JP2020124449A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having a setting change function and capable of suppressing reduction of game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided in which a lottery is performed based on a game ball entrance into a predetermined start port and a variable display of symbols is performed based on a result of the lottery to perform a predetermined win game if a win result is led out as a result of the variable display of the symbols. The game machine comprises: setting change means capable of changing setting information on a probability at which the win result is to be led out if a specific start operation is performed; suggestion presentation performance means for performing a suggestion presentation based on the setting information; abnormality determination means for determining a specific abnormality regarding the game machine; and suggestion presentation performance restriction means for restricting a performance of the suggestion presentation after the specific abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

In recent years, it has been considered that a game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a setting change function in order to make the game more versatile. In such a gaming machine, for example, setting information such as a winning probability can be set to any of a plurality of pieces by a setting related operation by a hall manager (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-6-91049

However, for example, depending on the setting information set by the hall manager, if the winning probability or the like is simply increased or decreased, the change of the game according to the setting information is scarce, and the interest of the game is reduced. There was a risk of inviting me.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the gaming appeal of a gaming machine having a setting changing function.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a predetermined starting opening, and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery, and a predetermined result is obtained when a hit result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol. In a gaming machine that executes a hit game,
When a specific start operation is performed, setting change means capable of changing the setting information regarding the probability that the hit result is derived,
Suggestive effect execution means for executing suggestive effect based on the setting information,
Abnormality determination means for determining a specific abnormality for the gaming machine,
After the specific abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means, suggestive effect execution limiting means for limiting the execution of the suggestive effect is provided.

In the above configuration, although the suggestion effect is executed based on the setting information, it is possible to limit the execution of the suggestion effect after the abnormality determining unit determines the specific abnormality. As a result, when a specific abnormality occurs due to a fraudulent act, the suggestive effect is not executed, so that the fraudulent act itself can be suppressed, and if the misconduct is not performed, the suggestive effect is executed As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game (for example, see the descriptions in paragraphs 2987 to 3005).

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest in a gaming machine having a setting changing function.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame that is disassembled and seen from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) seen from the lower front side. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of a door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate decoration unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing/retreating direction of the production operation section button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembles the production operation unit for each main member and is seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from below. (A) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit and was seen from the lower front. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lower position, (b) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a raise position. It is the explanation drawing which shows the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in a raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of a main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. It is the back cross-sectional view which cut|disconnected the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the center of the front-back direction of the delivery blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear direction center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the lower back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) taken apart and seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area|region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank flows in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main-body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit, and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component members, the game panel, the front unit and the like are transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 107. It is a front view of a game board shown in a state in which a table unit is cut in parallel with a surface of a game panel to show a game area in which a game ball flows and an obstacle nail. (A) is a perspective view of a front component member and a game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is It is a left side view of a starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning a prize mouth, and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning a prize mouth in an open state. It is an enlarged front view showing parts of a starting opening unit and a side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st special winning opening door in a 1st attacker unit from a left side surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center unit of the front unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center unit of the front unit viewed from the rear. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit from the front, (b) is the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit It is the perspective view which looked at from the back. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in a second attacker unit and a side right middle unit in a cross section. It is explanatory drawing which expanded the right part in the game area in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main composition and was seen from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which expands and shows the upper left corner of the game board in the state which made the door frame transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back rear effect unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear production unit and was seen from the back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back and rear production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back behind production unit. It is a front view which shows a back back movable decoration with a back back decoration board. 142A is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 142B is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back back movable decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide radiating plate and the back rear decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with a broken line. (A) is a front view showing a part of a decorative body in a back and rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of a decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), (c) 8A] is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the rear rear decorative substrate in the same portion as the decorative body of FIG. It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 160 is an exploded view showing an exploded view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front surface of a back back movable decoration, and shows the relationship between the decoration by a decoration and a decoration sheet, and a light guide radiation plate and a back and back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a light guide radiation board and a back decoration board in a site|part of 1st LED by a cross section, (b) shows 2nd LED on the optical axis of 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the light guide radiating plate in the part which exists from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and 1st LED of a back rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back decoration board with copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back rear decoration substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the back rear decoration substrate. (A) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body in a back-back movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a different form from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b). (A) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a back-rear movable ornament of the second embodiment different from the back-rear movable ornament of Fig. 142, and (b) is a back-rear movable ornament of the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing composition of in a section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing composition of a back back movable decoration of a fourth embodiment in section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower left production unit and back lower right production unit in the back unit from the front, and (b) is seen the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit from behind. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed the back lower left production unit and the lower back right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit, and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable constitution of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower back middle production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle raising/lowering mechanism of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle raising/lowering mechanism of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle production unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering of the lower back middle decoration body unit by the lower back middle raising/lowering mechanism in a lower back inside production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure concerning rotation of the back lower middle rotation decoration body of the back lower middle decoration body unit in a back bottom middle effect production unit from a front, (b) is a stop position of a back lower middle rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between each detection sensor by a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement|positioning of LED of the lower back middle decoration body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back production effect unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back production effect unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back side production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up and down decoration body unit in the back up production unit and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper and lower decorative body units in the back unit, which is disassembled and seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotation decoration body in a back upper production unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of the back side elevation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from a front, (b) is the state which moved the back side elevation decoration body unit to the appearance position, and the back side elevation decoration It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation ornament from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration board from the front in the state which moved the back up and down decoration body unit in the back up production unit to the appearance position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back rear left production unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back rear left production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left production unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left effect|production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decoration body unit of the back rear left effect|production unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left effect|production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right production unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decoration body unit of the back rear right effect|production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right effect|production unit, and was seen from back. It is the explanation drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back rear right production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right decoration body unit in the back rear right effect|production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front left effect unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front left effect unit in an open state. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front right production unit in a back unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the back front right production unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed one back front right ornamental body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front right performance unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back-rear rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit from the retracted position to the emergence position, the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the rear-rear left effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-side of the rear-rear right effect unit It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the rear right rotating decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. The state in which the back-rear left rotating decoration of the back-rear left rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear right rotating decoration of the back-rear right rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is the front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit respectively from the closed state to the open state. The rear back movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the emergence position, the rear rear rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the emergent position, the rear rear left rotatable decorative body of the rear rear left production unit From the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit rising from the lowered position It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is moved to each position. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a rear surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows the shape of the solid land in the part where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib formed on the base body was in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, and the copper foil on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. It is a schematic diagram of the surface (a), is a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (b). It is a figure which shows the shape of the resist with respect to the land when flowing a peripheral control board into a solder bath. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine roughly. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a circuit diagram explaining an outline of a circuit configuration of a power supply board. It is a configuration of a commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram of a motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a main control solenoid drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. It is a circuit showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is the circuit diagram which shows the production control solenoid drive circuit. It is the circuit diagram which shows the production control motor drive circuit. Outline of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which the fuse is mounted It is a block diagram explaining electrical connection of each decoration board with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 228. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of set value confirmation display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of turning-on of a payout controller. 234 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing subsequent to FIG. 235. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the special design and the special electric auditors product control processing which are executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the type of big hit, (C) is a type of small hit Is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in a modification. (A) It is a front perspective view of a dot matrix display, (B) is the sectional view cut|disconnected by the AA line in (A), and the perspective view seen from the back surface side. (A) It is a front view of a circuit board of modification 1, and an AA sectional view, and (B) It is a front view of a circuit board of modification 1, and an AA sectional view. It is a front view of the circuit board provided in the dot matrix display of a modification. It is a time chart which shows the control state of a dot matrix display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display content of a dot matrix display. It is (A) front perspective view of the dot matrix display of a modification, (B) is the sectional view cut|disconnected by the AA line in (A), and the perspective view seen from the back surface side. (A) It is a front view of a specific substrate, (B) is a front view which shows decoration of a specific substrate, and (C) is a specific substrate in a modification. It is a detailed view of a main control unit in the game board. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 9 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. 9 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the operation timing of the specific operation of the movable body in the first variation display of the symbols after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special monitor related production processing performed by peripheral control part regular processing. It is a figure for explaining a signal course at the time of detection of a steering wheel touch sensor and a single-shot button operation sensor. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st discharge stop time command related processing performed by peripheral control part regular processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd command at the time of stop of firing performed by peripheral control part regular processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command relation processing at the time of discharge permission performed by peripheral control part regular processing. It is a specific example of the effect of the pending notice effect and the set value suggestion effect. It is the perspective view (a) which looked at the function display unit from the front, and the perspective view (b) which looked at the function display unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the function display unit from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the function display unit from back. It is a schematic diagram of the front surface (front surface) of the functional display substrate housed in the functional display unit. It is a schematic diagram of a game board side matrix display device provided in the game board and a door frame side matrix display device provided in the door frame. XX in the schematic diagrams (a) and (a) for explaining the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board with an insulating film. It is schematic (b) of the cross section of a line, and schematic (c) of the modification of (b). XX in the schematic diagrams (a) and (a) for explaining the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board with an insulating film. It is schematic (b) of the cross section of a line, and schematic (c) of the modification of (b). XX in the schematic diagrams (a) and (a) for explaining the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board with (a), (a) It is schematic (b) of the cross section of a line, and schematic (c) of the modification of (b). XX in the schematic diagrams (a) and (a) for explaining the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board with (a), (a) It is schematic (b) of the cross section of a line, and schematic (c) of the modification of (b). It is the schematic (a) of the rear surface (back surface) side of the decorative board in which a DIP type connector is mounted, and the schematic drawing (b) of the front surface (front surface) side, and a surface mounting (SMD) type connector is mounted. It is the schematic (c) of the rear surface (back surface) side of a decorative substrate, and the schematic (d) of the front surface (front surface) side. It is a time chart which shows a behavior of a pachinko machine when a special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated in the upward direction. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a behavior of a pachinko machine when a special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated upward. It is a modification of the concrete display displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated in the upward direction. It is a time chart which shows a behavior of a pachinko machine when a special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated downward. It is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device and the special monitor when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch is operated downward. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when a game ball enters when the second starting opening is closed. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the pachinko machine when an abnormality is detected. 7 is a time chart showing the standby position of the peripheral control board-side movable body at the completion of the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the relation between suggestive production and abnormality detection. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the press operation section of the effect operation unit is in the elevated position as seen from the front right. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko machine, a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose top view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 are attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is provided, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main body The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is coaxially supported rotatably, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is formed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted and the sound is emitted to the front, so that the player can hear a more deep bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main frame upper hinge member 510 and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, a main frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640, a locking unit 650 that locks the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front face, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effect and light emission effect in accordance with the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstruction nails N (in this embodiment, brass are used) having a gold color and are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. , A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game balls B A mouth 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. The obstacle nail N having a gold color is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can drive the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. As a result, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a, the rear rear effect unit 3100, and the back bottom. Left rendering unit 3200, back lower right rendering unit 3250, back lower middle rendering unit 3300, back rendering unit 3400, back rear left rendering unit 3500, back rear right rendering unit 3600, back front left rendering unit 3700, back front right rendering It is possible to entertain the player by causing the unit 3800 or the like to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose shape in a front view extends vertically.

As illustrated, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends to each other, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward around the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 respectively extend vertically and are arranged laterally apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame 4 is for opening and closing.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded die material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a recessed portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right at a rear side portion of the left side surface that divides the front-back direction into three equal parts, and a right side surface from a portion opposite to the recessed portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b bulging toward one side and a cavity portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b are provided. The outer frame left member 11 has strength and rigidity enhanced by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further to the front side. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, with the lower lateral fixing portion 12c on the rear side abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, , Is attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 contacts the horizontal fixing portion 12a with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, the plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 contacts the rear surface of the contact portion 13d with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and contacts the left side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. When the screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, the lower left connecting member 13 makes the horizontal fixing portion 13a abut on the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connection member that is attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a recessed portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in a rear portion of the right side surface that is divided into three in the front-rear direction, and a left side portion that is opposite to the recessed portion 21a. The bulging portion 21b bulging toward one side and the cavity portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b are provided. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are enhanced by the recess 21a and the bulge 21b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from an intermediate portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of flat lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and rearward of the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, which is behind the horizontal fixing portion, and the left side of the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat plate-shaped abutting portion 23d extending in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and makes the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the right end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, so that the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b to which the upper frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a flat plate shape, and extends from the front side of the attachment portion 25a to the left. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later in the left-right direction.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that are vertically pierced and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and the outer frame lower member 41 that extends to the left and right, A box-shaped front panel member 42, which is arranged in front of the member 41, extends leftward and rightward along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain member 43, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends to the left and right, and extends forward and backward, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. And a mechanism 44.

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that are vertically penetrated and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on the left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 and becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The front curtain plate member 42 is provided with an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface, the curtain plate rear member 43 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a which becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends leftward and rightward and protrudes upward and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a at the center portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is located higher toward the rear side from the front end side which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b that connect the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection tubular portion 43a. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the speaker unit The enclosure 624 is formed by communicating with the internal space of 620a.

The ball catching prevention mechanism 44 is a game ball B between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is to prevent the product from being caught.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first outlet 44b that is open upward at the left end of 44a, a second outlet 44c that is open upward to the right of the first outlet 44b in the mounting portion 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface thereof is positioned upward as it goes rearward. And a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first outlet 44b and the second outlet 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is provided when an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. By the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placing portion 44a, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an incorrect tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will come into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end projecting portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed via the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving rearward, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is retained on the placing portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the mounting portion 44a is first discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be laterally separated from each other, and an opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front-rear direction, which are mounted inside the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 contact the lower ends of the door frames 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 connects the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders each having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 according to the Helmholtz resonance principle. Thus, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (on the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of the bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting tubular portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the main body frame 4 and is compressed when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking from between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21A seen from the lower front side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can rotate. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, which is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the outer frame hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends upward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a, which is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends vertically to the center of the front extension portion 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension portion 51b toward the front, and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a and a downward extending edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. And a flat plate-shaped end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a leftward extension extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c by a mounting screw 53.

With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space for accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

This lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c. Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. , An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to vertically pass through the horizontal portion 60a and allow only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion with respect to a vertical center. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and is not illustrated. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that it rolls to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling rearward of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the site of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically in a front view, and is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Has been. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game balls B are driven, and stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, as well as the stored game. A handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. Of the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the tray unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper left portion of the tray unit 200 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 mounted on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410. And a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front and rear, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view, and the speaker duct 103 mounted on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in the rear view, and the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 in the rear view. The door rear relay substrate 106, which covers the handle rear relay substrate 106, the door frame main relay substrate 104, and a part of the door frame sub relay substrate 105 from the rear side, and the rear handle handle relay substrate 106, which covers from the rear side. The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable are provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4. Note that, hereinafter, the frame body composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be referred to as a “front frame”.

The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved to the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launching device 540. It is for performing a game that is driven into.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

The left side of the door frame base unit 100 in front view is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is openably and closably closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view of the door frame base 101.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the rear end of the door frame base 101 near the right end in rear view, and a door frame main relay in the lower rear part of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the handle rear relay board mounted on the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 on the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side; A handle rear relay substrate cover 108 which is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 106 and covers the rear handle substrate 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. I have it.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The frame lower hinge member 125, the opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear relay substrate 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 has a door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner peripheral shape in a front view formed in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically. The door window 101a has upper and left and right sides forming an inner circumference, respectively, approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming an inner circumference vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b that is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. And the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and penetrates back and forth in the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the above.

Further, the door frame base 101 extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates in the front and back so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the penetration ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A glass unit mounting portion 101h is provided which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed in a lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) as viewed from the front and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located so that the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating forward and backward below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted into the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, penetrates the through hole 101j. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle attaching member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion. A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend along the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d which connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plural in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be restricted.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle attaching member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 by: The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The speaker duct 103 has a rear end of a tubular portion located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, a sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3 of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/door frame sub relay board/handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape with its outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an outer shape formed in an inverted L shape in which a rectangular shape extending left and right is combined on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a rectangular shape extending vertically, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 is a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. This is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration substrate 413, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the various substrates of the body frame 4, and the main body. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are the door frame main relay board 104 and the portion extending vertically above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

The handle rear relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle with its outer shape extending to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay substrate 106 connects the door frame main relay substrate 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the one-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle post substrate 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered with the rear handle post substrate cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay substrate cover 107, the handle rear relay substrate cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (reverse L-shaped vertically extending portion) are provided. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape whose front and left sides when viewed from the front are opened. In the assembled state of the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The handle rear relay substrate cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay substrate 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which are vertically spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left and right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 extending from the left reinforcement frame 111; A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that connect the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other and a plurality of vertically-spaced rear mountings of the right reinforcing frame 112 are attached to the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hooking member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length substantially the same as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically spaced apart and penetrate in the front-rear direction. Through these insertion holes, the tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with a length substantially the same as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction so that the vertical direction is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically in a front view. It is provided with a pair of side piece portions that extend in a flat plate shape from the sides to the front side, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion that connects the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to a front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to these hooking members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are stamped from a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). In this door frame reinforcing unit 110, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the state of being attached to the door frame base 101 coincide with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for mounting the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 that is vertically movably attached to the hinge bracket 121, and a flange that is attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a that is quadrangular in front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b that extends forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. The portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the collar member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves a horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is removed. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out. it can. Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated relative to the main body frame 4.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in a front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is located at a position coaxial with the vertically extending part of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. Installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. You can

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used to lock and close the door. The cylinder lock 130 is a columnar cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a cylinder hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132 to be a regular cylinder. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of cutout portions to rotate the rotation. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 of the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has the entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the ball exit 141b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 that is opened, and a game ball that is closed from the front end of the front cover 141 and has a box-like shape that is opened at the front and has entered through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. A rear cover 142 for each of a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of 141, and game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 supported by the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

In the ball feeding unit 140, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball removing member 143 is placed on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding members 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 143 on the left side of the ball removing port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball removing member 143, which will be described later, extends from 141c forward. The front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper dish ball 240 is formed. Also, it is formed so as to close the rearwardly open portion on the upstream end side of the ball guide passage 241c from the rear side.

The ball-removing member 143 divides the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b below the entrance 141a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 143a is lowered toward the ball-feeding member 144. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bending in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b and the lower end extending in the front-rear direction. Of the rotary rod 143b rotatably supported on the rotary rod 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotary rod 143b, and a rotary rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a is provided. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The operating rod 143c is an upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper bowl ball-sliding slider 242 (which is moved downward by pressing the upper bowl ball-removing button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball-removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. A ball holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the rod 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking section 144a faces the partition section 143a and at the same time, the ball holding section 144b faces the ball hitting supply port 142a, and the ball holding section 144b has the partition section 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hitting ball supply port 142a and has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked by the blocking section 144a from moving toward the ball holding section 144b (the hitting ball supply port 142a), and remains on the partition section 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the side of the rod part 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is vertically swung by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is vertically swung in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up-down direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) on the opposite side to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending in the front and rear direction. Has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron ball 146a is attracted toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding operation rod 146 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145. It rotates so that the left end side near the crank 147 moves upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the self-weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward centering on the right end. It rotates like this and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the ball feeding operation rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a and the engaging portion 147a that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operation rod 146 and extends in the left-right direction. And a shaft portion 147b which is disposed on the opposite side to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, so that the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated about an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. Turn to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 211) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to receive a moment such that it is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the ball pulling member 143 pivotally supported or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding toward the front of the ball removing member 143 should come into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation thereof is restricted, in a normal state, the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition the side, and the ball outlet 141b side The game ball B never enters.

Then, when the player presses down the upper bowl ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partitioning part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a drops to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guide passage 241c of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 of the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper bowl ball-sliding slider 242, on which the operation transmission portion 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball-removing member 143 abuts, is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B on the partition portion 143a. Even if the force is supplied with vigor, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball-removing member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is partitioned. It can be prevented from bouncing back at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The tamperproof member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 148a which is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center between a right side and a left side for a predetermined distance. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the tamper proof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven from the upper plate through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 to be attached to the illegal gaming ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed in which the illegal game ball B is put in and out of the first starting opening 2002 or the like by operating the provided string, the illegal game ball B shot (struck) by the ball launching device 540 is hit. The string attached to the illegal game ball B by force is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is dispensed from the dispensing device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. The foul cover unit 150 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. And 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates forward and backward in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower tank ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. The ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving passage 610b of the main body frame 4 which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b of the main frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front side. Foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving game ball B (foul ball), and game ball B received in full tank receiving port 150b and foul ball receiving port 150c opening forward near the lower right corner in front view. And a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. The storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the lower end thereof is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. A full tank detection sensor 154 for detecting rotation of the storage passage 150e in the direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In the foul cover unit 150, when the lower bowl 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is stored in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates as described above, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects a full tank, further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall to that effect and urge the lower plate 202 to be completely filled.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening/closing contact part 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game is performed. The front of the area 5a is closed.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be mounted on the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed so that the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and rear so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97 ).

The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disk-shaped base portion 163a that is mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base portion 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 163b which is formed. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attaching member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the procedure reverse to the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attachable to and detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotation position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to the position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the regulation of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 has a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 that shortly projects rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171, and is spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 173 projecting forward of the main body 171 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protruding piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear protruding piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed so as to follow a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

The crime prevention cover 170, in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, has a front surface of the main body 171 contacting a rear surface of the glass unit 160 (a rear end of the glass frame 161) and a portion protruding rearward from a lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be driven by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle attaching member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 mounted on the handle base 181 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183, which is mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183. And a transparent handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decoration board 184 is a surface mounting type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 186 and handle base 181 to provide an outer periphery. The shaft member 187 having the drive gear portion 187a, the transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and the detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 have the handle base 181 and the inner. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

In addition, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip end side that protrudes outward from the left side in a front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 and the base. A one-shot button 193 whose end side is behind the inner base 186 and is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a one-shot button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193. And an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a state where the three groove portions 181c are aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively provided in the three groove portions 181c. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four rotary shafts (shaft members 187) and four first projections 182a, second projections 182b, third projections 182c, and fourth projections 182c that are circumferentially separated from the outer peripheral surface and project outward. Two slits 182e extending in an arcuate shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a rear end projecting from the position inside the rotation center of the slit 182e with respect to the rotation center, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. The locking projection 182f is provided.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in a clockwise direction in front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so that it curves inward. The second projection 182b is such that the most projecting portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first projection 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction in front view of the most projecting portion that bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and a side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The third protrusion 182c is located such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It projects slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with the side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward in a round shape and is transparent. Inside the handle cover 185, which is the back surface of the handle cover 185, an inner lens 185a formed three-dimensionally with a transparent member is attached. The surface of the inner lens 185a is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 (located behind the inner lens 185a ( It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the mounting surface). The inner lens 185a and the back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the inner lens 185a may be replaced with a lens cut on the back surface. It may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron). The handle cover 185 is made to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light. The surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the surface of the handle cover 185 and the back surface may be lens-cut. Alternatively, the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron) on the back surface of the handle cover 185.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in a plan view and faces the outer side (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the terminal also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and the player can perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described below changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity that acts on the handle 182 or the like by the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is fired with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 is released, so that before the one-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 is provided with four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state for the player by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit seen from the rear. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, which is below the door window 101a. The dish unit 200 stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the top plate 201 and is supplied from the top plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. The dish decoration unit 250 having the above, and the effect operation unit 300 mounted on the front surfaces of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left-right direction, an upper plate body 212 having an upper plate 201 attached to an upper front portion of the plate unit base 211, and a right side of the upper plate body 212. Mounting base 213 mounted on the front of the mounting base 213, a tray unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. An upper plate bowl removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. Plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball punching unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

The production operation unit 300 includes, as a production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotationally operated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. ing. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation section base 320 housed in the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation section base 320. A ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302. The transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 that decorates the production operation ring 330 with light emission, the decoration substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. Vibrating speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of operation unit base 320. And are equipped with.

The dish unit 200 is entirely bulged to the front, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 is directed obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, the upper plate 201 has the ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front largely bulges forward and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate body 212), a portion that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction from the left end to the right side bulges out to the frontmost. The upper plate 201 has a front end retracted rearward as it goes from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side becomes lower, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 201a sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

The upper plate 201 is a state in which the bottom plate is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 211 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. The outer diameter of B is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter. As a result, the game ball B emitted forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball hole 202a through which the game ball B can be discharged by vertically penetrating the bottom wall. The lower dish ball removal hole 202 a of the lower dish 202 is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball-draining hole 202a penetrating vertically, and is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface is lowered toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is located in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 when assembled in the dish unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate ball hole 202a is closed, and the lower plate ball hole 202a can be opened. The game balls B stored in can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore, from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the front side. The discharged game ball B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower dish ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The plate base unit 210 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 is a plate plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100 and extends horizontally, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. The main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper dish main body 212 in the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a front side of the dish unit base 211 attached to the right side of the mounting base 213. And a plate unit relay board 214.

The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and an upper dish removal unit 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball, on the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow rear opening). It is formed in a box shape.

The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and also has an upper dish ball supply port 211a that extends cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating forward and backward at a lower part to the left of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through on the right side wall of a portion that extends rearward of the ball supply port 211c, and the front and rear sides of the lower dish ball supply port 211c at the upper right side in a front view. And an upper plate ball feeding port 211e which is vertically located at the right end of the upper plate body 212.

In addition, the dish unit base 211 projects forward to the right of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed, and to the left of the upper dish ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g that penetrates through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction and through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball-removing slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates in the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 with its front end opened and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower dish ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end from the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide passage 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the cutout portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are operated by the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, the upper It is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the plate ball and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges more toward the front than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end thereof is retracted rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulged portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the plate unit 200 so that a part of the upper plate near the right end of the upper plate body 212 is closed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper part, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion opening 213a that vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the left end, and a through hole 213b that vertically penetrates at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. A wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decoration board 273, the dish upper right decoration board 278, the plate lower left decoration board 283, and the plate lower right decoration board 288. , And relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the placing projection 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). (Omitted) After inserting cash or prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine It is for, for example, subtracting the amount of the game ball B that has been rented out, returning cash or a prepaid card inserted in a ball lending machine, and adjusting the sound volume related to the effect to a large amount or a small amount.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223, which is arranged to the right of the pull-out button 222 and has a light-transmitting property, and a ball lending operation base 223, which is on the upper surface of the base 221, and is located below and to the right of the upper bowl ball-pulling button 222. Volume down button 226 arranged on the lower left side of the base, a volume down button 227 arranged below the volume up button 226 on the upper surface of the base portion 221, and a ball arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. A lending button 224, a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223. ing.

The upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 projects upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (a distance dimension in which the upper bowl ball pulling button 222 moves downward when the player presses it). The tactile switch for ball lending button 224a (lead type) is pushed slightly downward so that the tactile switch for ball lending button 224a can be turned on, while the player releases the pushing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 is moved to the upper original position, the pressing operation portion of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a returns to the upper position, and the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape, and moves a little downward when the player presses it (a distance dimension in which the upper bowl pitching button 222 moves downward when the player presses it). The tactile switch for return button 225a (lead type) is pushed slightly downward to turn on the tactile switch for return button 225a, while the player releases the pushing operation. The return button 225 moves to the original position above, and the pressing operation portion of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward and the return button tactile switch 225a can be turned off. The ball lending display section is composed of three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. In addition, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been lent out are returned to the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, the ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine fails.

The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape and is arranged such that one of the three vertices faces upward, and the player pushes it to move it slightly downward (the player presses it). It is smaller than the distance dimension that the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 moves downwards by operating.) Volume up button tactile switch 226a (surface mount type) push operation part is pushed down slightly for volume up button While the tactile switch 226a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves to the original upper position and the pressing operation portion of the volume up button tactile switch 226a returns to the upper side. The volume up button tactile switch 226a can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces downward, and when the player presses it, it moves slightly downward (the player presses it). It is smaller than the distance dimension that the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 moves downwards by operating.) Volume down button tactile switch 227a (surface mount type) push operation part is pushed down slightly for volume down button While the tactile switch 227a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume down button 227 moves to the original upper position, and the pressing operation portion of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The volume down button tactile switch 227a can be turned off.

The ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball lending substrate 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. Through the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side, electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. , The drive frame unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later, without interposing the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. Peripheral control unit 1500 (controlling the progress of production) on the game board 5 side via a decorative substrate provided in the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000, a production drive substrate 1720 described later that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like. It is electrically connected to a peripheral control board 1510) which will be described later. The ball lending board 228 and the volume adjusting board 229 are accommodated in the ball lending operation unit 220 while being adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220.

In this way, the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the ball lending board 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 on which the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted are electrically connected. A door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, a volume adjusting board 229 housed in a ball lending operation unit 220 in which a volume up button tactile switch 226a and a volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted, and an electrical circuit. The door frame sub relay board 105 on the side of the door frame 3 that is connected to is a completely different relay board. In various relay boards on the side of the door frame 3, the tactile switch 224a for ball lending button and the tactile for return button The switch 225a and the signal transmission paths for the three 7-segment LEDs and the signal transmission paths for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are not mixed in the same relay board. .. This is because the signal transmission paths for the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are so-called main-side signal transmission paths. While the frame main relay board 104 is provided, the signal transmission path to the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is a path through which a so-called main side signal is transmitted. Therefore, the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side is used.

A ball lending button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a, a pad to which three 7-segment LEDs are soldered, and a through hole (of the through holes) on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball lending board 228. The peripheral wall is copper-plated and has conductivity. The same shall apply hereinafter.), and a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution over the entire area except for lands (hereinafter simply referred to as " Sometimes described as "solid green resist".), a green resist layer is formed. On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the ball lending board 228, a region where a connector (lead type) (not shown) is mounted is soldered to the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like. A green resist layer is formed by the resist. Further, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball lending board 228, although not shown, the tactile switch 224a for the ball lending button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the surfaces of the three 7-segment LEDs and the like are mounted. The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component, the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is to be placed near the front-side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, The front side notation part indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component and the model of the front side electronic component may be solidly coated with a white paint that tends to stand out against the green color. It is printed by silk printing on the green resist. Although illustration is omitted, on the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the ball lending board 228, the part number of the rear surface side electronic component and the rear surface side electronic component are arranged in the vicinity of the rear surface side electronic component such as a connector (surface mounting type). Specify the attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area that indicates the position (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component). May be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid green paint with a white paint that is easily noticeable with respect to green.

On the other hand, on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229, pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are soldered are removed. A white resist layer is formed in the entire area by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, a white area is filled with a solid white resist except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to be soldered in areas where connectors (not shown) are mounted. A resist layer is formed. Further, although not shown, on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229, the vicinity of front side electronic components such as the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button which are mounted. , The part number of the front-side electronic component, the attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component, The front side notation that indicates the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included.) is a solid white with a light yellow paint that is inconspicuous to white. It is printed on the resist by silk printing. Although not shown, on the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, a region indicating the part number of the rear surface electronic component and the position where the rear surface electronic component is arranged near the rear surface electronic component such as a connector. And the like (including the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

As described above, the color of the resist liquid applied to the ball lending substrate 228 and the volume adjusting substrate 229 accommodated in the ball lending operation unit 220 adjacent to each other is different. To explain this, the signal transmission paths for the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are so-called main-side signal transmission paths, as described above. Therefore, the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball lending substrate 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. Via a door frame main relay board 104 on the side of the door frame 3 and an interface board 635 on the side of the main body frame 4 and electrically with a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. In contrast to the connection, the signal transmission paths for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are not the paths through which so-called main side signals are transmitted, as described above. The volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220, and are located on the door frame 3 side. The drive frame unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 according to a command from a peripheral control substrate 1510 described later) does not need to intervene with the door frame sub relay substrate 105 and the interface substrate 635 on the main body frame 4 side. Peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (periphery to be described later that can control the progress of production) via a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, which will be described later, which are provided in It is electrically connected to the control board 1510).

That is, in the present embodiment, the volume electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. The adjustment board 229 and a ball lending board 228 electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 are adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. Although the volume control board 229 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, the ball rental board 228 is coated with a green resist solution different from white. Since the green coating film is formed, the operator who performs the wiring connection is electrically connected to the volume control board 229 by using the color of the coating film thus formed (that is, the color of the resist) as a mark. It is possible to contribute to prevention of erroneous connection between the wiring that is connected to the ball rental board 228 and the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball rental board 228. Therefore, it can contribute to the prevention of erroneous connection of wiring.

Further, on the volume control board 229, a tactile switch 226a for a volume up button that allows the player to greatly adjust the volume related to the effect, and a tactile switch for a volume down button that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the effect small. 227a and are mounted, and the detection result (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) by the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button is the control device in the pachinko machine 1 game board 5 The information is transmitted to the side peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect), and the player can request the ball lending board 228 to pay out the game ball B by ball lending. The ball lending button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a that can request a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) to return cash or a prepaid card, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine. Three 7-segment LEDs that can display the remaining amount of the prepaid card are mounted, and the detection result (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) by the tactile switch 224a for ball lending button and the tactile switch 225a for return button ) Is transmitted to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. A driving signal from a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) is transmitted to the ball lending board 228, so that the ball lending display section configured by three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball lending board 228 can While the amount of cash or the amount of prepaid card inserted into the machine is displayed, the volume is adjusted from the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side. No drive signal is output to the board 229, and based on the drive signal from the volume control board 229, the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (a peripheral control board 1510 which will be described later that can control the progress of the effect). No electronic component constituting the displayed display part is mounted. In this way, the route in which the player's operation position is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of production) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. And a path to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1, and therefore is electrically connected to the volume control board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 are erroneously connected, an unintended disadvantage may occur to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a white resist solution is applied to the ball lending substrate 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist solution different from white is applied to the ball lending substrate 228. A green coating film is formed to prevent erroneous connection.

Further, while surface mount type electronic components are adopted as the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229, they are mounted on the ball rental board 228. The ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are lead-type electronic components. Based on one of the types), the wiring electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 can be discriminated. It can contribute to the prevention of incorrect connection.

By the way, although the reflectance of light is highest in white and lower in dark color, as described above, the volume control substrate 229 not provided with the display section is coated with the white resist solution to form the white coating film. On the other hand, the ball lending substrate 228 provided with the ball lending display portion is coated with a dark green resist solution to form a green coating film. This reduces the efficiency of the light emitted from the ball lending display section reflected on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball lending substrate 228 so that it does not interfere with the performance of the production device excluding the ball lending display section. You can In this embodiment, green is used as the dark color, but purple or black may be used instead of green.

In the present embodiment, the ball lending board 228 is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side. While the volume control board 229 is electrically connected to (for example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 does not require the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. , A drive board unit 1700 on the side of the main body frame 4 (an effect to be described later that drives a decoration board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 according to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later. Via a drive board 1720), an interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side, and electrically with a peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 which will be described later that can control the progress of production) on the game board 5 side. It is connected. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are present on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, for the front surface (front surface) of the door frame main relay substrate 104 on the door frame 3 side, the same color as the resist liquid applied to the ball lending substrate 228 is adopted, and the green resist liquid is applied. A green coating film is formed, and the same color as the resist liquid applied to the volume control board 229 is adopted for the front surface (front surface) of the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. The white resist solution is preferably applied to form a white coating film. It should be noted that the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is more brittle than the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution. When a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from the material) to be manufactured, they may be cracked or split.

By the way, when a substrate is manufactured, as described above, since a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from one fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material), the color of the silk paint or the resist solution is used. Will be the same color, and a plurality of substrates having the same color will be manufactured. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not it is manufactured from the same fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) by examining a white-colored substrate. When the defect is found, it is only necessary to trace (find out) the other white substrates one by one to confirm the defect, which is advantageous in that it can contribute to the early detection of the defect.

In addition, the volume control operation of adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume up button 226 to a large amount or adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume down button 227 to a low level is performed for a certain period (for example, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. After the start, the peripheral display MPU (hereinafter, a peripheral control MPU having a function as the peripheral control MPU may be referred to as a “peripheral control IC” instead of the peripheral control MPU) is activated for a certain period of time. It is possible that the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) can always be executed except for a certain period before and after the special symbol is stopped, or both) Then, the peripheral control MPU (or the peripheral control IC) can execute the peripheral control MPU (or the peripheral control IC) only when a specific condition such as a period in which the demonstration display device 1600 is performing the demonstration is satisfied. It may be one. In addition, the volume control result based on the volume control operation such that the volume related to the effect based on the volume up button 226 is adjusted to a high level or the volume related to the effect based on the volume down button 227 is adjusted to a low level is immediately controlled by the peripheral control MPU (or the surrounding area). Control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may be delayed with respect to the volume control operation timing depending on the situation (whether or not variable display is being performed, production progress, etc.). May be reflected.

Incidentally, a game machine having a plurality of substrates has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0047] and FIG. 5). However, among the plurality of substrates, they are adjacent to each other. In the case where the wiring connection work is performed, the person who performs the wiring connection work may erroneously connect the wiring electrically connected to one substrate and the wiring electrically connected to the other substrate.

[3-5c-6. Unit before and after removing the bowl
The unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate removal unit 230 and the upper plate removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201 when the upper ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging the game balls B stored in the lower tray 202.

The upper dish ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting projection 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after removing the upper bowl is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl.

The upper dish removal unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and has a cylindrical front base 231 extending vertically, and a front base 231 movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the vicinity of the front of the upper dish ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, the upper end thereof is in contact with the lower end of the upper bowl ball removal button 222, and the lower end of the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 of the upper bowl removal unit 242. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The upper bowl removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to close the upper bowl feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear side, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper dish ball removing slider 242 slidably attached to the spring, a spring 243 urging the upper dish ball removing slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. Equipped with.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a which project upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and which is opened forward. A ball feed guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. The ball B guiding path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at a position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide passage 241c protrudes to the right in rear view as compared with the part to which the upper bowl removing slider 242 is slidably mounted, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view becomes lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The part of the ball guide passage 241c extending to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244 on the rear side. In the state in which the ball guiding path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball discharge guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in a front view, and projects rearward from an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and a rear surface which is a rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface thereof is located downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the dish unit base 211 from the rear side and projects forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removal unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the. Further, the upper tray ball pulling slider 242 has the operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241 and the operation of the ball pulling member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. The rod 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper bowl removing slider 242, and urges the upper bowl removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is located at the moving end upward due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

In the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl, the upper bowl removing slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243 and the upper bowl removing slider 242 is moved. Through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, the upper bowl ball pull-out button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward. Further, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c contacting the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. Therefore, the partition 143a of the ball punching member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball vent 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, in the state where the upper bowl ball-removing button 222 is not pressed, the space between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing opening 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned, and the ball is fed from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper bowl ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball-punching member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b, can be moved downward, and the ball-punching member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball-punching member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Moves backward between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball exit 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball removal port 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball removal guide path 241c, and then down from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressing of the upper bowl ball removal button 222 is released, the upper bowl bowl removal slider 242 moves upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is released via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball-removing button 222 moves up, the ball-removing member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the operation-transmitting part 242b, and the partition part 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball-removing port 141b. It will be restored to the original state.

In this way, the upper bowl removing unit 230 and the upper bowl removing unit 240 send the game ball B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decorating unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire dish unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forms a lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. The dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front portion of the dish unit main body 252 with left and right spaces, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 280 mounted below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate unit 275 of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends in the left-right direction and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to the lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The bottom plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending leftward and rightward, and a front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction projects further forward than the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball-draining hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The bottom plate body 251 is inclined such that its bottom surface is lowered toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 202a. The lower dish ball removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower dish ball removing lid 265 of the lower dish ball removing unit 260.

The lower plate body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit body 252. Further, the lower plate body 251 has a bottom surface located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211 in the state where it is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the lower plate ball vent hole 202a supplies the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the dish unit body 252 is curved so that the upper surface thereof has the lowest center in the left-right direction. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is opened rearward.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right sides toward the center in the left-right direction in the upper portion, extends downward, and is separated from each other in the left-right direction. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and a plate upper left decoration unit 270, a plate lower left decoration unit 280, a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower right decoration unit are formed on the front surface of each of them. 285 is attached. The right side of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front surface decoration portion 252b. In addition, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front surface decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decoration portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d is of a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the top and bottom thereof become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Further, the dish unit body 252 has a front notch 252e that is notched upward from a lower end of the front surface of a portion of the lower front decoration portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, and a lower plate body 251 of the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom face cutout portion 252f that is cut out in a region below the above. The lower dish removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g which penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. It is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are at the center in the left-right direction. The production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached is provided. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about ⅓ of the width of the plate unit body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .. Further, when assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front cutout 252e, and the lower dish ball removal base 261 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is exposed. The bottom cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower dish removal unit 260 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for making it happen.

The lower dish ball punching unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and has a flat plate-shaped lower dish ball punching base 261 having a through hole that vertically penetrates in the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball punching unit. A slider 262 that is slidably mounted in the front and rear direction on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 that is mounted at the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. It is provided with a lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower dish ball punching base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically arranged at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball punching hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the lower plate base 261 in a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending leftward and rightward in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower dish ball punching unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball punching base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the dish unit body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball punching base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In a normal state, in the lower bowl ball removing unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower bowl ball removing lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower dish ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pushed rearward and moved rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. Becomes When the slider 262 moves rearward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower dish ball removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removing lid 265 centers the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, by moving the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole to the rear from the position of the through hole, the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened, The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the lower plate bowl removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, so that the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front surface decoration portion 252b is pushed backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the holding of the slider 262. It Then, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal lid 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical transparent plate upper left decoration 271, which extends left and right, a transparent plate upper left inner lens 272 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left decoration 271, and a plate upper left inner. A dish upper left decorative substrate 273, which is attached to the rear side of the lens 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”), is provided.

The plate upper left decoration 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging part 252a. The plate left upper decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper left at the left end and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper left decoration 271 is transparent. The surface of the dish upper left decoration 271 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 and the back surface may be lens-cut. It may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the dish upper left decoration 271 (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The dish upper left inner lens 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decoration 271 from the rear side. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 is a surface mounting type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the plate upper left decoration 271 can be illuminated. .. The dish upper left inner lens 272 is formed transparent. The surface of the plate upper left inner lens 272 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the plate upper left decoration placed behind the plate upper left inner lens 272 is decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 273 are difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. It should be noted that a lens cut may be applied to the front surface of the dish upper left inner lens 272 (a polyhedron may be formed), or instead of the surface of the dish upper left inner lens 272, the back surface may be It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

In the state where the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical transparent plate upper right ornament 276 extending left and right, a transparent dish upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right ornament 276, and a plate upper right inner. A plate upper right decoration board 278 mounted on the rear side of the lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) is provided.

The dish upper right decoration 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging part 252a. The plate upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a central axis extending diagonally upper right at the right end and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylinder is twisted. Has been formed. The dish upper right decoration body 276 is formed transparent. The surface of the dish upper right decoration 276 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the surface of the plate upper right decoration 276 and the back surface may be lens-cut. The plate may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the plate upper right decoration body 276 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The dish upper right inner lens 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decoration body 276 from the rear side. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the dish upper right decoration body 276 can be illuminated. .. The dish upper right inner lens 277 is formed transparent. The surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the dish upper right decoration arranged behind the dish upper right inner lens 277 is decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 278 is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. It should be noted that a lens cut may be provided on the front surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277 (may be formed into a polyhedron), or instead of the surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277, the back surface may be It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with. Since the plate upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate upper right decoration unit 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper right decoration unit 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 partially project upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled to the door frame 3. It is possible to form a raised step between the upper side bulging portion 252a and the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 side. As a result, the player can use his/her step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a to catch his/her finger, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when performing or operating the production operation unit 301 described later. Further, due to the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing out forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decoration unit and plate lower right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. To be The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is a semi-cylindrical transparent dish lower left decorative body 281, a transparent dish lower left inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decoration 281, and a dish lower inner. The dish lower left decorative substrate 283 is mounted on the rear side of the lens 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”).

The plate lower left decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate lower left decoration 281 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the left end, the central axis extends slightly obliquely to the upper left rear, and at the right end The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The lower left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc curvature that becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower left dish 281 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the surface of the lower left dish 281 may be lens-cut on the back side. It may be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the plate lower left decoration 281 (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The dish lower left inner lens 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from the rear side. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the plate lower left decoration body 281 can be decorated to emit light. .. The plate lower left inner lens 282 is formed transparent. The surface of the dish lower left inner lens 282 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted, and the dish lower left decoration placed behind the dish lower left inner lens 282. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 283 are difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be applied to the front surface of the lower left dish inner lens 282 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the surface of the lower left inner lens 282 of the dish, the rear surface may be It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The plate lower left decoration unit 280 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the plate lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it seems that the left end goes into the door frame 3. Since the plate lower left decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the plate lower left decoration body 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 emits light, the entire front surface of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated almost uniformly with light, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish lower right decoration unit 285 includes a transparent dish lower right ornamental body 286 that is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right, and a transparent dish lower right inner lens 287 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right ornamental body 286. , A plate lower right decoration board 288 mounted on the rear side of the plate lower right inner lens 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). , Are provided.

The dish lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The plate lower right decoration 286 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276. At the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a curvature of a semi-circular arc that becomes thinner toward the right end side. The plate lower right decoration body 286 is formed transparent. A lens cut may be provided on the surface of the dish lower right decoration body 286 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface of the dish lower right decoration body 286. May be provided (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the dish lower right decoration body 286 (may be formed in a polyhedron). ..

The dish lower right inner lens 287 is inserted from the rear into the dish lower right decoration body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration board 288 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By making the LEDs emit light, the dish lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated and decorated. You can The dish lower right inner lens 287 is formed transparent. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the inner lower lens 287 of the dish lower side is disposed. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decoration board 288 is difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or may be lens-cut on the back surface as well as the front surface of the lower right dish inner lens 287 (a polyhedron is formed). It may be formed), and instead of the surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the plate, the back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 is, when assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is formed into a spherical shape, the lower right side of the dish lower right decoration unit 285 looks like the right end goes under the door frame 3. Since the plate lower right decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the plate lower right decoration body 286, when the plurality of LEDs of the plate lower right decoration board 288 emit light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 is illuminated. The entire front surface of the can be light-emitted and decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. Is something that can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a transparent central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a and a rotation operation unit. It is configured with a transparent annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b arranged between the inner periphery of 302 and the inner periphery.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. -Shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the portion 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Of the decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with an open upper portion and a rear portion.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front. A transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 mounted from the rear inside the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a rear side of the plate center upper inner lens 313 are mounted so that light can be emitted forward. A plate center upper decoration substrate 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 mounted from the rear inside the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower inner lens And a plate 316 below the plate center mounted on the rear side of the plate 315 and mounting a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side from this is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis line perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular arc shape of the front portion is located forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest position when assembled to the dish unit 200.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward so that the shape of the unit front cover 312 in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a transparent dish center upper decoration body 312a in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and a transparent dish center upper decoration body 312a. A transparent dish center lower decorative body 312b, which has a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends in a semicircular arc along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, is provided. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extending in a semi-arcuate shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration body 312b extends in a semi-circular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration body 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects further forward than the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state in which the dish unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish central lower decorative body is The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the plate lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is transparent.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the entire width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper inner lens 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and is forward (outer side) to the upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). ), a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the plate center upper decorative body 312a can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light. The surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the back surface thereof may be lens-cut. May be provided (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the plate center upper decorative body 312a (may be formed in a polyhedron). ..

The inner lens 313 on the plate center is formed transparent. The surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the plate central decoration board 314 to be arranged. It should be noted that a lens cut may be provided on the front surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the surface of the dish center upper inner lens 313. May be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The dish center lower inner lens 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear side. The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semi-circular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and is forward (outer side) to the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). ), a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. By emitting light, the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be illuminated and decorated. It should be noted that the surface of the dish lower central decoration 312b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the surface of the plate central lower ornament 312b may be lens-cut on the back side. May be provided (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the dish center lower decorative body 312b (may be formed in a polyhedron). ..

The inner lens 315 at the bottom center of the plate is formed transparent. The surface of the plate lower center inner lens 315 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 to be arranged. It should be noted that a lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the dish center lower inner lens 315 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the surface of the dish center lower inner lens 315, a back surface may be provided. May be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

Since the effect operation section cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular arc, When the LEDs of the upper central decoration board 314 and the lower central decoration board 316 of the dish are made to emit light, the whole of each can be made to emit light substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The effect operation section cover unit 310, when assembled to the dish unit 200, has a front end that projects far more forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. In addition, in the rendering operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation section base 320 is inserted into the effect operation section cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation portion base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open upper portion, and is formed to be translucent (for example, milky white).

The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 whose outer shape is formed into a substantially cubical box shape and which is open at the upper side, and an outer periphery which extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer shape. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion that is formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and is attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and is opened upward to rotatably support the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

The main body 321 of the operation section base 320 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body 321 has a through hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321. In the main body 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer circumference thereof substantially matches the inner circumference of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can attach the operation ring transmission gear in cooperation with the gear attachment member so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left and right directions. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has the flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Stage operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit as seen from above and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the upper front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a transparent rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The rendering operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically and a plurality of bushes 333 which are attached to the ring mounting base 331 and move the rotation base 332 upward. And a ring retaining member 334 that restricts the ring. The ring attachment base 331, the rotation base 332, the bush 333, and the ring retaining member 334 are transparent.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and below the ring outer upper cover 335 that constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and below the ring outer upper cover 335. The ring outer lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operating portion 302 and the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, and form a part of the rotation operating portion 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface in the circumferential direction. And a boss portion 331b for protrudingly mounting the bush 333 in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed in a bevel gear so as to project downward as it goes toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The outer ring upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc forming an outer portion and an upper portion of the circle extends annularly, and a plurality of them are arranged in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of outer upper cover attaching portions 335c that extend downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extend toward the center side and that are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer ring lower cover 336 has a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a in which circular arcs forming an outer portion and a lower portion of the circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a projecting upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a toward the center. And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc which constitutes an inner portion and an upper portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube which extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b, and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface of the cylindrical surface portion 337b has the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are continuous with the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion within a range of ½ or more of a circle, and have a donut shape as a whole. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotational drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the rear. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as disassembled and seen from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably attached in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346, and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that is integrally rotated with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the distance between them in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thus, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, but one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like this. Accordingly, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is located inside the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotary drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 can reciprocally rotate and vibrate the rotary operation unit 302 by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to repeat the normal rotation/reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

Further, in the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the contents of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, so that the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation is performed. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect, or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring-side gear portion 350a integrally rotates to detect transmission of the rotary drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed so that the pitch circles have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation unit base 320. To be

In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the production operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b is provided. It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotary drive unit 340 side, and also rotationally drive the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340. The effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are lined up along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). The plurality of LEDs of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are surface-mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 has its upper side covered with a transparent decoration substrate cover 353. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320.

Since the decoration board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are transparently formed by causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the decoration board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331. Through, or through the through hole 331c of the decorative substrate cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331, the transparent ring outer upper cover 335, the transparent ring outer lower cover 336, and the transparent ring inner lower cover 336 forming the transparent rotation operation unit 302. The cover 337 can be illuminated and decorated from the inside. Therefore, the player can see the light-emitting decoration such as the LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibration of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a variety of effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit that is disassembled and seen from the front lower side. FIG. 62A is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a transparent pressing operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a transparent cylindrical central pressing operation section 303a and a transparent cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation section 303a. ,,.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged in a target with a button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide shafts 362 that are connected at their upper ends to each other and have an outer periphery formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed into a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It has a disk-shaped lifting base 364 and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted to urge the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends in a column shape upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 and having the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a lower end of which is connected, and a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached to the lifting cam member 371 for lifting and lowering the lifting base 364; and a lifting drive gear. 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A transparent central button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 arranged between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 to urge the central button body 373 upward, and a central button body 373. The transparent center button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper base 363 so as to cover the upper base 363, and the transparent central button cover 375 and the upper base 363. A central button decoration substrate 376 mounted on the upper surface and having a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button operation unit 303a is configured by the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375.

Also, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to an outer surface of the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The transparent outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 are covered. A transparent cylindrical outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, which is arranged above the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side of the part and is three-dimensionally decorated, and covers the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364, and a central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is mounted on the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing cam drive gear member 370 mounted on the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface thereof, and a lower surface of the pressing detection sensor 381 and the lifting detection sensor 382 mounted on the lower surface thereof. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, respectively, from the center to the front and the rear at positions at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of a metal rod. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends abut on the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends abut on the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A standing wall portion 364c protruding upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding in the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted in its upward movement by the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363. Has formed. The lifting base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371.

The lifting cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a coupling portion 370b that projects upward from the gear portion 370a, and is connected to the lower end of the lifting cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. And a vertical movement detection piece 370c that is protruded downwardly from the vertical direction and is cut out at two locations facing each other and that is detected by the vertical movement detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b that extends in the direction perpendicular to the shaft center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c that is recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end portion in parallel with the axis, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end portion of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided at its lower end with a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d in the cam portion 371a rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371 a can guide the guide pin 364 d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

The center button main body 373 includes a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the bottom portion 373b and the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and a downward direction from the bottom portion 373b. A pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the tubular portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts the upper surface of the elevating base 364, so that the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower ends thereof penetrate the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and the screws into which the washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is transparent. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373.

The center button decoration substrate 376 is a full-color LED that is a surface-mounting type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) is multi-colored. ing. The central button decoration substrate 376 can cause the central button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 is a full-color LED that is a surface-mounting type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) is multi-colored. ing. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can make the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and has an annular base plate portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364, and extends upward from the inner circumference of the base plate portion 378a in a cylindrical shape to extend from the central button body 373. And a cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer circumference. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

In the outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as going upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. .. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the tubular portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state in which the elevating base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upper end of the movement due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Has become.

Therefore, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 exceeds the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is pressed. The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button ascending/descending drive motor 367 rotates the ascending/descending drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the ascending/descending cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the ascending/descending drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls to the left along the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the state of the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of the one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lift drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. Also, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is projected higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the production operation unit 300 is assembled and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of being projected more than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. The central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364 by moving downward against the force. In the state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is in a state of protruding below the elevating base 364. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is located away from, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, The center button body 373 contacts the elevating base 364, and then the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, so that the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361. Become. By contacting the elevating base 364 with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 abuts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button body 373 abuts the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 moves the elevating spring 368 through the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of the 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is projected upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button body is The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not project downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the lift base 364 stops moving and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c that is recessed upward by the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the up-down detection sensor 382 are relayed to the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the dish unit in a normal state, FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and FIG. 65(c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 on the upper surface, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. And 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined such that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation section 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly projects above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 to rotate. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in a left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction, is larger than the spacing between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction at equal intervals. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Accordingly, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation part 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened to assist. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavy or to give a click feeling.

The rotation operating portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of half or more of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operating portion 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operating portion 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a manner that is easy for the player to do, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be performed. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operating section 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Since the lower surface side of the rotating operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the rendering operation unit 300 includes a rendering operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged in a row below the rendering operation ring 330. Accordingly, by causing the LED of the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light, the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330 can be made to emit light. Further, in the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in line are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the player can be illusion that the LED (decorative substrate) is provided inside the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal operation state, in the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65( a ), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface higher than that of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a lowered position in which it slightly protrudes upward. In this state, the rotation operation part 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation part 303a of the pressing operation part 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and press detection is performed. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and press detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the operation button up-and-down drive motor 367 rotates the up-and-down cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the up-and-down base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). By the biasing force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously projects upward and is in the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above and above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are the rotational operation portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward with the pressing operation portion 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be made more entertaining.

It should be noted that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, some players can easily rotate the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 interferes with the rotation operation. The operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be changed due to the change, and a variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 that is attached to the left outside of the door window 101a in the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and a door frame left side base 401. The front side of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 and the front side of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). The transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401, and the transparent door frame left side decoration attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. And a body 404.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The door frame left side decoration board 402 can make the door frame left side decoration body 404 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side inner lens 403 is formed transparent. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the door frame left arranged behind the left side inner lens 403 is left. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration substrate 402 are difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. The left side inner lens 403 as well as the front surface may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the front surface of the left side inner lens 403, the back surface may be It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron). The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed transparent. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the front surface and the back surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be The lens may be cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame left side decoration body 404 may be lens-cut (formed in a polyhedron. Good).

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left side of the.

In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front surface right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200 and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in a front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to a position substantially the same as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and is a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window interior decorations 410b capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine placed on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player who is playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and it is possible to form the player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration portions 410b which are attached to the front surface, extend in a cylindrical shape forward, and are arranged in rows vertically, and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portions corresponding to the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the side window interior decoration member. The transparent inner inner lens 414 is inserted into each of the plurality of side window interior decorations 410b of 412.

The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the transparent right side inner lens 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically. A through-hole 416a that extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction in a flat plate shape and penetrates in the left-right direction to form the side window 410a is formed so as to cover the right side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416, and the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415 are attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the left and right sides. A door frame right side inner panel 417, which extends in a plate shape in the front-back direction and in the front-rear direction and penetrates in the left-right direction and in which a through-hole 417a forming a side window 410a is formed.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). A door frame right side decoration substrate 418 and a transparent door frame right side decoration body 419 attached to the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right side inner lens 415 are provided.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decorations 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decoration member 412 in the side window is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower than the vertical center to an upper part. The side window decoration member 412 is formed transparent. The surfaces of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron) or the side window interior decoration member 412. A lens cut may be applied to both the front surface and the back surface of the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410 b (may be formed in a polyhedron), and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 inside the side window interior may be formed. A lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the decorative portion 410b (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The decoration part decoration substrate 413 in the side window is attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412a of the decoration member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)” in some cases) of the decorative portion decoration substrate 413 in the side window is a surface mounting type and is a full-color capable of emitting multiple colors. It is used as an LED. In the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the up, down, left, and right directions around the axis of the side window decoration portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The inner inner lens 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The inner inner lens 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left and right. The inner inner lens 414 is formed transparent. The surface of the inner inner lens 414 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the decoration portion inside the side window arranged behind the inner inner lens 414 is arranged. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 413. It should be noted that a lens cut may be applied to the back surface as well as the front surface of the inner inner lens 414 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the back surface instead of the front surface of the inner inner lens 414. May be applied (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The right side inner lens 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is a wavy shape that moves forward and then rearward from the upper end toward the lower end. Has been formed. The right side inner lens 415 is transparently formed. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the right side inner lens 415 is provided on the right side of the door frame. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration substrate 418 are difficult to be clearly seen from the player side. The right side inner lens 415 and the back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the right side inner lens 415 may be replaced with the back surface in the back surface. It may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and forward and backward, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically elongated elliptical shape, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The right side decoration substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed so as not to transmit light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration body 419 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed transparent. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the front surface and the back surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be The lens may be cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame right side decoration body 419 may be lens-cut (formed in a polyhedron. Good).

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end thereof is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right side of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a 1/4 portion thereof projects from the top to the front, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction inside the side window 410a, and makes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 emit light. Thus, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. By illuminating the side window interior decoration portion 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 for causing the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b to perform light emission decoration are turned off. It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if the player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily operated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to block the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity by other portions including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the whole of the game area 5a difficult for a player to see, and to make it difficult for a player to feel as if being seen by another player so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzle, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decorations 410b have a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and in a radial shape. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on the game and to feel uncomfortable due to the induction of mistakes, and to make the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 72C is a top lower cover outside. FIG. 6 is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 has a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top base 451 that is mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame. A translucent (for example, milky white) top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both left and right sides of the top base 451 and an upper front face, and a front end of the top top cover 452. Transparent door frame top decoration 453, and a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top bottom plate that connects the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 454 and. In addition, in the present embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top top cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are configured to have translucency (for example, have a milky white color). A top top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the base 451 and the front upper part, and the lower end of the transparent door frame top decoration 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 are doors. Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be configured as a transparent one instead of a translucent one (having a milky white color, for example).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top central decoration board 455 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top left decoration board 456, which is attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door A door frame top right decoration board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, I have it.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 (that is, arranged behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and at the same time as the door frame top center decoration body 453). It is arranged between the transparent top center inner lens 458 attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, which is arranged in front of the board 455, and the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top left decoration board 456 (that is, A transparent top left inner lens 459 mounted on the front surface of the top top cover 452, which is disposed behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and in front of the door frame top left decoration substrate 456. A top top cover 452 arranged between the decoration body 453 and the door frame top right decoration board 457 (that is, arranged behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and in front of the door frame top right decoration board 457). And a transparent top right inner lens 460 attached to the front surface of the.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 mounted on the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 mounted downward on the central speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 mounted near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively mounted on the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, and a light-transmitting property attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the bottom bottom cover 465 from below (eg, milky white). A lower cover frame 466, a door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the door frame top base 451, and an upper top cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top top plate 468 having a translucency (for example, having a milky white color).

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending leftward and rightward with the same width as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left-right direction, and from the left and right ends near the front surface of the main body portion 451a. And a front protrusion 451b protruding forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101, and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed to have a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connect the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most forwardly projected, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the top surface, which is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is transparently formed. The door frame top decoration 453 has a shape in which a semi-circular arc that bulges forward has a curvature that decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. Has been formed. As a result, the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively. The front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the back surface thereof may be lens-cut. May be applied (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 (may be formed in a polyhedron). ..

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower ends of the main body portions 451a of the door frame top bases 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. The cage includes a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c vertically penetrating outside the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decoration board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) is a surface mounting type and is capable of emitting multiple colors. It is used as an LED. The door frame top central decoration substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) is a surface mounting type and is capable of emitting multiple colors. It is used as an LED. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can cause the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 is formed in a strip plate shape extending left and right. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) are surface mounting type and capable of emitting multiple colors. It is used as an LED. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the left-right direction and are transparent. The surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are each lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top center decoration board 455 arranged behind the top center inner lens 458 and a door frame top left decoration board arranged behind the top left inner lens 459. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of 456, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 arranged behind the top right inner lens 460. It is difficult for the player to see it clearly. It should be noted that the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, as well as the front surface and the back surface, may each be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). Instead of the surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, the back surfaces may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and a pair of top center speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[Illumination by topside speaker]
Next, the structure of the pair of topside speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. The topside speaker 464 has a vibrating plate and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene), and a magnetic circuit portion such as a magnet and a yoke. It is formed in a cylindrical shape having a through hole penetrating therethrough, and the vibrating portion and the magnetic circuit portion are held by the housing portion. A plurality of openings are formed in the casing in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered by the center cap arranged in the front, while the rear is open.

A top side speaker 464 is attached to an attachment portion (not shown) on the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and a rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 has a predetermined distance dimension from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 to the rear (in this embodiment, approximately The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the attachment portions formed on the four not-shown four substrate attachment bending plates (18 mm). Further, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached together with the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so as to cover the rear surface (back surface) side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, to the attachment portion formed on the above-mentioned four board attachment bending plates (not shown). This transparent plate protects the rear surface (rear surface) side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so that other members do not come into contact with each other to cause an electrical trouble. As described above, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, so that the speaker illumination unit is assembled. In other words, the speaker illumination unit is composed of the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the transparent plate.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. The acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged so as to face the rear surface thereof, and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464.

On the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). .) forms a white resist layer. A plurality of LEDs (in the present embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) 469a are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. A plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are adapted to flow a constant current controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467. The LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 receives the light emission data and the clock signal serially output from the peripheral control board 1510, and based on this, the sound decoration board 469. By controlling the constant current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the LED, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are turned on, turned off, blinking, and turned on and off. Various light emission modes are realized.

The peripheral control board 1510 causes an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of a ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, the main body). Opening of the frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or a defect (a defect related to the operation of various movable decorative members (movable members), the original position (standby position) of each movable decorative member cannot be detected, etc.)) When there is not, the light emission data which is the light emission mode of the normal mode is output to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 detects abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging in the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, door frame). 3, opening of the main frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (defective operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable body), etc.) )) occurs, the light emission data which is a notification mode as a mode different from the above-described normal time is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal.

It should be noted that the light emitting mode of the effect mode (normal time) is a variety of light emitting modes in which lighting, extinction, blinking, gradation lighting, and the like are combined, and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. Output, the symbols are variably displayed using a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal, the main control board 1310 transmits a command corresponding to the variation pattern set when the symbols are variably displayed to the peripheral control board 1510, Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission state of the effect mode as a predetermined effect light emission (normal time). On the other hand, the notification mode (a mode different from the normal time) is a light emission mode in which a predetermined color (in the present embodiment, red) is turned on with the maximum brightness, and the payout control MPU is a door frame. When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the opening switch, a door frame opening command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board which has received this door frame opening command 1310 adds peripheral information (information for adjusting the format for transmitting a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the door frame opening command that informs the main frame 4 that the door frame 3 is to be opened. The peripheral control board 1510 which has transmitted such a command to the control board 1510 and has received such a command controls to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal time).

Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, the part number of the front surface side electronic component and the front surface side electronic component are arranged in the vicinity of the front surface side electronic components such as the mounted LEDs 769a. Includes the attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area indicating the position (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component) In some cases, the surface-side notation part indicating () may be printed with silk paint on a solid white resist with a light yellow paint that is inconspicuous to white. Although illustration is omitted, on the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, a part number of the rear surface side electronic component, a region indicating a position where the rear surface side electronic component is arranged, and the like are provided in the vicinity of the rear surface side electronic component such as a connector. The attribute of the back side electronic component (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included). The back side notation shown is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, since a light emitting effect is brilliantly produced by the light emission by the light emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are As described above, the LED is a full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission, and the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (lighting) or turning off. For this reason, on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as a "solid-coated white resist.") to form a white resist layer, and further, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be formed on the solid-coated white resist. By making the front surface notation part that can be specified by silk printing with yellow paint, the yellow front side notation part is not conspicuous with the white resist when the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to that, a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a yellow paint having a reflectance very close to white when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on (when emitting light). It is possible to maintain a high reflectance on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 by combining with the front side notation portion printed by silk printing.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 corresponds to the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. Since the rear cover is arranged, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the top side speaker 464 passes through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape, and is transmitted. The light is emitted from the center cap having a light-transmitting property, and the light is emitted from the diaphragm having a light-transmitting property through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion. You can decorate. As described above, since the top lower cover 465 is formed by punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes, the top lower cover 465 is passed through the through holes of the top lower cover 465 to cover the front surface of the top side speaker 464 and its surroundings. In addition to being visible, the electrical decoration of the top side speaker 464 can be viewed.

Furthermore, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the LEDs are reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape) and reflected from the top. The backside of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are repeatedly reversed, and the light is emitted rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 toward the rear. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through) a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469.

As described above, the speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so that the acoustic decoration substrate 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached is exposed. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed. When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emits light, the LEDs are emitted rearward of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, the acoustic decoration board). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 469 emits light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). Through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface), a plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469), and to the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door frame top base 451. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a gap defined by the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba that is formed.

The door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 as described above. The door frame base 101 has a shape larger than or the same as the outer circumference of the through hole 451ba at a position corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and a through hole 101k penetrating back and forth. Are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the LEDs are emitted rearward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, rearward). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (acoustic decoration on the rear side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). Through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (rear surface) of the substrate 469 (through a plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469)), the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door frame top base The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through a gap formed by the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in 451 and the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101.

In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left and right through holes 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a to be mounted partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view and an upper left area of the front component member 1000. The light will be reflected in each of the upper right regions. In the present embodiment, the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, but it may be made of black resin. In addition, hereinafter, when the door frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the opening/closing axis side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is referred to as “the pivotal support side of the door frame 3” or “the pivotal support side of the main body frame 4”. In some cases, the side opposite to the opening/closing axis side may be referred to as the “open side of the door frame 3” or the “open side of the main body frame 4”.

[Upper left area of the previous component]
On the front surface (front surface) of the upper left side area of the front component member 1000, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game situation (in the present embodiment, has a black color except for the respective transparent areas for confirming the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs) Is provided, a reflective sheet 1000a, which is a white printed portion having a white color having a high reflectance or a color close to white, is affixed except for the region where the functional display unit 1400 is arranged.

The front surface (front surface) of the upper left side area of the front component member 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is attached is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. In the closed state, the function display unit 1400 is covered by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except the region where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, and the reflection sheet 1000a passes through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. It becomes difficult to see. In other words, the presence of the reflection sheet 1000a, which has nothing to do with the content of the game effect, can be hidden, which does not hinder the game.

Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the reflection sheet 1000a is arranged in a position corresponding to the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 in the upper left region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, and the pachinko machine is used. When the machine 1 is viewed from the front, the front surface of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 on the pivot side of the door frame 3 (the pivot side of the main body frame 4). Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (front surface) was provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side) The left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 after being reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a and emitted toward the front, the outer periphery of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the left through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. Light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm of the left top side speaker 464 through a gap formed by the inner circumference of the hole 451ba and a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion of the left top side speaker 464. Is emitted, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 can be efficiently used as a game effect or a notification mode. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of components mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side), Since the light is emitted forward, light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is within the game area 5a. It does not emit toward, and also does not emit toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak toward the inside of the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

As described above, the reflection sheet 1000a has the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 (the door frame 3 is closed). It is provided on the front surface of the upper left region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to, and the light emitted by the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 can be reflected toward the front of the reflection sheet 1000a. Therefore, light (leakage light) that leaks rearward from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 can be emitted toward the front of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 by reflecting toward the front of the reflection sheet 1000a. It is capable of functioning as a reflection member. As a result, it is possible to prevent light leakage of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 from proceeding toward the rear of the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to suppress light traveling rearward of the game board 5.

Although not shown, a QR code (registered trademark) is stored on the reflection sheet 1000a in which a number (management number) for identifying the model of the game board 5 and attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5 are stored. And are printed at predetermined positions with dark black paint. Identification regarding the pachinko machine 1 by the reflection sheet 1000a, the number (management number) for identifying the model of the game board 5, and the QR code (registered trademark) in which the attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5 is stored. A specific information display unit configured to display information (that is, a QR code (registered trademark) in which attribute information of the game board 5 such as a number identifying the model of the game board 5 and a manufacturing date of the game board 5 is stored) is configured. ing. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, since the front component member 1000 is made of transparent resin (when the front component member 1000 is made of black resin, the background is black), Since the white reflective sheet 1000a is conspicuous, it is possible to naturally direct the line of sight of an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall to the reflective sheet 1000a by the attractiveness.

Further, the front surface (front surface) area of the upper left area of the front component member 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is attached is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5 as described above, and is a door frame. In a state in which 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, it is adapted to be covered by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except for the region where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, and the reflection sheet 1000a is a door. Since it becomes difficult to see through the door window 101a of the frame 3, the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflection sheet 1000a become difficult to see through the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

Further, in the reflection sheet 1000a, since the reflection sheet 1000a is white, if the background is white, the dark black color is conspicuous, and the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) are easily visible. Further, the QR code (registered trademark) is a device separate from the pachinko machine 1, and when the code is read by a code reading device carried by an attendant such as a clerk in a game hall, the reflection sheet 1000a has a white background. Is white, and a QR code (registered trademark) having a dark black color can be easily read. In other words, the white color of the reflection sheet 1000a can improve the readability of the QR code (registered trademark). The surface area of the reflection sheet 1000a is larger than the area of the front surface (front surface) or rear surface (back surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469. Further, instead of the QR code (registered trademark), it may be a one-dimensional barcode, letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc., or letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be combined appropriately.

Although not shown, a plurality of pseudo nails are arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000. Through holes are formed in the reflection sheet 1000a at the portions corresponding to the regions where the pseudo nails having a gold color are arranged. On the front surface (front surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5, as described above, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color are planted. Since the pseudo nail is also made of a metal having a gold color, it can be used as a reflecting member in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, like the reflecting sheet 1000a.

[Upper right area of the previous component]
On the open side of the main body frame 3 and on the front surface (front surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component member 1000, a metal for maintaining the mounting state of the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 Each stop FT (see FIG. 10) is provided. That is, on the open side of the door frame 3, metal stoppers FT are arranged on the front (front surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In particular, on the front surface side of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, a metal stopper FT is arranged at a position corresponding to the right acoustic decoration substrate 469. The metal stopper FT is designed so that its end is inserted into and engaged with a disc stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the body frame 4.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal, and as described above, is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101, Rigidity is given to the door frame base unit 100, and the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 that are vertically spaced apart from each other are connected to the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The left and right upper reinforcing frames 113, the left end side of the left reinforcing frame 111, the left end side of which is attached to the upper side of the lower reinforcing frame 111, and the right side of the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right end of 114 and the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of hooks for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 while being vertically spaced apart. A hooking member 116 to which 652 is hooked. That is, the metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3 and on the open side of the door frame 3.

As described above, in the present embodiment, on the open side of the main body frame 4, the metal stoppers FT are provided on the front surface (front surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. The metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3 on the open side of the door frame 3. The metal stopper FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are both made of metal and have a luster. Therefore, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right side acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the right side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 ( The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface) is provided by the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112. Can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened to the main body frame 4, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily visually recognized. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) mounted on the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. Although the light from the LED 469a is reflected by the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, the door frame base Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in 101 does not go out toward the game area 5a, and the rear of the game board 5 Also does not emit. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak toward the inside of the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

Since the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, the front component 1000 may be made of black resin instead. Even with this configuration, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the right side acoustic decoration passing through the right side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 469 is provided with a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, and a metal right reinforcement. Since the light can be reflected by the frame 112, light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 can be emitted. It does not emit toward the game area 5a, nor does it emit toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak toward the inside of the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

In addition, a white reflection sheet in which the shape of the white reflection sheet 1000a described above is appropriately modified may be attached to the peripheral area in the upper right side of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 where the metal stopper FT is arranged. You may comprise. In this way, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (front surface), a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5, a metal right reinforcing frame 112, Since it can be reflected by the white reflecting sheet, the LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 that has passed through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 The light is not emitted toward the game area 5a and is not emitted toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is mounted. Light from the LED 469a does not leak toward the inside of the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

By the way, a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall is provided on the door frame 3 after inserting the regular key into the cylinder lock 130 and rotating the door frame 3 when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. By grasping a decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decoration body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 by hand, the door frame 3 is opened from the closed state to the main body frame 4. Since the decorative member is continuously pulled, as the work of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 increases, the load may be repeatedly applied to the joint portion between the decorative member and the door frame 3, and the door frame may be damaged. There is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the right side on the open side of the door frame 3 is as described above. In addition, since a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are emitted to the rear through the right side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, It is possible to emit light toward the rear of 3. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3, and on the open side of the main body frame 4, the front surface of the upper right side region of the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 Metal stoppers FT are arranged on the (front) side, both of which are metal members. Therefore, when an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 3, The light reflected by the metallic right reinforcing frame 112 and the metallic reflecting portion such as the metallic stopper FT leaks out through the gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, and the gap is formed. Can be made to emit light. As a result, when a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall performs the work of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, for example, the transparent door frame right side of the door frame right side unit 410 provided in the door frame 3 When the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 is grasped by hand and the decorative member is pulled to such an extent that the gap emits light, the pulling of the decorative member is stopped, and then a finger is put in the gap to insert the door frame. 3 can be opened. Since it is possible to shorten the time for grasping and pulling the decorative member by hand, it is possible to shorten the time for which a load is applied to the joint between the decorative member (door frame right side unit 410) and the door frame 3. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When opening the door frame]
By the way, when the player is playing a game, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally becomes an obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball shot toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player launches the game balls toward the game area 5a one after another, the game balls are further stacked on the packed game balls, and the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state where the game balls are gathered in a grape shape, the player calls an attendant such as a clerk in the game hall to remove the game balls gathered in the grape shape. A clerk such as a clerk of the game hall called by the player opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, the decoration boards provided on the game board 5 are displayed. In addition to controlling all the mounted LEDs to be turned off, each movable body provided on the game board 5 is controlled to be maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether it is operating or not. Control of the game board at time. In addition to or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board included in the door frame 3 is used. When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the open position regardless of whether it is operating or not. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed to perform control as described above.

When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when controlling the door frame at the time of opening, a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board included in the game board 5 are all turned off, and/or A specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board included in the door frame 3 is lit in a notification mode for notifying the door opening. Ready to go. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light, as described above, the translucency passes through the through holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464. Light is emitted from the center cap, and light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing. Further, the light is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape) and repeated between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. On the contrary, in order to emit light from the rear side of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 toward the rear side (in other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light). Then, a plurality of LEDs 469a leaks from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is the rear side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (transparent). ) Because a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469)), a gap between the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and the door. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through the through hole 101k formed in the frame base 101.

That is, the plurality of LEDs 469 a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and can emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3, and thus the door frame. In a state where 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the acoustic decoration board 469 of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is viewed from the direction facing the front surface side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear surface side of the door frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface). In other words, the fact that the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emits light in the notification mode can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3, The plurality of LEDs 469a is arranged to leak light from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Thereby, in the game hall, the front side (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is provided to a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall passing through the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey a notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front surface side and the rear surface side of the door frame 3. Further, in the game hall, an abnormality or a problem occurs in a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall from both aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3 (pachinko). Abnormality in the machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, opening of the body frame 4, wiring (Disconnection, etc.) or defects (defective operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), detection of original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (standby position), etc.))) The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

By the way, if the speaker's diaphragm is broken by an unauthorized tool, the sound will not flow, but it is easy to visually recognize that the speaker's diaphragm is broken by a wrong tool. The sound changes even if it is opened, but the sound flows. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool to remove the wire connected to the speaker's connection terminal or disconnect it, you can prevent the sound from flowing from the speaker. Even if the gaming machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball by performing the above, the warning sound cannot be heard from the speaker in the first place. When a person performing such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a waiting state for the player, and a silent demonstration (a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame and the gaming board becomes a waiting player light emitting mode). The player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device that emits light and is capable of displaying the effect image.). Then, a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall may open a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool to disconnect the wire connected to the speaker connection terminal or disconnect the wire while the player is waiting. As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not sound is output from the speaker.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is perforated with a wire, the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged behind the topside speaker 464, and therefore the front surface (surface of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted in (1) emit light, light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464, and the housing portion is Light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction. Since the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 and the center cap are made of a translucent resin (for example, polypropylene having milky white), the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 passes through the hole. The light that is emitted as a spotlight shines as a spotlight with higher brightness than the light that is emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap. As a result, as described above, since the top lower cover 465 is formed of the punching metal formed of the metal plate having the innumerable through holes, the top lower cover 465 does not penetrate the top lower cover 465 during the silent demonstration. Through the holes, the existence of the holes formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be found as the existence shining with high brightness like a spotlight. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is being output from the top side speaker 464.

Further, when the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is perforated with a wire to perform a silent demonstration, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are turned off (which happens to be off. Or a state in which a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are turned off within a period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. In addition, since the acoustic decorative substrate 469 having a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution is disposed behind the topside speaker 464, the white coating film causes the background to become white. The white color of the white coating film can be visually recognized through the holes formed in the diaphragm 464 and the innumerable through holes formed in the top lower cover 465, and the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 was illegally opened. The holes are easy to see. This makes it possible to find out whether the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 has been pierced illegally. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is being output from the top side speaker 464.

In addition, a silent demonstration that a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player waiting light emitting mode, and a player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image. As a result, the plurality of LEDs emit light in the player waiting light emitting mode. Therefore, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is pierced with a wire illegally, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. The light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks through a hole formed in the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464, so that it seems that part of the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is emitting light. Thereby, it can be found that the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has a hole.

A translucent speaker net may be provided on the front surface of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. By providing the speaker net, it is possible to prevent the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 from being illegally intruded with a wire, and it takes time to make a hole in the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464. , Can contribute to early detection of such misconduct. Further, since the speaker net has a light-transmitting property, it is unlikely that the light emitted through the light-transmitting diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 will be obstructed.

The topside speaker 464 has a vibrating plate and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a resin having a light-transmitting property, such as polypropylene having a milky white color, but has a gray color as a resin having a light-transmitting property ( Polypropylene having a color close to black), red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, or the like may be used, or a transparent resin may be used instead of the translucent resin.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device provides effects and error notifications that occur during the game. However, when the front frame is opened, the notification mode of the light emitting device can be visually recognized from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, while it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear side of the front frame. There was a problem.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine that detachably holds the gaming board in a middle frame and includes a front frame configured to cover the front side of the gaming board (for example, JP-A-2018-079163). (Paragraph [0019], and FIG. 1)). By the way, in order to open the front frame, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall inserts a key into the cylinder lock and performs a turning operation, and then grasps and pulls the decorative member provided on the front frame by hand. As the opening work increases, the front frame may be damaged due to repeated load applied to the joint portion between the decorative member and the front frame.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine including a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). When any abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from the normal time, and can notify the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction to the outside. However, in the same manner as in the past, it was difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of abnormality or malfunction.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). When any abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from the normal time, and can notify the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction to the outside. However, when the amount of light directed to the rear of the game board increases, the amount of light directed to the front of the game machine decreases, so it was difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of an abnormality or a defect.

Further, conventionally, a game machine in which specific information about the game machine is provided on a game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). As a result, it becomes possible to confirm from the outside whether or not the game board is a legitimate game board, and it is possible to suppress an unauthorized change act or the like for the game machine. However, in the same manner as in the conventional case, the specific information can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the decorativeness is deteriorated, which may cause deterioration in the entertainment appeal of the game.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a speaker in a front frame has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). From the speaker provided in this gaming machine, an effect sound generated during the game is played, and an error notification sound is also played. By the way, if the vibrating plate of the speaker is swollen by an unauthorized tool, sound does not flow, but it is easy to visually recognize that the vibrating plate of the speaker is swollen. The sound changes even if the hole is made in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool, but the sound flows. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool to remove the wire connected to the speaker's connection terminal or disconnect it, you can prevent the sound from flowing from the speaker. Even if the gaming machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball by performing the above, the warning sound does not play from the speaker. When a person who performs such an illegal act leaves the game machine, the game machine waits for the player, and a silent demonstration (the light-emitting device emits light in the player-waiting light emission mode and the image display device The player waiting image is displayed.) is repeated. However, in such a wait state for a player, a staff member such as a game hall clerk opens a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an unauthorized tool and disconnects or disconnects the wiring connected to the speaker connection terminal. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not sound is output from the speaker.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center of the front view. The door frame 3 is a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, a plate center upper decoration 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

A plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a, a door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate upper center decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, which surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, a door frame top central decoration Since the board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decoration boards are appropriately made to emit light, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a is decorated with light. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to make it.

In the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, a circular donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 and a donut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 are coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operating portion 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. Two doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter upper decoration body 312a and lower-plate middle decoration body 312b are mounted vertically spaced apart from each other and Door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. A door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b, and the rotation operation part 302 and the outer periphery are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be conspicuous.

Further, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate lower left decoration 281, the plate lower right decoration 286, and the plate lower center decoration 312b, which are arranged below the plate center upper decoration 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is made slightly thin, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish central lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the effect operation unit 300, it becomes larger from the lower end to the upper part, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the up-down direction, and the rotation operation part 302 that is arranged on the upper side and is operable by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a doughnut-shaped rotation operating portion 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easy to see, and to make the rotation operating unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. It is possible to rotate the operation unit 302, and by operating the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation part 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotation operation part 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are projected farther forward than the upper plate 201, and the plate center top Since the decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made to stand out significantly. At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at a glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and to appeal to the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or a game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), or the like. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side in front view of the main body frame base unit 500. Main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end of the main frame, rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and a main body frame. Main body lower hinge assembly attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing unit 530 that is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500 so that a game is played within the game area 5a of the game board 5. The ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, the inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and the dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that is attached to the main body frame base 501 and that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, which are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides a main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank which is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape extending left and right and is opened upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape that is opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and is separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and the ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream side end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for the door frame 3 side Or a lower full tank ball path unit 610 that guides to the substrate unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges the outer frame hook 653 upward is provided, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape that extends vertically in a front view, and a lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a base main body 501a having a vertically extending rectangular shape in a front view, and a total height of about 3/4 from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion port 501b that penetrates the front and rear in the range of the height and the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the game board 5 on which the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b is formed is placed. It is provided with a placement portion 501c and a game board regulation portion 501d which projects upward from the center of the game board placement portion 501c in the left-right direction and which restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540, and a launcher mounting portion. The cylinder insertion opening 501f that penetrates the front and rear on the right side in front view of the portion 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and the front and rear penetrates on the lower left side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g that faces the body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620 and the body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating in the front and rear direction at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base main body 501a in a front view, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j rotatably attached to the rear main body 501a is formed near the upper and lower end portions of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge mounting portion 501k and the lower hinge mounting portion 501l are provided.

On the body frame base 501, a game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the site where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-shaped guide main body 502a extending leftward and rightward, protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are projecting, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the guide body 502a that penetrates forward and backward at both upper and lower ends and is left and right. And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Has been formed. The attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically in the vicinity of the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end of the connection cable 503 is the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 or the drive board unit 1700 on the side of the main body frame 4 (a table unit 2000 in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later). And a decorative board provided in the back unit 3000, a production drive board 1720 described later that drives a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, and the opposite end is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3. And the door frame sub relay board 105.

Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

Then, a connection cable that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 or a production drive board 1720 described later of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. 503 is guided so that the side connected to the effect drive board 1720 of the interface board 635 and the drive board unit 1700 on the body frame 4 side described later extends from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. With the binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d in the same horizontal direction among a plurality of through holes 502d formed at both upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a in a state of being brought into contact with the front surface of the main body 502a. , Is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to close the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (desirably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases as the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). To change. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at the opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is provided. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the.

Further, since the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded back portion. You can add a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened, when the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back by 180 degrees changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 acts due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the crease, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is prevented. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is located closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to move toward the door frame hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axial center) side of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle that intersects the tangent line to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be surely closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is also the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical protrusion upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. A main body frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in a vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in a front view and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the main body frame 4 can be hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Body frame under hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is also the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an upper distance from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and also has a lower portion. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3 extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion. , Are provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. To be The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the main body frame 4 can be hingedly rotated, and the main body frame 4 can be attached to the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in a plan view whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving to the front and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side, which is formed in a U shape with the right side open in plan view. The groove portion 530a is for inserting the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes a meandering state in a plan view, and an illegal tool is left from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as seen from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for driving into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 and a flat plate-shaped launching base 541, and is attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543, the launching solenoid 542, which is a rotary solenoid whose axis extends through the launching base 541 and extends forward, the hitting hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the hitting solenoid 542, The launch rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left, and the launch ball 544 on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state where the handle 182 is rotated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is hit into the game area 5a.

Note that, due to the driving strength of the game ball B and the like, if the hit game ball B does not reach within the game area 5a, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the space between the fall cover unit 150, the fall cover unit 150 drops to the fall ball receiving port 150c, passes through the fall cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with the width in the front-rear direction being substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose front-rear width is approximately the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. To the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and an upper back plate 551d that extends downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. The back plate left part 551e, the inner plate part 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left part 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate part 551b, and the front part to the right side of the lower side of the left plate part 551b. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to a position substantially the same as the right side of the left back plate portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner side plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and the inside of the L shape.

As for the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b moves above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow recess-shaped portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the dispensing portion 551b A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached, which projects rightward at the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front.

The payout base unit 550 is mounted on the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, and has a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is opened upward, and a part that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in the shape of a groove opened upward is provided.

In addition, the payout base unit 550 is provided on the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction and leftward from the first rail cover 554 in a front view. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-back direction is shorter than the front-back direction depth of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position on the right side in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is diagonal from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 to the left and rearward, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height on the left end side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at various angles. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially matches the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located at an upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and has an end portion on the first rail cover 554 side around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By rectifying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B flowing in two upper and lower stages by the flow straightening piece 556a and rectifying so as to flow in one stage on the downstream side, the inside of the tank rail 553 Even if the height becomes low, it does not block the ball.

The ball stopper 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 in the vicinity of the left end in front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and by sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 88(b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the rear. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, which guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated to the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is discharged to the 600 side.

The upper tank ball path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper tank full ball passage unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game sphere B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 from the rear, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guide unit 570 has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 which has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering shape through which the game ball B can flow, and which is open to the front, and closes the front side of the guide unit base 571. The flat-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 are formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering shape while repeatedly folding back and forth between the widths of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the flow direction in which the game ball B flows. It can be guided in a line.

The movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570 such that the movable piece member 573 can advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an upper portion of the movable piece member 573 around an axis extending in the front and rear direction at a right outer side portion of the guide passage 570a, and a part of a lower end thereof projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. Is formed. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is retracted from the inside of the guide passage 570a by the game ball B coming into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a and not protruding. Becomes

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 projects into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the discharging passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guide passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device taken along the front-rear center of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90(b) is a sectional view taken along line AA of (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear side.

The payout device 580 has a box-like opening to the rear, through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and payout. A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and a rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front cover 583. , A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. A payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and project into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear side. The ball-removing movable piece 592, which is attached to the ball-removing path 580b so as to be openable and closable at a portion branched from the dispensing path 580a by the lid 582, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-removing path 580b is closed. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 are provided with a ball removing lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a quadrangle that extends vertically in a plan view. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end open upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end near a right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward about 1/3 of the total height from the top so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly rightward and downward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right widths and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B with the outer periphery of the payout blade 589. Is formed in a circular arc shape that is concentric with the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view with respect to the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

The ball drop passage 580b branches at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the payout removal movable piece 592 is attached in the portion where the payout passage 580a and the removal passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball passage passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball-removing passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rearward at a position at a height of about 1/3 from above to the rear side. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side in rear view of a part of the payout device body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front cover 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout vane 589 is provided with three vane pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the payout passage in a portion extending from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extending to the right in rear view. In addition, it projects into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed toward the center side with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three vane pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B stored in the ball storage portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by a payout device rear cover 582 and a payout device front cover 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in rear view when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball-removable movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-removable movable piece 592 is bent in a V shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The hollow movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction on the left side in the rear view near the upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592. The ball pull-out lever 593 partially penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. When the ball pulling lever 593 is located at the lower end, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 593 can contact the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear can be restricted. The ball removing passage 580b can be closed by the ball removing movable piece 592. Further, the ball pulling lever 593 can be moved to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

When the ball-removing piece 592 is made rotatable by raising the ball-removing lever 593, the game ball B, which has been in a state of connecting beads on the upstream side of the ball-removing piece 592, moves the ball-removing piece 592. Therefore, it will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that restricts the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is closer to the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down sooner.

Thus, in the state in which the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-removing passage 580b, so the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. Although the game ball B will come into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since the ball-removing passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the abutting force moves the ball-removing movable piece 592 to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 by the game ball B. It is possible to suppress deterioration of durability and damage of the piece 592.

From this, since it is possible to make the ball-removing movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged, it is possible to discharge more game balls B to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-removing passage 580b more quickly, and thus pachinko. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer to each other than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b, the ball-removing movable piece 592 connects the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the distance is larger than that of the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, by blocking the outward movement of the game ball B between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball-ball moving movable piece 592, the ball-ball movable piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out from the space between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game ball B can be surely distributed to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is attached from below to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. The upper tank ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower tank ball path unit 610. The upper tank bulb path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601. The upper full tank cover 602 and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and that can push the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 projects rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover.

Further, the upper tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of its overall width and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of its overall height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward from the left side in a front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction, and opens downward on the lower surface, and is adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper tank full discharge passage 600d that extends downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and opens upwards near the right end in front view on the upper surface and is substantially vertical downward. And an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper tank full ball path unit 600, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper tank full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged side by side and open downward from the left side in a front view. The upper full-ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B discharged (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is discharged downward from either of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removing passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower portion of the upper full tank ball path unit 600. The lower tank full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper tank ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side becomes lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower tank full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower tank dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close a downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are attached. And a biasing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in a front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward of the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball drop passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, front opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. (Opening) is closed. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape whose center view is the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 as viewed from the front, and the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined so as to project forward. The operating protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening/closing contact part 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

In the state where the lower full tank ball passage unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are respectively installed in the upper fullfiller passage 610c. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d is the lower full tank payout passage 610b. And the game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball-removing passage 600e flows through the lower ball-removing passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 that is opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is brought into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicated with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise in a front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, so that the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower tank ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is open.

In the ball tank 552 that is opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of a ball cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied/stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state where the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blade 589. Becomes

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it is understood that the game balls B are stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in the clockwise direction in rear view, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is released downstream from 589. Then, the game ball B emitted from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full-ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball delivery route unit 600 passes through the upper ball storing passage 600b and is arranged immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball passage unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in FIG.

When a lot of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full-ball path unit 600 which is in communication. Then, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the inside of the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is reached. While the game ball B starts to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received by After that, the game ball B received in the full tank receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper bowl 201 is filled with the game balls B and further game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

In addition, when the lower bowl 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower balls are further dispensed. The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detected state.

When the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the ascending end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball-removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball-removing movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down abuts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball-removing movable piece 592, so the ball-removing movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 has an upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600 and a lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removing passage 610c to the ball removing guiding part 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving part 628 and the ball discharge port 629 and is located outside the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall). (Island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93(b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the bottom rear side. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each major configuration and seen from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine taken along the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The substrate unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear side. The base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, the payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and the payout control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear side.

The speaker unit 620a is directed to the front in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621, which is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened to the front. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that is formed by a plurality of slits that extend in the front-rear direction and extend vertically in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b which projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, and extends diagonally downward and rearward. And an open connection portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The body frame speaker 622 is mainly a cone type speaker that outputs a low tone.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the rear-side portion of the main body frame speaker 622 projects the most to the rear. Are formed so that the protrusion of the is small. As a result, a space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front in the speaker cover 621. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

In the speaker unit 620 a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting tubular portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is provided. And the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, on the rear side of the body frame speaker 622, an enclosure 624 having a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. The sound output to can be output (radiated) to the front from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the lower outer frame assembly 40 side via the connection tubular portion 43a, in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622, the lower outer frame assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, so that the sound is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is output from the dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the body frame speaker 622 has a small diameter.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of the bass reflex type, and it is possible to make the player hear heavy bass. As a result, a sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are provided. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b, and a speaker box 623. Further, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. A rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B emitted from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower tank ball passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball guide part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving part that receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5 that is open upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball guide part 627. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 through which the game ball B that has passed through the ball pulling-out guide portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is discharged downward.

An upstream end of the ball drop guiding portion 627 is opened to the left in an upper part of a left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end is opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball drop guiding portion 627 is opposed so that the opening at the upstream end thereof coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removing passage 610c of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The game ball B discharged from the ball removing passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long right and left. The bottom end of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guiding portion 627 at the front end, and is inclined so as to decrease toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharge ball receiving section 628, and then the ball. Since the gas is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a lower bass richer than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a rear side of the power supply board 630 (hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, a power supply is used. A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover a surface of the board 630, which is the rear side, of the "power supply board 630 (mounting surface)" on which electronic components are mounted. And a cover 631. The surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631 so that the power supply board 630 is accommodated in the transparent power supply board cover 631. The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply substrate 630 are sometimes described as a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, simply referred to as “solid green resist”). .) to form a green resist layer, and a power switch 630a having an operation unit for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power board 630. On the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630, in addition to the power switch 630a, the attributes of the surface-side electronic component such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the surface) The front side notation part indicating the shape of the side electronic part, the size of the front side electronic part, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic part, and the model of the front side electronic part may be included. It is a white paint that stands out and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The power switch 630a is exposed from the transparent power board cover 631. Further, since the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

The payout control unit 620d is a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and payout control accommodated in the payout control board box 632. A substrate 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 operates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and the like. This is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that a trace of opening and closing remains. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 and enhance the deterrence against an illegal act.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 of the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. An interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost of the body frame speaker 622 and is most protruded rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to a rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and a left side of the back cover 640 has a dispensing base 551. Are attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper tank ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 551d of the dispensing base 551 is assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating forward and backward and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. Door frame hooks 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the outer hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

In addition, the locking unit 650 is more effective than the lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 is provided which protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the locking unit 650 assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to rotate the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 at the front end. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outer hooks 652 are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the body frame 4 is unlocked from the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the outer frame 2 is disassembled from the body frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 cause the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed structure of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. 101(a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank, and FIG. 101(b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) which is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper portion of the main body frame in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the hinge side rear.

As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachable from the outer frame 2 and hinged by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shape attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of an upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out the game ball B to the player side. Equipped with.

The ball tank 552 is formed in a quadrangle that extends in the left-right direction in a plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side becomes lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed into a container shape with the upper side opened. Has been done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end portion side of the left side wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end portion on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) by about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Is formed over the entire length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side thereof extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream side to the downstream end at the bottom portion, and the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game ball B is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed. Have The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left side in front view. In addition, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending leftward from the right end in the plan view, and then extends leftward. It is formed in a crank shape that extends obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extends from there to the left end in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. .. In the tank guide rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a that extends from the left end to the right in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis line extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the site where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the game ball B is formed. Is formed at a height at which only one can flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a site where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged so that a plurality of the game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b which bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and whose width direction narrows from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. From this, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of gaming balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes one line as it goes toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b is slightly separated from the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curved curvature is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. From this, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. Since it changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spherical burrs in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the game ball B inside is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape, and ball clogging (ball clogging) easily occurs. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b is different depending on the position of the game ball B, and therefore flows through the inside. Since the pressing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be dispersed are dispersed, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and it is possible to prevent ball clogging (ball clogging) from occurring.

Further, the tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clogging (ball clogging) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game is high. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4, as described above. It is possible to achieve the effect of.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. Extending toward the left (to the left), in order to return the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m extend rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface part 501m while inclining so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower. And a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the outer sides of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game sphere, It is provided at a position lower than the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between and lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. And an outer terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a capable of connecting electric wiring from the rear and an upper side of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and an upper surface thereof is an overflow surface portion. And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate from a position lower than the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which is formed in a vertically extending rectangular shape in the front view, at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B to the rear. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B with the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The left upper part is higher than the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o on both outer sides in the left and right direction of the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o, respectively, and extends in the front-rear direction in the shape of a strip plate. A plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the rear right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between and is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is flush with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m is The left end of the bypass passage 552g coincides with the left end in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Note that, hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and has a front end inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and a rear end lowering 552h. And a weir portion that extends upward from the end of the passage surface 552h on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (the weir 552i side) of the rear end side in front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward from the right end. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the left-right direction.

When the bypass passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is along the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and extending obliquely to the left-right direction. It is extended. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552g changes from the slanted rear end so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. Ball clogging within 553 can be made difficult to occur.

The detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end of the detour passage moves toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553. When discharged, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball debris in the tank rail 553 by discharging the gas to a wide area.

Further, the portion that guides the game ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. In this portion, the game ball B that lurks under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) is never exceeded. Therefore, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked on the upper side can be secured on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, and thus the detour passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape that extends downward from the position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d to the right inside the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, in the front surface view, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position of about ⅓ of the entire length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length, extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position of approximately 1/2 of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and then extending in parallel with the left side wall 552d and near the rear wall 552c It is formed in parallel with the rear wall 552c and has a constant width in the front-rear direction and extends from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the entire length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

The ball tank 552 has, in plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped flange that extends laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the main body frame base 501). Are formed higher than the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o.

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and a portion that extends obliquely on the left side thereof and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located behind the ball tank 552 (projection). )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharging portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The discharge portion 551j in the ball tank 552 is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the height becomes lower stepwise toward the rear from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, and then becomes higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to the rear after it extends to a nearby position).

The external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connecting terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened and the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped by operating the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged so that the overflow end surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g become lower on the rear end side, as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower and the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side thereof becomes lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a becomes lower.

Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the overflow portion 552f having the lowest height of the outer peripheral upper edge. It is possible to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface part 501m, and at the same time, to flow from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface part 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent further increase of the game ball B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball crush) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side which is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

Further, at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than that of the overflow portion 552f, so that the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m and flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to make a ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Since it is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Accordingly, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is changed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear side. It is possible to make the flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and it is possible to make the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the bypass passage 552g in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and biting due to the directions of the pressures applied to the game balls B becoming uneven, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom portion of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that the tank balls 553 line up in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the region where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, since a wide bulging portion 553b capable of arranging a plurality of game balls B is provided, the game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a line in the width direction as they go toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The plurality of gaming balls B that have been stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are circulated to the downstream side through the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction is reduced to form one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, by the tank rails 553, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) while being aligned in a line.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a( Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. It is possible to make it difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the or overflow surface portion 501m, and it is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball B to fall from the rear side even if it rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j can be prevented from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. It can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and gets on the left step 501n and the right step 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by the inclination thereof, and a problem occurs when the game ball B spills out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

Further, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game ball that is stacked on the upper side in the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, in the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the site where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a front component member, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. .. FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in which the front components, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the table unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail.

In the following, when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, when the LED mounted on the decorative substrate has a square shape, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decoration board (side view LED). The detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate portion which give a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by receiving or passing the game balls B. A 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. In 2006, etc., a game for entertaining or passing the handle 182 and for distributing the game ball B in the game area 5a is performed.

The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a substantially square shape in front view, and a rear end of the game region 5a which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstruction nails N (see FIG. 115 and the like) having a gold color that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is mounted on the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the game is carried out by hitting the game ball B mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 211, etc.) for controlling the contents.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700 which is formed, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The entire front component member 1000 is transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape.

The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like) that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has the transparent panel plate 1110, the game panel 1100 is arranged behind the game panel 1100 from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5) through the game panel 1100. It is possible to easily visually recognize the presence of various members (hereinafter, may be referred to as "transparent game panel 1100").

The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards electrically connected to the above-described door frame sub-relay board 105 (for example, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400). , A door window right side unit 410, a side window interior decoration board 413 and a door frame right side decoration board 418, and a door frame top relay board 467 of a door frame top unit 450), a main control board 1310 and peripheral control. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection with the board 1510, and a decoration board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like included in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are driven in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. The production drive board 1720, and a drive board box 1730 accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the production drive board 1720 are provided. The rear side of the drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 so that the left side thereof can be hinge-rotatably attached, and the right side of the drive substrate box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Note that, for example, the production drive substrate 1720 has a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter, simply “solid green resist”). May be described as "."), so that a green resist layer is formed. A plurality of electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the performance drive board 1720, and the electronic component attributes such as a component number of the electronic component and a region indicating a position where the electronic component is arranged near these electronic components. (In addition, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component may be included.) Then, each is printed by silk printing on the solid green resist.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls B that have been driven into the playing area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the playing areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game ball B can be accepted in accordance with the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate section 2003. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, it is possible to accept the game ball B, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. It is provided with a second special winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an outlet 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the inside of the game area 5a, and the game ball B provided in the up and down direction in the game area 5a. The first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the game area 5a are provided.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the slightly left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front side. 2300 and a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. The first attacker unit 2400 that is present, the frame-shaped center role object 2500 provided above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and the center role. A second attacker unit 2600 provided on the right side of the object 2500 above the first attacker unit 2400 and having a second special winning opening 2006, and one provided above the second attacker unit 2600. A side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003 are provided. There is.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall that is open to the front. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010, and a flat front left front decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. A lower back left effect unit 3200 and a lower right effect unit 3250, and a lower back middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the lower left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the rear front right decoration 3040 in the rear box 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in the back box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500, and front front right production unit provided between front front right decoration 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(a) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 116(b) is a perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel as seen from the rear.

The entire front component member 1000 is transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in the front view, and extends in an arc shape in a clockwise circumferential direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to decrease toward the rear (out port 2010).

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 when viewed from the front to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. An upper end of 1001 is connected, and a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact is provided.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the inner rail 1002 and the front rail. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The out opening 2010 is penetrated with a width in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided to the rear by the out guide portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower ends thereof, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch portion 1010 coincides with the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component member 1000 is formed almost entirely transparent, and the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component member 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. , It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the front component member 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstruction nails N having a gold color are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge, and a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole and a short long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of engaging stepped portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the panel plate 1110, a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 is offset to the upper right from the center in a front view. Thereby, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game ball B (circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion is approximately the same size as the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder 1120 also includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to match the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out opening 2010. The cylindrical portion 3081 of the out-ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into the out recess 1123.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step and a plurality of projecting pins protruding forward from the holding step and respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. The three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. And a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging step portions on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to incline the upper side and the lower left side. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion where it is engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component member 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (to the player's side). By doing so, it can be made to appear to be emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

Further, on the back surface side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, in the vicinity of the right side of the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 when viewed from the front of the game panel 5, it is illegal. A magnetic sensor 1111 for detecting magnetism is attached (see FIG. 113 and the like).

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with its upper and front portions open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A transparent main control board box 1320 is attached.

In the substrate holder 1200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharging portion 1201 is located directly above the discharging ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the rear unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below. You can

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 211) that controls the game contents and the payout of the game balls B, and the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And are equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one main sealing board is used to close the main control board box 1320, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrent to the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first big winning opening sensor 2402, and a second big winning opening. The sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub outlet sensor 2403, the second sub outlet sensor 3054, and the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 276 to 279 in addition to FIG. 107. FIG. 276 is a perspective view (a) of the function display unit seen from the front, a perspective view (b) of the function display unit seen from the rear, and FIG. 277 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit seen from the front. Yes, FIG. 278 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 279 is a schematic view of the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate housed in the function display unit.

As shown in FIG. 107, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 is a state indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and an ordinary symbol indicator made up of two LEDs for showing the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003. And a normal hold indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds associated with the passage of the game ball B in the gate section 2003.

In addition, the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result lottery by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The second special lottery result that is drawn by the first special reserve number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 It is provided with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. ing.

Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “win” or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening/closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 (the number of rounds). It has a round display consisting of five LEDs for displaying.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on/off, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs.

As shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, the function display unit 1400 includes a box body 1400a having an opening at the rear and an opening, a flat plate-shaped cover body 1400b closing the opening, a box body 1400a and a cover body 1400b. And a function display substrate 1400c sandwiched and housed in the space. The shape (that is, the outer shape) of the side surface of the box body 1400a and the shape (that is, the outer shape) of the side surface of the cover body 1400b are the same shape, and the cover body 1400b is covered by the box body 1400a so as to close the opening of the box body 1400a. When attached to the box body 1400a, the side surface of the box body 1400a and the side surface of the box body 1400a are flush with each other. The outer shape of the function display substrate 1400c is smaller than the outer shapes of the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b. In the present embodiment, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are molded from a colored and opaque resin (black resin). The colored and opaque resin may be a resin such as gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, and yellow in addition to black. Further, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b may be molded with a resin having a milky white color or a colorless and transparent resin, instead of the colored and opaque resin.

[5-5-1. Box]
The box body 1400a has a plurality of through holes 1400az at positions corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca (in the present embodiment, LED bare chips) mounted in a matrix on the front surface 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. The LED insertion cylinders 1400aa, which are arranged in a matrix and have a cylindrical shape that communicate with the through holes 1400az, are provided so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface side of the box body 1400a. In a state where 1400c is sandwiched and housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa is in contact with the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. There is. That is, in the state where the function display board 1400c is housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c correspond to each other. Since the LED insertion tube 1400aa is accommodated in the LED insertion tube 1400aa, the LED insertion tube 1400aa functions as a partition wall so that the lighting or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. ..

Further, the box body 1400a is provided with plate-like ribs 1400ab that connect the mutually adjacent through holes 1400az and reinforce the through holes 1400az, projecting rearward from the back surface side of the box body 1400a. The tip of the rib 1400ab is formed so as not to project from the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa (that is, the tip of the rib 1400ab is formed shorter than the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa). As described above, the box body 1400a is formed of a colored and opaque resin (black resin), and therefore the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the rib 1400ab also have a color (black). The tip of the rib 1400ab may be flush with the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa.

The inner diameter of the through hole 1400az and the inner diameter of the LED insertion tube 1400aa are the same, and there is no step at the portion where the through hole 1400az and the LED insertion tube 1400aa communicate with each other. In addition, on the upper side surface, the left side surface, the lower side surface, and the right side surface of the box body 1400a, protrusions 1400ac to be inserted into the locking holes 1400baa formed in the four mounting pieces 1400ba provided on the cover body 1400b are respectively provided. It is provided in a recess formed on the side surface. The side surface of each protruding portion 1400ac is flush with each side surface of the box body 1400a and does not protrude from each side surface of the box body 1400a. In addition, a part of the side surface of each protruding portion 1400ac is an upward inclined surface from the opening of the box body 1400a toward the front surface (front surface) of the box body 1400a, and four attachment pieces 1400ba provided on the cover body 1400b. Makes it easy to insert into the protrusion 1400ac. When the protruding portion 1400ac of the box body 1400a is inserted into the locking hole 1400baa formed in the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b, the locking hole 1400baa formed in the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b becomes the box body 1400a. Of the cover body 1400b, the side surface of the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b and the side surface of the box body 1400a are flush with each other, and the mounting piece 1400ba of the cover body 1400b must be destroyed. Has a structure that cannot be removed from the box 1400a. In other words, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are configured as a sealing board box for sealing the function display board 1400c.

Further, the box body 1400a has a plurality of positioning protrusions 1400ad along the inner peripheral surface of the box body 1400a for restricting the movement of the function display board 1400c in the up-down, left-right and front-rear directions and for sandwiching the function display board 1400c. It is provided.

Although not shown, a white function display sticker is attached to the front surface of the box 1400a. This functional display sticker is provided with a transparent portion having a circular shape at a position corresponding to each LED insertion tube 1400aa when it is attached to the front surface of the box body 1400a. That is, lighting or blinking of the LED 1400ca mounted on the front surface 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c can be visually guided through the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the through hole 1400az and the transparent portion. ing.

[5-5-2. Cover body]
Mounting pieces 1400ba are provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover body 1400b, and the mounting pieces 1400ba are provided so as to project from the front surface side of the cover body 1400b to the front side. Each hole 1400baa is formed. As described above, the recess is provided on the side surface of the box body 1400a, and the protrusion 1400ac is formed in the recess. When the locking hole 1400baa formed in the mounting piece 1400ba is locked when it is inserted into the projecting portion 1400ac, the mounting piece 1400ba is stored in the recess provided on the side surface of the box 1400a ( Regarding the attachment piece 1400ba provided on the upper side of the cover body 1400b, the tip of the attachment piece 1400ba is flush with the front surface (front surface) of the box body 1400a and does not protrude from the front surface (front surface) of the box body 1400a).

Further, the cover body 1400b is provided with a connector opening 1400bb at a position corresponding to the surface mounting type connector 1400cb mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c so as to close the opening of the box body 1400a. When the cover body 1400b is attached to the box body 1400a, the connector 1400cb of the function display board 1400c projects and is exposed from the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b through the connector opening 1400bb. A wiring cable for transmitting a control signal from the connector 1400cb main control board 1310 is electrically connected. The color of the housing of the connector 1400cb is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). The connector 1400cb may be a surface mount (SMD) type instead of the surface mount type.

Further, the cover body 1400b is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 1400bc for attaching the function display unit 1400 to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 so as to project rearward from the back surface side of the cover body 1400b (in the present embodiment, Three mounting bosses 1400bc are provided). As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a flat panel plate 1110 that is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the front component member 1000 that defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a, and the outer circumference of the panel board 1110. And a panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. As described above, the front component member 1000 is formed with the function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted in the upper left corner when viewed from the front. On the front surface (front surface) of the panel holder 1120, a fixing hole (not shown) having a through hole at the upper left corner in front view and at a position corresponding to the three mounting bosses 1400bc provided on the cover body 1400b of the function display unit 1400. Are formed respectively. In the function display unit 1400, the three mounting bosses 1400bc provided on the cover body 1400b are inserted into the three fixing holes provided on the front surface (front surface) of the panel holder 1120, and the three fixing holes are provided from the rear surface (back surface) of the panel holder 1120. The cover body 1400b of the function display unit 1400 is fixed to the front surface (front surface) of the panel holder 1120 by inserting a screw into the through hole of the and the function display unit 1400 is fixed to the front surface (front surface) of the panel holder 1120. It will be in the state to be. In this state, the panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000 while holding the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, whereby the function display unit 1400 is attached to the function display unit attachment portion 1011 of the front component member 1000, and the function display unit The front surface (front surface) of the box body 1400a of the unit 1400 and the front surface (front surface) of the front component member 1000 are flush with each other, and there is no step.

Further, a rib portion 1400bd is provided along the inner circumference of the cover body 1400b, and the rib portion 1400bd is provided so as to project from the front surface side of the cover body 1400b toward the front. The outer peripheral surface of the rib portion 1400bd comes into contact with the inner surface of the opening of the box body 1400a when the cover body 1400b is attached to the box body 1400a so as to close the opening of the box body 1400a. In addition, the cover body 1400b has a plurality of protrusions 1400bda for sandwiching the function display substrate 1400c at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1400ad provided on the box body 1400a along the inner peripheral surface of the rib portion 1400bd. It is provided.

Although not shown, the product management number (for example, FDU-TYP-A) of the function display unit 1400 is stamped on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b.

[5-5-3. Function display board]
A plurality of LEDs 1400ca (LED bare chips (also referred to as “LED elements” in this embodiment)) are mounted on a front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, and front side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs. In addition to the pads to which (the electronic components on the front surface side) are soldered, through holes (those that have conductivity by copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the through holes; the same applies hereinafter), lands, etc. A black resist layer is formed by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid black resist”) in all areas except the above. .. In the present embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c indicates the part number of the front electronic component (front electronic component) and the position where the front electronic component (front electronic component) is placed. Attributes of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts) such as areas (further, shape of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts), size of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts), front side electronic parts ( The front-side notation part (front-side notation part) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component and the model of the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component) may be included in a predetermined color ( For example, a bright white or yellow paint that is easily noticeable with respect to black) is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid black resist.

On the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, in addition to the connector 1400cb to which a wiring cable is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. may be mounted, and the connector 1400cb, various ICs, various In addition to the pads to which the rear electronic components (rear electronic components) such as resistors and capacitors are soldered, black resist liquid is applied to the entire area excluding through holes and lands. A black resist layer is formed by the coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid black resist”). In the present embodiment, the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c indicates the part number of the rear electronic component (rear electronic component) and the position where the rear electronic component (rear electronic component) is arranged. Attributes of the rear side electronic component (rear side electronic component) such as a region (further, the shape of the rear side electronic component (rear side electronic component), the size of the rear side electronic component (rear side electronic component), the rear side electronic component ( The back side electronic component (back side electronic component) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component and the model of the back side electronic component (back side electronic component) may be included in a predetermined color ( For example, a bright white or yellow paint that is easily noticeable with respect to black) is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid black resist.

As described above, a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, and on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, control from the main control board 1310 is performed as described above. A connector 1400cb to which a wiring cable for transmitting a signal is electrically connected is mounted. A plurality of terminals provided on the connector 1400cb to which a wiring cable for transmitting a control signal from the main control board 1310 is electrically connected are connected to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca via various wiring patterns formed on the function display board 1400c. It is electrically connected. The wiring cable includes not only wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main control board 1310 but also wiring for supplying power (for example, +12 V) and wiring for making the board ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 the same. included. Note that, of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c, one surface may be solid land, both surfaces may be solid ground, or both surfaces may be solid ground. You don't have to.

The front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c and the rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c are the land, respectively. Provided on a connector 1400cb mounted on a rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c via a through hole 1400cc having a front surface (a front surface (front surface) land and a rear surface (rear surface) land). The plurality of terminals to be electrically connected to the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c are electrically connected.

When a through hole 1400cc having a land is arranged in the vicinity of a plurality of LEDs 1400ca, the light emitted by the LED 1400ca is reflected by the land of the through hole 1400cc, and when the reflected light is emitted to another LED 1400ca adjacent to the LED 1400ca, The LED 1400ca may have a light emitting state such as a lit state even though the LED 1400ca does not emit light, and the LED 1400ca may be mixed with the light emitted by the other LED 1400ca to have a color different from the color emitted by the other LED 1400ca. It may be a light emitting mode or a light emitting mode in which the color is blurred. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs 1400a based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, and displays a game state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, etc. Since it is a display device, if such a light emission mode occurs, it may be misread by the player or misrecognized.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 279, the through hole 1400cc having the land is located at a position apart from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, and the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the ribs formed on the back surface side of the box body 1400a. It is arranged outside the region corresponding to the region of 1400ab. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca from being reflected by the land of the through hole 1400cc, so that the light reflected by the land of the through hole 1400cc does not travel toward the plurality of LEDs 1400ca. Can contribute to that.

Although it is difficult to prevent the entry of ambient light that enters through the gap between the connector opening 1400bb of the cover body 1400b and the connector 1400cb, the connector 1400cb does not have a plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted thereon. Since it is mounted, it is possible to prevent ambient light from directly traveling toward the plurality of LEDs 1400ca.

Further, in the state where the function display board 1400c is sandwiched and housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, as described above, the front end portion of the LED insertion tube 1400aa is located in front of the function display board 1400c ( The surface is in contact with 1400 cx. That is, in the state where the function display board 1400c is housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c correspond to each other. Since the LED insertion tube 1400aa is accommodated in the LED insertion tube 1400aa, the LED insertion tube 1400aa functions as a partition wall so that the lighting or blinking light of the LED 1400ca is not mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of the adjacent LED 1400ca. .. As a result, ambient light entering through the gap between the connector opening 1400bb of the cover body 1400b and the connector 1400cb passes through the through hole 1400cc having the land from the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the functional display board 1400c to the front surface of the functional display board 1400c. Even if it enters the (front) 1400cx, it is possible to suppress the entry of ambient light into the LED insertion tube 1400aa by the LED insertion tube 1400aa that functions as a partition wall, so that the color of the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca is reduced. It is possible to prevent the colors of the ambient light from being mixed (the color mixture of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca and the color of the ambient light can be reduced).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c have no silk printing on the solid black resist. Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern is formed. Even if the information for identifying what kind of electronic component the side electronic component (front side electronic component) is, is formed by the foil-removing foil leaving formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. However, on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c, the rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern, which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) in which the rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is formed, is the rear surface side electronic component ( Information for specifying what kind of electronic component the backside electronic component is is not formed by the foil-removing foil remaining formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. That is, in the present embodiment, the information for specifying what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) mounted on the front face (front face) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c is the function display substrate. The electronic device which is not written on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the 1400c and which is the rear electronic device (rear electronic device) mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c is specified. No information for doing so is written on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c.

A black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. This is because when a black resist solution is used, the light emitted by the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity is prevented by preventing reflection by the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. This is because it can contribute to preventing the mixture with.

Further, since the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are molded with a colored and opaque resin (black resin), light is passed through the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b. Can be prevented from entering. Even if light enters the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b, a black resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. Since the black resist layer is formed by the black coating film, by suppressing the reflection on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c, the reflected light is directed to the plurality of LEDs 1400ca. Can be suppressed.

By the way, since the function display unit 1400 is an important display device whose main control board 1310 controls the display of the lottery result and the game state, the function display board 1400c housed in the box 1400a of the function display unit 1400 is illegal. If changed to, it is not possible to correctly display the lottery result, the game state, and the like. In this case, for example, even though the game ball has not actually entered the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the illegal signal is input to the main control board 1310 as if it entered the game ball. Even if a fraudulent act of obtaining many lottery opportunities is performed, the function display unit 1400 cannot correctly display the lottery result, the gaming state, and the like, and it is difficult for the staff such as the clerk in the gaming hall to notice.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, silk printing does not exist on the solid black resist on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. That is, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c have no front surface notation portion (front surface notation portion) and rear surface notation portion (back surface notation portion) printed by silk printing. Not formed. Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern is formed. Even if the information for identifying what kind of electronic component the side electronic component (front side electronic component) is, is formed by the foil-removing foil leaving formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. However, on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c, the rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern, which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) in which the rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is formed, is the rear surface side electronic component ( Information for specifying what kind of electronic component the backside electronic component is is not formed by the foil-removing foil remaining formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. This makes it difficult to identify the electronic component mounted on the function display board 1400c and grasp the circuit configuration.

In this embodiment, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is front surface (surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c. We adopted a configuration that is directly implemented in. The LED bare chip (also called "LED element") is an extremely small electronic component because it is encapsulated in a surface mount type (top type or side type), chip on board type, shell type package, or the like. is there. Therefore, as compared with the case where the LED package is mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, the depth distance dimension in the surface mounting type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, or shell type package. Therefore, the function display unit 1400 can be downsized. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if an impact due to a player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the function display unit 1400 provided in the game board 5 is not affected. Since the impact due to the weakening is weakened, the probability that the plurality of LED bare chips mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c will be damaged by the impact due to such a dot is low.

As a method for electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode of the front surface 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, wire bonding, flip chip bonding, or the like can be used. In the present embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, instead of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode of the front surface 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c using a wire like wire bonding, bumps are applied to the electrodes of the LED bare chip. To form a projection portion called "." and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c. This connecting portion is reinforced with solder, resin or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c have no areas printed by silk printing. As a result, the step of silk printing can be omitted, and thus the board manufacturing cost can be reduced by reducing the plate cost of silk printing and the number of board manufacturing steps.

In the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c did not have any silk printing on the solid black resist. Instead, the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b are configured as a sealing board box that seals the function display board 1400c. Since the structure is not provided, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c has a front surface notation portion (front surface notation portion) of a predetermined color (for example, white, which is a light color that is conspicuous with respect to black or It may be printed by silk printing on a black resist that is solidly coated with (yellow) paint, and a rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) is provided on the rear face (rear face) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. Alternatively, it may be printed by silk printing on a solid black resist with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a light color that stands out against black).

Further, in the above-described present embodiment, the box-shaped body 1400a is provided with the LED insertion tube 1400aa having a cylindrical shape that communicates with the through hole 1400az, and protrudes rearward from the back side of the box 1400a. Instead of the LED insertion tube 1400aa having a cylindrical shape, the LED 1400ca is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 1400ca arranged in a matrix on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c separately from the box body 1400a. Lattice-shaped spacers may be provided. The lattice-shaped spacers are molded of colored and opaque resin (black resin) like the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b. Even with this configuration, when the function display substrate 1400c is housed in the space between the box body 1400a and the cover body 1400b by being sandwiched, the plurality of function display substrates 1400c are mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx. Since the LEDs 1400ca are accommodated in the rectangular openings formed in the corresponding lattice-shaped spacers, the light of the LED 1400ca that is turned on or blinked is not mistaken as the light of the adjacent LED 1400ca or the light that is blinked. The lattice-shaped spacers can function as a partition wall similarly to the LED insertion tube 1400aa.

Further, in the above-described present embodiment, the through hole 1400cc having the land corresponds to the region of the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the rib 1400ab formed on the back surface side of the box 1400a at a position distant from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca. However, when it is difficult to arrange the through hole 1400cc having the land at a position away from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, the through hole 1400cc having the land is arranged in the region corresponding to the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa. It may be arranged in an area smaller than the area (that is, within the area where the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c are in contact with each other, and the size of the area does not exceed this area. The LED insertion tube 1400aa may be disposed in the outer peripheral area of each LED insertion tube 1400aa (that is, the LED insertion tube 1400aa in the area in which the LED 1400ca is housed, and the tip of the LED insertion tube 1400aa and the function display. It may be arranged in a region in which the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the substrate 1400c abuts and a region excluding the combined region).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c are mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c (front surface electronic component (front surface electronic). The information for identifying what kind of electronic component the component is is not written on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, and is mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. Although information for specifying what kind of electronic component the rear surface side electronic component (rear surface side electronic component) is is not written on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c, the functional display substrate 1400c is a substrate. The management number may be written on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and/or the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate 1400c. As a method of indicating this board control number, silk printing is performed with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a bright color that is easily noticeable with respect to black, and gray, which is a dark color that is not noticeable with respect to black, and is close to black). It may be printed by or the board control number is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed. The board control number is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the board control number. It may be formed by leaving the foil.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the model of the connector 1400cb mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c is not described on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, but the model of the connector 1400cb is not described. May be indicated on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and/or the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c. As a method of indicating the model of this connector housing, silk of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow, which is a bright color that is easily conspicuous with respect to black, and a gray color close to black, which is a dark color that is inconspicuous with black) is used. It may be printed by printing, or in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the type of the connector 1400cb is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the type of the connector 1400cb with the wiring pattern which is the copper foil. It may be formed by leaving the foil-removing foil.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (rear surface) of the cover body 1400b, but instead of the rear surface (rear surface) of the cover body 1400b, the box body 1400a. The product management number of the function display unit 1400 may be stamped on any one of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (rear surface) of the cover body 1400b, but instead of the engraving, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is predetermined. May be directly printed on the back surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b with a paint of the color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. It is also possible to attach the one printed on the back surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b. Further, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1400b, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 may be assigned to any one of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall of the box body 1400a. It may be directly printed with a paint of a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or the product management of the function display unit 1400 on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. You may make it paste what printed the number.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c by the black coating film formed by applying the black resist solution. However, on the rear surface (back surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c on which no LED 1400ca is mounted, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution instead of black. Alternatively, the white resist layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution. For example, the green resist solution is inexpensive because it is a commonly used standard solution.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c by the black coating film formed by applying the black resist solution. However, instead of black, a green resist layer may be formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution, or a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution. May form a white resist layer. For example, the green resist solution is inexpensive because it is a commonly used standard solution.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is front surface of the function display substrate 1400c. Although the structure of directly mounting on the (front) 1400cx is adopted, instead of the LED bare chip, an LED package having a surface mounting type (top type or side type), a chip-on-board type, or a shell type is used for the function display substrate 1400c. It may be mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx.

Further, in the above-described present embodiment, flip chip bonding is adopted as a method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, but instead of flip chip bonding, Wire bonding may be adopted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c is a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern is formed. The information for specifying the electronic components of the front side electronic components (front side electronic components), which are the plurality of LEDs 1400ca, is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. Although it was not formed by leaving the foil left, a foil removal standard formed by making a circle symbol near the position corresponding to the terminals (anode terminal or cathode terminal) of multiple LEDs 1400ca and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. The terminal symbols are formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, and are black-painted (green or white may be used instead of black) on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. The foil removing reference terminal symbols may be covered with resist. The front side (front surface) side wiring pattern forming the foil stripping reference terminal symbol is formed to be electrically insulated from the LED 1400ca. If the surroundings of the foil removal reference terminal symbol are so-called solid ground (substrate ground), the circle symbol itself may be the foil removal. In addition, the foil-free reference terminal symbol may be a symbol indicating the polarity of the LED 1400ca (a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish an anode terminal and a cathode terminal) or a circuit diagram instead of a circle symbol. The symbol used (a symbol that can be used to distinguish between the anode and cathode terminals) may be simplified). Further, when the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display board 1400c have substantially the same mounting direction (that is, the mounting direction of the plurality of LEDs 1400ca is the same for the mounting operator or the automatic machine). As for the orientation (when there is no rule to be mounted in reverse), the foil-free reference terminal symbol is provided near the position corresponding to the terminal of any one LED 1400ca of the plurality of LEDs 1400ca. It may be formed on a front surface (front surface) 1400cx of 1400c, or a foil stripping reference terminal symbol may be formed on a front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c near a position corresponding to a predetermined one or more terminals of the LEDs 1400ca. It may be formed. Also in this case, the foil stripping reference terminal symbol may be a symbol indicating the polarity of the LED 1400ca (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal), instead of the circle symbol, The symbol used in the circuit diagram (the symbol that distinguishes the anode and cathode terminals) may be simplified).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 uses the plurality of LEDs 1400a based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, the game state (game state), the normal lottery result, and the like. Since it is an important display device for displaying the result of special lottery, etc., the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c are coated with a black resist solution to form a black coating film. By forming the resist layer, reflection by light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c is prevented, and thus the light emitted from the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity is not mixed. Was able to contribute to doing so. Therefore, as to the substrate accommodated in the display device other than the functional display unit 1400, similarly to the functional display substrate 1400c accommodated in the functional display unit 1400, on the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (rear surface) of the substrate, The black resist layer may be formed by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. This prevents reflection of light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the substrate housed in the display device, thereby contributing to preventing the light emitted from the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity from being mixed. be able to.

This display device will be described with reference to FIG. 280. FIG. 280 is a schematic view of a game board side matrix display device provided on the game board and a door frame side matrix display device provided on the door frame. As a display device, as shown in FIG. 280, a device that accommodates a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix are mounted is separately provided from the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image on the game board 5. Center board 2500, a circular game board side matrix display device UDPC provided at the center of the upper part, and one that accommodates a plurality of substrates on which a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix are mounted is the left side of the door frame 3 The door frame side matrix display devices TDPL, TDPR and the like provided in the unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, respectively, can be cited. The game board side matrix display device UDPC and the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL, TDPR are different from the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 which controls the progress of the game, and the peripheral control unit 1500 (controls the progress of the production. It is different in that it is controlled by a peripheral control board 1510) which will be described later. The game board side matrix display device UDPC and the door frame side matrix display devices TDPL and TDPR have the same configuration, and a detailed description of the game board side matrix display device UDPC will be given later as a “dot matrix display”.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 is a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 211) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially in the center. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the back surface side of the protective cover body 1601, a plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a for locking various wirings are formed along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 and the ventilation length is long in the vertical direction. A plurality of holes are formed in a state of being aligned vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1601c protruding downward from the lower end surface. This effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010, which will be described later, in a state where the liquid crystal screen is directed forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b from diagonally rear of 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward to insert the lower fixing piece 1601c into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right at.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 117(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Through, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , To the second start port 2004 or the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. Different from the first big winning opening 2005 and the first big winning opening 2005 in which it is possible to receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B. It is possible to receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is provided at the position and is selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The second big prize hole 2006 is provided.

Of the plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is the vertical direction in the right part of the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 at the bottom end at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the vertical direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end in the lower right corner of the game area 5a. The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the right general winning opening 2001.

The first sub-out opening 2011 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is arranged on the right side of the right general winning opening 2001.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002, and the front of the starting opening unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and the side upper left unit, which is provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly above the left side unit. 2300 and a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 are provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. The first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, above the first attacker unit 2400, and has a second special winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600. Of the side right middle unit 2700, which has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800 that is installed.

[5-8a. Starter unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. FIG. 118(a) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 118(b) is a perspective view of the starting opening unit and the side unit of the front unit seen from the rear, (c). ) Is a left side view of the starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening with the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing portions of the starting opening unit and the side unit in the game board. The start-up unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out-port 2010 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting opening unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending in parallel with a surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from a peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending from the middle in the front-rear direction to the outer side in the left-right direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall 2101 is formed in a shape such that the shape in front view is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long in the left and right and a semicircular portion whose lower side is a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101 and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is low, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the left-right direction is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by a front wall portion 2101 and a peripheral wall portion 2102 which are attached to the panel plate 1110 and project forward from the panel plate 1110. Is forming.

By attaching the starting opening unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting opening 2002 projects forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and then opens upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is reached. Located just below the center of the. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 toward the rear of the gaming panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102, and the back unit 3000. Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050. The game ball B transferred to the first transfer opening 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

Although illustration is omitted, a decoration sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so as to stand out from the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be prompted to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002. A lottery of special lottery results (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state in which a player, such as a "big hit" game, is advantageous, is performed by allowing the game ball B to be received in the first starting opening 2002 Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

In this starting opening unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B rearward is inclined at a gentler angle (angle near horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B toward the rear is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, the pleasure (sense of superiority) for the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

Further, in the state where the starting opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the under-rear production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear side and is provided in the under-reliment production unit 3300. Light is emitted and decorated by the light from the LEDs of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decoration substrate 3329 of the existing lower back middle decoration unit 3320.

Further, although not shown in detail, the starting opening unit 2100 may be provided with a rib extending over the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102. The rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part may be rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning opening 2001. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. (The position of the rib is below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 comes into contact with the rib and is guided rearward. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is in the first front wall portion 2203. It is possible to make it later than the timing of being guided to the rear by being brought into contact with the inclined portion, and the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can always be received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are open upward.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate and a second base plate that extends from the base plate back and forth in a gutter shape and is inclined so that the front end thereof moves rearward as it goes downward. One guide gutter, a first front wall part that closes the front end side of each of the two first guide gutters, and a gutter-like extension from the base plate back and forth on the left side of the two first guide gutters. And a second front wall that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide trough 2202 has a U-shaped open portion facing upward, and the second guide trough 2204 has a U-shaped open portion facing upper left. The front end of the first guide trough 2202 extends vertically with the upper part of the front gutter 2202 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom as a boundary, and near the base plate 2201 so that the lower part moves backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally up to. Therefore, the first front wall 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide trough 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the base plate 2201 brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Then, the first projection gutter 2202 and the second guidance gutter 2204 part that protrudes more forward than the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall 2203 and the second front wall 2205 can receive the game ball B. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. Further, in the side unit 2200, in a state where the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel board 1110, the portions of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 projecting rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrate the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. Then, it projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be guided to the rear.

The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the back delivery unit 3050 of the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B transferred to any of the second transfer opening 3062, the third transfer opening 3063, and the fourth transfer opening 3064 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then the lower position. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

Unlike the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker attached to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, It is less visible than the first starting port 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and the decoration sticker is not attached to the front surface. , Doesn't look bad.

In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located behind, and the back lower left decoration in the back lower left effect unit 3200. The light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light emission decoration, and the back lower left rotation decoration body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a portion that is inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the rear unit left side of the back unit 3000 is left by the portion. Light radiated forward from the lower left left decorative substrate 3203 of the rendering unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and You can improve the appearance.

In the side unit 2200, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, and thus is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increasing. The bottom surfaces of the first guide trough 2202 and the second guide trough 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily long drawn to the general winning opening 2001 while surely letting the player recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to the next game ball B, other first winning opening 2002, first winning opening 2005, second winning opening 2006, and other winning openings. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

In other words, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting opening 2002, and at the same time, the pleasure (sense of superiority) for the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer period of time than it was accepted by.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is seen from the side of the first guide trough 2202. It is possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined portion of the game ball B. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, and therefore the game ball B is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. There is a risk that the player will feel distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side because the game ball B is not paid out, and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall 2203 and the first guide trough 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and moved backward. Since the game ball B to be guided can be visually recognized by the player in a short time, it can be recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if an illusion that the game ball B passing in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

Further, in this side unit 2200, a part of the game ball B is allowed to pass in front of the first front wall part 2203, so that the front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is in front of the game ball. When most of the game ball B (at least half of the game ball B) overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in the front view when B passes, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. It is possible to make the illusion as if it has been accepted and entertain the player. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall from feeling distrustful even if no benefits (payout of game ball B or lottery of the first special lottery result) are given thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player entertained and continue to enjoy the game, and to prevent a decrease in interest.

In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 of the three general winning openings 2001 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. And has the same shape as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 at the left end, some players can make an illusion that the game ball B has been received in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, which is illusory as the starting opening, the special lottery result is not drawn, and the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrust. There is a fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position that cannot be accepted by "right hitting"), which is leftward from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction, and the second Since a decorative sticker for indicating the starting opening is not attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205, it can be reconfirmed that it is not the starting opening, and the player feels distrust, which makes the game interesting. It is possible to avoid lowering it.

Also, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 as compared with the case where the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the decoration sticker is not attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Although the inclination angle of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) from the horizontal is not shown, the variable winning openings such as the big winning opening and the accessory winning opening are closed so that they can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the angle of inclination from the horizontal when the gaming ball B is guided to the winning opening side and is rotated around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to move forward. It has an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by receiving the game balls B into the variable winning a prize is larger than the number of the general winning a prizes 2001, most of the game balls B to the variable winning a prize will be given. Will come to wish for a prize. Alternatively, even if the player has a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which the specified winning number is set, he or she desires to win more than the specified number. Therefore, the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is made gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall 2203), so that the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As described above, when the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning port, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning port 2001, so that the player can see the game ball B. In contrast, it is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning port, and at the same time, to the general winning port 2001, the pleasure (sense of superiority) for the game ball B being accepted into the variable winning port can be recognized. It can be tasted for a longer period of time than when it was accepted. Also, since the angle of the winning opening door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time until the winning opening door in the open state is closed. Therefore, more than a specified number of game balls B are awarded to the player. Can make you feel like doing.

In addition, in the two right general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, a portion that extends obliquely downward from the lower end of the portion of the first front wall 2203 than the distance of the portion that vertically extends downward from the upper portion. Is formed longer. As a result, since the prize hole is the general prize hole 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the ordinary lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Therefore, the game ball B accepted in the general prize hole 2001 is not performed. Can be made invisible from the player's field of view at an early stage.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 shows the one in which the front surface of the specific general winning opening 2001 is tilted among the plurality of general winning openings 2001, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all the general winning openings 2001 are not limited to this. You may make it the front surface of the winning opening 2001 incline. Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined is allowed to enter the game ball B which is launched to the launch position (so-called "left hit") in the normal gaming state. Although the one provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front face is not tilted is set in the advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probable variation" or "big hit"). The game ball B shot at the launch position (so-called "right hit") may be provided at a position where it can enter the ball, or may be provided at both positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the angle of inclination of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclined front surface is greater than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening) is opened and then opened. The angle is narrow. When the number of payouts of the game balls B at the time of winning in the special winning opening is made larger than that of the general winning opening 2001, even if the special winning opening is defined, the player can win more than the specified number. I wish. Therefore, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B that has won the special winning opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed when the game ball B that has won the general winning opening 2001 with the front surface tilted to the back side. There is. In other words, when the player wins the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number of payouts when the player wins the big winning opening, it is considered to be faster than the speed when the gaming ball B that wins the big winning opening rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the more the payout holes are paid out, the later it takes to disappear from the player's view. As a result, the more the payout opening is, the longer the joy of winning can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower rightward. The upper left side unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf part 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. 121(a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121(b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first special winning opening door in the first attacker unit, as viewed from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the first attacker unit in a cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side in the front view of the starting opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, and from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2004, a first special winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided in the upper part on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the first special winning port 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and is more than the second starting port 2004. It is provided at a lower position, and the first sub-out opening 2011 is provided below the second starting opening 2004 and at a position lower than the first special winning opening 2005.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and the second start port sensor 2401, and the first ball detecting the game ball B received in the first special winning port 2005. It is provided with a special winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. Two first big winning opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming the flow path of the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. A rear cover 2413, a second start opening door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second start opening 2004, and a second start opening door 2414 movable to open and close the second start opening 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415 for operating the starting opening solenoid 2415, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first big winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first big winning opening 2005, A first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the one big winning opening door 2417 to open and close the first big winning opening 2005, and a transmission for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 by transmitting the advance/retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418. And a member 2419.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for illuminating and decorating the first special winning opening 2005. A second starting opening sensor 2401, a first special winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403, a magnetic sensor 2404, a starting opening solenoid 2415, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and a first special winning opening decoration board 2420 and a panel relay board. The first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 includes a first opening portion 2411a penetrating in the front-rear direction near an upper end on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating in the front-rear direction below the first opening portion 2411a, and a left-right direction. A second opening 2411c that extends longitudinally left and right in the upper part on the left side of the center, and two second guide holes 2411d that extend side by side under the second opening 2411c and are arranged side by side left and right, And a first sub-out port 2011 that penetrates forward and backward below the one guide hole 2411b.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed such that the width on the left and right is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inserted. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b projects rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. Each of the second guide holes 2411d projects rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower.

The unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two abutting portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e are the contact portions of the front cover 2412, with the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is closed. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is attached in a state where the detection hole is projected forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d.

The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and is transparently formed as a member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage of the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the left in a front view. It is slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf portion 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and between the first shelf portion 2412a and the first shelf portion 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf on the left side of the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b and from the position lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left side. A third shelf 2412c extending shorter than the section 2412b and a third shelf 2412c are provided with a distance of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B from the left end of the third shelf 2412c to the left. It has a fourth shelf portion 2412d that extends downward from the lower position to the left and that forms a first special winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf portion 2412a, the second shelf portion 2412b, and the third shelf portion 2412c are inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portion 2412a and the like. ing.

Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to a height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. From the right end of the fourth vertical wall 2412h extending vertically to the lower side of the front cover 2412; the fifth vertical wall 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c; and the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. From the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a seventh standing wall portion 2412k extending downward from the sixth standing wall portion 2412j.

The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to lower leftward. Further, it extends downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the right. At the top, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side after inclining so that the game ball B can be distributed between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l and the first sphere wall portion 2412l so as to be lowered leftward. And a second lateral wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to be higher. The first lateral wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the position of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

In addition, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portion of each of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j toward the direction of approaching each other to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j. It has an extending third lateral wall portion 2412n and a partitioning portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and the space in which the game ball B can flow between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided to open. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The upper shelf portion 2412p has its right end located directly above the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and its left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Further, although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411, and in a portion that is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two contact portions projecting rearward in shape. These abutting portions are the game balls B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 when the first big winning opening 2005 is in a closed state, and the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. Together, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and is formed of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting opening door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first special winning opening door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403 so as to sandwich them.

The second starting opening door 2414 extends in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b, the arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a having a flat plate shape, and the unit base 2411. A rotary shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a lower portion of the arm portion 2414b and that is separated from the rotary shaft 2414c and that is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415. ..

The door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

The second starting opening door 2414 can close the second starting opening 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second starting opening door 2414 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2414c as the starting opening solenoid 2415 moves back and forth in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2414a moves in the front-rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting opening solenoid 2415 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In this starting opening solenoid 2415, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first big winning opening door 2417 includes a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long in the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c extending from the lower end coaxially with each other in the left-right direction, and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower portion of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a, and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in a transmission member 2419 described later.

The first special winning opening door 2417 can close the first special winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first special winning opening door 2417 is rotated (rotated) about the rotation shaft 2417c as the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is moved back and forth, whereby the door portion 2417a is moved in the front and rear direction. The first big winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger projects is directed forward. In the first attacker solenoid 2418, the plunger is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) in a non-energized state, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 passes through the base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extending portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and the left and right direction near the front end of the extending portion 2419b. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light to the front are mounted on the front surface of the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs on the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 are full-color LEDs that are surface mount type and capable of emitting multiple colors. The first special winning opening decoration substrate 2420 can cause the first special winning opening 2005 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs emit light.

In the normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the starting opening solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starting opening solenoid 2415 is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 passes through the first opening portion 2411a of the unit base 2411. Projecting forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 is located above the second starting opening 2004, and it is impossible to receive the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 by the door portion 2414a. Has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is projected forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is the second opening portion of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is located above the first big winning opening 2005, and it is impossible to receive the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. It is in a state. That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414. After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf portion 2412b, the second shelf portion 2412b is discharged to the left from the left end. The game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 depending on its momentum, and is left due to their inclination. Roll towards you. In addition, when the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left comes in contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p and bounces back to the right, a gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. May enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a closing the first special winning opening 2005, with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, They come into contact with each other alternately and roll to the left while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is discharged to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from its left end after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes along the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, the second horizontal wall portion 2412m passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then is returned to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulates on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B that passes through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c are both It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting opening solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is resisted against the biasing force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d on the upper side (door portion 2414a side) of the rotating shaft 2414c in the arm portion 2414b of the second starting opening door 2414 is pulled backward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting opening door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper side of the second starting opening 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Becomes That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 while the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall part 2412f and the third standing wall part 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls on the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first lateral wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls backward by the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from its rear end. The game ball B emitted rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is placed on the substrate holder 1200 below from the back guide unit 3050. Emitted.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger moves back together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the biasing force of the spring. When this transmission member 2419 retracts, the link pin 2417d of the first special winning opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed rearward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

As a result, the first special winning opening door 2417 rotates about the rotation shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. It will be moved. The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, so that the first big winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened. The game ball B can be accepted (see FIG. 124). That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in an open state, the gaming ball B passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and then the fifth standing wall portion. After being detected by one of the two first special winning opening sensors 2402 through the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, the first It falls on the three lateral wall portions 2412n. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to become lower rearward from the upper surface, and the game ball B dropped on the third lateral wall portion 2412n rolls rearward due to the inclination, so that the unit base 2411 It is discharged rearward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. ..

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first special winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005. Since the first prize hole 2005 is opened and closed by rotating the door portion 2417a about the rotary shaft 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction, the first prize hole 2005 (first The depth in the front-rear direction applied to the attacker unit 2400) can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first special winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first special winning opening sensor 2402 to detect the unit base 2411. Since it is designed to be released to the rear, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being stagnant between the first big winning opening 2005 and the first big winning hole sensor 2402, and at the same time, a lot of game balls can be played. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. 126A is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 126B is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100, slightly in the center in the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is in the frame. It cannot be entered.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-like shape protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted in the panel plate 1110. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not project, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an end side projecting from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape following the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line shape, so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player can exert the effect of reinforcement while exhibiting the effect. I try not to stand out.

More specifically, a plurality of support parts 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in the support portion 2503 provided in a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 projects leftmost above the warp inlet 2511 described later, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the portion is the middle of the vertically extending portion. Has a shape that bulges to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, and at the portion that bulges leftward of the peripheral wall portion 2501. It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is linearly formed so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135 ). The support part 2503 of this part is a state where the support part 2503 is assembled to the game board 5, and the part of the support part 2503 that extends linearly up and down on the tip side is a front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is substantially along a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the front end side of the support part 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support part 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively behind. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made conspicuous.

Further, among the plurality of support parts 2503, the support part 2503 on the lower side of the warp inlet 2511 has a rectangular shape extending rightward while the peripheral wall part 2501 extends obliquely. The support portion 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). The tip side extending to the left and right of the support part 2503 extends in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, and thus the shape of the shutter 3732 may be a part. , And the support part 2503 is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is opened so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter in a portion of the front wall of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front view from the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2511 and is capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512 and the warp outlet 2512 that is opened in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100. It is provided with a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from bouncing from the outside of the center accessory 2500 into the frame by bouncing back the game ball B on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is a panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W shape) such that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction when attached to the 1110 is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction (central emission portion 2513a) and a lowest portion on both left and right sides (side emission portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be released from those parts into the game area 5a.

In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the height center portion (center emission portion 2513a) of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is discharged from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game ball B can flow. This center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the stop of the front component member 1000). The game ball B, which is almost in contact with the right rail 1005 near the portion 1006 and is driven to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is located along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521, which is separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 that extends in the vertical direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are laterally separated. Further, the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened obliquely downward to the right along the arc of the upper portion of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 with the center accessory 2500 assembled to the game board 5. Further, the first guide passage 2521 has the right end of the entrance thereof located directly below the lower end of the hitting portion 1006 of the front component member 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the hitting portion 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is projected from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the right, and is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 for guiding the game ball B from above to the right and then discharging it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an inlet opening upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an outlet opening diagonally downward left with a width of one game ball B.

The lower right guide passage 2530, which is assembled to the game board 5, has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle side right unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is provided at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and through the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the back unit. It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B contacts the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be released from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support part 2503 is shortly projected from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501 and is partially provided on the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is provided on the rear side. It is possible to reduce the obstruction of the visibility of the decorative object of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. The center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located at positions as close to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 as possible. Since the transparent center accessory 2500 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the rear front left decoration 3030 and the rear left effect unit 3700 on the rear side from being blurred. From this, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body and the like provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the support portion 2503 and the like are transparent and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body or the effect display device 1600 that can be light-emitted, it is possible to perform light emission decoration with light from them and to improve the appearance. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, and the like in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (the cross hatching portion in FIG. 135). , The light emitted forward from the LED on the front left decoration board 3714 in the front left front production unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused to give a gorgeous luminous decoration. It can be shown to the player. Note that steps or cutouts may be provided in the support portion 2503 so that light from the rear can be diffused due to the steps or the like, and the image can appear more bright.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 is provided to have a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game with the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 is more expanded than the case where the support part 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side can be made more visible. In other words, when it is desired to make the non-circulation area (inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can Alternatively, it is preferable that the support part 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind when viewed from the front.

The edge of the support part 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the ornament) of the back front left effect unit 3700 provided on the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from being conspicuously deteriorating the decorativeness of the rear decorative body due to the support portion 2503 being different from the rear decoration, and at the same time, the support portion 2503 is also decorative. Can be increased.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear side, and those decorations are provided by the lens effect. Although the thing which suppresses that it looks blurry is shown, it is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 which is distant from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. Alternatively, the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided behind may be made to appear blurry.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shown inserted into the opening 1112. However, the rear wall portion 2501 may not have a rear portion to be inserted into the opening portion 1112, and in this case, the peripheral wall portion 2501 may be attached to the game panel 1100 having no opening portion 1112. .. Further, when the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support part 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center role object 2500 is not provided with the flange part 2502. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129 and the like. FIG. 128(a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the right side center unit, and the gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128(b) is the second attacker unit, the side right center unit, and It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing the passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in cross section.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a second special winning opening 2006 that opens and closes leftward (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 is a second special winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time acting near the second special winning opening 2006. 2602 and. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second special winning opening door 2611 to open and close the second special winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2006 by opening the second big winning opening door 2611. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance/retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second special winning opening door 2611, and the second big winning opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and discharging it backward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the second special winning opening 2006 opens to the left from the center in the left-right direction to the right, and the second big winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning opening door 2611 is provided.

The second big winning opening door 2611 bulges downward from the semicircular bottom side, the right side that linearly extends upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and bulges leftward from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called blade shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second big winning opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotation shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position distant from the rotation shaft. And a pin (not shown). The second big winning opening door 2611 has a lower rotation shaft rotatably attached so that the upper end moves leftward.

Although not shown in detail, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger projects downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction with the base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, and allows the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 to slide. It has a slit to be inserted and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is located so that the right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 in the state of being assembled to the game board 5, and the second winning hole 2006 and the peripheral wall portion of the center role object 2500. A space where the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501. Further, the second attacker unit 2600 has a rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second special winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the second special winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, in accordance with the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled up. By being slid in the slit, the second special winning opening door 2611 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second special winning opening door 2611 is moved to the left, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second special winning opening door 2611 is lowered. It will be in a tilted state. That is, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B that has flowed down comes into contact with the second big winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received in the second big winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged rearward. The game ball B discharged rearward from the guide passage 2613 is transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. The side right middle unit 2700 of the table unit 2000 is arranged immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. This side right middle unit 2700 is provided with one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

The side right middle unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 which is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width of two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear, and the first guide passage 2701 guiding the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012 to the rear. And two induction passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, bends rightward, and further bends rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

This side right middle unit 2700, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Further, the side right middle unit 2700, in a state of being assembled to the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000, and a lower end in contact with an upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can flow is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at a position slightly left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upwards over substantially the entire space (see FIG. 130 and the like).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and is provided behind the back side. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and is a rear unit provided in the rear side. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-outlet sensor 3054, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Has been. The gate member 2800 is a gate unit 2003 for performing a lottery of the ordinary lottery result of opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate unit 2003. 2801 and. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that projects obliquely to the lower left from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003 to the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is, when assembled on the game board 5, its extension line is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800, which is assembled to the game board 5, is located substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the game is performed on both the left and right outer sides. A gap through which the ball B can flow is formed. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer sides and the lower side of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, above the side upper left unit 2300, there is provided a wind turbine W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center character 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center character 2500 into a part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. Is adjusted so that the windmill W enters the region on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability. As a result, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center character 2500 with a certain probability by hitting the left side of the center character 2500 so as to flow down.

The plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 of the center accessory 2500 are more than the game balls B that have flowed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted so as to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B flows on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is driven by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the left side of the center role object 2500. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or a part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and with a lower probability than that, a part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W. Be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility of being accepted into the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is transferred to any of 3064, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is hardly received in the first starting opening 2002. Then, the game ball B not received in the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting opening 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N obliquely arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and received in the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right of the center of the wind turbine W may flow down onto the side unit 2200, passing between the plurality of obstacle nails N that are diagonally arranged, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 to move back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharging portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharging portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, and thus the first probability is high. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is discharged from the side discharge parts 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central discharge part 2513a, it is received in the first starting opening 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then passed to the first passing port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting port sensor. The sheet is detected by 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B flowing on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 or is received in the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being caught.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit to the right side of the center character 2500 is received by the second starting opening 2004, whereas the game ball B hit to the left side of the center character 2500 is. The probability of acceptance in the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are not in the open state, it is possible to prompt a driving operation (“left hitting”) of the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500.

In the game board 5 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved to the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 at a position lowering from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction to the right, and the game ball B is inserted at the strength. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with such strength that it comes into contact with the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of just above the gate portion 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is a left side of the gate member 2800, a gate portion by a plurality of obstacle nails N which are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is guided in order of decreasing probability and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and passed to the ninth transfer port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged outside the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the ordinary lottery result in which the second starting opening 2004 is opened and closed is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of having a high probability by the plurality of obstacle nails N that are planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes it is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the right side unit 2700, or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then transferred to the eighth transfer opening 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. To the left of.

At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted at the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. The detection of the game balls B by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 gives a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B.

The game ball B, which has not been accepted into the second prize hole 2006 and has flowed down to the left of the second prize hole 2006, enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits from the lower right guide passage 2530. From the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B discharged downward (obliquely leftward) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly in the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 and the second shelf portion 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf 2412b to the left. Then, the game ball B released from the second shelf 2412b to the left falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417, depending on its momentum, and their inclination. Thus, after being rolled to the left and rolling from the door portion 2417a to the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the game balls B abut on a plurality of obstacle nails N and do not flow down to the first shelf portion 2412a, but to the upper shelf portion 2412p. May flow down. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination and is discharged to the left from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and then to the obstacle nail N planted to the left. After coming into contact with each other, turning downward, and flowing down to the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first special winning opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left to first It is discharged to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing at which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, the first big prize It may be accepted in the winning opening 2005.

Further, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf portion 2412a bounces back to the right due to contact with the obstacle N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2412a may roll rightward against the inclination thereof and may be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The game ball B discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down to the vicinity of the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. Then, due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then is not returned into the game area 5a and is not returned into the game area 5a. And is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and the game ball B is passed through the gate portion 2003, if the "normal win" is selected as the normal lottery result, the second start is performed. Since the opening door 2414 moves and the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf portion 2412a to the left is received in the second starting opening 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

In addition, when the game ball B is discharged from the second shelf 2412b to the left, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are drawn. As a result, when the “big hit” is selected by lottery, the first special winning opening door 2417 moves and the first special winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the second winning portion 2412b is discharged to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first special winning opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By the detection of the game balls B by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of the game balls B is given.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged from the second shelf portion 2412b to the left, it comes into contact with a step on the lower surface of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and flows down diagonally to the lower right, and the second shelf portion 2412b and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received in any of the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged from the outlet 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

From this, in order to open and close the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and "small hit" is performed. It is necessary to make a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to let the gate section 2003 pass the game ball B to draw (or assign) the "normal win" as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the chance of accepting the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 is lower than that of the first starting opening 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting opening 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. An operation can be performed, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed by showing the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N, and the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of.

Then, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and a “small hit” or a “big hit” is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 Since the opening and closing, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right hit" so that the game ball B can be received in the first prize hole 2005 or the second prize hole 2006, and the first prize hole. It is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball B into the 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passages to be circulated allow passage of the gate portion 2003 easily. , The second sub-out port 2012 may be easily received, so that the striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through a desired guide passage, and the player can play the game ball. It is possible to entertain the typing operation of B.

In addition, there is a possibility that the "normal hit" in which the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state can be drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 by performing the "right hit", Since there is a possibility that the game ball B will be received in the second starting opening 2004 and a “small hit” or a “big hit” may be drawn, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening at the front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower front end inside the back box 3010, and a flat front left front decoration 3030 and back right decoration 3040 which are respectively provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010. The rear guide unit 3050, the rear rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guide unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010, which are separated from each other left and right. A lower back left effect unit 3200 and a lower right effect unit 3250, and a lower back middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the lower left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear effect unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, behind the back front left decoration 3030. Rear rear left effect unit 3500, rear rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the rear front right decoration 3040 in the rear box 3010, rear front left decoration 3030 and rear rear left in the back box 3010. Front front left production unit 3700 provided between production unit 3500, and front front right production unit provided between front front right decoration 3040 and back rear right production unit 3600 in back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, a back front left decoration 3030, a back front right decoration 3040, and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached on the rear side. This back box 3010 is transparently made of synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape having an open front, a square opening penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame in the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the lower side in the left-right direction and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached is provided.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear so that the lock mechanism 3020 can slide left and right.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface abutting on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting a decorative body, a performance unit, etc. are formed at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has a band-plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side of the opening 3010a and both left and right sides. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and shown with the door frame being transparent. The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 while being separated from each other in the left and right directions.

The back front left decoration 3030 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3031 and a decoration seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decoration seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The front left decoration 3030 is opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front right decoration 3040 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped base 3041 and a decoration seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decoration sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). This back front right decoration 3040 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extend in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side, is located outside the game area 5a in a front view when assembled on the game board 5. (See FIG. 111, FIG. 135, etc.). Further, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are flat plate-shaped so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. Has been extended to.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decoration 3030 is halved from the bottom of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. Has been extended to the position. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 in the front view. Further, in other words, the front left front decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, when assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 (hatched portion in FIG. 135), and the back rear left from the player side. The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made invisible. Further, in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Since it extends to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided on the rear side of the front left decoration 3030 can be made invisible to the player, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. can do.

Further, in the back front left decorative body 3030, it is extended so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 Although a part (upper half) can be seen from the front, the upper half of the rear left/right lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3 by assembling the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decoration 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decoration 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the outside of the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the front component upper left corner of the front component member 1000, the function display unit 1400 is not attached. Instead of 1400, the back-front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back-rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 (functional part) and the like provided in the rear.

On the other hand, in the back front right decoration 3040, when viewed from the front, it extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600, and a transparent front Even through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654 is invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, by making functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 invisible to the player, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. Therefore, it is possible to exhibit the same function and effect as the front left decorative body 3030.

As described above, according to the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of functional components such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided in the rear is covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts hard to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front of the functional component provided on the rear side can be covered by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible to the player. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, by the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a, and to give the player a sense of openness and the actual game area 5a. Although the size does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a in the decoration seal 3032 of the back front left decoration 3030 and the decoration seal 3042 of the back front right decoration 3040, which are provided with a predetermined decoration, are the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since it can be seen from the front through them, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated with them, and the game area 5a can be made larger than it actually is, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. The board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be used.

Further, as described above, the front front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can make the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 transparent, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the rear unit. Light from 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (on the side of the player) by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

It should be noted that functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided in the rear are provided from the player side by the portions of the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 which are extended to the outside of the game area 5a. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in a front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, if an attempt is made to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be done may occur, a part of the functional component is placed outside the game area 5a in such a balance that the game area 5a can be set large relative to the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide it.

In addition, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in a front view. As a result, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. 5a can be made to appear larger than it actually is, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136(a) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 136(b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit of the back unit seen from the back. The back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower portion of the front end inside the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is formed substantially transparent.

The back guiding unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. Out port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 2010, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. And a magnetic sensor 3055 which is provided at a rear part of the position and detects an illegal magnetism.

Further, the back guiding unit 3050 is received in the first transfer opening 3061 through which the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 is transferred and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 to which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the inner side of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400. 5th delivery port 3065, the 6th delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the 1st big winning port 2005 of the 1st attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the 2nd big winning port 2006 of the 2nd attacker unit 2600 The seventh transfer opening 3067 to which the game ball B is transferred, the eighth transfer opening 3068 to which the game ball B received from the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is transferred, and the side right middle unit 2700 It is provided with a ninth delivery port 3069 to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, although not shown in detail, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B transferred to the first transfer port 3061 to the right and then discharges it downward, and a second transfer path. The game ball B transferred to the transfer port 3062 and the game ball B transferred to the third transfer port 3063 are merged and then discharged downward, and the fourth transfer port 3064 is transferred. The third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it diagonally to the lower right, and the position where the game ball B transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 is below the sixth transfer port 3066. And a fourth discharge path that discharges diagonally to the lower left after guiding to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge passage.

The game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and transferred to the first delivery opening 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting opening sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. To be done. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second receiving opening 3062, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the inner side and transferred to the third receiving opening 3063. The ball B merges in the second discharge path, and is detected by the general winning opening 2001 and then discharged downward. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the fourth receiving opening 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharging path. ..

It is accepted in the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received in the game ball B and the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. And the game ball B transferred to the sixth transfer port 3066 and the game ball B transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 by being transferred to the second special winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600. It is discharged through the discharge passage.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the eighth transfer opening 3068 is on the upstream side of the portion communicating with the ninth transfer opening 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge passage. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the ninth transfer-out port 3069 merges with the fourth discharge passage after being detected by the second sub-out sensor 3054, It is discharged through the four discharge channels.

The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detecting member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. To detect the game ball B that has been received in the out-port 2010 that is open at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that were not present (the game ball B that has not been granted a privilege, also referred to as “out ball”) belongs to.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and has a cylindrical portion 3081 that extends in the front-rear direction so that the gaming ball B can flow, and a cylindrical portion 3081. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into left and right, a flange portion 3083 that projects in a horizontal direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and a rear end of the tubular portion 3081 that is continuous with the game ball B downward. And a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with an out-port sensor 3053 between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The cylindrical portion 3081 is approximately the same size as the outlet 2010, and the width in the left-right direction is a width in which the two game balls B are sufficiently aligned (a width in which the three game balls B are not aligned), and the lower inner surface is It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3081 and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side projects downward as it goes downward, and projects forward with a length shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided with two out-out sensors 3053 arranged side by side. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing on the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081. The game ball B that has circulated is detected. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided such that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the inner surface of the lower side of the tubular portion 3081. As a result, the circulation direction of the game ball B circulating in the tubular portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out mouth sensor 3053, so that the out mouth sensor 3053 can be detected smoothly and the game ball B can be detected. Can be promptly discharged, and it can be suppressed that the front side of the outlet sensor 3053 stays.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 has the tubular portion 3081 inserted into the out-recessed portion 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

The out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, and the upper front end of the tubular portion 3081 projects further forward than the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 114 ). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted in the tubular portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and projects below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

The out-ball detecting member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component member 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided rearward by the out guiding portion 1003 to be received in the out opening 2010. The gaming ball B is passed through the tubular portion 3081 and detected by either of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the body frame 4 without contacting the board holder 1200.

According to the out ball detection member 3080 of the present embodiment, the partition portion 3082 partitions the space between the two out port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, so that the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is It is possible to guide to the left outlet sensor 3053 side, and it is possible to guide the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the right outlet sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right outlet sensors 3053, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "left hit" or "right hit" depending on the number of gaming balls B detected per hour. Based on the determination, it is possible to promote the driving operation most suitable for the game situation and entertain the intended game.

Further, in the out-ball detecting member 3080, since the projection of the partition portion 3082 to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over, when the many game balls B enter the out-port 2010 per hour, the partition is performed. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the circulation amount of the game ball B of the portion 3082 is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out-port 2010 without delay.

Further, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is projected downward from the discharging portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second special winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 is backflowed by the out-ball detecting member 3080 and the out-out sensor 3053. It can be prevented from being detected, and only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

In this embodiment, the out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000, but the invention is not limited to this. The out-ball detecting member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recessed portion 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recessed portion 1123. In addition to being possible, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. The game ball B (“out ball”) that is not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub-out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub-out mouth sensor 3054. If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B in the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act is being performed on a specific winning opening. It is possible to inform that fraudulent acts are being performed.

Further, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening. The number of “winning balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by detecting the game ball B accepted in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the first large From the number of “safe balls” paid out by receiving the game ball B into the winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the “ball-out rate” in the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although illustration is omitted, on the rear side of the game board 5, there is provided a display section for displaying the “ball payout rate”.

Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“all balls”) driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“all balls”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, the "out ball" 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, and the second sub-out sensor 3054 detect only the "out ball". It is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 by comparing the respective numbers of “” and “all balls”.

[5-9d. Back production unit]
Next, the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137(a) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 137(b) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-rear effect unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the rear-rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rear-stage effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost side (the front surface of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape whose front view is open downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-rear production unit 3100 includes a back-rear movable decoration body 3110 that extends in the left-right direction and a back-rear movable mechanism 3120 that moves the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the up-down direction.

The back-back movable decoration body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and has a transparent flat plate-shaped decoration body 3111 having a relief-shaped decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of first decorations provided on the rear side of the decoration body 3111. The rear decoration board 3114 on which the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and the decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back decoration board 3114 are provided. Each of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is a surface mounting type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 can make the decorative body 3111 (back rear movable decorative body 3110) emit light.

Further, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 vertically extending on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 vertically extending on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from the upper end in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided on the upper end. Have

The back-rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened downward, and is attached to the inside of the back box 3010. The unit base 3121 extends vertically in a columnar shape on the left side of the unit base 3121. And a slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the back-end movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a slide shaft 3122 that extends vertically to the left of the slide shaft 3122 in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 and has a spiral on the outer periphery. Spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

In addition, the rear rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 serving as a rotation shaft. The rear rear drive motor 3126 that is attached, the motor base 3127 that attaches the rear rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123, and a slide guide 3130 that can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be moved up and down, and a lower end side of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by moving up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by the rotation of the link member 3133 and that can abut the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110. Equipped with.

Furthermore, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back-rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-removable decorative body 3110, a back-rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a back-rear detection sensor 3136. The front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front side. Connection between the front right cover 3138 and the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136, which are mounted on the lower front surface of the front left cover 3137, and the production drive board 1720. The rear-rear relay board 3139 that relays the rear-rear, and the rear-rear decoration board 3114 of the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 that is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138 and the production drive board 1720 are connected. And a rear rear right relay board 3140 that relays.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear rear movable decoration 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the shock. The upper and lower ends of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 projects from the vicinity of the lower end to the right and has a detection piece 3130a detected by the back lower back detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is incapable of rotating about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. The slide guide 3130 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 on the upper end surface. Further, the slide guide 3130 is configured such that an upper end surface of a lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can contact the lower surface.

The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved vertically only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a cylindrical protrusion rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. And a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the projection pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The upper end of the spring 3132 is attached to the unit base 3121 and the lower end of the spring 3132 is attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, and urges the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The shape of the link member 3133 in a front view is formed in a triangular shape in which each vertex is chamfered. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a slot-like first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis and a slot-like first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the top apex above the rotation axis. And a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and a flat upper end surface, and also extends in the left-right direction. An abutting surface 3134b that extends and is capable of abutting the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear rear movable ornament 3110, and is inclined so as to move to the left as it goes downward from the right end of the abutting surface 3134b, And a guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 slidably in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back-rendering effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the rear-rear effect unit 3100 is in the retracted position in which the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141(a)), and the slide guide 3130 is in the retracted position. Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear rear movable ornament 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the rear rear movable ornament is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of the 3110 is in contact.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 3132. The protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The urging force of 3132 causes the link member 3133 to act in the clockwise direction about the rotation axis, and the lock member 3134 to urge in the direction of sliding to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if either the slide guide 3130 or the lock member 3134 moves from the position due to some reason (defective), the remaining movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from falling (falling). it can.

Further, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b in which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the back-rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back-rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper-rear effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral drive shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, the counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even when the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the locking projection 3116b of the back rear movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back rear movable decoration 3110 does not move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward, away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear rear movable ornament 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123, and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 causes the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It contacts the upper end surface (see FIG. 141(b)). When the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 and the slide guide 3130 further moves downward, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132.

When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 in which the protruding pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is rotated counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. When the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted into the second slit 3133b is used. The locking member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 141(c)).

When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking projection 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, the lock (downward regulation) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the lower back rear detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the dropped back rear movable decoration body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121 to stop the fall and reach the appearance position (see FIG. 141(c)). In this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 does not contact.

In the rear-rear effect unit 3100, the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in the state of the appearance position where the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 is dropped. In this state, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (decoration body 3111) can be illuminated and decorated. The luminous decoration can entertain the player.

When the rear rear movable decoration 3110 is returned from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the rear rear drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the reverse direction (here, in a clockwise direction in plan view). Direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the urging force of the spring 3132. Then, as the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

Further, when the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing to, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141(d)).

Then, when the movable rear decorative body 3110 is moved upward to near the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking protrusion 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b pushes the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides to the right against the biasing force of the spring 3132 that tries to move to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking projection 3116b is located above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressing by the locking projection 3116b against the guide surface 3134c disappears. The lock member 3134 slides to the right due to the urging force of the spring 3132 to be in the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the lock-back member 3134 prevents the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 from moving downward. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the rear back movable decoration 3110 is detected by the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be returned from the appearance position to the normal state of the retracted position.

According to the rear-rear production unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the appearance position invisible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the lock member 3134 that locks (restricts) the back rear movable decoration body 3110 in the retracted position is released to the left, the lock member 3134 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving it, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when releasing the lock.

[5-9d-1. Movable decorative body behind the back]
Next, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back rear movable decoration together with the back rear decoration substrate. 143(a) is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143(b) is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144(a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the front, and FIG. 144(b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body seen from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decoration body disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back-removable decoration body disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 147 is a front view showing a part of the back-rear movable decoration body in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decoration substrate by broken lines in the front view of FIG. 149(a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-back movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same portion as the decorative body of (a), (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back rear decorative substrate in the same portion as the decorative body of (a).

Further, FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143(a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the rear-back decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear-back movable decorative body. FIG. 153(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back rear decorative substrate in the portion of the first LED, and FIG. 153(b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the light guide radiating plate in the part which is doing, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in an ornamental body and a decorative sheet, and the back rear decorative board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of 1 LED from the front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing a part of the back rear decorative substrate in an enlarged manner and showing it together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155(a) is a front view of the back rear decoration substrate, and FIG. 155(b) is a rear view of the back rear decoration substrate. FIG. 156(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-back movable decorative body, and FIG. 156(b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a different form from that of (a). It is an expanded sectional view, (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of ornamental body which has a metal decorative part of a form different from (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and is provided with a decoration portion 3150 having a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 includes two first decorative portions 3151 respectively provided near the left and right ends and a left-right direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 in a front view. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 that are arranged in a line. Each first decoration part 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Further, although not shown, the second decorative portion 3152 has a concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, a pachinko machine) because each of them imitates a predetermined character and is lined up on the left and right. A predetermined logo is formed according to the world view of the machine 1 (game board 5). In this way, the back rear movable decoration 3110 is decorated with the logo between the two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146, the rear rear movable decoration body 3110 in the rear rear production unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by the relief-shaped relief. A transparent flat plate-like decorative body 3111 having the following, and a translucent portion (area) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and provided with decoration (pattern) that constitutes the rest of the decorative portion 3150. A sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (region), a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decoration sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind. A back rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) and a rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided. A flat plate-shaped ornament base 3115 attached to the ornament 3111 so as to cover it, a left slider 3116 extending vertically to the left of the ornament 3111, and a right slider vertically extending to the right of the ornament 3111. And a slider 3117.

It should be noted that the surface number such as a part number of the front side electronic component such as the plurality of first LEDs and the second LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, the surface indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged, The attribute of the side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). The front side notation portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-side decoration substrate 3114 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a transparent portion is provided behind the transparent flat plate-shaped decoration body 3111 ( Since a sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3112 having a region) and a transparent portion (region), a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113, and a rear rear decoration substrate 3114 are sequentially arranged, the decoration sheet 3112 transmits light. Although there is a region (region) having a property, a predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear-side decorative substrate 3114 has a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and It is visible through the decorative body 3111, and in a state where the first LED and the second LED are turned off, it is a region corresponding to a region (region) having a light-transmitting property and has a predetermined paint color. If it is visible, it is possible to confirm the existence of the color of the predetermined paint, and it is impossible to determine whether the color of the predetermined paint shows characters or symbols or shows the shape. On the other hand, when it is a region corresponding to a transparent part (region) and a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters, symbols, shapes (that is, the surface indicated by the front side notation part) are determined by the predetermined paint color. It is possible to determine the attribute of the side electronic component).

[5-9d-2. Backside movable ornaments]
The ornamental body 3111 has flat front and rear general surfaces. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from a general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b protruding forward and shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b. And a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided in a portion that is the contour of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusions 3111a in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 are formed on the outer circumference of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and the central portion of the stamen and pistil, respectively. .. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in a double (two lines) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111 a and the third decorative protrusion 3111 c of the decorative body 3111 form a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion (first foil stamping area (see FIG. 156(a))) projecting forward of the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It has a metal decorative portion 3111d (in FIG. 147 to FIG. 149, a shaded portion having a light and shade). The decorative body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156(a) and the like, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided on the curved front surface portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Is not provided on the side surface of the. Thereby, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metallic decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, a high-grade feeling can be imparted by the metallic luster of the metallic decorative portion 3111d. At the same time, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized by the curved metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided in a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 in the second decoration portion 3152, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c is made difficult to see from the front.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. It is possible to reflect the light to the back and illuminate the front surface of the decoration sheet 3112 provided on the back, and make the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decoration sheet 3112 more visible.

The metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is attached to a predetermined position of the hot stamping device in a state where the front surface side from which the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like project is directed upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate whose lower surface has elasticity and which is heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. .. Then, the hot plate is lowered downward from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 to a position (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), and The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil-pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156(a)). ..

In the hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, since the portion of the hot sheet that contacts the decorative body 3111 that is the transfer destination of the metal foil of the transfer sheet has elasticity, the transfer destination ( Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be in a good state even in a three-dimensionally shaped portion such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil pressed). As a result, it is possible to easily form the metal decoration portion 3111d without requiring large-scale equipment and to suppress an increase in cost, as compared with the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition.

In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metallic decorative portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by the hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c. The decorative body 3111 can be formed by providing the metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, in a state in which the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is first formed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (first metal foil) of a predetermined color. It is lowered to a position (second foil stamping area FS2) lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first tip ends of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b are first Transfer the metal foil. Then, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from the first metal foil, the hot plate is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The second metal foil is transferred to the position (first foil pressing area FS1) and transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156(b)). As a result, without performing the masking process on the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, the decorative body 3111 including the metal decorative portion 3111d of different colors is formed in the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil pressing), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a metal film is formed on the surface of an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film in a portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled off (laser peeled) by laser light. Alternatively, the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156(c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided not only on the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also on the side surface portion.

The decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear recessed portion 3111e which is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear surface side. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. After this, the recess 3111e makes it possible to equalize the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 and suppress the deformation due to the sink of the resin at the time of injection molding.

The rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear concave portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. Accordingly, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, so that light is not irregularly reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. Through the transparent decorative body 3111, the pattern or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visible.

Further, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided in a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of the later-described first light diffusing portion 3112c and second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the front recessed portion 3111e in the rear recessed portion 3111e, so that the light emitted from the front to the rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is generated by the gap. The light is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e, and the light from the front makes the portion of the rear concave portion 3111e bright. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112, that is, the portions from the front, that is, The first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f projecting rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. This makes it difficult for the mounting boss 3111f to be seen from the front (player side) by the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in a portion in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Back decorative sheet of movable decorative body]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape that is substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet having a pattern on its rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, in a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the rear of the second decorative protrusion 3111b and in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a that is present, and a second contour portion 3112b that is provided between the second ornamental portion 3152 and the first ornamental protrusion 3111a that is double formed in the ornamental body 3111. A first light diffusing portion 3112c provided in a portion corresponding to the first ornamental portion 3151 and inside the first ornamental protrusion 3111a of the ornamental body 3111 (a portion behind the third ornamental protrusion 3111c); The second light provided on the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (the portion on the rear side of the third decorative protrusion 3111c) corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and doubled on the decorative body 3111. And a diffusion portion 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmissive portion 3112e provided at a position behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have

As shown in FIG. 149(b) and the like, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion having a pattern simulating a cherry blossom smaller than that of the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion is The hologram is used to display the light interference fringes. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaque. In the present embodiment, the hologram portion of the first contour portion 3112a has the same gold color as that of the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111. Further, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a that imitates a cherry blossom is white or pink (the pink in the present embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It is colored in accordance with (view). It should be noted that the ink (paint) used for the pattern or the like may be one having a glitter that is glittering in the form of particles.

The first contour portion 3112a is located outside and rearward of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and the metal is Since the decorative portion 3111d has the same color (gold color in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can be made difficult to feel.

The first contour portion 3112a is formed in a light gray or white color on the rear surface side. As a result, the coloring of the pattern or hologram on the front side is improved. Further, the light emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the front can be reflected back to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit light more brightly, the amount of light emitted forward from the light-transmitting portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 can be made to emit brighter light. In addition to the above, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated more uniformly.

Further, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, it is flat except the rear concave portion 3111e on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. It is provided behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into contact with and closely adheres to the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern or hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111 without being diffusely reflected.

The 2nd outline part 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 is formed in the black linear shape of predetermined width, as shown in figure. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind the portion between the doubled first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 in the second decorative portion 3152. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-formed gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to enhance the decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed of a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing section 3112c is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending projections in random directions. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149(b), etc., in one petal of the cherry blossoms that is plowed by the first decorative portion 3151 at the portion of the first light diffusion portion 3112c, from the center of the petal to the peripheral edge. A predetermined color (this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) as it goes. In this case, multiple dots of pink) are applied by printing. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the first light diffusing section 3112c is caused to emit light, the first light diffusing section 3112c causes a pear-like pattern to slightly Since different shades appear, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the luminous decoration of the first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed of a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing section 3112d is provided on the entire inner side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative sections 3152, as shown by the shaded areas in FIGS. 147 to 149. Has been. The second light diffusing section 3112d has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of minute irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing unit 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a semitransparent milky white. From this, when the first LED 3114a of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the second light diffusing portion 3112d is caused to emit light, the second light diffusing portion 3112d has a predetermined dot-shaped pattern. It is possible to make the second decoration portion 3152 formed of the characters “E” emit light with a uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111, and the rear surface of the relevant portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a rear recess 3111e that is recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d due to the existence of the rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state of being. Due to the gap, the light irradiated from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e. The diffusion unit 3112c and the second light diffusion unit 3112d become bright. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 are not made to emit light, the portions of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112, that is, the portions from the front, that is, The first decoration portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 that form the logo become brighter, and are easily visible from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 has a predetermined pattern formed by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The rest of the portion 3150 excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111 is configured. In the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment, the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent sheet serving as the base. There is. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). The first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d may be lens films or prism films.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since the transmissive portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, light is emitted from the first LED 3114a of the rear back decorative substrate 3114 and is emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and applied to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface side and the side surface side remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a is passed from the rear through the transparent portion 3112e. The light radiated to leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Thus, the light transmitted through the transmissive portion 3112e allows the player to see a light-emitting decoration such that the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) is backlit. In addition, the first contour projection 3112a located outside the first decoration projection 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light that has been transmitted through the transmissive portion 3112e and emitted from the side surface of the first decoration projection 3111a to the outside. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. It is possible to make the decoration of the rear rear movable decoration 3110 look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 is made to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is not framed, and therefore the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. By displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player an effect with a sense of unity. This makes it possible to give the player a visual impact and draw attention to the player, enjoy a large decoration, and prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In the above embodiment, the decorative sheet 3112 has the transparent body 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) provided with the transparent transparent portion 3112e behind the decorative body 3111. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may be provided also at a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. Accordingly, when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from diagonally front, the rear can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to avoid the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 from being deteriorated. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the rear part of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the first decoration protrusion 3112a in the first contour portion 3112a passes through the transparent side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the decoration body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the decorative portion 3150 can be made to look good.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate with movable decoration behind the back]
As shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 146, etc., the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3113a extending left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body. The plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the back-rear decoration board 3114 are inserted, and the body portion 3113a that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the back-rear decoration board 3114 A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. ..

The light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

The main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b projects rearward about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end protruding rearward from the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 in a state of being assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110.

The first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner peripheral shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the low transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151, a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the first light diffusion portion 3112c of the decoration sheet 3112 where the shade of pink by the dots is dark. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is closer to the center side than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals of the cherry blossoms. In addition, the center of the long side of the rectangular inner circumference is provided so as to be located on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Has been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided in the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decoration portion 3152. Further, when the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the respective first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 149(c) and 153(c). It is formed in the open state. By connecting the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to prevent a portion of the main body portion 3113a that is thinner than its thickness from being formed, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the body portion 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, Part of the light is reflected straight by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. It will be radiated|emitted inside 3113c. Then, when the light radiated inward from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the light is emitted from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body part 3113a, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body part 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing part 3113c, it is emitted to the inside of the first LED housing part 3113c. The light passing through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is reflected because part of the light is reflected at the inner peripheral surface portion and the inner peripheral surface portion of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side. The amount of light of will be greatly reduced compared to before passing.

Therefore, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided inside the body portion 3113a in the direction along the surface of the body portion 3113a. Since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light passing through the first LED housing portion 3113c may be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In addition, at the portion where the first LED 3114a is stored, light does not pass to the side opposite to the first LED storage portion 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at the optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decoration portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent light emission decoration by being guided to another second decoration portion 3152, and only the desired second decoration portion 3152 in the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 can be surely light-emitting decorated. ..

The operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 153(c), a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 of “I”, “RO”, “HA”, and “☆” are provided. In order to perform light emission decoration, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is provided on the outer circumference of each second decorative portion 3152, and the light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 in each first LED accommodating portion 3113c. As described above, the first LED 3114a is provided. In this embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided between “I” and “RO” and between “RO” and “HA” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is one hole. As a result, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating the "☆" arranged below the "I" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, when the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is illuminated, the "i" provided above the "☆" may be illuminated, but it is provided at the upper left of the "☆". The first LED housing portion 3113c housing the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating a part of the "i" is provided with the extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the upper part of "☆". ing. By this extending portion 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for light emitting decoration of "☆" being guided to the "i" side. As a result, even if "☆" is illuminated, "I" is not illuminated. In addition, the extension portion 3113j can reduce (block) that the light for decorating the "i" to emit light is guided to the "☆" side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be surely light-emitted and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference. The plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d are provided behind the five circular portions that imitate the stamens provided around the center of the first ornament portion 3151 that imitates the cherry blossoms. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom, behind a circular portion that imitates a stamen located on the center line of the petal. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the body portion 3113a. Thereby, when the light guided inside the body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the body portion 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, A part of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d so as to be fan-shaped diffused toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals in the first decoration portion 3151 simulating a cherry blossom, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a, so that FIG. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body portion 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a side by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the reflection thereof. The light can make the petals lighter and brighter.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a quadrangular pyramid, and the reflecting portions 3113e are arranged in a row so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e excludes a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, a portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. Within the plate thickness of the main body part 3113a, the plurality of reflecting parts 3113e can mainly reflect the light emitted in the direction along the plate surface to the front side and emit the light from the front surface of the main body part 3113a to the front side. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed such that the rear side is difficult to be visually recognized when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflection portions 3113e.

In addition, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and it is possible to easily cope with the design change and the cost. Can be suppressed.

The leg portion 3113f projects rearward from the rear end side of the portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f is provided such that the surface on the first LED housing portion 3113c side is flush with the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted into the main body portion 3113a. You can Also, the leg portion 3113f has a rear surface abutting the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 when assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front-rear decoration substrate 3114. Can be formed.

The auxiliary reflection portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along the side of the rear end of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f to the front.

The right slider front portion 3113h cooperates with a later-described right slider rear portion 3115d of the ornament base 3115 to configure a right slider 3117.

Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the rear rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the flange portion 3113b. It is possible to make the surface difficult to see and prevent the appearance from being deteriorated. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the flange portion 3113b projecting rearward from the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114, the light-reflective radiating plate 3113 is removed from the metal-rear decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. The creepage distance EL to the 3114 (copper foil 3114d or electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent that.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes that penetrate the main body portion 3113a. Therefore, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the heat effect on the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are used as through holes, the front sides of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are closed by the decorative sheet 3112 or the decorative body 3111. Even if the first LED housing 3113c and the second LED housing 3113d are not penetrated, the first LED housing 3113c and the second LED housing 3113c are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape). The volume (heat capacity) of the 3113d can be increased. As a result, a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a or second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and the thermal effect on the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 and the like can be suppressed. Further, in the first LED housing portion 3113c that is close to and connected to each other and the first LED housing portion 3113c that has the extension portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large, For the same reason as above, more heat from the first LED 3114a can be dissipated, or a rapid temperature rise can be further alleviated.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear side. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a approaches the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114. This allows heat to escape from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration board 3114 through the gap, and suppresses the temperature rise in the back-rear decoration board 3114 to influence the heat. Can be reduced. The gap between the body portion 3113a and the substrate body 3114c of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is defined as "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "the front surface of the substrate body 3114c. It is desirable to be within the range of "distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, there is a possibility that heat cannot be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Also, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because it may not be possible to decorate them.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions on the rear back decoration substrate 3114, and the front surface is reflected by the reflecting portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted to the front even in a portion of the main body 3113a where the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 is not provided. In other words, even if the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 is smaller than the size of the main body part 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body part 3113a. Therefore, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, so that the distance between the outer circumference of the main body portion 3113a and the outer circumference of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made longer, and the decoration body 3111 can be made longer. The creepage distance EL from the front metal decoration portion 3111d can be made longer to facilitate the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Back decorative board of movable back decoration]
On the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of surface mounting type side-view type first LEDs 3114a, a plurality of surface mounting type top-view type second LEDs 3114b, and a surface mounting type Connector 3114g (in FIG. 155(a), one surface mount type connector 3114g is arranged on the right side of the front surface (front surface) of the back rear decorative substrate 3114). Each of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector 3114g has a white housing (natural color). It is also said that it is made of a resin that is recognized as the same color as white (natural color). An electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155(b)) such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) and a resistor is mounted on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Further, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 has a flat plate-shaped substrate body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d having a predetermined circuit pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) and the back surface (rear surface) of the flat-plate substrate main body 3114c (see FIG. 154 etc.) respectively.

In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear back decoration substrate 3114, the first LED 3114a (surface mounting type), the second LED 3114b (surface mounting type), and the connector 3114g (surface mounting) are the front surface (front surface) of the substrate body 3114c. Type) A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to be soldered (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white resist"). In some cases, a white resist layer is formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, pads, through holes, lands, etc. to be soldered are formed on the back surface (rear surface) of the substrate body 3114c, on which the electronic component 3114e (surface mounting type) is mounted. A white resist layer is formed of the solid white resist in the entire area except the above. Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, the front-side electronic components are provided in the vicinity of the front-side electronic components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g. Of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component, the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction of the front-side electronic component (mounting) Direction), and may include the model of the front side electronic component.) is printed on the white resist that is solid-painted with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. It is printed by. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged are shown near the back-side electronic component such as the electronic component 3114e. The attributes of the backside electronic component such as the area (in addition, the shape of the backside electronic component, the size of the backside electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the backside electronic component, and the model of the backside electronic component may be included. .) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a light yellow paint that is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a glittering light emission effect by the illumination by the light emitting portions such as the LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are as described above. In addition, it is a full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission, and the light emission mode changes variously by being turned on (light emission) or being turned off. Therefore, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, as described above, the pad (the front surface) of the board body 3114c to which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered, A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except for through holes, lands, etc. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid-painted white resist"). A layer is formed, and further, the surface side notation portion that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed on this solid white resist by silk-printing with a yellow paint, thereby providing a multicolor emission. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation part inconspicuous with the white resist when the possible full-color LED is turned off, further, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on (when emitting light). , A solid white resist having a high reflectance and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance, are combined to form the surface of the back and rear decorative substrate 3114 (front surface). It is possible to maintain a high reflectance.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap that is slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a size that is formed to be substantially constant. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to have a constant size. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed in a size to be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

In the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is located on the center line of each of the five petals that imitate a cherry blossom. It is provided so that light is emitted toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decoration portion 3111d). As a result, the first LED 3114a in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151 can light-emit each one of the five petals simulating a cherry blossom.

In addition, in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative protrusions that are doubled in the decorative body 3111 are provided in each of the second decorative portions 3152 that are arranged in the left and right. The light is provided near the rear of 3111a toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. Accordingly, the first LEDs 3114a in the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 can cause the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged in the left and right to emit light one by one.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is a circular portion simulating a stamen located on the center line of the five petals in the central portion simulating a cherry blossom in the first decoration portion 3151. It is provided at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal of the first ornamental portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom. Thus, the second LED 3114b can cause the five portions of the first decoration portion 3151 that imitate the stamens in the central portion to emit light.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can emit light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is caused to emit light, a portion simulating a stamen in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is made to be closer than other portions. Can also emit light with high brightness, which can attract the player's attention. Therefore, in the light-emission decoration of the decoration portion 3150, a portion where the first LED 3114a emits light in a plane shape and a portion where the second LED 3114b emits light in a dot shape can be provided. A variety of light emission effects can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

The substrate body 3114c is a rigid substrate having a thickness slightly smaller than that of the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front surface and rear surface of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (hatched portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is inwardly separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL=1 mm in the present embodiment). ing. By this predetermined distance SL, a creeping distance EL and a space distance from a conductive member (for example, a metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) outside the back decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are acquired to prevent discharge of static electricity or the like. The insulating property against short circuit can be enhanced, and the damage to the rear back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided up to a portion within a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d. Is as wide as possible. Thereby, by transmitting a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, it is possible to dissipate the heat from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. , And the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced in cooling effect to prevent damage due to heat.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has a predetermined area on the light emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side so that light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the board body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. The light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is provided (region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153(a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f becomes lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted, and therefore, compared with the case where the copper foil 3114d is provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection assisting region 3114f approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c so that the light emitted to the substrate body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. You can

Further, as shown in FIG. 153(a) and the like, after the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is fixed. Since they are in contact with each other, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (the amount of light) emitted forward from the light guide emission plate 3113 can be increased to allow the back and rear movable ornament 3110 (the ornament 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be made to be brighter and lighter.

In addition, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 comes into contact with the inside of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 153(a) and the like). As a result, even if the white coating film (white resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg portions 3113f is worn or rolled up, the front surface of the substrate body 3114c is only exposed and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the insulation of the copper foil 3114d is lowered due to the exposure, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 of the present embodiment is assembled into a back-and-back movable decorative body 3110, so that the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, which will be described later, and the flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 will be described. Since 3113b and the outer circumference are doubly surrounded, it is difficult to see the outer circumference from the outside, and deterioration of appearance is prevented. Further, in the state where the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is assembled to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. Further, the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. Accordingly, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In the present embodiment, this creepage distance EL is set to a distance that can accommodate a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more, or 10 kV.

Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 provides a member (in the present embodiment, provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110). The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. This can prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 and the like provided in the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 can be illuminated and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of light emission, and it is possible to reliably cause the desired movable light emitting element 3110 to perform a desired light emission effect. Further, since the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110.

In addition, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are accommodated from the rear side with respect to the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 approaches the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Further, the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 has an electronic component 3114e such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), the resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114, the black component is formed from the front. The electronic component 3114e can be made invisible, and the appearance of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be improved. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 which cannot be seen from the front, it is not necessary to apply a paint such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, It is possible to reduce the cost of the rear back decoration substrate 3114.

[5-9d-6. Decorative base of movable decorative body behind the back]
The ornament base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates through the coating plate portion 3115a, a flat plate-shaped cover plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, a flange portion 3115b that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate portion 3115a. A plurality of opening portions 3115c, and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the covering plate portion 3115a in front view.

The cover plate portion 3115a has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the outer peripheral shape and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed into a size. That is, the covering plate portion 3115a (the ornament base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the back side of the back decoration board 3114 is covered by the covering plate portion 3115a, it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the back decoration board 3114 from the rear and protect the back decoration board 3114. Therefore, it is possible to prevent breakage of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and the front end is located in front of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114. Is protruding so that it is located. This flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114, and makes the outer peripheral surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 difficult to see from the outside to improve the appearance. Further, the flange portion 3115b is in a state of being inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 when assembled to the back and rear movable decoration body 3110, The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 can be meandered around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the rear back decoration substrate 3114 and damaging the rear rear decoration substrate 3114.

Each of the plurality of openings 3115c has a slit-shaped portion that is long in the left and right and a portion that is open larger than the slit-shaped portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration board 3114 can be released to the outside of the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the heat effect on the rear-rear decoration board 3114 can be affected. Can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d cooperates with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to configure the right slider 3117.

Further, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to abut on a portion of the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the rear-rear decoration substrate 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. .. Accordingly, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through the gap between the rear surface of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of the back-back movable decoration]
Subsequently, main operation effects of the back-back movable decoration body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back-back movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment has the decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body 3113. Assembling is performed by attaching the mounting boss 3111f of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative body base 3115 with the back rear decorative substrate 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 and the base 3115 (see FIG. 143 and the like). As a result, the thickness of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

The back rear movable decoration body 3110 has a transparent plate-shaped decoration body 3111, a first decoration protrusion 3111a, a second decoration protrusion 3111b, and a third decoration protrusion 3111c protruding forward, and Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a provided with the hologram on which the picture pattern and the interference fringes of light are displayed, the decorative portion 3150 of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 is different from the decorative portion 3150. As a result, the three-dimensional effect can be imparted by the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b, and the third decoration protrusion 3111c, and the lens effect by the second decoration protrusion 3111b and the third decoration protrusion 3111c. With the hologram, a sense of depth can be added. As a result, even if the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel the thinness, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficient. It can be shown to entertain the player.

In addition, as described above, the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b, the third decoration protrusion 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can give a stereoscopic effect and a sense of depth. The back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner in the front-rear direction. As a result, the space required for installing the back-rear movable decoration 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decoration 3110 can be increased, and a more effective part inside the game board 5 can be provided. It is possible to provide the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back and facilitate the implementation of the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. Further, since the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 can be thinned, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for arranging another decoration body. Therefore, by providing another decoration body, It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and a pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy a variety of productions, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players and can be differentiated. can do.

The back-back movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of a metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made conspicuous by the metallic luster of the metallic decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give the metal decoration portion 3111d a stereoscopic effect and a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 moves from the retracted position, which is invisible to the player, to the visible position, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, which gives the player a premium feeling. Since it is possible to give the player, it is possible to strongly inspire the player to think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 flat and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. Also, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the movable rear decorative body 3110 can be made large. In addition, since the back-back movable decoration body 3110 has the decoration sheet 3112 having substantially the same size as that of the decoration body 3111, the decoration of the back-back movable decoration body 3110 is not framed. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, by displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-back movable decoration body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, a game with a sense of unity can be played. It is possible to show the game to the player and give the player a visual impact, thereby making it possible to entertain a large decoration and prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, since the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at a position behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the second LED 3114a are provided. The two contour portions 3112b can make the first LED 3114a less visible from the front, and can suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration portion 3150 and sufficiently exert the decoration effect.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decoration 3110 is provided with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer circumference of each of the first decoration 3151 and the plurality of second decorations 3152, the first decoration 3151 is provided. Alternatively, the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually light-embellished. Accordingly, it is possible to sequentially light-emit a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right, or to light-emit only the specific first decorative portion 3151 or the second decorative portion 3152. By appropriately decorating the first decoration portion 3151 and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 with light emission, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

In addition, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 is lit by the first LED 3114a of the side-view type within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and then irradiates light in the direction along the surface thereof. Since the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the above so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are light-emitted and decorated, the light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide emission plate 3113. You can increase the distance to. Accordingly, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, even if the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 has a small thickness in the front-rear direction, the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly light-emitted and the decoration sheet 3112 can be made entertaining to the player by the light-emission decoration having a good appearance. Further, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a allow the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated, the thickness of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further increased. The pachinko machine 1 which can be made thin and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is configured to use the first LED 3114a as the side-view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b is the top-view type, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (the decoration portion 3150). In the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of (1), it is possible to add a portion that emits light in a dot shape with high brightness by the second LED 3114b to a portion that is light-emitting decorated in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, so that it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and it is possible to entertain the player more and to play the game. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which a side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light is received on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The part 3113i is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident on the inside of the main body part 3113a. Thus, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at a position close to a desired portion that is desired to be illuminated and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be brightly illuminated and decorated, and a more dramatic effect can be obtained. It is possible to entertain high-luminous decorations to the player.

Further, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing 3113c in which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back rear decoration substrate 3114 are inserted into the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the rear side. Since the housing portion 3113d is included, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be changed to the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d. Can be made as close as possible to, and the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner in the front-rear direction.

In addition, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 so that the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 are separated from each other. Since a gap is formed in the back side, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat. The gap between the body portion 3113a of the light guide/radiation plate 3113 and the substrate body 3114c of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is defined as "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "board". The distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a" is desirable. This is because if the gap is smaller than this, there is a possibility that heat cannot be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Also, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because it may not be possible to decorate them.

In addition, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 by the leg portions 3113f, and a plurality of openings are formed in the decoration base 3115. Since it has the portion 3115c, by raising and lowering the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, Also, the heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released to suppress the temperature rise of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114.

It should be noted that a temperature sensor is provided on the back rear movable decoration body 3110 to move the back rear movable decoration body 3110 up and down when the back rear movable decoration body 3110 (back rear decoration substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature. The frequency (probability) at which is executed may be increased. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down to ventilate the surface of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114, and cools the back-and-back decorative substrate 3114 to suppress the occurrence of defects due to heat.

Further, the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decoration body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. Accordingly, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3114, and the back rear decoration substrate It is possible to prevent the 3114 from being damaged.

Further, since the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 is configured such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided in the back-and-back decoration substrate 3114 at a position away from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL inside. The predetermined distance SL also makes it possible to increase the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, improve the insulating property against discharge of static electricity and the like, and prevent damage to the back and rear decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like.

In addition, in the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same operational effect as described above can be achieved. Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d is smaller than that when the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge is generated in the rear back decoration substrate 3114, the influence thereof can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decoration 3110 is moved up and down (movable) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by the driving of the back rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction is generated in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the body is moved up and down, and static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the back rear movable decoration body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 forming the surface of the movable back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 are formed of synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the surface of the movable decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 is reduced. Static electricity accumulated in the whole is difficult to be discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decoration portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration body 3111 has high conductivity, static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back-and-back movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment, static electricity is easily accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Since the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 is not damaged by electrostatic discharge, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down, and the back-rear movable decoration body It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which both the light emitting effect in which the 3110 is light-emitted and decorated is entertained.

In addition, when the area of the metal decoration part 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration part 3111d to GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another Embodiment of Back-Movable Decorative Body]
Next, mainly with reference to FIG. 157, regarding the back-rear movable decoration body 3160, the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, the back-rear movable decoration body 3180, and the like of the embodiment different from the above-mentioned back-rear movable decoration body 3110. The details will be described. FIG. 157(a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a rear-rear movable ornament different from the rear-rear movable ornament of FIG. 142, and FIG. 157(b) is a rear-rear movable ornament of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decorative body in a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back back movable decoration body of 4th embodiment in a cross section.

As shown schematically in FIG. 157(a), the back and rear movable decoration body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided on the front side with a decoration body 3161 and on the rear side of the decoration body 3161. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 having a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiating plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 for radiating light in a direction along the front surface forward, and a light guide radiating plate. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3164 having a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating the interior of 3163 with light in a direction along the front surface is mounted on the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. And a decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat or may be provided with relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration part 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3161a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The decoration sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (design) is printed. In this decorative sheet 3162, a low transparency portion of the decoration is located in a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiating plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED housing portion 3163a into which the LED 3164a of the rear-back decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of rear surface provided. And a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference thereof is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only in a predetermined portion. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is provided so as to reflect light from the LED housing portion 3163a, which is determined, to the front side, and is arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. .. That is, the plurality of reflectors 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. Note that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It is good, or it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed in the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The rear back decoration substrate 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a, which are inserted from the rear in the LED housing portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown in the drawings, the back-rear decoration substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface at a position inside the outer periphery of the back-rear decoration board 3164 by a predetermined distance SL. Further, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both sides) of the back rear decorative substrate 3164.

In the assembled state, the back-back movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment has the decorative sheet 3162 abutting on the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161 and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 on the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. And the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3160 is thin in the front-rear direction. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164. As a result, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back-and-back decoration substrate 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, which makes them difficult to see from the outside. And it looks good.

Since the rear back movable decoration 3160 has a flange 3161b extending rearward from the main body 3161a of the decoration 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3164, a metal decorative portion on the front of the main body 3161a. The creepage distance EL from the 3161c to the back rear decorative substrate 3164 (the copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3161c flows to the back rear decorative substrate 3164 to allow the back rear decoration to be performed. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operational effect as the above-mentioned back-and-back movable decoration body 3110 can be obtained. In addition, in the rear back movable decoration 3160, a decoration base that covers the rear side of the rear rear decoration substrate 3164 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(b), has an outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame A light-transmissive flat plate-shaped inner decoration body 3172 that closes the inside), and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided behind the inner decoration body 3172 and that radiates light in a direction along the entire surface inside thereof to the front. A rear-rear decoration substrate 3174 having a plurality of LEDs 3174a for irradiating the interior of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in a direction along the front surface mounted on the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-back movable decorative body 3170 includes a frame-shaped main body portion 3171a extending in the front-rear direction, a support portion 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a, and a main body portion 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decorative body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration portion 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3171a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

Although not shown, the inner decorative body 3172 is provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner decoration body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiating plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back rear decoration substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole that penetrates the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference thereof is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape around the determined LED housing portion 3173a, and is provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflecting portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the respective LED housing portions 3173a, which are individually determined, to the front. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect the light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. It is good, or it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The back rear decorative substrate 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a, which are inserted from the rear in the LED housing portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173, mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the rear back decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface at a position inside the rear rear decorative substrate 3174 by a predetermined distance SL. Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3174 has a white coating film formed of a white resist on the front surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-back movable decoration body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decoration body 3172 is fitted into the frame of the outer decoration body 3171 from the front side, and the front surface of the outer decoration body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. And the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decorative body 3172 are in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back-rear movable decoration body 3170, the light guide radiation plate 3173 and the back-rear decoration board 3174 are inserted from the rear in the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 of the light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. Around the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the back-and-back movable decorative body 3170 is thin in the front-rear direction. In the back-back movable decoration 3170, a gap having the thickness of the supporting portion 3171b is formed between the inner decoration 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3174. In this back-and-back movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the inner decoration body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back-and-back decoration board 3174 are covered by the main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171, and their outer peripheral surfaces are externally exposed. To make it hard to see and to make it look good.

The back-and-back movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back-and-back decorative substrate 3174 by the main body portion 3171a extending rearward of the outer decorative body 3171. The creepage distance EL to (the copper foil of) the back rear decoration substrate 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the back rear decoration substrate 3174, and the back rear decoration substrate 3174 is obtained. Can be prevented from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3170 of the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. Further, in the back-rear movable decoration 3170, a decoration base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decoration substrate 3174 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(c), has an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame A rear decoration substrate 3183 having a translucent inner decoration body 3182 for closing the inside) and a plurality of LEDs 3183a provided behind the inner decoration body 3182 and capable of irradiating light to the front are mounted on the front surface. And are equipped with.

The outer decorative body 3181 of the back rear movable decorative body 3180 includes a flat plate frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. And a metal decoration portion 3181c which covers. The metal decoration portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. The metal decoration portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The inner decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decoration 3182 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body portion 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3181b, and rearward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 3182a. And a flange portion 3182b extending to the. Although not shown, the main body 3182a is provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

The back rear decorative substrate 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed in a size such that a gap having a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. A plurality of top view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3183. Although not shown in the figure, the rear back decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front surface and the rear surface thereof at a portion inside the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative substrate 3183 by a predetermined distance SL. Further, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both sides) of the back rear decorative substrate 3183.

In the assembled state of the back rear movable decoration body 3180 of this embodiment, the inner decoration body 3182 and the back rear decoration substrate 3183 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3181. In the back-back movable decoration body 3180, the front surface near the outer circumference of the inner decoration body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is in contact with the outer decoration body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181. Therefore, the flange portions 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 prevent the outer peripheries of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back rear decorative substrate 3183 from being seen from the outside.

In this rear-back movable decorative body 3180, the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is provided inside the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c, and the inner decorative body 3182 is Since the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body portion 3182a is separated from the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182, the metal decoration portion 3181c (the copper of the back rear decoration substrate 3183) The creepage distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c is prevented from flowing to the rear back decoration substrate 3183 and damaging the rear back decoration substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the back-and-back movable decoration body 3180 of the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the back-and-back movable decoration body 3110. Note that a metal decoration portion may be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. Further, in the back-and-back movable decoration body 3180, a decoration body base that covers the rear side of the back-and-back decoration substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back lower left production unit and back lower right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. FIG. 158(a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 158(b) is the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit behind. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left production unit and the lower right production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 160 is the rear lower left production unit and the lower right production unit as seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing a movable configuration of the lower back left effect unit and the lower lower right effect unit from the front.

The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 of the rear unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the rear rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 when assembled on the game board 5. It is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the back lower left effect unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left production unit 3200 includes a transparent lower back left ornamental body 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower left left ornamental body provided behind the lower left rear ornamental structure 3201. 3202 and a lower back left decorative substrate provided behind the lower back left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). 3203 and the back lower left decoration substrate 3203, the back lower left rotating decoration 3201 is rotatably attached, and the back lower left decoration 3202 is attached. And a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the.

The lower back left production unit 3200 is mounted on the front lower surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and on the lower left drive motor 3205 rotation shaft. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206, the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 that is meshed with the drive gear 3206 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and the first transmission gear 3207 are meshed. A second transmission gear 3208 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3208. The third transmission gear 3209 has a spur gear shape and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decoration 3202.

The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left decorative member 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower left decorative member 3202, the lower left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. .. The lower back left decoration 3202 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower left rotation decoration 3201 on top of each other and rotating so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

The lower back left decoration 3201 and the lower left back decoration 3202 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the lower back left decoration 3201 and the lower left back decoration 3202 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges linearly extending in a short random direction. In one petal of the cherry blossoms which is struck by the ornament 3201 and the lower left left ornament 3202, the pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the bottom left rotation Through the decoration 3201 and the lower back left decoration 3202 (even at the peripheral portion of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203 arranged behind the lower left decoration 3202 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and capable of emitting multiple colors. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that projects forward and is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a of the lower back left decoration substrate 3203. When the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the driving gear 3206 is rotated by the lower back left drive motor 3205, the lower back left production unit 3200 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back lower left production unit 3200 causes the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 to emit light, thereby causing the lower lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower lower left decorative body 3202 to operate. Can be decorated with luminous.

It should be noted that the front side electronic components such as a part number of the front side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, a region indicating a position where the front side electronic components are arranged, and the like. The front side notation indicating the attributes (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). Is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and a transparent lower back left decorative body 3201 is provided behind the transparent lower back left decorative body 3201. Since 3202 and the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is the lower back decorative member 3202. Then, when the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized through the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters and symbols are displayed according to the predetermined paint color. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector is The housing is made of white (also known as natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural)) resin.

Next, the lower back right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effect unit 3250 includes a transparent lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower back right decoration body provided behind the lower back right rotating decoration body 3251. 3252 and a lower back right decorative board provided behind the lower right decorative body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). 3253 and the back lower right decoration substrate 3253 are provided, the back lower right rotation decoration 3251 is rotatably attached, and the back lower right decoration 3252 is attached. And a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the.

The lower back right effect unit 3250 is attached to the front lower surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotary shaft thereof projects rearward, and the lower right drive motor 3255 of the rear lower right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256 that meshes with the drive gear 3256 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 meshes with the first transmission gear 3257. The second transmission gear 3258 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and the second transmission gear 3258 mesh with and are attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower back right rotation decorative body 3251. A third transmission gear 3259 in the form of a spur gear and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the back lower right decorative body 3252 are provided.

The lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower lower right decorative board 3253, and the unit base 3254. .. The lower back right decoration 3252 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right rotation decoration 3251, and is rotated so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that allows it.

The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 and the back lower right decorative body 3252 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in random directions. In the petals of one of the cherry blossoms that are struck by the ornamental body 3251 and the lower right decorative body 3252, the pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along with the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the bottom right rotation Through the decoration 3251 and the lower back right decoration 3252 (even at the peripheral part of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 arranged behind the lower right decoration 3252 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and capable of emitting multiple colors. The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253. When the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a, the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back lower right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment moves back through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back lower right effect unit 3250 can cause the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 to emit light by making a plurality of LEDs of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 emit light.

It should be noted that the front side electronic component such as a part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 and a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is arranged The front side notation indicating the attributes (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). Is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and a transparent lower back right decorative body 3251 is provided behind the transparent lower back right decorative body 3251. Since 3252 and the lower back right decorative board 3253 are arranged in order, a predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative board 3253 by silk printing is the lower back right decorative body 3252. Then, when the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized through the lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 and a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters and symbols are displayed according to the color of the predetermined paint. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white), and the connector is The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a connector (surface mount type), a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type), and a lower back are provided on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower right decorative board 3253. A white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the entire area except for the pad, through hole, land, etc. to which the right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) is soldered (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid white"). Sometimes referred to as "resist"), a white resist layer is formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 and the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, pads and throughs to which the back lower left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and the back lower right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for holes and lands. Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 and the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, the front surface side is provided in the vicinity of the front electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs and connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the electronic component, a region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction of the front-side electronic component (Mounting direction), the surface side notation part (which may include the model of the front side electronic component is included) is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous to white, and is applied on a solid white resist. It is printed by silk printing. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 and the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, near the back side electronic components such as the back lower left detection sensor 3203a and the back lower right detection sensor 3253a, Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the part number of the back side electronic component, the area indicating the position where the back side electronic component is arranged (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic component The backside notation that indicates the mounting orientation (mounting direction), and the backside electronic component model may be included.) is a white resist that is a solid color with a light yellow paint that is inconspicuous with white. It is printed by silk printing on the top.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 gives a glittering light-emission by the electric decoration of the light-emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Therefore, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, as described above, the entire area excluding the plurality of LEDs, the pads to which the connectors are soldered, the through holes, the lands, and the like. In, the white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the painted white resist, the front surface notation that enables the identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, so that white when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side inscription part inconspicuous with respect to the resist of No. 1, in addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light), it is painted solid with high reflectance. The surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253 is combined by the combination of the white resist and the front surface notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white. It is possible to maintain a high reflectance.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

[5-9f. Inside production unit]
Next, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view of the lower back middle effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 162(b) is a perspective view of the lower back middle effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle raising/lowering mechanism of the back lower middle producing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is a rear lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled from the back. It is the seen disassembled perspective view. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing how the inside-under-the-back decoration unit is raised and lowered by the inside-under-the-back-elevating mechanism in the inside-under-the-back production unit. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle rotating decorative unit in the back lower middle effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor by a table|surface. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decoration unit in the lower back middle effect unit.

The lower back medium effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250. The under-rear middle production unit 3300 includes a back-rear middle decoration unit 3320 having a transparent back-rear middle rotation decorative body 3310 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-rear middle decoration unit 3320 that moves up and down. And an elevating mechanism 3350.

The shape of the inside-under-the-back decoration 3310 of the inside-under-the-back production unit 3300 is formed into a regular hexagon when viewed from the front. This back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape of "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and circles at an angle of 60 degrees clockwise around the center. It is arranged on the circumference. The back inner middle rotating decoration body 3310 has a transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 in a back inner middle decoration unit 3320 to be described later, a back inner middle decorative board 3322, and a front end side of the board fixing member 3323, Has a concave portion 3311 capable of accommodating therein.

The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is transparently formed, and the outer peripheral portion of each of the six numeral decorations protrudes forward, and further, a rib portion that connects the six numeral decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state. It is formed so as to project forward. A metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed on the protruding outer peripheral portion and the rib portion. In other words, the metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In the present embodiment, the outer peripheral portion where the metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed and the rib portion are integrally molded with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, but the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion are May be molded separately from the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the molded outer peripheral portion and rib portion and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be assembled. In this case, the metal decoration portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion, respectively.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3310a can give a high-class feeling, and can make the under-center rotating decorative body 3310 stand out, so that the presence of the under-center rotating decorative body 3310 can be further emphasized. It has become. The metal decoration portion 3310a is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has the metal decoration portion 3310a formed only on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion projecting to the front surface, and the back middle rotating decoration body 3310 has no metal decoration portion 3310a formed on the side surface. Absent. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3310a of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the back lower middle rotating decorative substrate 3322 is increased by at least the length of the side surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3310a from flowing to the back lower first decorative substrate 3322 and damaging the back lower first decorative substrate 3322. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

As described above, the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is formed with the rib portion that connects the six numeral decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state and protrudes forward. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion protruding from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding from the front side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the back lower middle. The rotating decorative body 3310 is transparently formed up to the rear edge of the side surface, and also has a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion protruding from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) on the front surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and a front edge of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. The ribs are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending in a short line in a random direction over the rear side edge of the underside middle rotating ornament 3310. From the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding on the front surface of the body 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 and to the side surface rear edge of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, the lightness and darkness becomes darker ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the transparency becomes low. Is printed.

As shown in FIG. 165, FIG. 166, etc., the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 and an inner lens (diffusing lens). ) It is provided at the rear of 3321 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). A board fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a that is attached to an inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative board 3322 from the rear side, and has a shaft portion 3323a protruding rearward, and a shaft of the board fixing member 3323. The portion 3323a has a shaft hole 3324a into which the portion 3323a is relatively rotatably inserted, and a rotating base 3324 attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

The surface of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and is disposed behind the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322. The inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 as well as the front surface may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 surface. The back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 includes a region detection piece 3325 which projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semi-circular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference which is coaxial with the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding above the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 has a circular opening 3328a which is provided at the rear of the rotation base 3324 and allows the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 to pass therethrough. A transparent back lower middle decoration 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are radially formed from the opening 3328a toward the outer periphery with the center of the circular opening 3328a as a center point, and the rear of the back lower middle decoration 3328 And a lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”) of the rear lower middle second decorative substrate. A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 (lead type) that are attached to the front surface of the 3329 and are capable of detecting the area detecting piece 3325, and are attached to the front surface of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, and the position detecting piece 3326 is attached. And a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) capable of detection.

Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the second lower back middle decorative board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached and the lower back middle decorative body 3328 is attached. A movable base 3332, a back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotation shaft projects forward, and a rotation shaft of the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3334 that meshes with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-bottom middle lifting mechanism 3350 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And a slide slider 3336 which is guided by the slide rail 3360 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and the front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 are positioned between the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotation base 3324 in an assembled state. It is in a state of being accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and is not in contact with any of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotation base 3324. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs on the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322, the portion of the numeral decoration (relief) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be light-emitted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168( a ), the area detection piece 3325 displays the numbers “3”, “4”, and “5” between the numbers “2” and “3” in the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Through the numeral decoration, a circular arc is formed within a range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis between the numeral decorations "5" and "6".

Each of the plurality (here, six) of position detection pieces 3326 projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on the circumference of a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. Each of the position detection pieces 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is positioned at the center of the numbered decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. .. In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a range of a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and adjacent ones. An interval of 2×β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis as a center (see FIG. 168(a)). ..

A plurality (here, three) of the area specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at intervals of an angle of θ degrees (60 degrees) about the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in a clockwise order in the order of a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are arranged so that the “3”, “4”, and “5” of the “1” decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 are positioned directly above the rotation center. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position of an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a that protrudes rearward from the lower portion of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The elevating pins 3332a are slidably inserted into the second slits 3357b of the elevating arms 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting a rotation position.

This back lower middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 via the rotation gear 3327 by rotating the drive gear 3334 by the lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333. You can In addition, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower middle second decoration substrate 3329, respectively. Also, the underbody decoration 3328 can be illuminated.

It should be noted that the front surface side electronic component such as a part number of the front surface side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, a region indicating a position where the front surface electronic component is arranged, and the like. The front side notation indicating the attributes (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). A portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and an inner lens (diffusion lens) is provided behind the transparent lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. ) 3321 and the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 are arranged in this order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back first decorative substrate 3322 is the inner lens. (Diffusion lens) 3321 and through the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 are visible, and when a plurality of LEDs are off, a predetermined paint can be seen when a predetermined paint color is visible. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated by the color of.

In addition, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) resin.

On the surface (front surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, a white resist solution is applied over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid-coated white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, a white resist is applied on all areas except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered, by a solid white resist. A resist layer is formed. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, the part number and the surface number of the front surface electronic component are provided near the front surface electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as a region indicating the position of the side side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side) (The electronic part type may be included.) is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. .. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back side electronic component such as a connector. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, the part number of the surface side electronic parts such as the area specifying sensor 3330 and the position specifying sensor 3331, and the surface side electronic parts are arranged. Specify the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components). May be included) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a transparent underside middle decorative body 3328 is shown. Since the second underside second decorative substrate 3329 is disposed behind the back underside, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the underneath second decorative substrate 3329 When the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized through the decorative body 3328 and the plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, shapes (that is, It is possible to determine the attribute of the front side electronic component indicated by the front side notation portion.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329 is made of a resin whose package is white (a color recognized to be the same as white). Has become.

A pad on which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type), a region specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), and a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) are soldered to the surface (front surface) of the second lower-side middle second decorative substrate 3329, A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except for through holes, lands, etc. (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Layers have been formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, a region specification sensor 3330 (lead type), a position specification sensor 3331 (lead type), and a pad to which a plurality of connectors (surface mounting type) are soldered, A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for the through holes and lands. Further, although not shown in the drawing, on the surface (front surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, the part number and the surface of the front surface electronic component are provided near the front surface electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front side) The electronic part type may be included.) is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. .. On the back surface (rear surface) of the second underneath second decorative substrate 3329, although not shown, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back side electronic component such as a connector. The attributes of the backside electronic component such as the area shown (In addition, the shape of the backside electronic component, the size of the backside electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the backside electronic component, and the model of the backside electronic component may be included. Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with white.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 gives a glittering light-emission by the electric decoration of the light-emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Therefore, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the pads (through holes, lands, etc.) to which a plurality of LEDs or the like are soldered are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-painted white resist”) on the entire area except the above. , The front side notation part that enables the specification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors on this solid white resist is printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint to turn off the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface notation part inconspicuous with respect to the white resist at some times, in addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (during light emission), it has a high reflectance. A combination of a painted white resist and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white, and the first underneath decoration substrate 3322 and the second underneath decoration. The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the substrate 3329 can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

As shown in FIG. 163, FIG. 164, etc., the under-bottom middle elevating mechanism 3350 has a unit base 3351 that extends left and right and both ends are attached to the under-bottom left effect unit 3200 and the under-bottom right effect unit 3250, and a unit base 3351. The lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is mounted on the front surface of the unit so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the flat bottom part of the unit base 3351 is mounted on the rotation shaft of the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 and faces the front side of the unit base 3351. The gear-shaped drive gear 3353 is meshed with the drive gear 3353, and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that is rotatably mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351 is meshed with the first transmission gear 3354. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity, and is provided with an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably attached at the upper center of the front surface of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at the base end side extending in the left-right direction, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. To the first slit 3357a and the second slit 3357b, which extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and in which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , And an elevating arm 3357 having a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip thereof, and a back-and-lower center up-and-down detection sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detection piece 3357c of the elevating arm 3357 are provided. And a lower back intermediate relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

Further, the back-and-lower center elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending elevator slit 3359a through which an elevator pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 of the ornamental body unit 3320 is inserted, and a front cover 3359 that is attached to the front surface of the ornamental body unit 3320 and moves up and down in the lower back middle ornamental body unit 3320. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip side of the elevating arm 3357 move upward (in the front direction). And a spring 3362 that urges the elevating arm 3357 to rotate in the clockwise direction with respect to the view.

The lower-under-back elevating/lowering drive motor 3352 is attached to a lower portion on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably attached such that the base end is to the right of the elevating cam gear 3356 and is at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356. The elevating arm 3357 has a tip end side extending to the left of the elevating cam gear 3356.

The under-rear intermediate relay board 3358 includes the under-rear first decoration board 3322, the under-rear second decoration board 3329, the area specifying sensor 3330, the position specifying sensor 3331, the under-rear middle rotation drive motor 3333, and the under-rear middle lift drive motor. 3352 relays the connection between the lower back middle up-and-down detection sensor 3358a and the production drive board 1720.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and an elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. An elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into an elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the horizontal center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359. The elevating slits 3359a and the slide rails 3360 can support the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back-and-back-in-the-middle elevating drive motor 3352, the back-and-back-in-the-bottom elevating mechanism 3350 passes through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the up-and-down cam gear 3356. The 3356 can be rotated. Then, the elevating arm 3357 can be rotated by the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356, through the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted, and the first elevating arm 3357 can be rotated. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 through the lifting pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted in the two slits 3357b.

Next, a detailed description will be given of the movement of the inside-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3310 and the inside-the-under-the-background decorative body unit 3320 in the inside-the-under-background effect unit 3300. In the normal state, the under-rear middle production unit 3300 is in the state of the lowered position where the in-under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 of the under-under-the-back elevating mechanism 3350 is positioned such that the tip side is lower than the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip is under the under-rear relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the revolving center of the elevating cam gear 3356, and is located near the proximal end of the elevating arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a. .. More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point between the drive pin 3356b and the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if the spring 3362 exerts an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the force line of the urging force causes the drive pin 3356b that is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arm 3357 and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the urging force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end of the first slit 3357a. The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 has the number decoration located at the uppermost side among the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 located inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be viewed well from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Further, in a normal state, the numerical decoration located at the lowermost side is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the back lower middle first. By making the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329 emit light, in addition to the light emission decoration of the back and middle rotating ornament, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be made to emit light (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the back-and-lower center up-and-down drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are passed. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the distal end side, and the elevating arm moves. The tip end side of 3357 is rotated clockwise around the base end side so that the tip end side moves upward.

By rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. Then, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved upward via the elevating pin 3332a. When the drive pin 3356b moves above the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end side. At this time, in the up-and-down arm 3357, since the spring 3362 exerts an urging force in the clockwise direction, the urging force assists the upward movement of the inside-under-the-back decoration unit 3320, and The load on the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When this drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 is stopped, and at the same time, the drive is performed. The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle ornamental body unit 3320 by the elevating arm 3357 is stopped, and the back lower middle ornamental body unit 3320 moves to the uppermost position.

When the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction acts due to the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force line of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the drive pin 3356b that is in contact therewith. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the lift cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the lift arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decoration does not move. The own weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352 via the lift arm 3357 and the like.

It should be noted that when the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the lifting cam gear 3356 is driven by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the state in which the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (further, a game ball rolling in the game area 5a). B is located above the rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided in the center accessory 2500 that prevents the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501) from rebounding from the outside to the front (the player). All the number decorations can be seen well from the side) (see FIG. 201).

To return the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 to the lowered position from the raised position, the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the reverse direction by the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 to move the lifting arm 3357. Rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. When the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the raising/lowering arm 3357 is detected by the lower back middle lift detection sensor 3358a of the lower back middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352. , The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in a normal lowered position (further, the center of the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a is prevented from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501)). The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the position where the pachinko machine 1 overlaps when viewed from the front.

In the back under-center production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the drive gear 3334 is rotated by the under-under-medium rotary drive motor 3333 in the under-under-medium ornamental body unit 3320, so that the under-medium intermediate rotating ornament 3310 is rotated via the rotating gear 3327. Can be rotated around a longitudinal axis. By rotating the underside middle rotating decoration body 3310, the six numeral decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333 at any position such as the lowered position or the raised position of the lower back middle rotating decoration unit 3320.

In the under-rear middle production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, one of a plurality (here, 6) of numerical decorations in the under-rear middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned immediately above the rotation center (stop position). doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168( a ), when the numeral decoration “1” of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located above, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is set to the first area specifying portion. The position detection sensor 3331 detects a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 while detecting by the three region specification sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second region specification sensor 3330b, and the third region specification sensor 3330c. Is not detecting.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the numeral decoration of “1” is the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c make the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is being detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

When the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect, the numeral decoration of "2" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of "3" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration of "4" is the range of the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located inside.

In addition, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b do not detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detects, the numeral decoration of "5" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a does not detect, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of "6" indicates an area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. It is located within the range.

As described above, by combining the detection/non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330, that is, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, any of the numeral decorations can determine the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not the vehicle is located in the stop area including the area.

Since the back-under-center rotation drive motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and then rotates 30 degrees, the back-under-center rotation drive is performed. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop a desired numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, it is necessary to identify the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the stop position area by the three area specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 are provided, and the position specifying sensor 3331 is used to recognize the origin. Thus, it is possible to reduce the load by suppressing the complexity of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

More specifically, when it is desired to stop the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 at a stop position of a desired numeral decoration, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 stop as desired. In the case of the combination satisfying the positions, the position specifying sensor 3331 is displaced in the rotational direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a, and therefore the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detecting piece 3326, the position detecting piece 3326 is separated from the position specifying sensor 3331. Then, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is the origin. Then, from there (from the origin), when it rotates by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to obtain a desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

Note that, in the above, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 has been described by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 including a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, when the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is further rotated by 13 steps with the three area specifying sensors 3330 being a combination satisfying the desired stop position, the position detection piece 3326 is The position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detected away from the position specifying sensor 3331. When the position specifying sensor 3331 makes an angle of non-detection as an origin and makes 20 steps of rotation, the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation driving motor 3333 is stopped to stop the desired numeral decoration. Can be stopped exactly in position.

Next, the light-emission decoration in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the under-rear middle effect unit 3300 includes a plurality of LEDs for causing the under-rear middle decoration unit 3320 to emit light to decorate the under-rear middle decoration unit 3310. It is provided with a decorative board 3322 and a second lower back middle decorative board 3329. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numeral decorations on the lower middle rotating decoration 3310, and each numeral decoration can be independently illuminated.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3329 are located behind a portion of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 that is outside the plurality of numeral decorations. The periphery can be illuminated.

As described above, the inside-under-the-scene production unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the inside-under-the-background rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330. Therefore, based on the detection by the area specifying sensor 3330. , By rotating a plurality of LEDs of the first underneath first decorative substrate 3322 as appropriate, rotating in a state in which only a specific number decoration is illuminated or each number decoration is illuminated in a different color Therefore, it is possible to show the player a production that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numerical decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the relevant part in the lower back first decorative substrate 3322 to emit light. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting opening 2002. In addition, when the game ball B is won in the first starting opening 2002, the LED of the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is caused to emit light (or one emission mode is selected from a plurality of emission modes to emit light). ).

As described above, according to the inside-under-the-back production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, this allows the rotating lower-under-the-background rotating decorative body 3310 having the six stop positions to detect an area having a length extending over three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions are provided, and three area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 and one position identification that detects the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. By repeating this, all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not non-detected until the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, and the area detecting piece 3325 is detected. The current rotation position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensors 3330 that are present.

Then, since the inside-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the inside-under-the-background rotation is detected by the detection of the area detecting pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by the detection of the position detection piece 3326 by the one position specifying sensor 3331, and the stop position is displaced. The stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions can be accurately grasped by reducing the number as much as possible.

Further, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, it is possible to accurately stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower inner rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, the back under-center rotating decorative body 3310 can be given a strong impact on the player by rotating the back under-center rotating decorative body 3310, and the player can rotate the back-under-center rotating decorative body 3310. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is supposed to rotate about the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of numeral decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette wheel that stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position after rotating round and round. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position, and the movable effect by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be achieved. You can entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting the movement to any stop position is The number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is the same, and the ability (the grasp of the stop position) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions are provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. It can be made as large as possible, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

In the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (together) with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The invention is not limited to this, and the region detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Back production unit]
Next, the back production unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170(a) is a perspective view of the back surface effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 170(b) is a perspective view of the back surface effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled for each main member and seen from behind. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation decorative body unit in the back production unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation decorative body unit in the back unit disassembled and seen from behind. It is a figure.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotating decorative body in the back-up production unit. FIG. 176(a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the back up/down lifting decorative body unit in the back up rendering unit from the front, and FIG. 176(b) shows the back up with the back up lifting decorative body unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a raising/lowering ornament body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation ornamental body from a front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory view showing the decorative substrate from the front side in a state where the back-and-up elevator decoration body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back-side effect unit.

The back production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back production unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back production unit 3400 includes a transparent front front rotating ornament 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface and a front front rotating ornament. A transparent back front decorative body 3421 extending in the left and right direction in which the shaft shaft 3410a of the 3410 penetrates in the center of the left and right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter, referred to as "surface (mounting) Surface)))), and a back front decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a back front decorative body 3421 provided behind the back front decorative board 3422 and on the front. And a unit base 3423 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3410a of the front upper rotating decorative body 3410.

In addition, the back production unit 3400 is provided between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the unit base 3423 having a rotation axis on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. Back front rotation drive motor 3425 mounted so as to project into the space of the above, spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotation shaft of the back front rotation drive motor 3425, and meshing with the drive gear 3426. A rotary gear 3427, which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the front and rear front decorative member 3410 and which has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward, and a front and rear decorative substrate 3422. And a back rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) attached to the rear surface of the rotation gear 3427 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

Further, the back production unit 3400 includes a back elevation drive motor 3429 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 such that the rotation shaft projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back elevation drive. The spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and the portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrate the rear cover 3424. And an elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424, which has a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a. , A back side up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) attached to the rear surface of the back side front decoration substrate 3422 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the up/down cam gear 3431, and a tip provided with a back side rear rotation decoration body 3440 The up and down decorative body unit 3450 whose rear end is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 about the axis in the front-rear direction so that the side moves up and down by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the up and down cam gear 3431. A spring 3433 that urges the elevating/decorating body unit 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip end side moves upward, and a spring attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and move to the upper side of the back/up elevating/decorating body unit 3450. And a rod-shaped restricting member 3434 that restricts the movement of the.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back-up/down decorative body unit 3450 includes a transparent rear-side rear rotating decorative body 3440, which is transparent with a shaft shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface thereof. A rear back decorative body 3451 and a back provided behind the rear rear decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). The upper rear decorative substrate 3452 and the rear upper decorative member 3451 are attached to the front surface from the rear of the rear upper decorative substrate 3452, and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3423. And a lifting unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

Further, the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 includes a back up rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the up/down unit base 3453 such that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back up rear rotation drive motor 3454. Drive gear 3455 attached to the drive gear 3455, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 meshing with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456. And a second transmission gear 3457 in the form of a spur gear that is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and a shaft shaft 3440a of the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457. And a rotary gear 3458 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rear end.

Further, the back-and-up elevator decoration unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevator unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotary gear 3458 from the rear. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back-up production unit 3400 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 penetrates the back front decorative body 3421, the back front decorative substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear side. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the cover. The back front decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back front rotating decorative body 3410 stacked in front and back at the center in the left-right direction, and the rear petals are located between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it was rotated to be located at.

The back upper front decorative substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length in the left and right direction of the back upper front decorative body 3421. By illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front decoration 3421 can be illuminated and decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the front back decorative board 3422 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in a random direction. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is such that, in one petal of the cherry blossoms that is struck by the ornamental body 3421, the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the periphery ( That is, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5 world view) are applied by printing, and the back side front of the back side front decoration body 3421 The pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) so that the area other than the area corresponding to the rotary ornament 3410 has a certain shade (because the shade is lighter and darker than the shade at the peripheral portion of the petal). ) (That is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed, but the front-up front rotating decorative body 3410. Also, the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front decorative substrate 3422 disposed behind the back front decoration 3421 can be visually recognized through the back front decoration 3421 (even at the peripheral portion of the petal). ing.

The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged. (Furthermore, the front-side electronic component may include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) A transparent front back decorative body 3421 is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front decorative board 3422 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and a transparent back front decorative body 3421 is provided behind the transparent back front rotating decorative body 3410. Then, since the back front decorative board 3422 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front decorative board 3422 is transferred via the back front decorative body 3421. , Or through the front back decoration 3421 and the front front rotation decoration 3410, when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are off. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated by the predetermined paint color.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422 is made of a white resin (a color recognized to be the same as white) resin. ing.

A plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type), a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a backside up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the surface (front surface) of the backside front decorative substrate 3422. White on all areas except pads, through holes, lands, etc., by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Resist layer is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mounting type), a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a backside up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the backside (rearside) of the backside front decorative substrate 3422. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except the pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the back-side front decorative substrate 3422, the part number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are provided near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, a region indicating the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged near the back-side electronic component such as a connector. The attribute of the back side electronic component such as (the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

The unit base 3423 has through holes 3423a through which the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back upper lifting detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the upper front rotating decorative body 3410, and has a cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and an arc shape into which the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is inserted. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the upper and lower lifting decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 is detected by the back-side rotation detection sensor 3428 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semi-circular shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 in the rear upper and lower elevating decorative body unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-and-up lifting detection sensor 3432 which penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward.

The back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453, and moves up and down. Extends to the rear side. The rear back decoration 3451 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the rear back rotation decoration 3440 stacked one on top of the other, and the rear petals are rotated so that they are located between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it was made.

The back-up rear decorative board 3452 can light-emit a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to lighten the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decoration 3451. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-side rear decorative substrate 3452 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-up rear decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in random directions. In one petal of the cherry blossoms which is struck by the ornamental body 3440 and the back decorative element 3451, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the density becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the peripheral edge) A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are applied by printing, but the back and back rotation Through the decoration body 3440 and the back rear decoration body 3451 (even at the peripheral portion of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear decoration substrate 3452 arranged behind the back rear decoration body 3451 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

It should be noted that the front side electronic component such as a part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3452 and a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is arranged. The front side notation indicating the attributes (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component may be included). A portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and a transparent back-up rear decorative body 3440 is provided behind the transparent back-up rear decorative body 3440. Since 3451 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 causes the back-up rear decorative body 3451 to be printed. In the case where the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized through the rear decorative body 3451 and the rear rotating decorative body 3440, and a plurality of LEDs are turned off. The characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be discriminated by the predetermined paint color.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear-side rear decorative substrate 3452 is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) resin, and the connector is The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

On the surface (front surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, white resist liquid is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3452, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist on the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a connector (surface mounting type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the back-and-back rear decorative substrate 3452, the part number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are provided near the front-side electronic components of the plurality of mounted LEDs. The attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component The surface-side notation part indicating the type may be printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, although not shown, a part number of the back-side electronic component near the back-side electronic component of the connector, a region indicating a position where the back-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. The attributes of the back side electronic component (In addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and the shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be rotatable relative to the base end side (right end side in front view). And an elongated hole-shaped slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lifting unit base 3453. On the front surface of the motor cover 3460, decoration imitating a cherry blossom is formed.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 gives a glittering light-emission by the electric decoration of the light-emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Therefore, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the front surface (front surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and further, this solid coating is performed. The surface-side notation that enables the identification of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors on the white resist is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint, so that the white color when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface notation part inconspicuous to the resist, in addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (when emitting light), it is a solid white with high reflectance. Of the surface of the front and rear decorative substrates 3422 and 3452 on the front and back decorative substrates 3422 and 3452 by the combination of the resist of FIG. The reflectance can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

Next, the movements of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up lifting decorative body unit 3450 in the back-up production unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the back production unit 3400 detects the detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotation decorative body 3410 by the back rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotary ornament 3410 is in a state in which one petal faces upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back front rotation drive motor 3425, the back front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

Further, in a normal state, the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 in which the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 is provided on the front end side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the entire body excluding the front end side is It is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 176(a)). In addition, the part of the back up and down decorative body unit 3450 protruding leftward from the back front decorative body 3421 is located in the rear of the back front left effect unit 3700 in the state assembled in the game board 5, It is invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-and-up lift detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is located below the center of its revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453 of the back up/down lift decoration unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point between the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 and the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3431. As a result, even if the force of rotating the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction such that the front end side moves downward by the own weight of the back-and-front lifting/lowering decorative body unit 3450, that force is exerted. Since the force line passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lifting unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 rotates so that the tip side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the own weight of the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up/down lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-and-forth lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is moved counterclockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lift unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the back up/down drive motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshed with the motor gear 3430 causes the lift cam gear 3431 to rotate clockwise. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3453a such that the front end side of the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 is moved downward by its own weight.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above a straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b moves. The slit 3453b slides in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. When the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up/down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b. The revolution of the is stopped.

This stops the counterclockwise rotation of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 via the lift unit base 3453, so that the front end side of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 including the back/up rear rotating decorative body 3440 is moved. , And the appearance position is moved to a position lower than the back-up front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 176(b)). In this appearance position, the tip side is located below the vicinity of the center of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 and below the back front decorative body 3421, so the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like are visually recognized from the front. It becomes possible.

In the state in which the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431. As a result, even if the force of further rotating the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is applied due to the weight of the back and upper elevating decorative body unit 3450, the force line of the force is applied to the slit 3453b. The elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact therewith. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the lifting unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise so that the tip side moves further downward from the appearance position. In addition, the weight of the back up and down decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back up and down drive motor 3429 via the up and down cam gear 3431.

It should be noted that in the state in which the back-and-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 further attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-and-front lifting/decorating body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is driven by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction of the surroundings. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lift unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In the state where the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back up rear rotating decorative body 3440 provided on the front end side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up/down lifting decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up rear rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about the longitudinal axis (see FIG. 176(b)). Therefore, when the back-rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized from the front, by rotating the driving gear 3455 by the back-rear rotating driving motor 3454, the rotating back-rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized. ..

When the back up/down lifting decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the back up/down driving motor 3429 rotates the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above so that the drive pin 3431b of the up/down cam gear 3431 moves up and down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the tip end side of the back-up lifting decoration unit 3450 moves upward. When the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back up/down detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back up/down drive motor 3429 is stopped to move the back up/down decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position. Can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 in a clockwise direction, assists the rotation of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and lifts the back up/down. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back side production unit 3400 of the present embodiment has the back side front decoration substrate 3422 provided behind the back side front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back side front decoration body 3421. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421 can be illuminated. In addition, since the back-up rear decorative board 3452 is provided behind the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decoration board 3452 appropriately emit light. By doing so, the back-up rear decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be light-emitted.

At this time, the LED on the rear upper rear decoration substrate 3452 is caused to emit light in a state where the rear upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side. The body 3440 and the rear back decorative body 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Left rear production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. 178(a) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 178(b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left rendering unit seen from the front, and FIG. 182 is a rear rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left rendering unit disassembled from the back. FIG. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing a movable mechanism of the rear-left rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back-rear left decorative body unit in the back-rear left effect unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The rear-rear-left production unit 3500 includes a transparent rear-rear-left rotation decoration 3510 that is rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction and a rear-rear-left decoration that rotatably supports the rear-rear-rotation decoration 3510 on the lower end side. A body unit 3520 and a rear rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in the rear case 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided.

The back-rear left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back-rear left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The rear-rear left-handed rotating decorative body 3510 has an axial shaft 3510a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a transparent back rear left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft shaft 3510a of the transparent rear left left rotating decoration body 3510 penetrates in the center. A rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the rear left decorative body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”), and a rear rear surface. A front cover 3523 mounted from the rear of the left decorative substrate 3522 to the rear side of the rear rear left decorative body 3521 and rotatably supporting the shaft 3510a of the rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and a front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 is attached to the rear side and has an upper end side rotatably attached to the rear rear left drive unit 3550.

The rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3524 such that the rotation shaft thereof projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a rear rear A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotary shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear rear left rotation decorative body 3510 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

The back-rear left decoration body 3521 of the back-rear left decoration body unit 3520 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-rear left rotation decoration body 3510 stacked one on top of the other, and the rear petals have front petals. It is formed in such a shape that it is rotated so as to be positioned between. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are surface mounting type, and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The rear back left rotation decoration 3510 and the rear rear left decoration 3521 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the back-rear left decoration 3521 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in random directions. In the petals of one of the cherry blossoms, which are struck by the decoration body 3510 and the left rear decoration body 3521, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the density becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the peripheral edge) A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along with the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the back left rotation Through the decoration body 3510 and the back rear left decoration body 3521 (even at the peripheral portion of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decoration substrate 3522 arranged behind the back rear left decoration body 3521 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522, the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front-side electronic component may include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) The rear back left decorative board 3522 is printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative board 3522, and a transparent back rear left decoration 3521 is provided behind the transparent left rear back rotating decoration 3510. Since the rear back left decorative substrate 3522 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 is the rear rear left decorative body 3521 and the rear rear decorative body 3521. When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized through the rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are determined by the predetermined paint color. (That is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

In addition, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear left rear decorative substrate 3522 has a package made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the entire surface of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 (front surface) except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the left rear decorative board 3522, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist on the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a connector (surface mounting type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522, the part number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522, a region indicating the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged near the back-side electronic component such as a connector. And the like (including the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 gives a glittering light-emission by the electric decoration of the light-emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Therefore, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white coating layer (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) forms a white resist layer, and a white coating is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that makes it possible to specify the full-color LED capable of emitting color light is printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint, so that the yellow surface side against the white resist when the multi-color emission full-color LED is turned off. In addition to making the notation inconspicuous, a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors (light emission) With the combination of the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to, the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the back rear left decoration substrate 3522 can be maintained high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decoration body 3521 and a portion that extends upward from the upper left of the portion in a quadrangle. .. The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion that extends upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3524b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 moves the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the rear rear left decoration unit 3520. , A vertically extending unit base 3552 mounted on the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and mounted in the back box 3010, a unit cover 3553 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3552, and a rotation on the upper front surface of the unit cover 3553. A rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 mounted such that the shaft projects between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on the rotary shaft of the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554. 3555 and.

In addition, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. An elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from near the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a, and an elevating cam gear The drive pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a extending left and right, and the left and right under the first slit 3558a extends left and right, and the operation pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the rear rear left decoration unit 3520. Has a second slit 3558b slidably inserted therein, and a link member 3558 slidably attached in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. The back rear left relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the back side 3553 and the back rear left up/down detection sensor 3562 (lead back up/down detection sensor 3562 mounted on the back surface of the back rear left relay board 3561 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the up/down cam gear 3557). Type), and.

A white resist solution is applied to the front surface and the rear surface of the back-rear left relay substrate 3561 except for the pads to which various connectors and the back-rear left up/down detection sensor 3562 are soldered, through holes, lands, and the like. White resist layers are each formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-painted white resist”) formed as described above. Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear left relay board 3561, the part number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are provided near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear left relay substrate 3561, the part number of the back electronic component, the back electronic Attributes of the backside electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the backside electronic component, the size of the backside electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the backside electronic component, the backside electronic component) , Which may include the model No.), is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. The back rear left relay board 3561 is not a decorative board and is a board provided in the game board 5 although the LED is not mounted. By functioning as a board), when the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, the light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and the support shaft 3551a projects forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear rear left decoration unit 3520.

The unit base 3552 extends vertically longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape that is open rearward.

In the elevating cam gear 3557, the drive pin 3557b penetrates the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 and is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a back rear left up/down detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a provided near the upper end thereof and a second slit 3558b provided at the lower end thereof. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semi-circular shape into which the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 is inserted. The rear back left relay substrate 3561 relays the connection between the rear rear left decoration substrate 3522, the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554, the rear rear left up/down detection sensor 3562, and the performance drive substrate 1720. It is for doing.

Next, the operation of the back rear left effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the rear-rear-left production unit 3500 has a rear-rear left ornamental body 3510 provided with a rear-rear left rotation ornamental body 3510 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184(a). The unit 3520 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

Further, in a normal state of being assembled on the game board 5, most of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700. Only part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). It should be noted that the portion of the rearward left/right lifting drive motor 3554 that faces the front is covered with a portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, and thus the player It is invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear rear left lift detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557, and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3524b located on the right side of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is It is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged by the spring 3559 in a direction of moving upward, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554 through the link member 3558, the up/down cam gear 3557, and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the lifting cam gear 3557 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left. However, since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b. Cannot be revolved, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, and the back rear left decoration unit 3520 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554, the lift cam gear 3557 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Thus, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3558a is pressed upward, and the inside of the first slit 3558a is slid rightward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operation pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 protruding below the support shaft 3551a and rightward is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a while the operation pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is pressed. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184(a) and 184(b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3559 assists the upward movement of the link member 3558, and reduces the load applied to the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554.

In this way, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, whereby the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. While moving upward, the back-rear left-handed rotation decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front left effect unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (the retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184(b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. When the drive pin 3557b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear rear left drive motor 3554 stops and the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops at the same time. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the counterclockwise rotation of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 184(c). See)). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

When the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, a force to rotate the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 in the clockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a acts, and the force causes the movable base to move. The link member 3558 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3524b of the 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the lifting cam gear 3557 does not rotate, the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the rear back left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the rear rear left up/down drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, and the like.

In the state where the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b abuts on the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. As a result, when the back rear left decoration unit 3520 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a by its own weight and the link member 3558 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3524b, The force acting from the one slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b causes the lifting cam gear 3557 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left. However, since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Therefore, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear left decoration unit 3520 can be locked so as not to rotate in the second appearance position.

In the state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

In this rear rear left decorative body unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is moved through the rotary gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see Figure 183). Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 is visible from the front side (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rotating back rear left rotation decoration 3510 is displayed. It can be seen by the player.

When the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is returned from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 is used to reverse the motor gear 3555. When the link member 3558 is rotated by rotating the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557, the link member 3558 can be moved downward. As the link member 3558 moves downward, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left lift drive motor 3554. It is possible to return to the position state.

Since the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear left decoration substrate 3522 behind the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 and the back rear left decoration body 3521 as shown in FIG. 183. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decoration substrate 3522, the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 and the back rear left decoration body 3521 can be illuminated. At this time, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LEDs of the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522 are caused to emit light, whereby the light emission decoration is performed. The back rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the back rear left decoration 3521 which are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Right after rear production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 185 to 191. FIG. 185(a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 185(b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is a figure. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit seen from the front, and FIG. 189 is a rear rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled from the back. It is the seen disassembled perspective view. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back-rear right decorative body unit in the back-rear right effect unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear right rendering unit 3600 includes a transparent back-rear right rotating decoration body 3610 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-rear right decoration that rotatably supports the back-rear rotating decoration body 3610 at the lower end side. A body unit 3620 and a back rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating an upper end side of the back rear right decoration unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided.

The rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 of the rear-rear right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom. The back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a transparent rear rear right decorative body 3621 through which the shaft shaft 3610a of the transparent rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610 penetrates at the center. A rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”), and a rear rear surface. A front cover 3623 mounted from the rear of the right decorative substrate 3622 to the rear side of the back rear right decorative body 3621 and rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and a front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 is attached to the rear side and has an upper end side rotatably attached to the rear rear right drive unit 3650.

In addition, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3624 such that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear rear right rotation decoration body 3610 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3627.

The back rear right decoration body 3621 of the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, which are stacked in front and rear, and the rear petals are front petals. It is formed so as to be rotated so as to be located between the two. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The rear back right rotation decoration body 3610 and the rear rear right decoration body 3621 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-and-back right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back-and-right right decoration body 3621 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in a random direction. In the petals of one of the cherry blossoms that are struck by the decorative body 3610 and the right rear decorative body 3621, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the density becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center to the periphery of the petal A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the back right rotation Through the decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 (even in the peripheral part of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decoration substrate 3622 arranged behind the back rear right decoration body 3621 can be visually recognized. It is like this.

The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622, the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front-side electronic component may include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) The rear back right decoration substrate 3622 is printed on the surface (mounting surface) with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and the transparent back rear right decoration body 3621 is provided behind the transparent back right rotation decoration body 3610. Since the back rear right decorative board 3622 is arranged in order, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative board 3622 is the back rear right decorative body 3621, and If the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized through the rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are determined by the predetermined paint color. (That is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

In addition, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same as white).

On the surface (front surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, a white resist liquid is applied and formed on the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the right rear decorative substrate 3622, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist on the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mounting type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, the part number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, a region showing the part number of the back electronic component and the position where the back electronic component is arranged near the back electronic component such as a connector. The attribute of the back side electronic component such as (the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a light yellow paint which is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 gives a glittering light-emission by the electric decoration of the light-emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Therefore, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the rear-rear right decorative substrate 3622, excluding the pads to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered, the through holes, the lands, and the like. A white coating layer (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) forms a white resist layer, and a white coating is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that makes it possible to specify the full-color LED capable of emitting color light is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, so that the yellow surface side of the white resist against the white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to making the notation inconspicuous, a solid white resist with a high reflectance and a white reflectance with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors (light emission) By combining with the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to, the reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decoration body 3621 and a portion that extends in a quadrangle upward from the upper right of the portion. .. The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a square shape. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b protruding forward in a cylindrical shape at a position apart from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the operating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved back and forth through the rotary gear 3627 meshed with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the rear rear right decoration unit 3620. A vertically extending unit base 3652 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and is installed in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper portion is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652; A rear rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of 3653 so as to project between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and a rear rear-right up-down drive motor 3654 is attached to the rotary shaft. And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

Further, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer circumference, a first slit 3658a extending left and right in which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b which extends leftward and rightward below 3658a and into which the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted, and the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653 are provided. And a link member 3658 mounted so as to be slidable in the up-down direction.

Further, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. The back rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the 3653 and the back rear right up and down detection sensor 3662 (lead Type) and a lower base 3663 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and to which the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached.

It should be noted that a white resist solution is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the back-and-right relay board 3661 over the entire area excluding various connectors and pads to which the back-and-back right up/down detection sensor 3662 is soldered, through holes, lands, and the like. White resist layers are each formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-painted white resist”) formed as described above. Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear right relay board 3661, the part number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear right relay board 3661, although not shown, in the vicinity of the back surface electronic components such as the plurality of connectors and the back rear right up/down detection sensor 3662, the part number of the back side electronic component, the back surface Attributes of the back side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the side electronic component is arranged (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side) (The electronic part type may be included.) is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with white. .. The back rear right relay board 3661 is not a decorative board and is a board provided in the game board 5 although the LED is not mounted on the back rear right relay board 3661. By functioning as a board), when the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, the light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate that extends vertically, and a support shaft 3651a projects forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is relatively rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620.

The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically with substantially the same length from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed in a shallow container shape that is opened rearward.

The elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 by the drive pin 3657b penetrating the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear rear right up/down detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and projects rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semi-circular shape into which the drive pin 3657b of the lifting cam gear 3657 is inserted. The rear rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the rear rear right decoration board 3622, the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654, the rear rear right up/down detection sensor 3662, and the performance drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Next, the operation of the back rear right effect unit 3600 will be described. In the normal state, the rear-rear right effect unit 3600 has a rear-rear right decorative body 3610 provided with a rear-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191(a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right performance unit 3800 and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

Further, in a normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the entire front (player side). Since it is invisible.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 and is located near the right end of the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3624b located on the left side of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged by the spring 3659 in the direction of moving upward, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 with the first slit 3658a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657, and the like.

Note that, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. .. At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right. However, since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b. Cannot be revolved, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the back right drive motor 3654, the elevator cam gear 3657 rotates clockwise through the gear portion 3657a, and the elevator cam gear 3657 is rotated. Drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, the inner surface of the first slit 3658a is pressed upward while sliding leftward in the first slit 3658a, and the link member 3658 moves upward. Becomes

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 protruding below the support shaft 3651a and leftward is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a while the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is retracted. It rotates in the clockwise direction from the position (see FIGS. 191(a) and 191(b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3659 assists the upward movement of the link member 3658, and reduces the load on the rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654.

In this way, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. As it moves upward, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 moves to the left of the back front right effect unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotating position of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 when the lifting cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the normal state (the retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191(b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b comes to slide to the right in the first slit 3658a. When the drive pin 3657b moves to a position right above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654 stops and the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops at the same time. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the clockwise rotation of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 191(c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force that causes the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a acts, and the force moves. Although the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located immediately above the revolution center. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate, the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657 and the like.

In addition, even when the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 may be further rotated in the clockwise direction so that the drive pin 3657b abuts on the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the back rear right decoration unit 3620 tries to rotate counterclockwise about the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, and thus the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operation pin 3624b, The force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the lifting cam gear 3657 to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is prevented, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked so as not to rotate in the state of the second appearance position.

In the state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided at the lower end side is forward (player side). Can be seen from.

In this rear rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is moved through the rotary gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about its longitudinal axis (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), if the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back rear right rotating decoration body 3610 is displayed. It can be seen by the player.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 sets the motor gear 3655 to the reverse of the above. By rotating the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, the link member 3658 can be moved downward, and with the movement of the link member 3658 downward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 is stopped to retract the back rear right decoration unit 3620. It is possible to return to the position state.

Since the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decoration board 3622 behind the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back rear right decoration body 3621 as shown in FIG. 190, By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decoration substrate 3622, the back rear right rotating decoration 3610 and the back rear right decoration 3621 can be light-emitted. At this time, the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, and the LED of the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 is caused to emit light, whereby the light emission decoration is performed. The back rear right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right rotating decoration 3621 that are displayed can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192(a) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192(b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 194 is one rear front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. 195(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in a closed state, and FIG. 195(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in an open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left effect unit 3700 includes three back front left decorations, a first back front left decoration body unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration body unit 3710C, in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the right. The shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back-front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back-front left effect unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. -Shaped shutter support member 3712 and the shutter support member 3712 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 and are supported rotatably around an axis in the left-right direction so that the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3730.

The back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is provided behind the back front left decoration 3713 and the back front left decoration 3713 in the shape of a transparent plate. A front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”) and a back front left decorative board 3714 from behind. The rear cover 3715 is attached to the front cover 3711 and is attached to the front of the back rear left effect unit 3500.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front. A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a rotation member attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3719 and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides up and down to open and close the shutter unit 3730 by rotating the link member 3719 are provided.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 has an outer shape formed such that the “convex” shape is tilted to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is patterned). On the front surface of the front cover 3711, a portion in which a metallic decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having the metallic decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3711. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is integrally molded with the front cover 3711, but is molded separately from the front cover 3711, and the molded portion and the front cover are formed. 3711 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decoration portion 3711a can give a high-class feeling, can make the front cover 3711 stand out, and further enhance the presence of the front cover 3711. The metal decoration part 3711a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold color in this embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3711 has a metal decoration portion 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decoration portion 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be made longer at least by the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711. Therefore, in the metal decorative portion 3711a. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decoration substrate 3714 and damaging the back front left decoration substrate 3714. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a on the front surface for rotatably supporting the shaft portions 3733 of the shutter members 3731 in the shutter unit 3730. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b which is cylindrically projected forward from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and the support plate 3716 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3732, and a left-hand side after protruding in the axis-perpendicular direction from the tip of the left-side shaft portion 3733. And a crank shaft 3734 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward one side.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crank shaft 3734 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3733.

Since the shaft portion 3733 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, the shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720.

Although not shown, the front left decorative body 3713 includes characters, items, logos, etc. that follow the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It has a design. The back front left decoration 3713 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing light from the LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714. The surface of the back front left decoration 3713, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear left front decorative substrate 3714 to be arranged. Note that a lens cut may be provided on the front surface and the back surface of the back front left decoration body 3713 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the surface of the back front left decoration body 3713. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the front left decoration board 3714 are surface-mounting type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is in a state visible from the front, as described later. In this open state, the back front left decoration body 3713 is transparently formed, and therefore the front surface of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 disposed behind the back front left decoration body 3713 (mounting The surface) is visible.

The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the front left decorative substrate 3714, the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front-side electronic component may include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) A back front left decorative board 3714 is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back front left decorative body 3713. Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the predetermined paint color printed by silk-screen printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 passes through the back front left decorative body 3713. When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state in which the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front-side notation portion are It is possible to determine the attribute of the front side electronic component shown).

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the left front decoration board 3714 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white) resin.

On the front surface (front surface) of the left front decorative board 3714, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the left front decorative board 3714, a white resist is applied by a solid white resist on the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. Layers have been formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, although not shown, a part number of the front side electronic component and a front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 gives a glittering light-emission by the electric decoration of the light-emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Therefore, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the back left front decorative substrate 3714 over the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white coating layer (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) forms a white resist layer, and a white coating is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that makes it possible to specify the full-color LED capable of emitting color light is printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint, so that the yellow surface side against the white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to making the notation inconspicuous, a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors (light emission) With the combination of the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the above, the reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. A portion of the support plate 3716, which is bent to the right on the front end side, is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the rest of the portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that projects from the vicinity of the lower end to the right in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in such a direction that the plunger moves forward and backward. The front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can be rotated around the axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3716a. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion into which the support pin 3716a is inserted being interposed, and a second connection portion 3720 connected to the opening/closing slider 3720. The connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The open/close slider 3720 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of a shutter unit 3730 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the front left production unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state, the back front left effect unit 3700 is in a state in which the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 has its plate surface facing forward as shown in FIG. The shutter 3732 closes the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back left decoration body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732). Has been done.

In a normal state, the front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the urging force of the spring causes the plunger to protrude downward. Further, in the normal state, the open/close slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

In this normal state, when the front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crank shaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crank shaft 3734 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is provided. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195(b)).

After that, the front left drive solenoid 3717 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has moved upward moves downward due to the biasing force of the spring. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can be returned to the closed state which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left production unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the back front left decoration body 3713 is changed from the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3730. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

Further, since the back front left decoration substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decoration body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 are made to emit light. Thus, the player can see the shutter unit 3730 that is light-emitted and decorated, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, by making a plurality of LEDs on the front left front decorative substrate 3714 emit light, the front-left left that is illuminated and decorated. The ornamental body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front left effect unit 3700, three back front left decoration unit units, that is, a first back front left decoration body unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration body unit 3710C. Since the shutter units 3730 can be independently opened/closed and the light emitting decorations can be performed on the 3710, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects by the three back front left decorative body units 3710. I can show you.

[5-9k. Front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196(a) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 196(b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 198 is one rear front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. 199(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right performance unit in a closed state, and FIG. 199(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right performance unit in an open state.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010. .. The back-front right effect unit 3800 has three back-front right decorations of a first back-front right decoration body unit 3810A, a second back-front right decoration body unit 3810B, and a third back-front right decoration body unit 3810C in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. It is slanted so that the upper end moves to the left. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decoration body unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration body unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back-front right effect unit 3800 has a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating forward and backward, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. -Shaped shutter support member 3812 and the shutter support member 3812 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 and are supported rotatably around an axis in the left-right direction so that the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3830.

The back front right decoration unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and is provided behind the back front right decoration 3813 and the back front right decoration 3813 in the form of a transparent plate. The front front right decorative board 3814 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) and the back front right decorative board 3814 from behind. The rear cover 3815 is attached to the front cover 3811 and is attached to the front of the back rear right effect unit 3600.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front. The transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and the transmission plate 3816 attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. A rotating link member 3819 and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open/close the shutter unit 3830 are provided.

The front cover 3811 of the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape formed such that the “convex” shape is tilted to the left and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is patterned). On the front surface of the front cover 3811, a portion in which a metallic decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having the metallic decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3811. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is integrally molded with the front cover 3811, but is molded separately from the front cover 3811, and the molded portion and the front cover are formed. 3811 and 3811 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decoration portion 3811a can give a high-grade feeling, can make the front cover 3811 stand out, and further enhance the presence of the front cover 3811. The metal decoration portion 3811a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold color in this embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3811 has a metal decoration portion 3811a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decoration portion 3811a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front right decoration substrate 3814 and damaging the back front right decoration substrate 3814. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a on the front surface thereof, which rotatably supports the shaft portions 3833 of the shutter members 3831 of the shutter unit 3830. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and the support plate 3816 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a plate-shaped shutter 3832 that extends in the left-right direction, a shaft portion 3833 that extends in a column shape from both ends in the left-right direction of the shutter 3832, and a right-hand side after protruding from the tip of the right-side shaft portion 3833 in the axis-perpendicular direction. And a crank shaft 3834 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward one side.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged, with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located rearward of the shaft portion 3833.

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft portion 3833 in the left-right direction. The crank shaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820.

Although not shown in the figure, the back front right decorative body 3813 includes characters, items, logos, etc. in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It has a design. The back front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens that can diffuse the light from the LEDs of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The surface of the back front right decoration 3813, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused and refracted. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear right decorative board 3814 to be arranged. In addition, a lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the back front right decorative body 3813 (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface may be replaced with the back surface of the back front right decorative body 3813. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are surface mounting type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

In the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is open, the back-front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front right decoration 3813 is transparently formed, the surface of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 arranged behind the back front right decoration 3813 through the back front right decoration 3813 (mounting) The surface) is visible.

The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the front right decorative board 3814 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged. (Furthermore, the front-side electronic component may include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component.) A back front right decorative board 3814 is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and a back front right decorative board 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back front right decorative body 3813. Therefore, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the predetermined paint color printed by silk-screen printing on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is transferred through the back front right decoration body 3813. When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state in which the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front-side notation portion are It is possible to determine the attribute of the front side electronic component shown).

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the front right decorative substrate 3814 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same as white).

On the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, a white resist solution is applied and formed on the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the right front decorative board 3814, a white resist is applied by a solid white resist on the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. Layers have been formed. Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814, the part number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are provided near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The surface-side notation part indicating () may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white. Although illustration is omitted, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-front right decorative board 3814, the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged are provided in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous to white.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is noticeable when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red surface side is different from the white resist. While the notation part (red backside notation part with respect to white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation part (rear side notation part) is made yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow backside notation part for white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 gives a glittering light-emission by the electric decoration of the light-emitting portions such as the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are, as described above, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Therefore, the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, the white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the back-front right decorative substrate 3814 over the entire area except the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white coating layer (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) forms a white resist layer, and a white coating is further formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front surface side that makes it possible to specify the full-color LED capable of emitting color light is printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint, so that the yellow surface side against the white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to making the notation inconspicuous, a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors (light emission) By combining the surface side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to, the reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be kept high.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing leftward and rightward, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. A portion of the support plate 3816, which is bent leftward on the front end side, is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portions pass rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. Further, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that protrudes in the shape of a cylinder from the vicinity of the lower end to the left. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in a direction in which the plunger advances and retracts downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate about the support pin 3816a about the axis in the left-right direction. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side and a second connection portion connected to the opening/closing slider 3820 with a portion into which the support pin 3816a is inserted in between. The connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3820 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of a shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831, and each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is inserted in a transmission groove slidably in the front-rear direction. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199(a), the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 is in a state with its plate surface facing forward, The shutter 3832 is in a closed state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Has been done.

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the urging force of the spring causes the plunger to protrude downward. Further, in the normal state, the open/close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the side opposite to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

When the open/close slider 3820 moves downward, the crank shaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crank shaft 3834 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates about the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 is oriented in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the front side of the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is provided. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).

After that, the back right drive solenoid 3817 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has moved upward moves downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can be returned to the closed state which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the back front right decoration 3813 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of, and it is possible to entertain the change of the decoration to the player.

Further, since the back-front right decoration board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back-front right decoration body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back-front right decoration board 3814 are made to emit light. Thus, the player can see the shutter unit 3830 that is illuminated and decorated, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, by illuminating a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, the back front right that is illuminated is decorated. The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right effect unit 3800, three back front right decoration units, a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 can be independently opened/closed and the 3810 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects by the three back front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205 and the like. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the under-rear-middle rotating decorative body of the under-rear-middle rendering unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 202 shows the rear-rear rotating decorative body of the rear-up rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear-rear left rotating decorative body of the rear-rear left effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the rear-rear right. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the rear right rotation ornamental body of the production unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 203 shows that the back-rear left rotating decorative body of the back-rear left rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear right rotating decorative body of the back-rear right rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state.

FIG. 205 shows the rear rear movable decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear rear rear rotating decorative body of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the rear rear of the rear rear left effect unit. Move the left rotating decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back lower middle rotating decoration body of the back lower middle rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where it is moved from the lowered position to the raised position.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting opening unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially transparent, in a normal state. As shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decoration 3030, the back front right decoration 3040, and the back bottom left rotation of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are passed. Decorative body 3201, back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 of back lower right rendering unit 3250, back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 of back lower middle rendering unit 3300, back top front rotating decorative body 3410 and back top of back rendering unit 3400 The front decoration 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, and the like can be visually recognized well, and the center accessory 2500 is also visible. Through the inside of the frame, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well.

More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is connected to the right rail 1005 from the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000. It is located along the side right middle unit up to the vicinity of 2700. Further, the rear-rear movable decoration body 3110 of the rear-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper-rear effect unit 3400 and is invisible to the player.

In addition, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, behind the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. Is located below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first special winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

Further, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the state of the lowered position, and is positioned behind the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 so that the upper part thereof projects into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees this back-and-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 from a diagonally upper position, the numeral decoration above the center of rotation is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be seen well.

Further, the back front decorative body 3421 of the back production unit 3400 extends to the left and right in the upper part of the game area 5a in a front view, and the upper left side from the center in the left-right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center accessory. It is possible to see through the 2500, and the rest can be seen well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-up front decorative body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be seen. The back up/down decorative body unit 3450 having the back up/rear rotating decoration body 3440 of the back up production unit 3400 is in a retracted position which is behind the back up front decoration body 3421 in a normal state. It is invisible from the side.

Further, the back-rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back-rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back-rear left rendering unit 3500 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-rear left rendering unit 3700 in a normal state. , Is invisible from the player side. Further, the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 having the back-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back-rear right rendering unit 3600 is in a retracted position which is behind the back-front right rendering unit 3800 in a normal state. , Is invisible from the player side.

Also, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, the upper first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative body unit 3710B on the inner side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. In the front view, most of the lower third back front left decoration unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500, and the right part is inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Furthermore, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are vertically arranged along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A on the upper side is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second rear front right decorative body unit 3810B on the inner side and the third rear front right decorative body unit 3810C on the lower side are transparent game panel 1100 and the center on the right side from the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 is a rear-rear effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700. , And the front right production unit 3800 perform a predetermined production (movable production or light emission production).

Specifically, as an effect using the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The lock due to is released and the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. As a result, a large back-back movable decorative body 3110 that crosses the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can show the player an effect (movable effect) that falls freely while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise the expectation for the game.

In the back-rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the back-rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the back-rear movable decoration. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the normal/reverse rotation of the rear drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed to move the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 via the slide guide 3130 to the upper and lower sides of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 and the rear rear The movable decorative body 3110 can be paid attention to, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to rotate the lower back middle decoration unit 3320. Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and at the same time, the lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333 rotates the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600, which is good from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

Since the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six numeral decorations, by rotating the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310, the impression that the roulette is rotating to the player as much as possible. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as "Soroku", and the number of the number decoration of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating. Depending on, the "piece" may be advanced. As a result, the player is harassed depending on whether or not the rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired numeral decoration so that the “piece” moves to the desired “box”. It can be exciting and entertaining the player. In addition, the player can feel as if the expected value is increasing as the "pieces" advance, and the player's expectation for the game can be increased.

As an effect using the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower right effect unit 3250, the upper effect unit 3400, the rear left effect unit 3500, and the rear right effect unit 3600 in the reverse unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, in the lower back left production unit 3200, the lower back left drive motor 3205 rotates the lower back left rotation decoration body 3201 and in the lower back right production unit 3250, the lower back right drive motor 3255 rotates the lower back right rotation decoration body. Rotate 3251. In the back production unit 3400, the back front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back front rotation decoration body 3410, and the back elevation drive motor 3429 moves the back elevation work unit 3450 downward from the retracted position. At the same time as turning to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440. Further, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500, the rear rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 moves the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the retracted position to the slightly upper right first appearance position, and by the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525. The left-hand rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. Also, in the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear right up and down drive motor 3654 moves the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the slightly upper left first appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 drives the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625. The right rotation decorative body 3610 is rotated.

As a result, the back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, the back rear left rotating decoration 3510, and the back right rotating decoration 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 to be visible, and the back lower rotating decoration is also visible. Since the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate, respectively. By rotating the six ornaments, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game as if something good will happen.

At this time, the back up/down elevating drive motor 3429, the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554, and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654 are appropriately repeated in the forward/reverse direction to set the back up/down elevating decoration unit 3450, the back rear left adornment. The body unit 3520 and the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, the back-rear rotating left decoration 3510, and the back-rear rotating right decoration 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain the player.

At this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, since the seven ornaments rotate around, it is possible to strongly suggest to the player that an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage (for example, a "big hit" game) occurs. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the rear rear left rotation decoration 3510. In addition, in the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 moves the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 drives the rear rear right. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate at a substantially height position, which may surprise the player and do something good. It is possible to make you think that it is, and to raise the expectation for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back-rear left-handed rotating decoration body 3510 and the back-rear-right rotating decoration body 3610 at the second appearance position are the concepts of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1). You may make it display the effect image which becomes the position of the eyes of the face of a predetermined character along the (world view of the game board 5). As a result, the player can be presented with an effect in which the eyes of the character are spinning, and the player can be entertained.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, the shutter unit 3730 is operated by the back front left drive solenoid 3717 in the back front left effect unit 3700. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800 changes the shutter unit 3830 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the back front left decoration 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decoration 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side, and therefore the back front left decoration 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the ornamental body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, each has three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be opened and closed individually, respectively. As a result, various effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired.

Back unit production unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back production unit 3400, back left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As an effect using the back-front left effect unit 3700 and the back-front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all ornaments and the like may be movable. This allows
By moving all the ornaments, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game state) will occur, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the advantageous game state. In this case, in the rear rear left effect unit 3500 and the rear rear right effect unit 3600, the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 and the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each ornament is described, but when each ornament is moved, the LED of the decoration substrate provided in the rear is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the player can perform the light emission effect of the ornament. It can be shown and can further attract the player's interest.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. With this, it is possible to present the player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining the light emission effects, the movable effects, the display effects, and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to use various effects. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[5-11. Main effects of game board]
Next, main operation effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above configuration will be described. In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a on the front side has an opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the game area 5a is distributed with a distribution area in which the game balls B can be distributed. A frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is formed into a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 by partitioning it into an impossible non-circulation area, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the flow area and the inner side becomes the non-flow area, by definition. Then, a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503, which is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, is extended from the same position as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation region side (inside). At the same time, since the flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the distribution area side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided. Since nothing is extended to the circulation region side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 as possible. Therefore, the substantial distribution area can be set to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial distribution area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-circulation area (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged, the substantial distribution area is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. .. Therefore, the non-circulation area is increased by increasing the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B flows in the game area 5a from being substantially reduced. It is possible to make the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided behind the area, the movable body and the decorative object of the effect unit more visible, and play the game ball B in the distribution area and the non-distribution area. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining any of the above effects.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion can be formed by the flange portion 2502 provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since the part 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution region side (outside), and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange part 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 is improved. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (abuts on) the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 and the like. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged.

Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by mounting the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B abuts. Can be prevented from being elastically deformed and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which gives the player discomfort. It is possible to prevent this from happening and to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, the support part 2503 extending from the peripheral wall part 2501 to the non-circulation region side can be made invisible, and the support part 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as an effect device provided in the rear through the accessory 2500 and the movable body and the decorative object of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, the non-distribution area It is possible to increase the range in which the effect images, movable bodies, decorations, etc., that are provided at the rear of the display area can be made larger, and it is possible to make it easier to exert the effect of the effect by the effect device, and at the rear of the non-circulation area. Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the visible range of the movable body, the decorative object, and the like are large, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be obtained. it can.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the light of illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1 are provided by the transparent portion. It is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit light from the light emitting means (such as the LED or the effect display device 1600), so that the transparent portions such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 are brilliant. It is possible to make it look lively, improve appearance, and enhance appeal to the player. At this time, a step or a notch may be provided in the transparent support part 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in a movable body (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 or the back rear left effect unit 3500) provided behind the support part 2503. By the light emission from the light emitting means (LED), the above-described effects can be obtained, and the transparent support portion 2503 enables the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front-back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed as a game panel. The lens effect of the support unit 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support unit 2503 is extended with the same thickness as that of the 1100, and the support unit 2503 has the rear front left decorative body 3030 and the rendering device (the rendering display device 1600). Etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further reduced, and a part behind the support part 2503 in the back front left decoration body 3030, the rendering image of the rendering device, the movable body, the decoration body, etc. ) Visibility can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be more easily seen.

Furthermore, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed in the portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 different from the peripheral wall portion 2501. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown depending on the tip end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, it becomes difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 is seen, and it seems that attention is paid to details. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a deep design.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and different at the relevant portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 extends from the same position in the front-back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501, the support part 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to make an illusion like that, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the support portion 2503.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle (in the middle) in the front-rear direction of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the rear portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is sufficiently increased. It is possible to keep it, and it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium comes into contact therewith.

Furthermore, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped to follow the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made invisible by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, when the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is It seems that it protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, and can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and a good-looking pachinko inside the game area 5a. The machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-circulation area and the movable body and the decorative object of the effect unit can be favorably visually recognized from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the effect of production by the above.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is projected more forward than the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it appears to protrude, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and to easily recognize the distribution area and the non-distribution area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution area side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and at a portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Does not have the support part 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), the support part 2503 disturbs the visibility of the rendering device (rendering display device 1600 or the rendering unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, it is possible to increase the area in which the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen, and it is possible to more easily exert the effect of effect by the effect device, and at the same time, the effect device to the player. It is possible to entertain the production by and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be kept equal to that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally resin-molded to form a metal. It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when it is removed from the mold.

Further, since the support part 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the part of the support part 2503 is different from other parts. It is possible to prevent the difference in shrinkage amount from increasing, and it is possible to prevent deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a flat-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 from the rear side. , Rear and rear right ascending/descending drive motors 3554 and rear/rear right producing units 3600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 as the functional parts of the rear/rear left producing unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000, respectively. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part thereof is outside the game area 5a in a front view, and between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654, the back rear left. Back front left decorative body 3030 and back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to cover at least a portion of the lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 can cover and hide at least part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, Through the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100, and the game area 5a, it is possible to make the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654 difficult to see from the player side, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 looks good. It is possible to prevent the back rear left up/down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up/down drive motor 3654, and the front back front left decoration 3030 and back front right decoration 3040 can be seen, The appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing power to the player.

Further, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary between the game regions 5a defined by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 becomes difficult to understand, so the outer periphery of the game region 5a is not partitioned. It is possible to give a feeling of openness by looking like, and even if the game area 5a has the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to make the game area 5a look larger. Therefore, by making the game area 5a look larger than the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game on the pachinko machine 1 and play the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing power to the player.

In addition, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are arranged to cover at least a portion in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to the same effects as the above, the functional parts can be made difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided with continuous decorations over the entire surface, and in front view, the back front extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a Since the decorations of the left decoration 3030 and the back right decoration 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a difficult to understand, giving a feeling of openness and playing the game. The size of the area 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. It is possible to make the player more prominent and appeal to the player.

Further, since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 and It is possible to prevent the back-rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being visible, and it is good to see the back-rear left effect unit 3500 and the back-rear right effect unit 3600 etc. from the player side through the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the pachinko machine 1 and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in front view, at least a part of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the game area 5a (in the back rear left lift drive motor 3554). Since it is arranged completely (entirely outside the game area 5a), in order to arrange the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By keeping the balance, it is possible to prevent the space in the game area 5a from becoming small. In other words, since a part of the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a in a front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a should be reduced. Therefore, the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further exert the above-described operational effects can be provided. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased, and in that case. The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is expanded. All the driving sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the accessory moving in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 1 and the effect display device 1600, etc. It becomes possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from, and it is possible to make it look as if the front component 1000 or the game panel 1100 is emitting light, and the entire pachinko machine 1 You can improve the appearance of. Further, although the opaque decoration seal 3032 and the decoration seal 3042 are provided on the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, the respective bases 3031 of the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided. Also, since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is reflected on the front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to give the impression that the front left decoration 3030 and the back right decoration 3040 reach the front right decoration 3040 and emit light. It can be said that the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

Further, since the back left front decoration 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be understood that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It will be spicy and can look like a piece of decoration. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the same operation and effect as described above even if the back left front decoration 3030 is not sized so as to cover the entire back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and the back front left decoration 3030 can be obtained. It is possible to make the game area 5a look large while reducing the cost required for 3030. Although at least a part of the back rear left up-and-down drive motor 3554 and the back rear right up-down drive motor 3654 are covered and hidden by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040, the part is a pachinko machine. It is desirable that the area is closer to the center of 1 (closer to the boundary line that divides the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). Further, a predetermined location where the drive source is not located outside the game area 5a (a lower left portion in FIG. 131, that is, a lower left corner portion in the game board 5) extends from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. By providing a decorative body, the game area 5a can be made large.

Also, the inside of the frame of the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The same effect can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. It can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the back-front left decoration 3030 and the back-front right decoration 3040 are configured to extend to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back-front left decoration is inside the door window 101a. It is possible to make the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600, etc., behind the 3030 and the back right decoration 3040 invisible, and to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Further, since the back front left decoration 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inside of the door window 101a in the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decoration 3030 is used to lift the back front left lift. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily long. It is possible to reduce the cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, according to this embodiment, the first front wall 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is made parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since the sticker is attached, the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), and the first starting opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first starting opening 2002 than to the general winning opening 2001, and the number of the game balls B received in the first starting opening 2002 decreases (or the first starting). It is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress a decrease in interest, and it is possible to surely recognize the position of the first starting opening 2002 that the player should aim at, and aim the player at the first starting opening 2002. You can entertain the game.

Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is received in the first starting opening 2002, the player can be harassed, and when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002, Depending on whether or not the winning (for example, "big hit") in which an advantageous game state occurs due to the lottery of the first special lottery result, the player can be excited and excited, and the expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. After that, when the winning is selected by a lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous game state in which the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern occurs, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first starting opening 2002 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the first special lottery result is not drawn. As a result, the player is not discouraged, and the player can continue to enjoy the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Also, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different in form (appearance), a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a seal is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unattractive, making the player enjoy the game on the pachinko machine 1 and lowering the excitement. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. This can prevent a decrease in interest. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 Since the light from the means (LED on the decorative substrate) can be reflected, refracted, or diffused, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous and look good. Thus, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B is placed in the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided to the rear later than the game ball B accepted in 2001, the game ball B accepted in the first starting opening 2002 in which the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is made into the general winning opening 2001. Since the game ball B can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (excellence) due to the acceptance of the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 is given to the general winning. The player can enjoy the game ball B for a longer period of time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since it can be discharged to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, it is useless for the game ball B being received in the general winning port 2001. It is possible to suppress the player from feeling for a long time, and the player's interest can be directed to the next game ball B, so that the game can be smoothly advanced and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, after inclining the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface with respect to the game panel 1100, a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. Since it is possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Then, depending on the player, it is possible to give the illusion that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and entertain the player. At this time, since part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and to the player. As a result, it is possible to keep the game entertained and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning is achieved. It is possible to omit decoration such as a seal on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of the general winning opening 2001, and by turning that amount to a production device or the like, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back under middle decoration unit 3320 of the under under middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, a rotating under back middle rotation having a plurality of (here, 6) stop positions of even-numbered places. The decorative body 3310 is provided with a region detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions, and a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, and the area detection piece 3325. A plurality of (here, three) area specifying sensors 3330 that detect half of the stop positions, and one position specifying sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326. Since the middle-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 are sequentially increased from one side in the rotation direction and then decreased. Therefore, the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensors 3330 detecting the area detecting pieces 3325.

More specifically, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 which has six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three side-by-side stop positions in which the number of the area detection pieces 3325 is half. And the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is at the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325 at the time of (the position of the decorative numeral “3”). When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated from this state to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. To do. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detection, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detected, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c detects the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number of "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detecting, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting pieces 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is further rotated, it is rotated to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325. In this state, the detection and non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above are repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

As described above, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, the combination of the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 enables the decoration to be performed in the lower back center. The rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detection until the middle-under-the-back rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. It is possible to roughly grasp the current position of the middle-turn ornament 3310.

Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (here, six) position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detecting pieces 3325 of the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 are detected. After roughly detecting the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by minimizing the shift of the stop position.

Further, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, it is possible to accurately stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play. It is possible to prevent a person from feeling uncomfortable (discomfort), and to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the back-and-center-in-the-middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give the player any discomfort.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower inner rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, the back under-center rotating decorative body 3310 can be given a strong impact on the player by rotating the back under-center rotating decorative body 3310, and the player can rotate the back-under-center rotating decorative body 3310. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotation surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in the front, and is freely rotated after being rotated. Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect in which the rotation stops at the stop position, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the movable effect by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensor 3330) necessary for detecting the movement to any stop position. And the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (the grasp of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (the area specifying sensor 3330 and the position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 in the back lower middle effect unit 3300 has the six stop positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have four to ten stop positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) is shown as a rotating body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. As the above, "circling", "straight-moving", "arc-moving", "curved-moving", etc. may be used.

[5-12. Improving the reflectance by insulating coating on the land of each decorative board provided in the game board]
Next, a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole formed on each decorative board provided in the game board 5 (hereinafter, a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole according to the first to fourth embodiments. )) will be described with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284. FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5, ( It is the schematic (b) of the cross section of the XX line in a), and is the schematic (c) of the modification of (b), and FIG. 282 shows the front surface (front surface) of each decoration board with which the game board 5 is equipped. It is the schematic (a) explaining the structure which covers the land of the through hole which concerns on 2nd Embodiment formed with an insulating film, and is the schematic (b) of the cross section of the XX line in (a). , (B) is a schematic view of a modified example of (b), and FIG. 283 insulates from the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the game board 5. It is the schematic (a) explaining the structure which covers a film, the schematic (b) of the cross section of the XX line in (a), and the schematic (c) of the modification of (b), 284 is a schematic view (a) for explaining a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5, (a) 3B is a schematic view (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in FIG. 281 to 284, those having the same function are denoted by the same reference numerals, and each decorative substrate included in the game board 5 is represented as a decorative substrate KB.

As described above, the through hole is a through hole in which the inner peripheral wall of the through hole is copper-plated and has conductivity, and the through hole for mounting the electronic component and the through hole for not mounting the electronic component. The structure of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating coating according to the first to fourth embodiments is adopted for the through hole in which the electronic component is not mounted. Each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is provided with non-through holes in addition to the through holes in the decorative board KB, and the non-through holes are not provided with copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the through hole, so that the decorative board KB is provided. Since the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (rear surface) do not have lands, the inner wall of the through hole is copper-plated, and the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate KB are landed. Is greatly different from the through hole. The non-through holes are formed to attach the substrate to the member, or to fix an electronic component to which an external force is applied (a connector or the like where wiring is attached/detached) to the substrate. The structure in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film may be used for the through hole for mounting the electronic component.

Here, first, each decorative board included in the game board 5 will be briefly described, and the structure of covering the land of the through hole according to the first to fourth embodiments with the insulating coating, and mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board. The connectors will be described in order.

In addition, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the first to fourth embodiments with the insulating coating, a heat source such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) is mounted on each of the decorative boards included in the game board 5. The present invention is not applied to a decorative substrate on which a heat source such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) is mounted, while the present invention is applied to a decorative substrate that is not included. In addition, the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating coating according to the first to fourth embodiments is the drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor (to be described later) that drives the first distribution drive motor that is an electric drive source (see 217), a drive circuit 1310vb (see FIG. 217) for a second distribution drive motor, which will be described later, that drives a second distribution drive motor that is an electrical drive source, and a drive solenoid that is an electrical drive source. This does not apply to the main control board 1310 on which a heat source such as a drive solenoid drive IC 1310da (see FIG. 218) described later is mounted, and a payout motor drive IC 633adb (FIG. 221) that drives a payout motor 584, which is an electric drive source, described below. Of the peripheral control IC 1510a (see FIG. 206) or the like which is not applied to the payout control board 633 on which a heat source such as (see FIG. 206) is mounted and which is air-cooled by an air-cooling fan FAN (see FIG. 206) described later. This does not apply to the mounted peripheral control board 1510.

Each board on which these heat sources are mounted (that is, the decoration board provided in the game board, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510) is an IC (that is, an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit)). , A first distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310va, a second distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310vb, a drive solenoid drive IC 1310da, a payout motor drive IC 633adb). Although the structure of covering the land of the through hole formed on the pattern with the insulating coating on the land of the through hole according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied, the land of the through hole according to the first or second embodiment is not applied. To each IC (that is, LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), first distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310va, second distribution drive motor drive circuit 1310vb, drive solenoid drive IC 1310da, payout motor drive) It may be applied to a pad portion to which each terminal of the IC 633 adb) is soldered.

Further, the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating coating according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied to the power supply substrate 630 to be described later on which the heat radiation fin is mounted. Of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, the decorative board may be configured so that the heat radiation fins are mounted. In this case, the configuration of covering the land of the through holes according to the first to fourth embodiments with the insulating coating is , Is not applied to the decorative substrate on which the radiation fins are mounted, whereas it is applied to the decorative substrate on which the radiation fins are not mounted. Further, the heat dissipation fins may be mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 or the liquid crystal output board 1530 (see FIG. 206), and in this case, the land of the through hole according to the first to fourth embodiments may be mounted. The structure in which the insulating coating is applied is not applied to the peripheral control board 1510 or the liquid crystal output board 1530 on which the heat radiation fins are mounted.

Further, an amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat, as will be described later. It may be housed or mounted in a metal case. Therefore, the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating coating according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied to the amplifier substrate.

[5-12-1. Each decorative board provided in the game board]
First, as described above, each of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is provided with the back-rear decorative board 3114 provided in the back-removable decorative body 3110 shown in FIG. 145 and the back lower left effect unit 3200 shown in FIG. 159. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203, the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 included in the lower back right effect unit 3250 shown in FIG. 159, the first lower decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back intermediate decorative body unit 3320 shown in FIG. 165, and Second underneath second decorative board 3329, back up front decorative board 3422 included in the back up effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171, and back up and down of the back up/down decorative body unit 3450 included in the back up effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 173. Rear decorative board 3452, rear rear left decorative board 3522 provided in rear rear left decorative body unit 3520 shown in FIG. 181, rear rear right decorative board 3622 provided in rear rear right decorative body unit 3620 shown in FIG. 188, and FIG. There is a back front left decoration board 3714 provided in the back front left decoration body unit 3710, a back front right decoration board 3814 provided in the back front right decoration body unit 3810 shown in FIG. On the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (rear surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution as an insulating coating on almost the entire surface (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid coating"). Sometimes referred to as “white resist”), a white resist layer is formed. In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the game board 5, a full-color LED that enables identification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), which are electronic components, on a solid white resist When the part number, the attribute of the electronic part such as the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged (in addition, the shape of the electronic part, the size of the electronic part, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic part, the model of the electronic part) Is printed with silk paint with yellow paint. As the attribute of the electronic component, a solid line, a broken line, or a character in the case of a model is used.

The white color of the resist liquid may be a light white color or a dark white color due to variations, or may be a dark white color or a bright white color. In addition, since the ink companies that supply the resist liquid have a wide range of white (for example, yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), white is used as the resist liquid for the same substrate manufacturing company or multiple substrate companies. Even if specified, the colors are not completely the same white (it is difficult to make them completely the same white), and the white has a width.

Here, the reason why the resist liquid color is white and the silk printing paint is yellow will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is far from the reflectance of white as compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of the white coating film, it has high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the notation part is red, the red notation part is conspicuous with respect to the white resist, whereas the white part is white. In the combination of and the yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and when the notation is yellow, the yellow notation is less noticeable than the white resist.

A player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face) to change the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). Even if it is visible, the part number of the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is placed on the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5. Since the notation part showing the attributes of the electronic parts such as the region shown is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, the yellow notation part is less noticeable than the white resist and has no relation to the game for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

In addition, the notation part showing the attributes of the electronic parts such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) that are electronic parts, , The front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 was printed by silk printing with yellow paint, but instead of this, a yellow color is provided on the rear surface (back surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5. The paint may be printed by silk printing, a color different from yellow (for example, a non-light color such as black, or a color such as blue, green, or red). It may be made to print by silk printing with the paint of 1). In this case, there is nothing printed by silk printing on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5, and only the rear surface (back surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 is printed by silk printing. There will be what is done. By doing this, the reflectance of the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the plurality of LEDs is increased by the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5. Can contribute. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the component number of the electronic component and the attribute of the electronic component which have no relation to the game to the player.

Further, the notation part showing the attributes of the electronic parts such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) which are electronic parts, , The front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 was printed by silk printing with yellow paint, but instead of this, the part number of the full-color LED is printed as a foil-cut character (that is, a wiring pattern is formed). On the copper foil surface to form a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil and remove the surrounding copper foil) to form the full-color LED attributes except for each terminal (not shown) and wiring pattern (not shown). The front surface of each decorative substrate which is formed as a foil removal area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil excluding the terminals and the wiring pattern on the copper foil surface on which the wiring pattern is formed) and provided on the game board 5. The foil-removed region and the foil-removed character may be covered with a white resist that is solidly coated on the (front surface). Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as a foil-removing region on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the game board 5, and a full-color LED is provided near the foil-removing region. The corresponding part number is formed as a blank character on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5, and the foil is removed by the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5. The area and its foiled letters are covered. The wiring pattern that forms the characters without the foil is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. By doing this, the reflectance of the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the plurality of LEDs is increased by the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5. Can contribute. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the component number of the electronic component and the attribute of the electronic component which have no relation to the game to the player.

Further, the notation part showing the attributes of the electronic parts such as the part number of the full-color LED, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, and the like that can specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) that are electronic parts , The front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 was silk-printed with a yellow paint, but instead of this, a white color using a white resist that is twice coated with the part number of the full-color LED The attribute of the full-color LED may be formed as a white-resist-excluding region using a double-coated white resist as well as the resist-excluding character. Specifically, for example, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 is almost the same as the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 as the first of the white resists that are applied twice. The whole is covered with a white resist (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate included in the game board 5 as the first of the double-coated white resist). Then, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged (the area for instructing the arrangement of a predetermined pin number) as the second time of the white resist that has been coated twice. (Including cutouts) is masked as white resist removal areas, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs are masked as white resist removal characters in the vicinity of these white resist removal areas. The entire front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in 5 is covered with a white resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5, but the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the second layer of the second layer. By covering the whole area excluding the area masked by the white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the white-resist removal area, and at the same time the full-color LED is removed. The part number corresponding to the LED is formed as a white resist-less character. Since the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same, the white resist of the first layer and the second resist of the second layer are adopted. A shade occurs with the white resist of, and the base (copper foil surface (copper foil part) and copper foil surface (copper foil) of the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 through the second layer white resist Looking at the area except the foil portion), the same below), the white resist of the second layer looks dark in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap. On the other hand, in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap with each other due to the masking, the white resist of the first layer covers the white resist of the second layer. By being exposed without being exposed, the white resist of the first layer looks light. In other words, when looking at the underside of the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal area and the white resist removal characters in the first layer white resist are identified. You can do it. By doing this, the reflectance of the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the plurality of LEDs is increased by the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5. Can contribute. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the component number of the electronic component and the attribute of the electronic component which have no relation to the game to the player.

Further, the notation part showing the attributes of the electronic parts such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area showing the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which makes it possible to specify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) which are electronic parts, , The front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 was silk-printed with yellow paint, but instead of this, the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 ), there may be no area printed by silk printing. By doing this, the reflectance of the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the plurality of LEDs is increased by the white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5. Can contribute. Further, it is possible to completely prevent the player from visually recognizing the component number of the electronic component and the attribute of the electronic component which have no relation to the game to the player. Further, since the step of silk printing can be omitted, it is possible to reduce the board manufacturing cost by reducing the plate cost of silk printing and the number of board manufacturing steps.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration board KB, and on the rear surface (back surface) of the decoration board KB, in addition to a connector for connecting electrical wiring to the decoration board KB, a resistor, a capacitor, and a plurality of LEDs. In some cases, one or a plurality of electronic components such as a circuit (for example, a constant current drive circuit) that controls the emission of light are mounted. An LED is an electronic component whose package has a white color or a color close to white (for example, ivory color, beige color, cream color), and a connector has a housing whose color is white or close to white ( For example, it is an electronic component having an ivory color, a beige color, a cream color, and the constant current drive circuit is housed in an IC package which may have a black color as an integrated circuit, and is a surface mount type (SMD type) LED driver. An electronic component that is an IC, a resistor is a surface mounting type (SMD type) electronic component having black, blue, white, or the like, and a capacitor is a surface mounting type having black, brown, gray, or white, or the like. It is a (SMD type) electronic component. On the rear surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate KB, an electronic component (connector, resistor, capacitor, circuit for controlling light emission of a plurality of LEDs, etc.) can be specified on a solid white resist. The parts such as the part number and the area indicating the attribute of the electronic part may be printed by silk printing with yellow paint, or a color different from yellow (for example, a non-light color such as black Alternatively, the color may be blue, green, red, or the like) and may be printed by silk printing.

It is better that the surface mount type (SMD type) resistor is arranged only on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which no LED is mounted and not on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. It is possible to increase the area of the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is because most surface mount type (SMD type) resistors have a black top surface (sometimes referred to as a protective film) except for the terminal portion, and a black top surface resistor is a decorative substrate. When placed on the front surface (front surface) of the KB, the reflectance is different from that of the white resist. Therefore, the dark black color exists in the light-colored white resist. The reflectance due to the resist is reduced, and the uniformity of the reflectance is impaired. In addition, since the resistor whose top surface is black (dark color) is a color that stands out (a color that is easy to see) when combined with the white color (light color) of the resist, the player should see a black color that is unnecessary. Therefore, the effect may be reduced. Also, the resistance value may be written on the upper surface (protective film) of the surface mount type (SMD type) resistor, and when the upper surface (protective film) is black, the numbers or symbols indicating the resistance value are white. However, since the black area that is the base is overwhelmingly larger than the number or symbol that indicates the resistance value, the upper surface (protective film) is recognized as black even when the resistance value is indicated. It Depending on the mounting density of the decorative board KB, heat dissipation measures, and the arrangement position of the decorative board KB, resistors may be arranged also on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The surface mount type (SMD type) capacitor (ceramic capacitor) is arranged only on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which no LED is mounted, and on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. If not arranged, the area of the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB can be increased. This is because the surface mount type (SMD type) capacitor (ceramic capacitor) generally has an upper surface (because it is often manufactured by the green sheet method and the upper surface is made of ceramic which is a dielectric). Most of them are brown except for the terminal part, and when a capacitor with a brown top surface (ceramic capacitor) is placed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB, the reflectance is different from that of the white resist. Due to the presence of dark brown color, the reflectance of the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB is reduced, and the uniformity of the reflectance is impaired. Also, a capacitor (ceramic capacitor) whose top surface is brown (dark) is combined with the resist white (light). Since the color is conspicuous (a color that is easy to see), the player may see an unnecessary brown color, which may reduce the effect of production. A capacitor (ceramic capacitor) may be arranged also on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, depending on the mounting density of the decorative substrate KB, heat dissipation measures, and the arrangement position of the decorative substrate KB.

When the connector is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB, it is desirable to use a connector having the same color as the solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB, that is, a housing having a white housing. .. When the connector is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB, colors such as white, black, and blue may be used except for special cases.

If yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow color printed by silk printing may become pale yellow or dark yellow due to variations in the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a wide range of yellow (yellow on the bright side and yellow on the dark side), so as a silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, the colors will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make them exactly the same), and the colors will have a wide range of yellow. For this reason, the marking part is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, but in addition to yellow, the marking part is painted with a paint having a color close to the brightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). Even when printed by silk printing, similar to the above-mentioned yellow paint, the color does not become close to the brightness of the exact same white (it is difficult to make the color close to the brightness of the exact same white), and the brightness of the white There is a wide range of colors close to. Even when a color different from yellow is used as the paint for silk-printing the notation part, it has a wide range of color, like the above-mentioned yellow paint.

The LED is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, but may be a single color LED such as white, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, or green, or a surface-mount top-view type LED. May be used, or a surface mount type side view type may be used. Further, in addition to the surface mount type LED being used, a cannonball type LED may be used.

Further, a connector for connecting electric wiring to the decorative board KB was mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative board KB, but the color of the housing of the connector was white or a color close to white (for example, ivory color, In the case of an electronic component having beige or cream color, it may be mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is a decoration by this connector by mounting a white connector (or a connector of a color close to white) having a color similar to the white coating film which is an insulating coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB. This is because it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate KB.

[5-12-2. Configuration of Covering Insulating Coating on Land of Through Hole According to First Embodiment]
In the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 281 (a) and (b), the base material KBo of the decorative substrate KB is in the plate thickness direction (the base material of the decorative substrate KB). A thin through hole is formed in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (vertical surface back surface) of the KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are formed. The front (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 each having the outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil, and the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the rear surface (rear surface) side are formed. A wiring pattern is formed. The through hole KTH1 is formed by subjecting the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole to conductive plating. The outer diameter of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are outside. The diameter is KTHD1 and the sizes are the same.

A front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and one end of a front surface (front surface) wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected to each other. In addition to being connected, the other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to one full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors or a pad to which specific terminals of a plurality of full-color LEDs are soldered. ing.

In addition, the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. Include a first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and a second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the second front surface. One end of the (front surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and two wires from the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1. The front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed. In addition, a rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is formed. Include a first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the second rear surface. One end of the (rear surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and two rear surface (rear surface) lands KRDy1 are provided. The rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the rear surface (rear surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, the pad to which the specific terminal of the IC for controlling the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are Any pad such as a pad to be soldered is electrically connected.

The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are connected through the through hole KTH1. , And the front surface (front surface) wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB ( The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear surface (rear surface) formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. ) Side land KRDy1 is electrically connected.

Although a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to form a front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the front surface (front surface) side resist is formed. A front surface (front surface) side resist opening portion KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the layer KBxr. .. Although a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB to form a rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, the rear surface (rear surface) side is formed. In the region corresponding to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 of the resist layer KByr, a rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening portion KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is formed. There is.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front surface (front surface) side resist opening portion KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening portion KByra are the same. A board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and a board ground (GND) (that is, solid surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. And (ground) are electrically connected to each other through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one regular-sized copper clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one copper clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to a manufacturing apparatus, a process of coating, a process of drying, a process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each substrate is cut out. ..

As described above, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, in the area corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the front surface (front surface) side resist opening portion KBxra having the smaller opening diameter KBxrD1 is formed, the front surface goes from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 toward the center of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. The outer peripheral portion of the (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be covered with the white resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the front surface (land) side land KRDx1 can be reduced.

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on both the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1, the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the decorative substrate KB is different from the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. The decorative board KB can be electrically inspected (operation check or abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact, and from the rear surface (rear surface) side of the decorative board KB to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1. The electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB (operation confirmation or abnormal potential confirmation) can be performed by bringing the tip portion of the contact probe into contact. That is, the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for conducting continuity check of a so-called “tester”.

Further, since the tip portion of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. Since the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe should be brought into contact with the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB. If it is possible, an electrical inspection (operation confirmation or abnormal potential confirmation) of the decorative substrate KB can be performed as a defect inspection of the decorative substrate KB without performing a work for taking out the decorative substrate KB.

By the way, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are viewed as a point light source when they are of a type with a small irradiation angle (a type with a narrow irradiation angle), and are visually recognized by the player as an aggregate of point light sources. There is a risk that you will feel uncomfortable. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are of a type having a large irradiation angle (a type having a wide irradiation angle) so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED increases (the irradiation angle of the LED increases), the range illuminated by the LED increases, so that the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED reflects on a plurality of other members and the decorative substrate KB. Many will come back to. Therefore, if the light returning to the decoration board KB can be reflected so as to be emitted to the front of the decoration board KB, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is mounted. By using as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emission effect.

As described above, the decoration substrate KB has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and a rear surface (rear surface) formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 is formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. On the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, as described above, the solid white resist is formed as the insulating coating, and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance of the white resist (white coating film) solidly coated as an insulating film and the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 are reflected. Therefore, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Therefore, in the configuration of covering the land of the through-hole according to the first embodiment with the insulating coating, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is covered with the white resist as the insulating coating. By setting such a state, the area of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed is kept small, and the reflectance by the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is reduced. It is possible to contribute to making it uniform (uniform).

In addition, the decoration board KB that can be visually recognized by the player is obtained by covering the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration board KB with an insulating coating of white resist. In the above, since the rate at which the copper foil exposed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is exposed can be reduced, the reflectance by the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is made uniform (uniform). As a result, it is possible to make the copper foil part inconspicuous and contribute to the improvement of the light-emission production effect of the decorative substrate KB.

In addition, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is provided with an inner lens that is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) and is capable of irregularly refracting light as described above. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the presence of the holes of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. By adopting the structure of covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with the insulating film, the existence of the hole of the front surface (front surface) side KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is more played. Can be difficult to understand. Further, when there is a difference in the reflection efficiency due to the thickness of the white resist solidly coated as an insulating coating formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the shade of the color, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. It is possible to enhance the directing effect.

Further, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 is the player's largest visual recognition target, the decorative substrate around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), the decorative substrate disposed so as to cover the upper side of) and the decorative substrate movably disposed at a position covering the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are insulated from the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment. In the structure in which the film is covered, the reflectance of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform) by minimizing the portion of the through hole that is not covered by the insulating film. That is, the effect of making the copper foil part less noticeable, the effect of making the existence of the through hole more difficult for the player to understand, and the like are enhanced. Also, at other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens that is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) and can diffract light. In the case of the above, the structure in which the insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment makes the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform). The effect, the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, the effect of making the existence of the through-holes more invisible to the player, and the like are provided. It should be noted that, with respect to each of the decorative boards included in the door frame 3 and each of the decorative boards included in the game board 5, the decorative boards included in the game board 5 are closer to the effect display device 1600 than the decorative boards included in the door frame 3. Because of the arrangement, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating coating according to the first embodiment, the reflectance by the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). It can be said that the effect is high, the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, and the effect of making the existence of the through hole more difficult for the player to understand.

In the configuration in which the insulating film covers the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment, the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr. In the region to be formed, a rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1. The outer peripheral portion of the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery toward the center of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1, as shown in FIG. 281(c). In the region corresponding to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 in the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is provided. The rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is reflected on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. Since KBy cannot be used as a reflection surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance by the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above. This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emission effect.

Further, in the configuration in which the insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating film. Although a white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed as described above, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is almost entirely covered with a white resist liquid as an insulating coating. While a white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by coating with, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which no LED is mounted is almost entirely covered with an insulating film. The resist layer of another color may be formed by a coating film of another color formed by applying a resist liquid of another color different from white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is reflected on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. Since KBy cannot be used as a reflection surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance by the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above. This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emission effect.

Further, in the configuration in which the insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are almost entirely coated with a white resist solution as an insulating film. Although the white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed as described above, one or both of the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is almost entirely formed. The white silk-printed layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by silk-printing with a white paint as the insulating coating. In this case, the electronic part can be identified on the white silk-printed layer formed on one surface or both surfaces. It is printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the marking portion may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to the brightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). When the above-mentioned white silk-printed layer is formed on one surface or both surfaces, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (the copper foil surface excluding a predetermined area in addition to the pad to which the electronic component is soldered) ) May be formed or a resist layer may not be formed.When forming a resist layer, a white paint as an insulating coating is applied by silk printing so as to cover the resist layer. The white coating film formed by printing forms a white silk printing layer. The resist layer may be a white resist liquid or a resist liquid of a color other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Further, the structure of covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with the insulating coating can be applied to the land of the through hole of the function display substrate 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, the black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c by the black coating film formed by applying the black resist solution. When the black resist solution is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are emitted by preventing reflection by the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. It can contribute to preventing the light from mixing with it. For this reason, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) side land of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c is covered with a black resist as an insulating coating, whereby the front surface where the copper foil is exposed ( To reduce the reflectance by suppressing the area of the front surface side land to contribute to make the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform). You can

Further, as described above, the through-hole has conductivity by copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the through-hole, and the through-hole for mounting the electronic component and the electronic component are mounted. There is a through hole that does not exist, and the structure of covering the land of either through hole with an insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment. The structure of covering the land of the through-hole according to the first embodiment with the insulating coating may not be adopted for the device provided directly below the electronic component. That is, of the through holes on which the electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through holes provided directly below the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is exposed. To do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, it is not necessary to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through hole hole This is because it is not necessary for the player to easily understand it, and the presence of the land of the through hole and the presence of the hole of the through hole are visually confirmed in the electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB from the surface on which the electronic component is not mounted. Moreover, the electrical inspection (operation check or abnormal potential check) of the decorative substrate KB can be performed by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-3. Configuration of Covering Insulation Coating on Land of Through Hole According to Second Embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment is covered with the insulating film, as shown in FIGS. 282 (a) and (b), the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative substrate KB (the decorative substrate KB A thin through hole is formed in a direction perpendicular to the front surface (back surface vertical direction) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the copper surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are formed. A front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and a rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil on the foil surface and the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the rear surface (rear surface). ) Side wiring pattern is formed. Through holes KTH1 are formed by subjecting the through holes to conductive plating. The outer diameter of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are outside. The diameter is KTHD1, which is the same size, and the outside diameter and the rear surface (rear surface) side land of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in the configuration in which the insulating film is covered on the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

A front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and one end of a front surface (front surface) wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected to each other. In addition to being connected, the other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to one full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors or a pad to which specific terminals of a plurality of full-color LEDs are soldered. ing.

The rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the rear surface (rear surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, the pad to which the specific terminal of the IC for controlling the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are Any pad such as a pad to be soldered is electrically connected.

In addition, the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. Include a first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and a second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the second front surface. One end of the (front surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and two wires from the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1. The front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed. In addition, a rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is formed. Include a first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the second rear surface. One end of the (rear surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and two rear surface (rear surface) lands KRDy1 are provided. The rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are connected through the through hole KTH1. , And the front surface (front surface) wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB ( The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear surface (rear surface) formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. ) Side land KRDy1 is electrically connected.

Although a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to form the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the front surface (front surface) side resist is formed. An area of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and is insulated from the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment. A front side (front surface) side resist opening portion KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the structure for covering the film and larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 is formed. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is obtained by adding a resist solution intrusion prevention region that concentrically spreads outward from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (front surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1, and the front surface (surface of the through hole KTH1 ) Side distance of resist liquid intrusion from the inner peripheral edge (resist liquid intrusion prevention distance is set to at least 0.5 mm or more in order to prevent the white resist liquid from entering the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB. The distance dimension is required, and 0.5 mm is adopted in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment with the insulating coating.) Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is equal to the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. It is as large as 1.0 mm.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating to form a rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, but the rear surface ( In the area corresponding to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, a rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening portion KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is formed. Has been formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with the insulating coating.

A board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and a board ground (GND) (that is, solid surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. And (ground) are electrically connected to each other through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one regular-sized copper clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one copper clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to a manufacturing apparatus, a process of coating, a process of drying, a process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each substrate is cut out. ..

As described above, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, in the area corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. An opening diameter KBxrD1 which is smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above is covered with an insulating coating, and which is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. Since the front surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, the front surface (front surface) side land is formed from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. Outer portion of KRDx1 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention region (that is, the region extending from the front (front surface) side inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 to the position separated by the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm)) Is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating. As a result, the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB extends from almost the inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB). Since the white resist can be covered as an insulating film (over the area excluding the resist solution intrusion prevention area), the exposed portion of the copper foil becomes the resist solution intrusion prevention area. As a result, the area of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 in which the copper foil is exposed can be suppressed to be extremely small as compared with that in the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment is covered with the insulating coating. it can.

Further, since the resist solution intrusion prevention region is provided for the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, a white resist solution is provided as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. When applied, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is oriented vertically upward (the decorative substrate KB is actually a plurality of substrates from one standard copper clad laminate (base material)). Since it is placed and finally cut out and manufactured, one white copper clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing device so that the front surface of the copper clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward, and a white resist solution is actually produced. Even if it is applied, the white resist solution penetrates into the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and is dried without blocking the hole.

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on both the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1, the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the decorative substrate KB is different from the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. The decorative board KB can be electrically inspected (operation check or abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact, and from the rear surface (rear surface) side of the decorative board KB to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1. The electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB (operation confirmation or abnormal potential confirmation) can be performed by bringing the tip portion of the contact probe into contact. That is, the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for conducting continuity check of a so-called “tester”.

Further, since the tip portion of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. Since the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe should be brought into contact with the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB. If it is possible, an electrical inspection (operation confirmation or abnormal potential confirmation) of the decorative substrate KB can be performed as a defect inspection of the decorative substrate KB without performing a work for taking out the decorative substrate KB.

By the way, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are viewed as a point light source when they are of a type with a small irradiation angle (a type with a narrow irradiation angle), and are visually recognized by the player as an aggregate of point light sources. There is a risk that you will feel uncomfortable. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are of a type having a large irradiation angle (a type having a wide irradiation angle) so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED increases (the irradiation angle of the LED increases), the range illuminated by the LED increases, so that the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED reflects on a plurality of other members and the decorative substrate KB. Many will come back to. Therefore, if the light returning to the decoration board KB can be reflected so as to be emitted to the front of the decoration board KB, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is mounted. By using as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emission effect.

As described above, the decoration substrate KB has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and a rear surface (rear surface) formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 is formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. On the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, as described above, the solid white resist is formed as the insulating coating, and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance of the white resist (white coating film) solidly coated as an insulating film and the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 are reflected. Therefore, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Therefore, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating coating according to the second embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB extends from substantially the inside to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, Since the white resist can be covered as an insulating coating over the area of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, the copper The area of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in which the copper foil is exposed is larger than that of the through-hole land according to the first embodiment because the exposed portion of the foil serves as a resist solution intrusion prevention region. In comparison with a structure in which an insulating coating is applied on the LED substrate, it is suppressed to be extremely small, and the reflectance by the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform). Compared to the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the embodiment is covered with the insulating coating, it is possible to contribute more.

In addition, from the substantially inner side of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KBx). In the decorative substrate KB that can be visually recognized by the player by leaving the white resist as the insulating coating over the region excluding the resist liquid invasion prevention region), the front surface (surface of the decorative substrate KB) ) Since it is possible to reduce the rate at which the copper foil exposed on KBx is exposed, by making the reflectance by the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform), the portion of the copper foil is less noticeable. The decorative substrate KB can contribute to the improvement of the light emitting effect.

In addition, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is provided with an inner lens which is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) and capable of irregularly refracting light as described above. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the presence of the holes of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. By adopting the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment is covered with the insulating coating, the existence of the hole of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is more played. Can be difficult to understand. Further, when there is a difference in the reflection efficiency due to the thickness of the white resist solidly coated as an insulating coating formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the shade of the color, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. It is possible to enhance the directing effect.

Further, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 is the player's largest visual recognition target, the decorative substrate around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), the decorative substrate arranged so as to cover the upper side of) and the decorative substrate movably arranged at a position covering the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are insulated from the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment. In the structure in which the film is covered, as compared with the structure in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the first embodiment, a portion where the insulating film is not covered with respect to the land of the through hole is reduced as much as possible, so that a plurality of LEDs can be formed. The effect of making the reflectance of the front surface of the decorative board on which is mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, and the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand The effect will be higher. Also, at other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens that is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) and can diffract light. In the case of a plurality of LEDs, a plurality of LEDs are mounted by the structure of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the second embodiment, as compared with the structure of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the first embodiment. The effect of making the reflectance of the front surface of the decorative board uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, and the effect of making the presence of through-hole holes more invisible to the player Etc. It should be noted that, with respect to each of the decorative boards included in the door frame 3 and each of the decorative boards included in the game board 5, the decorative boards included in the game board 5 are closer to the effect display device 1600 than the decorative boards included in the door frame 3. Because of the arrangement, it is said that the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform) in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment. It can be said that the effect is high, the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, the effect of making the existence of the through hole more difficult for the player to understand, and the like.

In the configuration of covering the land of the through-hole according to the second embodiment with the insulating film, the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr. In the region to be formed, a rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1. 28. Although the outer peripheral portion of the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery toward the center of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1, as shown in FIG. 282(c). In the region corresponding to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 in the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is provided. The rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening portion KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is reflected on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. Since KBy cannot be used as a reflection surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance by the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above. This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emission effect.

Further, in the configuration of covering the land of the through-hole according to the second embodiment with the insulating coating, the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are coated almost entirely with the white resist liquid as an insulating coating. Although the white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed as described above, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is almost entirely white as an insulating coating. While a white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by coating with, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which no LED is mounted is almost entirely covered with an insulating film. A resist layer of another color may be formed by a coating film of another color formed by applying a resist liquid of another color different from white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is reflected on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. Since KBy cannot be used as a reflection surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance by the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above. This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emission effect.

Further, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating coating according to the second embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are coated with a white resist solution as an insulating coating almost all over. Although the white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed as described above, one or both of the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is almost entirely formed. The white silk-printed layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by silk-printing with a white paint as the insulating coating. In this case, the electronic part can be identified on the white silk-printed layer formed on one surface or both surfaces. It is printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the marking portion may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to the brightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). When the above-mentioned white silk-printed layer is formed on one surface or both surfaces, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (the copper foil surface excluding a predetermined area in addition to the pad to which the electronic component is soldered) ) May be formed or a resist layer may not be formed.When forming a resist layer, a white paint as an insulating coating is applied by silk printing so as to cover the resist layer. The white coating film formed by printing forms a white silk printing layer. The resist layer may be a white resist liquid or a resist liquid of a color other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Further, the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment with the insulating coating can be applied to the land of the through hole of the function display substrate 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, the black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c by the black coating film formed by applying the black resist solution. When the black resist solution is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are emitted by preventing reflection by the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. It can contribute to preventing the light from mixing with it. Therefore, the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c extends substantially from the inner side of the front surface (front surface) land to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front surface (front surface) land of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. Since the black resist can be covered as an insulating coating over the area excluding the resist liquid invasion prevention area), the exposed portion of the copper foil becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area. As a result, the area of the front surface (front surface) side land where the copper foil is exposed is much smaller than that of the function display substrate 1400c which adopts the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with the insulating coating. In order to make the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform) by suppressing the reflectance to a small value, the through hole of the first embodiment is provided. Compared to the functional display substrate 1400c which adopts a structure in which the land is covered with the insulating coating, it can contribute more.

Further, as described above, the through-hole has conductivity by copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the through-hole, and the through-hole for mounting the electronic component and the electronic component are mounted. There is a non-through hole, and the land of either through hole is covered with an insulating film on the land of the through hole according to the second embodiment. The structure of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating film according to the second embodiment may not be adopted for the device provided directly below the electronic component. That is, of the through holes on which the electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through holes provided directly below the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is exposed. To do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, it is not necessary to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through hole hole This is because it is not necessary for the player to easily understand it, and the presence of the land of the through hole and the presence of the hole of the through hole are visually confirmed in the electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB from the surface on which the electronic component is not mounted. Moreover, the electrical inspection (operation check or abnormal potential check) of the decorative substrate KB can be performed by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-4. Configuration of Covering Insulating Coating on Land of Through Hole According to Third Embodiment]
In the configuration in which the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment is covered with the insulating coating, as shown in FIGS. 283(a) and 283(b), the base material KBo of the decorative substrate KB is in the thickness direction (of the decorative substrate KB). A thin through hole is formed in a direction perpendicular to the front surface (back surface vertical direction) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the copper surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are formed. A front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and a rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil on the foil surface and the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the rear surface (rear surface). ) Side wiring pattern is formed. Through holes KTH1 are formed by subjecting the through holes to conductive plating. The outer diameter of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are outside. The diameter is KTHD1, which is the same size, and the outside diameter and the rear surface (rear surface) side land of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in the configuration in which the insulating film is covered on the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

A front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and one end of a front surface (front surface) wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected to each other. In addition to being connected, the other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to one full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors or a pad to which specific terminals of a plurality of full-color LEDs are soldered. ing.

In addition, the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. Include a first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and a second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the second front surface. One end of the (front surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and two wires from the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1. The front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed. In addition, a rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is formed. Include a first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the second rear surface. One end of the (rear surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and two rear surface (rear surface) lands KRDy1 are provided. The rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the rear surface (rear surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, the pad to which the specific terminal of the IC for controlling the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are Any pad such as a pad to be soldered is electrically connected.

The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are connected through the through hole KTH1. , And the front surface (front surface) wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB ( The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear surface (rear surface) formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. ) Side land KRDy1 is electrically connected.

On the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating to form the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. A region of the layer KBxr corresponding to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 is also coated with a white resist solution as an insulating coating to form a front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr.

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one regular-sized copper clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one copper clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to a manufacturing apparatus, a process of coating, a process of drying, a process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each substrate is cut out. .. Therefore, when a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB faces vertically upward. (Actually, the decorative substrate KB is manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one copper clad laminated board (base material) and finally cutting out the copper clad laminated board (base material). The plate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing apparatus so that the front surface thereof faces vertically upward, and the white resist liquid enters from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB on the front surface (front surface) side. It will be closed. Due to its own weight, the white resist solution that has entered the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is dented from the inner peripheral edge of the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole and is dried. Becomes

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating to form a rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, but the rear surface ( In the area corresponding to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, a rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening portion KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is formed. Has been formed. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with the insulating coating.

A board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and a board ground (GND) (that is, solid surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. And (ground) are electrically connected to each other through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, a region of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with the white resist as the insulating coating. At the same time, the white resist liquid enters from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB on the front (front surface) side to close the hole. As a result, the entire front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be covered with the white resist as an insulating coating, and thus the front surface (front surface) ) The side land KNDx1 is not exposed by the copper foil, and the conductive plated portion provided on the entire inner peripheral surface of the through hole KTH1 is not exposed from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Can be Further, since the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is closed, light from the rear of the decorative substrate KB passes through the hole of the through hole KTH1 toward the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. You can prevent it from going on.

By the way, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are viewed as a point light source when they are of a type with a small irradiation angle (a type with a narrow irradiation angle), and are visually recognized by the player as an aggregate of point light sources. There is a risk that you will feel uncomfortable. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are of a type having a large irradiation angle (a type having a wide irradiation angle) so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED increases (the irradiation angle of the LED increases), the range illuminated by the LED increases, so that the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED reflects on a plurality of other members and the decorative substrate KB. Many will come back to. Therefore, if the light returning to the decoration board KB can be reflected so as to be emitted to the front of the decoration board KB, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is mounted. By using as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emission effect.

As described above, the decoration substrate KB has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and a rear surface (rear surface) formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 is formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. On the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, as described above, the solid white resist is formed as the insulating coating, and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance of the white resist (white coating film) solidly coated as an insulating film and the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 are reflected. Therefore, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

When the player visually recognizes the holes of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB, the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 are formed. The presence of the holes may be an obstacle to the player.

Therefore, in the configuration of covering the land of the through-hole according to the third embodiment with the insulating coating, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. The area to be covered is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film, and the white resist liquid has entered from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB on the front surface side to close the hole. Since it is in the state, it is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Further, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, a region of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is also covered with a white resist as an insulating coating. The decorative substrate which is visible to the player by the white resist liquid intruding from the inner peripheral edge of the front surface of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and closing the hole. In KB, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the copper foil exposed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is exposed (at least because the copper foil on the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is not exposed at all). By making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform), it is possible to make the portion of the copper foil inconspicuous and contribute to the improvement of the light emitting effect of the decorative substrate KB.

In addition, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is provided with an inner lens which is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) and capable of irregularly refracting light as described above. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the presence of the holes of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. By adopting the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment with the insulating coating, the existence of the hole of the front surface (front surface) side KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is more played. Can be difficult to understand. Further, when there is a difference in the reflection efficiency due to the thickness of the white resist solidly coated as an insulating coating formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the shade of the color, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. It is possible to enhance the directing effect.

Further, although the white resist liquid has entered from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (front surface) side to close the hole, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is not formed. The rear (rear) side is open. That is, the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB are closed on the front surface (front surface) side by the white resist solution, while being opened on the rear surface (back surface) side. This is because the white resist solution has entered from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB on the front (front) side, and the air remains inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB. If the rear surface (rear surface) side of the through hole KTH1 is closed, a liquid such as a resist removing liquid may remain inside the through hole KTH1. Due to the influence of this liquid, the conductivity inside the through hole KTH1 may be reduced. Contact failure may occur due to corrosion of the plating, or the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 may momentarily vaporize and expand (so-called "steam explosion") during soldering (reflow, etc.) process in which heat is applied. This is because the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1 may be damaged, and the through hole KTH1 may be electrically disconnected.

Further, although there are holes on the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and through holes KTH1, since the existence can be hidden by the white resist, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is solidly coated. The front side (front surface) side land KRDx1 can be made inconspicuous and the through hole KTH1 can be made inconspicuous with respect to the formed white resist. As a result, it is possible to prevent the holes on the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 from being an eyesore to the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered by the player visually recognizing the holes of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 as a pattern or a pattern.

Further, since each decorative board provided in the game board 5 may be arranged in the front-rear direction, a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the front surface (front surface) of another decorative board KB arranged behind one decorative board KB. Even if the LED emits light, since the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB is blocked by the white resist, it cannot pass through the through hole KTH1. Of the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the other decorative substrate KB, the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the other decorative substrate KB causes the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB. By passing through, it is possible to prevent the colors of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of another decorative substrate KB from being mixed. If no other decorative substrate KB is arranged behind one decorative substrate KB, the hole of the through hole KTH1 must be provided unless the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB is blocked with a white resist. Appears to be a black dot, and therefore the black dot due to the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB is against the color of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the one decorative substrate KB. That is, when the black color is mixed, while the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB is blocked with the white resist, the area corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. Since it is also covered with a white resist as an insulating film, the holes of the through holes KTH1 are mixed (assimilated) with the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. It is possible to prevent the color of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board KB from being mixed by the through hole KTH1 formed on the front surface (front surface) of the single decorative board KB.

Further, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 is the player's largest visual recognition target, the decorative substrate around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ) And the decorative substrate movably arranged at a position to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display screen) are insulated from the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment. In the structure in which the film is covered, the part of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board that is not covered by the insulating film to the land of the through hole is removed, and the hole of the through hole is closed on the front surface (surface) side of the decorative substrate. The effect of making the reflectance (front surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, and the presence of through-hole holes The effect of making it difficult for a person to understand becomes high. Also, at other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens that is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) and can diffract light. In some cases, the effect of making the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, and the through hole hole This has the effect of making the existence more difficult for the player to understand. It should be noted that, with respect to each of the decorative boards included in the door frame 3 and each of the decorative boards included in the game board 5, the decorative boards included in the game board 5 are closer to the effect display device 1600 than the decorative boards included in the door frame 3. Because of the arrangement, it is said that the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform) in the structure in which the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment is covered with the insulating film. It can be said that the effect is high, the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, and the effect of making the existence of the through hole more difficult for the player to understand.

In the configuration of covering the land of the through-hole according to the third embodiment with the insulating coating, the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr. In the region to be formed, a rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1. As shown in FIG. 283(c), the outer peripheral portion of the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery to the center of the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1. In the region corresponding to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 in the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is provided. The rear surface (rear surface) side resist opening KByra may be formed. This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is reflected on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. Since KBy cannot be used as a reflection surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance by the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above. This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emission effect.

Further, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating coating according to the third embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are coated with the white resist liquid as an insulating coating almost all over. Although the white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed as described above, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is almost entirely white as an insulating coating. While a white resist layer is formed by the white coating film formed by coating with, the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which no LED is mounted is almost entirely covered with an insulating film. A resist layer of another color may be formed by a coating film of another color formed by applying a resist liquid of another color different from white (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.). This is because no LED is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is reflected on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. Since KBy cannot be used as a reflection surface in the first place, there is no need to contribute to making the reflectance by the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform) as described above. This is because KBy cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED for the light emission effect.

Further, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole with the insulating coating according to the third embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are coated with the white resist liquid as an insulating coating almost all over. Although the white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed as described above, one or both of the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is almost entirely formed. The white silk-printed layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by silk-printing with a white paint as the insulating coating. In this case, the electronic part can be identified on the white silk-printed layer formed on one surface or both surfaces. It is printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the marking portion may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to the brightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). When the above-mentioned white silk-printed layer is formed on one surface or both surfaces, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (the copper foil surface excluding a predetermined area in addition to the pad to which the electronic component is soldered) ) May be formed or a resist layer may not be formed.When forming a resist layer, a white paint as an insulating coating is applied by silk printing so as to cover the resist layer. The white coating film formed by printing forms a white silk printing layer. The resist layer may be a white resist liquid or a resist liquid of a color other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Further, the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment with the insulating coating can be applied to the land of the through hole of the function display substrate 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, the black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c by the black coating film formed by applying the black resist solution. When the black resist solution is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are emitted by preventing reflection by the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. It can contribute to preventing the light from mixing with it. Therefore, in the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c, a region of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land is also covered with a black resist as an insulating coating. , The black resist liquid has entered from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole 1400cc of the function display substrate 1400c on the front surface (front surface) side, and the hole is blocked, so that the reflectance is reduced and a plurality of LEDs 1400ca are provided. Can contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which is mounted uniform.

Further, as described above, the through-hole has conductivity by copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the through-hole, and the through-hole for mounting the electronic component and the electronic component are mounted. There is a non-through hole, and the land of either of the through holes is covered with an insulating film on the land of the through hole according to the third embodiment. The structure in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the third embodiment does not have to be adopted for the device provided directly below the electronic component. That is, of the through holes on which the electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through holes provided directly below the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is exposed. To do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, it is not necessary to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through hole hole This is because it is not necessary for the player to easily understand it, and the presence of the land of the through hole and the presence of the hole of the through hole are visually confirmed in the electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB from the surface on which the electronic component is not mounted. Moreover, the electrical inspection (operation check or abnormal potential check) of the decorative substrate KB can be performed by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-5. Configuration of Covering Insulation Coating on Land of Through Hole According to Fourth Embodiment]
In the structure in which the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment is covered with the insulating coating, as shown in FIGS. 284(a) and 284(b), the base material KBo of the decorative substrate KB is in the plate thickness direction (of the decorative substrate KB). A thin through hole is formed in a direction perpendicular to the front surface (back surface vertical direction) of the base material KBo, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the copper surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are formed. A front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and a rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil on the foil surface and the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the rear surface (rear surface). ) Side wiring pattern is formed. Through holes KTH1 are formed by subjecting the through holes to conductive plating. The outer diameter of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are outside. The diameter is KTHD1, which is the same size, and the outside diameter and the rear surface (rear surface) side land of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in the configuration in which the insulating film is covered on the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment described above. It has the same size as the outer diameter of KRDy1.

A front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and one end of a front surface (front surface) wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected to each other. In addition to being connected, the other end of the front (surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to one full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors or a pad to which specific terminals of a plurality of full-color LEDs are soldered. ing.

In addition, the front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. Include a first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and a second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the second front surface. One end of the (front surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and two wires from the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1. The front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern and the second front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed. In addition, a rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is formed. Include a first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and the second rear surface. One end of the (rear surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to a rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, and two rear surface (rear surface) lands KRDy1 are provided. The rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern (that is, the first rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (rear surface) side wiring pattern) is exposed.

The rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and one end of the rear surface (rear surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are electrically connected. In addition, the other end of the rear (back) side wiring pattern, the pad to which the specific terminal of the IC for controlling the light emission of the full-color LED is soldered, the pad to which the specific terminal of the resistor is soldered, and the specific terminal of the connector are Any pad such as a pad to be soldered is electrically connected.

The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are connected through the through hole KTH1. , And the front surface (front surface) wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB ( The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear surface (rear surface) formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. ) Side land KRDy1 is electrically connected.

Although a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to form a front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the front surface (front surface) side resist is formed. A front surface (front surface) side resist opening portion KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed in a region corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the layer KBxr. .. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the first embodiment with the insulating coating.

On the other hand, on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating to form the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr. A region of the (rear surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 is also coated with a white resist solution as an insulating coating to form a rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr.

The decorative substrate KB is actually manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one regular-sized copper clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. There is a process of fixing one copper clad laminate (base material) of a fixed size to a manufacturing apparatus, a process of coating, a process of drying, a process of making holes, and other processes, and finally each substrate is cut out. .. Therefore, when a white resist solution is applied as an insulating coating on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB faces vertically upward. (Actually, the decorative substrate KB is manufactured by arranging a plurality of substrates from one copper clad laminated board (base material) and finally cutting out the copper clad laminated board (base material). The plate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing apparatus so that the rear surface of the board is oriented vertically upward, and the white resist solution enters from the inner peripheral edge of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB on the rear surface (rear surface) side. It will be closed. Due to its own weight, the white resist solution that has entered the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is dented from the inner peripheral edge on the rear surface (rear surface) side of the holes of the through holes KTH1 toward the center of the holes and is dried. Becomes

A board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and a board ground (GND) (that is, solid surface) formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. And (ground) are electrically connected to each other through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, in the area corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the front surface (front surface) side resist opening portion KBxra having the smaller opening diameter KBxrD1 is formed, the front surface goes from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 toward the center of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. The outer peripheral portion of the (front) side land KRDx1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating. Further, in the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, a region of the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating. The white resist liquid enters from the inner peripheral edge of the through-hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB on the rear surface (rear surface) side to close the hole. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB can be covered with the white resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil is exposed. The area of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 can be suppressed to be small, and the light from the rear of the decorative substrate KB is prevented from traveling through the holes of the through holes KTH1 toward the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. can do.

Further, since the copper foil is exposed on both the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1, the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the decorative substrate KB is different from the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. The decorative board KB can be electrically inspected (operation check or abnormal potential check) by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact, and from the rear surface (rear surface) side of the decorative board KB to the rear surface (rear surface) side land KRDy1. The electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB (operation confirmation or abnormal potential confirmation) can be performed by bringing the tip portion of the contact probe into contact. That is, the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the rear surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing an electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for conducting continuity check of a so-called “tester”.

Further, since the tip portion of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. Since the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip of the contact probe should be brought into contact with the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB. If it is possible, an electrical inspection (operation confirmation or abnormal potential confirmation) of the decorative substrate KB can be performed as a defect inspection of the decorative substrate KB without performing a work for taking out the decorative substrate KB.

By the way, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are viewed as a point light source when they are of a type with a small irradiation angle (a type with a narrow irradiation angle), and are visually recognized by the player as an aggregate of point light sources. There is a risk that you will feel uncomfortable. For this reason, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate KB are of a type having a large irradiation angle (a type having a wide irradiation angle) so as not to be visually recognized as a point light source by the player.

However, when the irradiation angle of the LED increases (the irradiation angle of the LED increases), the range illuminated by the LED increases, so that the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED reflects on a plurality of other members and the decorative substrate KB. Many will come back to. Therefore, if the light returning to the decoration board KB can be reflected so as to be emitted to the front of the decoration board KB, in addition to the light emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration board KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is mounted. By using as a reflective surface, the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED can be efficiently used for the light emission effect.

As described above, the decoration substrate KB has a front surface (front surface) side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB and a rear surface (rear surface) formed on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decoration substrate KB. The front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 is formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB with respect to the through hole KTH1 that electrically connects the side wiring pattern. On the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, as described above, the solid white resist is formed as the insulating coating, and the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed. Since the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance of the white resist (white coating film) solidly coated as an insulating film and the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 are reflected. Therefore, it is difficult to make the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

When the player visually recognizes the holes of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB, the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 are formed. The presence of the holes may be an obstacle to the player.

Therefore, in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment with the insulating film, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is covered with the white resist as the insulating film. In addition to the above, the white resist solution has entered from the inner edge of the rear surface (rear surface) of the through-hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB to close the hole. It is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the mounted decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform).

Further, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating over the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1, and the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB are formed. In the decorative substrate KB that is visible to the player by the white resist solution entering from the inner edge of the rear surface (back surface) side and closing the hole, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB is visible. ) Since it is possible to reduce the rate at which the copper foil exposed on KBx is exposed, by making the reflectance by the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform), the portion of the copper foil is less noticeable. The decorative substrate KB can contribute to the improvement of the light emitting effect.

In addition, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is provided with an inner lens that is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) and capable of irregularly refracting light as described above. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the presence of the holes of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB. By adopting the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment with the insulating coating, the existence of the hole of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 in the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is more played. Can be difficult to understand. Further, when there is a difference in the reflection efficiency due to the thickness of the white resist solidly coated as an insulating coating formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the shade of the color, this difference is suppressed by the inner lens. It is possible to enhance the directing effect.

Further, although the white resist solution has entered from the inner peripheral edge of the rear surface (rear surface) of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB to close the hole, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is The front side is open. That is, the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB is closed on the rear surface (rear surface) side by the white resist solution, whereas it is open on the front surface (front surface) side. This is because the white resist solution enters from the inner edge of the rear surface (rear surface) of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and the air remains inside the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB. If the front surface (front surface) side of the through hole KTH1 is closed, a liquid such as a resist removing liquid may remain inside the through hole KTH1. Due to the influence of this liquid, the conductivity inside the through hole KTH1 may be reduced. Contact failure may occur due to corrosion of the plating, or the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 may momentarily vaporize and expand (so-called "steam explosion") during soldering (reflow, etc.) process in which heat is applied. This is because the conductive plating inside the through hole KTH1 may be damaged, and the through hole KTH1 may be electrically disconnected.

Further, although there are holes in the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and through holes KTH1, the presence of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 can be hidden by the white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB. Since the existence of the hole of the hole KTH1 can be hidden by the white resist on the rear surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate KB, the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is used. On the other hand, the front side (front surface) side land KRDx1 can be made inconspicuous, and the hole of the through hole KTH1 can be made inconspicuous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the holes on the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 from being an eyesore to the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered by the player visually recognizing the holes of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and the through holes KTH1 as a pattern or a pattern.

Further, since each decorative board provided in the game board 5 may be arranged in the front-rear direction, a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the front surface (front surface) of another decorative board KB arranged behind one decorative board KB. Even if the LED emits light, since the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB is blocked by the white resist, it cannot pass through the through hole KTH1. Of the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the other decorative substrate KB, the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the other decorative substrate KB causes the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB. By passing through, it is possible to prevent the colors of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of another decorative substrate KB from being mixed. If no other decorative substrate KB is arranged behind one decorative substrate KB, the hole of the through hole KTH1 must be provided unless the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB is blocked with a white resist. Appears to be a black dot, and therefore the black dot due to the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative substrate KB is against the color of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the one decorative substrate KB. That is, while black is mixed, when the hole of the through hole KTH1 of one decorative substrate KB is blocked by the white resist, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is front surface. Since the white resist as an insulating coating covers the entire outer peripheral portion of the (front) land KRDx1, the white resist in which the holes of the through holes KTH1 are blocked and the front (front) land KRDx1 are formed. The hole of the through hole KTH1 is mixed with the white resist which is solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB due to the close arrangement with the white resist covering the entire outer peripheral portion (assimilation). Therefore, the color of light emitted by the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the one decorative board KB is prevented from being mixed by the through hole KTH1 formed on the front surface (front surface) of the one decorative board KB. You can

Further, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 is the player's largest visual recognition target, the decorative substrate around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) and the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) ), the decorative substrate arranged so as to cover the upper side of ), and the decorative substrate movably arranged at a position covering the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are insulated from the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment. In the configuration in which the coating is applied, a portion of the through hole that is not covered by the insulating coating is reduced as much as possible, and the holes of the through holes are closed on the rear surface (back surface) side of the decorative substrate, thereby providing a plurality of LEDs. The effect of making the reflectance of the front surface of the decorative board on which is mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, and the existence of through-hole holes more difficult for the player to understand The effect will be higher. Also, at other places, for example, the decorative substrate is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens that is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) and can diffract light. In some cases, the effect of making the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform), the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, and the through hole hole This has the effect of making the existence more difficult for the player to understand. It should be noted that, with respect to each of the decorative boards included in the door frame 3 and each of the decorative boards included in the game board 5, the decorative boards included in the game board 5 are closer to the effect display device 1600 than the decorative boards included in the door frame 3. Because of the arrangement, the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is made uniform (uniform) in the structure in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating film according to the fourth embodiment. It can be said that the effect is high, the effect of making the copper foil part inconspicuous, the effect of making the existence of the through hole more difficult for the player to understand, and the like.

In the configuration in which the insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB corresponds to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. In the region to be formed, a front surface (front surface) side resist opening portion KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. The outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery toward the center of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1, but as shown in FIG. 284(b). In the area corresponding to the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 in the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr, the outer diameter is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and further smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1. A front surface resist opening KBxra having a small opening diameter KBxrD2 larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1 may be formed. The inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is obtained by adding a resist solution intrusion prevention region that concentrically spreads outward from the inner peripheral edge on the front surface (front surface) side of the hole of the through hole KTH1, and the front surface (surface of the through hole KTH1 ) Side distance of resist liquid intrusion from the inner peripheral edge (resist liquid intrusion prevention distance is set to at least 0.5 mm or more in order to prevent the white resist liquid from entering the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB. The distance dimension is required, and 0.5 mm is adopted in the configuration of covering the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment with the insulating film.). Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is equal to the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), which is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. It is as large as 1.0 mm.

As a result, the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB extends from substantially the inside of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB). Since a white resist can be covered as an insulating film (over the area excluding the resist liquid invasion prevention area), the exposed portion of the copper foil becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area. Thereby, the area of the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be suppressed to be extremely small.

Further, since the resist solution intrusion prevention region is provided for the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, a white resist solution is provided as an insulating film on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. When applied, the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB is oriented vertically upward (the decorative substrate KB is actually a plurality of substrates from one standard copper clad laminate (base material)). Since it is placed and finally cut out and manufactured, one white copper clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing device so that the front surface of the copper clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward, and a white resist solution is actually produced. Even if it is applied, the white resist solution penetrates into the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB and is dried without blocking the hole.

In addition, from the substantially inner side of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to the entire outer peripheral portion (that is, the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KBx). The area where the copper foil is exposed becomes smaller as the resist solution intrusion prevention area by making the white resist as the insulating coating over the area excluding the resist solution intrusion prevention area. However, the electrical inspection (operation check and abnormal potential check) of the decorative substrate KB can be performed by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the front (front) side land KRDx1 from the front (front) side of the decorative substrate KB. Therefore, the front side (land) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when performing an electrical inspection of the decorative board KB, and, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the decorative board Since the front surface (front surface) of the KB faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, the tip portion of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 from the front surface (front surface) side of the decorative substrate KB. In addition, an electrical inspection (operation confirmation or abnormal potential confirmation) of the decorative substrate KB can be performed as a defect inspection of the decorative substrate KB without performing a work for taking out the decorative substrate KB. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead for conducting continuity check of a so-called “tester”.

Further, in the configuration in which the insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are almost entirely coated with the white resist liquid as an insulating film. White resist layers were respectively formed by the white coating film formed as described above. However, the color of the resist covering the entire outer peripheral portion of the land of the decorative substrate KB and the resist for closing the through hole KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB The color and the color may be different. For example, on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, a white resist layer is formed on the entire surface of the decorative substrate KB by applying a white resist solution as an insulating coating to form a white resist layer. The front surface (front surface) KBx is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating on the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1, whereas the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is almost entirely covered. By forming a black resist layer with a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution as an insulating coating, the holes of the through holes KTH1 of the decorative substrate KB may be blocked by the black resist. it can.

Further, in the configuration in which the insulating film is applied to the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are almost entirely coated with the white resist liquid as an insulating film. Although the white resist layer was formed by the white coating film formed as described above, one or both of the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is almost entirely formed. The white silk-printed layer may be formed by a white coating film formed by silk-printing with a white paint as the insulating coating. In this case, the electronic part can be identified on the white silk-printed layer formed on one surface or both surfaces. It is printed by printing. In addition to yellow, the marking portion may be printed by silk printing with a paint having a color close to the brightness of white such as pastel color (for example, light green, light blue, etc.). When the above-mentioned white silk-printed layer is formed on one surface or both surfaces, the base material KBo or the copper foil surface (the copper foil surface excluding a predetermined area in addition to the pad to which the electronic component is soldered) ) May be formed or a resist layer may not be formed.When forming a resist layer, a white paint as an insulating coating is applied by silk printing so as to cover the resist layer. The white coating film formed by printing forms a white silk printing layer. The resist layer may be a white resist liquid or a resist liquid of a color other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

Further, the structure of covering the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment with the insulating coating can be applied to the land of the through hole of the function display substrate 1400c in the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. As described above, the black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx and the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display substrate 1400c by the black coating film formed by applying the black resist solution. When the black resist solution is used, as described above, the LEDs 1400ca arranged in the vicinity are emitted by preventing reflection by the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. It can contribute to preventing the light from mixing with it. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of the front surface (front surface) land of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c is covered with a black resist as an insulating coating, and the through hole 1400cc of the function display substrate 1400c is covered. Since the black resist liquid has entered from the inner edge of the rear surface (rear surface) of the hole to close the hole, the reflectance is reduced, and the front surface of the functional display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted. This can contribute to making the reflectance of (surface) 1400 cx uniform (uniform).

Further, as described above, the through-hole has conductivity by copper plating on the inner peripheral wall of the through-hole, and the through-hole for mounting the electronic component and the electronic component are mounted. There is a through hole that does not exist, and the structure of covering the land of either through hole with the insulating film on the land of the through hole according to the fourth embodiment is adopted. The structure in which the land of the through hole is covered with the insulating coating according to the fourth embodiment may not be adopted for those provided directly below the electronic components. That is, of the through holes on which the electronic components are not mounted, the entire copper foil on the land of the through holes provided directly below the electronic components may be exposed. In this case, the entire copper foil on the front surface (front surface) land KRDx1 of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (rear surface) land KRDy1 of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is exposed. To do. Since the electronic components are arranged so as to cover the entire land of the through hole where the entire copper foil is exposed, it is not necessary to make the copper foil part inconspicuous in the first place, and the existence of the through hole hole This is because it is not necessary for the player to easily understand it, and the presence of the land of the through hole and the presence of the hole of the through hole are visually confirmed in the electrical inspection of the decorative substrate KB from the surface on which the electronic component is not mounted. Moreover, the electrical inspection (operation check or abnormal potential check) of the decorative substrate KB can be performed by bringing the tip of the contact probe into contact with the land of the through hole.

[5-12-6. Connector mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the decorative board]
Here, a connector mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB will be described with reference to FIG. 285. FIG. 285 is a schematic view (a) of the rear surface (rear surface) side of the decorative substrate on which the DIP type connector is mounted and a schematic view (b) of the front surface (front surface) side. It is the schematic (c) of the rear surface (back surface) side of the mounted decorative substrate, and the schematic (d) of the front surface (front surface) side. The front surface (front surface) of the connector will be described below as a surface to be mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB.

[5-12-6a. DIP type connector]
As shown in FIGS. 285(a) and 285(b), various terminals of the DIP type connector KCN (in this embodiment, four terminals are provided, a first terminal: a ground terminal, a second terminal: a power terminal (for example, +12 V), the third terminal: a data signal terminal 1 (for example, a serial signal terminal), and the fourth terminal: a data signal terminal 2 (for example, a clock signal terminal). No., the number of terminals can be increased in order to allocate a plurality of power supply terminals and a plurality of data trust terminals. Through holes KTH having soldered lands KRD (hereinafter simply referred to as “land KRD”) Through hole KTH is formed in the base material KBo of the decorative substrate KB described above, and the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the rear surface (back surface) of the decorative substrate KB. Lands KRD having a predetermined outer diameter are respectively formed on the copper foil surface of KBy and on the copper foil surface (in this embodiment, four through holes KTH are formed). In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land KRD formed on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB and the outer diameter of the land KRD formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are the same size. There is. One end of the wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land KRD formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB.

Although the resist solution is applied to form the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr The resist solution is not applied to the region corresponding to the land KRD, and the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed. Note that the resist solution may not be applied to a region larger than the outer diameter of the land KRD on the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. In this case, the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed and part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed. Although the resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB to form the above-mentioned rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr. In the area corresponding to the land KRD, the resist solution is not applied and the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed. The resist solution may not be applied to a region larger than the outer diameter of the land KRD on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. In this case, the copper foil surface of the land KRD is exposed and part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed.

The decorative substrate KB has a single reverse insertion preventing through hole KBa through which the connector reverse insertion preventing boss KCNa provided in the DIP type connector KCN is inserted, and two connector mounting locking pieces provided at the DIP type connector KCN. KCNb (Instead of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb, two screws (two rivets may be used) for fixing the DIP type connector to the decorative substrate KB may be inserted. A through hole KBb is formed. The single reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa and the two mounting through holes KBb do not have copper plating applied to the inner peripheral walls of the above-described through holes, and the front surface (front surface) KBx and the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB are not formed. It is formed on the decorative substrate KB as a non-through hole having no land.

The single connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the DIP type connector KCN is arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the housing having a horizontally long quadrangular shape, while the two connectors provided on the DIP type connector KCN are provided. The connector mounting locking pieces KCNb are respectively arranged on the left and right side surfaces of the housing having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa and the connector mounting locking piece KCNb are made of the same resin as the housing of the DIP type connector KCN and have the same color.

The mounting of the DIP type connector KCN on the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative board KB will be briefly described. Various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN are inserted, and the reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided in the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is inserted into the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Then, the two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb provided in the housing of the DIP type connector KCN are inserted into the two mounting through holes KBb from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB.

Then, the rear surface (rear surface) of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is pushed toward the rear surface (rear surface) KBy side of the decorative substrate KB so that the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. The reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is closed with (the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may project forward from the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa, or the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may be located on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) May be flush with KBx.), the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb projects forward from the mounting through hole KBb of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, and the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KB. ) KBx is locked, and various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN are projected from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. In this state, various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN and the land KRD of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB are soldered from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decoration substrate KB.

As described above, the housing of the DIP type connector KCN, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa, and the connector mounting locking piece KCNb have the same color, and the color thereof is white or a color close to white (for example, an ivory color). , Beige, cream), the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. As a result, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is closed, and the tip portion of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa becomes visible from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, but the tip portion of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is white. Alternatively, the reverse insertion prevention through-hole KBa has a white color or a circular shape having a color close to white, and is a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. Can contribute to making the reflectance by the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform). Further, when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb moves forward from the mounting through hole KBb of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Although protruding and locked to the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the tip of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb becomes visible from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, but the tip of this connector mounting locking piece KCNb. Since the connector mounting locking piece KCNb has the same color as that of the connector mounting locking piece KCNb, the connector mounting locking piece KCNb and the tip thereof are solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB by being white or a color close to white. It is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform) by being mixed in with the white resist, and at the same time the existence of the through-holes. The effect of making it difficult to understand is obtained. In addition, even when there is a through hole which is a through hole in which an electronic component is not mounted on the board portion facing the housing of the connector mounting portion, the same effect as in the case of the above reverse insertion preventing through hole KBa can be obtained and the reflectance can be improved. It is possible to contribute to making uniform (uniform), and it is possible to obtain the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand the existence of the through holes.

If the above-mentioned connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is not provided on the DIP type connector KCN, the reverse insertion prevention is performed when the DIP type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. Since there is nothing to block the inside of the through hole KBa, the front surface (front surface) of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is visible from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB through the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. Since the color of the housing of the DIP type connector KCN is white or a color close to white, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is also the same color as the housing of the DIP type connector KCN, which is white or a color close to white, and vice versa. The insertion preventing through-hole KBa becomes white or a circular shape having a color close to white, and is inserted into the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB to mount a plurality of LEDs. This can contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB uniform (uniform).

Note that, regarding the configuration of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which the DIP type connector KCN shown in FIGS. 285(a) and 285(b) is mounted, the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 described above has the DIP type. When the connector 1400cb is mounted, it can be applied to the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. In this way, the housing of the DIP type connector 1400cb and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss have the same color, and the color is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Therefore, in the state where the surface mounting type connector 1400cb is mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss should remain in the reverse insertion prevention through hole formed in the function display board 1400c. Although the reverse insertion prevention through-hole is closed with, the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss can be visually recognized from the front surface 1400cx of the function display board 1400c, but the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss is black or nearly black. Due to the color, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa becomes black or has a circular shape having a color close to black, and the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is mixed in the black resist solidly applied to the front surface 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. By reducing the reflectance, it is possible to contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform).

The decorative board KB has two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb provided on the DIP type connector KCN (for fixing the DIP type connector to the decorative board KB in place of the connector mounting locking pieces KCNb). Two mounting through holes KBb, through which two screws (or two rivets) may be inserted, were formed as non-through holes, but the inner peripheral wall of the through holes was plated with copper. It may be formed as a through hole having conductivity and fixed by soldering. In this case, the two connector mounting locking pieces KCNb are made of metal. The land of the through hole is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) (that is, solid land) of the decorative board KB. The two connector attachment locking pieces KCNb made of metal are soldered and fixed to the decorative board KB, whereby the two connector attachment locking pieces KCNb made of metal and the board ground (GND) of the decoration board KB (that is, It becomes electrically connected to the solid ground, and noise that enters the DIP type connector KCN can escape to the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the decorative board KB, improving the noise resistance. Can contribute to. Instead of the two metal connector mounting locking pieces KCNb, two metal screws for fixing the DIP type connector to the decorative substrate KB may be used, or two metal rivets may be used. Also in this case, the two screws made of metal or the two rivets made of metal are fixed to the decorative substrate KB so that the two screws made of metal or the two rivets made of metal and the decorative substrate KB are attached. Is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the decorative board KB and escapes to the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the decorative board KB. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of noise resistance.

[5-12-6b. Surface mount type connector]
As shown in FIGS. 285(c) and 285(d), various terminals of the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN (in this embodiment, four terminals are provided, a first terminal: a ground terminal, a second terminal: a power supply). It is assigned to a terminal (for example, +12 V), a third terminal: a data signal terminal 1 (for example, a serial signal terminal), and a fourth terminal: a data signal terminal 2 (for example, a clock signal terminal). The pad KSP to which a plurality of power supply terminals and a plurality of data trust terminals are additionally soldered is not limited to this. The pad KSP is a copper foil on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. By removing the copper foil on the surface, each is formed into a predetermined rectangular shape (in the present embodiment, four pads KSP are formed). One end of the wiring pattern is electrically connected to the pad KSP formed on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. In addition, a metal connector fixing portion (in this embodiment, two metal connector fixing portions are provided in the housing for fixing the housing of the surface mount (SMD) type connector KCN to the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. The fixed pad KSPF to which is soldered is formed as a predetermined rectangular shape by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB (in the present embodiment, in this embodiment). Two fixed pads KSPF are formed). Although not shown, the four corners of the fixed pad KSPF around the fixed pad KSPF are not illustrated, but the fixed pad KSPF is decorated through a cross-shaped pattern by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. A thermal pattern that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) of the substrate KB is provided. Due to this thermal pattern, when the metal connector fixing portion provided in the housing of the surface mounting type connector KCN is soldered to the fixing pad KSPF on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, the heat that melts the solder is generated by the fixing pad KSPF. You can prevent it from being robbed from the outer circumference.

On the copper foil surface of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, a region corresponding to the pad KSP is coated with a resist solution to form the front surface (front surface) side resist layer KBxr. Although the resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB to form the above-mentioned rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr, the rear surface (rear surface) side resist layer KByr. In the area corresponding to the pad KSP, the resist solution is not applied and the copper foil surface of the pad KSP is exposed. The resist solution may not be applied to a region larger than the outer shape of the pad KSP on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB. In this case, the copper foil surface of the pad KSP is exposed and a part of the surface of the base material KBo is exposed.

The decorative substrate KB has a single reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa through which the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided in the surface mount type connector KCN is inserted.

The single connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa provided on the surface mount type connector KCN is arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the housing having a horizontally long rectangular shape, whereas it is provided on the surface mount type connector KCN. The two metal connector fixing portions are respectively arranged on the left and right side surfaces of the housing having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is made of the same resin as the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN and has the same color.

The mounting of the surface mounting type connector KCN on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB will be briefly described. For the pad KSP (four pads KSP) of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, the surface mounting type connector KCN is mounted. For fixing various terminals (4 terminals) of the connector KCN and the fixed pad KSPF (two fixed pads KSPF) of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB to the metal connector fixed to the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN. While fitting the parts (two metal connector fixing parts) respectively, the connector is reversely inserted from the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB into the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN with respect to the prevention through hole KBa. Insert the prevention boss KCNa.

The rear surface (rear surface) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is pushed toward the rear surface (rear surface) KBy side of the decorative substrate KB, so that the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa stays in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. As a result, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is closed (the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may project forward from the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa, or the tip of the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa may be the decorative substrate KB. May be flush with the front surface (front surface) KBx of). In this state, the pads KSP (four pads KSP) of the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB and various terminals (four terminals) of the connector KCN are soldered, and the rear surface (rear surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB is The fixed pad KSPF (two fixed pads KSPF) and a metal connector fixed portion (two metal connector fixed portions) provided in the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN are soldered.

The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa have the same color as described above, and the color thereof is white or a color close to white (for example, ivory color, beige color, cream color). Therefore, when the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa remains in the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa to prevent reverse insertion. Although the through hole KBa is closed and the tip portion of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is visible from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB, the tip portion of the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is white or a color close to white. This can contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

In addition, when the above-mentioned connector reverse insertion prevention boss KCNa is not provided in the surface mount type connector KCN, when the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB, it is reversed. Since there is nothing that blocks the inside of the insertion prevention through hole KBa, the front surface (front surface) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN can be seen from the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB through the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa. However, since the housing color of the surface mount type connector KCN is white or close to white, the reverse insertion prevention through hole KBa is also white or white as the same color as the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN. The colors are close to each other, which can contribute to making the reflectance of the front surface (front surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted uniform (uniform).

Note that, regarding the configuration of the rear surface (back surface) KBy of the decorative substrate KB on which the surface mounting (SMD) type connector KCN shown in FIGS. 285 (c) and (d) is mounted, the function display unit of the game board 5 described above is used. When the surface mount (SMD) type connector 1400cb is mounted on the 1400, it can be applied to the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c. By doing this, the housing of the surface mount type connector 1400cb and the connector reverse insertion prevention boss have the same color, and the color is black or a color close to black (for example, dark gray, dark blue, dark green, etc.). Therefore, when the surface mounting type connector 1400cb is mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) 1400cy of the function display board 1400c, the connector reverse insertion prevention boss remains in the reverse insertion prevention through hole formed in the function display board 1400c. As a result, the reverse insertion prevention through hole is closed, and the tip portion of the reverse insertion prevention through hole becomes visible from the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the function display substrate 1400c. However, the tip portion of the reverse insertion prevention through hole becomes black or black. Since the colors are close to each other, it is possible to reduce the reflectance and contribute to making the reflectance on the front surface (front surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which the plurality of LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (uniform).

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a game board provided with a light emitting means such as a board lamp has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0023] and FIG. 5)). By the way, the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted is required to efficiently reflect the light emitted by the light emitting means.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a display device is provided in the lower right part of the game board (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0023] and FIG. 5)). By the way, when a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the display plate of the display device, when the light emitted by the light emitting means is reflected on the surface of the display substrate, the color of the light emitted by one light emitting means and other There is a problem that the color of the light emitted by the light emitting means (the light emitted by another light emitting means for one light emitting means becomes ambient light) is mixed and it is difficult to visually recognize.

Further, conventionally, a game board provided with a light emitting means such as a board lamp, a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect to be executed as the game progresses, and the like. A game machine provided is proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraphs [0023] and [0051], FIGS. 2 and 5)). By the way, since there are places where through holes are formed on the board on which the light emitting means is mounted by arranging the wiring pattern, there is a possibility that the presence of these through holes is visually recognized by the player, and the effect of the production is deteriorated. It was

[6. Game contents]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, whereby the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls B are brought into contact with the obstacle nails N, so that the game balls are The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates by abutting the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, which is higher than the highest part, the game ball B contacts a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 to move back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharging portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central discharging portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting opening 2002, and thus the first probability is high. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probable change) hit", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes a "win" is drawn.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. To be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center character 2500, the center character 2500 is guided. The plurality of passages 2520 are discharged above the gate portion 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After coming into contact with the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an inlet opening in the vicinity of the stopper 1006, and an inlet opening with a space leftward from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522 that opens. As a result, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with the strength of abutting against the hitting portion 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 and the strength of not hitting the hitting portion 1006 (a hitting right). When the game ball B is hit with a strength weaker than a certain degree), it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B that has been driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 depending on the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the gaming ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. In addition, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through this gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is carried out on the main control board 1310, and when the drawn ordinary lottery result is "normal win", the first attacker unit The closed second starting opening 2004 in 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting opening 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 0.01 to 600 seconds, which is also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time. The normal fluctuation time from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery is set to a relatively long time (600 seconds in this example) in the normal time (non-time saving state). It is designed to be changed in a short period of time. As a result, during the time saving (time saving state), the ordinary lottery result is frequently derived, and the second starting opening 2004 is frequently opened. In this way, the second starting opening 2004 is frequently opened in the time saving (time saving state), so a game (so-called "right hitting") aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is performed. Will be done.

If the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. Further, the maximum number of holding of the normal lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of being highly likely due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700, and sometimes it is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit, or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out, similarly to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-outlet 2012, there is no opportunity to be received in the second special winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the first big winning opening 2005, and it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. ..

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received in the second sub-out opening 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second big winning opening 2006, the second of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no chance of being accepted into the starting opening 2004 or the first special winning opening 2005, and the material is discharged outside the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, so the second sub-out to the player. It is possible to prompt a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received in the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B in the second sub-out opening 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. The driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522 can be prompted. That is, rather than "right hitting" in which the game ball B abuts on the hitting portion 1006, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that requires delicate adjustment in the rotating operation of the handle 182, and a driving operation of the game ball B. It is possible to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 which is mainly.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing through the left side of the above, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted at the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006 while the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 10 pieces) from the payout device 580. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B discharged to the side of the first attacker unit 2400 through the left side of the second special winning opening 2006 is a first shelf 2412a, a second starting opening door 2414, and a second shelf 2412b, left on the top. After rolling to the left, it is discharged to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first special winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d, and into the game area 5a. Is released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2414, the ordinary lottery result selected by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is “ordinary winning”, and the second starting door is When 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probable change) hit", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that causes a "win" is drawn.

Further, while the game ball B is rolling on the first big winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the first lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 (the first When the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit"), the first special winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening/closing pattern after the elapse of the special variation time. Then, the game ball B is ready to be received. When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 allow a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B when the first special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball B, a large amount of the game ball B can be paid out, and the player Can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, on the main control board 1310). A lottery of special lottery results that generate “middle hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probable change) hit”, “time shortening (time shortening) hit” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) Note that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and is selected by lottery. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time saving (time saving) hit", " "Probability change short time hit", "Probability no short time hit", "Second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state in which the game ball B can be received, or the first big winning. If any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern for setting the game balls B into an unacceptable closed state (one opening/closing pattern is 1 (A round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, the advantageous game state advantageous for the player is generated.

In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the first special winning opening 2005 makes it possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, the advantageous game state is ST (special).・Time) is generated. This ST is to maintain a state of probable variation or shortening of time during a predetermined number of times of variation.

In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 to the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by the lottery, the first starting port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result can be started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Pending The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is limited to four with respect to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are provided. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of this special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. In the suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by a combination of the LEDs that are lit.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is such that, in a state in which three picture strings each including a plurality of pictures are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, each picture string is changed and the variably displayed picture string is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective three rows of the stopped and displayed picture rows are stopped and displayed so as to be a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “miss”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective patterns are stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is (Time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, an effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. A player participation type effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated can be performed. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, and the back-and-back performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back. Lower left rendering unit 3200, lower back right rendering unit 3250, lower back middle rendering unit 3300, back upper rendering unit 3400, back rear left rendering unit 3500, back rear right rendering unit 3600, back front left rendering unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with various effects and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed, a correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[7. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208. 206 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 207 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 208 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. Note that, in FIG. 207, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of various connectors are back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although it is projected from the drawing, it is omitted for clarity of the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a cover body 1501 having a box shape that is opened rearward and is longer in the left-right direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of production based on a command from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510. A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that is electrically connected and a base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted in predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the base body 1502 closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Thus, the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) is constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[7-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the peripheral control board 1510, on various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about ⅔ when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. Peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 have a square shape when peripheral body data ROM substrate 1520 has a square shape in the remaining one-third area when cover body 1501 is viewed from the rear side. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape twice larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described later. Connected to each other. Accordingly, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to each other, and the same ground is provided. (GND). The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. There is.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded in an opaque black color. When viewed from the front, the oblong rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) has an upper side and a left side. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are respectively provided on the lower side and the right side so as to project rearward (on the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is provided with the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly on the upper right side of the center of the cover flat plate 1501a and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles whose center points are the centers of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a columnar predetermined shape is inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension of the air-cooling fan FAN in the depth direction) are respectively formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the slit hole 1501aaa having an arc shape, it is possible to prevent an illegal act in which various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510 are illegally taken out from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and in a diagonal shape. When the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa to be mounted, the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw (not shown) having a seat (a head having a pan head and a flat washer integrated) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear. As a result, the flat washer that is the seat portion of the pan-head screw with a seat comes into contact with the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air-cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and the model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is at a higher position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). A wiring lead-out concave portion 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted and fixed in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawing-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front surface thereof, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch. The position corresponding to 1510d is a connector concave part as one closed rectangular region (correctly, a convex region having the volume adjusting switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as the upper part and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 as the lower part). 1501ac is directed toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Are formed so as to project. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjusting switch 1510d, respectively. Has been formed. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies the lower right area of the cover flat plate 1501a when viewed from the front. For this reason, as measures against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume control. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2, which are long and thin in the vertical direction, are formed so as not to interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and project forward with a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 are exposed.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof. A position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as one closed horizontally long rectangular area (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). And is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 have connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. It becomes a state to be exposed from each.

The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed along the left side of the cover flat plate 1501a at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Compared with the bottom surface of the above-mentioned FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae. It is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a predetermined height of a columnar shape that is inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension of the wiring cover body 1503 in the depth direction). A protrusion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting hole 1501afb1 is provided at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, a flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat)) that closes the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and is connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Abbreviation of Cable In the flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 are arranged in parallel, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects )) from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project outward in the vertical direction with a predetermined center interval. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projects outward, and a hinge hooking portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and projects outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of each of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda that project toward the front are formed on the front surfaces of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right side cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at the positions so as to project from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, which are circular copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to face the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing in. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , Are in contact with each other, and lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan head screw. Become. Further, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a pan head screw made of metal. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Since it is the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a pan head screw made of metal. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND) is obtained.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to project outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 when viewed from the rear surface so that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At a position to be formed, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and circular solder copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are formed, and these lands are formed. Wiring patterns of 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Insert 1520r1 and 1520r3 into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, The seat surface of the metal pan head screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a pan head screw made of metal. The lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above, and is the same. Since it is the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND) is obtained.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2, 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The rear side (solder side) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate are arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end surfaces on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e). The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is formed. 1530rf4 and solder copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530. To the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to cover the cover plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the 1501a. In this state, lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal And the seating surface of the pan head screw made of steel are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a pan head screw made of metal. The lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since it is the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND) is obtained.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e and the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

As described above, in a state where various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of the various boards (the cover flat plate 1501a). A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Are formed.

Ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby performing peripheral control. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 are provided with a clearance. A gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d formed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501 while being formed. Further, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. In addition to taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connectors formed in the cover body 1501) are taken. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is taken in through the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501).

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. And the gaps formed in the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501 and the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. And the area in the (gap formed in and). Therefore, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. When the air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be kept small.

When the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be ejected toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blade portion. When taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Although the flow velocity of the air flowing into the fan can be suppressed to a low level, when the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, this rotation sucks in air through the blade portion and the surroundings. Air may be sent out to the control IC 1510a. In other words, the air-cooling fan FAN may not be the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are respectively provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side so as to project forward (toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Accordingly, when the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are provided inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. When is fitted, it becomes inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base flat plate 1502a has a predetermined distance along the lower side and does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board). Each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Since it protrudes from 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at the position where it does not interfere with the protruding terminals). Long and narrow disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the left side base side wall 1502c near the opening side of the base body 1502. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It is capable of engaging.

Further, a base side sealing portion 1502ea protruding outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 in the center of the right side base side wall 1502e. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right side base wall 1502e, respectively.

[7-3. Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501, the peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control unit 1512 (functions of various ROMs) described above are provided. Function, and a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I/O interfaces, etc. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of game performance (demonstration performed in the player waiting state), and various schedule data that regulate the progress of performance Of the peripheral data stored in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above, the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, and the like). A SDRAM 1510c including SDRAMs (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various types of control information (peripheral data) stored in the ROM 1520a, and a slide method capable of adjusting the volume. A volume adjustment switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. I have it. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b included in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 included in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os and various parallel I/Os. The various serial I/Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (for communication via a corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In the present embodiment, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source (for example, various motors or various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, a door frame. The drive data is transmitted to a drive control IC that drives an electric drive source (for example, various motors or various solenoids, which communicate with each other via a connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, or the game board 5 side. Light emission data for the LED control IC for the plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided on the LED and the plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side. Or receive signals as detection data from various sensors (communicating via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, or various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via the connector CN3). It is receiving signals as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I/O, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN included in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1) or provided on the game board 5 side. The signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or the control signal for the unillustrated controlled object provided on the game board 5 side is transmitted from the GPIO (connector CN6 Output) or a signal from the GPIO to the LED ML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In the present embodiment, for example, the connector CN1 is assigned GPIO, and the connector CN3 is assigned SPI communication and I2C communication (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication, and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as SPI communication and a connector in which GPIO coexists), and connector CN7 is SPI communication. Has been assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and has realized a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be transferred at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memories), and can realize high data communication speeds. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the board and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the board are further provided. I have it. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 by a plurality of types of video signal systems. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include a plurality of types such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, an eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and a clockless system. In the above, four systems (a total of four systems) of an RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system are adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. It should be noted that, instead of the MIPI system, for example, an eDP system is adopted, a RGB system has one system, an LVDS system has two systems (a first LVDS system, a second LVDS system), and an eDP system has one system. It is also possible to create 1510.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, an LEDML1 is provided near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 is provided near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 is provided near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 is provided near the special connector SCN2. , Are provided. The peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with various voltages (+24V, +12V, and +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface 635. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) the state where +5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where +5V is supplied. The LED ML2 confirms (monitors) the state where +12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where +12V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state where +24V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where +24V is supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The special connector SCN4 provided includes a connector CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a connector CN8 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the plugs of the corresponding connectors are inserted and pushed in the vertical direction with respect to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 so that the sockets and the plugs fit with each other. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which there is no amount of vertical movement when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are viewed from the front when they are fitted together.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The special connectors SCN4 provided on the (mounting surface) 1530x are sockets.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to push the socket and the plug. Fit together. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (pachinko). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back surface and the front surface of the machine 1. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In the above, even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved from the front side to the maximum extent within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is the cover plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the 1501a.

By inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing the socket, the socket and the plug are separated. Mating. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is in the front-back direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front (pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that is capable of absorbing an error in the front-back direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back surface and the front surface). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a state in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front and moves to the maximum within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range, the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) that is a control target of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (a function of the image ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, etc.). Including.). As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, a character image, a pattern image, etc., various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 In the door frame 3 and the game board 5, light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs and the like that are mounted in a plurality, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, and notification sound. Examples thereof include drive data for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is cheaper than the NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to the suppression of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the peripheral control substrate 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via a wiring (harness) between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510. By adopting a structure in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected to the control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector, the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

Although the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x and the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( (Mounting surface) It is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a after inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided for the mounting board 1510x. By using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the front-back direction error that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is absorbed. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-back direction that occurs when the connection is performed, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, and thereby the progress of the game effect on the effect display device 1600 (for example, to the player). And an image that conveys a big jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state, an image that conveys that the jackpot gaming state does not occur, a state where the jackpot gaming state occurs, although the jackpot gaming state does not occur It is an important board that draws images (such as images that show that you are approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration performed while the player is waiting) as images. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via a wiring (harness), but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1530 are not connected. By adopting a structure in which the board 1510 and the board 1510 are electrically connected to each other, the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

Although a procedure for mounting various boards in the inner space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on its surface (mounting surface) 1530x, and a surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting). Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a after inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface) 1510x, By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to absorb the error in the front-back direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-back direction that occurs at the time, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is surely secured. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are separated. Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control board 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing the three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (a movable effect member is operated on the game board 5). It is possible to contribute to secure a distance dimension in the depth direction for disposing an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of performing the above, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[7-4. Peripheral control unit assembly method]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Then, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( The mounting surface 1520x and the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The insertion boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are inserted, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the attachment boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. .. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in 1.

Next, insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by the above, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal (not shown) in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of steel and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is constrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side, the peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a so as to constrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such constraint is covered by the peripheral control substrate 1510. When fixing to the back surface side of 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a have the dimensional dimensions. This is because it is possible to absorb it with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda are formed on the base body. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. When the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw in which the anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base side seal portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to form the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a sealed state.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted and inscribed (surface contact) inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and the base body 1502 is in contact. The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the above are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are in a conductive state. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed by a tool. Therefore, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening/closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrent to the unauthorized conduct on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are pulled out from the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal-made pan head screw (not shown) having a seat (a head having a pan head and a flat washer integrated) is screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover plate 1501a toward the rear.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring drawing opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front side to the rear side of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front side and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). (The engagement portion 1502ca side formed in) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Is fixed by screwing in and screwing it toward a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100.

In the assembling method described above, in the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is first placed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 at the predetermined position described above. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the rear side.), and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. Surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 after being fixed at the above-described predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted into and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to push the peripheral control board 1510 at the predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is a cover). The body 1501 is packed and arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side). Even in such a procedure of mounting various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during the pressing, the plug and the socket are separated. It is possible to prevent a plurality of connection terminals from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively, and at the same time, to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral. It is possible to reliably form the transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards with different game specifications, which are mounted on the pachinko machine. In this embodiment, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition to the above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used commonly regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. By storing peripheral data corresponding to, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate that depends on the game specification of the game board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate that depends on the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board and is not dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As the system of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device, there are a plurality of types of systems such as the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI system, the eDP system, and the clockless system as described above. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 (for example, the first LVDS system system). Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 (LVDS method) is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the inter-board connector described above.

Further, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is made to flow to the board ground (grounds (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter, it may be described as "noise suppression effect by peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, it is not necessary to provide each of the substrates with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, and it is possible to contribute to the cost reduction of the various substrates.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 by air, and also have a function of confirming whether or not there is any illegality.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 208, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, the angle in multiple directions. In order to be able to check the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins, the areas are dispersed and arranged so as to be larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b is designed to maintain the lighting state when +5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635, the LED ML1 is originally intended to be maintained. , 5V is supplied (+5V), the control ROM 1510b has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of visibility.

The ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow confirmation of the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) In addition, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, Can be visually recognized, that is, in a large area in which the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pin can be substantially confirmed from the angles of the multiple directions, and are arranged in a dispersed manner. As a result, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is performed in a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having the. Further, the LED ML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in the lighting state when +24V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state where +24V is supplied, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) 1510x includes the special connector SCN1 and the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (mounting surface). ) By additionally having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided in 1520x, the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are provided. The special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x can contribute to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be confirmed. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530). It is arranged so as to be distributed. Thus, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is performed by changing a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Further, the LED ML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is adapted to maintain the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, so that the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it is said that a special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 illuminate the board-to-board connector brightly. By having the function as a spotlight, the board-to-board connector is visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of sex.

In addition, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the product numbers printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In order that the model and the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles, the SDRAMs 1510c1, They are arranged so as to be larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LED ML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state when +12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. Therefore, although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state that +12V is being supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight of brightly illuminating the SDRAM 1510c, so that the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) and the state of the IC pin can be improved in visibility.

Further, among the plurality of blades forming the wing of the air-cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades by the inspector rotating the wing of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In the present embodiment, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounting type with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and weak directivity type. Is also suitable for lighting applications. When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as illumination, the space thus formed can be illuminated brightly.

Further, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 are emitted to the area of the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) that reflect the reflected light and redirect it to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. As the reflection portion (not shown), a colored paint having a gloss in addition to a colored paint having a bright color such as white may be used, or a metallic sheet having a gloss may be attached.

Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. In the game balls are rubbed against each other to be charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Further, since the pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities of the game hall in the opposite direction, another pachinko machine may be a noise source and may be affected by noise. In this way, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data are used. A configuration is adopted in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). As a result, noise that enters through the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the base body 1502, and the like, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and The noise can be removed by flowing the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to a substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)).

[7-5. Part of Beta Grand Foil]
By the way, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and a region other than a region where various land patterns are formed are grounds (GND). , The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as "solid ground"), and a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. It is formed as a so-called solid land (substrate ground) (also referred to as "solid earth") in which the other area except the area where various land patterns are formed is the ground (GND). The solid land (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are the peripheral control board. A plurality of through holes (both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510) that are formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the 1510 (copper). The same ground (GND) is formed by being electrically connected by the plated holes).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front. Position (that is, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the peripheral control board Since it protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of 1510, it is surrounded by the force when inserting a connector for connecting wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at a position where it does not interfere with each protruding terminal. Elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 are respectively formed in the up-down direction to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped by the control board 1510.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above, The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted and inscribed (surface contact) inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502. The front surface of 1502aa to 1502aa3 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is made to flow to the board ground (grounds (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. You can do it.

By the way, the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502a3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although the solid land was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion and the solid land was covered with the resist, the peripheral control at the contacted portion in the noise resistance test. The bottom surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 is covered with a resist by forming a solid land, and the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 at this contact portion is covered with the resist without forming the solid ground. It was found that noise resistance was higher when the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this contacted portion was covered with a resist without forming a solid land. ..

When electromagnetic wave noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to a portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502a3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. This causes electromagnetic noise to pass through the resist and enter the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise enters through such an unexpected route, an electronic component susceptible to the electromagnetic wave noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to this electronic component are formed on the base body 1502. If the front surfaces of the parts 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to the part in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, malfunction or damage may be caused.

Electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that is in contact with any of the disconnection prevention ribs of the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Since it cannot be predicted whether or not it will enter, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to this electronic component away from a specific disconnection prevention rib portion.

High voltage is applied to a portion of the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 and the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, so that electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and is solid. In order to invade the brand, when the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the beta gluant are in contact with each other through the resist, a high voltage due to electromagnetic noise that has invaded the base body 1502 is applied to this abutting part. Therefore, it is considered that unnecessary loop wirings are formed in which electromagnetic wave noise penetrates from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the solid plane.

Here, the solid of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502a3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a diagram showing the shape of the solid land in the portion where the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portion formed on the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. 2A is a schematic view of the copper foil surface of FIG. 2A, and is a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and are connected to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. As shown in FIG. 209(a), the corresponding positions and their peripheries are, as shown in FIG. 209(a), a vertically long rectangular foil stripping region 1510ya having a horizontal distance dimension dgw and a vertical distance dimension dgh. 1510 yp, respectively. That is, on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, a region in which a part of the solid pattern is removed (removed) is formed.

In these foil removing regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 is equal to or more than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the left-right direction is 1.0 as the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the left side surface of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3. The length is 1.5 times the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

In addition, in these foil stripping regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each of them is formed. As the length of the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3. The length is 1.5 times the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

In addition, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. As the length of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil removing area 1510ya and the upper side surface of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3, the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the wire break prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3 in the left-right direction is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil removing region 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aaa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1-1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

That is, since the foil removal area 1510ya is formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp where the solid land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil removal area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the solid land. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. 209(b), the resist solution is also applied to the foil removal area 1510ya and the resist layer 1510yr. Is formed. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil removal area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. In addition, a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil removal area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. No foil stripping region of the same shape is formed.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and are provided on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, are fixed by metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and the same ground (GND). GND). For this reason, in the present embodiment, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is controlled from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil removal area 1510ya. The "route through which noise does not escape" that cannot enter the solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate is formed, and the noise that entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is described above. By forming a "route through which noise escapes" that flows to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates) via the metal pan head screw, noise can be removed.

[7-6. Reuse of peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (used again).

As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has a circular soldering copper foil (so-called “ Lands) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and is formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to mount the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by being screwed toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. For this reason, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other.

In this manner, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by repeatedly screwing and removing the peripheral control board 1510. The mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are rubbed against the mounting surface (boss surface) to be peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 of the peripheral control board 1510 are made of metal. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are rubbed against the seat surface (head seat surface) of the screw and peeled from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. If the copper foils of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the above are exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reused because the copper foil is oxidized and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. There is a problem that it becomes difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the front surfaces. The copper foil is soldered to prevent it from being exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw are electrically connected while being covered. Covered so that it can be connected This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being peeled off from the base material, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are seat surfaces (heads) of the pan head screw made of metal. Of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and oxidation can be prevented, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to improve electrical connectivity in a state where the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the solder can be provided. Of the peripheral control board 1510 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 and the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw are in electrical contact with each other. It is possible to improve the property.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 will pass through the metal pan head screw to the board ground (ground of various boards (GND)). By reliably forming the above-mentioned "route through which noise flows" to (1), the noise countermeasure effect by the peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin can be stably maintained.

In the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are set as described above. , The surface of the copper foil is soldered so that it is not exposed. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws as described above, and thus are soldered to the copper foils that are the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the thickness is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are There is a problem that the contact area decreases and the electrical connectivity deteriorates. Further, as described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Since the contact is made, unless the thickness of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is soldered uniformly (that is, when the solder is swelled), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510x Side lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are reduced in contact area, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. If the thickness of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, to be soldered is not uniform (that is, if the solder has a raised portion), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of metal into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a, The control board 1510 is distorted, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the seat surface of the metal pan head screw abuts. A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the device and a squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask so that the solder paste is applied through the holes formed in the metal mask. By putting the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste by heat, the thickness soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the thickness of the metal mask. You can Further, the copper that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the foil, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (such as a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask to form the metal mask. By applying from the holes, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is put in a reflow oven and the solder paste is dried by heat, so that the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be adjusted. The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[7-7. Modification]
In the above-described present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have their surfaces. The respective copper foils are soldered so as not to be exposed, but the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. Surface of the peripheral control board 1510 contacting the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, which are respectively soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side, and are formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side, may be coated with a resist solution to cover it. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied together when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. It Even with such a configuration, a metal pan head screw is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 to face the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via the metal pan head screw. It can be in a state. Further, the copper that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with the resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, so that the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of metal into 1510r4 and screwing it toward mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. It was applied from a hole formed in a metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 was put in a reflow oven to heat and dry the solder paste. ) May be poured into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. In order to prevent the area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity to be deteriorated, soldering should not be partially raised on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist for the land when the peripheral control board is poured into the solder bath.

For example, on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, a resist layer 1510xr formed by coating a part of the resist solution with a resist solution is formed, The peripheral control board 1510 is to be soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, which is the surface of the copper foil, in a region having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 210(a), a resist is predetermined with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles each having a width are concentrically formed (a resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed). As shown in FIG. 210B, the resist has a predetermined width. And a shape in which a rectangular shape having a predetermined length is formed in a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are arranged in an annular shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, and as shown in FIG. And a line formed in a horizontal direction formed in a lattice (a resist may have a predetermined width, and a plurality of lines may be formed only in the vertical direction with a predetermined distance therebetween, or a resist may have a predetermined width). It may have a shape in which a plurality of horizontal lines are formed with a predetermined distance between them.), as shown in FIG. 210(d), lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and rise to the right. A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed in an oblique line shape (a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines in the lower right direction are formed in an oblique line shape), or a small circular shape (not shown) Examples include aggregated shapes.

In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the periphery is formed. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered. The amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined shape by being coated with a resist solution. Of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 as long as they can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is soldered. It is possible to make the attachment uniform so that it does not rise in part. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is landed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts on the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist solution. Then, the resist layers applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may have a uniform thickness.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal pan head screw is used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a “chrysanthemum washer”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a. 1510rb1 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 while the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with each other. ˜1510rb4 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other, whereby the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan head screw. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to each other, and the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other. A metal cover 1501′ may be used instead of the resin cover 1501. In this case, the base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of a conductive resin, or may be made of metal instead of being made of a conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring drawing opening 1501ae may be made of a conductive resin or a metal.

An amplifier board having a circuit that amplifies various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is housed in the metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal board box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. Noise may enter the partial case. Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of amplifier boards are formed. The land and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the metal cover body of the metal substrate box or the metal partial case are in contact with each other. , The plurality of lands formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the amplifier board and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other, so that the metal pan The metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal board box is electrically connected to the plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body or the metal cover board of the metal board box is made. The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier substrate can be electrically connected. Also, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transferred from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case through the metal pan head screw, and the heat is efficiently radiated to the outside air. You can also

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the state in which the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the pan head screw made of metal. The cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other, but it can also be used in a two-story board (so-called “turtle board”). it can. For example, the plurality of lands of the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, the plurality of lands of the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board, and the plurality of lands of the parent board are electrically connected. And multiple lands of the child board are screwed at both ends of a metal strut (spacer) respectively, so that electricity is generated through the plurality of lands of the parent board, the plurality of lands of the child board and the metal strut (spacer). Can be connected to each other. Accordingly, the ground (GND) of the parent board and the ground (GND) of the child board can be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin, but the main control board box 1320 housing the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are housed. If the payout control board box 632 is made of a conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 need to be transparent in accordance with the rule, and a conductive resin board is used. Although not possible, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box while the board box for accommodating the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for accommodating the various relay boards are made of conductive resin. They may be fixed by the same method. By doing so, the same effect as the noise countermeasure effect by the peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin can be obtained for the board box that houses the power supply board and the various relay board boxes that contain the various relay boards. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 as shown in FIG. In the state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. An inter-board connector including a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a board-to-board connector including a special connector SCN2 included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 included in the liquid crystal output board 1530. By disposing it near the center of 552, it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail 553 is provided with the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the cutouts 553aa formed in plurals on the lower side (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). Since the board-to-board connector can be dropped, by disposing the board-to-board connector described above away from the tank rail 553, the occurrence of an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the board-to-board connector described above. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, the inter-board connector including the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided. The board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN4 provided is a peripheral control unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). When the 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 206, the upper area of the inter-board connector can be made smaller by arranging it vertically in a long direction, so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. The area of adhesion can be minimized. In the case where the above-described inter-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector becomes large, so that the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres significantly increases. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. Is so large that the area where dust, powder of some kind of metal or the like adheres is extremely increased. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac is Due to the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot be projected from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust or some kind of metallic powder adhered to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. There is. In this way, the direction in which the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

In the embodiment described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug) correspondingly. For example, in the above-described embodiment, since various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data is not transferred. The ROM board 1520 serves as the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 serves as the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) serving as a plug, and correspondingly, when the peripheral control board 1510 serves as a socket, a special connector (or a plug) is formed. Can be provided with a special connector). Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal systems to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 serves as the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 serves as the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) serving as a plug, and correspondingly, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 serves as a socket, a special connector (or a plug serves). A special connector).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one of the 1501e except the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side or in combination. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, and a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this structure, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the game ball B drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign substances falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason for not forming the ventilation holes 1501az on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, if the ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is provided through the ventilation holes 1501az. When foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and enters the inside of the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, the foreign matter that has fallen onto the various substrates causes electrical effects. This is because there is a high probability that trouble will occur.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. In this case, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. The reason why the vent holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is, as described above, if the vent holes 1501az are temporarily formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the vent holes 1501az are formed through the vent holes 1501az. The foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls into the peripheral control board box 1505 and intrudes, so that the peripheral control board box 1505 falls onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical troubles due to foreign matter will occur.

[8. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 that are attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 that is attached to the main body frame 4, and each control is shared. Has been done. The main control board 1310 can control a game operation (progress of a game). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effect, and the peripheral control section 1511 and the peripheral control section that can control various effects in the game based on various commands from the main control board 1310. An effect display control unit 1512 capable of controlling the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from 1511. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that can control the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that can control the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182. There is.

[8-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 capable of controlling the progress of the game is housed in the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, and for the sake of explanation, the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front side of the board holder 1200. The surface opposite to the front side of the main control board 1310 facing the rear surface (that is, the rear surface) may be referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310” on which electronic components are mounted. Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a green coating film (hereinafter, referred to as a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)). A green resist layer may be simply described as "solid green resist".) A power-on process executed at power-on is controlled, and a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on. From various sensors such as a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations executed later and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of the voltage, a RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation section for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, Equipped with. The main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high-frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310.

A main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a RAM clear switch 1310f, various connectors, etc. are provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A DIP type electronic component to be configured is mounted, and a through hole having a mounting surface side land through which various terminal pins of the DIP type electronic component are inserted and a through surface having a mounting surface side land through which the DIP type electronic component is not inserted. A hole is formed, and a green resist layer is formed by a solid-painted green resist in the entire area except the mounting surface side land and the through hole. Further, on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310, a solder surface side land corresponding to the through hole is formed, and a solid green resist is applied to the entire area excluding the solder surface side land and the through-hole. A green resist layer is formed. The mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the solder surface side land are electrically connected. The mounting surface side land is electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the solder surface side land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. It is electrically connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side. When various terminal pins of the DIP type electronic component are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 into the through holes having the mounting surface side land, the back surface of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the inserted through holes. The DIP type electronic component is fixed to the main control board 1310 by projecting from the solder surface side land formed on the (solder surface), and soldering the projecting various terminal pins and the solder surface side land. It will be in a state of being. As described above, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are formed by applying the green resist solution to the green coating film (that is, the green resist layer is formed by the solid green resist). However, the pachinko machine 1 does not have a green coating on the mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the solder surface side land. There are multiple rows across from each other, and while the game balls that have become hot due to the polishing of the game balls are supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the heat emitted from the pachinko machine 1 is also added, making it a sealed space called an island facility. As the internal temperature rises, the main control board 1310, which is an important board for controlling the progress of the game, is prevented from thermal runaway under the influence of heat. Therefore, the mounting surface side land, through hole, and solder are provided. By exposing the copper foil portion of the surface side land, it is possible to improve the heat dissipation efficiency of the main control board 1310 and contribute to the prevention of thermal runaway of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. Since the ID code once added is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the content of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the content of the register changes inconsistently, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly determined to have been affected by electrical noise. It is a circuit that resets. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by the user program. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described below, and again executes the main control side power-on process described below. Will be done. In this case, since the main-control-side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main-control internal RAM will always occur, as will be described later, so the contents of the main-control internal RAM are completely erased ( It will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, since the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 (main control board Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in hardware Random number circuit"). This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and the initial value is generated. The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed as a value (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication and within a predetermined numerical range. When all the values have been extracted, the one value within the predetermined numerical value range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical value range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. It is supposed to be set as.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch 1310f, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the front side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged (in addition, , The shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component may be included.) In contrast, it is a white paint that is easily noticeable, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310. Since the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, it is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. Further, the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the main control board 1310 is also arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize because the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various sensors to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so that the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is electrically connected to a ground (GND) (board ground of the main control board 1310), and various signals are externally supplied to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit with a reset function that has a reset function that forcibly resets the information that has been input with various signals to be output to the board, and a reset function that does not have a reset terminal And a main control output circuit without reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with a reset function is a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to the external board etc. by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board etc. by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on that information is output. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

A first starting port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. A second starting opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first winning prize for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first winning opening 2005 Mouth sensor 2402, second special winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting game ball B received in second special winning opening 2006, out mouth sensor 3053 for detecting gaming ball B accepted in out opening 2010, first sub-out opening A first sub-out sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in 2011, a second sub-out sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. for detection are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with the reset function so that the main control output circuit with the reset function drives the main control solenoid. By outputting a control signal to the circuit 1310d, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, or the like, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with a reset function to the main control output circuit with a reset function, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, the normal hold display, the first special Each drive signal is output to the symbol display device, the first special reserved number display device, the second special symbol display device, the second special reserved number display device, the round display device, or the like.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with the reset function, whereby the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with the reset function. Main control with reset function by outputting various information about games (game information) to or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function The output circuit outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not included. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical is used for the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054. I am using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

Further, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B is frequently entered. The detection of the game ball B by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not frequently occur. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3051.

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the outlet 2010, the proximity sensor 3053 having high durability and long life is used as the outlet sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the payout from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without the reset function as serial data, so that the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data. When the payout control board 633 completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control output with a reset function. The main control output circuit with a reset function outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 633.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without the reset function, Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

Various voltages (DC +24V, DC +12V, and DC +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various types of information stored in the RAM with built-in main control include operation signals from the RAM clear switch 1310f when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. (RAM clear signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and triggered by this, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control internal RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. It is like this. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without the reset function, and is also output from the main control output circuit without the reset function to the payout control board 633.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC +12V and DC +24V from the power supply board 630, and monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of these DC +12V and DC +24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notification when detecting signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of DC +12V and DC +24V, and the power failure notification signal is output from a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. The input terminal of the main control board 1310 (outputted via the main control output circuit 1310c), and the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110 while being input to the input terminal. Entered in. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display device 1600 in addition to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and further, from the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635, the door frame 3 It is input to each of the various boards attached to the. It should be noted that the power failure notice signal may be configured not to be input to various boards or the like attached to the door frame 3.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power supply lines, that is, a power supply line supplied with +12V DC (+12V power supply line) and a power supply line supplied with +24V DC (+24V power supply line). Compared with the case of monitoring the voltage applied to one of the +12V power supply line or the +24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage respectively, it is possible to more accurately understand the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure. You can do it.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is provided on the main control board 1310 as described above, but DC +12V and DC +24V are supplied from the power supply board 630, and these DC +12V and DC are supplied. Since a sign of a +24V power failure or a momentary power failure is monitored, the power supply board 630 may be provided instead of the main control board 1310. In this way, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e does not have to be provided on the main control board 1310, so that the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is not required every time the game board 5 is manufactured, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

[8-2. Discharge control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, a payout control board 633 that controls the launch of the game ball B, the ball feed control, and the like is a payout control detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. For the sake of explanation, the surface opposite to the front side (that is, the rear surface) of the payout control board 633 that faces the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 is described. It may be referred to as a "surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633" on which the electronic component is mounted. The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game balls B, etc., has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid coating”) formed by applying a green resist solution to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) thereof. A green resist layer is formed by means of the ". green resist"), and a discharge control section 633a for performing various controls related to the discharge and a discharge control by a discharge solenoid 542 and a ball feeding solenoid 145. Error release having a firing control unit 633b that performs ball feeding control, an error LED display 633c that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, and a pressing operation unit that releases the error displayed on the error LED display 633c. And a switch 633d.

On the front surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, DIP type electronic parts constituting a payout control section 633a, a firing control section 633b, an error LED display 633c, an error release switch 633d, various connectors, etc. are mounted. , A through hole having a mounting surface side land through which various terminal pins of the DIP type electronic component are inserted and a through hole having a mounting surface side land through which the DIP type electronic component is not inserted are formed, and the mounting surface side land and A green resist layer is formed of a solid green resist over the entire area except the through holes. In addition, a solder surface side land corresponding to the through hole is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633, and a solid green resist is applied to the entire area excluding the solder surface side land and the through-hole. A green resist layer is formed. The mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the solder surface side land are electrically connected. The mounting surface side land is electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633, and the solder surface side land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the dispensing control board 633. It is electrically connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side. When various terminal pins of the DIP type electronic component are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633 into the through hole having the mounting surface side land, the back surface of the payout control board 633 corresponding to the inserted through hole. The DIP type electronic component is fixed to the dispensing control board 633 by projecting from the solder surface side land formed on the (solder surface), and soldering the projecting various terminal pins and the solder surface side land. It will be in a state of being. As described above, the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633 are formed by applying the green resist solution (that is, the green resist layer is formed by the solid green resist). However, the pachinko machine 1 does not have a green coating on the mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the solder surface side land. There are multiple rows across from each other, and while the game balls that have become hot due to the polishing of the game balls are supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the heat emitted from the pachinko machine 1 is also added, making it a sealed space called an island facility. In order to prevent the payout control board 633, which is an important board for controlling the payout of the game balls, from being affected by heat and causing thermal runaway due to an increase in the internal temperature, the mounting surface side land, the through hole, and By exposing the copper foil portion of the land on the solder surface side, it is possible to improve the heat dissipation efficiency of the payout control board 633 and contribute to the prevention of thermal runaway of the payout control board 633.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error release switch 633d, the attribute of the surface side electronic component such as the part number of the surface side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged (in addition, , The shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component may be included.) In contrast, it is a white paint that is easily noticeable, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that houses the payout control board 633. Since the payout control board 633 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the payout control board 633 is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the payout control board 633. The error release switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is also located at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the payout control board 633 because the payout control board 633 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[8-2-1. Dispensing control section]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633, controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and also performs a game medium payout operation executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. The payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs including a payout control program for controlling, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various sensors related to payout are input. A payout control input circuit 633ab, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external substrate, and a payout motor drive circuit 633ad for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580, Equipped with.

The payout control MPU 633aa has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “WDT with payout control”) for monitoring the system) and functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various sensors to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 633ab, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is electrically connected to a ground (GND) (board ground of the payout control board 633), and various signals are externally supplied to its various input terminals. Output circuit with a reset function that has a reset function that forcibly resets the information that has been input with various signals to be output to the board, and a reset function that does not have a reset terminal And a payout control output circuit having no reset function. The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit with the reset function is a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to the external board etc. by resetting by the payout control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, in the payout control output circuit without the reset function, since the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to the external board etc. is not reset by the payout control system reset, the signal based on the information is output. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

Detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154 of foul cover unit 150, detection signal from ball cutting detection sensor 574 of ball guiding unit 570, detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590 of dispensing device 580, dispensing detection of dispensing device 580 The detection signal from the sensor 591 and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the detection signal from the body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab.

Further, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received by the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab by the serial data method. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

When the payout control MPU 633aa completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a signal to that effect (payment main ACK signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with the reset function. By outputting to the circuit, the payout control output circuit with reset function outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 633aa sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

Further, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with the reset function to drive the payout control output circuit with the reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED display 633c from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal for displaying to the payout control output circuit with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with the reset function to the error LED display 633c.

The error LED display 633d is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 633d include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “out of ball” (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the fact that there is no game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570) is notified, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball game" (specifically Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B are engaged with each other, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate, and the number "3" is displayed. When it is, the fact that there is a "count switch error" (specifically, there is a problem in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591) is notified, and the number "5" is displayed. If it is, the message "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit) is notified, and if the number "6" is displayed, "full retry" is displayed. “Tan” (specifically, the game ball B in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154) and the number “7” is displayed. If it is, "CR is not connected" is notified (electrical connection is cut off in any part from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1). , When the number "9" is displayed, it means that "the stock is in stock (the prize ball stock (there is unpaid)") (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out is the predetermined number of balls. Has been reached).

Further, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out as a prize ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with the reset function, thereby performing the payout control with the reset function. The output circuit outputs the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out as prize balls to the external terminal board 558 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 558 is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photo couplers. ), the number of balls of the game ball B and various information (game information, error content regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) is transmitted to the hall computer. The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated from each other by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the hall computer can control the main control board 1310, which allows the game to proceed through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, and the payout. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can be used and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance, and thus malfunction or failure does not occur. The hall computer grasps the number of game balls B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, and thereby the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called , The player's game), and the player's game.

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. .. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game ball B to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial system, and this signal is sent from the payout control MPU 633aaa through the CR unit input/output circuit (not shown). It is adapted to be input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the lent gaming ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal indicates the ball. It is adapted to be input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the lending operation unit 220.

Various voltages (DC +24V, DC +12V, and DC +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633. As described above, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. With this capacitor, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is the operation signal (RAM clear signal) when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and triggered by this, it is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control internal RAM by the payout control MPU 633aa. There is.

[8-2-2. Firing controller]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors relating to firing are input, an oscillation circuit to output a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal based on this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on this firing reference pulse, and a firing reference A ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , And generates a ball feeding reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the relationship of the handle unit 180, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger touches the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball B is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

Based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a launch reference pulse. It is output to the firing solenoid 542 in response to the input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the dish unit 200. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped and the received game ball B is delivered to the ball launching device 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Controlled.

[8-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510 is a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter, simply referred to as “solid green resist”). A green resist layer is formed, and as shown in FIG. 211, the peripheral control unit 1511 and the periphery described above that can control various effects during the game based on various commands from the main control board 1310. It also has a function with the above-described effect display control section 1512 capable of controlling the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on various commands from the control section 1511, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, A peripheral control IC 1510a in which a sound source, a SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b that stores in advance various programs and various schedule data that regulates the progress of effects, and peripheral data ROM A SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data) stored in a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the substrate 1520, and a slide type volume adjustment capable of adjusting the volume. A switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). ing. Examples of various I/O interfaces include various serial I/O ports and various parallel I/O ports.

A peripheral control IC 1510a, a control ROM 1510b, an SDRAM 1510c, a volume control switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e, a power supply creating circuit (not shown), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown), various connectors, etc. are formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A surface mount (SMD) type electronic component is mounted, various terminals of the surface mount (SMD) type electronic component are soldered, and a through hole having a land on the mounting surface (that is, various terminals of the electronic component). Is formed, and a green resist layer is formed by a solid green resist over the entire area excluding the pad, the mounting surface side land and the through hole. .. In addition, a back surface side land corresponding to the through hole is formed on the back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and a green resist layer is formed by a solid green resist over the entire area except the back surface side land and the through-hole. Has been done. The mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the back surface side land are electrically connected. The mounting surface side land is electrically connected to the mounting surface side wiring pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surface side land is electrically connected to the back surface side wiring pattern on the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510. Connected to each other. Various terminals of a surface mounting (SMD) type electronic component are arranged on pads formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the various terminals and the pads are soldered to each other, whereby surface mounting (SMD) is performed. The electronic components of the type are fixed to the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the green coating film formed by applying the green resist liquid (that is, the green resist layer is formed by the solid green resist). However, in addition to the pad, the mounting surface side land, the through hole, and the back surface side land are not covered with the green coating film at all.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a includes various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as one process of the initial setting process when the power is turned on (including the case of restoring power from a power failure). (Data) is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer speed of 2 Gbps, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed. .. As the control information (peripheral data), a plurality of image data such as a background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, a character image, an image data such as a pattern image, various decorative boards included in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs to be mounted, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, and various types provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. It is drive data and the like for controlling the drive of the movable effect body.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the activation of its own system, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and advances the production. ..

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the activation of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads out and reads out various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read out in accordance with the schedule data, control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, and various LED light emission modes according to various effects are achieved. By performing such control as described above, or by performing control so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow, the various effects are advanced.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates drawing data for reading the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, the output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is controlled. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a becomes ready to receive the screen data that defines the screen configuration, the VDP outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to notify that effect.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates the sound data, and outputs the sound data. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. When the slide type volume adjusting switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume adjusting operation signal is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side can be adjusted. Outputs an acoustic signal (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to 464 and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound effect).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the activation of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU reads the various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands and reads the read schedule data. Along with, various game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2. Read from the various serial I/O ports and send to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the effect drive board 1720, and various drive motors and drive solenoids provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5. Various game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the game board side electric drive source is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted to the performance drive board 1720 from various serial I/O ports, or the door. A door frame side electric drive source such as an operation ring drive motor 342 provided in the frame 3 and an operation button lift drive motor 367 (including a drive solenoid when a drive solenoid is provided on the door frame 3 side). Outputs various door frame side drive data for outputting a drive signal to, a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Various door frame side light emission data for reading are read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted to the door frame 3 side from various serial I/O ports.

Detection signals from various detection sensors provided in various performance units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are input to the panel drive board 1720 and various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Has been done. In addition, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 381, the detection signal from the elevation detection sensor 382, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3. The detection signal from is received (input) to various serial I/O ports (or may be various parallel I/O ports) of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. A signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. ..

The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[9. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 213. 212 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 213 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 212. First, the power supply board will be described, and subsequently, the backup power supply, the power supply to each control board and the fixing method of the fuse will be described. The board grounds (GND) of the various boards and the board grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of the power supply board 630 and are the same ground (GND).

[9-1. Power board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 95, FIG. 96, etc. is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of this power supply cord is used as the power outlet of the island facility in the game hall. It is plugged in. In the island facility in the game hall, a system is usually adopted in which, for example, four pachinko machines 1 as one group are supplied with an AC power source (AC 24V) for each transformer. For example, in an island facility at a game hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, 4 pachinko machines 1 are managed as 5 groups, and one transformer is provided for each group. Since a system in which AC power (24 V AC) is supplied (by a total of 5 transformers) is used, a transformer having a maximum allowable capacity of 1000 VA is provided.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, the AC power (24V AC) supplied from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power board 630, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on, while the power switch 630a. When is turned off, the AC power supply (24 V AC) supplied from the island facility in the game hall is not supplied to the power supply board 630, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be powered off. The power switch 630a is normally maintained in the ON state, and when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall starts business, the breaker installed in the game hall is turned on (turned on) to operate the island in the game hall. The pachinko machines 1 arranged in a plurality of rows in the equipment are simultaneously turned on. Then, after the staff such as the clerk of the game hall closes the business, the breakers installed in the game hall are turned off (turned off) to simultaneously shut off the power of the pachinko machines 1 arranged in multiple rows in the island facility of the game hall. To do. Therefore, in the case of individually turning on or off the power of the pachinko machines 1 among a plurality of pachinko machines 1 arranged in a row in the island facility of the game hall, for example, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall performs maintenance. When the power switch 630a is turned off and the power switch 630a is turned on again when the maintenance is completed, the pachinko machine 1 in which some trouble has occurred needs to be solved in order to eliminate the trouble. A person in charge of turning off the power switch 630a turns on the power switch 630a again when the trouble is solved.

As shown in FIG. 212, the power supply board 630 includes fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, and a power supply in addition to the power switch 630a. A creation circuit 630f and a backup power supply circuit 630h are provided. The AC power supply (AC 24V (hereinafter, referred to as "AC24V")) supplied from the island facility of the game hall is irrespective of ON/OFF operation of the power switch 630a, and the interface board 630. It is supplied to the ball lending machine (for example, CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 from the interface board 635.

When the power switch 630a is turned on, 24V AC supplied from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b via the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and the power switch 630a, and noise is generated in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. To be removed. The noise-removed AC 24V is supplied to the rectifier circuit 630c, and is rectified (converted from AC to DC (AC-DC conversion)) in the rectifier circuit 630c to become a DC power supply. This rectified DC power supply is supplied to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and DC +35V (hereinafter referred to as "+35V") with the power factor corrected in the power factor correction circuit 630d is created. To be done. The generated +35V is supplied to the smoothing circuit 630e, and the smoothing circuit 630e removes the ripple of +35V and is smoothed. This smoothed +35V is supplied to the power supply generation circuit 630f. When the voltage supplied to itself exceeds a predetermined voltage, the power supply destruction circuit 630g causes a large current exceeding the allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) to flow into the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to melt them and blow them out from the game hall island equipment. The supplied AC 24V is electrically disconnected. The fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, when a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the permissible current upper limit (breaking current) flows, the element parts of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted and supplied to the subsequent AC24V through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Shut off.

The power supply generation circuit 630f to which the smoothed +35V is supplied includes a +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa, a +12V power supply generation circuit 630fb, and a +24V power supply generation circuit 630fc. The +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa creates a direct current +5V (hereinafter referred to as “+5V”) from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb creates a direct current +12V (hereinafter referred to as “+12V”) from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc creates a direct current +24V (hereinafter referred to as “+24V”) from +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The +5V applied power supply system created by the power supply board 630 is a +5V power supply line, the +12V applied power supply system created by the power supply board 630 is a +12V power supply line, and the power supply board 630 is created. The power supply system to which +24V is applied and supplied serves as a +24V power supply line.

[9-2. Backup power supply]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control internal RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 controls the payout control in the payout control board 633. The backup power is supplied to the RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 633aa of the unit 633a.

The +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the payout control board 633. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 633 becomes a +5V power line in the payout control board 633 via the payout control filter circuit 633h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and is supplied with the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. Is applied to the power supply terminal of. The +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V from +12V from the payout control board 633 as a local power supply serving as a control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a. +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (hereinafter, may be referred to as "main control board side generation +5V") is generated by the main control board 1310 on the main control board 1310 through the main control filter circuit 1310h. It becomes a line and is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. Note that +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 (main control board side creation +5V) are electrical. Are not connected to each other and are independent of each other.

The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633 and is also paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 on the control board 633. That is, +5V generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and the power supply of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0. A current flows toward the terminal and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is an electrical device in which +5V generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 returns to the power supply board 630 from the payout control board 633 and again. With various connection methods, +5V can be supplied and charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, although the current is prevented from flowing to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate. The content stored in the payout control built-in RAM is retained by the.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, +5V (+5V created on the main control board side) created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM which is the forward direction due to the diode MD0. , A current flows toward the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected by +5V (created on the main control board side +5V) created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g to the power supply board 630 from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. By this, +5V supplied to the main control board side can be supplied to be charged. As a result, +12V created by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g is +5V. When it becomes impossible to create (main control board side creation +5V), the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a due to the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM to perform the main control. The contents stored in the built-in RAM are retained.

[9-3. Power supply to each control board, etc.]
Next, an outline of the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the power supply mainly supplied to the payout control board and the power supply supplied to the main control board will be described.

The three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are as shown in FIG. 212. Are supplied to the payout control board 633, and among these three kinds of power supplies, two kinds of power supplies of +12 V and +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 generate three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V to the interface board 635. In addition to being supplied, it is also supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, and the like via the interface board 635.

The three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V, which are respectively supplied to the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., are melted by an overcurrent flowing to each of these power supply lines. A +5V fuse (not shown), a +12V fuse (not shown), and a +24V fuse (not shown) that can be provided may be provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, and the like, respectively.

Particularly, the +12V power supply line and the +24V power supply line are monitored for a decrease in potential by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as will be described later, and the potential of the +12V power supply line and the potential of the +12V power supply line decrease. When the power failure notice signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the payout control MPU 63aa of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later. Stops the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, to stop the payout progress (the action of paying out the game ball as a prize ball). Will be done.

Therefore, when a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, a main control board 1310 that constitutes the main board is provided. When the payout control board 633 is operating normally, the interface board 635, the door frame main board in the +12V power supply line or the +24V power supply line of the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. Due to an electrical trouble on the relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, or the like due to some reason, a leakage current or a short circuit occurs, and the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, or the like. When the overcurrent flows through the door frame clothing relay board 105 or the like, the +12V fuse and the +24V fuse provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. are blown out. be able to. This suppresses a decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line and the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power failure monitoring signal 1310e of the main control board 1310 controls the power failure notice signal to perform the main control. It does not have to be output to the MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout. The control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the game ball is paid out as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process described later.

As shown in FIG. 213, three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are provided through the +5V fuse SF5, the +12V fuse SF12, and the +24V fuse SF24. 1720 respectively. Further, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the effect drive board 1720 via the +12V fuse SF12, and is also supplied to the effect display device 1600 via the +12V fuse SF12 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Has been done. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 relays +12V supplied via the +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the effect display device.

The +5V fuse SF5 takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +5V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the current used by the succeeding boards such as the performance drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510. The capacitance is set in advance, and a current can flow up to the upper limit (breaking current) of the +5V power line peripheral control board allowable current. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the permissible current of the +5V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the fuse portion SF5 of the +5V fuses, the element portion of the fuse SF5 of the +5V fuses, and is supplied via the fuse SF5 of the +5V to the following. Cut off the +5V power line.

The +12V fuse SF12 is a current board used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequent boards such as a performance drive board 1720 and various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510. The current is used in the above, and the current used in the subsequent device such as the effect display device 1600 via the peripheral control board 1510 is added, and the capacity is preset, and the +12V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current is set. A current can flow up to the upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the permissible current of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board flows, the fuse portion of the +12V fuse SF12 is blown out and the element portion of the fuse of the +12V fuse SF12 is blown to be supplied via the +12V fuse SF12. Cut off the +12V power line.

The +24V fuse SF24 has a capacity set in advance in the +24V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 in consideration of a current used by a succeeding board such as the performance drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to pass a current up to the upper limit (breaking current) of the permissible current of the power supply line peripheral control board. When the +24V is used in the peripheral control board 1510 to provide a +24V system driver circuit as an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid), the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power supply line is used as the capacity of the +24V fuse SF24. The current used by itself and the current used by the succeeding boards such as the performance drive board 1720 via the peripheral control board 1510 are set in advance. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the +24V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit flows, the element part of the +24V fuse SF24 is blown and the +24V fuse SF24 is supplied via the +24V fuse SF24 to the following. Shut off the +24V power supply line.

The +5V fuse SF5, the +12V fuse SF12, and the +24V fuse SF24 are the main components in which the +5V power supply line, the +12V power supply line, and the +24V power supply line are supplied from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the subsequent substrates such as the performance drive substrate 1720. Since it is a fuse, a large current may flow and it may generate heat, so that it is arranged away from electronic components such as the peripheral control IC 1510a so as not to cause a failure due to a thermal shutdown built in the IC under the influence of this heat generation. Preferably in the vicinity of the connector to which +5V, +12V and +24V are supplied from the interface board 635 (particularly in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the power line to which +5V, +12V and +24V is supplied from the interface board 635 is connected. ).

The peripheral control board 1510 controls to generate DC 3.3V (hereinafter, referred to as “+3.3V”) from +12V supplied via the +12V fuse SF12 as a local power supply which is a control power supply of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The power generation circuit 1510z is provided. The +3.3V generated by the control power supply generation circuit 1510z is a peripheral control IC 1510a (CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA integrated on one semiconductor chip as the peripheral control IC 1510a via the control power supply fuse SF3). It is supplied to the controller, various I/O interfaces, etc.) and is supplied to the peripheral control data ROM board 1520 although it is a local power supply for the peripheral control board 1510. The +3.3V created by the control power supply creation circuit 1510z becomes a +3.3V power supply line in the peripheral control board 1510 and a +3.3V power supply line in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the control power supply fuse SF3. The control power supply generation circuit 1510z is supplied via the +5V power supply line and/or the +24V fuse SF24 supplied via the +5V fuse SF5, except for the +12V power supply line supplied via the +12V fuse SF12. Even if an abnormal current flows to the +24V power supply line and blows out, +12V from the +12V power supply line can be used to create +3.3V, which is a local power supply that serves as a control power supply for the peripheral control IC 1510a. The control IC 1510a continues to operate without stopping, and when the +24V fuse SF24 is blown, it is difficult to drive the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid), but the production is continued. can do.

In addition to +3.3V, the control power supply generation circuit 1510z uses, as local power supplies, a plurality of control power supplies corresponding to respective devices such as the control ROM 1510b of the peripheral control board 1510, the SDRAM 1510c, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. (For example, direct current 1.5 V (hereinafter referred to as “+1.5 V”), direct current 1.25 V (hereinafter referred to as “+1.25 V”), etc.) may be created. In this case, the control power supply fuse SF3 is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of control power supplies (for example, +3.3V fuse for +3.3V and +1.5V for +1.5V). Fuses for +1.25V, +1.5V fuses are provided, and +3.3V fuses serve as +3.3V power supply lines, +1.5V fuses serve as +1.5V power supply lines, and +1 It becomes a +1.25V power line via a 25V fuse).

The control power supply fuse SF3 takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by the subsequent boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +3.3V power supply line. The capacitance is preset, and a current can flow up to the +3.3V power line peripheral control board allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the +3.3V power line peripheral control board allowable current flows in the control power supply fuse SF3, the element portion of the control power supply fuse SF3 is blown and the control power supply fuse SF3 passes through the control power supply fuse SF3. Shuts off the +3.3V power line to the subsequent power supply. When the control power supply fuse SF3 is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of control power supplies (for example, +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, +1). In the case where a +1.25 V fuse is provided for each .25 V), the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the subsequent data board such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via the peripheral control board 1510 are used. The current and this capacity are set in advance, and the current can flow up to the upper limit (breaking current) of the permissible current of the control lines of the power supply lines of the plurality of control power supplies. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable upper limit of the power supply line peripheral control board flows, the element parts of the control power supply fuse SF3 provided corresponding to the plurality of control power supplies are blown, and the blown control power supply fuses. The power supply line of the control power supply to the following that is supplied via SF3 is cut off.

Note that the control power supply fuse SF3 is the main fuse of the +3.3V power supply line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control IC 1510a and the like, and the flowing current is large and may generate heat. The peripheral control IC 1510a is preferably placed away from electronic components such as the peripheral control IC 1510a so as not to cause a failure due to a thermal shutdown built in the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is preferable to dispose in the vicinity of a terminal supplied as a +3.3 power supply line).

In the present embodiment, the +5V fuse SF5, the +12V fuse SF12, the +24V fuse SF24, and the control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mounting type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and are determined in advance. When a current that exceeds the permissible current upper limit (predetermined breaking current) flows, it blows. Unlike a resettable fuse, once the fuse blows, even if the current drops, the power supply line is It is an electronic component that cannot be supplied. The +5V fuse SF5, the +12V fuse SF12, the +24V fuse SF24, and the control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be lead type fuses instead of SMD type chip fuses. Further, as the +5V fuse SF5, the +12V fuse SF12, the +24V fuse SF24, and the control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or a lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when the resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding one, but if the current drops, the succeeding one is restarted. In contrast, a power line can be supplied.

Of the three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the performance drive board 1720, +5V is supplied to the input buffer circuit 1720a or the like via the +5V fuse EF5, and +24V is played via the +24V fuse EF24. The +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the board 5 is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 for controlling the drive, and +12V is supplied to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 through the +12V fuse EF12. It is supplied to the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 for drive control, and is also supplied to a plurality of decorative boards (hereinafter, may be referred to as "each decorative board of the game board 5") included in the game board 5.

The +5V fuse EF5 has its capacity preset in consideration of the current used by the production drive board 1720 itself in the +5V power line of the production drive board 1720, and the +5V power line production drive board allowable current upper limit (cutoff current). ) Can be passed through. In the +5V fuse EF5, when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the +5V power line production drive board allowable current upper limit flows, the element portion of the +5V fuse EF5 is melted and is supplied via the +5V fuse EF5. Cut off the +5V power line.

The +12V fuse EF12 is used in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720 for the current used by the production drive board 1720 itself and the current used for the subsequent boards such as each decorative board of the game board 5 via the production drive board 1720. , Is taken into account and the capacity is set in advance, and a current can flow up to the +12V power line production drive board allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the +12V power line production drive board allowable current flows, the +12V fuse EF12 is blown out by the element portion of the +12V fuse EF12 and is supplied via the +12V fuse EF12 to the subsequent stage. Cut off the +12V power line.

The +24V fuse EF24 has its capacity preset in consideration of the current used by the production drive board 1720 itself in the +24V power supply line of the production drive board 1720, and the +24V power line production drive board allowable current upper limit (cutoff current). ) Can be passed through. In the +24V fuse EF24, when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the +24V power line production drive board allowable current upper limit flows, the element portion of the +24V fuse EF24 is blown and is supplied via the +24V fuse EF24 to the following. +24V power supply line is shut off.

The +5V fuse EF5, the +12V fuse EF12, and the +24V fuse EF24 are fuses that supply the +5V power supply line, the +12V power supply line, and the +24V power supply line. Although the flowing current is smaller than the fuse for SF12 and the fuse for +24 V SF24, the current may be large and may generate heat. Therefore, for example, due to the influence of this heat generation, a thermal shutdown unit built in the +12 V driver circuit 1720c2 is used. In order to prevent a failure due to the function from shutting down, it is preferable to dispose the device away from electronic components such as the +12V driver circuit 1720c2, and in the vicinity of the connector to which +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 (particularly, It is preferably arranged in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line to which +5V, +12V and +24V are supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 is connected.

The input buffer circuit 1720a receives a control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, and removes noise from the input control signal. Output to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. Specifically, the input buffer circuit 1720a is respectively supplied to a plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance drive board 1720 via the +5V fuse EF5. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are electrically connected, and removes noise that has entered a plurality of wirings (harness). Therefore, the noise resistance can be improved.

The +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 is a driver IC that drives the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC (hereinafter, provided in the "+24V system driver circuit 1720c1". It may be described as "a fuse that is used."). The +24V supplied via the +24V fuse EF24 is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 takes into account the current used in the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 in the +24V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. The capacity is preset, and the current can flow up to the upper limit (breaking current) of the game board side drive solenoid allowable current. The fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 is blown by an element portion of the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable upper limit of the game board side drive solenoid flows, and the +24V system driver is blown. The +24V power supply line to the subsequent circuit supplied through the fuse provided in the circuit 1720c1 is cut off.

The +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 is a driver IC that drives a +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC (hereinafter, provided in the "+12V system driver circuit 1720c2". It may be described as a "fuse."). The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse EF12 is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 takes into account the current used in the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 in the +12V power line of the production drive board 1720. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the upper limit (breaking current) of the game board side drive motor allowable current. The fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 has a fuse element provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 that melts when an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the game board side drive motor allowable current flows and the +12V system driver is blown. The +12V power supply line to the subsequent circuit supplied via the fuse provided in the circuit 1720c2 is cut off.

In the present embodiment, the +5V fuse EF5, the +12V fuse EF12, the +24V fuse EF24, the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive substrate 1720 are surface mount type. (So-called SMD type) chip fuse, which blows when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) flows, and unlike a resettable fuse, once blown, It is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to the succeeding line even if the current decreases. It should be noted that the +5V fuse EF5, the +12V fuse EF12, the +24V fuse EF24, the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive substrate 1720 are SMD type chip fuses. Instead, a lead type fuse may be used. Further, the +5V fuse EF5, the +12V fuse EF12, the +24V fuse EF24, the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive substrate 1720 are SMD type or lead type fuses. A resettable fuse such as a thermistor may be used. In this way, when the resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding one, but if the current drops, the succeeding one is restarted. In contrast, a power line can be supplied.

+12V supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of LEDs such as a full-color LED or a single-color LED provided on the game board 5 via a +12V fuse DF12 (hereinafter referred to as “various LEDs of the game board 5”). May be described) are supplied to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various light emission such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting. The LED constant current drive circuit sets a sink (constant) type constant current drive circuit capable of supplying a constant current to the various LEDs of the game board 5 and the maximum current of the current supplied to the various LEDs of the game board 5. And a maximum current setting circuit capable of controlling the maximum current. When the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with an input buffer circuit corresponding to the above-mentioned input buffer circuit 1720a, an input buffer circuit corresponding to the above-mentioned input buffer circuit 1720a is provided in the preceding stage of the LED constant current drive circuit. It may be provided.

The +12V fuse DF12 has its capacity set in advance in the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the game board 5 in consideration of each current used in each decorative board of the game board 5, and the game board side decorative board A current can flow up to the upper limit of allowable current (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side flows, the element part of the +12V fuse DF12 is melted and the +12V fuse DF12 is supplied via the +12V fuse DF12. Cut off the +12V power line.

The +12V fuse DF12 is a fuse that supplies a +12 power supply line, and has a smaller flowing current than the original +12V fuse SF12 in the peripheral control board 1510 and the +12V fuse EF12 in the production drive board 1720. Since the electric current is large and may generate heat, it is preferable to dispose the LED and the LED constant current drive circuit apart from each other so as not to damage the various LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate under the influence of the heat generation. It is preferably arranged near the connector to which +12V is supplied from the performance drive board 1720 (in particular, near the connector of the terminal to which the power line to which +12V from the performance drive board 1720 is supplied is connected).

In this embodiment, the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5 is a surface mounting type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and exceeds a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current). It is an electronic component that blows when a current flows, and unlike a resettable fuse, once blown, even if the current drops, it is an electronic component that cannot supply a power line to the succeeding line. As the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5, a lead type fuse may be used instead of the SMD type chip fuse. Further, as the decorative board +12V fuse DF12 of the game board 5, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or a lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when the resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding one, but if the current drops, the succeeding one is restarted. In contrast, a power line can be supplied.

The +12V supplied to the effect display device 1600 is, via the +12V fuse PF12 as the pre-stage fuse serving as the source fuse of the effect display device 1600, the +12V fuse PF12a1 serving as the first post-stage fuse serving as the branch first system fuse. And a +12V fuse PF12a2 serving as a second post-stage fuse which serves as a branch second system fuse, and is branched and supplied to two systems. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a1 as the first latter-stage fuse is supplied to the liquid crystal panel power supply generation circuit 1600z that creates the liquid crystal panel power supply to be supplied to the liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel power supply generation circuit 1600z may supply the generated liquid crystal panel power supply to the liquid crystal panel as well as to a backlight and a drive circuit. +12V supplied as the second post-stage fuse via the +12V fuse PF12a2 is supplied to the backlight and the drive circuit. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a2 may be supplied to the liquid crystal panel in addition to being supplied to the backlight and the drive circuit.

The +12V fuse PF12, which is the main source fuse, has its capacity preset in consideration of the respective currents used in the performance display device 1600 in the +12V power supply line of the performance display device 1600, and the main source allowable current upper limit ( Current can flow up to the breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the maximum allowable current flows, the element part of the +12V fuse PF12 is melted and the +12V fuse PF12 serving as the main source fuse is supplied via the +12V fuse PF12. Shut off the +12V power line to.

The +12V fuse PF12a1 that serves as the first branch branch fuse and the current used in the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z in the +12V power line that is supplied via the +12V fuse PF12 that serves as the main fuse of the effect display device 1600. , The current used in the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, the drive circuit, and the like are taken into consideration, and the capacity thereof is preset, and the current can flow up to the allowable current upper limit (breaking current) of the first branch system. When the overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the first branch system flows, the element part of the +12V fuse PF12a1 is melted and the +12V fuse PF12a1 fuses the +12V fuse PF12a1. Shut off the +12V power line to the following that is supplied via.

The +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the second branch system fuse, is used in the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, the drive circuit, etc. in the +12V power line supplied via the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600. The capacity is preset in consideration of the current to be applied, and the current can flow up to the upper limit (breaking current) of the allowable current of the second branch system. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit of the branch second system flows, the +12V fuse PF12a2 serving as the branch second system fuse melts the element portion of the +12V fuse PF12a2 to fuse the +12V fuse PF12a2. Shut off the +12V power line to the following that is supplied via.

The +12V fuses PF12, PF12a1, and PF12a2 are fuses that supply a +12 power supply line, and flow when compared with the original +12V fuse SF12 in the peripheral control board 1510 and the +12V fuse EF12 in the production drive board 1720. Although the current is small, the current is large and may generate heat. Therefore, for example, the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z, the liquid crystal panel of the effect display device 1600, the backlight, and the drive circuit should not be damaged by the heat generation. It is preferable to dispose the liquid crystal panel power supply generation circuit 1600z and the liquid crystal panel of the effect display device 1600, the backlight, and the drive circuit away from each other, and in the vicinity of the connector to which +12V is supplied from the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (especially, the liquid crystal output). It is preferably arranged in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal to which the power line to which +12V from the substrate 1530 is supplied is connected.

In the present embodiment, the +12V fuse PF12, the +12V fuse PF12a1 and the +12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600 are surface mounting type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and have predetermined allowable current upper limits (respectively). When a current exceeding a predetermined breaking current flows, the fuse blows. Unlike a resettable fuse, once the fuse blows, even if the current drops, an electronic device that cannot supply a power line to the subsequent It is a part. The +12V fuse PF12, the +12V fuse PF12a1, and the +12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600 may be lead type fuses instead of SMD type chip fuses. Further, as the +12V fuse PF12, the +12V fuse PF12a1, and the +12V fuse PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600, a resettable fuse such as an SMD type or a lead type thermistor may be used. In this way, when the resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding one, but if the current drops, the succeeding one is restarted. In contrast, a power line can be supplied.

Three types of power supplies of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the door frame clothing relay board 105 are provided on the door frame 3 and are not shown on the door frame side drive board (hereinafter, referred to as "each drive board of the door frame 3"). Or a plurality of decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “each decorative board of the door frame 3 ”). Fuses (not shown) corresponding to the above are provided on the substrate, respectively.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 has a fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power source (for example, +5V fuse, +24V fuse, +12V fuse) as well as a +24V electric drive source (for example, drive solenoid). A fuse provided in a +24V system driver circuit for drive control, a fuse provided in a +12V system driver circuit for drive control of a +12V system electric drive source (for example, a drive motor), and the like are also provided. The fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply has its capacity preset in consideration of the current used in each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply line corresponding to the power supply of each drive board of the door frame 3, Side power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit (for example, door frame side +5V power supply line drive board allowable current upper limit (breaking current), door frame side +24V power supply line driving board allowable current upper limit (breaking current), door frame side +12V power supply line It is possible to flow currents up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive substrate (breaking current). The fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is the upper limit of the allowable current of each power supply line drive board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +5V power supply line drive board on the door frame side, the upper limit of the allowable current on the +24V power supply line drive board, the upper limit of the door frame side). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the +12V power line drive board allowable current upper limit) flows, the element portion of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power source is blown and is supplied through the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the blown power source. Cut off the power line to the following.

The fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit takes into account the current used in the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the +24V system driver circuit in the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is set in advance, and a current can flow up to the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current flows in the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit, the element portion of the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit melts and the fuse becomes a +24V system driver circuit. It interrupts the +24V power line to the following that is supplied through the provided fuse. The fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit takes into account the current used in the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V system driver circuit in the +12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. The capacity is set in advance, and the current can flow up to the door frame side drive motor allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the door frame side drive motor allowable current flows in the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit, the element portion of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit melts and the fuse becomes a +12V system driver circuit. It interrupts the +12V power supply line to the following that is supplied through the provided fuse.

The fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 has its capacity set in advance in the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the door frame 3 in consideration of each current used in each decorative board of the door frame 3. Therefore, the current can flow up to the upper limit (breaking current) of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side. The fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 is blown by the fuse element portion (not shown) of each decorative board of the door frame 3 when an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board of the door frame 3 flows. Then, the +12V power supply line to the following that is supplied via a fuse (not shown) of each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is cut off.

For example, if one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards among the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the door frame 3 is provided with a +12V fuse (not shown). Supply to a not-illustrated +12V system driver circuit that controls the drive of a drive motor that is an electric drive source (for example, a drive motor (operation ring drive motor 342 or operation button lift drive motor 367) of the performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3) The +12V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that shuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.The +12V system driver circuit fuse is connected to the +12V power supply line of the drive board by the +12V system electricity of the door frame 3. The capacity is preset by taking into account the current used in the dynamic drive source (drive motor) and the +12V system driver circuit, and the current can flow up to the door frame side drive motor allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the door frame side drive motor current flows to the fuse of the system driver circuit, the element part of the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit melts and is supplied through the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit. The +12V power supply line to the following is cut off.

Among the drive boards of the door frame 3, a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided for the drive board provided (mounted or mounted) with a +12V driver circuit. Therefore, a control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 is inputted and this is inputted. Noise is removed from the control signal and output to the +12V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is for +5 V for each of a plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect between the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the boards of the drive board of the door frame 3. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V applied via a fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to a ground (GND) are electrically connected to each other, and are connected to a plurality of wirings (harness). The noise resistance can be improved by removing the intruding noise. The same effect (that is, improvement of noise immunity) can be achieved even if +12V supplied via a +12V fuse is used instead of +5V supplied to this resistor.

Further, for example, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all of the drive boards among the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24V, the door frame 3 is connected via a fuse for +24V (not shown). Is supplied to a +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of an electric drive source (for example, a drive solenoid) provided in the. The +24V system driver circuit is mainly composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives an electric drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the +24V system of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that shuts off an overcurrent to the driver IC. ing. +24V supplied via the +24V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The fuse of the +24V system driver circuit has its capacity preliminarily added with the current used in the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +24V system driver circuit in the +24V power supply line of the drive board. It is set, and current can flow up to the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit (breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit flows, the fuse of the +24V system driver circuit blows off the element part of the fuse of the +24V system driver circuit, and the fuse of the +24V system driver circuit passes through. Shuts off the +24V power line to the subsequent power supply.

As described above, the +5V fuse and the input buffer (not shown) are provided for the drive board on which the +24V system driver circuit is provided (mounted or mounted) among the drive boards of the door frame 3. A circuit is provided, and a control signal (this control signal may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 is input. , Removes noise from the input control signal and outputs it to the +24V system driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is +5 V for each of a plurality of wirings (harnesses) that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the boards of the drive boards of the door frame 3 to each other. It is configured as a circuit in which one end of the resistor to which +5V is applied through the fuse for application and one end of the resistor grounded to the ground (GND) are electrically connected, and a plurality of wirings (harness) The noise resistance can be improved by removing the noise that has entered the. Instead of +5V supplied to this resistor, even if +24V or +12V supplied via a +24V fuse is also supplied, the same effect (that is, noise immunity) can be obtained even if +12V supplied via a +12V fuse is supplied. Improvement).

Further, for example, in the case where one decoration board, a plurality of decoration boards, or all the decoration boards among the decoration boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, the door frame 3 is connected via a fuse for +12V (not shown). Various LEDs such as full-color LED and single-color LED (hereinafter, may be referred to as "various LEDs of door frame 3") provided in the above are turned on, turned off, blinking, and gradation lighting is controlled. Is supplied to the LED constant current drive circuit. The LED constant current drive circuit sets a sink (constant) type constant current drive circuit capable of supplying a constant current to various LEDs of the door frame 3 and the maximum current of the current supplied to the various LEDs of the door frame 3. And a maximum current setting circuit capable of controlling the maximum current. The +12V fuse (not shown) has its capacity set in advance by taking into account the respective currents used in each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the +12V power supply line of the decorative board, and the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side ( Current can flow up to the breaking current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows, the fuse element (not shown) is blown and the element portion of the fuse element (not shown) which is not shown is blown and is supplied through the fuse element not shown. Cut off the +12V power line to the following.

It should be noted that one of the decoration boards of the door frame 3 is one decoration board (for example, the left side upper decoration board 402a constituting the door frame left side decoration board 402 provided in the door frame 3), and the LED constant current drive circuit. One decoration board by the LED constant current drive circuit provided on the other decoration board of the door frame 3 (for example, the left side lower decoration board 402b forming the door frame left side decoration board 402 provided in the door frame 3) When the light emission of the plurality of LEDs mounted on itself is controlled, the +12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on one decorative substrate. Further, when the LED constant current drive circuit is not provided with an input buffer circuit corresponding to the input buffer circuit provided (mounted or mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 described above, the LED constant current drive is performed. An input buffer circuit corresponding to this input buffer circuit may be provided in the preceding stage of the circuit.

In the present embodiment, each of the above fuses provided on the door frame 3 side is a surface mounting type (so-called SMD type) chip fuse, and a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current). Is an electronic component that cannot be supplied with a power line to the succeeding one even if the current decreases once the fuse has blown, unlike the resettable fuse. As the above-mentioned fuses provided on the side of the door frame 3, lead type fuses may be used instead of SMD type chip fuses. Further, as the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used. In this way, when the resettable fuse is used, if a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current upper limit flows, the power supply line cannot be supplied to the succeeding one, but if the current drops, the succeeding one is restarted. In contrast, a power line can be supplied.

[9-3-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 633h and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 633aa and the like. This payout control filter circuit 633h is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from this +5V. The +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode PD0 and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a. +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 558z. It should be noted that +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in the payout control board 633.

[9-3-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 212, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and creates +5V, which is the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In this embodiment, +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and the main control board side creation +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are electrically. Since the circuit is configured so as not to be connected to the +5V, +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310. In addition, the main control board side generated +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V (created on the main control board side +5V) created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 630 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. +12V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power outage notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage notice when detecting the signs of +12V and +24V power outages or instantaneous blackouts. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 633aa via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510, the interface board 635, and the door frame clothing relay board 105 as shown in FIG. Then, it is configured to be input to the effect display device 1600 and the like via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies the voltage to one of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to the two power lines of the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case of monitoring the generated voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

As described above, in the power supply system for the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa, the +12V power generation circuit 630fb, and the +24V power generation circuit 630fc of the power generation circuit 630f in the power board 630, respectively. Among the three types of power sources of +12V and +24V, the two types of power sources of +12V and +24V are various types such as the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the production drive board 1720 as described above. It is supplied to the substrate. That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the power supply of +12V has the same potential on the various substrates, and the power supply of +24V has the same potential on the various substrates. Further, +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. However, they have the same potential.

Further, in the power supply system for the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the +12V fuse SF12 and the +24V fuse SF24 except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310. In addition to being provided (mounted or mounted), the effect drive board 1720 is provided (mounted or mounted) with a +12V fuse EF12 and a +24V fuse EF24.

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the power supply of +12V and the power supply of +24V are both monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

That is, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, +12V which is a power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 and +12V provided (mounted or mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510. Fuse SF12 and +12V fuse EF12 provided (mounted or mounted) on performance drive board 1720 have the same potential, and a power supply monitored by power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of main control board 1310. +24V, the +24V fuse SF24 provided (mounted or mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V fuse EF24 provided (mounted or mounted) on the performance drive board 1720. It is at the same potential.

Further, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the drive boards of the door frame 3, when one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all the drive boards require +12V, As described above, a drive motor that is an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 via a +12V fuse (not shown) (for example, a drive motor of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 (an operation ring drive motor 342 or an operation button lift/lower). It is supplied to a +12V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor 367), and among the drive boards of the door frame 3, one drive board, a plurality of drive boards, or all the drive boards require +24V. In such a case, as described above, the power is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the electric drive source (for example, drive solenoid, drive motor) provided in the door frame 3 via the +24V fuse (not shown). In this case, in the power supply system for the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, +12V which is the power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 and the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 are provided. The +12V fuse SF12 provided (mounted and mounted), the +12V fuse EF12 (mounted and mounted) provided on the production drive board 1720 of the game board 5, and the drive board of the door frame 3. A +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted or mounted) has the same potential, and +24V which is a power source monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. Fuse SF24 for +24V provided (mounted and mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 and fuse EF24 for +24V provided (mounted and mounted) on the performance drive board 1720 of the game board 5. And a +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted or mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 have the same potential.

[9-4. Fixing method of fuse]
Next, each fuse provided on the power supply board 630, each fuse provided on the peripheral control board 1510, each fuse provided on the effect drive board 1720, each fuse provided on each decoration board of the game board 5, and the effect display device 1600. A method of fixing the fuses provided on the door and the fuses provided on the door frame 3 side will be described.

The fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply board 630 are made of a transparent glass tube, and both ends of the transparent glass tube are made up of supporting terminals made of metal, and are made of transparent glass. The support terminals at both ends of the tube are detachably attached to support fittings (also referred to as fuse holders) (not shown) that are soldered to the power supply board 630, and include fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including fuse FUSE3 (FIGS. 214 and 215). If the fuse blows, a new fuse can be replaced. On the other hand, +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power supply fuse SF3 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and +5V fuse EF5 and +12V fuse provided on the production drive board 1720. EF12, +24V fuse EF24, +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 fuse, and +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 fuse provided, +12V fuse DF12 provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and the effect display device 1600. The +12V fuse PF12, the +12V fuse PF12a1 and the +12V fuse PF12a2 provided and the fuses provided on the door frame 3 side are surface mounting type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, which are rectangular chip types, There are ceramic type, mold type, etc., which are soldered directly to the substrate.

As described above, each fuse provided on the power supply board 630 is detachable, and when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) flows into the fuse to melt it, the fuse is replaced with a new fuse. On the other hand, each fuse provided in the peripheral control board 1510, each fuse provided in the effect drive board 1720, each fuse provided in each decoration board of the game board 5, each fuse provided in the effect display device 1600. , And each of the fuses provided on the door frame 3 side are chip fuses directly soldered to the substrate, so if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current upper limit (each predetermined breaking current) flows through the fuses, the fuses are blown. , Cannot be replaced with a new fuse.

Since the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIGS. 214 and 215)) provided on the power supply substrate 630 are configured by supporting terminals having a transparent glass tube with both ends made of metal, It is possible to visually confirm through a transparent glass tube whether or not the element parts of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (including the fuse FUSE3 (see FIG. 214 and FIG. 215)) provided on the power supply board 630 are blown. .. On the other hand, +5V fuse SF5, +12V fuse SF12, +24V fuse SF24, and control power supply fuse SF3 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and +5V fuse EF5 and +12V fuse provided on the production drive board 1720. EF12, +24V fuse EF24, +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 fuse, and +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 fuse provided, +12V fuse DF12 provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and the effect display device 1600. The +12V fuse PF12, the +12V fuse PF12a1 and the +12V fuse PF12a2 provided and the fuses provided on the door frame 3 side are surface mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses, and thus are rectangular chip types. In any of the chip fuses of ceramic type and mold type, it is not possible to visually confirm from the appearance of the chip fuse whether or not the element portion arranged inside the chip fuse is blown.

[10. Power board]
Next, the power supply board 630 included in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 94 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board.

There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100V (hereinafter, referred to as “AC100V”) is a power supply for a game machine of AC 24V (hereinafter, referred to as “AC24V”). It is stepping down to voltage. When a plug of a power cord (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island facility in the game hall, AC24V is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 includes various power supplies (DC +24V (hereinafter referred to as "+24V")), DC +12V (hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +5V (from AC24V supplied from the island facility in the game hall). Hereinafter, various DC power supplies such as “+5V”) are created and supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1. Circuit configuration of power board]
As shown in FIG. 214, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

24V AC from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) are used. (The supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal) and the type B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) is input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a. Specifically, AC24V line 1 (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V1” (may be referred to as “L side”)) is AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) at the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a. It is inputted through a fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for the power source, and is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a at the line 2 of AC24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V2" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "N side"). Is input through a fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2). The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

When a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC 24V1 is transferred to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. When the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC 24V2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC 24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. The supply is cut off, and the input-side terminal 1 and the output-side terminal 2 are electrically disconnected from each other, and the supply of the AC 24V2 to various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

In addition, while the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains ON, staff such as a game hall store clerk turn ON the breaker of the game hall to operate the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, or the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be turned off all at once by turning off the breaker in the game hall.

[10-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasures, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasures, and a choke coil L1. The output of the power switch 630a is provided. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacitance and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. Varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that could not be reduced by capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC 24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as the frame ground FG2. This ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to a ground terminal of a frame ground substrate (not shown) arranged in the vicinity of the external terminal plate 558 shown in FIG. 86 via a power ground line (not shown).

It should be noted that the dispensing base 551 is viewed from the front so that the mounting surface on which the plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, the ground terminals are provided) is mounted on the frame ground substrate is horizontal with the mounting surface facing downward. Then, it is arranged in front of the external terminal board 558, attached to the board housing portion, and covered with the terminal cover 551k shown in FIG. That is, the frame ground substrate is accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground board housed in the space formed by the board housing portion and the terminal cover 551k can be seen from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a.

The AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power source line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24V. .. The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power supply line connector DCN2 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 96, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit not provided and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to a CR unit not shown.

The AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[10-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FET”) Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a Zener diode.

The AC 24V1 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and also to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca, It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and also to the gate terminal of the FETQ2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca, It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f, respectively.

The AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified into the DC power supply by the switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode of the Schottky barrier diode D2. It is output from the terminal 2 and respectively. The types of packages of the FET Q1, FET Q2, the Schottky barrier diode D1, and the Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type, and are fixed to one heat radiation fin (not shown). The heat radiation fin is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being fixed to the power supply board 630 by soldering.

As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. From the respective terminals and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The rectified DC power sources output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[10-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FET”) Q3 and Q4, and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

The DC power supply with the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and the drains of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are directly connected without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Input to each terminal. The gate signal of the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit is input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. Source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 through the peripheral circuit 630da.

The DC power supply in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 suppresses the generation of harmonics by switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. 2 are output respectively. The types of packages of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the types of packages of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above). Not fixed to each radiation fin. The heat radiation fin is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being fixed to the power supply board 630 by soldering.

The DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[10-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of these electrolytic capacitors are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the positive terminals of the electrolytic capacitors receive the DC power supplies whose power factor is improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. To be done. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating flow from the DC power supply whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, as well as the fuse FUSE3 (main In the embodiment, a transparent glass tube having the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal) and a Class B fusing defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law are used. Via the power supply board 630, +24V is supplied to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE3 becomes the +24V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. The fuse FUSE3 is a glass tube fuse for +24V power supply line (DC power supply line (DC power supply line)), and when a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current upper limit (breaking current) flows, the element part of the fuse FUSE3 The fuse is blown and the +24V power supply line to the following is cut off through the fuse FUSE3.

[10-1-5. Power supply circuit]
When the DC power supply from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply creation circuit 630f creates +12V and +5V from the input DC power supply, respectively. The power supply creation circuit 630f outputs the created +12V from the +12V terminal and supplies it to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 from the power supply board 630, and outputs the created +5V from the +5V terminal to the inside of the pachinko machine 1 from the power supply board 630. Supply to each substrate. The power line supplied from the +12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the +12V power line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is +5V of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. It becomes a power line.

The power supply generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor correction circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by performing control to output a power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor correction circuit 630d. Suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power supply generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether or not to output the power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the AC24V power outlet for the game machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC100V power outlet that is higher than the game machine power supply voltage of AC24V. When plugged in, a power supply voltage higher than +24V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

The power supply generation circuit 630f uses the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal to reduce the common mode noise, and the magnitude of this power supply voltage is a predetermined value (threshold value: this embodiment). Then, the voltage is set to about 50 V.), it becomes possible to output the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit to the power supply destruction circuit 630g.

When the power supply generation circuit 630f outputs a power supply destruction circuit gate signal to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, the power supply destruction circuit 630g self-destroys and enters a short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode and the power switch 630a is in the ON operation state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g to generate the power. A large current flows into the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by flowing all at once toward the CGND terminal of the creation circuit 630f, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

The GND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is electrically connected becomes the ground (GND) line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end on the opposite side of the resistor R25 whose one end is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of.

The power supply destruction circuit 630g receives the power supply destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 through the resistor R25, and the FET Q5 operates to change the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal. When a large current flows toward the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, and the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained. To be done. The FET Q5 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above), but the FET Q1 is the same. , Q2, Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, the radiation fins are fixed (specifically, FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2. (Not shown) and FETs Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10 respectively fixed (not shown). It is placed in a position that is not allowed. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged while each heat radiation fin is arranged, and is not fixed to each heat radiation fin at all. This aims at absorbing and cooling the heat through the respective heat radiation fins so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, in the FET Q5, when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent), heat is generated in a short time. This is because it contributes to be destroyed.

In other words, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the AC24V power outlet for the gaming machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, but is accidentally inserted into the AC100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply for the gaming machine. When plugged in, the power supply generation circuit 630f determines the magnitude of the power supply voltage to a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, the voltage is set to about 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is output to the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the FET Q5 is controlled to self-destruct. As a result, the short-circuit state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. When it is in the ON operation state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 in the short-circuit state in the power source destruction circuit 630g, and the power source generation circuit 630f outputs the current. By flowing into the CGND terminal all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown, and only the power supply board 630 is destroyed and the plug of the power supply cord is commercialized. Even if it is accidentally plugged into a power outlet of AC100V, which is the power source voltage, it is possible to reliably prevent destruction of each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power board 630.

In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet for the game machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and is mistaken for the AC100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the game machine. In the state where the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is broken by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones which are not blown, and the plug of the power supply cord is AC24V which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet, the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Then, a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short circuit mode in the power supply destruction circuit 630g, causing a large current to flow through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. One or both of FUSE1 and FUSE2 will be blown again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has not been destroyed, the plug of the power supply cord must be replaced in the island facility of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines, the game cannot be started.

The fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are detachably attached to a support metal fitting (also referred to as a fuse holder) (not shown) that is soldered to the power supply board 630. When the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are blown It can be replaced with a new fuse.

[10-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h is composed of capacitors BC0 and BC1. The minus (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 has a main control built-in of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main VBB that serves as a backup power supply line to the RAM. The minus (−) terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC1 is the payout control provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 illustrated in FIG. 211. It is electrically connected to the payout VBB that serves as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the MPU 633aa.

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs to restore power, the power line (that is, +12V power line) supplied from the +12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is the payout control board 633, Then, the power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 212 (that is, the main control board side creation +5V power supply line, this main control board side creation The +5V power supply line is not electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line) supplied from the +5V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f as the main VBB, and is independent of the power supply line in FIG. Via the diode MD0 provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 3 to supply the capacitor BC0 as the main VBB to the capacitor BC0 provided in the power supply board 630, and also to incorporate the main control of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310. It holds various information supplied to the RAM and stored in the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs to restore power, the power supply line (that is, +5V power supply line) supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is the payout control board. It is supplied to the capacitor BC1 included in the power supply board 630 as a payout VBB and is charged to the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0 included in the payout control board 633 illustrated in FIG. The payout control MPU 633aa included in the control unit 633a holds various information that is supplied to the payout control internal RAM and stored in the payout control internal RAM.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are simultaneously powered off by turning off the breaker in the game hall). Occurs, +5V due to the power supply line (that is, +12V power supply line) supplied from the +12V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f cannot be created in the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310. In response to this, the capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is prevented by the diode MD0 provided in the main control board 1310 from being supplied to the power supply line (that is, the main control board side creation +5V power supply line) supplied from the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided in the main control board 1310. Various information that is supplied as a VBB to the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 and stored in the main control internal RAM is held. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is shut down (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are shut off at the same time by turning off the breaker in the game hall). In this case, +5V due to the power supply line (that is, +5V power supply line) supplied from the +5V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC1. In response to this, the capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is prevented from being supplied to the power supply line (that is, +5V power supply line) supplied from the +5V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f by the diode PD0 provided in the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 is paid out as the payout VBB. Various information that is supplied to the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the control unit 633a and stored in the payout control internal RAM is held.

That is, the pachinko machine 1 is shut down (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are shut off all at once by turning off the breaker in the game hall). Then, by discharging the capacitors BC0 and BC1, various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB is held, and the payout VBB is paid out. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the substrate 633 is held.

In the present embodiment, as described above, on the power supply board 630, the fuse FUSE1 serving as the glass tube fuse for the AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) and the fuse FUSE2 serving as the glass tube fuse for the AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2). And a fuse FUSE3 serving as a glass tube fuse for a +24V power source line (DC power source line (DC power source line)). As a result, a load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electric drive source, a sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (or a sensor to which +24V is supplied instead of the sensor to which +12V is supplied) is connected. When used, a sensor (+24V power supply alternative sensor) to which +24V is supplied, and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electric drive source, sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors) (Or, if a sensor that supplies +24V is used in place of the sensor that supplies +12V, this sensor that supplies +24V (+24V power supply alternative sensor)) and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 The fuse corresponding to the power supply line (+24 V and the same potential (+24 V)) supplied to the power supply board 630 is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply substrate 630, and a power supply FUSE1. A fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the substrate 630 and a fuse which is a glass tube fuse for a +24V power supply line (DC power supply line (DC power supply line)) provided on the power supply substrate 630. +24V power supply in the power supply line that is supplied to a specific load among the loads corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 and the board subordinate to the peripheral control board 1510, which correspond to FUSE3 The line includes a fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and a fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. Of the +24V power supply line (DC power supply line (DC power supply line)) which is a glass tube fuse FUSE3 provided on the power supply board 630, and the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 which is a chip fuse and the production drive board 1720. The +24V fuse EF24 corresponds to this.

In addition, when the fuse FUSE3 which is a glass tube fuse for the +24V power source line (DC power source line (DC power source line)) is not provided on the power source substrate 630, that is, the power source substrate 630 is for AC24V1 (AC power source line 1). When a fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse and a fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) are provided, a load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 ( Electric drive source, a sensor that supplies +24V among various sensors (or a sensor that supplies +24V when a sensor that supplies +12V is used instead of the sensor that supplies +12V) (+24V power supply alternative sensor )) and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electric drive source, a sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (or a sensor to which +24V is supplied instead of the sensor to which +12V is supplied). In the case of using the power supply line (+24V, the sensor (+24V power supply alternative sensor) supplied with +24V) and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310, the power supply line (+24V and the same potential (+24V) is supplied. )) is a fuse FUSE1 that is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. The fuse FUSE2, which becomes the fuse FUSE2, corresponds to the peripheral control board 1510 which is the board on the production side, and the power supply line supplied to a specific load among the loads corresponding to the boards subordinate to the peripheral control board 1510. , +24V power supply line serves as a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. The fuse FUSE2 corresponds to the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is a chip fuse, and the +24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720.

In the present embodiment, for the +12V (+12V power supply line) created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, as described above, the +12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2)) is supplied to the power supply board 630. No glass tube fuse for +12V, which is a glass tube fuse for ), is provided. Accordingly, a load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electric drive source, a sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electrical The fuse corresponding to the power supply line (+12V and the same potential (+12V)) supplied to the drive source, the sensor to which +12V is supplied among the various sensors, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 are A fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630, and a fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630. It corresponds.

For +12V, which is a glass tube fuse for +12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2)) on the power supply board 630 with respect to +12V (+12V power supply line) created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630. If a glass tube fuse is provided and +12V is supplied from the power supply generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 through the +12V glass tube fuse, a load (electrically connected) electrically connected to the main control board 1310 is used. A drive source, a sensor to which +12V is supplied, and a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electric drive source, a sensor to which +12V is supplied, and a main control board 1310). A fuse corresponding to the power supply line (+12V and the same potential (+12V) supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e included in the power supply board 630 is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630. And a fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V2 (AC power supply line 2) provided on the power supply board 630, and a +12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2)) provided on the power supply board 630. ) Glass tube fuse for +12V, which is a glass tube fuse for ), and corresponds to the peripheral control board 1510 that is the board on the production side and the load corresponding to the board subordinate to the peripheral control board 1510. Among the power supply lines supplied to the load, the +12V power supply line includes a fuse FUSE1 which is a glass tube fuse for AC24V1 (AC power supply line 1) provided on the power supply board 630 and an AC24V2 (AC power supply line provided on the power supply board 630. Fuse FUSE2 which is a glass tube fuse for 2), a +12V glass tube fuse which is a glass tube fuse for a +12V power supply line (DC power supply line 2 (DC power supply line 2)) provided on the power supply board 630, and a chip fuse. The +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720, the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board, and the +12 fuse PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of the production display device 1600 are Will correspond.

Further, the "specific load on the production side" has a higher probability of failure than other loads among the plurality of loads on the production side, or at the time of failure, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the main control board. This has a great influence on the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310. The load against the generated wiring (harness) can be mentioned.

A load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electric drive source, a sensor that supplies +24V among various sensors (or a sensor that supplies +24V instead of a sensor that supplies +12V is used. Is a sensor to which +24V is supplied (+24V power supply alternative sensor), a load electrically connected to the payout control board 633 (electric drive source, a sensor to which +24V is supplied among various sensors (or +12V is supplied) When a sensor to which +24V is supplied is used instead of the sensor to be supplied, a sensor to which +24V is supplied (+24V power supply alternative sensor), a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310, and power supplied to If the fuse (glass tube fuse) FUSE3, which is the glass tube fuse of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the line (+24V and the same potential (+24V)), is blown (broken), the function of advancing the game is impaired. On the other hand, when the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the +24V fuse EF24 of the production drive board 1720, which are the chip fuses on the production side, are blown (broken). , For example, although the +24V system electric drive source of the game board is not activated, the game machine is out of order, but when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the payout of the game balls is not affected. Therefore, the damage (stress) to the player can be minimized.

A +12V glass tube fuse is provided on the power board 630 for +12V (+12V power line) created by the power creation circuit 630f of the power board 630, and a power supply for the power board 630 is created through the +12V glass tube fuse. In the case of supplying +12V from the circuit 630f, a load electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (electric drive source, a sensor to which +12V is supplied among various sensors, a payout control board 633, and an electric load). Connected to the load (electric drive source, a sensor to which +12V of various sensors is supplied, and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310, a power supply line (+12V and having the same potential) When the +12V glass tube fuse of the power supply board 630 corresponding to (+12V) is blown (broken), the function of advancing the game is impaired and the game is substantially stopped. +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the chip fuse of the above, +12V fuse EF12 of the performance drive board 1720, +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board, and +12 fuses PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of the performance display device 1600. If is melted (broken), for example, the +12V system electric drive source of the game board is not activated, and various LEDs of the game board and door frame are not turned on, but it becomes a failure for the game machine, When a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the payout of the game balls is not affected, and therefore the damage (stress) to the player can be minimized.

In this embodiment, as described above, the AC power (AC24V) supplied from the island facility in the game hall is sent to the interface board 635 via the power board 630 regardless of the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 630a. It is supplied and is supplied from this interface board 635 to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the pachinko machine via the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 96, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). 1 is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) that is installed outside 1, and supplies AC 24 VA and AC 24 V to the CR unit (not shown). In the present embodiment, the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 is provided with glass tube fuses (not shown) corresponding to AC24VA and AC24V, respectively (or glass tube fuses not shown corresponding to only one of AC24VA and AC24V). The glass tube fuses (not shown) corresponding to AC24VA and AC24V from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the CR unit provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the glass tube fuses provided on the interface board 635.

Further, in the present embodiment, the overcurrent protection circuit (so-called OCP (so-called OCP ( Over Current Protection))) may be installed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a +5V glass tube fuse is provided on the power supply board 630 with respect to +5V (+5V power supply line) created by the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the power is supplied via this +5V glass tube fuse. You may make it supply +5V from the power generation circuit 630f of the board|substrate 630.

Next, measures are taken against the commercial power supply voltage when the plug of the power supply cord for supplying the AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is mistakenly plugged into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration of commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 shows a configuration of a commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. Note that in FIG. 215, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 214 (hereinafter, referred to as “composition of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power supply breakdown circuit 630g breaks the power supply from the FUSE-GATE terminal. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal of the FET Q5 to the source terminal (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are excessive. The FET Q5 is destroyed by becoming a current), so that the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are electrically connected is maintained.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b is, as described above, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is the circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, and the circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. There is.

Further, in the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the AC 24V1 and the AC 24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and the diode D5, as described above. It is inputted to the anode terminal of D6, outputted from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and inputted to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 215, AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is directly input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. To be done.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, AC24V from the island facility of the game hall omits the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. To briefly explain this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC24V from the island facility in the game hall has fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 for both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side ( This is because the input was made to AC24V2)), but the test conducted by the applicant did not cause any problem even if one side (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted. Accordingly, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 215, one of the AC 24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. Cost reduction is realized by directly inputting to.

Further, the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment employs the same power supply switch 630a as the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. This will be briefly described because, for the power switch 630a, it is necessary to surely disconnect/connect both the L side and the N side of AC24V from the island facility in the game hall. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment is the same as the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, which is 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected/contacted at the same time.

Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 215, the N side of AC24V (AC24V2) from the island facility of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a are connected. It is electrically connected to one of the micro-gap type arrester AL1. The other of the micro gap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The micro-gap type arrester AL1 surges to the frame ground FG2 of the earth connection terminal DCN5 when a high voltage (referred to as “surge voltage”) enters AC24V from the island facility in the game hall due to a lightning strike. The surge voltage is restricted by flowing as a current so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a, or a high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning on/off the power switch 630a is supplied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. By supplying a surge current to the frame ground FG2, the surge voltage is limited so that the power switch 630a is not exposed to the surge voltage. Further, the micro-gap type arrester AL1 is a frame earth substrate (not shown) arranged near the external terminal board 558 shown in FIG. 86 when the operator mistakenly sets the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall. If you forget to electrically connect the ground terminal (island equipment ground) and the ground connection terminal in the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, as a collateral, electromagnetic noise from the game hall island equipment Noise immunity can be improved by introducing and removing the AC24V to the N side (AC24V2).

In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, and the choke coil. In addition to L1, the power absorber circuit 630g' is composed of a surge absorber SA1. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a have a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and a power source breakdown circuit. 630g' and is input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g′ has a faster reaction speed than the varistor ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1. A silicon surge absorber can be mentioned), one end of which is electrically connected to the L side of AC 24V (AC24V1) via the power switch 630a, and the other end of which is the N side of AC 24V via the power switch 630a ( It is electrically connected to AC24V2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, resulting in a short circuit and a short mode.

A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD, etc.) is used here. The silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage having a steep rising edge as compared with a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber has the characteristics of extremely fast response to surges, excellent control voltage characteristics, and extremely small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type is used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47 V, which is about twice the input voltage, may be selected.

Further, in the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the second (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , And is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1 and is electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor correction circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals (that is, the contacts) between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. As its characteristics, when the vertical axis represents the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis represents the AC voltage, the value of the AC voltage increases as the value increases. Thus, a capacitor is selected that has a curve that the value of the allowable capacitor capacity decreases and that is not destroyed even when AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is applied.

The direct current having the power factor improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the relay drive circuit 630i. When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input, the relay drive circuit 630 creates an operating voltage (+24V) capable of operating the coil of the relay RL1 and supplies it to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

The rectified DC powers respectively output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are insufficient due to insufficient power from the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (relay drive). Since the coil of the relay RL1 is not operating because the power supply from the circuit 630i by +24V is insufficient, the relay RL1 cannot be turned on (that is, the relay RL1 remains off). ), input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 with the 2nd (COM) terminal and the 3rd terminal of the relay RL1 being in non-conduction state. To be done. As a result, the rectified DC powers respectively output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flow toward only the thermistor TH1, and at the time when this DC starts to flow to the thermistor TH1, the resistance is reduced. Although a high value causes a weak current to flow to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1, when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually rises due to the current flowing to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly, and the subsequent value of the thermistor TH1 decreases. Apply a strong current to the load.

On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned on and the coil of the relay RL1 is switched from the non-operating state to the operating state by the power from the relay driving circuit 630i (by the power supply of +24V from the relay driving circuit 630i), the relay RL1 is activated. By turning on the relay RL1, the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are brought into conduction, and the rectified DC power source output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is shunted between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1, and passes through the choke coil L2 to the power factor correction circuit 630d. Is entered. As a result, the rectified DC power output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is between the terminals (that is, the contact points) between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. (Current) to the thermistor TH1 to decrease the temperature of the thermistor TH1 and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, so that the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are The current that flows between the terminals and (that is, between the contacts) increases.

As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. When the thermistor TH1 flows to the thermistor TH1, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises and the resistance value decreases, so that the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 increases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet for the game machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and the AC100V power supply is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the game machine. If it is inserted into the outlet incorrectly, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 greatly exceeds the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) before the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, causing a large current to flow in the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 is destroyed and the short mode can be set.

In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 in the short circuit mode in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is blown. It will melt down. Further, since the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1, and the elements of the surge absorber SA1 scatter and the surge absorber SA1 You can prevent it from being destroyed in open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power supply cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is the commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 is destroyed. This can be surely prevented.

In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since the FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting the gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit and the CGND terminal for supplying a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 need not be provided, the circuit configuration does not become complicated.

In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC24V power outlet for the game machine power supply of the island facility in the game hall, and is mistaken for the AC100V power outlet that is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V power supply voltage for the game machine. In the state where the surge absorber SA1 that is plugged in and constitutes the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is destroyed, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with one that is not blown, and the plug of the power cord is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into a 24 V AC power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g' has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Therefore, the fuse replaced through the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1, and the fuse FUSE1 is blown again. That is, the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g′ has already been destroyed must be replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g′ has not been destroyed. Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into the AC24V power outlet, which is the power source voltage for the game machine of the island facility in the game hall, the game cannot be started.

Note that in the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power destruction circuit 630g are provided on one substrate, which is the power substrate 630. Although various electronic components and the like were provided, it is possible to separately provide the two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminals DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B is the diode D5, D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply generation circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , Fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, they are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and input to the power supply generation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC power sources, such as +24V, +12V, and +5V, created on the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630A.

Further, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 215 can be divided into two boards, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A is the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. 215. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B mainly configured by the connector A is the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply generation circuit 630f, the relay drive circuit 630i, the relay RL1 shown in FIG. 215. The thermistor TH1, the choke coil L2, the fuse FUSE3, and the wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are connected to the wiring in the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Various DC power sources, such as +24V, +12V, and +5V, created on the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630A.

[11. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit, production drive board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the circuit of the effect drive board 1720, etc. shown in FIG. 211 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 224. 216 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 217 is a circuit diagram of a motor drive circuit, FIG. 218 is a circuit diagram showing a main control solenoid drive circuit, and FIG. 219 is a power failure monitoring circuit. 220 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board, FIG. 221 is a circuit showing a payout motor drive circuit, and FIG. 222 is a circuit diagram showing an effect control solenoid drive circuit. FIG. 223 is a circuit diagram showing the effect control motor drive circuit, and FIG. 224 is a schematic view of the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the fuse is mounted. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the circuit of the production drive board will be described. Wiring to the power supply and the input signal board in the circuits of various boards will also be described as appropriate.

[11-1. Main control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is +12V from the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, which is supplied via the payout control board 633. In the +12V to +5V generation circuit 1310g, +5V is generated as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the main control board 1310. The +5V that is the local power supply has the same potential as the +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630.

In the +5V generation circuit 1310g, +5V as a local power source that serves as a control power source for the main control board 1310 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h, as shown in FIG. 216. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is applied with +5V from the +5V generation circuit 1310g at its 1st terminal, its 2nd terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from its 3rd terminal. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), so that ripple (first AC component superimposed on the voltage) is generated. Has been removed and smoothed.

+5V output from the third terminal is connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacitor: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when an instantaneous blackout occurs and the power from the game hall is shut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is generated after the instantaneous blackout occurs. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple by the capacitor MC3. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0. The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the resistor MR0. Is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a via the resistor MR0, whereas the main control MPU 1310a is supplied. The power supply terminal VDD terminal is prevented from being supplied with the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 via the resistor MR0 by the diode MD0.

Of the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401 , A detection signal from the first big winning opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second big winning opening sensor 2601, a magnetic sensor 1111 and an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is input to each of the input circuits 1310b.

Detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, detection from the first big winning opening sensor 2402 The signals, the detection signals from the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and the magnetic sensor 1111 are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is an empty terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

The operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is also output via the main control output circuit 1310c. It is output to the control board 633. Like the input port PA, this input port PB is composed of 8 bits. Although not shown, the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are input to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input terminals that are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals and are vacant terminals are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing, like the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminal of the predetermined output port via the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power failure clear signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c, or outputs a drive signal via the main control output circuit 1310c. And outputs it to the main control solenoid circuit 1310d.

Note that the detection signals from other sensors may not be input to the port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b but may be input to predetermined input terminals of the port PC, respectively. As for the input port PA, similarly to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process. The port PC is composed of 8 bits like the input ports PA and PB.

[11-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described here as an example.

As shown in FIG. 216, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input has a +12V power supply line at one end (power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f). (That is, it is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the (+12V power supply line), and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. In addition to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control substrate 1310. The emitter terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is provided on the main control board side +5V power supply line (main control board 1310 is provided. The +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is electrically different from the power supply line created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, different from the +5V power supply line). The non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 is electrically connected to the other end of the connected resistor MR5 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and a signal input to one of them (MIC10A)). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the output of the waveform which is shaped and output without being inverted.

[11-1-2. Motor drive circuit under control of main control board]
Next, a motor drive circuit under the control of the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 217. There may be a case where the game board is provided with a member that distributes the route to the downstream side by using a distribution piece that swings the game ball, which is inserted in a not-shown ball portion provided in the game area 5a of the game board 5, into a wiper shape. .. A stepping motor, which is a drive motor, can be cited as an electric drive source that operates such a distribution piece. This drive motor is driven by a motor drive circuit 1310v of the main control board 1310. The rotary motion of the rotary shaft of the drive motor is converted into a wiper-like swing motion by the distribution piece via a gear mechanism (not shown). Here, the first distribution drive that distributes the game ball, which has entered a not-illustrated ball-in portion provided in the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the downstream path by using the first distribution piece that swings like a wiper. The drive circuit of the motor and the drive circuit of the second distribution drive motor that distributes the game balls distributed by the first distribution piece to the path to the further downstream side using the second distribution piece that swings like a wiper are described. To do.

The motor drive circuit 1310v includes a drive circuit 1310va for the first distribution drive motor and a drive circuit 1310vb for the second distribution drive motor. The drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor switches between the operating voltage and the stop voltage for excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 according to the rotation state of the first distribution drive motor. It is provided with a first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m capable of performing the above, and a first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n capable of driving the first distribution drive motor. The drive circuit 1310vb of the second distribution drive motor switches between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage for excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 according to the rotation state of the second distribution drive motor. A second distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310p capable of performing the above, and a second distribution drive motor drive IC 1310q capable of driving the second distribution drive motor. Since the drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor and the drive circuit 1310vb of the second distribution drive motor are the same circuit, the drive circuit 1310va of the first distribution drive motor will be described here and the second distribution drive motor will be described. The motor drive circuit 1310vb may be indicated in parentheses following the reference numeral used in the description of the drive circuit 1310va for the first distribution drive motor.

The first distribution drive motor constantly swings the first distribution piece in a wiper shape, and the second distribution drive motor always swings the second distribution piece in a wiper shape. Therefore, the first and second distribution drive motors. Need to be driven at all times. However, when the first and second distribution drive motors are constantly driven, the first and second distribution drive motors generate excessive heat, which drives the first and second distribution drive motors or the first and second distribution drive motors. The first and second distribution drive motor drive ICs may have a malfunction or failure, and the rotary motion of the rotary shaft of the drive motor causes a wiper-like swing motion by the distribution piece via a gear mechanism (not shown). Therefore, if the gear mechanism fails for some reason and becomes difficult to rotate, the sorting drive motor that has become difficult to rotate due to a malfunction in the gear mechanism among the first and second sorting drive motors Due to overload and excessive heat generation, malfunctions or failures may occur in the distribution drive motor or the distribution drive motor drive IC that drives the distribution drive motor. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the first and second distribution drive motors are constantly driven.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first and second distribution drive motors are driven to swing the first and second distribution pieces in a wiper shape, the operating voltage is used, whereas , When the second distribution drive motor is driven to stop the first and second distribution pieces, the voltage switching circuit that uses the stop voltage is controlled and the current flowing to the first and second distribution drive motors is controlled. To protect the first and second distribution drive motors and the first and second distribution drive motor drive ICs that drive the first and second distribution drive motors by restricting the resettable fuses using poly switches. Heat generation due to constant drive of the first and second distribution drive motors is suppressed.

[11-1-2a. First and second distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit]
The first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) mainly includes a transistor MTR50 (MTR60), a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60), a diode M50 (M60), and a polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a resettable fuse. Has been done. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) and is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR51 (MR61) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is connected to the. The other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via a main control output circuit 1310c as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching 1.

Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is illustrated as a D-type flip-flop for first distribution piece voltage switching (a line for transmitting a signal called voltage switching 2) which is not shown as a line for transmitting a signal called voltage switching 1. Not electrically connected to the output terminal of the second distribution one-side voltage switching D-type flip-flop). The input terminal of the first distribution piece voltage switching D type flip-flop (the second distribution piece voltage switching D type flip-flop) is a first distribution piece voltage switching output terminal (first section) of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the output terminal for switching the two divided voltage.

The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR52. It is connected to the. The gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR53 (MR63). The source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line (a power supply line created by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630 (that is, a +12V power supply line)). Connected to each other. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) which is a rectifying diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60). .. The anode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) is a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is a power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630). It is electrically connected to a power supply line (that is, different from the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa. The other end of the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD51, MD52 (MD61, MD62), respectively, and supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). +12V-U (+12V-D) is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power line.

[11-1-2b. First and second distribution drive motor drive IC]
The first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) has four NPN type Darlington transistors and four diodes which are chipped in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is The base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR55 (MR65) and is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR56 (MR66) and is the base of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor. The terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR57 (MR67).

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which a current for exciting φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a U/φ1 line (D/φ1 line) in which a current for exciting /φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the connector terminal as a Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which a current for exciting φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. The collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is a U/φ2 line (D/φ2 line) through which a current for exciting /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows. It is electrically connected to the terminals of the connector.

The other ends of the resistors MR54 to MR57 (MR64 to MR67) are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c. Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end that instructs to start or stop the excitation of φ1 of the first distribution drive motor. Electrically connected to an output terminal of a φ1 D type flip-flop of a first distribution drive motor (not shown) as a line for transmitting a signal of MPD0 (MPD4) (φ1 D type flip-flop of a second distribution drive motor not shown) Has been done. The input terminal of the φ1 D type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (φ1 D type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is the φ1 output of the first distribution drive motor at the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (φ1 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end of MPD1 (MPD5) that instructs the start/stop of excitation of /φ1 of the first distribution drive motor. ) Is electrically connected to an output terminal of a /φ1 D type flip-flop (/φ1 D type flip-flop of a second sorting drive motor (not shown)) of a first distribution drive motor (not shown). There is. The input terminal of the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (/φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is the / of the first distribution drive motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ1 output terminal (/φ1 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR56 (MR66), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end of MPD2 (MPD6) for instructing to start or stop the excitation of φ2 of the first distribution drive motor. Is electrically connected to the output terminal of a φ2 D type flip-flop (not shown) of the first distribution drive motor (φ2 D type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) not shown. The input terminal of the φ2 D type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (φ2 D type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is the φ2 output of the first distribution drive motor at the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (φ2 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The other end of the resistor MR57 (MR67), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end of MPD3 (MPD7) that instructs the start/stop of excitation of /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor. ) Is electrically connected to an output terminal of a /φ2 D type flip-flop (/φ2 D type flip-flop of a second sorting drive motor (not shown)) of a first distribution drive motor (not shown). There is. The input terminal of the /φ2 D type flip-flop of the first distribution drive motor (the /φ2 D type flip-flop of the second distribution drive motor) is the / of the first distribution drive motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal (/φ2 output terminal of the second distribution drive motor).

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution drive motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution drive motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) has four built-in diodes. The first and second diodes are arranged in a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are paired. Is located in the package.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. And the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Has been done. The cathode terminal 3 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD51 (MD61).

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. And the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Has been done. The cathode terminal 10 of the first distribution drive motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD52 (MD62).

The first to fourth diodes convert the counter electromotive force generated when the excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is stopped into heat. The first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors are protected by removing them.

A power supply line of +12V-U (+12V-D) that supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) has a first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive) via a connector terminal and a wire (not shown). The motor is electrically connected to the third pin φ2C (common) and the fourth pin φ1C (common). The Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) in which the current for exciting φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows is the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) via the connector terminals and wiring not shown. Is electrically connected to φ1 of the sixth pin of the connector. The U/φ1 line (D/φ1 line) of the current for exciting /φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows through the first distribution drive motor (first It is electrically connected to the second pin /φ1 of the connector of the two-way drive motor). The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) in which the current for exciting φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) flows is the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) via the connector terminals and wiring not shown. Is electrically connected to φ2 of the fifth pin of the connector. The U/φ2 line (D/φ2 line) of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) in which a current for exciting /φ2 flows is connected to the first distribution drive motor (first It is electrically connected to /φ2 of the first pin of the connector of the two-way drive motor).

MPD0 to MPD3 for instructing to start or stop the excitation of φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor, and the excitation of φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the second distribution drive motor When rocking drive data MPD0 to MPD7, which is 8-bit information that is a combination of MPD4 to MPD7 for instructing a stop or stop, is output from the main control MPU 1310a, the corresponding D type flip-flops and the respective resistors are passed. Are input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12 of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n and the base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12 of the second distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310q. When the system of the main control board 1310 is activated, the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) starts the main control side power-on process (described later and the main control side timer interrupt process (port output process) described later) starts. Then, according to the swing drive data MPD0 to MPD3 (MPD4 to MPD7) from the main control MPU 1310a in the port output process, the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) causes the operating voltage or the stop voltage. A current for exciting φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is supplied with the voltage switched to.

Here, the operation of the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) will be briefly described. When the system of the main control board 1310 is activated, the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) performs the main control side power-on process (described later and the main control side timer interrupt process (port output) described below). Processing) is started), when the logic of the signal of voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a in the port output processing is output as the operating voltage logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned off, The first distribution drive is performed when the voltage of the power supply line +12V-U (+12V-D) that supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is pulled up to +12V by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60). +12V as an operating voltage is supplied to the motor (second distribution drive motor) as a power line of +12V-U (+12V-D) through the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60). It should be noted that the power line of +12V-U (+12V-D) is not supplied to the +5 power line via the diode MD50 (MD60).

On the other hand, when the logic of the signal of voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the stop voltage logic which is the inversion of the operating voltage logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned on. However, the voltage of the power supply line +12V-U (+12V-D) that supplies power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) when +12V is cut off by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is the diode MD50. By being pulled up to +5V side via (MD60), +5V as a stop voltage is +12V-U (+12V-D) via the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) for the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). ) Is supplied as a power line.

Here, the difference in temperature rise due to the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stopping voltage will be briefly described. The power consumption W can be calculated by Ohm's law: voltage V×voltage V÷resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage +12V is 144/resistance R (voltage V squared/resistance R), and the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage +5V is 25/resistance R (voltage V squared/resistance R). R). Then, the power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage +12V is 5 times or more (5.76=144/25) as compared to the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage +5V, so that the temperature rise is also about 5 times or more. Becomes The same applies to the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q).

That is, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem due to the drive (continuous drive) of the independent power source by the operating voltage +12V, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about 1/5 or less by the drive by the stop voltage +5V. ..

The package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is composed of first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors for exciting φ1, φ2, /φ1 and /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor). Absorbing heat generation and heat generation by the first to fourth diodes that convert the back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) into heat, The absorbed heat is released to the outside air (around the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q)). Since the island equipment in the game hall is installed in a row in the back of other pachinko machines, the temperature inside the island equipment in the game hall is raised by the heat generated from the power board and various control boards of the pachinko machine.

Therefore, even if heat generated by the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes is absorbed by the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q), the first distribution drive motor drive is performed. In the vicinity of the IC 1310n (1310q), that is, in a state where the temperature of the outside air is high, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases, so that heat is stored in the package of the first distribution drive motor driving IC 1310n (1310q). It will be. Then, if the package temperature of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors. The transistor may break down.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is driven to rotate the rotation axis in CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first distribution is performed. Φ1, φ2, /φ1 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) by exciting the φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the drive motor (second distribution drive motor) as continuously as possible. , The counter electromotive generated when the excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) is stopped by reducing the number of times excitation to /φ2 is stopped. The number of times the power is converted into heat by the first to fourth diodes and removed can be reduced. Thereby, heat generation by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to be small, which can contribute to a reduction in temperature rise of the package of the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

In this embodiment, a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60) which is a semiconductor is used for the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) without using a relay. This is because a relay has a time lag and the performance of each relay varies widely, which makes it difficult to accurately control the distribution operation.

[11-1-2c. Poly switch]
Here, a poly switch will be described as the resettable fuse. The operating voltage or the stopping voltage is supplied to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) via the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) as a power line of +12V-U (+12V-D). In the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat. When cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. By using this, the first distribution drive motor that is the load is limited by limiting the current that flows to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) that is the load. (Second distribution drive motor) can be protected. A fuse may be used as a device for limiting the current to the load. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by fusing when an overcurrent flows, but it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent unauthorized persons from illicitly modifying the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game to obtain an illegal game ball. Therefore, the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body, and the cover body and the base body are, for example, one-way parts of a caulking portion which is a sealing mechanism. It is crimped with screws. The caulking portion is a sealing mechanism and is provided in plural. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, a fuse is mounted on the main control board 1310, and if the fuse is blown, the crimp portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulking portion of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so the fuse cannot be replaced and the game can be played. It will be in a state where you can not.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a poly switch is used as an element for limiting an overcurrent, similarly to the fuse. Thus, when an overcurrent flows through the poly switch, the current flowing to the load can be limited and the load can be protected by specifying the poly switch. That is, unlike the fuse, the poly switch itself is not destroyed due to overcurrent and does not need to be replaced at all. It is possible to protect the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) that drives the (1)), and there is no need to break the crimped portion.

The poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) has a main body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a lead linear shape in which two leads project downward from the bottom surface. As described above, in the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from the specific temperature and the main body generates heat. When cut off and the body cools, it returns to conductivity and returns. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60), by arranging the two leads of the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) in the vertical direction, the thickness of the main body of the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) is reduced. The smaller surface can be set in the vertical direction, which facilitates upward convection of heat generated by the main body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60).

Further, since a large current flows through the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60), each terminal of the terminals for supplying power to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) and the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) It is arranged in the vicinity of a connector having terminals for exciting (φ1, /φ1, φ2, /φ2). As a result, it is possible to contribute to reducing the influence of noise due to the current on the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) on other electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310.

Further, since the poly switch MPS50 (MPS60) can limit the current flowing to the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor), it protects the first distribution drive motor (second distribution drive motor) from overheating. be able to.

In the present embodiment, one poly switch MPS50 for the first distribution drive motor is provided exclusively for the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310, and a poly switch MPS50 is provided for the second distribution drive motor. The switch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the collector terminals 2, 4, of the first and second distribution drive motor drive ICs 1310n, 1310q are replaced. A poly switch may be dedicatedly provided between the terminals 9 and 11 and the corresponding terminals of the connectors of the first and second distribution drive motors.

Further, in the present embodiment, the poly switch MPS50 for the first distribution drive motor is provided exclusively for the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310, and the poly switch MPS50 is provided for the second distribution drive motor. One switch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310, but instead, it is supplied to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m, 1310p, respectively. One common poly switch may be provided for each of the +12V and +5V motor power supplies, or +12V supplied to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. A single common poly switch may be provided for only the motor power supply.

Further, for example, when a stepping motor is driven as another drive motor together with the first distribution drive motor (the first distribution drive motor is driven by the first distribution drive motor drive IC 1310n, and the other drive motors are other drive motors). In the case of being driven by the drive IC), the motor power supplied to other drive motors together with the first distribution drive motor can be configured to be switched by the first distribution drive motor voltage switching circuit 1310m. In this case, the common poly switch for the first distribution drive motor and the other drive motors is the poly switch MPS50, and the motor power source of +12V or +5V is supplied to the other stepping motor together with the first distribution drive motor via the poly switch MPS50. Each is supplied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the unipolar stepping motor is used as the first and second distribution drive motors, but instead of this, a bipolar stepping motor may be used. In this case, a poly switch is provided exclusively for each terminal to which motor power of +12 V and +5 V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

Further, in the present embodiment, the polyswitch adopted as the resettable fuse is a ceramic PT which is a PPTC (abbreviation of Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficient) such as a polymer PTC (abbreviation of Positive Temperature Coefficien) thermistor. Even if an element (abbreviation of Positive Temperature Coefficien) or a bimetal is adopted, the same effect as that of the poly switch described above can be obtained.

[11-1-3. Main control solenoid drive circuit]
Next, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d will be described with reference to FIG. 218. The main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d includes a starting opening solenoid 2415, which is a driving solenoid, as an electric drive for moving (operating) the second starting opening door 2414 to open and close the second starting opening 2004, and the first big winning opening. As the electric drive for moving (operating) the door 2417 to open and close the first special winning opening 2005, the first attacker solenoid 2418, which is a drive solenoid, and the second large winning opening door 2611 are moved (operated). A second attacker solenoid 2612, which is a drive solenoid, is driven as an electric drive for opening and closing the two major winning openings 2006.

The drive solenoids such as the starting opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc., are the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is driven by. The main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d mainly includes a drive solenoid drive IC 1310da that drives the drive solenoid.

The starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are, as described above, the main control solenoid drive circuit of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a predetermined condition is satisfied. 1310d, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the system of the main control board 1310 is activated like the above-mentioned first and second distribution drive motors (main control side power-on process described later). Is performed and the main control side timer interrupt process (port output process) described later is started), and is not always driven. However, while the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are being driven, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 generate excessive heat for some reason. By doing so, a malfunction or a failure occurs in the drive solenoid drive IC that drives the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612 or the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612. In addition, the mechanism for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, the mechanism for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005, and the mechanism for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2006 are difficult to move (difficult to operate). ), a malfunction occurs in the starting opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 and is difficult to move (difficult to operate), and excessive heat is generated. There is a possibility that a solenoid or a drive solenoid drive IC for driving the solenoid that has become difficult to move (difficult to operate) due to the occurrence of the malfunction may have a failure. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the starting opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 are driven.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the current flowing to the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is limited by using a poly switch as a resettable fuse to limit the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418. , The second attacker solenoid 2612 and the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the drive solenoid driving IC that drives the second attacker solenoid 2612 to protect the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second The heat generated by driving the attacker solenoid 2612 is suppressed.

[11-1-3a. Drive solenoid drive IC]
One end of the poly switch MPS40 is electrically connected to a +24V power supply line (a power supply line created by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, a +24V power supply line)). The other end is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD45 and MD46, respectively, and serves as a power supply line SOL+24V for supplying power to the starting opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612. It is electrically connected to the terminal.

The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da has four NPN type Darlington transistors and four diodes which are formed in a chip and are incorporated in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR45, and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN Darlington transistor is connected to the resistor MR46. The base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor electrically connected to one end is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR47.

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an S-SOL line through which a current for exciting the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415 flows, and the collector terminal 2 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. 4 is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a D1-SOL line through which a current for exciting the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 flows, and the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is connected to the second attacker solenoid 2612. It is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a D2-SOL line through which a current for exciting the coil flows.

The other ends of the resistors MR45 to MR47 are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c. Specifically, the other end of the resistor MR45, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end, which is a signal MPC0 for instructing the start and stop of the excitation of the coil of the starting opening solenoid 2415. Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the coil type D-type flip-flop of the starting opening solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of the coil D-type flip-flop of the starting opening solenoid is electrically connected to the coil output terminal of the starting opening solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The other end of the resistor MR46, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor, has the other end of which transmits a signal called MPC1 for instructing the start and stop of the excitation of the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418. Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the coil D type flip-flop of the first attacker solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of the coil type D flip-flop of the first attacker solenoid is electrically connected to the coil output terminal of the first attacker solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The other end of the resistor MR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end of which transmits a signal called MPC2 for instructing the start and stop of the excitation of the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612. Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop for the coil of the second attacker solenoid (not shown). The input terminal of the coil type D flip-flop of the second attacker solenoid is electrically connected to the coil output terminal of the second attacker solenoid of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the drive solenoid driving IC 1310da inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the drive solenoid driving IC 1310da inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND), whereas the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor is of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da. It is not connected to the outside.

The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da has four built-in diodes. The first and second diodes form a pair inside the package, and the third and fourth diodes form a pair inside the package. It is arranged.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. Is electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 3 of the drive solenoid driving IC 1310da. The cathode terminal 3 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD45.

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. Is electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the drive solenoid driving IC 1310da inside the package. The cathode terminal 10 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD46.

Of the first to fourth diodes, the first to third diodes are when the excitation of the coil of the starting opening solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 is stopped. By converting the generated back electromotive force into heat and removing it, the first to third NPN type Darlington transistors are protected.

A power supply line SOL+24V for supplying power to the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 has a starting port solenoid 2415, a first attacker solenoid 2418, via a terminal of the connector and each wiring not shown. It is electrically connected to each connector of the second attacker solenoid 2612. The S-SOL line through which the current for exciting the coil of the starting port solenoid 2415 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the starting port solenoid 2415 via a terminal of the connector and wiring not shown. The D1-SOL line through which the current for exciting the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the first attacker solenoid 2418 via a terminal of the connector and a wire (not shown). The D2-SOL line through which the current for exciting the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 flows is electrically connected to the connector of the second attacker solenoid 2612 via a terminal of the connector and a wire (not shown).

Whether the system of the main control board 1310 is activated (main control side power-on process described later is performed and main control timer interrupt process (port output process) described later is started), and whether a predetermined condition is satisfied or not Accordingly, in the port output processing, the main drive solenoid that is information of MPC0 to MPC2 that instructs the start and stop of the excitation of the coil of the starting opening solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612. When the drive data MPC0 to MPC2 for use are output from the main control MPU 1310a, they are input to the base terminals 1, 5, and 8 of the drive solenoid drive IC 1310da via the corresponding D-type flip-flops and the resistors described above. The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da excites the coil of the starting opening solenoid 2415, the coil of the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the coil of the second attacker solenoid 2612 in accordance with the drive data MPC0 to MPC2 for the main drive solenoid from the main control MPU 1310a. Apply current.

[11-1-3b. Poly switch]
Here, a poly switch will be described as the resettable fuse. The +24V power supply line (the power supply line created by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +24V power supply line) is compared with the starting opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612). Is supplied as a power supply line of SOL+24 V through the poly switch MPS 40. In the poly switch MPS 40, in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value abruptly increases from the specific temperature and the main body generates heat. The conductivity decreases and interrupts the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. By using this, the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second which are loads are used. The current flowing to the attacker solenoid 2612 can be restricted to protect the starting opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 that are loads. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by melting when an overcurrent flows, but it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent unauthorized persons from illicitly modifying the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game to obtain an illegal game ball. Therefore, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 composed of the transparent cover body and the transparent base body, and the cover body and the base body are the sealing mechanism. The caulking portion is caulked by, for example, a one-way screw. The caulking portion is a sealing mechanism and is provided in plural. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, in order to open the main control board box 1320, The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, a fuse is mounted on the main control board 1310, and if the fuse is blown, the crimp portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulking portion of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so the fuse cannot be replaced and the game can be played. It will be in a state where you can not.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a poly switch is used as an element for limiting an overcurrent, similarly to the fuse. Thus, when an overcurrent flows through the poly switch, the current flowing to the load can be limited and the load can be protected by specifying the poly switch. That is, unlike the fuse, the poly switch itself due to overcurrent is not destroyed, and there is no need to replace it. The drive solenoid drive IC 1310da that drives the attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612 can be protected, and there is no need to break the crimped portion.

[11-1-4. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 2192, the main control board 1310 has two types of +12V from the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 and +24V of the power supply creation circuit 630f from the power supply creation circuit 630f to +24V. Is supplied via the payout control board 633, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of +12V and +24V power failure or momentary power failure. When the power failure or momentary power failure is detected, a power failure notice signal is sent as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board. The payout control MPU 633aa, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, and the like. When the power failure notice signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later and stops the progress of the game. Then, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs a payout control unit power-off process in a payout control unit power-on process described later to stop the progress of the payout (an operation of paying a game ball as a prize ball), and the surrounding area. The control board 1510 performs a backup process of effect information, and the effect display device 1600 can surely complete the main control side power-off process by the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit power-off process by the payout control 633aa. In order to cut power consumption, an inverter (not shown) that creates a power source for the backlight is turned off to stop the progress of the effect.

Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +24V, the power failure or instantaneous power failure of +12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal will be described.

[11-1-4a. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 219, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 have one end created on the main control board side +5V power supply line (created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310). And a resistor MR20 that is a +5V power supply line and is electrically connected to a power supply line (that is, different from a +5V power supply line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. The main control board side +5V is applied by being electrically connected to the end, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20. (AC component superimposed on voltage) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is a +24V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, +24V power supply). It is used for comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of the line) (hereinafter referred to as “+24V monitoring voltage V1”) and the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B) is used for the +12V power line (power source). The monitor voltage V2 (hereinafter, referred to as "+12V monitor voltage V2") and the reference voltage Vref of the power supply line (that is, +12V power supply line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the creation circuit 630f. The positive terminal of the MIC 21A, the third terminal, is applied with the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V, and the negative terminal of the MIC 21A is applied with the reference voltage Vref. The fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal, is applied with the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V, and the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC21B, is applied with the reference voltage Vref.The results of these comparisons are stored in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment.The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is , +5V, which is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is +5V The ripple is removed and smoothed by the MC 21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC 21 is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[11-1-4b. +24V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the +24V power failure or the instantaneous blackout is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 219, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end formed by the +24V power supply line (created by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the supplied power supply line (that is, +24V power supply line) and the other end of the resistor MR22 electrically connected to the ground (GND) are electrically connected to each other. The other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, which are connected to each other, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) are electrically connected to each other at the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. The monitor voltage V1 of +24V applied to a certain terminal 3 is smoothed by dividing +24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and removing ripples by the capacitor MC23. , +24V, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and reaches a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (21.40V is set in this embodiment). The voltage V1 is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board side. The capacitor MC24 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. .. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is mainly due to the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic level has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[11-1-4c. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
As described above, the +12V power failure or the instantaneous blackout is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 219, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, has one end formed with a +12V power supply line (created by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the supplied power supply line (that is, +12V power supply line) and the other end of the resistor MR25 electrically connected to the ground (GND) are electrically connected. The other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to a certain terminal 5 is divided by +12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC25. , +12V, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage starts to drop from +12V and reaches a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), +12V monitoring is performed. The voltage V2 is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A described above, so that one end is formed on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays the role of a low-pass filter, as described above.

When the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is mainly due to the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic level has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[11-1-4d. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Further, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state when the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal which is the inverted signal of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal which is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is output. On the other hand, when a signal having a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latched state is set. Further, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to the latch state by inputting the signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. When this signal is input, a state in which a signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic). Maintain the status output from the 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is a clock input terminal because the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are electrically connected to the ground (GND), respectively. There is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The circuit is configured. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of +24V and the power failure of +12V to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and is connected to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The applied +5V on the main control board side is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. The negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts is electrically disconnected from the outside.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310c. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal has a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310c as its logic becomes LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted to an output terminal. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 1310c and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the 1Q output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the terminal is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control output circuit. The output from the 1310c to the payout control board 633 is output as a payout power failure notification signal, and the peripheral control board 1510 is output as a peripheral power failure notification signal.

As shown in FIG. 219, the main control input circuit 1310b for electrically connecting the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a includes a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. Is electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control substrate side. And the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (MIC23A) is shaped and output without being inverted. Is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board side to generate the transistor. The MTR 20 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the main control MPU1310a. It is input to the input terminal of the port PB.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic of HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. To be entered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as the payout power failure notice signal is an open collector output type. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected. The base terminal of the preceding-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 having one end electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage has a resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board side. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage through the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). , And is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 633a shown in FIG. In the circuit 633ab, a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to a power supply line (that is, +12V power supply line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa shown in FIG.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the following stage is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and The MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is applied to the main control board side by the resistor MR32. By being pulled up to the +5V side, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the main control board side +5V side and The MTR21 is turned on, and the switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control substrate side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage, whereby the transistor MTR22 in the succeeding stage is turned on. .. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 633.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 has the logic HI and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. By the input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). The payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633.

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure notice signal is an open collector output type. The 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. It is connected to the. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 having one end electrically connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), one end of a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 has a +12V power supply line (power supply generation). 14 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, +12V power supply line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the circuit 630f. It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on/off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the main control board side created +5V side to cause the transistor The MTR 23 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure notice signal that has become is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic of HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is the peripheral control board. 1510 is input.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310c for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripheral control board 1510 input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to is the same, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the payout control board 633. In the main control output circuit 1310c that outputs as, there are two transistors, the former stage and the latter stage, and the logic of the payout power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 and the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal is the opposite of the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control substrate side, and the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a through the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310c via the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a on the substrate 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the transistor of the main control output circuit 1310c is used. The collector terminal of the MTR 23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). Has been done. This is because between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to the main control board 1310. Since it is installed in the main control MPU 1310a, the main control board 1310a and the main control board 1310 are used to give a power failure warning by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using +5V. Between the board with the payout control board 633 and between the board with the main control board 1310 and the board with the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, The power outage notification is performed by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage notification signal using the control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa, and the control power supply of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, +12V which is a DC power supply higher than +5V.

As described above, the power supply line created by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +12V power supply line) is the main control input circuit of the main control board 1310 as described above. 1310b, the motor drive circuit 1310v of the main control board 1310, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 212, and the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 213. Control power generation circuit 1510z, the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 shown in FIG. 213, the LED constant current drive circuit of each decorative board of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 213, and the effect display device shown in FIG. 213. It is supplied to the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of 1600, the liquid crystal panel of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. That is, the +12V power line is supplied to the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720, each decorative board of the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the like. Even if the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 forming the main board are operating normally, for example, due to some electrical trouble to the control power supply creation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510, the control power supply creation circuit is generated. Due to the overcurrent flowing to 1510z, the potential of the +12V power supply line is lowered, or the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel of the effect display device 1600, the backlight, and the electric circuit for some reason to the drive circuit are electrically connected. Due to a trouble, an overcurrent flows to any one of the liquid crystal panel power supply generation circuit 1600z of the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel of the effect display device 1600, the backlight, the drive circuit, etc., so that the potential of the +12V power supply line is lowered or the effect drive is performed. When the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the board 1720 (or waiting for the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 to be driven. However, due to an overload or an electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent flows to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. +12V power line due to overcurrent flowing to the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5 due to an electric trouble due to some reason to the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5 The electric potential of may drop. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530 for supplying the +12V power line from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display device 1600, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, the decorative board of the game board 5, and the like. +12V due to overcurrent even when leakage current or short circuit occurs due to some electrical trouble in the formed wiring pattern or wiring (harness) that electrically connects between boards The power line potential drops. Then, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

The power supply line created by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f (that is, the +24V power supply line) is the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310 and the main control board as described above. In addition to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of 1310, the payout control board 633 (the main control board 1310 is supplied with a +12V power line through the payout control board 633), the peripheral control board 1510, and the production drive shown in FIG. 212. It is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the substrate 1720. In other words, the +24V power supply line is supplied to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the performance drive board 1720, etc. in addition to the main control board 1310, so that the main control board 1310 and the payout control board that constitute the main board are provided. Even if 633 is operating normally, the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the production drive board 1720 (or the +24V system of the game board 5). While waiting for the drive of the electric drive source (drive solenoid)), due to overload or electrical trouble for some reason, the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) or +24V system driver circuit of the game board 5 When the overcurrent flows to 1720c1, the potential of the +24V power supply line decreases. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the +24V power supply line, the wiring pattern formed on the boards such as the performance drive board 1720, and the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards may leak due to some electrical trouble. Even when a current is generated or a short circuit occurs, the potential of the +24V power supply line is lowered. Then, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later. The progress of the game will be stopped.

[11-1-5. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line and +24V power line]
[11-1-5a. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line]
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the overcurrent protection to the +12V power supply line, the +12V power supply line has a +12V power supply line upper limit of the peripheral control board allowable current as a measure against the overcurrent, as shown in FIG. A +12V fuse SF12 capable of passing a current up to is provided, and a +12V fuse PF12 capable of flowing a current up to the upper limit of the maximum allowable current as a source fuse of the effect display device 1600 is provided in the effect display device 1600. 1600 is provided with a +12V fuse PF12a1 capable of passing a current up to the allowable current upper limit of the first system as a branch first system fuse branching from the +12V fuse PF12 into two systems, and the +12V fuse PF12 is provided in the effect display device 1600. Branch to 2 systems Branch +2V fuse PF12a2 capable of flowing current up to the allowable current upper limit of the second system as a second system fuse is provided, and production drive board 1720 is up to +12V power line production drive board allowable current upper limit. A +12V fuse EF12 capable of passing a current is provided, and a +12V driver circuit 1720c2 in the performance drive board 1720 is provided with a fuse capable of flowing a current up to the upper limit of the game board side drive motor allowable current, and each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. Of the above, a +12V fuse DF12 capable of flowing a current up to the upper limit of the game board side decorative board allowable current is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted (whether or not the LED constant current drive circuit is provided). The fuse DF12 for +12V capable of flowing a current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the game board side may be provided to all the decorative boards of the game board 5 to which the +12V power supply line is supplied. It should be noted that +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a1 as the first branch fuse is used to generate the liquid crystal panel power by the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z, and this liquid crystal panel power is used by the liquid crystal panel of the effect display device 1600 and the back. Since it is supplied to the light and the drive circuit, the liquid crystal panel of the effect display device 1600, the backlight, and the drive circuit are made from +12V which is supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a1 as the branch first system fuse. The panel power supply and +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a2 as the branch second system fuse are supplied.

In the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that form the main board are operating normally, the control power supply generation circuit 1510z of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the permissible current of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board to the control power supply generation circuit 1510z flows due to an electrical trouble for some reason, the +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510 is blown. .. In this manner, the +12V fuse SF12 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V fuse SF12 is blown out by the overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the +12V power supply line peripheral control board allowable current. By suppressing a decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the control board 633, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output the power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a. Can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa, in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as the prize ball) without performing the control unit power-off process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which form the main board, are operating normally, the liquid crystal panel power supply of the effect display device 1600 is created in the +12V power supply line of the effect display device 1600. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the permissible current of the first branch system flows to the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z due to an electrical trouble to the circuit 1600z for some reason, +12V which is the fuse of the first branch system of the effect display device 1600. The fuse PF12a1 is blown. Further, in the present embodiment, due to an electrical trouble to the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 for some reason, from the +12V supplied via the +12V fuse PF12a2 as the branch second system fuse. When an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the permissible current of the first system flows to the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit 1600z that generates the liquid crystal panel power, the +12V fuse PF12a1 which is the branch first system fuse of the effect display device 1600 is blown. However, due to an electrical trouble to the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 for some reason, the liquid crystal panel, the backlight, and the drive circuit of the effect display device 1600 are branched. When an overcurrent exceeding the allowable upper limit of the two systems flows, the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the branch second system fuse of the effect display device 1600, is blown. Further, in the present embodiment, the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, has a capacity of +12V fuse PF12a1 that is the branch first system fuse and +12V that is the branch second system fuse. The fuses PF12a2 for use are selected in advance so as to have a larger capacity than any of the fuses and a smaller capacity than the sum of them. Therefore, the +12V fuse PF12, which is the original fuse, includes the +12V fuse PF12a1 which is the branch first system fuse and the +12V fuse PF12a2 which is the branch second system fuse in the +12V power supply line. Even if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses is blown, the fuse may be blown if the overcurrent still flows in the blown fuse system and exceeds the maximum allowable current limit. As the capacity of the +12V fuse PF12 that is the original fuse of the effect display device 1600, the capacity of the +12V fuse PF12a1 that is the branch first system fuse and the capacity of the +12V fuse PF12a2 that is the branch second system fuse. And +12V fuse PF12 which is the original fuse, the +12V fuse PF12a1 which is the fuse of the branch first system and the fuse PF12a1 which is the branch second system in the +12V power supply line. Of the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the fuse of the above, if an overcurrent flows and any one of the fuses blows, the blown fuse is blown when the overcurrent still flows in the fuse system and exceeds the upper limit of the permissible current. In some cases, the +12V fuse PF12a1 which is the branch first system fuse and the +12V fuse PF12a2 which is the branch second system fuse are blown when an overcurrent flows and both fuses are blown. Thus, the effect display device 1600 is provided with the +12V fuse PF12, which is the main fuse of the effect display device 1600, the +12V fuse PF12a1, which is the branch first system fuse, and the +12V fuse PF12a2, which is the branch second system fuse. Since the overcurrent is provided, the +12V fuse PF12 which is the original fuse, the +12V fuse PF12a1 which is the branch first system fuse, and the +12V fuse PF12a2 which is the branch second system fuse are blown. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 suppresses the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power failure notice signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa is a payout control unit described below. The payout control unit in the power-on process The power-off process can be continued without performing the power-off process (the operation of paying a game ball as a prize ball).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that form the main board are operating normally, the +12V system driver circuit of the production drive board 1720 is in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. When the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is driven by 1720c2 (or while waiting for the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 to drive), If an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the drive motor on the game board side flows to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, +12V The fuse provided in the system driver circuit 1720c2 is blown. +12V supplied via the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720 is supplied to each decorative board of the game board 5 in addition to the +12V driver circuit 1720c2. The capacity is selected in advance based on the game board side drive motor allowable current upper limit of the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 and each decorative board of the game board 5 upper limit of the game board side decorative board allowable current.

The +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 requires a considerable amount of current for driving, so the effect by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and each decorative board of the game board 5 Among the light emitting effects of various LEDs by, the light emitting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is preferentially continued over the effect by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. It has become. Therefore, the fuses provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720 are blown first, rather than the +12V fuses DF12 of the respective decoration boards of the game board 5 are blown. The capacity of the +12V fuse DF12 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720 are selected in advance and depend on the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. The capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720 is set in advance so that the effect of emitting various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 can be continued preferentially over the effect.

As a case of continuing the light emitting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 with priority over the effect by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, for example, as the capacity of the +12V fuse EF12 , Each of the decorative boards of the game board 5 is larger than the capacity selected for use up to the gaming board side decorative board allowable current upper limit, and the selected capacity and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. In the case where the fuses EF12 for +12V are selected in advance to be smaller than the one obtained by adding and, in the state where each decorative board of the game board 5 is using up to the upper limit of the decorative board allowable current of the game board, Even if the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board side drive motor to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. If the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the +12V power line production drive board allowable current, the fuse may be blown. Further, for example, as the capacity of the fuse EF12 for +12V, the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to use up to the upper limit of the decorative board allowable current of the game board, and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2. When the same value as the one obtained by adding the capacity and is selected in advance, the +12V fuse EF12 is used in the state where each decorative board of the game board 5 is using up to the allowable upper limit of the decorative board-side decorative board current. , The +12V system electric drive source (driving motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 has an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the game board side drive motor allowable current, and the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 is blown. However, if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the +12V power line production drive board allowable current, the fuse may be blown.

In addition, among +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and among various LED light emission effects by each decorative board of the game board 5, +12V system electric drive source (drive) of the game board 5 Contrary to the case where the light emitting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5 is continued with priority over the effect by the motor, the game board is more than the light emitting effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5. In the case of preferentially continuing the effect by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of No. 5, each decoration of the game board 5 rather than the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 being blown. The capacity of the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720 are preset so that the board +12V fuse DF12 is blown first. Along with the selection, the production by the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 can be prioritized and continued over the emission production of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5. The capacitance of the +12V fuse EF12 of the substrate 1720 is preset.

Also, due to an overload or electrical trouble on the 12V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720 for some reason, an overcurrent flows in the 12V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720, and the +12V system electric drive source (drive) of the game board 5 is driven. In the case of stopping both the effect by the motor) and the light effect of various LEDs by each decorative board of the game board 5, the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720, Of the capacities of the +12V fuses DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5, whichever is smaller, the capacity of the +12V fuses EF12 of the production drive board 1720 is set in advance.

In this way, by providing the +12V fuse EF12 on the production drive substrate 1720 and providing the fuse on the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2, the fuses of the +12V fuse EF12 and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 are blown by the overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 sends a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The output is not output, the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the process of turning off the power of the payout control unit in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which form the main board, are operating normally, each decoration of the game board 5 is in the +12V power line of each decoration board of the game board 5. The +12V fuse DF12 of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted on the board causes an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board of the game board to flow to each LED of the game board 5 and the decorative board of the game board 5. Then, the +12V fuse DF12 on the decorative board of the game board 5 is blown. A +12V fuse DF12 capable of flowing a current up to the upper limit of the decorative board allowable current of the game board is provided to all the decoration boards of the game board 5 to which the +12V power supply line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit. In this case, when the +12V fuse DF12 of all the decorative boards of the game board 5 causes an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable allowable current of the decorative board of the game board to flow to each LED of the game board 5 and all the decorative boards of the game board 5, The +12V fuses DF12 on all the decorative boards of the game board 5 are designed to be blown. As described above, among the decorative boards of the game board 5, the +12V fuse DF12 is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, and the +12V fuse DF12 is generated due to the overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the decorative board allowable current of the game board. Since it is designed to melt down (It should be noted that, regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit, the +12V power line is supplied to all the decorative boards of the game board 5 When providing the +12V fuse DF12 that can flow, the +12V fuse DF12 is provided on all the decorative boards of the game board 5 so that the +12V fuse DF12 is blown by the overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the decorative board allowable current of the game board. Therefore, by suppressing a decrease in the potential of the +12V power source line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the power failure monitoring signal 1310e of the main control board 1310 sends a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a or It is not necessary to output to the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa. Can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying out a game ball as a prize ball) without performing the process at power-off of the payout control unit in the process at power-on of the payout control unit described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which form the main board, are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720. , In the +12V power supply line of each decorative board of the game board 5, electrical for some reason to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc. Due to various troubles, a leakage current or a short circuit may occur, and the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, each decorative board of the game board 5, etc. When an overcurrent flows through the fuses, the +12V fuses SF12, PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2, EF12, and DF12 provided on each substrate are blown out, so that the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633 are supplied. By suppressing the decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output the power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a is a main control side described later. The game can be continued without performing the main control side power-off process in the power-on process, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process described later. It is possible to continue the payout process (the operation of paying out the game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout. When a leakage current or a short circuit occurs due to an electrical trouble on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 for some reason, an overcurrent flows to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed. Since the overcurrent also flows through the peripheral control board 1510 which is the upper board, the +12V fuse SF12 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is blown.

In the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that form the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is performed in the +12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +12V system driver circuit of the board (or waiting for the drive of the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3) During the operation), due to an overload or an electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the door frame side drive motor allowable current is applied to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 or the +12V system driver circuit. When it flows, the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the +12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the drive motor allowable current of the +12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is connected to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) and the +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 by an overcurrent exceeding the door frame side drive motor allowable current upper limit. Even if the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit is blown, if the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. As described above, by providing the +12V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 and providing the fuse on the +12V system driver circuit, the +12V fuse and the fuse of the +12V system driver circuit are blown by the overcurrent. Therefore, a decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and a power failure notice signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be described later. It is possible to continue the payout (the operation of paying a game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the control unit power-on process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, each decoration of the door frame 3 is in the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the door frame 3. When the +12V fuse of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted on the board, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side flows to each LED of the door frame 3 or the decorative board of the door frame 3. The +12V fuse on the decorative board of the door frame 3 is blown. In the case where a +12V fuse capable of flowing a current up to the door frame side decorative board allowable current upper limit is provided for all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 to which the +12V power supply line is supplied regardless of the presence or absence of the LED constant current drive circuit. When the +12V fuse of all the decoration boards of the door frame 3 causes an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the decoration board allowable current of the door frame side to flow through each LED of the door frame 3 and all the decoration boards of the door frame 3, The fuses for +12V of all the decorative boards of No. 3 are blown. As described above, among the decorative boards of the door frame 3, the +12V fuse is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, and the +12V fuse is blown by the overcurrent exceeding the door frame side decorative board allowable current upper limit. (It should be noted that, regardless of the presence of the LED constant current drive circuit, +12V power line is supplied to all of the door frame 3 to the decorative board, the current up to the gaming board side decorative board allowable current upper limit When providing a +12V fuse capable of operating, the +12V fuses are provided on all the decorative boards of the door frame 3 and the +12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the decorative board on the door frame side. ), the decrease of the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and a power failure notice signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be described later. It is possible to continue the payout process (the operation of paying a game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the control unit power-on process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, the +12V power source for each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc. In the line, a leakage current or a short circuit may occur due to an electrical trouble on each drive board of the door frame 3 or each decorative board of the door frame 3 due to some reason. When an overcurrent flows through each drive board of No. 3 and each decorative board of the door frame 3, the fuse for +12V provided on each board is blown out, so that the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are provided. By suppressing a decrease in the potential of the +12V power supply line to be supplied, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output the power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The game can be continued without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process, and the payout control MPU 633aa is a payout control unit power-off in the payout control unit power-on process described later. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as the prize ball) without performing the time processing.

[11-1-5b. Overcurrent protection for +24V power line]
Further, in the present embodiment, as the overcurrent protection to the +24V power supply line, as shown in FIG. 213, the +24V power supply line has a +24V power supply line upper limit of the peripheral control board allowable current as a countermeasure against the overcurrent, as shown in FIG. A +24V fuse SF24 capable of passing a current up to is provided, and a +12V fuse PF12 capable of flowing a current up to the upper limit of the maximum allowable current as a source fuse of the effect display device 1600 is provided in the effect display device 1600. 1720 is provided with a +24V fuse EF24 capable of flowing a current up to a +24V power line production drive board allowable current upper limit, and a current can be passed to a +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 in the production drive board 1720 to a game board side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit. There is a fuse that can.

In the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that form the main board are operating normally, the peripheral control board 1510 itself and/or the periphery are provided in the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. If an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the permissible current of the peripheral control board of the +24V power supply line flows due to an electrical trouble due to some reason to the production drive board 1720, which is the succeeding board of the control board 1510, the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is designed to melt down. As described above, since the +24V fuse SF24 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the +24V fuse SF24 is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the +24V power supply peripheral control board allowable current, the main control board 1310, By suppressing the decrease of the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the control board 633, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output the power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a. Can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa is the payout control unit power-on process described below. It is possible to continue the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out the game ball as the prize ball) without performing the control unit power-off process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which form the main board, are operating normally, the +24V system driver circuit of the production drive board 1720 is provided in the +24V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. When the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is driven by 1720c1 (or when the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), If an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the game board side drive solenoid allowable current flows to the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) or the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the game board 5 due to an overload or an electrical trouble for some reason, +24V The fuse provided in the system driver circuit 1720c1 is blown. Even if the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 is blown, the +24V fuse EF24 is blown when the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the +24V power line production drive board allowable current upper limit. As described above, by providing the +24V fuse EF24 on the production drive board 1720 and providing the fuse on the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1, the fuses of the +24V fuse EF24 and the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 are blown by the overcurrent. Therefore, the decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 sends a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. It is not output, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be described later. In the payout control unit power-on process, the payout control unit power-off process can be performed without performing the payout control unit power-off process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which form the main board, are operating normally, the peripheral control board in the +24V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance drive board 1720, etc. 1510, the performance drive board 1720 and the like, due to some electrical trouble, a leakage current or a short circuit occurs, and the peripheral control board 1510, the performance drive board 1720 and the like are over-current. When flowing, the +24V fuses SF24 and EF24 provided on each substrate are designed to be blown out, thereby suppressing a decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output the power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described later. The game can be continued without performing the payout control, and the payout control MPU 633aa does not perform the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. Can be continued.

In the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 that form the main board are operating normally, each drive of the door frame 3 is performed in the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. When the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit of the board (or waiting for the drive of the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3) During the operation), due to an overload or electrical trouble for some reason, an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the door frame side drive solenoid current is applied to the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 or the +24V system driver circuit. When it flows, the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit is blown. The capacity of the +24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit of the +24V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is connected to the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) and the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 with an overcurrent exceeding the door frame side drive solenoid allowable current upper limit. Even if the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit is blown out, if the overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, the fuse is blown. As described above, by providing the +24V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3 and providing the fuse on the +24V system driver circuit, the fuse for the +24V system and the fuse of the +24V system driver circuit are blown by the overcurrent. Therefore, a decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the progress of the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa will be described later. It is possible to continue the payout (the operation of paying a game ball as a prize ball) without performing the payout control unit power-off process in the control unit power-on process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which form the main board, are operating normally, each of the door frames 3 is connected to the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3. If an electric current to the drive board or the like causes a leakage current or a short circuit due to an electrical trouble due to some reason, and an overcurrent flows to each drive board or the like of the door frame 3, each board may be affected. Since the provided +24V fuse is designed to be blown out, the decrease in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310e. Due to this, the power failure notice signal is not output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 63aa, and the main control MPU 1310a continues the game without performing the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process described later. The payout control MPU 633aa can continue the progress of payout (the operation of paying a game ball as a prize ball) without performing the process of turning off the power of the payout control unit in the process of turning on the power of the payout control unit described later. You can

[11-2. Discharge control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is +5V from the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied. The backup power supply to the power supply circuit 630 is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as the payout VBB.

As shown in FIG. 220, first, +5V from the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 is input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630 at its first terminal, and its second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). , +5V from which the noise component is removed is output from the third terminal. The +5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), so that ripples (AC component superimposed on the voltage) are first generated. Has been removed and smoothed.

The +5V output from the third terminal is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, when an instantaneous blackout occurs and the power from the game hall is shut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is generated after the instantaneous blackout occurs. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 is larger than the power consumption of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. (In this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is larger than the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)). Has been selected. As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when the power supply from the game hall is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure. Each of the charged charges is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the instantaneous blackout.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple by the capacitor PC3. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. Further, the VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the resistor PR0. Is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via the. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, while the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied. The diode PD0 prevents the supply VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of, through the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are respectively input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are It is input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. The input terminals PA6 and PA7, which are empty terminals, are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as empty terminal processing.

The power outage notification signal, which is a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payment control MPU 633aa via the payment control input circuit 633ab. Detection signals from the respective sensors are respectively input to predetermined input terminals of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA is an empty terminal. , PA7, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

[11-2-1. Dispensing control input circuit]
Next, the payout control input circuit 633ab will be described. Since the payout control input circuit 633ab is the same circuit, here, as an example, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout blackout notification signal which is the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 220, the payout control input circuit 633ab to which the payout power failure notification signal, which is the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input, has a +12V power supply line at one end (power generation in the power supply board 630). It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR40 which is electrically connected to the power supply line created by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the circuit 630f (that is, the +12V power supply line) and via the resistor PR41. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. In addition to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control substrate 6330. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the payout control substrate 633. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line (a power supply line created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630 (that is, a +5V power supply line)). The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43. It is electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the shaping and output without inverting the logic.

[11-2-2. Discharge motor drive circuit]
Next, the payout motor drive circuit 633ad will be described with reference to FIG. The payout motor drive circuit 633ad is a circuit that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 89 in response to a control signal from the payout control MPU 633aa. When the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 rotates, the payout blade 589 shown in FIG. 89 rotates and the game ball can be paid out as a prize ball.

The payout motor drive circuit 633ad can switch between the operating voltage and the stop voltage to excite the φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 in accordance with the rotation state of the payout motor 584. And a payout motor drive IC 633adb capable of driving the payout motor 584.

During the acceleration period from the state in which the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped to the rotation at a constant rotation speed, and the deceleration period from the state in which the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates at a constant rotation speed to the stop are high torque. Therefore, in order to prevent step-out, it is necessary to apply a high voltage as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the payout motor 584, while the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped or constant. High torque is not required when rotating at a rotational speed of. Therefore, regardless of whether the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped or rotating, when the high voltage is applied to the φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the payout motor 584, the payout motor 584 becomes excessive. Due to the heat generation, the payout motor 584 may malfunction or fail, and it is necessary to suppress the heat generation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acceleration period from the state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is stopped to the time when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated, and the time when the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is stopped from the state where the rotation shaft is rotated at the constant rotation speed. In the deceleration period of, +12V is used as the operating voltage which is a high voltage, while the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is in a stopped state or is rotated at a constant rotation speed. During the period, the voltage switching circuit 633ada that uses +5V as a stop voltage, which is a voltage lower than the operating voltage, is controlled, and the current flowing to the payout motor 584 is controlled using a poly switch as a resettable fuse. By limiting and protecting the payout motor 584 and the payout motor drive IC 633adb that drives the payout motor 584, heat generation of the payout motor 584 is suppressed.

[11-2-2a. Voltage switching circuit]
The voltage switching circuit 633ada mainly includes a transistor PTR50, a field effect transistor (FET) PF50, a diode P50, and a poly switch PPS50 as a resettable fuse. The base terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR50 and one end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the resistor PR50 is electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa via a payout control output circuit 633ac as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching.

Specifically, the other end of the resistor PR50 is electrically connected to an output terminal of a voltage switching D-type flip-flop (not shown) as a line for transmitting a voltage switching signal. The input terminal of the voltage switching D-type flip-flop is electrically connected to the voltage switching output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor PF50 via the resistor PR52. The gate terminal G of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to the source terminal S of the field effect transistor PF50 via the resistor PR53. The source terminal S of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line (a power supply line created by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630 (that is, a +12V power supply line)). Has been done. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor PF50 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD50, which is a rectifying diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the poly switch PPS50. The anode terminal of the diode PD50 is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line (a power supply line (that is, +5V power supply line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630). .. The other end of the poly switch PPS50 is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes PD51 and PD52, and is also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line of MOTH+12V for supplying power to the payout motor 584.

[11-2-2b. Discharge motor drive IC]
The pay-out motor drive IC 633adb has four NPN Darlington transistors and four diodes which are formed in a chip, and are incorporated in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR54, and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is of the resistor PR55. The base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR56, and the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR57. It is electrically connected.

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a Hφ1 line through which a current for exciting φ1 of the payout motor 584 flows, and the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is The current for exciting /φ1 of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the connector terminal as an H/φ1 line, and the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor has a current for exciting φ2 of the payout motor 584. It is electrically connected to the connector terminal as a flowing Hφ2 line, and the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the connector terminal as an H/φ2 line in which a current for exciting /φ2 of the payout motor 584 flows. It is connected to the.

The other ends of the resistors PR54 to PR57 are electrically connected to a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control output circuit 633ac. Specifically, the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end of a signal HPD0 for instructing start or stop of excitation of φ1 of the payout motor 584. As a transmission line, it is electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ1 D type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the φ1 output terminal of the payout motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR55, whose one end is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end as a line for transmitting a signal PPD1 which instructs the start/stop of excitation of the payout motor 584 to /φ1. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the /φ1 D type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the /φ1 D type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the /φ1 output terminal of the payout motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR56, whose one end is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end shown as a line for transmitting a signal called PPD2 for instructing start or stop of excitation of φ2 of the payout motor 584. Not electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the dispensing motor 584. The input terminal of the φ2 D type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal of the payout motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The other end of the resistor PR57, whose one end is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor, has the other end as a line for transmitting a signal PPD3 that instructs the start/stop of the excitation of the payout motor 584 to /φ2. It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the /φ2 D type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 (not shown). The input terminal of the /φ2 D type flip-flop of the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to the /φ2 output terminal of the payout motor 584 at a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the payout motor driving IC 633adb inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the payout motor drive IC 633adb is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the payout motor driving IC 633adb inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the payout motor drive IC 633adb is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The payout motor drive IC 633adb has four built-in diodes. The first and second diodes are arranged in a pair inside the package, and the third and fourth diodes are arranged in a pair inside the package. It is arranged.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. Is electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the payout motor driving IC 633adb inside the package. The cathode terminal 3 of the payout motor driving IC 633adb is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PD51.

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. Is electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the payout motor driving IC 633adb inside the package. The cathode terminal 10 of the payout motor driving IC 633adb is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PD52.

The first to fourth diodes convert the counter electromotive force generated when excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the payout motor 584 is stopped into heat to remove the first to fourth diodes. It protects the fourth NPN Darlington transistor.

The power supply line of MOTH+12V for supplying power to the payout motor 584 is electrically connected to φ3C (common) of the third pin and φ1C (common) of the fourth pin of the connector of the payout motor 584 through a terminal of the connector and wiring not shown. Connected to. The Hφ1 line in which a current for exciting φ1 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to φ6 of the sixth pin of the connector of the payout motor 584 through a terminal of the connector and a wire (not shown). The H/φ1 line in which a current for exciting /φ1 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to the second pin /φ1 of the connector of the payout motor 584 through a terminal of the connector and a wire (not shown). The Hφ2 line through which the current for exciting φ2 of the dispensing motor 584 flows is electrically connected to φ5 of the fifth pin of the connector of the dispensing motor 584 through a terminal of the connector and a wire (not shown). The H/φ2 line in which a current for exciting /φ2 of the payout motor 584 flows is electrically connected to /φ2 of the first pin of the connector of the payout motor 584 through a terminal of the connector and a wire (not shown).

When payout motor drive data HPD0 to HPD7, which is 8-bit information including HPD0 to HPD3 for instructing start or stop of excitation of φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the payout motor 584, is output from the payout control MPU 633aa. , D-type flip-flops corresponding to the above, and the respective resistors, and are input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12 of the payout motor drive IC 633 adb. When the system of the payout control board 633 is activated (when the payout control section power-on processing, which will be described later, is started), the payout motor driving IC 633adb turns on the payout control section power based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. Φ1, /φ1, φ2 of the payout motor 584 with the voltage switched to the operating voltage or the stop voltage by the voltage switching circuit 633ada according to the payout motor drive data HPD0 to HPD3 from the payout control MPU 633aa in the port output process of the process. , And /φ2 is applied.

Here, the operation of the voltage switching circuit 633ada will be briefly described. When the system of the payout control board 633 is activated (when the payout control unit power-on process (port output process) described later is started), the port output is performed. When the logic of the signal of voltage switching from the payout control MPU 633aa in the processing is output as the operating voltage logic, the transistor PTR50 is turned off, and the voltage of the power supply line MOTH+12V that supplies power to the payout motor 584 is generated by the field effect transistor PF50. By being pulled up to the +12V side, +12V as an operating voltage is supplied to the payout motor 584 as a power supply line of MOTH+12V via the poly switch PPS50. It should be noted that the power supply line of MOTH+12V is supplied to the +5 power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply substrate 630) via the diode PD50. Never.

On the other hand, when the logic of the signal for switching the voltage from the payout control MPU 633aa is output as the stop voltage logic that is the inversion of the operating voltage logic, the transistor PTR50 is turned on, and +12V due to the field effect transistor PF50 is generated. By being cut off, the voltage of the power supply line MOTH+12V that supplies power to the payout motor 584 is raised to the +5V side via the diode PD50, so that +5V is a stop voltage for the payout motor 584 via the poly switch PPS50. It is supplied as a power line of MOTH+12V.

Here, the difference in temperature rise due to the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stopping voltage will be briefly described. The power consumption W can be calculated by Ohm's law: voltage V×voltage V÷resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage +12V is 144/resistance R (voltage V squared/resistance R), and the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage +5V is 25/resistance R (voltage V squared/resistance R). R). Then, the power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage +12V is 5 times or more (5.76=144/25) as compared to the power consumption Ws due to the stop voltage +5V, so that the temperature rise is also about 5 times or more. Becomes The same applies to the payout motor 584.

In other words, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem due to the driving of the single power supply by the operating voltage +12V, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about 1/5 or less by the driving by the stop voltage +5V.

The package of the payout motor driving IC 633adb generates heat by the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2 of the payout motor 584, and φ1, φ2, /φ1, / of the payout motor 584. The heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert the counter electromotive force from φ2 into heat is absorbed, and the absorbed heat is released to the outside air (around the payout motor 584). Since the island equipment in the game hall is installed in a row in the back of other pachinko machines, the temperature inside the island equipment in the game hall is raised by the heat generated from the power board and various control boards of the pachinko machine.

Therefore, even if heat generated by the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes is absorbed by the package of the payout motor 584, the temperature around the payout motor 584, that is, the outside air becomes high. In this state, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air is reduced, so that heat is stored in the package of the payout motor 584. Then, if the package temperature of the payout motor 584 rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors may fail. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is driven to rotate the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584, the excitation of the payout motor 584 to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 is continuously performed as much as possible. When the discharge motor 584 is stopped from being excited to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2, and the discharge motor 584 is stopped to be excited to φ1, φ2, /φ1, /φ2. It is possible to reduce the number of times that the counter electromotive force generated in the above is converted into heat by the first to fourth diodes and removed. Thereby, the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to be small, which can contribute to the reduction in the temperature rise of the package of the payout motor 584. Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the voltage switching circuit 633ada does not use a relay but uses a semiconductor field effect transistor (FET) PF50. This is because the relay has a time lag and the performance of each relay varies widely. By using the field effect transistor (FET) PF50, the payout operation can be accurately controlled.

[11-2-2c. Poly switch]
Here, a poly switch will be described as the resettable fuse. The operating voltage or the stopping voltage is supplied to the payout motor 584 through the poly switch PPS50 as a power supply line of MOTH+12V. In the poly switch PPS50, in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature to generate heat in the main body, the heat lowers the conductivity, shuts off the current, and cools the main body. Conductivity returns and returns, and by utilizing this, it is possible to protect the payout motor 584 which is a load by limiting the current flowing to the payout motor 584 which is a load. A fuse may be used as a device for limiting the current to the load. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by fusing when an overcurrent flows, but it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent unauthorized persons from acquiring an illegal game ball by illegally modifying the important payout control board 633 which controls the payout operation of the game ball to the player. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is housed in a payout control board box 632 composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body, and the cover body and the base body are, for example, one-way parts of a caulking portion which is a sealing mechanism. It is crimped with screws. The caulking portion is a sealing mechanism and is provided in plural. The payout control board box 632 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like in the crimping portion using one sealing mechanism, and next, in order to open the payout control board box 632. The sealing mechanism needs to be destroyed. That is, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, a fuse is mounted on the payout control board 633, and if the fuse is blown, the crimp portion must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulking portion of the payout control board box 632 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so that the fuse cannot be replaced and the game is played. It will be in a state where you can not.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a poly switch is used as an element for limiting an overcurrent, similarly to the fuse. Thus, when an overcurrent flows through the poly switch, the current flowing to the load can be limited and the load can be protected by specifying the poly switch. That is, unlike the fuse, the poly switch itself is not destroyed due to overcurrent and does not need to be replaced. The payout motor drive IC 633adb that drives the payout motor 584, which is a load, can be protected and the caulking portion needs to be destroyed. There is no

The polyswitch PPS50 has a main body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a lead linear shape in which two leads project downward from the bottom surface. As described above, in the poly switch PPS50, in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from the specific temperature to generate heat in the main body, and the heat lowers the conductivity to cut off the current, When the body cools, it returns to conductivity and returns. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the poly switch PPS50, the two leads of the poly switch PPS50 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the surface where the thickness of the main body of the poly switch PPS50 is reduced becomes the vertical direction. The heat generated by the main body of the poly switch PPS50 is easily convected upward.

Since a large current flows through the poly switch PPS50, the vicinity of a connector having a terminal for supplying power to the payout motor 584, a terminal for exciting each phase (φ1, /φ1, φ2, /φ2) of the payout motor 584, etc. It is located in. This can contribute to reducing the influence of noise on the payout motor 584 due to the current with respect to other electronic components mounted on the payout control board 633.

Further, since the poly switch PPS50 can limit the current flowing to the payout motor 584, it is possible to protect the payout motor 584 from overheating.

Although the unipolar stepping motor is used in this embodiment, a bipolar stepping motor may be used instead. In this case, a poly switch is provided exclusively for each terminal to which motor power of +12 V and +5 V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

Further, in the present embodiment, the polyswitch adopted as the resettable fuse is a ceramic PT which is a PPTC (abbreviation of Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficient) such as a polymer PTC (abbreviation of Positive Temperature Coefficien) thermistor. Even if an element (abbreviation of Positive Temperature Coefficien) or a bimetal is adopted, the same effect as that of the poly switch described above can be obtained.

[11-3. Stage drive circuit]
+5V of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, +5V from the power supply creation circuit 630fa, +12V from the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb in the power supply board 630, +24V of the power creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, 630fc When +24V from the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635, the effect drive board 1720 is supplied via the +5V fuse SF5, the +12V fuse SF12, and the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510. Are supplied to the effect drive board 1720 and the subsequent boards such as each decorative board of the game board 5 through the +5V fuse EF5, the +12V fuse EF12, and the +24V fuse EF24 of the effect drive board 1720. These are the +5V power supply line, the +12V power supply line, and the +24V power supply line.

The +24V power supply line supplied via the +24V fuse EF24 of the production drive board 1720 is supplied to the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 which is the production control solenoid drive circuit, as described above, and the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720. As described above, the +12V power supply line supplied via is supplied to the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2, which is a production control motor drive circuit, and each decorative board of the game board 5. Here, as the circuit of the effect drive substrate 1720, first, the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 will be described, and the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 will be described.

[11-3-1. +24V driver circuit]
The +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 drives and controls the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5. As the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, the back provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 192, respectively. The front left drive solenoids 3717 (a total of three back front left drive solenoids 3717) and the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, 3810C in the back front right performance unit 3800 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 196, respectively. There is a back front right drive solenoid 3817 (a total of three back front right drive solenoids 3817) provided.

As shown in FIG. 222, the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 includes a front left drive solenoid 3717 (a total of 3 rear front drive solenoids 3717) provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, and 3710C in the back front left production unit 3700 of the back unit 3000. Driver IC 1720c1a1 for driving and controlling each of the back front left drive solenoids 3717) and the back front right drive solenoids provided in the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, 3810C in the back front right rendering unit 3800 of the back unit 3000, respectively. And a driver IC 1720c1a2 for driving and controlling each of the 3817 (a total of three back right drive solenoids 3817). Since the driver IC 1720c1a1 and the driver IC 1720c1a2 are the same circuit, the circuit of the driver IC 1720c1a1 will be described here, and the driver IC 1720c1a2 may be represented in parentheses after the reference numeral in the description of the driver IC 1720c1a1.

[11-3-1a. +24V driver IC]
The back front left drive solenoid 3717 (a total of three back front left drive solenoids 3717) provided in the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, 3710C in the back front left production unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, respectively. The back front right drive solenoids 3817 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817 in total) provided in the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, and 3810C in the back front right effect unit 3800 are powered by the pachinko machine 1. Then, the system of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (peripheral control section power-on processing described later is performed and peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing (motor and solenoid drive processing) described later is started), and a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is sometimes driven and not always driven. However, when driving the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, there is a possibility that the driver IC 1720c1a1 and the driver IC 1720c1a2 may malfunction or fail for some reason. Further, a mechanism for opening and closing a plurality of shutters 3732 of a shutter unit 3730 provided in each of the third back front left decorative body units 3710A, 3710B, 3710C in the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, and a back front right rendering of the back unit 3000. When the mechanism for opening and closing the plurality of shutters 3832 of the shutter unit 3830 provided in the third back front right decorative body units 3810A, 3810B, and 3810C in the unit 3800 becomes inoperable and becomes difficult to operate (difficult to operate), the three backs are separated. The front left drive solenoid 3717, the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, which are difficult to operate (difficult to operate) due to a malfunction, are overloaded and generate excessive heat, thereby driving the solenoids and the solenoids. There is a risk that the IC will malfunction or fail.

When such a defect or failure occurs, the back front left drive solenoid or the back back which has the failure or failure among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and the three driver ICs 1720c1a1 for driving and controlling the back front left drive solenoids 3717. The overcurrent flows to the driver IC that drives the front left drive solenoid, or the back or back of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 or the three back front right drive solenoids 3817 driver ICs 1720c1a2 that have malfunctions or failures occur. The potential of the +12V power supply line decreases due to overcurrent flowing to the driver IC that controls the driving of the front right drive solenoid and the back front right drive solenoid. Then, as described above, this +12V power supply line is +12V from the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and this +12V is the main board that constitutes the main board in addition to the production drive board 1720. Since the power is also supplied to the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, respectively, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The main control side power-off process performs main control side power-off process to stop the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process described later and pays out. Will be stopped (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the driver IC 1720c1a1 that controls the driving of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 has three back front left drive solenoids 3717 and three back front in the +24V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A fuse for shutting off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c1a1 that controls the drive of the left drive solenoid 3717 is provided. A fuse is provided to cut off an overcurrent flowing to the three front right drive solenoids 3817 and the driver IC 1720c1a2 that controls driving of the three front right drive solenoids 3817.

A fuse EF24a1 for +24V which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c1a1 that drives and controls the three front left drive solenoids 3717 (a +24V fuse that is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c1a2 that controls the drive three back right solenoids 3817) One end of the EF 24a2) is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. The other end of the +24V fuse EF24a1 (+24V fuse EF24a2) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes ED50 and ED51 (ED52, ED53), respectively, and the three front left drive solenoids 3717 (three Is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power line called SOLL+24V (SOLR+24V) for supplying power to the back right drive solenoid 3817).

The driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) has four NPN type Darlington transistors and four diodes which are formed in a chip and are incorporated in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER50 (ER53), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is The base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER51 (ER54), and is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER52 (ER55) to be the base of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR57 (MR67).

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is a back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710A among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Of the 3817, a third front front right decoration unit 3810A is provided with a front front right drive solenoid 3817) electrically connected to a connector terminal as a LU-SOL line (RU-SOL line) through which a current for exciting a coil flows. The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is a back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710B among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Of the 3817, a third front right decoration unit 3810B includes a front front right drive solenoid 3817) electrically connected to a connector terminal as an LC-SOL line (RC-SOL line) through which a current for exciting a coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) flows. The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is a back front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids) provided in the third back front left decoration unit 3710C among the three back front left drive solenoids 3717. Of the 3817, the third front front right decorative body unit 3810C is provided with a rear front right drive solenoid 3817) electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as an LL-SOL line (LL-SOL) in which a current for exciting a coil flows. ..

The other ends of the resistors ER50 to ER55 are electrically connected to a production drive input circuit (not shown) of the production drive board 1720, and a production drive input circuit (not shown) and a connector of the production drive board 1720, a production drive board 1720 and a peripheral control board. Wiring for electrically connecting the board to the board 1510 (electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a harness and a connector of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, one end is a first NPN type. The other end of the resistor ER50 (ER53) electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the Darlington transistor has the other front left drive solenoid provided in the third rear front left decoration unit 3710A among the three rear front left drive solenoids 3717. A signal of SPD0 (SPD3) is transmitted to instruct the start or stop of the excitation of the coil of 3717 (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration body unit 3810A among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817). Is electrically connected to an output terminal of a production drive input circuit (not shown) of the production drive board 1720. The input terminal of the production drive input circuit production drive input circuit is a predetermined one of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the output port.

To briefly explain the effect drive input circuit (not shown), the effect drive input circuit includes a main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 216 and a payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. It has the same circuit. The input terminal of the production drive input circuit is a +12V power supply line (power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 at one end, and the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720. +12V power supply line supplied via the first resistor (corresponding to the resistor MR2 of FIG. 216 and the resistor PR40 of FIG. 220) electrically connected to the other end of the first resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor (corresponding to the transistor MTR0 of FIG. 216 and the transistor PTR40 of FIG. 220) via the two resistors (corresponding to the resistor MR3 of FIG. 216 and the resistor PR41 of FIG. 220). ing. In addition to the second resistor, the base terminal of the transistor has a third resistor (resistor MR4 in FIG. 216, resistor PR42 in FIG. 220) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the performance drive substrate 1720. Is electrically connected to the other end. The emitter terminal of the transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the production drive substrate 1720. One end of the collector terminal of the transistor is a +5V power supply line (a power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and is supplied via the +5V fuse EF5 of the production drive board 1720. It is electrically connected to the other end of the fourth resistor (corresponding to the resistor MR5 in FIG. 216 and the resistor PR43 in FIG. 220) electrically connected to the supplied +5V power source line) and is also shown in FIG. 213. The non-inverting buffer IC configuring the input buffer circuit 1720a (the non-inverting buffer IC includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the non-inverting buffer circuits A can be inverted. It is shaped and output without any output.) (corresponding to the MIC 10 in FIG. 216 and the PIC 40 in FIG. 220). The output terminal of the non-inverting buffer circuit A of the non-inverting buffer IC that constitutes this input buffer circuit 1720a becomes the output terminal of the effect drive input circuit.

The other end of the resistor ER51 (ER54) whose one end is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor has the other end of the three front left drive solenoids 3717, which is the third front left decoration unit 3710B. SPD1 for instructing the start or stop of the excitation of the coil of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (the back front right drive solenoid 3817 of the third back front right decoration unit 3810B among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) A line for transmitting a signal (SPD4) is electrically connected to an output terminal of a production drive input circuit (not shown) of the production drive board 1720. The input terminal of this effect drive input circuit is electrically connected to the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

The other end of the resistor ER52 (ER55), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor, has the other end of the three front left drive solenoids 3717, which is the third front left decoration unit 3710C. SPD2 for instructing to start or stop the excitation of the coil of the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (back back right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810C among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) A line for transmitting a signal (SPD5) is electrically connected to an output terminal of a production drive input circuit (not shown) of the production drive board 1720. The input terminal of this effect drive input circuit is electrically connected to the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

The lines for transmitting the signals SPD0 to SPD5 are separate lines, and are electrically connected to the output terminals of predetermined output ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, that is, different output terminals. ..

The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the ground (GND), while the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor is connected to the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2). ) Is not connected to the outside.

The driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) has four built-in diodes. The first and second diodes are arranged in a pair in the package, and the third and fourth diodes are arranged in a package. It is located inside.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor. And the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The cathode terminal 3 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED50.

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. Is electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) inside the package. The cathode terminal 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED51.

Of the first to fourth diodes, the first to third diodes are used when the excitation of the three back-front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back-front right drive solenoids 3817) to the coils is stopped. By converting the generated back electromotive force into heat and removing it, the first to third NPN type Darlington transistors are protected.

The power line called SOLL+24V (SOLR+24V) that supplies power to the three back-front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back-front right drive solenoids 3817) is connected to the terminals of the connector and each wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to each connector of the front left drive solenoid 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817). Out of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration body unit 3710A (of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the third back front right decoration body unit 3810A The LU-SOL line (RU-SOL line) through which the current for exciting the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) flows is provided as the first of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 via the terminals of the connector and wiring not shown. Three back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in front back left decorative body unit 3710A (back front right drive solenoid 3817 provided in third back front right decorative body unit 3810A among three back front right drive solenoids 3817) connector and electricity Connected. Out of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration body unit 3710B (of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, the third back front right decoration body unit 3810B The LC-SOL line (RC-SOL line) through which the current for exciting the coil of the back front right drive solenoid 3817) flows is the first of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 via a terminal of the connector and wiring not shown. (3) Back front left drive solenoid 3717 (back back right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right drive unit 3810B among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) connector and electric Connected. Out of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 provided in the third back front left decoration body unit 3710C (of the three back front right drive solenoids 3817, The LL-SOL line (RL-SOL line) through which a current for exciting the coil of the back-front right drive solenoid 3817) flows is provided as the first of the three back-front left drive solenoids 3717 via a terminal of the connector and wiring not shown. Three back front left drive solenoids 3717 provided in the back front left decoration unit 3710C (back back right drive solenoid 3817 provided in the third back front right decoration unit 3810C among the three back front right drive solenoids 3817) Second attacker solenoid It is electrically connected to the connector of 2612.

Whether the system of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (peripheral control unit power-on process described later is performed and peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process (motor and solenoid drive process) described later is started) and predetermined conditions are satisfied Depending on whether or not the motor/solenoid drive processing is performed, the information of SPD0 to SPD5 is used to instruct the start and stop of the excitation of the coils of the three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817). When certain drive solenoid drive data SPD0 to SPD5 is output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the driver IC 1720c1a1 (via the corresponding effect drive input circuit (not shown) of the above-described effect drive board 1720 and each resistor. It is input to the base terminals 1, 5 and 8 of the driver IC 1720c1a2), respectively. The driver IC 1720c1a1 (driver IC 1720c1a2) has three back front left drive solenoids 3717 (three back front right drive solenoids 3817) according to drive solenoid drive data SPD0 to SPD5 from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. A current is applied to excite the coil.

[11-3-1b. Arrangement of fuses provided in +24V driver IC]
In the case where the fuse EF24a1 for +24V, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c1a1, generates a large current called an overcurrent to the three back-front left drive solenoids 3717 and the driver ICs 1720c1a1 that drive the three back-front left drive solenoids 3717 and generate heat. Therefore, there is a connector near the driver IC 1720c1a1 (in particular, near the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a1) or the above-mentioned power supply line of SOLL+24V, LU-SOL line, LC-SOL line, and LC-SOL line. It is preferable to be arranged in the vicinity (in particular, in the vicinity of a connector of a terminal to which a power supply line of SOLL+24V is connected). Further, the +24V fuse EF24a2, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c1a2, generates a large current called an overcurrent to the three back-front right drive solenoids 3817 and the driver ICs 1720c1a2 that drive the three back-front right drive solenoids 3817 to generate heat. In some cases, it is connected in the vicinity of the driver IC 1720c1a2 (in particular, in the vicinity of the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the driver IC 1720c1a2) or the above-mentioned SOLR+24V power supply line, RU-SOL line, RC-SOL line, RC-SOL line. It is preferably arranged near the connector (in particular, near the connector of the terminal to which the power supply line of SOLR+24V is connected).

[11-3-2. +12V system driver circuit]
The +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 drives and controls the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. As a +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, a rear drive motor 3126 in the rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 137(a) and 137(b), and FIG. 158(a). 158. The back lower left drive motor 3205 in the back lower left production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 158, the back lower right drive motor 3255 in the back lower right production unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. b) The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 in the lower back middle production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 162B, and the lower back middle production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 162A. 1703 (a) and (b) shown in FIGS. 170(a) and 170(b), the lower back middle up/down drive motor 3352, the back front rotation drive motor 3425 in the back production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 170(a) and 170(b). The back-up/down drive motor 3429 in the back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back-up/down rotation drive motor 3454 of the back-up lift decorative body unit 3450 in the back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 178(b) of the back unit 3000 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 178 (a), the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 of the back rear left decoration body unit 3520 in the back unit left production unit 3500. A back-rear left up/down drive motor 3554 in the back-rear left effect unit 3500, a back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625 of a back-rear right ornamental unit 3620 in a back-rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 185(b), There is a rear rear right up/down drive motor 3654 in the rear rear right production unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 shown in FIGS. 185(a) and 185(b), and there are a total of 12 drive motors (hereinafter, referred to as "game board 5 side"). Drive motor").

As shown in FIG. 223, the +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 drives and controls the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear rear drive motor 3126 and the rear lower left drive motor 3205, corresponding to each of the drive motors on the game board 5 side. Driver IC 1720c2a2, driver IC 1720c2a3 that drives and controls the lower back right drive motor 3255, driver IC 1720c2a4 that drives and controls the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, driver IC 1720c2a5 that drives and controls the lower back middle lift drive motor 3352, and back A driver IC 1720c2a6 that drives and controls the upper front rotation drive motor 3425, a driver IC 1720c2a7 that drives and controls the back up and down drive motor 3429, a driver IC 1720c2a8 that drives and controls the back and up rear rotation drive motor 3454, and a back and left rotation drive motor 3525. Driver IC 1720c2a9 for driving and controlling the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554, driver IC 1720c2a10 for controlling the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, driver IC 1720c2a11 for controlling the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, and driver for controlling the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 IC1720c2a12. Since the twelve driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 in total are the same circuit, the circuit of the driver IC 1720c2a1 will be mainly described here, and the description of the driver ICs 1720c2a2 to 2720c2a12 may be omitted.

[11-3-2a. +12V driver IC]
As for the drive motor on the game board 5 side, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the system of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (peripheral control unit power-on process described later is performed and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process (motor And the solenoid drive process) is started) and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the drive is not always performed. However, while the drive motor on the game board 5 side is being driven, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 may malfunction or fail for some reason, and a mechanism operated by the drive motor on the game board 5 side. When trouble occurs in the drive motor on the game board 5 side and becomes difficult to operate, the drive motor that has become difficult to operate due to a trouble is overloaded and excessively heats up. There is a possibility that the driver IC to be driven may malfunction or fail.

When such a defect or failure occurs, the drive motor or the drive motor in which the failure or the failure has occurred among the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive-control the drive motor on the game board 5 side or the drive motor on the game board 5 side is drive-controlled. When the overcurrent flows to the driver IC, the potential of the +12V power supply line drops. Then, as described above, this +12V power supply line is +12V from the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and this +12V is the main board that constitutes the main board in addition to the production drive board 1720. Since the power is also supplied to the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, respectively, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a will be described later. The main control side power-off process performs main control side power-off process to stop the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process described later and pays out. Will be stopped (operation of paying out game balls as prize balls).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive and control the drive motors on the game board 5 side include the drive motors on the game board 5 side and the drive motors on the game board 5 side in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. Fuses for cutting off the overcurrent flowing to the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 for controlling the driving of the respective are provided.

Specifically, the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear rear drive motor 3126 includes an overcurrent that flows to the rear rear drive motor 3126 and the driver IC 1720c2a1 that controls the rear rear drive motor 3126 in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. There is provided a +12V fuse EF12a1 for cutting off the lower back left drive motor 3205, and the driver IC 1720c2a2 for controlling the lower back drive motor 3205 includes the lower back left drive motor 3205 and the lower back left drive motor 3205 in the +12V power line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a2 for shutting off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a2 for driving control is provided, and a driver IC 1720c2a3 for driving and controlling the lower back right driving motor 3255 includes a lower back right driving motor for the +12V power supply line of the production driving board 1720. A fuse EF12a3 for +12V that cuts off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a3 that controls the drive of the 3255 and the lower back right drive motor 3255 is provided, and the driver IC 1720c2a4 that controls the drive of the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 includes the effect drive substrate 1720. There is provided a +12V fuse EF12a4 for shutting off an overcurrent flowing to a driver circuit 1720c2a4 that drives and controls the under-rear intermediate rotation drive motor 3333 and the under-rear intermediate rotation drive motor 3333 in the +12V power supply line.

In addition, the driver IC 1720c2a5 that drives and controls the under-bottom middle up-and-down drive motor 3352 includes the driver IC 1720c2a5 that drives and controls the under-under-bottom mid-up and down drive motor 3352 in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a5 for shutting off an overcurrent that flows is provided, and a driver IC 1720c2a6 that drives and controls a back rotation drive motor 3425 for the back drive in the +12V power line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a6 that shuts off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a6 that drives and controls the front rotation drive motor 3425 is provided. A +12V fuse EF12a7 for shutting off an overcurrent flowing to the back up/down lift drive motor 3429 and the driver IC 1720c2a7 for driving and controlling the back up/down lift drive motor 3429 is provided, and the driver IC 1720c2a8 for driving and controlling the back up/down rear rotation drive motor 3454 is provided. A +12V fuse EF12a8 is provided in the +12V power supply line of the performance drive board 1720 to shut off an overcurrent flowing to the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 and the driver IC 1720c2a8 that drives and controls the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454.

In addition, the driver IC 1720c2a9 that drives and controls the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, to the driver IC 1720c2a9 that drives and controls the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a9 for shutting off an overcurrent that flows is provided, and a driver IC 1720c2a10 that drives and controls a rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 includes a rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 and a rear rear drive motor 3554 in the +12V power line of the production drive board 1720. A +12V fuse EF12a10 that shuts off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a10 that drives and controls the left lift drive motor 3554 is provided, and a driver IC 1720c2a11 that drives and controls the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625 has a +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. A driver for controlling the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 provided with a +12V fuse EF12a11 for shutting off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a11 for driving and controlling the rear rear right rotation driving motor 3625 and the rear rear right rotation driving motor 3625. The IC 1720c2a12 is provided with a +12V fuse EF12a12 that shuts off an overcurrent flowing to the driver IC 1720c2a12 that drives and controls the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the +12V power supply line of the production drive board 1720. There is.

One end of the +12V fuse EF12a1, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the back-and-back drive motor 3126, is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The other end of the +12V fuse EF12a1 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED60 and also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line of MOT1+12V for supplying power to the rear drive motor 3126. One end of the +12V fuse EF12a2, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c2a9 that drives and controls the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The other end of the +12V fuse EF12a2 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED61 and also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line of MOT2+12V for supplying power to the rear left rotation drive motor 3525. R. The driver IC 1720c2a3 to the driver IC 1720c2a11 have the same circuit configuration, and one end of the +12V fuse EF12a12, which is a fuse provided in the driver IC 1720c2a12 that drives and controls the rear rear right lift drive motor 3654, is electrically connected to the +12V power line. There is. The other end of the +12V fuse EF12a12 is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED71 and also electrically connected to the terminal of the connector as a power supply line MOT12+12V for supplying power to the rear right drive motor 3654. R.

Each of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 includes a 4-channel low-side driver, an overcurrent protection unit, a short-circuit protection unit, a thermal shutdown unit, a low voltage lockout unit, a diode that clamps a turn-off transient voltage generated by an inductive load, and a serial interface. The first stage driver IC 1720c2a1 to the last stage driver IC 1720c2a12 are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 indicate information by the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current state), information by the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating the presence or absence of a short circuit), and information by the thermal shutdown (indicating the state of being shut down due to overheating). The status information) and the information by the low voltage lockout section (status information indicating a standby state when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage) can be read via the serial interface.

The terminals 14 (SDATIN terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are serial data input terminals, and the 15 terminals (SDATOUT) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are serial data output terminals. The drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, electrically connects the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance drive board 1720 ( Harness), the connector of the production drive board 1720, the above-mentioned production drive input circuit (not shown), and the resistor ER60, first, when input to the terminal 14 of the driver IC 1720C2a1 in the first stage, drive motor drive for serial data from the 15th terminal. The data signal SDAT is output and input to the terminal 14 of the driver IC 1720c2a2, which is the subsequent stage of the driver IC 1720c2a1 of the initial stage, via the resistor ER64.

The driver IC 1720c2a2 outputs the drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data, from its 15 terminal to the driver IC 1720c2a3, which is a driver IC in the subsequent stage. Then, the drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data output from the 15 terminal of the driver IC 1720c2a11, which is the driver immediately before the driver IC 1720c2a12, which is the last driver, is output to the latter stage via the resistor ER82. It is input to the terminal 14 of the driver IC 1720c2a12 of the stage. In this way, the drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data, is sent from the first-stage driver IC 1720C2a1 to the final-stage driver IC 1720C2a12 that are electrically connected in a daisy chain.

Since the driver IC 1720c2a12 is the final stage driver IC, there is no subsequent stage driver IC. Therefore, the terminal 15 (SDATOUT) of the driver IC 1720c2a12 at the final stage is not connected to the outside.

Further, in the drive motor drive data signal SDAT which is serial data from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the drive data for driving the drive motor of the game board 5, the inside of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 There is a command (status information acquisition data) for checking the status by status information. The status information includes information by the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current state), information by the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating the presence/absence of a short circuit), information by thermal shutdown (status indicating the state of shutting down due to overheating). Information) and information by the low voltage lockout unit (status information indicating a standby state when the input voltage is lower than a predetermined voltage). The driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 output status information as serial data from a terminal 16 (FAULT) described later.

The terminals 13 (SCLK terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are serial clock signal input terminals. The drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, electrically connects the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance drive board 1720 ( Harness), and input to the production drive board 1720 via the connector of the production drive board 1720. The drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is the serial clock signal input to the production drive board 1720, is branched toward the terminal 13 of the driver IC 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 via the production drive input circuit (not shown) described above. For example, the drive motor clock signal SCLK, which is a serial clock signal branched via a production drive input circuit (not shown), is input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC 1720c2a1 via the resistor ER61, and the terminal of the driver IC 1720c2a2 via the resistor ER64. 13 is input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC 1720c2a12 via the resistor ER83. That is, the terminals 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are electrically connected in parallel, unlike the terminals 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 to which serial data connected in a daisy chain that is electrically connected is input.

The resistors ER60 to ER83 function as damping resistors that reduce the reflection of signals on the path for transmitting the drive motor drive data signal SDAT that is serial data. This is because among the input terminals of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, the terminals 13 and 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are terminals to which signals relating to serial communication are input, and the signal transmission speed is faster than other input terminals. Is. It should be noted that there is no problem even if a damping resistor is provided to the other input terminals, which will be described later, such as a terminal 11 (LATCH terminal) and a terminal 8 (ENBL terminal). For example, in the case where a collective resistor (resistor array) is commonly used by a plurality of substrates, when the terminals 13 and 14 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are respectively mounted with surface mounting type resistors (SMD type resistors). Compared with, the number of parts is reduced, and when a collective resistor (resistor array) is used, it may be superior in terms of mounting density.

The terminals 11 (LATCH terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are latch signal input terminals. A wiring (harness) for electrically connecting the drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, between the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and between the peripheral control board 1510 and the production drive board 1720. ), and input to the production drive board 1720 via the connector of the production drive board 1720. The drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is the latch signal input to the production drive board 1720, is branched toward the terminal 11 of the driver IC 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 via the production drive input circuit (not shown) described above.

The terminals 8 (ENBL terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are enable signal input terminals, and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the production drive board 1720 in this embodiment. Although the terminals 8 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are internally pulled down, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the production driving board 1720, so that the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are connected. When the drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal, is input to the terminal 11 of the driver IC and the logic thereof is the acquisition permission logic (for example, HI), the drive signal which is the clock signal input to the terminal 13 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12. Based on the motor clock signal SCLK, the drive motor drive data signal SDAT, which is serial data input to the terminal 14 of the driver IC 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, is captured, and the captured serial data is converted into parallel data, which will be described later. Output from 3, 4, 6, 7. On the other hand, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 receive the drive motor latch signal SLAT, which is a latch signal, at the terminal 11 of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, and the logic thereof is the acquisition non-permission logic (for example, LOW). The drive motor drive data signal SDAT which is the serial data input to the terminal 14 of the driver IC 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 based on the drive motor clock signal SCLK which is the clock signal input to the terminal 13 of the driver IC 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is not captured. , The current output state is maintained (that is, the state in which the data is previously captured, converted, and output from the output terminals 3, 4, 6, 7 is maintained).

The terminals 9 (RESET terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are reset signal input terminals, and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the production drive board 1720 in this embodiment. By electrically connecting the reset signal input terminal to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the performance drive board 1720, the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are unintentionally operated by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 due to disturbance such as noise. It also prevents it from being reset.

The terminals 5 (GND terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are ground terminals, and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the production drive board 1720.

The terminal 1 (VM terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is a power input terminal, and is a connector of the peripheral control board 1510, a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the peripheral control board 1510 and the board of the effect drive board 1720, +12V fuse EF12a1 which is a fuse provided on the driver IC 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 while being electrically connected to the +12V power supply line supplied through the connector of the production drive substrate 1570 and the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive substrate 1720. It is also electrically connected to one end of the EF 12a12. The other ends of the +12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12, which are fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, are electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes ED60 to ED71, respectively, as described above, and the game board 5 is also used. The power supply lines MOT1+12V to MOT12+12 for supplying power to the side drive motors are electrically connected to the terminals of the connector.

The terminals 2 (VCLAMP terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are output terminals that output a clamp voltage, and are electrically connected to the cathode terminals of the Zener diodes ED60 to ED71, respectively.

The terminal 3 (OUT1 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal to the load 1, and serves as a connector terminal as MOT1-A to MOT12-A in which a current for exciting the A phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. It is electrically connected.

The terminal 4 (OUT2 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal to the load 2, and serves as a connector terminal as MOT1-B to MOT12-B in which a current for exciting the B phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. It is electrically connected.

The terminal 6 (OUT3 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal to the load 3, and is a connector as MOT1-/A to MOT12-/A in which a current for exciting the /A phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. Is electrically connected to the terminal.

The terminal 7 (OUT4 terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 is an output terminal to the load 4, and is a connector as MOT1-/B to MOT12-/B in which a current for exciting the /B phase of the drive motor on the game board 5 side flows. It is electrically connected to the terminal.

The terminals 10 (NC terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are not connected to the outside.

The terminals 10 (NC terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are not connected to the outside.

The terminals 16 (FAULT terminals) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 are serial data output terminals, and information by the overcurrent protection unit (status information indicating the current state), information by the short circuit protection unit (status information indicating the presence or absence of a short circuit), Status information that includes information due to thermal shutdown (status information indicating the status of shutdown due to overheating) and information from the low voltage lockout section (status information indicating the standby status when the input voltage drops below a predetermined voltage) Are output as error signals 1 to 12 which are serial data. The error signals 1 to 12, which are serial data output from the terminal 16 (FAULT terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, are input to a logical sum circuit (OR circuit) by the logic circuit 1720c2b of the production drive board 1720 and calculated. The calculation result is serial data, and a driver circuit error signal is used to electrically produce a production drive output circuit (not shown) of the production drive board 1720, a connector of the production drive board 1720, and a board between the production drive board 1720 and the peripheral control board 1510. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness) to be connected and the connector of the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a driver circuit error signal, which is serial data, via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Since the error signal 1 to the error signal 12 are calculated by the logical sum circuit (OR circuit) of the logic circuit 1720c2b of the production drive board 1720 as described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a indicates the status included in the driver circuit error signal. Based on the information, it is not possible to individually determine which of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the production driving board 1720 is the status information, but the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the production driving board 1720 are assigned to the driver IC group. It is possible to determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred, and various effect devices (various LEDs and effect display device 1600) provided in the game board 5 for error notification and various effect devices provided in the door frame 3 (various LEDs and effect operation). It can be performed by controlling the button unit 360).

In the present embodiment, since the error signal 1 to the error signal 12 are calculated by the logical sum circuit (OR circuit) by the logic circuit 1720c2b of the production drive substrate 1720 as described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a is Based on the status information included in the circuit error signal, it is not possible to individually determine which of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the production drive board 1720 is the status information, but instead of this, the error signal A circuit configuration that allows 1 to the error signal 12 to be input to the peripheral control IC 1510a may be adopted. In this way, on the basis of the status information included in the driver circuit error signal, the status information and the driver IC of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 of the production drive board 1720 can be associated and grasped, so which driver IC is selected. It is possible to determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred.

[11-3-2b. Arrangement of fuses provided in +12V driver IC]
The +12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12, which are fuses provided in the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12, may generate heat due to a large current, which is an overcurrent, flowing to the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12 that drive the drive motor on the game board 5 side. ˜1720c2a12 (in particular, near the terminal 1 (VM terminal) and terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of the driver ICs 1720c2a1 to 1720c2a12) or the above-mentioned power supply line MOT1+12V to MOT12+12V, MOT1-A line to MOT12-A line, MOT1- B line to MOT12-B line, MOT1-/A line to MOT12-/A line, MOT1-/B line to MOT12-/B line vicinity (particularly, MOT1+12V to MOT12+12V power line is connected) It is preferable to be arranged in the vicinity of the connector of the terminal).

[11-3-3. Copper foil surface on the surface of the board (fuse mounting surface) on which the fuse is mounted]
The copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the fuse is mounted will be described. As the fuses, the +5V fuse SF5 of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V fuse SF12 of the peripheral control board 1510, the +24V fuse SF24 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the control power supply fuse SF3 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 213 are shown. , +12V fuses PF12, PF12a1, PF12a2 of the effect display device 1600, +5V fuse EF5 of the effect drive board 1720, +12V fuse EF12 of the effect drive board 1720, +12V system driver circuit 1720c2 of the effect drive board 1720 (fuses provided ( (+12V fuses EF12a1 to EF12a12 shown in FIG. 223), +24V fuse EF24 of the performance drive board 1720, and fuses provided in the +24V system driver circuit 1720c1 of the performance drive board 1720 (+24V fuses EF24a1 and EF24a2 shown in FIG. 223). In addition to the +12V fuse DF12 of each decorative board of the game board 5, there are a +12V fuse, a +24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3, a +12V fuse of each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the like.

A surface mount type (so-called SMD type) fuse is adopted as each of these fuses in the present embodiment, and is mounted on the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of each board. Among the fuses provided in the +12V fuse EF12 of the production drive board 1720 and the +12V system driver IC 1720c2 of the production drive board 1720, the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear drive motor 3126 is mounted. The copper foil surface on the front surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the drive substrate 1720 will be described, and a method of selecting each fuse will be described.

[11-3-3a. Copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the production drive board on which the +12V fuse is mounted]
As shown in FIG. 224(a), the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive substrate 1720 on which the +12V fuse EF1 is mounted is a circular shape for inserting each terminal (lead type connector) of the connector. A plurality of connector soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") having the above are arranged in two rows along the vertical direction. Among the copper foils for soldering a plurality of connectors, the power source terminals are allocated to the uppermost left side of the first terminal and the right side of the second terminal. A terminal for GND (a terminal for ground) is assigned to the 4th terminal below, and a control signal is assigned to other terminals not shown. The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the performance drive board 1720 is long in the vertical direction for mounting the +12V fuse EF12 in the vicinity of the second terminal allocated as the power supply terminal among the plurality of connector soldering copper foils. Of the pair of rectangular copper foils for fuse soldering EF12xpa, EF12xpb (so-called "pads"), the copper foil EF12xpa for fuse soldering on the connector side is formed so as to be arranged. A connector-side wiring pattern 1720xpa for electrically connecting the land of the second terminal and the fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpa is formed.

The connector is inserted into the connector soldering copper foil and soldered on the rear surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the performance drive board 1720, and the pair of terminals of the +12V fuse EF12 has a pair of fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpa. , EF12xpb and soldered, the longitudinal direction of the connector and the longitudinal direction of the +12V fuse EF12 are arranged perpendicular to each other.

Among the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa and EF12xpb, a plurality of through holes EF12t are formed in three rows in the vertical direction near the fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpb which is separated from the connector. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension of the through holes EF12t formed in a plurality in three rows are compared with the vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension of the fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpb. Both are about twice as big. This through hole EF12t is electrically connected by both sides (holes (copper-plated holes) penetrating both surfaces (front surface (fuse mounting surface) and back surface (fuse non-mounting surface)) of the performance drive board 1720, On the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the performance drive board 1720, a copper foil area having a rectangular shape (not shown) covering the through hole EF12t at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12t is provided in another area (the back surface of the performance drive board 1720 ( It is formed as an island that is not electrically connected to the area (copper foil area formed on the fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y.

The front surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the performance drive board 1720 electrically connects the fuse soldering copper foil EF12xpb and the through hole EF12t, which are separated from the connector, of the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa and EF12xpb. A subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb for connecting and supplying a +12V power source line to a plurality of electronic components (not shown) and subsequent substrates (each decorative substrate of the game board 5) which are connected to each other is formed.

The line width Pw2 of the succeeding side wiring pattern 1720xpb is larger than the line width Pw1 of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa, and is formed to be about twice as large in this embodiment. The copper foil for connector soldering to which the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa is electrically connected is formed by being arranged close to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions, so it is difficult to increase the line width of the wiring pattern. If the wiring pattern in which the current that supplies the line flows is drawn around the effect drive substrate 1720 with a thin line, the wiring pattern may be burned out within the capacitance selected for the +12V fuse EF12. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to secure a large line width Pw1 of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa. The +12V fuse EF12 is arranged in the vicinity of the second terminal allocated as the power supply terminal.

The +12V fuse EF12 must not be blown by the inrush current when the power is turned on or the use of the normal steady current, but it must be blown by the overcurrent. The reason for providing the through hole EF12t is that the current on the subsequent side wiring pattern 1720xpb flows through the +12V power supply line, so the temperature rises. And the copper foil region having the above-described rectangular shape (not shown) formed on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the performance drive board 1720 increases the surface area for cooling.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the performance drive board 1720 is coated with a resist liquid of a predetermined color except for the connector soldering copper foil, the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa, EF12xpb, and the through hole EF12t. The direction of the electronic component, the component number, the pin number, etc. are printed by silk printing with a predetermined color paint. The color of the resist liquid and the color of the paint are, for example, white, yellow, green, black, red, blue, and the like, and they are used in appropriate combination.

[11-3-3b. Copper foil surface on the surface (fuse mounting surface) side of the performance drive board on which the fuse provided in the +12V driver IC is mounted]
Of the fuses provided in the +12V system driver IC 1720c2 of the performance drive board 1720, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the performance drive board 1720 on which the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 that drives and controls the rear drive motor 3126 is mounted is: As shown in FIG. 224(b), the branched wiring pattern 1720xpc branched from the subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb for supplying the +12V power supply line has a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction for mounting the fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1. The branch side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa of the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb (so-called "pad") is formed so as to be arranged, and the branch side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa is formed. And a VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd that electrically connects the terminal 1 (VM terminal) of the driver IC 1720c2a1 and a VM terminal copper foil VMp (so-called “pad”) having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. Are formed. In addition to the VM terminal and VCLAMP terminal of the driver IC 1720c2a1, on the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the production drive board 1720, wiring copper foil for each terminal (so-called “pad”) is provided even if it corresponds to other terminals. Each is formed.

Further, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the performance drive board 1720 has a VCLAMP terminal copper foil VCLAMPp (so-called “pad”) having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction on which the terminal 2 (VCLAMP terminal) of the driver IC 1720c2a1 is mounted. And an anode terminal copper foil ED60ap (so-called "pad") having a vertically long rectangular shape on which the anode terminal of the Zener diode ED60 is mounted, a VCLAMP terminal copper foil VCLAMPp, and an anode terminal copper foil ED60ap. VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe that is electrically connected thereto is formed. The line width of the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe is the same as the line width of the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd.

Also, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the performance drive board 1720 is separated from the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc of the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12a1xpa, EF12a1xpb (that is, electrically connected to the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc. The branch side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa and the other) The fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpb is formed in the vicinity of the fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpb in a plurality of through holes EF12a1t arranged in two rows in the left-right direction. The horizontal distance dimension and the vertical distance dimension of the through holes EF12a1t formed in a plurality in line with each other are about about both compared with the horizontal distance dimension and the vertical distance dimension of the fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpb. It's about one size bigger. The through-holes EF12a1t are electrically connected to each other by the holes (holes plated with copper) penetrating both surfaces (front surface (fuse mounting surface) and back surface (fuse non-mounting surface)) of the production drive board 1720. On the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the performance drive board 1720, a copper foil region having a rectangular shape (not shown) covering the through hole EF12a1t at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12a1t (through at a position corresponding to the above-described through hole EF12t is formed). A copper foil area different from the copper foil area having a rectangular shape (not shown) covering the hole EF12t is electrically connected to another area (a copper foil area formed on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the performance drive board 1720). It is formed as an unconnected island.

The surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the performance drive board 1720 is separated from the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc in the pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12a1xpa and EF12a1xpb (that is, the branch electrically connected to the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc. Side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa and the other) The fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpb, the through hole EF12a1t, and the cathode terminal copper foil having a vertically long rectangular shape in which the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ED60 is mounted. To electrically connect the ED 60 kp (so-called "pad") to the VCLAMP terminal copper foil VCLAMPp and the anode terminal copper foil ED60ap to supply a power supply line MOT1+12V for supplying power to the rear drive motor 3126. Motor side wiring pattern 1720xpf is formed.

The pair of terminals of the fuse EF12a1 for +12V provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 are placed and soldered on the pair of copper foils EF12a1xpa, EF12a1xpb for fuse soldering, respectively, and the anode and cathode terminals of the Zener diode ED60 are copper for anode terminals. When placed and soldered on the foil ED60ap and the cathode terminal copper foil ED60kp, the longitudinal direction of the +12V fuse EF12a1 and the longitudinal direction of the Zener diode ED60 are arranged perpendicular to each other.

As described above, the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc is a branch from the above-mentioned subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb that supplies the +12V power supply line, and its line width Pa1w1 is compared with the above-described subsequent wiring pattern 1720xpb line width Pw2. Although it is small, it is formed larger than the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the branch-side fuse soldering copper foil EF12a1xpa. The line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc may be larger, the same as or smaller than the line width of the connector side wiring pattern 1720xpa described above, but the line width of the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd may be larger. The width is larger than the line width of the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe. Although the line width of the VM terminal wiring pattern 1720xpd is the same as the line width of the VCLAMP terminal wiring pattern 1720xpe, it is formed thinner than the line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc.

The line width Pa1w2 of the motor side wiring pattern 1720xpf is larger than the line width Pa1w1 of the branch wiring pattern 1720xpc, and is formed to be about 1.5 times larger in this embodiment. The wiring width of the motor side wiring pattern 1720xpf is thicker than that of the wiring pattern 1720xpd for the VM terminal and the wiring pattern 1720xpe for the VCLAMP terminal to which the +12V power supply line is supplied. This is because the pattern 1720xpf supplies a power supply line of MOT1+12V that supplies power to the rear drive motor 3126, and a large amount of current flows.

It should be noted that the +12V fuse EF12a1 provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 should not be blown by the inrush current when the power is turned on or the use of the normal steady current, but it should be blown by the overcurrent. The reason for providing the through hole EF12a1t is that the motor side wiring pattern 1720xpf is provided in the driver IC 1720c2a1 although the temperature rises because the current of the power supply line MOT1+12V that supplies power to the rear drive motor 3126 flows. In order to prevent the +12V fuse EF12a1 from being blown out, a through hole that is plated with copper and a copper foil region (not shown) formed on the back surface (fuse non-mounting surface) 1720y of the production drive substrate 1720 and having the above-described rectangular shape (described above) The copper foil area different from the copper foil area having a rectangular shape (not shown) covering the through hole EF12t at a position corresponding to the through hole EF12t) increases the surface area for cooling.

In addition, the surface (fuse mounting surface) 1720x of the performance drive board 1720 is used for a pair of fuse solder in addition to the above-mentioned connector soldering copper foil, a pair of fuse soldering copper foils EF12xpa, EF12xpb, and a through hole EF12t. Copper foils EF12a1xpa, EF12a1xpb, through holes EF12a1t, anode terminal copper foil ED60ap, cathode terminal copper foil ED60kp, VM terminal copper foil VMp, VCLAMP terminal copper foil VCLAMPp, wiring copper foil for each terminal Color resist liquid is applied, and the orientation of electronic components, component numbers, pin numbers, etc. are printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color. The color of the resist liquid and the color of the paint are, for example, white, yellow, green, black, red, blue, and the like, and they are used in appropriate combination.

[11-3-3c. How to select the capacity of each fuse]
Here, a method of selecting each fuse will be briefly described. The fuse must not be blown by the inrush current when the power is turned on or the use of normal steady current, but it must be blown by the overcurrent. However, due to the mounting density of other electronic components around the fuse, the density of other electronic components around the fuse is densely packed. Compared with the low density mounting state, the temperature of the fuse itself is higher in the high mounting density state than in the low mounting density state even if the temperature around the fuse is the same. Become. Therefore, it is preferable that the capacity of each fuse is selected based on the temperature at the pair of terminals of each fuse in addition to the ambient temperature of each fuse. Therefore, in this embodiment, in addition to the ambient temperature of each fuse, the capacity of each fuse is selected based on the temperatures at the pair of terminals of each fuse. For example, when mounting an electronic component as a heating element around a fuse mounted on a board and selecting it based on the relationship between the rated current ratio (%) and the ambient temperature (°C), use the ambient temperature of the fuse as the ambient temperature. Instead, use the temperature at the fuse terminals. When this selection method is used, for example, in the case of the fuse capacity selected by using the fuse ambient temperature as the ambient temperature, when the fuse terminal temperature is selected as the ambient temperature, the selection result is that selection is not possible. There are cases where it becomes a risky selection. Whether the ambient temperature is selected as the ambient temperature of the fuse or the ambient temperature is selected as the terminal of the fuse, the selection result must be acceptable in either case. Is more preferable.

In addition, among the capacities of the fuses, the capacity of the +5V fuse SF5, which is the main fuse of the +5V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the capacity of the +5V fuse mounted on the production drive board 1720 that is the subsequent board. Compared with, the +5V fuse mounted on the subsequent substrate is the largest and has a smaller capacity than the fuse mounted on the previous substrate, and a plurality of fuses are mounted on the subsequent substrate. In this case, in the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted in the previous board, and the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is the capacity of the fuse in the final stage. It is bigger than

For example, in the +5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse of the first middle stage is The capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage is smaller than that of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than that of the fuse in the first middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage is It may be smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage. Further, for example, in the +5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage is Is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first stage one step before, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage one before, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage is one previous. It may be the same as the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage. Further, for example, in the +5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage is Is smaller than the capacity of the previous fuse in the first stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is the same as the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is 1. It may be smaller than or equal to the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage immediately before. Further, for example, in the +5V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse of the first stage is the capacity of the fuse of the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse of the second middle stage, and the final stage. It may be smaller than or the same as the combined fuse capacity of In the +5V power supply line, when the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, when the capacity of the fuse to the substrate is increased, The substrate itself may be ignited by overcurrent.

Further, among the capacities of the fuses, the capacity of the +12V fuse SF12, which is the main fuse of the +12V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, has the capacity of the effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 1720, and the game board 5 which are the subsequent boards. It is the largest compared to the capacity of the +12V fuse mounted on each of the decorative boards provided in, and the capacity of the fuse mounted on the preceding board is the largest (the fuse is not mounted on the preceding board). In some cases, the capacity of the fuse on the previous board on which the fuse is mounted is the same (hereinafter the same)), and when multiple fuses are mounted on the subsequent board, The capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted on the previous substrate, and the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage.

For example, in the +12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and The capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage is smaller than that of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than that of the fuse in the first middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage is It may be smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage. Further, for example, in the +12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage is Is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first stage one step before, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage one before, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage is one previous. It may be the same as the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage. Further, for example, in the +12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage is Is smaller than the capacity of the previous fuse in the first stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is the same as the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, and the capacity of the final stage fuse is 1. It may be smaller than or the same as the capacity of the fuse in the immediately preceding second middle stage. Further, for example, in the +12V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse of the first stage is the capacity of the fuse of the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse of the second middle stage, and the final stage. It may be smaller than or the same as the total of the capacities of the fuses. In the +12V power supply line, if the capacity of the fuse of the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse of the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse of the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse of the final stage, it becomes The substrate itself may be ignited by overcurrent.

Further, among the capacities of the respective fuses, the capacity of the +24V fuse SF24, which is the main fuse of the +24V power supply line supplied from the peripheral control board 1510, is the capacity of the +24V fuse mounted on the performance drive board 1720 that is the subsequent board. The fuse for +24V, which is the largest, is smaller than that of the fuse mounted on the preceding substrate, and the fuses for the +24V mounted on the succeeding substrate are smaller, and a plurality of fuses are mounted on the succeeding substrate. In this case, in the same subsequent board, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse mounted in the previous board, and the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is the capacity of the fuse in the final stage. It is bigger than

For example, in the +24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and The capacity of the fuse of the first middle stage is smaller than that of the fuse of the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse of the second middle stage is smaller than that of the fuse of the first middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the last stage is It may be smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage. Further, for example, in the +24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage is Is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first stage immediately before, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage immediately before, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage is It may be the same as the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage. Further, for example, in the +24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, and the fuse in the first middle stage is Is smaller than the capacity of the fuse in the first stage immediately before, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage is the same as the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage immediately before, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage is 1. It may be smaller than or the same as the capacity of the fuse in the immediately preceding second middle stage. Further, for example, in the +24V power supply line, when four fuses are provided on the same subsequent substrate, the capacity of the fuse of the first stage is the capacity of the fuse of the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse of the second middle stage, and the final stage. It may be smaller than or the same as the total of the capacities of the fuses. In the +24V power supply line, if the capacity of the fuse in the first stage is larger than the capacity of the fuse in the first middle stage, the capacity of the fuse in the second middle stage, and the capacity of the fuse in the final stage, it is The substrate itself may be ignited by overcurrent.

[12. Each decorative board provided for the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate included in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 225 to 227. FIG. 225 is a block diagram for explaining electrical connection of each decorative substrate included in the door frame, FIG. 226 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 227 is an LED. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board included in the door frame 3 will be described, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, and the decorative board including the LED constant current drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a so that the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side. The side window decoration portion 410b of the window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are arranged, respectively, and the plate upper left decoration body 271, the plate upper right decoration body 276, and the plate. Below the center upper decorative body 312a, a plate lower left decorative body 281, a plate lower right decorative body 286, and a plate lower central decorative body 312b are arranged, respectively.

The plate upper left decorative body 271 is provided with a plate upper left decorative substrate 273 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending in the left-right direction along the plate upper left decorative body 271, and a plurality of plate upper left decorative substrates 273 are mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273. Light-emitting decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). The plate upper right decoration body 276 is provided with a plate upper right decoration board 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the left-right direction along the plate upper right decoration body 276, and a plurality of plate upper right decoration boards 278 are mounted. The LEDs are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). The plate center upper decorative body 312a is provided with a plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having a semi-arcuate shape along the plate center upper decorative member 312a at the rear of the plate center upper decorative substrate 312a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are used for light emission decoration.

The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending vertically along the door frame left side decoration body 404 at the rear of the door frame left side decoration body 402a and the left side lower decoration board 402b. The door frame left side decoration board 402 configured by and the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decoration board 402a and the left side lower decoration board 402b (in the present embodiment, the left side upper decoration board 402a). 5 and 10 on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The side window interior decoration portion 410b is provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and behind the side window side is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate that extends vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412. The decoration part decoration board 413 in a window is arrange|positioned, and the light emission decoration is carried out by the full-color LED (12 pieces in this embodiment) multiply mounted by the decoration part decoration board 413 in a side window. The door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate extending vertically along the door frame right side decoration body 419 at the rear of the door frame right side decoration body 419 and the right side upper decoration board 418a and the right side lower decoration board 418b. The door frame right side decoration board 418 composed of is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in the present embodiment, the right side top decoration board 418a) are mounted on the right side top decoration board 418a and the right side bottom decoration board 418b, respectively. 4 and 10 on the lower right side decorative substrate 418b).

The door frame top decoration body 453 is provided with a door frame top center decoration board 455, which is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending laterally along the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453, behind the door frame top decoration body 453. A door frame top left decoration substrate 456 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decoration body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decoration body 453. A plurality of door frame top right decorative substrates 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip are arranged, and a plurality of them are mounted on each of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Light emission decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top central decoration board 455, 7 on the door frame top left decoration board 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decoration board 457).

The plate lower left decorative body 281 is provided with a plate lower left decorative substrate 283 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending in the left-right direction along the plate lower left decorative body 281. A plurality of plate lower left decorative substrates 283 are mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283. Light-emitting decoration is performed by full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). The dish lower right decoration body 286 is provided with a dish lower right decoration substrate 288 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending laterally along the dish lower right decoration body 286 behind the dish lower right decoration substrate 288. A plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, six LEDs) are mounted to emit light. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided with a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arcuate shape along the plate center lower decorative body 312b at the rear thereof. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are used for light emission decoration.

The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53, which is included in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3, includes the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 that is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The production operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a front semicircular shape, and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular shape on the rear side. ,,. The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decoration board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decoration board 352b ( In the present embodiment, 9) are used for light emission decoration.

As described above, each of the decorative substrates included in the door frame 3 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate. Accordingly, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distances of the game board 5, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large-sized display device, or the like can be provided.

[12-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
The plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the left upper upper decorative substrate 402a, the left lower lower decorative substrate 402b, and the side, which are arranged in various decorative bodies and decorative parts provided in the door frame 3. Window decoration part decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top central decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, plate left bottom decoration board 283, the lower right dish decorative board 288, the lower central dish decorative board 316, the front decorative board 352a, the rear decorative board 352b, and the like, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection between the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 225.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 included in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is the light emission data that is the door frame side first serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control board 1510 illustrated in FIG. The SDAT1, the clock signal SCLK1, the light emission data SDAT2, which is the door frame side second serial system, and the clock signal SCLK2 are independently input. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line through the interface board 635, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[12-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the dish unit relay board of the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are the dish lower left decoration board 283, the dish lower right decoration board 288, and It is input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 are input to the plate upper left decoration board 273, respectively. That is, the plate lower left decoration board 283 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decoration board 273, so that the plate lower left decoration The board 283 and the plate upper left decoration board 273 are electrically connected in a beaded state. The door left lower decorative board 283 serving as a bridge board receives the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214, respectively, which are not shown. An input connector is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output to the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 (not shown). A connector is provided. On the other hand, the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 electrically connected to the lower plate left decorative plate 283 (that is, the latter stage and the final stage of the lower plate left decorative substrate 283) includes the lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in the drawing. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) respectively output from the output connectors that are not provided are provided only as input connectors (not shown).

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish lower right decoration board 288 are input to the plate upper right decoration board 278, respectively. In other words, the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 serves as a bridge substrate for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative substrate 278, and thus the dish right The lower decorative substrate 288 and the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a beaded state. A door frame lower side decorative board 288 serving as a bridge board receives the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214, respectively. An input connector not provided and an output (not shown) for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decoration board 278, respectively Connector is provided. On the other hand, the dish upper right decoration board 278 electrically connected to the dish lower right decoration board 288 (that is, the latter and final stages of the dish lower right decoration board 288) includes the dish lower right decoration board 278. Only the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors 288 not shown, are provided. There is.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are the plate center decoration board 314 and the plate center. Inputs are made to the lower decorative board 316 and the front decorative board 352a of the effect operation ring decorative board 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decoration board 352a are input to the rear decoration board 352b, respectively. That is, the front decoration board 352a serves as a bridging board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration board 352b. The rear decoration substrate 352b is electrically connected to the beads. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are input to the front decoration board 352a serving as a bridge board, respectively. And a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output to the rear decoration board 352b. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the rear decorative substrate 352b electrically connected to the front decorative substrate 352a (that is, the latter stage and the final stage of the front decorative substrate 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative substrate 352a. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from, are provided only with input connectors (not shown).

Here, for example, a brief description will be given of the plate lower left decoration substrate 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay substrate 214 are input. The dish lower left decoration substrate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of flowing a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls to flow a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x is taken over by the heat distribution circuit 283c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

The +12V input to the plate lower left decorative board 283 is a surface mounting type chip fuse that is soldered to the plate lower left decorative board 283 and surface-mounted as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative substrate on the door frame 3 side. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a mounted on the dish lower left decoration board 283 and the six constant color light emitting full color LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decoration board 283 become the +12V power line through the +12V fuse SLLDF12. It is supplied to sdLED1 to sdLED6.

Further, for example, a brief description will be given of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 is input. The plate upper left decoration substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decoration substrate 283, and is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of supplying a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , SuLED1 to suLED6, and a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls to supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate lower left decoration board 283. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (sink) type as described above, it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x is taken over by the heat distribution circuit 273c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

The +12V input to the plate upper left decoration board 273 is a surface mounting type chip fuse which is surface-mounted by being soldered to the plate upper left decoration board 273 as a +12V fuse provided on each decoration board on the door frame 3 side. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a mounted on the plate upper left decoration board 273 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a mounted on the plate upper left decoration board 273 and six multicolor LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are provided as a +12V power source line via the +12V fuse SLUDF12. It is supplied to suLED1 to suLED6.

[12-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub relay board 105 are the lower left side decorative board of the door frame left side decorative board 402. 402b and input to the decoration part decoration board 413 in the side window, the lower right side decoration board 418b of the door frame right side decoration board 418, and the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 73. Each has been entered.

+12V and the ground (GND) input to the lower left side decorative board 402b of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are input to the upper left side decorative board 402a of the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decoration board 457. Has been entered in.

The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decoration board 457 are input to the door frame top center decoration board 455, respectively. There is. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridging board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. The door frame top right decoration board 457 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 are electrically connected to each other. On the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 which is a bridge substrate, the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, +12V, and ground ( An input connector (not shown) for inputting each GND) is provided, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) are provided on the door frame top center decoration board. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to each 455 is provided. Further, the door frame top center decorative board 455 electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative board 457 (that is, the latter stage of the door frame top right decorative board 457) includes the door frame top right decorative board 457 illustrated. A door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors, are provided, and not-shown input connectors are provided. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) are provided to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively, and output connectors (not shown) are provided.

The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top central decoration board 455 are input to the door frame top left decoration board 456, respectively. There is. That is, the door frame top central decoration board 455 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decoration board 456. The door frame top central decoration board 455 and the door frame top left decoration board 456 are electrically connected to each other. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative board 456 electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative board 455 (that is, the latter and final stages of the door frame top central decorative board 455) has a door. Door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top central decorative board 455, are input. Only the connector is provided.

Here, for example, the left side of the door frame left side decoration substrate 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay substrate 105 is input. The side lower decorative substrate 402b will be briefly described. The left lower lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decoration board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decoration board 273, and applies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. It is mainly configured by a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bax and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current of the currents flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax applies a constant current to eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay board 105. Take control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decoration board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decoration board 273. hdLED10 and sink type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying a constant current to huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side decorative substrate 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left It is mainly configured by a maximum current setting circuit 402by capable of setting the maximum current of the currents flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side decorative substrate 402a. The constant current driving circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay board 105, and is mounted on the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which it is mounted. Control is performed to pass a constant current to the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the huLED1 to huLED5 of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a.

Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is handled by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. ing.

As described above, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted (left side lower decorative substrate 402b). On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent board in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted (left side lower decorative board 402b). The heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a can disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to flow a constant current to the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate across the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which the constant current driving circuit 402bbx is mounted. Has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is necessarily performed. A worker who performs this work has his finger on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b connector, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a connector, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b heat distribution circuit 402bc, or the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a have the function of distributing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, It also has a function to prevent damage to electronic components due to.

As described above, the left side upper decoration substrate 402a receives +12V and the ground (GND) from the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, and also has a constant current to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. The lines that flow are input respectively. As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a includes the heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has the function of preventing the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

The +12V input to the left side lower decorative board 402b is a surface mount type that is surface-mounted by being soldered to the left side lower decorative board 402b as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side. The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba mounted on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and eight multicolored lights can be formed by the +12V power line via the front stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1 which is a chip fuse. Are supplied to the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8. The +12V input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is for the above-mentioned front stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1 and the rear stage +12V which is a surface mounting type chip fuse soldered to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b becomes a +12V power source line via the fuse LLDF12a2, and the hdLED9 which is two full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. , HdLED10 as well as huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the left side decorative substrate 402a.

[12-1-3. Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1, SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. And key information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit is designated among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which of the gradation 0 (zero) to the gradation 127 is to be specified.

[12-2. Outline of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, and therefore the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (constant) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of supplying a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current of the current supplied to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283y capable of

[12-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output a current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is provided for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. , LG, LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in this embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for up to eight full color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. You can do it.

The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[12-2-2. Linear power supply]
The +12V input to the plate lower left decorative board 283 is a surface mount type that is soldered to the plate lower left decorative board 283 and surface-mounted as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side as described above. It becomes a +12V power source line through a +12V fuse SLLDF12 which is a chip fuse of the above. The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit which can input +12V from the +12V power supply line and generate and supply an internal power supply Vreg (+5V in the present embodiment) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. The internal power supply Vreg supplies the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi. Is able to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5V power supply line that is supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95 through various boards, and independently creates +DC 5V as the internal power supply Vreg. It is used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. This is because when the +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 through various boards is used, this +5V power supply line is used by laying out electrical wiring, and therefore +5V power supply line for supplying +5V. Becomes longer and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the +5V power supply line and +5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED flickers under the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the +5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 through various boards is not required in the constant current drive circuit 283x, and thus the noise resistance is extremely high as compared with the +5V power supply line. A configuration is adopted in which +5V is independently created as the internal power supply Vreg in the linear power supply 283xa of the constant current drive circuit 283x from the +12V power supply line.

As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate without using the internal power supply Vreg. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which can contribute to the prevention of flicker of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. Further, the electric wiring for input and the electric wiring for external transmission to the +5V power source line are not required, which can contribute to miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-3. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa and outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x to initialize the constant current drive circuit 283x and operate the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are started.

The constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 211, for example, and creates a reset signal independently as the internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. For example, if a line that transmits a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as “reset signal transmission line”) is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by laying out electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset by the influence of external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reset signal transmission line is not required in the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates the reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another board, and only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using it, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, and therefore it is possible to stabilize the internal reset signal RST. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It is possible to contribute to the prevention of unexpected turning off and flickering of the LED elements that compose the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. Further, the electric wiring for input to the reset signal transmission line and the electric wiring for external transmission are not required, which can contribute to miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-4. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter, referred to as “data line”) for transmitting serial data (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. From the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter, referred to as “clock line”) that transmits a clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. Is a circuit capable of inputting a clock signal from the input terminal, shaping the waveform of the clock signal, and outputting the shaped signal to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. For this reason, both the data line and the clock line are long, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is provided. The waveform is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line resistant to noise. This makes it possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise.

[12-2-5. Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 types of addresses as IDs (IDs capable of identifying the individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown) based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa. You can do it.

As described above, in this embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). However, it is not set properly by receiving data by software.

[12-2-6. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
In the logic processing unit 283xg, serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) and the clock line buffer 283xd. The clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address that is the ID of its own set by the address setting unit 283xe. Sometimes, the gradation information is fetched from this serial data, and the gradation degree in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to be the fetched gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[12-2-7. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation level) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation off to lighting (maximum brightness) from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. One output channel is gradation-controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown). That is, the PWM unit 283xh includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control units 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation level is set, each of the PWM gradation control section 1 to the PWM gradation control section 24 controls the constant current drive section 283xi so that a current having the set gradation level flows.

[12-2-8. Constant current drive]
The constant current driving unit 283xi has one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation levels are set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the PWM unit 283xh described above. A current driver causes a constant current to flow through the LED element that constitutes the full-color LED. That is, the constant current drive unit 283xi includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

Each of the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 has one end of a resistor Rr that sets a maximum current flowing through a red (R) emitting LED element that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 has one end of a resistor Rg that sets a maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green (G) light that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. The resistor Rg is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. The resistor Rb is electrically connected and the other end is grounded to the ground (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element, which form a full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line and receives +12V.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 1 to the constant current driver 8) so that the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements that form the full-color LED can be respectively sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side. Has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements forming the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16), and the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), and the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements forming the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 side, respectively. ing.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, and thereby the red (R) LED elements that form the full-color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements that configure the individually set full-color LEDs, and thus the green (G) LED elements that configure the full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements that configure the individually set full-color LEDs, and thereby the blue (B) LED elements that configure the full-color LED. Can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform the dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, 8 full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. Thus, it is possible to turn off, turn on at one gradation, blink at one gradation, and the like.

[12-2-9. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to flow in the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8 described above, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. A resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green (G) that constitutes a full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8, and a full-color LED in eight output channels from output channels LB1 to LB8 are configured. It is composed of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). There is.

[12-3. Decorative substrate with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decorative substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. Here, a decorative substrate including one LED constant current driving circuit will be described, and a decorative substrate including two LED constant current driving circuits will be described. The LED constant current drive circuit described above provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 226 and 227, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals for convenience of description.

[12-3-1. Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 226, a plate lower left decorative substrate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a heat generator. The distribution circuit 283c is provided.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 included in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is the light emission data SDAT1 that is the door frame side first serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control board 1510. , The clock signal SCLK1 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. Has been done.

As described above, the lower left decorative plate 283 of the plate is the plate of the plate unit 200 in which the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) on the door frame side from the door frame sub-relay substrate 105, +12V, and the ground (GND). It is input through the unit relay board 214. The +12V input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 is a surface mount type that is soldered to the plate lower left decoration board 283 and surface-mounted as a +12V fuse provided on each decoration board on the door frame 3 side as described above. It becomes a +12V power source line through a +12V fuse SLLDF12 which is a chip fuse of the above. +12V supplied from this +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) of the sdLED1 to sdLED6 that are full-color LEDs are formed. Inputs are also made to the anode terminal of the LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements that compose the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6 (the constant current described above). It is electrically connected to the drivers 1 to 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that form sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6 (the constant currents described above). The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1). Gradation information is captured, and sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and dimmed to be the captured gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of the sink type as described above, it heats up by absorbing the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is taken up by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 283c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left side of the dish via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above). While being input to the board 273, +12V and the ground (GND) are input to the plate upper left decoration board 273 through the plate lower left decoration board 283. As a result, noise that has entered the data line and clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current drive circuit 283x) is prevented from being transmitted to the plate upper left decoration substrate 273 which is the subsequent substrate. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a can shape the waveform (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd included in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

The +12V input to the plate upper left decoration board 273 is a surface mount type that is soldered to the plate upper left decoration board 273 and surface-mounted as a +12V fuse provided on each decoration board on the door frame 3 side as described above. It becomes a +12V power supply line through a +12V fuse SLUDF12 which is a chip fuse of the above. The +12V supplied from the +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) of the suLED1 to suLED6 that are full-color LEDs are configured. Inputs are also made to the anode terminal of the LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements that form the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current driving circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant currents) via the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the drivers 1 to 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that form the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are output channels LB1 to LB6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1). Gradation information is taken in, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and dimmed and turned on so as to be the taken-in gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink type as described above, it heats up by absorbing the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (to be precise, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is responsible for the heat dispersion resistances suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

As a decorative substrate having one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate lower right decorative substrate 288, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456. , And the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[12-3-2. Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 227, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, and 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1. ~ The hdLED 10 and the heat distribution circuit 402bc are provided.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 included in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is the light emission data SDAT2 which is the door frame side second serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a included in the peripheral control board 1510. , The clock signal SCLK2 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. Has been done.

As described above, the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), +12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay board 105 are input to the left side lower decorative board 402b. .. The +12V input to the lower left side decorative board 402b is a surface mounted on the left side lower decorative board 402b by soldering as a +12V fuse provided on each decorative board on the door frame 3 side as described above. It becomes a +12V power supply line through the front stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1 which is a mounting type chip fuse. +12V supplied from the +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements that form the hdLED1 to hdLED8 of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, Inputs are also made to the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element. Further, as described above, +12V input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the front stage +12V fuse LLDF12a1 and the surface mounting type chip fuse soldered to the left lower lower decorative substrate 402b and surface mounted. It becomes a +12V power supply line through the subsequent +12V fuse LLDF12a2. The +12V supplied from the +12V power supply line is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb, and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements that form the hdLED9 and hdLED10 of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, the green (G) And huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side decorative substrate 402a, while being input to the anode terminals of the LED elements and the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements. , The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. For this reason, among the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the LED constant-current drive circuit 402ba controls the light emission mode for the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two LEDs. For the hdLED9 and the hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate across the substrate on which the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emitting modes of the huLED1 to huLED5 are controlled.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to sdLED8, are the same as the eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8. Through the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above), the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the above-mentioned constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16) via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, are connected to the output channels LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. To LB8 (constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 described above) are electrically connected.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and sdLED10, are different from the two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10. The full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are output channels LG1 and LG2 (constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 10 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the full-color LEDs, that is, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the reds (huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are configured). The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are respectively connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the heat distribution resistances huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. Are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current driver 3 to constant current driver 7 described above), and the cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that form huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are respectively, Output channels LG3 to LG7 (constant current driver described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRg1b to huRg5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRg1a to huRg5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. 11-constant current driver 15), the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are respectively the heat dispersion resistance huRb1b to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the huRb5b and the heat dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Has been done. The output channels LR8, LG8, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

When the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba includes its own ID in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba outputs the light emission data SDAT2. Gradation information is taken in, and eight full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED8, among the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, are individually controlled and dimmed to obtain the taken-in gradation information. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (emission data) that is input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2), gradation information is fetched from this light emission data SDAT2, and the fetched gradation information is set to 10 Of the full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are individually controlled to perform dimming and lighting, and the left side, which is the subsequent board to the left-side lower decorative board 402b. The five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through the eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more accurately, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is taken up by the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402bc. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax).

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type, it absorbs the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the left Heat is generated by drawing in constant currents flowing through the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (correctly, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is converted into two full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, for two hdLED9 and hdLED10. The five heat dissipating resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10, which constitute the heat dispersal circuit 402bc, are mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate of the left lower lower decorative substrate 402b. For huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the heat distribution circuits huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, and huRb1a to huRb5a that configure the heat distribution circuit 402bc in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a. The heat distribution of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be precise, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is distributed by the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat distribution circuit 402ac in FIG. You can do it.

Further, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration substrate 402a are, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (correctly, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function to disperse the heat generated by the device, it also has a function to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

As a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, in addition to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the plate center lower decorative substrate 316, the side window interior decorative portion decorative substrate 413, the right side. There is a lower decorative board 418b and a door frame top central decorative board 455.

Further, as a decorative substrate having no LED constant current drive circuit, there is a right upper decorative substrate 418a in addition to the left upper decorative substrate 402a.

[13. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 to 233. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on process, and FIG. 230 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, we will explain various random numbers used in game control, and then move the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on process, main control side timer interrupt process, setting change process, set value confirmation display process, error The display process will be described.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number A random number for determination, a random number for reach determination to be used for determining whether to generate a reach (out of reach) when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400. Random display pattern random numbers to be used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable on the symbol display, and the first special symbol display and the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when the jackpot gaming state is generated. Random number for design to be used for determining big hit symbols and small hit symbols (decision of hit type) that are derived and displayed on the symbol display and for determining initial value of this random symbol Etc. are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol to be used for determining whether to open or close a movable piece that allows the game ball of the second starting port 2004 to be opened and closed, and this regular symbol determination Normal symbol per determination for determining the initial value of the random number for use for determining the initial value determination random number, and the normal pattern for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers for variable display patterns, etc. are prepared.

Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

[13-2. Initial value update type counter operation]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. After extracting the other values in the specified numerical range one after another and extracting all the values in the specified numerical range, the main control is performed again by extracting one value in the specified numerical range. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another based on the clock signal input to the MPU. Such a high-speed lottery is repeated by the hard random number circuit with built-in main control, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the hard random number circuit with built-in main control at the time of acquiring the value from the hard random number circuit with built-in main control as a special random number. It is supposed to do.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 and the count is incremented. This counter normally counts from the initial value determination random number for symbol determination to the maximum value, and then from the minimum value to the initial value determination random number for regular symbol determination to count up. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an “initial value updating type counter”. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when various types of data are stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the information as a numerical value and calculating the sum is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-down process (power-off) of the main control side. When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, normally, the random number per symbol determination initial value determination is from the built-in non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU. The ID code is taken out, and the initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that normally updates the random number for symbol determination based on the taken out ID code is executed. It is a mechanism to be set. In other words, the normal symbol per-judgment initial value determination random number is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value per ordinary symbol is derived by using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process is performed when clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except a specific area. By executing the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing it and the two-step security measure, the analysis is prevented.

Here, an advantage that an ID code is taken out from a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU and the taken ID code is used as a normal per symbol determination initial value determination random number will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying an individual. Since the code is added, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting judgment random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1′, and thus is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece can be opened and closed to accept the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. Cannot be generated.

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been done.

Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch) that also has three functions. Here, the information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased. It operates as the function of the RAM clear switch for. In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, while the RAM When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is performed and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated. In addition, since it is an extremely short time within the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is the present routine, to the determination of step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is actually pressed. The person who performs the operation turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

When determining in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is operated, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). Is a flag indicating whether or not to erase various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc., and is set to a value of 1 when the various information is erased and a value of 0 when the various information is not erased. .. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Subsequent to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is set. The key is turned on, and the setting key switch 1311a performs a setting key ON signal. In addition, since it is an extremely short time within the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is the present routine, to the determination in step S18, in reality, a person who operates the setting key switch 1311a turns it on. After turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and sets the setting key switch based on the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key 1313a is turned on, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned on, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later) of the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU. Is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change and confirmation display of set value 1 to set value 6) at the time when is turned on. A value of 1 is set when display is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when setting change of setting value or confirmation display is not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. At the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Is ready to receive various commands from.

Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as the power failure notification. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that the power outage notice signal is input, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage notice signal continues to be input. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22.

In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 or not. It is determined (step S25). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 1, it means that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG does not have a value of 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1. Moreover, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). Although the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has the value 0, the preset setting value change permission condition is not satisfied. It is determined that various pieces of information are deleted in the same manner as when the preset setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

In the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG does not have a value of 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). .. This checksum is to calculate the sum of the various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

Subsequent to step S29, the main control MPU sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) to the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When determining in step S30 that the two match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main power supply-side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power cut-off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main power supply side power-off process has not been normally completed, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is finished is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but if it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or if the main control side power-off process is not normally completed at power-off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

In addition, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). This routine is again performed by turning on the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 after turning the knob 60 degrees clockwise and turning it on. Processing at power-on of the main control side is started. In the determination of step S14 described above, the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is operated, and in step S16A described above, sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and In the above-described determination in step S18, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON and the value 1 is set in the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above step S20A, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 in the determination in the above step S25. Also, assuming that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, it is determined that a predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and the step to be described later is followed by the setting change process of step S37 to be described later. In the process of S38, the RAM error is released by clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area so that the game can proceed (hereinafter, "first RAM error"). Cancel method").

As a method different from this first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the setting key cylinder remains at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310, the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines in the above-described determination in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is operated, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in above-described step S16A. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch is activated by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that 1311a has not been set key ON, and the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above. Therefore, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in the determination in step S26 described above. Assuming that the value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG are the value 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, the same as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. It is determined that various kinds of information are to be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be progressed by clearing a specific region out of the entire region of the main control built-in RAM. (Hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally terminated, an error display in step S33 is displayed and the main control internal RAM is displayed. When notifying that there is an abnormality (or cannot be trusted) in the contents stored in, two releasing methods, a first RAM error releasing method and a second RAM error releasing method, are given. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU incorporates the main control as the power recovery. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, the state in which power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, fraudulent person A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device and the main control MPU itself is reset and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various processing thereafter, so that the main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, all areas of the main control internal RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

Following the determination of step S36, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1 (step S27). When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the preset setting value display permission condition is satisfied. judge.

In the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and the preset set value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the value is set, the set value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In the setting value confirmation display processing, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g, which will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, a predetermined setting value change. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, the setting change process is performed (step S37). This setting change processing will be described later in detail, but is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310. The RAM clear switch has a function (RAM clear switch, setting change button, and error release switch) that also has three functions as described above, and here, a setting change button for selecting and changing a set value. Works as a function of. Each time the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal to that effect (a selection switching signal for the setting value) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a The changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key cylinder is operated from OFF to ON, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, it is predetermined. If the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but it is determined that various information is to be erased as in the case where a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, a specific area is excluded from all areas of the main control internal RAM. To clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specific area of the whole area of the main control built-in RAM). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control internal RAM is always The specified area of the main control built-in RAM (the area excluding the specified area of the main control built-in RAM) is cleared except for the specified area. Here, the “specific area” is an area dedicated to setting values in which setting values are stored, and an out port 2010, a first sub-out port 2011, and a second sub-out port provided in a game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. An area for exclusive use of out-ball counting, in which a counting result (total number) of the number of gaming balls collected by 2012 is stored, is configured. The set value dedicated area stores a set value that is changed in a setting changing process described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area is an out port 2010, a first sub out port 2011 and a first sub out port 2011 which are counted in a ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012 is stored.

The main control MPU may read and set a predetermined value as an initial value from the ROM with built-in main control. Further, the main control MPU is a signal indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 has been operated (RAM clear signal) to instruct the RAM clear. When the values do not match or when the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally terminated, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is extracted, and the extracted ID code The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for judgment of the normal symbol based on this fixed value, the fixed value It is set to the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, which is used for determination.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S36, S28 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as “the dock dock timer control register incorporated in the main control MPU to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally” WDT control register") to set a timer set value to start the main control built-in WDT and reset the main control MPU. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts timing, and the watchdog timer clear register (in the main control MPU) is built in until the time counted reaches the time set by the timer setting value. Hereinafter, when the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and the timekeeping is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the processing of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and restarting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set to the communication speed and the presence/absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set to the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission.

Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a test facility for gaming machines, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, of the various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state, a random number is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU to be updated by hardware. Settings such as latching and acquisition are made, and activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the hard random number circuit with built-in main control is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and predetermined. When all the values within the specified numerical range have been extracted, one value within the specified numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values in are extracted one after another without duplication. The main control MPU outputs a latch signal to the main random number circuit with built-in main control when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the hard random number circuit with built-in main control, and the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command that are classified into Remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S42.

Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. R. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, the main control MPU performs the non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In the non-win/win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning/judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. Incidentally, the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination, normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-win/win random number updating process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. If the power outage notice signal is not input, the non-win random number updating process is performed in step S56. Then, step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, in the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that the power failure advance notice signal is input, the main control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clearing processing in step S12 is performed.

Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU outputs drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, a starting opening solenoid 2415, a first attacker solenoid 2418, a second attacker solenoid 2612, a special monitor, and the like. Stop (step S62).

Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total thereof.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition makes it impossible to access the RAM with built-in main control, thereby preventing the contents of the RAM with built-in main control from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

As described above, the main control MPU undergoes a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control-side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control-side power-off processing, and again executes the main control-side power-on processing. .. In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the power-off process on the main-control side immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored because the power-off process on the main-control side is not executed. When the power is shut off, the checksum value (sum value) stored after the main power supply side power-off process is executed and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the internal reset circuit is forcibly reset and restarted. The value (sum value) cannot match with the checksum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM without fail, and a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control internal RAM in the process of step S38. It will be completely erased.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power restoration.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off processing is normally ended. Are inspecting. Thus, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

When the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in the determination of step S25, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, it is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific region in the entire region of the main control built-in RAM, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). At this time, that is, when it is determined that various kinds of information are to be erased, in the process of step S38, the main control internal RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific region. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be precise, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When performing a setting change that can be performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control internal RAM. This is because when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability variation (probability change)). If it is, etc.), it is necessary to delete (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business starts, so a clerk such as a game hall clerk presses the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation portion. In addition, when the setting value is changed and decided, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is consequently maintained, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM. Since it is an important key that can be used to confirm the set value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to carry it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3. In the present embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the staff such as a clerk in the game hall needs to erase the RAM when the game backup information needs to be erased (cleared). The game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation section of the clear switch.

Here, description will be made on the point that the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the wait time waiting process in step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26, and the subsequent process is performed Described below are the problems.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is adapted to be applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. In other words, even if the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is +5 V, so that the island facility in the game hall is applied. The power-off process on the main control side can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is turned off. This is an island facility in the game hall due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure while the player is playing the game, that is, while performing the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. When the power supply from the main control unit is cut off, the main control-side power cutoff process can be surely completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted) (boot timer: in the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set.) If a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the waiting time is reached, the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the charge charged in +5V is applied as +5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer described later is performed. Even if the interrupt processing is performed and the content of the main control internal RAM is updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the power-on process on the main control side is started again when power is restored.

Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of power recovery this time, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated as the checksum based on the contents of is compared with the value stored in the RAM with built-in main control immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the staff such as the clerk in the game hall operates the RAM clear switch without the intention of the staff such as the clerk in the game hall. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information will be erased (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power outage notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power outage notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time waiting process in step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information) are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step S24). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process in S22 (when it is determined in the determination in step S24), the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the blackout warning signal is continuously input, By repeating the determination of step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. Thereby, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculated and stored value of step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is performing a game while the pachinko machine is in progress. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, by supplying power to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, game information due to the progress of this game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) The main control board includes the processing of steps S58 to S68 which is a backup processing for storing various information including the information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) and the main power supply side power-off processing constituted by an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) is determined to match, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure stored and held in the main control internal RAM is held. Is never initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are reset. When the main control side power-off processing can be restarted without updating the value at all, while immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, As described above, it is possible to reliably complete the power-off process on the main control side within the "power-supply securing period during momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the island facility in the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. Therefore, in the case where the main control-side power-off processing cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power interruption or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the step immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22 is performed. In S24, it is determined whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is input, the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage notice signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is performed. By repeating the game, the game cannot be progressed.

Such software prevents the game from proceeding, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt is permitted in step S52). The content of the main control internal RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) is set by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. It is possible to avoid updating various information) including information indicating the counter value). When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power from the island facility in the game hall is shut off, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) Various information including information indicating the counter value) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of main control internal RAM (game information, and By dividing the other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter) by hardware so that it is not changed at all, , It is possible to surely prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. You can do it.

Next, description will be made regarding the fact that the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, it is indicated that the power is turned on (power recovery). In order to transmit, create a power-on status command that is classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command, and incorporate the main control as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2415 and information indicating the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. .. Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2415 and information indicating the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. If not, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command transmitted by the power-on main control return destination command at power-on in step S50 is not performed will be described.

For example, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the first special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member or when the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven to open the second special winning opening 2006 by the opening/closing member, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 causes the power failure or the power failure based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control RAM in step S34. By being restored to the game state immediately before the occurrence of, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven, and the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member or the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven. The state in which the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the opening/closing member is changed to the state in which it is opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating the big hit game state as the game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned to the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, the jackpot gaming state. It is not possible to display at which round of the time. That is, for example, a game ball enters the first big winning opening 2005, is detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the big winning opening 1 count that conveys the number of balls of the game balls entered in the first big winning opening 2005 Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls of the played game ball can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is impossible to display at all which round (that is, how many rounds) the big hit game state is.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and ends the first special winning opening 2005 when the fourth big round (fourth round) of the big hit game state is ended, for example. Mainly, a special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the opened state to the closed state (that is, starting the closing of the first special winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 between the rounds) When transmitting from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the big hit game state of the fifth round (fifth round), the drive of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to make the first big winning opening. A special winning opening opening fifth display command for instructing that the state of 2005 is changed from being closed by the opening/closing member to being opened (that is, opening of the fifth round of the first special winning opening 2005). It is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the fifth round of the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, for example, a screen informing that a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is advantageous to the player (for example, a player is notified that the movable piece is open). Screen is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2415 to open the movable piece to open the second starting opening. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs in the state in which 2004 is opened, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control internal RAM in the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored to start driving the starting opening solenoid 2415 to close the movable piece. (2) The state where the starting port 2004 is closed is entered.

However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the short-time state based on the probability and the short-time state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of the power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is entered, and it is in a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball is received at the second starting opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power recovery is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. Nevertheless, since the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored, the game There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the above-described two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly restored after the power restoration. In other words, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumpy state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power restoration, power restoration is also performed when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on The main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, in the four rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, from the state where the first attacker solenoid 2418 is driven and the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member, as the return destination of the main control board 1310. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is to be changed to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is four rounds of the jackpot gaming state (that is, what round is it?). Although it is not possible to display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, in the big hit game state, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started, and the first special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member. A screen that tells you that you are in a state (for example, tell the player a message that it is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game ball so that it enters the big winning opening.) A screen) can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the first special winning opening 2005 after power recovery. Also, for example, in the above-described example, in the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then When the power is restored to the screen, as a destination of the main control board 1310, a screen notifying that the starting opening solenoid 2415 is started to open the movable piece to open the second starting opening 2004 ( For example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting opening." It is possible to instruct the player who is displayed in the display area to sit on the front surface of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 after the power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting on the front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values are not the same, and in step S38, the checksum values must be cleared except for the specific area in the entire main control RAM.

As a result, when the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. In the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands are the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize balls. The information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command operates the RAM clear switch to operate the RAM clear switch at the time of power-on (including power-on and power recovery when power failure or momentary power failure occurs). The information indicating that when clearing is performed, and at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery by power failure or momentary power failure) Indicates the pachinko machine model code and information that indicates which state (probability or time saving state) is used to recover from the probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-time saving state, or high probability non-time saving state It consists of information and. Here, a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine, to which the so-called Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 1310), is the copyright for which work? What kind of game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like) in which the probability variation occurs in the state)).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for whichever of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of movie D). Even though the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misconceptions that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which product copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs to, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, in the production line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, when the main control boards 1310 are mixed when the main control boards 1310 are mixed, the main control boards for the copyrights of the plural kinds of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, when the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to send a power-on status command including information indicating the power-on status to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified into power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on status The main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspecting step, which is the inspecting step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus operates as the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code to identify which type is the sweet digital type, a copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability variation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state continues until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the probability change occurs in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited, Based on the above, by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the copyright of the main control board 1310 belongs to, and also to confirm the copyright of the same work. Whether it is a model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually checking the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from decreasing due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[13-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 228 and 229.

When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 230 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is the present routine, the first register bank to the second register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits. Performing time management such as ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 normally receives various commands is input. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes the value 0, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes the value 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2401. A signal, a detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2601, an out opening sensor 3053, a detection signal from the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and a second sub-out opening sensor 3054, Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame opening switch, detection signals from the main frame opening switch 4b, setting key switch 1311a From the payout control board 633 which informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. , Is stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information. Further, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting port winning commands classified as other are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 3052, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and from the second starting mouth sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal of, the starting mouth winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process). First, it is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read in the second time is compared with the result read in the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball entered or if the input is ignored.

As described above, in the switch input process, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including the ones subjected to the vacant terminal process) is repeated from the first time to the third time. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, ie, two readings for comparison and two readings for the second to fourth times. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first A detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2601, a detection signal from the out opening sensor 3053, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054, a magnetic sensor 1111. 2404, 2602, 3055 detection signals, RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), door frame opening switch detection signal, body frame opening switch 4b detection signal, setting key switch 1311a signal, It is possible to enhance the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 normally receives the signal from the setting switch button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. ..

Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring processing, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to the vacant terminal processing is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal process is applied among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is applied is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display notifying that the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU has a defect. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In the winning random number updating process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 229, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for initial value determination for the big hit symbols and the random numbers for initial value determination for the small hit symbols are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the hit determination (hit determination), each counter counts up only every time this hit random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol per determination random number, the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number is also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the minimum value is set. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by one each time this main control side timer interrupt process is performed. Ordinary symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, then from the minimum value normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. Normally, when the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for symbol determination, the initial value determination random number for determination of collision is updated by this winning random number updating process. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of randomly selecting a value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not included in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 229. The winning random number updating process and the winning random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and If the number of executions of the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer of occurs, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number , And the small hitting symbol initial value determining random number may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU performs a sphere counting process (step S107). In this sphere counting process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the outlet sensor 3053 is input to the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. When the game ball collected by the provided outlet 2010 is detected by the outlet sensor 3053, the value 1 is added to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball collected by the outlet 2010. First, the game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011 provided in the game area 5a defined by the detection signal from the first sub-out port sensor 2403 are input. When the sub-out opening sensor 2403 detects, a value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game balls collected by the first sub-out opening 2011, and the calculation is performed. When the detection signal from the second sub-out sensor 3054 is input and the second sub-out sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 Performs the operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012. In other words, in the ball counting process, the out-mouth sensor 3053 detects the game ball collected by the out-mouth 2010, the first sub-out sensor 2403 detects the game ball collected by the first sub-out 2011, and When the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 detects the game ball collected by the second sub-out opening 2012, the value 3 is added to the value of the collected-ball counter. The main control MPU uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012, and performs the main control. It is stored in the area dedicated to counting out balls in the specific area of the built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control MPU, when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls. Each time, a sphere collection command to that effect is created and stored as transmission information in the output information storage area. The main control MPU, when the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in the present embodiment) and is further incremented by 1 to the value of the collected ball counter, the collected ball. The value of the counter overflows to a value 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first big prize hole 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. Since it has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that fact, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control processing of step S108, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the input information. In order to notify that fact, a main prize ball number information output command classified into other is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, based on this input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, the gate section 2003, the second. Based on the game balls entered in various winning openings such as the one starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the first big winning opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5"). The number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is counted, and in the prize ball control processing of step S108, it is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. There is. In the prize ball control processing of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter. To the value of, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball has reached 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output command is created in order to convey that fact, and as the transmission information. The value is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of exceeded balls is stored and updated in the award ball schedule information storage area of the main control RAM as the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 of that fact is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as output information. Further, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a command of 2 bytes (16 bits) (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act due to radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) is performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1. The value of the radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the injustice detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). The radio wave irradiation goto notification command divided into a notification display for notifying that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, and 3055 are input, the misconduct using the magnet ( Hereinafter, it will be referred to as “magnet goto”), and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by the value 1. The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initialized when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is the interrupt cycle in which the injustice detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a magnet goto notification command divided into a notification display for notifying that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible for an employee such as a clerk in the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. Has become.

In the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when not in the jackpot gaming state, detection from the first special winning opening sensor 2402 or the second special winning opening sensor 2601. When a signal is being input (when a game ball enters the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006) or the like, the special winning opening abnormal winning occurs and is classified into an alarm display as an abnormal state. A winning abnormality display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a radio wave irradiation goto and/or a magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 as detection of a fraud, while the radio wave irradiation goto and magnet are detected. When the goto is not detected, the value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud has not been detected. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, when the occurrence of an abnormal winning of the special winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that notifies the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines, based on the value of the above-described fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, that the fraudulent activity has not been detected. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing permission logic is set to the inverted firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. If the door frame opening switch detects that the body frame opening switch 4b is open, the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b is input, and the body frame opening switch 4b detects that the body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. The logic of the firing permission signal is as an initial value (default), that is, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power restoration), the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process is the main routine. Until the start, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the firing permission logic is set.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114). In this special design and special electric auditors product control processing, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance match (big hit. It is determined whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control ROM according to the big hit type or the small hit type. It is determined (whether the hit type is determined) whether or not any of the hit type determination values that match.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting mouth sensor 3052, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second starting mouth sensor 2401. If it is due to the above, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronization effect are created, stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, according to the variable display pattern of the determined special symbol, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is lit so as to light the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function indicator unit 1400. The output of the lighting signal to the display device is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it is a big hit game state, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N times display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big A winning hole 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, drive to the first attacker solenoid 2418 to open/close the opening/closing member. When the signal output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or the number of times (round) the first special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, the function display unit 1400 is rounded. The output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp is set so as to light the two-round display lamp of the display unit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 15, the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so that the 15-round display lamp of the round display is turned on, store it in the output information storage area as output information, and turn on/off the occurrence of time saving in a predetermined color. The output of a lighting signal to the status display of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the normal winning a prize winning process is performed based on this input information. In the normal winning opening process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning award winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (4 partitions), and the normal winning opening is in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. The winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th partition to the 2nd partition of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning award winning information is set, the ordinary winning award winning information storage of the first section of the ordinary winning award winning information is stored in the 0th section of the ordinary winning award winning information storage, the second of the ordinary winning award winning information storage. The regular prize opening prize information of the section is stored in the first section of the regular winning hole prize information storage, and the ordinary winning opening prize information of the third section of the regular winning hole prize information storage is stored in the second section of the ordinary winning hole prize information storage. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage after being shifted becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal prize opening prize information is stored in the first to second sections of the normal prize opening prize information storage, the normal prize opening prize information of the first section of the normal prize opening prize information storage is the normal prize winning information. In the 0th section of the ordinary winning award information storage, the ordinary winning award winning information of the second section of the ordinary winning award winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the award winning oral award information storing respectively, and the ordinary winning award winning information storing section is stored. The second section and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are empty areas. Here, if the normal prize hole prize information is stored in the first to third partitions of the normal prize hole prize information storage, the total number of the stored normal prize hole prize information is set as the reserved ball and the normal of the function display unit 1400 is set. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number per ordinary symbol is determined from the read normal winning opening winning information to perform the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not to open/close the movable piece is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is brought into the opening operation, and the game ball becomes receivable in the second starting opening 2004, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified in relation to the general symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information is stored. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the normal pattern, and the output information Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control ROM, various commands related to the normal electric character effect are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2415 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area, while the extracted normal When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above. , Create various commands related to the general figure synchronization effect, store them in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, and turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In this example, the winning probability of the normal lottery (probability of being a normal win) is 1/2.

Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. The main control MPU, for example, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, the main control MPU issues the main payout ACK signal. And a movable piece for outputting a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the first special winning opening 2005 when in the big hit game state, and opening and closing the second starting opening 2004. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2415 that performs the opening/closing operation of, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display Various information (game information) related to the game such as information output signal, time saving information output signal, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 633, or a launch permission logic or a launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic). The discharge permission signal set to is output to the payout control board 633, and the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 is displayed. It outputs a display signal to a special monitor or outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the transmission information is read from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. This transmission information is classified into various commands classified by special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified by special figure 2 tuning effect related, and jackpot related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. Various commands (for example, the special winning opening 1 corresponding to the special winning opening count command based on the detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2402 when the game ball entering the first special winning opening 2005 is detected) (Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as ordinary electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, status display Various commands that are classified, various commands that are related to tests, and various commands that are classified into other commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is a prize ball based on a game ball that has entered various prize holes provided in the game board 5). Whenever the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted as a main prize ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. Main prize ball number information output command, etc., and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 is 10 balls). Every time it reaches, the ball collection command to notify that, the setting change command to notify that the setting value has been changed, the contents stored in the main control internal RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted). ), an error display command for notifying the user, an ON operation command for a setting key for notifying a setting value stored in a setting value exclusive area, which will be described later, in a specific area of the main control internal RAM, etc.) are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main circumference serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by summing the mode as a numerical value, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes various commands as main circumference serial data. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as +5 V when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. The main serial transmission port built in the control MPU can transfer at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. You can do it. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power is restored and power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the power is turned on at step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 229. The power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on status command is configured as the main serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value. It transmits to the peripheral control board 1510, and then transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value that compose the main control return destination command at power-on, and then the power-on main prize ball number information. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information and set according to the various information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on state command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

When a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the player that the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls, the periphery is The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 for each received ball collection command, and is not shown. Updated with ball collection information (counted value (that is, the total number of game balls collected at the outlet 2010, the first sub-out 2011 and the second sub-out 2012) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC. Information associated with date and time) is updated. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off after the business hours of the game hall are ended without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011). Also, ball collection information in which the total number of game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012 and the updated date and time are associated with each other is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the start of the game hall business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 operates the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held as the ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and held in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as the ball collection information, the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the total sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT is cleared in step S122 by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the timing by the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT is not forced to be reset by the main control built-in WDT.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. It can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. When the power supply is turned on, a main control return destination command for instructing the drive state of the starting opening solenoid 2415 or the first attacker solenoid 2418 which is an electric drive source by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It can be output. That is, the main control board 1310 sets the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 228 in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on of step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 229. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area, the power-on status command classified as power-on is transmitted to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, main-cycle serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value forming the power-on status command, and then the power-on main control return destination. The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of composing the command, the status, the mode, and the sum value, and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on is subsequently composed. The information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, the return destination of the progress of the game display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect can be displayed in. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure should be immediately restored after power recovery. In addition to being able to perform, the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 for notification, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed.

Further, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process shown in the main control side, the entire area of the main control internal RAM must be cleared except for the specific area. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 229, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on. , Power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, a status command, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for power-on main prize ball number information output determination, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection process is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes a power-on state command as main circumference serial data. It is sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that make up the main control return destination command at power-on, and then the main prize ball number information output at power-on. The determination counter notification command is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-described max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if the probability variation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code for identifying (machine) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[13-5. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 231 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the set value is acquired, it may be read out or may be taken out. When the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is to calculate the sum of various types of information stored in the RAM with built-in main control as numerical values. Is the same as the calculation of

Following step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off processing (main power-off) in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) is equal (step S204). When determining in step S204 that the two match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG contains various types of information, a checksum value (sum value), and game backup information such as the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off process, which will be described later. This is a flag indicating whether or not the data is stored and held in RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. To be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been normally terminated, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by advancing to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been normally completed when the power is turned off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU determines that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range from set value 1 to set value 6 It is determined whether or not any of the values is set, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S208 that the main control MPU determines that the range is not within the normal range, the main control MPU sets the setting value 1 which is the initial value to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 which is the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not the value is a value, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. When it does, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, the main-control-side power-off process is not normally completed. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and the setting value 1 which is the initial value may be set for the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main-control-side power-off processing has normally ended, or the main control MPU determines in step S208. When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value to the setting display 1310g and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting switch button has been operated (step S216). In this determination, the detection signal from the setting switch button is read, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the setting switch button is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switch button is being operated when the detection signal from the setting switch button is being input, while the setting switch button is being operated when the detection signal from the setting switch button is not being input. Determine not.

When it is determined in step S216 that the setting switch button is operated, the main control MPU updates the setting value by adding (incrementing) 1 to the setting value (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is fetched and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g to update the setting value updated for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a in the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and sets the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder turned counterclockwise. The key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). Setting key switch. 1311a is turned on based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key has been operated. When the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the decision key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the enter key has not been operated, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated, the main control MPU performs the processing of steps S218 and S220 again, performs the determination of step S222, and does not operate the enter key. If the setting switch button is operated until the decision key is operated, the setting value is incremented by 1 and updated every time the setting switch 1310g is operated. When the setting switch button is not operated, the setting display button 1310g displays the updated set value immediately before the setting switch button is operated. By the time the determination key is determined to have been operated in step S222, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is fetched and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since the set value set in the above is updated, the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. After the processing of step S224 is completed, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the Enter key is operated before the power failure or the momentary power failure is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting key has been turned off (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and turns the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder. When the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the switch 1311a to the OFF position of the setting key cylinder, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. Based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When determining in step S226 that the setting key has not been operated to OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S226 again and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is operated to OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates that the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is set to the first ON position) stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. This is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change of the set value 1 to 6) at the time of operation, and when permitting to change the setting of the set value. A value of 1 and a value of 0 are set when the setting value is not permitted to be changed. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, so that the setting change of the setting value is not permitted thereafter.

Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as the one determined in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU normally checks the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set values 1 to 6 which is the range, and when it is determined to be in the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

When it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S234), subsequently creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is ended. The serial communication initial setting of step S234 is the same as the serial communication initial setting of step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 229, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmitting process of step S238 is the same as that of FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted as peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, this is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229. This is because the peripheral control board 1510 is notified by a setting change command that the setting value has been changed. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value of which setting has been changed and the completion of setting value storage. Upon receiving the setting change command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 updates the set value history information (information that associates the set value with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). To do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display processing is finished is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but if it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or if the main control side power-off process is not normally completed at power-off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[13-6. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the set value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value 0 as shown in FIG. 232 (step S350). The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. When the value is not displayed for confirmation, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has the value 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU determines whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on. It is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected. The signal and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by setting the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by the first turning ON operation by 60 degrees. Is determined to be open, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be ON by the signal of the setting key ON, it is determined that the preset set value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU ends this routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the set value is to be confirmed and displayed, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S356, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determinations in step S208 and step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 178. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 2 are set. Values 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the main control MPU acquires the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM). (Setting value stored in) is any one of setting value 1 to setting value 6 within the normal range, and when it is determined to be within the normal range, the setting value is used as it is. To do.

When it is determined in step S357 that the main control MPU is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 to the setting display device 1310g, and outputs the lighting signal to the setting display device 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates an ON operation command for the setting key and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), and ends this routine. The ON operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the set value confirmation display process of this routine has been started (that is, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information (setting value confirmed) of the setting key stored and held in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is confirmed. Information that associates the purpose with the date and time) is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the above-described ball collection history information, set value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the specific history information such as is permitted to be displayed is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510, the person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied is rotated by the person who confirms the specific history information and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. By performing the above, the control is performed to switch from the image that has been displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information and display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is being confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU operates the setting key OFF. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder turning position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a performs an OFF signal. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key is not turned OFF.

If it is determined in step S362 that the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU ends the routine as it is, whereas if it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU does not confirm and display the set value. The value 0 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and subsequently, the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired set value is hidden on the setting display 1310g (step S366), and subsequently, an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. The setting key OFF operation command is set (step S368), and this routine is ended. The OFF operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display processing of this routine has been completed (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM has been confirmed). Is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command for the setting key, the predetermined specific history information display permission condition described above is not established. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 is performing control to display the specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. The control is performed to switch back to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and to restore the image.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S357, when determining that the main control MPU is not within the normal range, the main control MPU sets the interrupt non-permission (step S370). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 230, which is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop that continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop will continue to clear the main control built-in WDT, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started. Therefore, by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT performs the main control. The MPU is not forced to reset. Also, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot be progressed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display process, a detailed description will be given later, but if it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal, or if the main control side power-off process is not normally completed at power-off. If the determination is made, it is determined that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy), and an error display indicating that is displayed. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[13-7. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, and is performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 (FIG. 231). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process illustrated in FIG. 23) is the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process illustrated in FIG. 232.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 233 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to launch the game ball B, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is started. While the logic is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the firing permission logic, the firing can be stopped (non-permission). ..

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228. (Specifically, when started as the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231,) the main control MPU interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 229. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 230 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function, it has a reset function when the power is restored. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, the error display processing which is the present routine of the processing executed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 228 or the processing executed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 228. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 231), the main control MPU, in step S400, recovers the power and then displays an error message that is the main routine. Even after the processing is started, in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) and its predetermined output port. To the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function.

When the error display process which is the routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 232, the main control MPU causes the main control MPU in step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are abnormal. Although the main control MPU has already set the interrupt permission of step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 229, it is already shown in FIG. 232 before the error display process of this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is made in step S370 in the set value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing which is the present routine is completed, as described above, the infinite loop is entered, and therefore the main control side shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process which is the present routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 232, the main control MPU causes an abnormality in the contents of the main control internal RAM in step S400. In order to surely prevent the game ball B from being launched in a certain state, the logic of the launch enable signal is set to the launch stop logic (the launch non-permission logic) and the output terminal of the predetermined output port is reset. It outputs to the firing control part 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all of the various display devices of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine is ended.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 231 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 229. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S410 includes the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 231 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228, and in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 228 (FIG. 231). 2) and the processing of step S372 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 232, the processing enters into an infinite loop as described above. By this endless loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the peripheral control serial data. 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control internal RAM are abnormal (or untrustworthy). Upon receiving the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 stores error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) Is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, a blue background image “RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff.” is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. While performing the control to display the message image of white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510. It is controlled not to depend on the volume, but forcibly set to the maximum volume, and the control is performed through various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of issuing the RAM error notification by the error display command has the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command to notify another error, the RAM is notified. Error notification is given the highest priority.

[14. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 237. FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on process, FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 234, and FIG. 236 is a payout control unit following FIG. 235. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. 234 to 236, the payout control unit power-on process is performed. .. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input as a power failure notification from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). Based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, it is determined that this determination does not instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. If the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW while it is determined that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the RAM clear is judged to be an instruction to perform the RAM clear. It is determined that the switch is operated.

When it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU is operating the RAM clear switch, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state capable of executing the RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) incorporated in the payout control MPU for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU has not operated the RAM clear switch, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize ball information storage area). The number of prize ball stocks PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. PRDY signal output setting information etc.) indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout is to be erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power shutdown process (power shutdown) described later. Yes (step S526). When it is determined in step S526 that the payout control MPUs match each other, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU determines that the power is restored and the payout control internal RAM is used. The work area of is set (step S530). With this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU, and this power recovery time is read. Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, The sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, and the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area is set, The information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. It should be noted that the term "power recovery" includes not only a state in which the power is turned off and a state in which the power is turned on, but also a state in which the power is subsequently restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to delete the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has not been normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes the power failure warning voltage or less, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. To be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

When it is determined in step S540 that the power outage notification signal is not input, the payout control MPU determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU inputs the power failure notice signal. It is determined whether it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on this various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command or self-check command) are normally received, and drive control of the payout motor 584 is performed. Various information such as driving information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the payout motor 584 outputs the number of balls actually paid out of the game balls to the external terminal board 558 as an award ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out the 10 game balls). Each time it is output, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output the prize ball number information is provided. The number of the game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, and the number of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. It is adapted to be stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is displayed. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later, the value is added with the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and the memory is updated.

In the port output processing of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds 10 ( That is, when the payout motor 584 has actually paid out 10 balls, the award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded). The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, the CR connection signal, and the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later are normally received are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when it is determined whether or not a ball gami state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, a ball gami determination time set as the determination condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and is set as the determination condition when it is determined whether or not the lower bowl 202 is full with the stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as the out-of-ball determination time set as the determination condition, the number of balls of the game balls received and paid out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the payout detection sensor 591 actually. When determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether to repeatedly pay out game balls that are not consistent due to the number of balls detected by Performs time management of the inconsistency counter reset determination time set as the condition. For example, when the ball-game determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-game determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer updating process is performed, and the subtraction result is the value. When it becomes 0, the ball determination time is accurately measured. The various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set).

By this processing, for example, even after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. As a result, even when the payout device 580 is performing the payout operation of the game balls, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202, a momentary power failure or a power failure causes the CR unit. Even if it is not possible to continue paying out game balls, the exchange of various signals with the game ball is interrupted, and when the power is restored, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, or the like, which is stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure, so that the instantaneous value is restored. Immediately before the stop or power failure, exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be continued after the power is restored, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power interruption or stop even when the power is restored or stopped. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. When the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal which tells that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is payout controlled. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. That is, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and the payout ball gami operation determination setting process is performed. As the setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, when the communication with the CR unit is not made, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible is output by the PRDY signal. The setting information is set and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, when the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored at the time of power restoration, so it is extremely early after power restoration. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 is provided to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the payout operation of the game ball by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and when the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. 1 is turned on, and when the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible, PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected to each other, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is impossible. It outputs to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the lower plate 202 described above is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full, or the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is a predetermined number or more based on the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. Or not. For example, the determination whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls is performed by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms from the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank (2 ms before) and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the timing of the full tank determination time described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing? Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is full in the stored game balls is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full tank information indicating that the lower bowl 202 is not full in the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area area.

To determine whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the timer interrupt period 2 ms is used to check whether the tank is full or out of ball this time. When the detection signal from the ball cut switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball cut switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) and ball cut check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is When the state changes from OFF to ON, the above-described out-of-ball determination time is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball is cut off. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The out-of-ball information that indicates that is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is abnormal (various command signals are abnormal). The information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal and ball gamming are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. ..

Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. To do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball cutout information is read out from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the ball cutout information, it corresponds. Display data (display value 1 (numeral “1”) in this embodiment) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state display based on the various information are created. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of balls of the game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and this power failure warning is notified. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. In step S554, CR communication processing is performed, in step S556, full tank and out-of-ball check processing is performed, in step S558, command reception processing is performed, in step S560, command analysis processing is performed, and in step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. To do. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to be able to sufficiently perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when it is determined that the power outage notice signal is input, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-mentioned payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watchdog timer for clearing (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information in the work area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU sets a prohibition setting for access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset at the time of a power failure or momentary power failure, and performs the payout control unit power-on process by the subsequent power restoration.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[14-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 234 to 236.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register, as shown in FIG. 237 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU sets a value of 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout controller, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 242. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller power-on process, FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 240 is an example of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described, and then the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral controller power failure notice signal interrupt process. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. The order is set to V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[15-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 238. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 238. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initialization processing, processing for initializing the peripheral control IC itself, hot start/cold start determination processing, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, processing for transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC is extremely short. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control command reception interrupt process described later, a command relating to the control of the game effect, which is output from the main control board 1310. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the like can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed in response to this. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized to once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so as not to reset the CPU of the peripheral control IC after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1. ing.

In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a value of 1 for the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady processing is being executed and a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is performed Also, the value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) and Various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set), the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation are performed. Whether to reflect the state of the operation of the operation unit 303 in the game effect is appropriately determined. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted luminance. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the effect proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light, based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value, Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specification value ranging from the brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specification value. The key information can be updated.

Here, the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that compose the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (extinction) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. It is a value that can be set, and a normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. The player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set the first brightness specified value to the maximum brightness of the 31st brightness. It is possible to set one luminance specified value up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotationally operates the rotating operation unit 302 in a clockwise direction, the current luminance is temporarily set to the minimum luminance (light out), and the 0th (zero) luminance is designated. When the brightness is set to the first brightness specified value which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear expression) from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light are changed to be higher along a tone curve or a tone curve like a spline curve, while the rotation operation unit 302 is turned off. When rotating clockwise, and when the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, linearly) from the maximum brightness to the 31st brightness specification value is set. Along with a different tone curve or a tone curve like a spline curve), the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as the direct light are changed so as to be lowered. When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is prepared in advance that the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) can set the brightness while the production is in progress. At this time, the player (or the clerk in the game hall) Staff member) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position of the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the production of the effect, the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image what the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th brightness designation value is set as an initial value (default).

The normal pallet value is set by the brightness information of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side or the door frame side, which are directly illuminated by light, as the gradation information described above. is there. The normal pallet value is selected from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value, in one of 17 steps in 5% increments. In a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which are specified values, a palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a tone curve like a spline curve).

The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value which are the above-mentioned brightness designation values. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the above-mentioned luminance specified value. It is a value for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for various decorative boards provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Of the various decorative boards that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are provided on the game board side that is directly irradiated with light, a palette is provided for a specific decorative board (LED that makes the player feel dazzling) not shown. The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information, which is the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. The special pallet value is different from the normal pallet value in only one step, and is one of the 32 step ranges from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which are the above-mentioned brightness specified values. The palette value corresponding to the brightness designation is set as the above-described gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, when the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set using the special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as the direct light. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits the indirect light for the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (off). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value that is almost equal to the 18th brightness specification value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and is in the range from the 1st brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value is set according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. The brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player and the staff (such as a clerk in the game hall) operate the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness of the While being set according to the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or an employee such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The value is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness designated value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set the brightness of the LED used as direct light to be dazzling, and to reduce the brightness, the brightness is changed to direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the minimum brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off) and the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level). Then, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the minimum brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (light off)). Also, since the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth brightness designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), The minimum brightness is set so that the state where the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set, set the light emission mode according to the flow of production, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side Then, the normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a particular decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce more effect), and By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, it is possible to extremely easily change the balance of the entire light emitting mode. That is, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness designation value to the 31st brightness. Even if one brightness specified value up to the brightness specified value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness specified value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance specification value is set for each of the other decorative boards, the relationship of the light emission modes set (bright or dark) is set. The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the above relationship.

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light from the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, a special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) is used for the LED used as the indirect light. The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is normally managed by the palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted respectively.

Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. The drawing data for one minute (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeds the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. This makes it possible to prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although so-called frame drop occurs, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame are generated by the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the production of effect sounds such as music and sound effects that are matched with various effects from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as “various speakers”).

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound data to various speakers from the set output channel in the sound data creation process described later. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various effects.

Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data to output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data To update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data is to be output. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound command data that directs the sound data of the effect sound such as music and sound effect, and the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series to configure the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series that form the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data to be output is set as the output target. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which form the electric drive source schedule data, is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which will be repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor/solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be instructed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data originally instructed in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed, and used for various effect settings. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to hold prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands that have been performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (Extracted) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp pallet setting process. By executing, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the maximum brightness is reached from the above-described first brightness designation value. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the gradation information described above may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the normal symbol A normal pattern storage command for identifying the number of holdings (0 to 4), a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. The command, the symbol storage command that is output when the number of starting pending changes, and whether or not it is the command for displaying 1 count of the special winning opening that is output each time a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 is analyzed. Recognize which gaming state you are in.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related commands, various commands classified as special figure 2 tuning effect related commands, various commands classified as jackpot related commands, various commands classified as power-on, and general commands. Figure Various commands related to performance related, various commands related to normal electric-role effect, various commands related to notification display, various commands related to status display, various commands related to test, and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical data. The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511, various data, various control data, and various schedule data are stored in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-series arrangement of light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC. , And a track number for instructing in which track the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set, The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when multiple anomalies occur at the same time, the anomaly notification is performed from the highest priority order registered in advance, and the anomaly is automatically resolved and the remaining anomaly notification is automatically made. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before another abnormal condition has been resolved. You can

Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is selected from the peripheral control ROM among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. Read out (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When the screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one minute (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. It is read from the peripheral control ROM (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is determined based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Outputs sound data from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects tailored to various effects can be played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value to obtain a value of 0 to 0. The value is converted to a value of 1023 in 1024 steps. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4 are controlled. Music and sound effects come to play from. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch. It is like this.

It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the rotation of the volume adjustment switch. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. For a certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the container (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, to the peripheral control unit) 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the variation pattern command has been received and after the variation display of the decorative pattern has started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the decorative display was confirmed and displayed after the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except the above), it can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), Special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) in a fixed period when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example the surroundings 0.5 seconds after the variation pattern command is received by the control unit and 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed. (Until the second elapses), by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by setting the board volume by adding or subtracting the predetermined value accordingly.

Further, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC includes a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the central volume speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4 are amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized. And output as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side. The volume that flows from the top-side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, out of the plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume control switch, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting, is combined with the adjusted board volume, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually the center of the top of the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top-side speaker 464, and the main volume speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 are amplified to a master volume value that is a volume, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to be used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume and the volume of the combined notification sound are combined with each other, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually combined with the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the effect sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a pachinko machine is generated. To briefly explain the control for sending the alarm sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the illegal act for 1, the subvolume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this effect sound The sound data of the built-in track, the sub-volume value set to mute that sound, the sound data of the track that contains the notification sound, and the sub-volume value that sets the volume of the notification sound to the maximum volume are combined. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume that flows from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4. To the master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, but the effect sound is described above. It is proceeding according to the generated sound generation schedule data.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period of time, the volume of the effect sound that has been proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute up to the sub-volume that is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch It is set again as the volume value (at this time, when the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. (Set to the volume value), and the sound comes from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the effect sound is being output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4, the malfunction or pachinko machine of the pachinko machine 1 is generated. When a notification sound is played to notify a clerk of the hall of a misconduct to the machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although it is played from the low-frequency main body frame speaker 622 of FIG. 4, the muffled effect sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data. When the 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of the main body frame 4 stop flowing, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound started to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow for a predetermined period. The flow starts again from the point where it has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the point of time that has passed.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a malfunction occurs or the player is conducting an illegal act, the notification sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff member such as the clerk in the game hall from being liable to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the cheating of the player by the notification sound.

Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for regular processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets a value 0 to the in-steady-processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1008-step The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this way, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and the value is set to 1 in the steady process flag SP-FLG. .., and step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of peripheral processing steady processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later and is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[15-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process that is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 239 (step S1045). As described above, the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the CPU does not change this. Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC detects the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 1 is set to FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to perform the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is to be performed as the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 238. Since the processing is forcibly canceled on the way and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, for the purpose of preventing this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 238. In this routine, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is notified that the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed by setting the value 1 in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG, and the peripheral control in FIG. The peripheral control unit, which is the routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed by setting the value 0 in the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the process of turning on the power to the unit (peripheral control unit steady process). By notifying the V blank signal interrupt process, whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process. It is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing drop.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 238 that the next time. Then, the state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, which has been omitted, is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. 238. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, which has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is missed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[15-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 238 will be described. .. When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 240 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 238. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is 0.3 ms (=1000 ms÷30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second,..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. When the determination is made, this routine is finished as it is. In the case where the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing has a higher priority than the peripheral controller V in the present embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. After the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1100 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 238. This means that the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids that are arranged in time series and constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data to be updated, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and updates the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 or the like) ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5. The moving position is grasped by setting or by acquiring the moving position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the rotation operation unit). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc. are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, it is possible to acquire the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence/absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 by operating the production operation unit 301. Can be adjusted and the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM. Backup is performed by copying to the provided backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM is The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the above and the regular processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the effect progresses within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 238, various processes related to the effect of step S1014 to step S1032 are executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is finished as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. The 1ms timer interrupt process is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[15-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to send the main circumference serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC for 1 byte (8 bits). ) Information is loaded into the reception buffer, and when this loading is completed, an interrupt occurs triggered by this, and peripheral command command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and the mode are considered as numerical values as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 241 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs 1-byte (8-bit) information when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, in the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data. The value is 2 when taken out from the reception buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in value, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the mode is the second byte of the main serial data after the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is finished. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the period during which the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses the second byte of the main-cycle serial data after the status which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data in a certain mode, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the total (sum value ) Is calculated.

Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facility in the game hall, and when the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value is the same as the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the main-circulation serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been changed to normal main-circulation serial data affected by noise. Can be determined.

In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, with the sum value calculated in step S1212. If it is determined that the received status is assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period over which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value that is the third byte of the main-cycle serial data that has already been retrieved from the reception buffer in step S1202. Then, when it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, the routine is finished as it is.

[15-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing executed when the power outage notification signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 242 to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. It is determined (step S1302). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, the CPU directly ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal is input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC has not elapsed 2 macroseconds, the CPU returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input, and the power failure notice signal is not input. When it is determined that this routine is ended as it is, when it is determined that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started.

In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt process of this routine is started and the power outage notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, the CPU performs the power saving process. Perform (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the electric power of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least for a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command backup process (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal is not input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. Determine whether. That is, it will continue to determine indefinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined that the power failure advance notice signal is not input in the determination of step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process in step S1314, CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 238 is restarted.

In this way, when the power failure warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. It is designed so that it will not take place. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise, and the noise occurs for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, When the power failure warning signal is not continuously input in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 243, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3052. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM first. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol reserved storage area is executed (step S232). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled is set (step S235), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is stopped is 15R jackpot, A process for controlling the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 is executed according to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, when it becomes a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", when it becomes a mode that suggests "2R jackpot" by executing processing for controlling opening and closing of the 1st special winning opening 2005 according to the 5R jackpot gaming state Then, the process of controlling the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the 2R big hit game state is executed.

Further, in the big hit control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005, each process of setting the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is in a time saving state, and the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode that suggests "2R jackpot" 2R jackpot game It is set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the fact that it has become a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", and when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. .. Then, the time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the count value of the time saving counter becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 254 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown. Reset by processing.

Further, the time saving counter is a counter showing the remaining number of times of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuation of the time saving state, and controls to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this case, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, the number of times the short-timed state is continued is set. Then, the hour/hour counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but it becomes the next big hit before the counter value becomes "0". Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 254 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown (return the counter value to “0”).

If the big hit execution flag is not set, on condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is "0". (Step S237), the first special symbol process processing including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol reserved storage area is stored in the second. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the above-mentioned first starting opening passage processing (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 244. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first number of reserved storages is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is not the maximum value thereof, the following step S243 to set the variable display control of the first special symbol to the newly reserved state. The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is a first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S241. Whether or not to be a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the production pre-determination processing for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before the variation display corresponding to the start winning is started (step S245), the processing is ended.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is the first reserved memory. While updating to correspond to the number, the command for instructing the first reserved memory number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 stored command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It is like this.

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation. Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or is executed. The type of the game effect), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the number of reserved counters) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the first special random number is acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of the one special reserved number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding to it is set (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memory to be held, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is to be a big hit, if it is a big hit, the kind of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the reach effect is executed as the game effect to be executed or the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is started before the variable display according to the start winning is started. IC can be grasped.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. When the pre-determination command is received when the pre-determination information is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the pre-determination information notified to the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variable display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-determination information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the variable display start occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), this can be preceded, for example, at a predetermined timing such as a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display corresponding to the hold exhaustion. ..

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage processing (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the on state and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 246. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the second special pending number counter from the main control internal RAM, and based on this counter value, the second pending storage number reaches its maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “1” (step S252). In the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S253-, in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol in the suspended state The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special pending number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the number of second reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the number of second reserved memories changes based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is the second reserved memory. While updating to correspond to the number, the command for instructing the second reserved storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1). It is like this.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball to the second starting opening 2004. The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on the fact that the player has entered is set to "1". The second starting opening 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a second start opening 2004. Even if a game ball is entered, it is suppressed that the player cannot get a chance to win the big hit, which is a disadvantage to the player.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and random numbers used for determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, depending on the first special symbol process flag described above, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the determination process of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol fluctuation control is stopped (step S281) )
3. A variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and a variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. Variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process for
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283)
5. The variation control stop mode of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S284)

The first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 274).

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 248, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) is read from the same RAM. .. Then, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserve number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserve storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as a process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process ends.

FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. 185(A) (first special random number read in step S302 when the first special symbol normal process is executed, When the two special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process) (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 250(A) is for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state ( It has a big hit judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of low probability short time state)) and a big hit judgment table at the time of high probability used when the game state is at the high probability time (high probability short time state). .. In the low probability hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 1/319 is set when the setting value is 1, 1/309 is set when the setting value is 2, and 3 is set value. The first special random number is a big hit with a big hit probability of 1/299 in the case, 1/289 in the case of setting value 4, 1/279 in the case of setting value 5, and 1/269 in the case of setting value 6. It coincides with the big hit judgment value that indicates that it has done, the first special random number with the small hit probability of 3/319 coincides with the big hit judgment value that indicates that it has won the small hit, and the other first special random numbers are the above-mentioned deviations. The above-mentioned first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with the loss determination value indicating that there is. Further, in the present example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, if the setting value is 1/319, the setting value is 2 1/309 in some cases, 1/299 in case of setting value 3, 1/289 in case of setting value 4, 1/279 in case of setting value 5, and 1/269 in case of setting value 6. With the big hit probability that the second special random number is a big hit, it coincides with the big hit judgment value that shows that the second special random number is a small hit with a small hit probability of 144/319. However, the second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the other second special random numbers coincide with the loss determination value indicating the loss. That is, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the probability of being determined as a small hit is higher than that for the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed Is more advantageous for the player. In addition, the high-probability-hit hit determination table is configured so that the big-hit probability for each set value can be increased 10 times compared to the low-probability-hit hit determination table.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process) As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S313), and the hit judging process is ended.

The result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a reach determination table at the time saving state used when the game state is at the time saving state and a non-time saving used at the time when the game state is at the non-time saving state And a reach determination table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination value is such that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach and 71 types of reach random number match the reach determination value indicating not to reach. Random numbers are associated with each.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state match the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers reach, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers are not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that there is reach loss as a result of the comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316) (step S317), the variation is changed. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 251, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the big symbol design table shown in FIG. 250(B) with the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. By determining the type of big hit by, the mode at the time of fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. It is closed after opening the first prize hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first prize hole sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have been won in the first prize hole 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to the 15R big hit game state, and the special symbol (first special after the big hit game state ends) Until the variable display of the symbol, the second special symbol is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and a high probability time saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual 15R sure change big hit to control 2. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, it is closed. By opening and closing the pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 2005 (easy) and control to the 5R big hit game state, and after the big hit game state special symbol (first special symbol) , 2nd special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time short hit big to shorten the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot gaming state in which it can (easily) enter the first big winning opening 2005, and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot gaming state. If there is a jackpot game state after the end of the state of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) variable display is executed 77 times until it is a big hit If it is finished, it is controlled to a short time state, 2R 2R big hit to control to the normal state after the end of the big hit game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the big hit game state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

In addition, the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the second special symbol (stop symbol of the second special symbol) is
In particular,
1. It is closed after opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have been won in the second big winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds) to let the game ball enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy) 15R big hit game state is controlled, after the big hit game state special symbol (first special Until the variable display of the symbol, the second special symbol is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and a high probability time saving state in which the special lottery result is selected with a higher probability than usual 15R sure change big hit to control 2. After opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2006 is closed. By opening and closing the pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball can be entered into the second big winning hole 2006 (easy) by controlling the 5R big hit game state, and after the big hit game state is finished, a special symbol (first special symbol) , 2nd special symbol) until the variable display is executed 77 times, 5R time short hit big to shorten the execution period of the variable display than usual,
3. After opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2006 is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot gaming state in which it can (easily) enter the second big winning opening 2006, and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot gaming state. If there is a jackpot game state after the end of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) variable display is executed 77 times until it is a big hit, it will be finished in a time-saving state, 2R 2R big hit to control to the normal state after the end of the big hit game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the big hit game state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

In the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed when the 15R probability variation jackpot is obtained, and 100 judgment values are distributed when the 5R hour short-term jackpot is distributed, and the 2R jackpot is obtained. In this case, 92 judgment values are distributed. That is, if a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 15% jackpot with a probability of 4%, a 5R jackpot with a probability of 50%, and a 2R jackpot with a probability of 46%. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 92 determination values are distributed when the 15R probability variation jackpot is obtained, and 100 determination values are distributed when the 5R time-shortening jackpot is distributed, and 2R. Eight judgment values are distributed in the case of a big hit. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 46% probability of a 15R certainty variation big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 4% probability of a 2R big hit. .. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared to the big symbol symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, the probability of being determined as a 15R probability variable big hit is high. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting opening 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002, It is in an advantageous state for the player.

Further, when the type of big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be a 2R jackpot, it is determined to be a 2R jackpot design as a jackpot design, when it is determined to be a 5R jackpot it is determined to be a 5R jackpot design as a jackpot design, and when it is determined to be a 15R jackpot As a design, it is determined to be a 15R jackpot design.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 250(C) are compared to determine the type of small hit, and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. The opening and closing pattern for closing the second big winning opening 2006 for a short period of time (for example, 80 ms) and then executing the opening and closing pattern twice is executed to control the gaming ball into the small winning game state in which it can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy). First small hit 2. The opening and closing pattern in which the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed 9 times to control the gaming ball into a small hitting game state in which it can (easily) enter the second big winning opening 2006. Either one of the two types of small hits will be decided.

In the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed when the first small hit occurs. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 100% probability that the first small win is won and the second small win is not won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 180 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. ing. That is, when the lottery result of the small winning is obtained by the lottery based on the second special random number, the first small winning is at a probability of 10% and the second small winning is at a probability of 90%.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when the first small hit is decided, the first small hit symbol is decided as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is decided, the second small hit symbol is decided as the small hit symbol. ..

When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines a deviating symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S328, the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, out of reach, out of contact) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). ). Then, after that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle) Stop display in the order of decorative designs (note that the left, middle, and right decorative designs may be displayed in sync with the same design in a variable manner and may be stopped at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command, as a mode (stop pattern) when the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing. Is a small hit design ("final decisive battle"), and if 5R hour/short/big hit is specified, the 5R hour/hour/big hit pattern (the left, middle, and right decorative designs are the same among the symbols "0" to "9") If it is determined to be a combination that becomes an even number pattern and 15R certainty variation big hit is specified, the 15R certainty variation big hit pattern (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd number symbol among "0" to "9" symbols) Combination). In addition, when the reach out is specified, a detached pattern accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same symbols whose left and right decorative symbols are "0" to "9" and different inside decorative symbols; reach loss) (Design), and when the outlier is specified, determine the outlier design without reach (a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs in which at least the left and right decorative designs are different), and change When the variation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop design is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game state can be controlled to the time saving state until it is executed up to 77 times, but the time saving state The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the shift control is performed. Specifically, after controlling the short hit state after the big hit game state, if a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) big hit occurs, without controlling to the short time state after the predetermined number of times of the big hit game state. Alternatively, the normal state may be controlled. Further, even when the number of occurrences of the big hit is less than a predetermined number, it may be controlled to a non-time saving state during the big hit game state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the big hit game state.

FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, the big hit flag is set, as shown in FIG. 252. If it is done (step S341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag. If is set and entered (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal In the case of a loss (a loss in which the reach effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the variation pattern table is started around The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation patterns set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. Then, the main control MPU, of the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variable random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, and by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super-reach effect is executed, the expectation of the player for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the hour/hour count counter in which the number of times of continuation of the hour/hour state is set is "0". To do. Then, if the counter value is not "0", after the time saving counter is counted down (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short time counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control in the time saving state (time saving control) is ended is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the processing of step S351 that the count value of the hour/hour counter is "0", and if it is determined in the processing of step S353 that the hour/hour counter is not "0", then Then, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of deviation, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), In the non-time saving state, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set. .. That is, in the variation pattern at the time of out of time selected in the time saving state, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of out of time selected in the non-time saving state, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, The variable time information of the special symbol is set.

FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 253, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S371. As the processing of 1, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery processing (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has passed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the first special symbol process flag described above is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 254, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, first, step S381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). With this, when the variable display of the predetermined number of special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is ended and the non-time saving control is performed. (Normal state control) is started.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started (step S387), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (time for displaying the start of the big hit game and the like) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit to a big hit counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit count counter reaches “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to hit the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the special winning opening opening pre-process (step S401) and the special winning opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches "0", and the big winning is opened. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0". Then, the process shifts to the big winning mouth opening post-process (step S403) to end the jackpot game. Control to be executed.

Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a big hit start command (15R sure change big hit start command, 5R time short hit big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) corresponding to the type of big hit (15R sure change big hit, 2R big hit big hit, 2R big hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit game in accordance with the kind of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, the big hit start command (15R sure change big hit start command, 5R time short hit big hit) corresponding to the type of big hit (15R sure change big hit, 5R time short big hit, 2R big hit) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) are set.

In addition, the big hit execution flag which shows that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, the big winning opening after-process (step S403) of the big hit control process (step S235A) Opening/closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or having won 10 game balls in the first special winning opening 2005) The opening/closing pattern for closing the opening/closing pattern to be closed when detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is repeated twice, five times, or fifteen times) and the opening/closing control of the second special winning opening 2006 (for example, the first big winning opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have entered the first special winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern is closed twice. Times, or open/close control repeated 15 times) is reset (all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game). While the jackpot execution flag is reset, the jackpot control processing (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (step S114), while the first of the function display unit 1400 is executed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 become executable.

If the big hit flag is not set (step S386), and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. A small hit start command is set (step S391), and a waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying that the small hit game is started, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small hit. In step S391, a small hitting start command (first small hitting start command, second small hitting start command) corresponding to the type of small hitting (first small hit, second small hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, small hitting start command (first small hitting start command, first 2 small hit start command) is set.

In addition, the small hitting execution flag which shows that the small hitting game is being executed, when the small hitting game is finished, specifically, the small hitting mid-process (step S411) of the small hitting control process (step S236A) described later. ) Open/close control of the second special winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, opening/closing control in which the opening/closing pattern of opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice or nine times) Will be reset when you exit. While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Also, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if it becomes a loss, set the interval timer to the waiting time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. Then, (step S395), this processing ends.

FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. Notification to the player such as transition to the big hit game state based on the fact that the variation display stop state of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes the big hit symbol, the peripheral control board Pre-opening process for the special winning opening that waits until it is performed by 1510 or waits until the next round starts (step S401)
2. Based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped becomes a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state, or the next round is started. The first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to an open state, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or after the first big winning opening 2005 has 10 game balls. When it is detected that the first big winning opening sensor 2402 has won a prize, or after the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or at the second big winning opening 2006, there are 10 game balls. Processing for opening the special winning opening, which is closed when the second special winning opening sensor 2601 detects that a prize has been won (step S402)
3. After all the rounds are finished, the big winning opening opening post-processing is waited for until the peripheral control board 1510 informs the player that the jackpot gaming state is over (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the processing of step S42. In the processing for opening the special winning opening (step S402), at the start of a round for controlling the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 to be in an open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of the round of setting and controlling the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 to a closed state, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a big hit game effect is displayed according to the number of rounds designated by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker and the like.

[Dot matrix display]
Next, a circuit board on which an LED used as a display unit having an important function is mounted will be described. In this example, the display unit having an important function is information relating to the profit of the player (for example, special lottery result, type of big hit or small hit, specific big hit (probable variation big hit, 15R big hit, etc.), high probability Whether or not state control is being executed, whether time saving control is being executed, etc.) is displayed. It should be noted that, in addition to the above, an LED for displaying information relating to the profits of a player or a game store and a display section having a circuit board on which an LED for displaying important information relating to the progress of a game are mounted have an important function. May be used as the display unit.

As shown in FIG. 256, in this example, a dot matrix display unit 7000 as a display unit having an important function is provided in place of the back side effect unit 3400. As shown in FIG. 257A, a dot matrix display 7000 includes a case 7100 formed of a colored opaque (white in this example) resin or the like having no translucency, and a substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100. A plurality of LEDs 7001 arranged and mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the board 7200, and a predetermined color (white in this example, but light blue or blue) mounted on the back surface (rear surface: LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200. It may have a connector 7002 of other colors such as yellow and green, and a translucent film 7300 attached to the surface (front surface) side of the case 7100. The plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is directly mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200. .. The colored and opaque resin may be black, gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow or the like in addition to white.

Further, the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 are divided into different systems, and the plurality of LEDs 7001 can individually and independently control light emission. Thus, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be displayed by causing a predetermined LED 7001 of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 to emit light. It should be noted that a light emitting decorative body (a back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, a back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, a back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and Back back right rotation decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) The light emission is controlled for each group of (two or more) LEDs, and a plurality of LEDs included in this group are caused to emit light. However, it may be a part of the surface). In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 are controlled to emit light based on a lottery result of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and a predetermined character. Display symbols, figures, etc.

In addition, on the surface of the dot matrix display 7000 (the surface of the front surface cover portion 7110 described later), a part (a portion corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a and the like) is made semitransparent (in this example, it is cloudy ground glass) and A transparent film 7300 having a colored and opaque (black in this example) portion is adhered to the portion, and the lighting state of the LED 7001 is visually recognized through the transparent film 7300. It should be noted that, without attaching the translucent film 7300 to the front side of the dot matrix display 7000, a film may be attached to the surface of another decorative member or printed on the surface of another decorative member. The dot matrix display 7000 may be arranged at the rear so that the lighting state of the LED 7001 can be visually recognized through another decorative member. In addition, the light-transmissive film 7300 may not be provided in front of the dot matrix display 7000, but the light emitted from the LED 7001 can be visually recognized through the light-transmissive film 7300 to thereby make the LED 7001 serving as a light source. Can be prevented from being directly viewed by the player so as not to make the player feel dazzling, and the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually surface-emitted by the translucent film 7300. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light, a light source is emitted. Can be made inconspicuous.

In this example, a light-emitting resin (for example, milky-white polypropylene (PP) or transparent polyethylene terephthalate (PET)) is used as a light-emitting decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440). , Rear back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration (Embodiment 3813, etc.), which is provided on the body 3813 or the like and controls light emission in relation to the variation effect, and covers a specific region (LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the circuit board (front surface) of the light emitting decoration body). )) is mounted on the surface of the circuit board on which the LED mounted is mounted. The most effective reflection efficiency is to increase the efficiency by which the light emitted by the mounted LED is reflected on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the circuit board. Highly white insulating coating is applied to form a white insulating film (solid white resist, white resist layer) (white resist treatment is performed).

On the other hand, the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 for individually surface-emitting a plurality of LEDs 7001 provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is mounted is coated with a black insulating paint having the lowest reflection efficiency. A black insulating film (solid black resist, black resist layer) is formed (black resist treatment is performed). As a result, although the efficiency with which the light emitted by the dot matrix display 7000 is reflected on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 is reduced, the LED 7001 is directed directly forward (the irradiation direction of the LED, the front direction of the substrate 7200). The interference between the emitted light and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted toward the front is suppressed, and the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be clearly recognized. As described above, in this example, normally, a white insulating film is formed (resist treatment) to increase the brightness in order to increase the reflection efficiency of the circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted, but a plurality of LEDs are independently Circuit board on which a plurality of LEDs each of which has an important function are mounted and which is mounted on the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 of the dot matrix display 7000 is mounted is another circuit board on which the LED is mounted. An insulating film of a color different from that of is formed, and the role of the LED mounted on the circuit board can be determined by the color of the insulating film (resist) formed on the circuit board. There is. That is, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the circuit board is an LED on which an important function is mounted.

As described above, in the present example, regarding the circuit board for which the brightness of the light emitting decoration is desired to be improved, such as the circuit board provided in the light emitting decoration for controlling the light emission of the plurality of LEDs for each group in association with the variation effect, A white insulating film is formed (resist processing), and the light emission of each of the plurality of mounted LEDs 7001 is made clear like a substrate 7200 provided in a dot matrix display 7000 that individually and independently controls the light emission of the plurality of LEDs. Since a black insulating film is formed (resist process) for the substrate 7200 that is desired to be visually recognized, the circuit board provided on the light emitting decoration is improved in reflection efficiency of light emitted by the mounted LED and when the LED emits light. Since it is possible to suppress a decrease in the brightness of the light emitting decoration, it is possible to improve the effect of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Further, regarding the dot matrix display 7000, when light is emitted from the plurality of LEDs 7001, the reflection of light is suppressed so that the light emitted from the LEDs 7001 directly toward the front and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted toward the front are interfered with each other. In addition to being suppressed, the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly visible by comparison with the LED mounting surface on which the black insulating film is formed. In addition, a substrate 7200 provided on a dot matrix display 7000 that individually controls light emission and displays important information related to the progress of the game (for example, a special lottery result), and a predetermined number of LED units (a group including a predetermined number of LEDs). Each time) and the circuit board provided on the light-emitting ornament that does not display important information related to the progress of the game (may be displayed infrequently) And the color of the LED mounting surface of the circuit board for different purposes (to enhance the effect of effect, etc.) for excitement of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and is mounted on the defective circuit board. It is easy to determine whether or not the LED or other light emitting means displays important information, and to determine the LED control unit (whether to control every predetermined number of LEDs or independently). Therefore, it becomes possible to promptly deal with a problem in the light emitting means for displaying important information relating to the progress of the game, so that it is possible to prevent deterioration in the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as described above, in this example, the substrate 7200 on which the black insulating film is formed is housed in the case 7100 formed of a colored opaque white resin having no light transmitting property. That is, with respect to the substrate 7200 on which a black insulating film having a low reflection efficiency (not limited to black, a dark color such as green or violet may be formed), white having a high reflection efficiency (not limited to white, yellow or By housing in a case 7100 (which may be a light color such as light blue), the case 7100 enhances the reflection efficiency of the light emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 from another circuit board on which the LED is mounted. be able to. On the other hand, with respect to the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, a black (not limited to black, but may be a dark color such as green or purple) insulating film having low reflection efficiency is formed, and thus is mounted on the substrate 7200. The interference of light of each of the LEDs 7001 is suppressed, and each light can be clearly visually recognized.

Further, a translucent film 7300 is attached to a part of the surface (front surface) side of the case 7100, and a part of the translucent film 7300 is non-translucent opaque black. Since the translucent film 7300 is not attached to the side surface and the back surface (rear surface) side of the case 7100 and the white case 7100 is exposed, the pachinko machine can be removed from the circuit boards arranged in the rear or side of the case 7100. The light emitted toward the front of the machine 1 can be reflected with high efficiency to enhance the brightness, thereby enhancing the effect of production.

Further, in this example, the light-colored connector 7002 (having a light-colored housing) is arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200. As described above, since a dark (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the board 7200, the light-colored connector 7002 is attached to the surface (LED mounting surface) of the board 7200. , The front surface), the reflection efficiency on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is increased, and the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 interferes with each other so that the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 cannot be clearly recognized. There is a risk. Without arranging the light-colored connector 7002 on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted ( By arranging it on the LED non-mounting surface), interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be suppressed and individual light emission of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly recognized. Further, the dark color (having a dark color housing) connector 7002 may be arranged on the back surface of the substrate 7200 on which no LED is mounted (LED non-mounting surface), or the dark color connector 7002 may be dark color (in this example, You may make it mount on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the board|substrate 7200 in which a black insulating film (resist) is formed. By arranging the dark-colored connector 7002 on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress improvement in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200, and the dark-colored connector 7002. Even if it is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark color (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is excessive. Can be prevented from improving.

Not limited to the connector, a light-colored electronic component (may have a part different from the light-colored part) (for example, a resistor, a capacitor, a diode, an IC, an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), etc.) ) May not be arranged on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which the dark insulating film is formed, but may be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted. Further, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. Further, a dark-colored electronic part (which may have a part different from the dark-colored part (a silver-colored metal part, a transparent resin part, etc.)) (for example, a resistor, a capacitor, a diode, an IC, an LED driver IC ( Constant current drive circuit), etc.) may be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, or for a dark electronic component, a dark (black in this example) insulating film (in this example). You may make it mount on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the board|substrate 7200 in which a resist is formed. By arranging the dark-colored electronic component on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the dark-colored electronic component. Even if it is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a dark color (black in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is excessive. Can be prevented from improving.

In addition, a light-emitting decorative body that controls light emission in relation to the above-described change effect (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610, rear Rear movable decorative body 3110, back-up front rotating decoration 3410, back-up front decoration 3421, back-front left decoration 3713, back-front right decoration 3813, etc.) and a circuit board provided on the door frame 3 to mount LEDs. (Back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration body unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top rendering unit 3400, back front right decoration board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right presentation unit 3250 Lower back right decorative board 3253, lower back left decorative board 3203 of lower back left production unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame top left A white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and the like. In these circuit boards, the dark connector (having a dark housing) may be mounted on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the circuit board on which the LED is not mounted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which the white insulating film (resist) is formed and increase the brightness of the LED, so that the effect of the production is improved. Also, a light-colored connector (having a light-colored housing) may be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, or the light-colored connector 7002 may be white-insulated. You may make it arrange|position on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the circuit board in which a film (resist) is formed. By disposing the light-colored connector 7002 also on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200, and Even if the connector 7002 is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not excessively reduced. Can be

Further, not only the connector but also a dark-colored electronic part (which may have a part different from the dark-colored part) (for example, a resistor, a capacitor, a diode, an IC, an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), etc.) May be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, instead of being arranged on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which the light-colored insulating film is formed. Also, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. Further, a light-colored electronic component (for example, a resistor, a capacitor, a diode, an IC, an LED driver) which has a light-colored part (may have a part different from the light-colored part (a silver metal part, a transparent resin part, etc.)) The IC (constant current drive circuit) or the like may also be arranged on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, or for a light-colored electronic component, a white insulating film (resist) may be used. You may make it mount on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the board|substrate 7200 formed. By arranging light-colored electronic components also on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200, and Even if the electronic component is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 on which a white insulating film (resist) is formed, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not excessively reduced. Can be

In the above example, as the substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, a black insulating coating is applied to form a black insulating film, but the dot matrix display 7000 is shown. Of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100 of FIG. 7 is not limited to the black insulating paint, and may be purple, dark blue, dark green, or the like. To form a dark-colored insulating film (solid-colored dark color (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) resist, dark color (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) resist layer) You may do so. However, a circuit board on which a black insulating film is formed by applying a black insulating paint has a higher reflection efficiency than a circuit board on which a dark insulating film other than black is applied and a dark insulating film is formed. Because of its low price, a circuit board on which a black insulating film is formed by applying a black insulating paint is applied, rather than a circuit board on which a dark insulating film other than black is applied to form a dark insulating film. The interference between the light emitted directly from the LED 7001 toward the front and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted toward the front can be suppressed, and the light emitted from each of the LEDs 7001 can be clearly recognized. Further, at least the surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is mounted (LED mounting surface) is required to form the dark insulating film, and the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted is An insulating film different from the dark insulating film (for example, a light insulating film coated with a light insulating coating material such as white) may be formed. That is, the color of the insulating film may be the same between the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the circuit board, or the color of the insulating film may be different between the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the circuit board. Good. Further, the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is not limited to the one (resist) formed by applying (solid coating) an insulating coating, but the insulating coating may be coated (solid coating). It may include a layer (first layer) formed and a layer (second layer, outermost layer) formed by silk-printing an insulating coating on the layer. Further, in this case, the types (components) and colors of the insulating paints of the first layer and the second layer may be different, for example, the first layer is a dark color (for example, black or green), The layers may have a light color (eg white), the first layer may have a light color and the second layer may have a dark color.

As shown in FIG. 257(B), the case 7100 includes a front surface cover portion 7110 on the front surface (front surface) side of the substrate 7200 and a rear surface cover portion 7120 on the rear surface side of the substrate 7200. The substrate 7200 is sandwiched by the cover portion 7120 and accommodated inside the case 7100. The surface cover portion 7110 that covers the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 (the surface (front surface) of the board 7200) has a predetermined thickness (about 5 mm in this example) and corresponds to each of the LEDs 7001 mounted on the board 7200. As described above, the cylindrical penetrating portion 7110a is formed, and the substrate 7200 is brought into close contact with the surface cover portion 7110 so that only one LED (one LED element) is arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a. The front surface cover portion 7110 and the rear surface cover portion 7120 are tightly adhered to each other without a gap and are strong (detachment is difficult, and at least a part of the substrate 7200 such as the front surface cover portion 7110 or the rear surface cover portion 7120 is not destroyed by welding or the like, the substrate 7200 is removed. The substrate 7200 is fixed (attached) to the surface cover portion 7110 by being attached in an irreversible attachment state or the like). As a result, the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 is partitioned so that the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 are arranged in the respective penetrating portions 7110a, and the plurality of LEDs 7001 are irradiated. Light is prevented from leaking to the other penetrating portion 7110a and the back surface (rear surface) side of the substrate 7200, and interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be suppressed. Therefore, light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be suppressed. The light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually identified and can be easily identified individually. For example, even when the first LED and the second LED of the plurality of LEDs 7001 are made to emit different colors, it is possible to prevent the colors of the plurality of LEDs 7001 from being mixed by suppressing mixing of these colors. Since they can be individually identified, it is possible to prevent the information displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 from being transmitted to the player differently from the original information. Further, by firmly attaching the front surface cover portion 7110 and the rear surface cover portion 7120, it is possible to maintain a close contact state between the substrate 7200 and the front surface cover portion 7110, and to prevent interference of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. The risk of impairing the suppressing function is reduced.

Further, on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, in addition to the plurality of LEDs 7001, in the vicinity of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001, a part number of the LED, a region indicating a position where the LED is arranged, and the like. It is also referred to as a notation part (information display part (including symbols and characters)) indicating the attribute of the LED (further, it may include the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the LED, and the model of the LED). ) Is a white (not limited to white, but may be a bright color (for example, yellow) having a high reflection efficiency) that is easily conspicuous with respect to black. It is silk-printed on. In this example, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is partitioned so that the silk-printed notation portion is also included in the penetrating portion 7110a. Specifically, one LED and a notation part that is silk-printed in the vicinity of the one LED and indicates the part number or the like of the LED are arranged in the penetrating part 7110a ( It may be arranged so that all of the notation parts fit within the penetrating part 7110a, or a part of the notation parts may be arranged so as to fit within the penetrating part 7110a). As a result, the area inside the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200 (the area where one LED 7001 is arranged) is formed by the notation portion silk-printed with the white insulating paint having the highest reflection efficiency and arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a. Since the reflection efficiency can be increased and the decrease in the brightness in the penetrating portion 7110a can be further suppressed when the LED 7001 emits light, the emission from one LED 7001 can be clearly recognized. Further, as described above, since the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is solidly coated with the black insulating film (resist) having the lowest reflection efficiency, the area outside the penetrating portion 7110a maintains the low reflection efficiency. Even if the light from the LED 7001 arranged inside the penetrating portion 7110a leaks to the outside of the penetrating portion 7110a, the light can be prevented from being diffused. In this case, the ratio of the notation portion occupying the area outside the penetrating portion 7110a on the substrate 7200 is reduced as much as possible (most of the notation portion is contained in the penetrating portion 7110a and a part thereof is slightly protruded outside the penetrating portion 7110a. And the like), the effect of preventing light diffusion can be further enhanced.

Further, the circuit board described above is provided with a through hole (a wiring pattern on the front surface side (front surface side, LED mounting surface side) and a back surface side (LED non-mounting surface side) that penetrates the circuit board in the front-rear direction. A plurality of holes) to be electrically connected. Since the through hole penetrates the circuit board in the front-back direction, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the circuit board is not reflected by the through hole, but the back surface of the circuit board. There is a risk that the light will leak out to the side (LED non-mounting surface side) and the brightness will decrease. In this example, in the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, the through hole is not formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating part 7110a (the region inside the penetrating part 7110a). With such a configuration, the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a can be reflected toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 without leaking to the back side of the substrate 7200, and the substrate 7200 can be reflected. The brightness of the light emitted from the LED 7001 mounted on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the LED 7001 can be increased, and the interference of the LEDs 7001 can be suppressed to allow the light emission of each LED 7001 to be clearly visible. ..

Although a black insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, no notation part is formed on this insulating film (resist). You may do it. With this configuration, only the insulating film (resist) of the same color is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, and the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) can be made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 from being improved by the notation portion. Further, by not improving the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, a black insulating film (which may have a dark color other than black, such as green, blue, or purple) having the lowest reflection efficiency ( The interference of light on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) on which the resist is formed can be suppressed, and light can be suppressed from diffusing from the LED 7001 arranged in the through portion 7110a to the outside of the through portion 7110a. The light emission of each LED 7001 corresponding to is clear, and the light emission state of each LED 7001 can be easily identified.

Further, when the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is not silk-screened with an insulating paint to form the notation part, the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface) is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200. A predetermined color different from the color of the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED (for example, if a black insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface), a color having a higher reflection efficiency than black (for example, white). , Yellow, green, light blue, yellow-green, blue, purple, etc.), and if a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface), a color with lower reflection efficiency than white (eg yellow, green) , Light blue, yellow-green, blue, purple, black, etc.) may be silk-printed with an insulating paint to form the notation portion, or the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 may be foil-cut (wiring pattern). In the layer (copper plane) in which is formed, a wiring pattern that is a copper foil is used to form characters, figures, symbols, etc., and the copper foil around it is formed. The notation part may be formed by being electrically insulated from the electronic component), or the color of the insulating film formed on the substrate 7200 on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 ( A dark color different from a dark color such as black or green (when a black insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a dark insulating coating such as blue, purple, or green is formed, and a green insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200). In this case, the notation part may be formed by silk-printing on the insulating film (on the resist) with an insulating paint of dark color such as black, blue, or purple).

That is, only an insulating film (resist) of the same color (black in this example, it may be a dark color such as green, purple, or blue) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. The notation portion having a color different from that of the insulating film may not be formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. With this configuration, it is possible to make the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 uniform, and to suppress the improvement in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. As a result, the interference of light can be suppressed, so that the light emission of each LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be made clear, which facilitates the identification of each light emission state. In addition, the part number of the LED mounted by the notation portion formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the board 7200, the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged, and the like. It becomes easy to grasp the attribute of the LED.

Further, the case where the notation part is formed on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the circuit board according to the color of the insulating paint used for forming the notation part, and the circuit board. The case where the notation part is formed on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface) may be different. For example, in a circuit board in which a dark color (for example, black, green, blue, purple, etc.) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), insulation formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) The sign may be formed on the film (resist) by silk-printing with an insulating paint of a dark color (for example, black, green, blue, purple, etc.) different from the color of the insulating film (resist). Alternatively, the sign may be formed by silk-printing with an insulating paint of light color (white, yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). Good. Further, in a circuit board in which a light-colored (white) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), on the insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), The inscription part may be formed by silk-screen printing with an insulating paint of a light color (for example, yellow, light blue, or yellow-green) different from the color of the insulating film (resist), or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). ) May be silk-printed with a dark color (black, green, blue, purple, etc.) insulating paint on the insulating film (resist) formed in (1) to form the notation part. As a result, advantageous characteristics are added to the circuit board depending on the purpose of use of the circuit board (whether it is a circuit board for which reflection efficiency is desired to be improved or a circuit board for which reflection efficiency is suppressed to suppress light interference). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of presentation and the effect of information transmission. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in the entertainment appeal.

On the other hand, the above-described light-emitting ornaments (back lower middle rotating ornament 3310, back upper rear rotating ornament 3440, rear rear left rotating ornament 3510, rear rear right rotating ornament 3610, rear rear movable ornament 3110, rear upper front) (Rotating decorative body 3410, back-up front decoration body 3421, back-front left decoration body 3713, back-front right decoration body 3813, etc.) A circuit board for mounting (a back front left decoration board 3714 of a back front left decoration body unit 3710, a back front front decoration board 3422 of a back production unit 3400, a back front right decoration board 3814 of a back front right decoration unit 3810, a back Lower right lower decorative board 3253 of lower right effect unit 3250, lower lower left decorative board 3203 of lower left effect unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top central decorative board 455 , A door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and the like, a light-colored (white in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), On this insulating film (resist), an insulating paint of a light color different from the color of the insulating film (white in this example) (yellow in this example, a light color other than yellow, such as light blue or yellow green) may be used. The inscription part is formed by silk printing.

That is, the light emitting decorations (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration 3510, rear rear right rotating decoration 3610, rear movable movable decoration 3110, rear front rotating decoration) Body 3410, back-up front decorative body 3421, back-front left decorative body 3713, back-front right decorative body 3813, and the like. Circuit board (back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration body unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top rendering unit 3400, back front right decoration board 3814 of back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right Back lower right decorative board 3253 of rendering unit 3250, lower back left decorative board 3203 of lower back rendering unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top central decorative board 455, door A light-colored (white in this example) insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, etc. Silk on the film with a light-colored (yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) insulating paint that is different from the color of the insulating film (resist) so as not to reduce the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) A notation part is formed by printing. Thereby, the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) can be suppressed from being lowered by the notation portion, and the brightness of the light emitted toward the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased and the staging effect can be improved. .. It should be noted that it is desirable to use yellow insulating paint as the light color forming the notation part. Since yellow has the closest reflection efficiency to white, by forming the notation part with a yellow insulating paint, while suppressing the reduction of the reflection efficiency at the LED mounting surface of the circuit board, the notation part enables LED parts to be used. The LED attributes such as a number and an area indicating the position where the LED is arranged (in addition, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the LED, and the model of the LED may be included) are identified. You will be able to.

In addition, a circuit board provided in a conventional pachinko machine 1 in which a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface, and a notation portion is formed by silk printing on the insulating film (resist) by black insulating paint. Compared with the above, in the case of the circuit board in which the marking portion is formed by silk printing with a light-colored insulating paint such as yellow, light blue, or yellow-green, the marking portion becomes inconspicuous when it is arranged in the pachinko machine 1. The above-mentioned light emitting decoration (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration 3510, rear rear right rotating decoration 3610, rear rear movable decoration 3110, rear upper front rotating decoration) 3410, front back decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) and the door frame 3 with the LED mounting surface of each circuit board facing the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (pachinko machine). 1 is arranged so as to irradiate light toward the front side of the device 1. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the modeling and decoration are unified according to a predetermined theme, it is formed on the LED mounting surface of the circuit board. LED attributes such as the part number of the LED that is irrelevant to the game being played, the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged, etc. (In addition, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the LED, the LED When a player visually recognizes information such as a model), the sense of unity of the pachinko machine 1 and the view of the world may be lost, and the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated. In the above example, since the notation part is less noticeable than the circuit board provided in the conventional pachinko machine 1, LED attributes such as the part number of the LED unrelated to the game and the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged. (In addition, information such as the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), and the model of the LED may be included.) becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the pachinko machine 1 has a unified feeling. It is possible to suppress the collapse of the world view and suppress the deterioration of the interest in gaming.

Since white and yellow have similar reflection efficiencies and a small visual characteristic difference (contrast), a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface, and the white insulating film (on the resist) is formed. When the yellow insulating paint whose reflection efficiency is close to that of white is used as the notation part to be formed, the effect of suppressing the reduction of the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface is enhanced compared to the case where a combination of other colors is used. In addition to the above, it is possible to enhance the effect of suppressing the deterioration of amusement of the game by making the notation part unnoticeable when installed in the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, a light emitting decoration (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration 3510, rear rear right rotating decoration 3610, rear rear movable decoration 3110, rear upper front rotating decoration) (Body 3410, back-up front decoration 3421, back-front left decoration 3713, back-front right decoration 3813, etc.) and the door frame 3 are provided to control the light emission in relation to the variation effect, and thereby the specific light-emitting decoration can be specified. On the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the circuit board on which the LED for surface emitting the area is mounted, a light color (yellow, light blue, yellow) different from the white color of the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). The notation part may be formed by green or the like, or the notation part may be formed by removing the foil, or the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) may be formed without forming the notation part on the LED mounting surface. In addition, the notation portion may be formed by a color different from the white color of the insulating film (not limited to a light color) or by removing the foil. Further, the notation part may be formed corresponding to each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, “LED1” is formed for one LED), or a plurality of LEDs (for example, for each type) are collected. It is also possible to form them (for example, "LED1 to LED5" are formed for a plurality of LEDs). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and increase the brightness of light emitted from the dimming LED or the non-dimming LED. Also, it is possible to realize efficient light emission by suppressing the loss of light emission due to the non-dimming LED.

Further, in the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (a region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) is white (not limited to white, but a bright color having high reflection efficiency (for example, It may be (yellow)) to improve the reflection efficiency. FIG. 258A shows a front view and a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the circuit board (the board 7200 in this example) in the modification 1, and FIG. 258B shows the circuit board (the board 7200 in this example) in the modification 2. The front view and AA sectional drawing of FIG. As shown in FIG. 258(A), as the substrate 7200 of the first modification, a black insulating coating material is applied to the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the base material 7201 to form the first conductive film 7200A (resist). In addition, a white insulating paint is applied to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the base material 7201 to form a back surface side conductive film 7202 (resist), and then a base material on which the first conductive film 7200A (resist) is formed. A portion of the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of 7201 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (area inside the penetrating portion 7110a) is silk-printed with white insulating paint from above the first conductive film 7200A. The conductive film 7200B may be formed and one LED 7001 may be mounted at the center of each second conductive film 7200B (the second insulating film 7200B is formed around the LED 7001 after mounting the LED 7001). May be done).

Further, as shown in FIG. 258(B), as a substrate 7200 of the second modification, a white insulating paint is applied to the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of a base material 7201 to form a first conductive film 7200A (resist). Is formed and a white insulating paint is applied to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the base material 7201 to form a back surface side conductive film 7202 (resist), and then a first conductive film 7200A (resist) is formed. Silk printing with black insulating paint from the top of the first conductive film 7200A except for the region (the region inside the penetrating part 7110a) corresponding to the penetrating part 7110a on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the base material 7201. The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by, and the LED 7001 may be mounted at the center of each of the first conductive films 7200A (resist) (the second insulating film 7200B is formed after mounting the LED 7001). May be done).

That is, in FIG. 258(A), the black first conductive film 7200A is formed around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and the white first conductive film 7200A is formed in the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. Two conductive films 7200B are formed. Further, in FIG. 258(B), a black second conductive film 7200B is formed around a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white second conductive film 7200B is formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. One conductive film 7200A is formed.

In this manner, the black insulating film (the black first conductive film 7200A, the black second conductive film 7200B) is formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and the penetrating portion 7110a is formed. By forming a white insulating film (a white second conductive film 7200B and a white first conductive film 7200A) in a region corresponding to the region, a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 (one It is possible to increase the reflection efficiency of the area inside the penetrating portion 7110a in which the LED 7001 is arranged. Accordingly, when the LED 7001 emits light, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in the luminance in the penetrating portion 7110a, and to clearly see the light emitted by one LED 7001 and to correspond to the penetrating portion 7110a of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200. It becomes possible to maintain a state where the reflection efficiency is low around the area, and even if light from the LED 7001 arranged in the through portion 7110a leaks to the outside of the through portion 7110a, this light is prevented from diffusing. it can.

Further, in this case, the above-mentioned notation part may not be silk-printed, or the notation part may be silk-printed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 where the LED 7001 is not mounted, or the LED mounting. On the black first conductive film 7200A or the black second conductive film 7200B formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the surface, a bright color paint having high reflection efficiency such as white or yellow is used. The notation portion may be silk-printed, or a yellow color or the like may be formed on the white first conductive film 7200A or the white second conductive film 7200B formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface. The marking portion may be silk-printed using a bright color paint having high reflection efficiency.

Note that, on the surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is mounted (front surface, LED mounting surface), a dark color (black in this example, still black in this example) whose reflection efficiency is lower than a ratio of a bright color (white in this example) having high reflection efficiency. Other than that, it may be green, blue, purple, etc.) is higher. Therefore, on the entire surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 are mounted, the interference of light from the LEDs 7001 is suppressed, and the individual lights can be clearly viewed.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the through-hole is not formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating part 7110a of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 (the region inside the penetrating part 7110a). A through hole may be formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, and at least the hole on the LED mounting surface side of the through hole may be closed with the white second conductive film 7200B described above. Also in this case, the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a can be reflected toward the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 without leaking to the back surface side of the board 7200. It is possible to increase the brightness of the light emitted from the LEDs 7001 mounted on the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) of the 7200, and suppress the interference of the respective LEDs 7001 so that the light emission of each of the LEDs 7001 is clearly visible. it can.

In addition, by accommodating the substrate 7200 on which the black insulating film is formed in the case 7100 formed of a colored opaque white resin having no translucency, a pachinko machine from another circuit board on which the LED is mounted is mounted. While the case 7100 is configured so that the reflection efficiency of the light radiated toward the front of the No. 1 can be increased, the reflection efficiency is high in the region of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. By forming the white insulating film, the light-transmitting film 7300 attached to the case 7100 is peeled off so that the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 can be visually recognized through the penetration portion 7110a or the light-transmitting film. Even when the case 7100 is used in which a part of the substrate 7200 is exposed from the penetrating portion 7110a without the 7300 being attached, the reflection efficiency can be improved by the substrate 7200 exposed from the penetrating portion 7110a formed in the case 7100. It is possible to prevent the light from being lowered, and to highly efficiently reflect the light emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 from the other circuit board on which the LED is mounted, thereby increasing the brightness and improving the effect. ..

Further, the notation portion may be formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) without forming the notation portion on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, or the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the substrate 7200 may be formed. , A front surface), which is formed by forming a form of characters, figures, symbols, etc. with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. The wiring pattern forming the foil removal may be formed to be electrically insulated from the electronic component), and the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the board 7200 may be formed on the board. A dark color different from the color of the insulating film formed on the 7200 (dark color such as black or green) (in the case where a black insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, a dark insulating paint such as blue, purple, or green), When the green insulating film is formed on the substrate 7200, the notation portion is formed by silk-printing on the insulating film (on the resist) with an insulating paint of black, blue, purple, or other dark color insulating paint). You may do so. Note that when the notation portion is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200, a predetermined color (white, yellow, black, or black is formed on the insulating film formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200. The notation may be formed by silk-printing with an insulating paint of green or the like, or characters or figures may be formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer without a foil (a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)). , A symbol or the like is formed to remove the copper foil around it, and the wiring pattern forming the foil removal is electrically insulated from the electronic parts) to form the notation part. You may do it. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 uniform, and to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200. As a result, the luminance can be increased, and in the region outside the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200, the improvement of the reflection efficiency is suppressed, and the light interference can be suppressed.

Further, the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 is housed in the case 7100 in a state where the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) is in close contact with the front surface cover portion 7110, and the light emitted from the LED arranged in the through portion 7110a is outside the through portion 7110a. Since it is difficult to leak to the surface (LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 of the above, on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the same substrate 7200, a region where reflection efficiency is desired to be improved and the reflection efficiency are suppressed to suppress light interference. It becomes possible to coexist with a region opposite to a desired region, whereby the brightness of light emitted from the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be increased, and in addition, the interference of the LEDs 7001 is suppressed and the LED 7001 is suppressed. Individual light emission can be clearly recognized.

The color of the insulating film formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200 is not limited to the same color as the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface), and for example, the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 has a dark color. An insulating film (black in this example, blue, green, purple, etc. other than black may be used) is formed, and a bright color (white in this example, other than white in this example) is formed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) of the substrate 7200. May be yellow or the like).

In addition, at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 have higher brightness than normal (normal brightness: brightness that reflects the result of brightness adjustment by the player, which will be described later, higher brightness than normal). : Brightness higher than the brightness reflecting the result of the brightness adjustment by the player, maximum brightness in the brightness range in which the player can adjust the brightness, higher brightness than the brightness range in which the player can adjust the brightness (the brightness is adjusted by the player) The light emission is controlled for the plurality of LEDs 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 even under a specific condition, such as when the light emission is controlled to one of (high brightness which cannot be set in step 1). Since it is possible to individually identify the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001, it is possible to recognize important information displayed on the dot matrix display 7000. Further, under the specific conditions described above, the LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back front decoration board 3422 of the back production unit 3400, the back LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the front right decoration body unit 3810, LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and bottom back left of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 Since a part of the light emitting means (LED) provided on the game board 5 such as the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 3203 is turned off, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 is reduced. Therefore, it is easy to determine the light emitting states (displayed information) of the plurality of LEDs provided in the dot matrix display 7000. In addition, at least a part of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light at a higher brightness than usual, and a decorative body (movable decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310) provided on the game board 5 is controlled. , Back-rear rotating decorative body 3440, back-rear rotating left decorative body 3510, back-rear rotating right decorative body 3610, and back-removable decorative body 3110), back-rear left decorative body unit 3710, back-rear rendering unit 3400, front-rear A light emitting unit provided in a decorative body (excluding the function display unit 1400 that displays important information) that does not display important information, such as the right decoration unit 3810, the lower back right production unit 3250, and the lower back left production unit 3200. (LED) may be turned off, and the LED as the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 may be controlled to emit light while maintaining normal brightness ( For example, when it is desired to pay attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600 (when a super reach or an error state occurs, etc.), the brightness inside the glass frame 161 can be further reduced in this case. It becomes easy to determine the light emitting states (information displayed) of the plurality of LEDs provided in the container 7000.

Further, since all the light can be emitted from the front of the through portion 7110a without leaking the light from the LED 7001 provided in the through portion 7110a to the outside of the through portion 7110a, the brightness inside the through portion 7110a is reduced. Can be suppressed. Note that not only the front surface cover portion 7110 and the rear surface cover portion 7120 but also the substrate 7200 is firmly attached to the front surface cover portion 7110 (difficult to remove, cannot be removed unless at least a part of the front surface cover portion 7110 or the substrate 7200 is destroyed by welding or the like. The LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 can be protected by the front surface cover portion 7110, so that the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 may be tampered with by mischief or the like. Is suppressed.

In addition, an opening 7120a for exposing the connector 7002 mounted on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200 is provided in a part of the back surface cover portion 7120 that covers the back surface (rear surface) of the board 7200 on which the connector 7002 is mounted. Has been formed. Since the substrate 7200 is fixed to the front surface cover portion 7110 while being closely attached to the front surface cover portion 7110 so that only one LED is arranged in the through portion 7110a as described above, the back surface (rear surface) of the substrate 7200 ) Side light leakage is suppressed, and light from the LED 7001 does not leak from the opening 7120a that exposes the connector 7002 formed in the back surface cover portion 7120.

As described above, in the present example, the light-emitting decoration body provided with the LED for controlling the light emission in relation to the variation effect is formed of the resin having the light-transmitting property, and the surface-emission is performed by the light emitted from the LED. .. On the other hand, the case 7100 of the dot-matrix display 7000 may be colored and opaque white that does not have translucency (if it is opaque and does not have translucency, it may be other than white, for example, black, dark blue, dark green, etc.). It is made of a resin) so that the light of the LED 7001 can be seen only from the penetrating portion 7110a, and the light of the LED 7001 cannot be seen from other parts of the case 7100. .. Further, the front surface cover portion 7110 and the rear surface cover portion 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered (welded) in a state of closely contacting each other without a gap, and light leakage from a joint portion between the front surface cover portion 7110 and the rear surface cover portion 7120 is prevented. It is suppressed. In this way, the case 7100 for accommodating the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 for individually controlling the light emission and displaying the important information (for example, the result of the special lottery) relating to the progress of the game is not translucent. A light-emitting ornament that houses a circuit board on which LEDs that are controlled by a predetermined number of LEDs (each group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs) are mounted and which do not display important information related to the progress of the game. Is formed of a transparent resin or the like, whether or not the defective light emitting means such as an LED displays important information, and a control unit of the LED (controlled for each predetermined number of LEDs). Whether it is controlled independently or not) can be easily discerned from the appearance, and if a problem occurs in the light emitting means that displays important information relating to the progress of the game, it will be possible to quickly respond, It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

The front surface cover portion 7110 and the rear surface cover portion 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered to each other by welding or the like so that the substrate 7200 cannot be taken out from the case 7100 unless at least a part of the case 7100 is broken. Has become. Further, as described above, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms. One of the plurality of sealing mechanisms is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320, and then the destroyed sealing mechanism is used. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by using one different sealing mechanism. On the other hand, the case 7100 of the present example does not have such a sealing mechanism, and once the part of the case 7100 is destroyed and the case 7100 is taken out, the case 7100 cannot be returned to the original state. There is. In this way, the substrate 7200 is enclosed and protected in the case 7100 in which the substrate 7200 cannot be taken out (exposed) unless at least a part of it is destroyed, so that the LED 7001 having an important function is physically destroyed. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, a light-emitting decorative body that houses a circuit board on which LEDs that are controlled to emit light by a predetermined number of LED units (each group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs) and that does not display important information related to the progress of a game is mounted Rotating decorative body 3310, back rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back rear movable decorative body 3110, back front rotating decorative body 3410, back front decorative body 3421. , The front left front decorative body 3713, the front front right decorative body 3813, etc.) are detachably (reversibly) formed by screwing or the like so that the circuit board can be taken out without destroying the light emitting decorative body. Has become. This makes it difficult for the electronic components (LEDs, etc.) mounted on the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 housing the circuit board on which the LED displaying important information is mounted to be physically destroyed, which is important. It is possible to suppress the disappearance of information, and the light-emitting decorative body that houses the circuit board on which the LED that does not display important information is housed can be immediately replaced when an electronic component (LED or the like) malfunctions. ing.

Further, in the dot matrix display 7000 of this example, the LED 7001 provided in the case 7100 has a predetermined constant brightness, and the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) is operated. However, the brightness adjustment described later is not possible. As a result, the brightness of the LED 7001 having an important function can be kept constant, and important information such as information relating to the profit of the player can be surely transmitted. Regarding the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information even under the above-mentioned specific conditions, the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right) LEDs provided on the side decorative board 418, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, and the plate center upper The LED may be included in the decorative substrate 314, and the light emission may be controlled without turning off the light.

Further, when a specific reach effect is executed in the display effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the LED provided around the effect display device 1600 may be turned off, and for example, the back lower middle lift. When the raising/lowering arm 3357 is rotated by the drive motor 3352 to move the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 from the lower position to the upper position, the rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 is located below the front upper decorative body 3421. When moving to the back rear left rotation decorative body 3510 to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the right of the front front left effect unit 3700, the back rear right rotating decoration body 3610 is directed to the front front right. When moving to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the left of the unit 3800, and by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the rear rear drive motor 3126, the lock by the lock member 3134 is released and the rear rear movable. When the decoration body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the back front decoration board 3422 of the back production unit 3400 are displayed. The mounted LED, the LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration body unit 3810, the LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250, The LED mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 may be turned off. Movable ornaments in front of the effect display device 1600 (back lower middle rotating ornament 3310, back upper rear rotating ornament 3440, back rear left rotating ornament 3510, back right rotating ornament 3610, and back rear movable ornament 3110). ) Is performed, by turning off the LED provided around the effect display device 1600, visual confirmation of the effect executed by the movable decorative body exposed in front of the effect display device 1600. Can be prevented. In this case, the dot matrix display 7000 may be continuously controlled to emit light without being turned off. As a result, important information such as information relating to the player's profit can be displayed even under a specific condition, and the player or the like is not disadvantaged.

In this example, not only when a specific reach effect is executed, but an error state such as detection of opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 occurs based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, LED mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the left decoration unit 3710, LED mounted on the back front decoration board 3422 of the back production unit 3400, back front right decoration of the back front right decoration unit 3810 LED mounted on the board 3814, LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250, LED mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200, movable LEDs provided on the ornaments (back lower middle rotating ornament 3310, back upper rear rotating ornament 3440, back rear left rotating ornament 3510, back right rotating ornament 3610, and back rear movable ornament 3110), Even when at least a part of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 is turned off, at least a part of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 The LED and the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 are controlled to emit light without being turned off. As a result, when an error condition occurs, for example, at least a part of the LEDs provided on the game board 5 is turned off and at least a part of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 is normally operated. Notifying that an error state has occurred (for example, that the door frame 3 is open) by controlling the light emission in an error mode (for example, flashing light with higher brightness than in normal time and blinking in a short time) different from Or display on the effect display device 1600 to notify that there is an error state (for example, “Abnormality occurs!”), or output by voice that the error state has occurred (for example, “The door is open. ", "Please pull out the ball.", etc.) while the LED 7001 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to emit light without being turned off so long as the variation effect is being executed. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted and to keep the update display (variable display) of the dot matrix display 7000 continuous so as not to give anxiety or distrust of not displaying the special lottery result. it can.

The dot matrix display 7000 may or may not be turned off depending on the type of error state (degree of urgency). For example, an error having a small effect on the game (minor error: main frame 4) When the opening of the door frame 3 is detected, the vibration sensor (not shown) continuously detects the vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (the action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is performed. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the dish 202 is full of the game ball B), the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is detected. Is input (when it is detected that the game ball B does not exist in the guide passage 570a, it is unlikely that a goto action is being performed), the dot matrix display 7000 is provided. While not interrupting the progress of the game by controlling the light emission without turning off the LED 7001 that is present, an error that seriously affects the game (critical error: when a radio wave irradiation goto is detected, a magnet goto is detected, a second When the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is input when the starting port 2004 is not open, the first big winning a prize sensor 2402 or the second big winning award when it is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. For the error (which is highly likely to be a goto action such as when the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2601 is input), the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled so as to be turned off so that the variation effect is being executed. Even if there is, the variation effect may be interrupted or ended, whereby the control state of the dot matrix display 7000 can be changed according to the degree of error, which is disadvantageous to the player and the game store. You can choose not to give.

Further, when an error state occurs, a display for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the error state and an LED provided on the door frame 3 are displayed according to the type of the error state. Either one of the notification by the light emission control and the notification by the audio output that the error state has occurred may be executed, or any two combinations may be executed. Alternatively, all may be executed. For example, when a slight error that has a small effect on the game occurs, a display is sent to notify that the production display device 1600 is in an error state, and the LED provided on the door frame 3 emits light in an error mode. A serious error that seriously affects a game is executed by executing any one or a combination of two of a notification by controlling and a notification that an error state is generated by voice output. In this case, the display for notifying that the error state is in the effect display device 1600, the notification by controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 in the error mode, and the error by the voice output All of the notification that the state has occurred and the notification may be executed.

Further, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems (such as display of content different from what is originally displayed) compared to the case where the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 controls based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. It is possible not to give a disadvantage to the player or the like. Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the peripheral control unit steady processing every about 33.3 ms, while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. Therefore, the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 is updated at a shorter cycle than the case where the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Even if a problem occurs and a content different from the content originally displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 is displayed, the display content is updated immediately (after 4 ms) to the original display content. It can be changed without giving any disadvantage to the player. That is, for the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information (higher importance), a control signal is output at a shorter cycle than a light emitting ornament that does not display important information (low importance), and the light emitting means ( In order to update the light emitting mode of the (LED), even if the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 (the light emitting mode of the LED 7001) that displays important information is defective, the display content can be immediately changed to the normal display content. Therefore, this light can prevent different contents from being displayed and giving a disadvantage to the player. Further, when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Although a communication error may occur and a problem may occur in the information (light emitting state of the LED 7001) indicated by the dot matrix display 7000, in this example, since the main control board 1310 directly controls the dot matrix display 7000, the peripheral As compared with the case where the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000, the information (light emitting state of the LED 7001) indicated by the dot matrix display 7000 is less likely to cause a defect, which gives a disadvantage to the player. Can be suppressed.

In addition, the translucent film 7300 is attached to the surface cover portion 7110 of the case 7100 as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 257A, the light-transmitting film 7300 is formed of a semi-transparent sheet, and a region around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100 is opaque black print (limited to black. First, a color (dark color or the like may be used) that makes it easy to visually recognize the light emitting state in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a and does not transmit light. On the other hand, the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is in a translucent state having a light-transmitting property without being printed in black, and is surface-emitted by the light emitted from the LED 7001. As a result, when the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is emitting surface light and the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a appears dark like a shadow, it corresponds to the penetrating portion 7110a. By comparing the area and the periphery of the area corresponding to the penetrating portion, it becomes easier to visually recognize the surface light emission of the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the light emitting state of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200), and various values can be displayed on the dot matrix display 7000. Since it is possible to clearly display various characters, symbols, figures, etc., important information such as information relating to the profit of the player can be surely transmitted. In addition, by providing a region that does not transmit light between each of the surface emitting regions corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, it is possible to suppress interference of light emitted from the plurality of penetrating portions 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light, and Even when light of different colors is emitted from each of the penetrating portions 7110a, it is possible to suppress mixing of the emitted lights of various colors and to make individual colors clearly visible. Since it becomes possible to identify the respective regions corresponding to the penetrating portions 7110a that are surface-emitted by light as different light emitting regions, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be clearly displayed. Note that at least the surface cover portion 7110 of the case 7100 itself is formed of a dark resin such as black without providing the light-transmitting film 7300 so that the light emitted from the penetrating portion 7110a can be easily seen when the LED 7001 emits light. However, in this case as well, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be clearly displayed on the dot matrix display 7000, so that important information such as information relating to the profit of the player is obtained. Can be reliably transmitted.

The front surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) and the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 described above are divided into a first region and a second region by a predetermined virtual line, The LED 7001 may be mounted only on one of the first region and the second region on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the 7200, or on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. Of the first region and the second region, a dark color (black in this example) insulating film having low reflection efficiency is formed not only in one region where the LED 7001 is mounted but also in the other region where the LED 7001 is not mounted. You may do it. For example, as shown in FIG. 259, a substrate 7200 on which a black insulating film is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) is attached by a virtual line X to a mounting area on which the LED 7001 is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface). , And an unmounted region where the LED 7001 is not mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface).

Further, the connector 7002 may be arranged in an unmounted area on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200. In this case, a virtual line in the unmounted area on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200 is further provided. The connector 7002 may be arranged near the end on the side far from X. As described above, the substrate 7200 is housed in the case 7100, and the case 7100 (rear surface cover portion 7120) has the opening 7120a for exposing the connector on the back surface side. Even if light enters the case 7100 through the opening 7120a, the opening 7120a is formed at a position away from the mounting area for mounting the LED 7001. It is possible to prevent erroneous information from being recognized. In addition, a black insulating film with low reflection efficiency is formed not only in the mounting area where the LED 7001 is mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, but also in the unmounted area where the LED 7001 is not mounted, so that the opening Even if the light entering the case 7100 from the portion 7120a reaches the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 through the through hole 7003 formed in the substrate 7200, the black color formed in the unmounted region This insulating film suppresses the reflection of light and suppresses the entry into the mounting area. This can prevent light entering from outside the case 7100 from entering the penetrating portion 7110a and causing the player to recognize incorrect information.

Further, since the connector 7002 is arranged in the unmounted area near the end of the board 7200 farthest from the mounting area, and the opening 7120a is formed in the portion of the case 7100 corresponding to this connector 7002, from the outside of the case 7100. The entering light can be suppressed from reaching the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200 through the through hole 7003 formed in the mounting region of the substrate 7200.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the light-colored electronic component is not mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200, but the light is not mounted on the unmounted area of the surface (LED mounting surface, front surface) of the substrate 7200. A color electronic component may be mounted. In this case, the light-colored electronic component is provided at a position distant from the LED 7001, and a black insulating film is formed on the surface (LED mounting surface, surface) of the substrate 7200 around the light-colored electronic component. Therefore, even if light is reflected by the light-colored electronic component, further reflection is suppressed by the black insulating film formed in the unmounted region of the surface (LED mounting surface, surface) of the substrate 7200, and mounting is performed. It is possible to prevent light from entering the area, which can prevent light entering from outside the case 7100 from entering the penetrating portion 7110a and causing the player to recognize incorrect information.

[Demonstration example using a dot matrix display]
Next, an example of presentation using the above-mentioned dot matrix display 7000 will be described. As shown in FIG. 256, the dot matrix display 7000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Then, important information relating to the progress of the game is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 260, when the effect display device 1600 executes the variable effect based on the start winning to the first starting opening 2002 and the starting winning to the second starting opening 2004, the dot matrix display is displayed. Even at 7000, the display content is updated and displayed (variable display). Then, when a predetermined period (fluctuation time) has elapsed since the update display of the display contents was started on the dot matrix display 7000, a predetermined mode is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 261(A) and 261(B), information relating to the winning or failure such as “big hit”, “miss”, etc. is displayed when the variation time elapses. As described above, the dot matrix display 7000 of the present example is different from the light emitting decoration body and the like in which the circuit board mounting the LEDs is provided and the light emission is controlled in relation to the above-mentioned variation effect, and the special lottery result (first special lottery result). , The second special lottery result) can be discriminated (at least if the different contents are displayed depending on whether it is a big hit or a big hit). That is, a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is discriminated from a light emitting mode such as a light emitting decorative body which is provided with a circuit board on which LEDs are mounted and whose light emission is controlled in relation to the above-mentioned variation effect. However, it is difficult to determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emission mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000. Is possible. A circuit board on which an LED is mounted is provided when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when a jackpot finalizing effect for notifying that a jackpot has been confirmed before the special lottery result is derived is executed). Thus, the light emission control may be performed so that the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) can be discriminated from the light emission mode of the light emitting decorative body or the like that controls the light emission in association with the variation effect. However, the dot matrix display 7000 can always discriminate the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emission mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200, not only under a specific condition. Even if a problem occurs in the light emitting mode of the light emitting decorative body that controls the light emission in relation to the variation effect by providing the circuit board mounting the LED, the special lottery result (from the light emitting mode of the dot matrix display 7000 ( Since the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) can be determined, no disadvantage is given to the player or the like.

Further, the dot matrix display 7000 is designed to display a big hit type (15R big hit, 5R big hit, 2R big hit) during a big hit game state. It should be noted that the fact may be displayed when the time is short and the fact may be displayed when the probability is high.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game aiming to enter a game ball into the second starting opening 2004 in a short time (low probability short time state (also referred to as short time state), high probability short time state (also referred to as probability change state)) (So-called "right-handed") is being performed. In addition, the second start opening 2004 is frequently opened during the time saving, so that the start winning prize (to the first start opening 2002) is higher than in the normal time (low probability non-time saving state (also referred to as normal state), high probability non-time saving state). It is easier to win the game ball and win the game ball to the second starting opening 2004), which is advantageous for the player. However, this advantageous state cannot be enjoyed if the player does not play the game (so-called “right hitting”) aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 in a short time. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 261(C), the player plays a game (so-called "right hitting") aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 at a short time. "Right-handed →" is displayed as the notification display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying an advantageous state even though the time is shortened and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this way, the dot matrix display 7000 of the present example displays important information related to the game, unlike the light emitting decoration or the like in which the circuit board on which the LED is mounted is provided and the light emission is controlled in relation to the variation effect. It is supposed to do. Further, as described above, the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 and mounted with the LED 7001 has an insulating film of a color different from that of the circuit board mounted on the light emitting decoration or the like and mounted with the LED. Since it has been formed (resist processing), whether or not the circuit board is mounted with an LED for displaying important information relating to the game by the color of the LED mounting surface when the LED mounting surface of the LED is visually recognized. It can be easily determined.

Although the dot matrix display 7000 is provided inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in this example, it may be provided outside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing in the regions inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 is increased, and it is possible to provide a structure or a movable object to enhance the decorativeness and the effect of presentation.

By the way, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout for paying out the game ball B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side. And a unit 560. Further, the payout unit 560 is based on an instruction from the payout control board 633 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering downward direction, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 for a door frame The lower full ball path unit 610 which guides to the 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side (see FIG. 4).

In addition, the game ball B supplied to the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 is easily charged by moving to the downstream side while rubbing against each other, and when electrostatic discharge occurs from the game ball B, it is in the vicinity. A problem may occur in the arranged light emitting means (LED or the like). In this example, the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information related to the game is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control substrate 1310, and the display content (LED 7001 Since the lighting state) is updated, even if the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 becomes defective due to the occurrence of electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the display content can be immediately updated and displayed to the player. It is designed not to give a disadvantage.

As described above, the area in the vicinity of the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but in this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is used. By updating the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 within a short period of time (4 ms), a front view of an area susceptible to noise, for example, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 shown in FIG. It is possible to arrange the dot matrix display 7000 even in the upper left area or the lower left area of the front view. That is, the dot matrix display device 7000 of this example is capable of displaying without being disadvantageous to the player even if the dot matrix display device 7000 is arranged in a region susceptible to noise.

According to the above-mentioned embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means (light emitting decorations (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body, which are mounted on a circuit board for electric parts and whose light emission is controlled according to a special lottery result). 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right LEDs provided on the decorative body 3813 and the like, LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in this example, The LED provided on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the LED provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are also included. , A dot matrix display 7000, a function display unit 1400, an effect display device 1600, etc.), and a plurality of light emitting means are divided into separate systems for each light emitting means and individually controlled to emit light. Means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) and a second light emitting means (light emitting ornament (back under center rotating decoration) which is divided into separate systems for a predetermined number of light emitting means and is controlled in a predetermined number of units. Body 3310, back-rear rotating decoration 3440, back-rear rotating left decoration 3510, back-rear rotating right decoration 3610, back-rear moving decoration 3110, back-up front rotating decoration 3410, back-up front decoration 3421, back LEDs provided on the front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, and the like, LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door) LEDs provided on the frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, provided on the plate upper left decoration board 273, the plate upper right decoration board 278, and the plate center upper decoration board 314. LED may also be included))), and the color of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted and the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted are In order to make them different, it is possible to distinguish the control unit of the light emitting means mounted on the circuit board by looking at the color of the mounting surface of the circuit board, and for example, it is important to control the light emission individually and to hinder the progress of the game. A circuit board on which a light emitting means that plays a role is mounted (a board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 and a function display unit 1400) Function display board) and other circuit boards (light emitting decorations (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back rear right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable) The decorative body 3110, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, the back-front left decoration body 3713, the back-front right decoration body 3813, etc.), and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3. A circuit board to be mounted (in this example, at least the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, The plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may be included. )) and different mounting surface colors make it easier to determine whether the defective light emitting means is an important light emitting means, and respond promptly when the game progress is hindered. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the first light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode in which the special lottery result can be discriminated, and the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode in which the special lottery result is difficult to discriminate, and the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted. Since the mounting surface of is a special color (black) different from the color (white) of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted, the defective light emitting means plays an important role. It becomes easy to determine whether or not

A first substrate case (a case 7100 for accommodating the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a box for accommodating the function display substrate of the function display unit) for accommodating the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted, and a second light emission. A second board case for accommodating a circuit board on which the means is mounted (a plate upper left decoration 271, a plate upper right decoration 276, a plate upper center decoration 312a of the performance operation unit 300, a door frame left side unit 400 of the plate operation unit 300). Door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decorative body 419, door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453, back upper front rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421 , Back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310, back top front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front A decorative body 3421, etc.), and the first substrate case includes a case 7100 for accommodating the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, which is formed of a material having no light-transmitting property, and a functional display unit. Of the functional display board) and a first display section (a penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100, an LED insertion hole of the box containing the functional display board) capable of discriminating the light emitting state of the first light emitting means. , And the second substrate case is formed of a light-transmitting material for the second main body portion (the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, the plate center of the effect operation unit 300). Decoration body 312a, door frame left side decoration body 404 of door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side decoration body 419 of door frame right side unit 410, door frame top decoration body 453 of door frame top unit 450, back top front Rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, back lower left rotating decorative body 3201, back lower right rotating decorative body 3251, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, Since it has the front back decorative body 3410, front front decorative body 3421, etc.), it is possible to determine whether or not the light emitting means has a control unit of the light emitting means or plays an important role depending on whether or not the substrate case has translucency. Will be easier.

The first board case is in a state where the circuit board can be detached by breaking a part of the first board case, and the second board case is a circuit board without breaking a part of the second board case. The circuit board cannot be detached unless a part of the first substrate case is destroyed so that it is possible to prevent the light emitting means, which plays an important role, from being physically destroyed. On the other hand, it becomes easy to physically replace the light emitting means of low importance.

First light emitting means (light emitting decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, rear rear) LEDs provided on the right rotation decorative body 3610, the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back front front rotation decoration body 3410, the back front front decoration body 3421, the back front left decoration body 3713, the back front right decoration body 3813, etc., LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top) The LED provided on the right decorative substrate 457, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the LED provided on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included.)) and the first light emitting means. First circuit board to be mounted (luminous decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610, rear rear movable decorative body 3110) , A circuit board provided on the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, a back-up front decorative body 3421, a back-front left decorative body 3713, a back-front right decorative body 3813, etc., and a circuit for mounting the LED provided on the door frame 3 Substrate (In this example, at least the door frame left side decoration substrate 402, the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the plate upper left) The decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included.)), and the second light emitting means (dot matrix display) capable of individually controlling light emission to represent a predetermined light emitting mode. 7000, a function display unit 1400) and a second circuit board (second board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, a function display board provided on the function display unit 1400) on which the second light emitting means is mounted, A white insulating film is formed on the mounting surface of the first circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted, and a dark insulating film is formed on the mounting surface of the second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted. Therefore, the reflection efficiency of the first circuit board is increased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the luminance when the first light emitting means emits light. Further, since the dark insulating film is formed on the second circuit board on which the second light emitting means whose light emission is controlled individually is formed, reflection is suppressed and the individual light emission is achieved by comparing with the mounting surface of the dark insulating film. It can be clearly seen.

A suppression member that suppresses the interference of emission colors by each of the plurality of light emitting units of the second light emitting unit (each light emitting unit is cylindrically divided by the penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100, the LED insertion hole of the box that houses the function display substrate). Is provided, the diffusion and interference of the emission colors are suppressed, and the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting means can be easily identified individually.

A substrate case for accommodating the second circuit substrate (a case 7100 for accommodating the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a box for accommodating the functional display substrate of the functional display unit) is further provided, and the substrate case is constituted by a plurality of light emitting means. A display portion (a penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100, an LED insertion hole of a box housing a functional display board) capable of discriminating a light emitting state, and a dark-colored display auxiliary portion formed around the display portion (of the case 7100). A transparent film 7300 in which the periphery of the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is opaque and black, and a black functional display sticker in which the periphery of the transparent portion is black). It becomes easy to determine the light emitting state of the light emitting means.

A game board 5 on which a game is played, a frame body (door frame 3) provided with a game window portion (door window 101a) arranged in front of the game board 5 to make the game board 5 visible, and the frame A plurality of frame-side light emitting means provided on the body (door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top central decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, and door frame top right decoration board) The LEDs provided on the plate 457, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the LED provided on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included.) and the game window provided on the game board. A plurality of board side light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, light emitting decoration (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration 3510) , Rear back right rotating decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back front rotating decoration 3410, back front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.) When a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of frame side light emitting means emit light with higher brightness than usual, while at least a specific board side light emitting means among the plurality of board side light emitting means. The means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) emits light in a state where normal brightness is maintained. The specific board-side light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LED elements) and the light emitting elements. A light emitting board (board 7200, function display board) to be mounted, and partitioning members for partitioning each of the plurality of light emitting elements mounted on the light emitting board (penetration part 7110a of case 7100, box-shaped LED housing the function display board) (Each light emitting means is divided into a cylindrical shape by the insertion hole) for preventing the light emission from the plurality of light emitting elements from interfering with each other so that the light emission from each of the plurality of light emitting elements can be easily visually recognized. Even in a situation where the side light emitting means emits light with high brightness, it is easy to determine the light emitting state of the specific board side light emitting means.

When the specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of board-side light emitting means (e.g., a light-emitting decorative body (back side) among the plurality of board-side light emitting means except for a specific board-side light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400)) Middle rotation decorative body 3310, back rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510, back rear right rotating decoration 3610, back movable movable decoration 3110, back front rotating decoration 3410, back front decoration 3421, the back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) is turned off, any or all of the LEDs provided on the back front right decorative body 3813) can be turned off. It becomes easy to determine the light emitting state of the board side light emitting means.

A dark color having a low reflection efficiency is provided around a region of the light emitting substrate which is partitioned by the partitioning means and in which the light emitting elements are arranged (around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200, around the region corresponding to the functional display substrate). Since the insulating film is formed, the diffusion of light can be suppressed even when the light emitted from the light emitting element leaks to the outside of the region partitioned by the partition member, and the dark insulating film You can see more clearly by comparing.

A first light emitting unit that receives a predetermined control signal and emits light in a light emitting manner based on the received control signal (a light emitting decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear rear left rotating) Decorative body 3510, back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, back rear movable decoration body 3110, back top front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813) LEDs provided, LEDs provided on the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. , And the LEDs provided on the plate upper left decoration substrate 273, the plate upper right decoration substrate 278, and the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 may be included.), and information of higher importance than the first light emitting means. And a second light emitting means (a dot matrix display 7000, a function display unit 1400) for obtaining a control signal when the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means output at different cycles. In addition, it is possible to prevent both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means from emitting light in a light emitting manner different from the original light emitting manner.

First light emission control means for outputting a control signal to the first light emitting means (a portion for controlling light emission of the light emitting decoration by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510), and second light emission control for outputting a control signal to the second light emitting means. Means (a portion for controlling light emission of the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400 by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310), and the second light emitting means is controlled at a shorter cycle than the first light emitting control means. Since the signal is output, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect in the information represented by the second light emitting means.

The first light emission control means controls the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode in which it is difficult to determine the special lottery result, and the second light emission control means controls the light emission of the second light emitting means in a mode in which the special lottery result can be determined. By controlling the light emission in a manner in which the result of the lottery process can be discriminated, the second light emitting means, which is highly important to the first light emitting means, outputs a control signal at a shorter cycle than the first light emitting means to control the light emission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring in the information represented by the second light emitting means, which is disadvantageous to the player.

The game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) which includes the first light emission control means and controls the progress of the game, and the second light emission control means which controls the production based on the command from the game control means. The production control means (peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510) is further provided, and the first light emitting means is controlled by the game control means, and the second light emitting means is controlled by the production control means. Can be reliably suppressed.

A game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) for controlling the progress of the game and a plurality of light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, which can emit light in association with the game effect executed along with the progress of the game. Function display unit 1400, light emitting ornament (back lower middle rotating ornament 3310, back upper rear rotating ornament 3440, back rear left rotating ornament 3510, back right rotating ornament 3610, back rear movable ornament 3110, back upper Front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, etc.), door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418 LED provided on the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, the plate upper left decoration board 273, the plate upper right decoration board 278, and the plate center upper decoration board 314. And a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on different circuit boards depending on the use (production use, game state or notification of special display result). , A first circuit board (a board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, a function provided in the function display unit 1400) on which the light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, the function display unit 1400) used for the first application is mounted. A display substrate) and a light emitting means used for a second application different from the first application (a light emitting decorative body (a lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, a rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, a rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, It is provided in the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, the back rear movable decoration body 3110, the back front rotation decoration body 3410, the back front decoration body 3421, the back front left decoration body 3713, the back front right decoration body 3813, etc.). LED, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, and LED provided on door frame top right decoration board 457, still upper left plate A second circuit board (a light emitting decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310) that mounts the decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the LED provided on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may be included. , Back-rear rotating decoration 3440, back-rear rotating left decoration 3510, back-rear rotating right decoration 3610, back-rear movable decoration 3110, back-rear rotating decoration 3410, back-rear front decoration 3421, back-rear left A circuit board provided on the decorative body 3713, the front right decorative body 3813, etc.) and a circuit for mounting the LED provided on the door frame 3 Substrate (at least door frame left side decorative substrate 402, door frame right side decorative substrate 418, door frame top central decorative substrate 455, door frame top left decorative substrate 456, door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and plate upper left in this example) The decorative substrate 273, the dish upper right decorative substrate 278, and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included. )) and the mounting surface of different colors, the reflection efficiency of the light emitting means can be increased or decreased depending on the application. For example, by making the circuit board for which the reflection efficiency is desired to be a bright color and the circuit board for which the diffusion of light is desired to be a dark color, it is possible to prevent erroneous information from being transmitted to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

The light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board is used to enhance the effect, and the light emitting means mounted on the second circuit board is used to display the information related to the lottery result. By forming a dark insulating film on the surface of the second circuit board that displays predetermined information, it is possible to suppress light interference and prevent incorrect information from being notified.

A white insulating film is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, a dark insulating film is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, and a light emitting means used to enhance the effect is provided. By forming a white insulating film on the surface of the first circuit board, the reflection efficiency of the light emitting means can be increased, and thus the brightness of the light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board at the time of light emission can be increased, The staging effect is enhanced. On the other hand, by forming a dark-colored insulating film on the surface of the second circuit board for displaying information related to the lottery result, it is possible to prevent light emitted from each of the light emitting means from diffusing and interfering with each other. The light emitting state of each of the light emitting means becomes clear, and it is possible to prevent the information related to the lottery result from being misunderstood and transmitted.

A first circuit board including a game board 5 having a game area 5a on which a game ball rolls is formed on the front surface, and rail members (outer rails 1001 and inner rails 1002) partitioning the front surface of the game board 5. Are arranged in the inner area of the rail member, the second circuit board is arranged in the outer area of the rail member, and a white insulating film is formed on the surface of the first circuit board. It is possible to enhance the light reflection efficiency in the inner region of the member and enhance the effect of production.

A plurality of light emitting means mounted on a circuit board for electric parts and controlled to emit light according to the result of the lottery (a light emitting decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration) Body 3510, back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, back rear movable decoration body 3110, back top front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456). , And the LED provided on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the LED provided on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included), dot matrix. Display unit 7000, function display unit 1400, effect display device 1600, etc., the plurality of light emitting means are divided into a plurality of light emitting units, and the plurality of light emitting units simultaneously emit a plurality of light emitting means. The first light emitting unit (light emitting decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right) is made difficult to identify each light emitting state when controlled. Rotating decorative body 3610, back rear movable decorative body 3110, back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.), door frame 3, door frame 3 LED (at least the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board in this example) The LEDs provided on the plate 457, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate central upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included. And a second light emitting unit (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) that can be identified for each light emitting state, and the surface of the first circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted. Includes a first insulating film (light-colored insulating film such as white) formed of a first insulating paint, and the electric component formed on the first insulating film and mounted on the first circuit board. LED attributes such as the part number of the LED (the part number of the LED, the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged, etc.) (in addition, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED The size, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), and the model of the LED may be included. ) (Including foil stripping and silk printing with an insulating paint of a color different from the first insulating paint)), and the second light emitting means are mounted. It is characterized in that only the second insulating film (dark insulating film such as black) made of the second insulating paint is formed on the surface of the circuit board without forming the notation portion. As a result, only the second insulating film made of the second insulating paint is formed without forming the notation portion on the surface of the second circuit board on which the second light emitting unit whose individual light emitting states are visible is mounted. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to make the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board uniform. For example, when only the second insulating film made of the light-colored second insulating coating is formed on the surface of the second circuit board. In addition, uniform light emission can be realized, and when only the second insulating film made of the dark second insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, the light interference is suppressed and the individual light emitting states are made clear. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify each light emitting state.

Alternatively, the first insulating paint may be a bright color, and the notation part may be formed in a bright color different from that of the first insulating paint. As a result, a coating film of a light-colored insulating paint is formed on the surface of the first circuit board, and a light-colored notation different from the light-colored color of the insulating paint is formed on the coating film. It is possible to prevent the reflection efficiency on the surface of the substrate from being reduced by the notation portion, and it is possible to specify the electrical component mounted on the first circuit board by the notation portion. As a result, it is possible to specify the electric components mounted on the first circuit board without lowering the luminance of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means mounted on the first circuit board, thus improving the effect of game production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

Further, the first insulating paint may be white and the notation part may be yellow. As a result, the notation portion is formed in yellow whose reflection efficiency is close to that of the white color of the insulating paint formed on the surface of the first circuit board. It is possible to specify the electric component mounted on the circuit board, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the luminance of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the game effect and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Alternatively, the second insulating paint may be dark and a dark second insulating film may be formed on the surface of the second circuit board. Thereby, while the coating film of the dark insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board, the notation portion is not formed, so that the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board is prevented from being improved by the notation portion. It will be possible. This makes it possible to suppress light interference on the surface of the second circuit board and clarify the individual light emitting states, which facilitates identification of the individual light emitting states.

Alternatively, the second insulating paint may be black and a black second insulating film may be formed on the surface of the second circuit board. Accordingly, while the coating film made of the black insulating paint is formed on the surface of the second circuit board while the notation portion is not formed, it is possible to prevent the reflection efficiency on the surface of the second circuit board from being improved by the notation portion. It will be possible. This makes it possible to suppress light interference on the surface of the second circuit board and clarify the individual light emitting states, which facilitates identification of the individual light emitting states.

Further, a notation part for specifying an electric component mounted on the second circuit board may be formed on the back surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are not mounted. Since the notation portion is formed on the back surface of the second circuit board, it is possible to specify the electric component mounted on the second circuit board while suppressing a decrease in reflection efficiency on the front surface of the second circuit board.

Further, the notation portion formed on the back surface of the second circuit board may be formed in a color having a higher reflection efficiency than black. Since the notation portion formed of a color having a higher reflection efficiency than black is formed on the back surface of the second circuit board on which the light emitting means for wearing is not mounted, the second circuit board does not have to improve the reflection efficiency on the front surface. It becomes possible to specify the electrical components mounted on the two circuit boards, suppress the interference of light on the surface of the second circuit board, and make the individual light emission states clear. Identification can be facilitated.

In addition, a first circuit board cover that covers at least the surface of the first circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back side). Rear right rotation decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, and left side of door frame 3. Inner lens 403, right side inner lens 415, etc.), and a second circuit board cover (surface cover portion 7110) that covers at least the surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted. The circuit board case is made of a material having a light-transmitting portion corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board, and the second circuit board case is made of a material not having a light-transmitting portion corresponding to the surface of the second circuit board. While being formed, a display unit may be provided that allows the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting units mounted on the second circuit board to be discriminated. By forming a portion of the first circuit board case corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board with a light-transmitting material, light is emitted over the entire area of the portion of the first circuit board case corresponding to the surface of the first circuit board. It can be decorated. In addition, a portion corresponding to the surface of the second circuit board of the second circuit board case is formed of a material having no translucency so that the light emitting state of each of the plurality of light emitting means can be discriminated from the display unit. It is possible to suppress the interference of light of each of the light emitting means and make the individual light emitting states clear, which makes it easy to identify the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the display unit of the second circuit board cover may have a suppressing unit (each light emitting unit is divided into a cylindrical shape) for suppressing light interference by each of the plurality of light emitting units. With this configuration, light interference on the surface of the second circuit board is suppressed, and it becomes easier to individually identify the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the second circuit board cover covers the front surface cover portion (surface cover portion 7110) that covers the surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means are mounted and the back surface of the second circuit board on which the plurality of light emitting means is not mounted. A rear surface cover portion (rear surface cover portion 7120) for accommodating the second circuit board, and a part of the second circuit board cover (a part of one or both of the front surface cover portion 7110 and the rear surface cover portion 7120). The second circuit board may be made detachable by destroying the second circuit board. As a result, the second circuit board cannot be detached without breaking a part of the second circuit board case, and the possibility of impairing the function of suppressing light interference is reduced.

A gaming machine which performs a lottery whether or not to win based on the establishment of the lottery conditions and controls to a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery is a win, and a plurality of light emitting means (LED) A plurality of light emitting boards (a back front left decoration board 3714 of a back front left decoration unit 3710, a back front decoration board 3422 of a back production unit 3400). , A back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, a back lower right decorative board 3253 of a back lower right effect unit 3250, a back lower left decorative board 3203 of a back lower left effect unit 3200, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative substrate 418, a door frame top central decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, and a function display unit 1400. A dark-color light-emitting substrate (dot matrix display 7000) including a function display substrate (provided) provided, and an insulating film of a dark-color (black, green, dark blue, purple, etc.) insulating coating is formed on at least the surfaces of the plurality of light-emitting substrates. 7200 provided on the substrate, the functional display substrate provided on the functional display unit 1400, etc.) and a bright color on which an insulating film made of a light-colored (white, yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) insulating paint is formed on at least the surface. Light emitting board (back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration body unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top rendering unit 3400, back front right decoration board 3814, back bottom right presentation of back front right decoration unit 3810 Lower back right decorative board 3253 of unit 3250, lower back left decorative board 3203 of lower back left production unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame Top left decorative substrate 456, door frame top right decorative substrate 457, etc.), and the dark color light emitting substrate is a connector (connector 7002) for connecting wiring to the dark color light emitting substrate only on the back surface of the dark color light emitting substrate. ) Is arranged, and the connector for connecting the wiring to the bright color light emitting substrate is arranged on the surface of the bright color light emitting substrate. With this configuration, by disposing the connector on the rear surface of the light-emitting substrate on which the insulating film made of the dark-colored insulating paint is formed, the reflection efficiency is uniform on the front surface of the light-emitting substrate. The light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means can be clearly recognized. As a result, the effect of production is improved, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Alternatively, a bright color (white, light blue, yellow, yellow-green, etc.) connector may be used. By arranging a light-colored connector on the back surface of the dark-colored light-emitting board on the dark-colored light-emitting board, it is possible to connect the wiring to the dark-colored light-emitting board while suppressing the improvement of the reflection efficiency on the surface of the dark-colored light-emitting board. By making the connector arranged on the surface of the bright color light emitting substrate a bright color, it becomes possible to connect the wiring to the bright color light emitting substrate while suppressing a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface of the bright color light emitting substrate.

Alternatively, a black insulating paint may be used as the dark insulating paint. Since an insulating film made of a black insulating paint is formed on the surface of the dark color light emitting substrate, it is possible to suppress light interference on the surface of the dark color light emitting substrate. Further, by disposing the connector on the back surface, the reflection efficiency on the front surface of the dark color light emitting substrate can be made uniform without being improved by the connector, and the light emission by the plurality of light emitting means can be clearly recognized.

Alternatively, a white insulating paint may be used as the light-colored insulating paint. Since an insulating film made of a white insulating paint is formed on the surface of the light-colored light emitting substrate, the efficiency of light reflection on the surface of the light-colored light-emitting substrate is improved as compared with the conventional circuit board on which the green insulating film is formed. be able to. Further, by making the connector arranged on the surface light-colored, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface of the light-colored light-emitting substrate and increase the brightness of light emitted by the plurality of light-emitting means.

Alternatively, a white connector may be used. By arranging the white connector on the back surface of the dark color light emitting substrate, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the dark color light emitting substrate can be made uniform without improving the connector, and the light emission by the plurality of light emitting means can be clearly recognized. .. Further, by making the connector white, it becomes easy to identify the connector when a dark insulating film is formed on the back surface of the dark light emitting substrate. Further, since the white connector similar to the insulating film formed on the surface of the bright color light emitting substrate is arranged, it is possible to prevent the reflection efficiency of the surface of the bright color light emitting substrate from being lowered by the connector.

Further, a dark-color light-emitting substrate case (case 7100) that accommodates the dark-color light-emitting substrate is further provided, and the dark-color light-emitting substrate case has a portion corresponding to the surface of the dark-color light-emitting substrate formed of a material having no translucency. You may make it have a display part (penetration part 7110a) which can discriminate|determine the light emission state of each of several light emission means mounted in a dark color light emission board. A portion of the dark-colored light-emitting substrate case corresponding to the surface of the dark-colored light-emitting substrate is formed of a material having no light-transmitting property so that the light-emitting state of each of the plurality of light-emitting means can be discriminated from the display unit. It is possible to suppress the interference of light and clarify the individual light emitting states, which facilitates the identification of the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means.

In addition, the display unit of the dark color light emitting substrate case may have a suppressing unit (each light emitting unit is divided into a cylindrical shape by the penetrating portion 7110a) for suppressing light interference by each of the plurality of light emitting units. The interference of light on the surface of the dark color light emitting substrate is suppressed, and it becomes easy to individually identify the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting means.

Further, the dark color light emitting substrate case may be in a state in which the dark color light emitting substrate case can be detached by breaking a part of the dark color light emitting substrate case. The dark color light emitting substrate cannot be detached unless a part of the dark color light emitting substrate case is destroyed, so that the possibility of impairing the function of suppressing light interference is reduced.

A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game in accordance with the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and a plurality of light emitting means capable of emitting light as the game progresses. (Light emitting decoration (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration 3510, rear rear right rotating decoration 3610, rear rear movable decoration 3110, rear upper front rotating decoration) 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, and the like, LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (at least door frame left side decoration in this example) LEDs provided on the board 402, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457, the plate upper left decoration board 273, the plate upper right decoration It may also include a substrate 278, an LED provided on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.), a dot matrix display 7000, a function display unit 1400, an effect display device 1600, etc.). , The plurality of light emitting means are mounted on different substrates according to the application (whether surface decoration is performed by light emitting decoration on a decorative body, or various hemorrhoidal characters, symbols, figures, etc. are displayed by dot matrix display, etc.) The first light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means is provided on the first light emitting substrate (the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400) which is formed of a black mounting surface having low light reflection efficiency. The second light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means provided on the function display board, etc. is a second light emitting board (back front left of the decorative body unit 3710, which is a white mounting surface having high light reflection efficiency). Decorative board 3714, back-up front decoration board 3422 of back-up production unit 3400, back-front right decoration board 3814 of back-front right decoration body unit 3810, back-bottom right decoration board 3253 of back-bottom right presentation unit 3250, back-bottom left presentation The lower back left decorative board 3203 of the unit 3200, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, Etc.), and the first light emitting substrate is housed in a white case body (case 7100) having high light reflection efficiency. As a result, the first light emitting substrate does not increase the reflection efficiency of its own light emission, but can increase the reflection efficiency of other light emission.

Further, the first light emitting means mounted on the first light emitting board can display the lottery result of the lottery means in a light emitting mode, and the second light emitting means mounted on the second light emitting board is Before the first light emitting means displays the lottery result in the light emitting mode, the light emitting effect according to the lottery result may be executed. The interference of light on the mounting surface of the first light emitting substrate is suppressed by making the mounting surface of the first light emitting substrate displaying the lottery result in a light emitting mode black with low light reflection efficiency, and incorrect information is notified. Can be suppressed.

[Counterfeit prevention measures for important boards]
As described above, in this example, the circuit board that mounts the light emitting means that plays an important role in hindering the progress of the game, in other words, by directly controlling the profit of the player, On a high circuit board (in this example, the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, the function display board provided on the function display unit 1400, etc.), a black insulating film is formed on the board surface, which is important for the progress of the game. No information is displayed (may be displayed infrequently) Luminous ornament (back lower middle rotating ornament 3310, back upper rear rotating ornament 3440, back left rotating ornament 3510, back right rotating ornament) Body 3610, rear back movable decoration body 3110, back top front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) and the like provided on the door frame 3. Circuit board, in other words, a circuit board of low importance by performing control related to game production that is not directly related to the interests of the player (in this example, a lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, a back upper rear rotating decorative body). 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back rear movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right A circuit board provided on the decorative body 3813, the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board. 457, etc., which may include the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314.), a white insulating film is formed on the substrate surface.

Further, as described above, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. On the other hand, the circuit board of low importance (in this example, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the upper back rotating rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear Left rotation decorative body 3510, back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, back rear movable decoration body 3110, back top front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc. , A door frame left side decoration board 402, a door frame right side decoration board 418, a door frame top central decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, a door frame top right decoration board 457, and the like. The plate upper left decoration substrate 273, the plate upper right decoration substrate 278, and the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 may be included.) The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. It is designed to be controlled.

That is, in this example, of the circuit boards on which the LEDs for irradiating the front side of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the game board 5 are mounted, the circuit board directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, In other words, a black insulating film is formed on the circuit board of high importance (the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 in this example), while the circuit board controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, Then, a circuit board having a low degree of importance (in this example, a back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, a back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, a back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, a back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, a back rear movable decorative body 3110, A white insulating film is formed on a circuit board provided on the back-up front rotating decoration 3410, the back-up front decoration 3421, the back-front left decoration 3713, the back-front right decoration 3813, and the like. ..

As described above, in this example, the circuit board on which the LED, which is provided on the game board 5 and emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, is mounted is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. Insulation formed on the surface of the board to determine whether it is a circuit board with a high degree of importance or a circuit board with a low importance controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. It can be easily identified by the color of the film. Therefore, if it is determined that the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, etc., a sufficient inspection is performed on the circuit board, so that it is directly in the interest of the player when it is installed in the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious troubles related to this. On the other hand, since it is possible to easily determine that the circuit board is of high importance, there is a possibility that unauthorized modification or the like may be performed on the circuit board of high importance. In this example, by making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance, it is difficult for unauthorized modification of the circuit board of high importance.

Specifically, in the substrate 7200 provided in the above-mentioned dot matrix display 7000, although the black insulating film is formed on the substrate surface (LED mounting surface), the above-mentioned penetrating portion of the LED mounting portion is used. Only a white insulating film is formed in a region corresponding to the portion 7110a (FIGS. 262A and 262B). In addition, a white insulating film is formed on the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000. 262(A) and 262(B) show a state in which the translucent film 7300 is peeled from the case 7100 for convenience. Further, the translucent film 7300 is not limited to being attached to the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, and may be placed in front of the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 with the dot matrix display 7000 installed in the pachinko machine 1. It may be attached to a transparent member (resin, glass, etc.) to be arranged.

In this example, in the area of the substrate 7200 that can be visually recognized through the penetrating portion 7110a and the opening 7120a formed in the case 7100, control relating to game production that is not directly related to the player's profit is performed. Therefore, only a white insulating film which is the same as or very similar to the insulating film formed on the circuit board of low importance is formed. As described above, in the area of the substrate 7200 that is visible through the penetrating portion 7110a and the opening 7120a formed in the case 7100, only a white insulating film that is the same as or closely resembles a circuit board of low importance is formed. By doing so, the translucent film 7300 attached to the case 7100 is peeled off and the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 becomes visible through the penetrating portion 7110a, or the translucent film 7300 is not attached. When the case 7100 that exposes a part of the substrate 7200 from the penetrating portion 7110a is used, even if the board 7200 is visually recognized through the penetrating portion 7110a and the opening 7120a formed in the case 7100, it is highly important. It is possible to prevent the player from noticing that it is a circuit board. However, on the surface of the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is mounted (front surface, LED mounting surface), a black insulating film which is the same as or closely resembles the insulating film formed on the circuit board of low importance is occupied by a black insulating film. Is higher in proportion. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the color of the surface (front surface, LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 of the board 7200 is mounted can be immediately determined to be a circuit board of high importance, and a sufficient inspection is performed. Like

It should be noted that, of the circuit boards mounted on the game board 5 and mounted with the LEDs that emit light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, all the circuit boards directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 are white. Is not limited to the one in which an insulating film of a different color (for example, black or green) is formed, and white is at least one of the circuit boards directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. What is necessary is that an insulating film of a different color (for example, black or green) is formed (black is provided when a plurality of circuit boards are provided as circuit boards directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310). (A combination of two or more of a circuit board on which an insulating film is formed, a circuit board on which a green insulating film is formed, and a circuit board on which a white insulating film is formed may be included). Further, among the circuit boards mounted on the game board 5 and mounted with the LEDs that emit light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, all the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 are white. The insulating film is not limited to the one on which the insulating film is formed, and an insulating film having a color different from black (for example, white or green) on at least one of the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. May be formed, or the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface (rear surface)) of the circuit board on which the LED that is provided on the game board 5 and emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. In this case, an insulating film having a color different from white (for example, black or green) may be formed.

On the other hand, circuit boards such as a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (at least the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, but a payout control board 633). (Which may include other circuit boards, etc.) are circuit boards of high importance, and in this example, the insulating film of the same color (green) is formed. The main control board box 1320 for housing the main control board 1310 is made of transparent resin so that the main control board 1310 can be visually recognized from the outside of the main control board box 1320. The peripheral control board box for housing the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. The peripheral control board 1510 is made of transparent resin so that the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized from the outside of the peripheral control board box 1520. Further, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are provided with notation portions corresponding to the electronic components on the mounting surface of the electronic components. In this way, for the circuit boards of high importance such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the insulating film of the same (similar) color is formed and the mounting surface of the electronic component is formed. Since the notation part corresponding to each of the electronic parts is formed in the, it is easy to determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, and sufficient inspection is performed on the circuit board of high importance. In addition, even if the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized by the player in a state where it is provided on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 after manufacturing, a plurality of backsides of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged. An insulating film of the same color or very similar color is formed on the circuit board, and notation portions corresponding to the electronic components are formed on the mounting surface of the electronic component, so that the mounting surface of the electronic component is substantially similar (at least It is only necessary that an insulating film of the same color or a very similar color is formed on the mounting surface of the electronic component, and the color (black, yellow, etc.) of the notation portion and the arrangement method (formed for each electronic component or plural Since it is formed collectively with respect to the electronic components, is formed on the front surface on which the electronic components are mounted, or is formed on the rear surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 1 It becomes difficult to discriminate which one of the plurality of circuit boards to be arranged in the most important circuit board (main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.), and the circuit board of high importance (main control board). 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) are less likely to be tampered with.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an insulating film of the same color (similarly similar color) is formed and a circuit of high importance. While it is difficult to determine whether the board is a circuit board or a circuit board of low importance, a circuit provided with an LED that is provided on the game board 5 and emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. The board is made visible through a case (case 7100 or the like) while making it possible to determine whether the circuit board is of high importance or low importance by changing the color of the insulating film. By making the colors of the insulating films the same (similarly similar colors), it is difficult for the player to notice whether the circuit board is of high importance or low importance. Also, regarding the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a circuit board provided on the game board 5 and mounted with an LED that emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 Similarly, the color of the insulating film may be different, but if the case (main control board box 1320, peripheral control board box 1520, etc.) is made opaque, the discovery will be delayed even if unauthorized modification is performed. Since the damage may spread, the circuit board provided on the game board 5 and arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is formed with an insulating film of the same color (similarly similar color), and a visible transparent case ( It is desirable to store them in the main control board box 1320, the peripheral control board box 1520, etc.).

In the above example, the white insulating film is formed on the entire area of the back surface of the board 7200 (LED non-mounting surface), but the invention is not limited to this, and at least the connector on the back surface of the board 7200 is used. It suffices if a white insulating film is formed in a region corresponding to the opening 7120a exposing the 7002 (a region visible through the opening 7120a exposing the connector 7002), and the other regions are white. You may make it form the insulating film of a different color (for example, black, green, etc.). In addition, when an opening or a penetrating portion is formed in addition to the opening 7120a exposing the connector 7002, a white insulating film is formed also in a region corresponding to the opening and the penetrating portion and the opening is formed. Even if the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the board 7200 is visually recognized through a portion or a penetrating portion, it is possible to realize that the circuit board is of high importance by performing control directly related to the player's profit. The person may not be aware of it.

Further, in the substrate 7200, a color that is the same as or closely resembles that of the insulating film formed on the circuit board of low importance (white in this example) over the range exceeding the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a formed in the case 7100. ) May be formed, or may be formed on a circuit board of low importance in a part of a neighboring area outside the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a when the board 7200 is housed in the case 7100. A white insulating film that is the same as or closely resembles the above-described insulating film may be formed in a predetermined shape (for example, an arbitrary shape, a symbol, a character, a notation portion, or the like). With such a structure, the black insulating film can be made difficult to be visually recognized even when the substrate 7200 accommodated in the case 7100 is displaced and the region of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is changed. It is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the circuit board is of high importance. Also,

Further, as described above, the case 7100 that houses the substrate 7200 is formed of a colored opaque white resin that does not have a light-transmitting property. Further, on the front surface side of the case 7100, a translucent film 7300 having a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a made semitransparent (in this example, frosted frosted glass) is attached. The substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 cannot be directly viewed from the front surface side. As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process and perform a sufficient inspection on the circuit board of high importance. In the state of being provided on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1, among the circuit boards of high importance, the existence of the circuit board on which the LED that emits light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is concealed is concealed Since it is difficult to illegally modify the game machine, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the gaming machine from decreasing.

The main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 on at least the LED mounting surface (excluding at least the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a) of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100. It is also possible to form an insulating film of a color (green) that is the same as or very similar to that of the circuit board having high importance. Of the circuit boards controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, at least the LED mounting surface of the circuit board on which the LEDs provided on the game board 5 and radiating light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted. By forming an insulating film of a color (white) different from that of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc., it is easy to determine whether or not the circuit board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, and the importance level can be increased. It becomes possible to perform a sufficient inspection on a high circuit board.

Further, the case 7100 accommodating the board 7200 may be formed of a white resin that is the same as or closely resembles the insulating film formed on the circuit board of low importance, and thus the case 7100 is also low in importance. It is possible to recognize that the circuit board is similar to the circuit board and not notice that the circuit board having a high degree of importance is contained.

In addition, as described above, in this example, in the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is a white insulating film that is the same as or closely resembles the insulating film formed on the less important circuit substrate. Since only the film is formed, even if the transparent film 7300 is peeled from the case 7100 and the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 is visible through the penetrating portion 7110a, it is housed in the case 7100. It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the printed circuit board 7200 is a circuit board of high importance.

Further, no through hole is formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating part 7110a of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 (a region inside the penetrating part 7110a). As a result, the surface of the white insulating film formed over the entire surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the area inside the penetrating portion 7110a) becomes smooth, and thus the surface of the substrate 7200 passes through the penetrating portion 7100a. It is possible to prevent the player who looks at the (front surface, LED mounting surface) from feeling uncomfortable, and to avoid noticing that the circuit board is of high importance. Note that a through hole is formed in a region corresponding to the through portion 7110a of the substrate 7200 (a region inside the through portion 7110a), and a surface of the substrate 7200 (front surface, LED mounting surface) corresponding to the through portion 7110a including the through hole. Alternatively, a white insulating film thicker than usual may be formed. In this case as well, since the surface of the insulating film can be smoothed, the surface of the substrate 7200 (front surface, It is possible to prevent the player who sees the LED mounting surface) from feeling uncomfortable, and to prevent the user from noticing that the circuit board is of high importance.

In addition, in the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the area inside the penetrating portion 7110a) is white (not limited to white, but a bright color having high reflection efficiency (for example, The reflection efficiency may be improved by forming an insulating film (which may be yellow). For example, as shown in FIG. 258(A), a black insulating paint is applied to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 to form the first conductive film 7200A, which corresponds to the penetrating portion 7110a of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200. The region (region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) may be solid-painted (silk-printed) with white paint from above the first conductive film 7200A to form the second conductive film 7200B. ), a white insulating paint is applied to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 to form a first conductive film 7200A, and a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 (penetrating portion 7110a). The second conductive film 7200B may be formed by solid-painting (silk-printing) a black paint on the first conductive film 7200A except for the inner region).

That is, in FIG. 258(A), the black first conductive film 7200A is formed around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and the white first conductive film 7200A is formed in the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. Two conductive films 7200B are formed. Further, in FIG. 258(B), a black second conductive film 7200B is formed around a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white second conductive film 7200B is formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. One conductive film 7200A is formed. In this manner, the black insulating film (the black first conductive film 7200A, the black second conductive film 7200B) is formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and the penetrating portion 7110a is formed. By forming a white insulating film (a white second conductive film 7200B and a white first conductive film 7200A) in a region corresponding to the area, a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 (one Since it is possible to increase the reflection efficiency of the area inside the penetrating portion 7110a in which the LED 7001 is arranged, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in the brightness in the penetrating portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light and to make the light emission by one LED 7001 clear. Since the low reflection efficiency can be maintained around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, the LED 7001 arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a can be provided with a low reflection efficiency. Even if the light leaks to the outside of the penetrating portion 7110a, the light can be prevented from diffusing. Further, in this case, the above-mentioned notation part may not be silk-printed, or the notation part may be silk-printed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 where the LED 7001 is not mounted, or the LED mounting. On the black first conductive film 7200A or the black second conductive film 7200B formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the surface, a bright color paint having high reflection efficiency such as white or yellow is used. The notation portion may be silk-printed, or a yellow color or the like may be formed on the white first conductive film 7200A or the white second conductive film 7200B formed in a region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface. The marking portion may be silk-printed using a bright color paint having high reflection efficiency.

According to the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine that performs a lottery whether or not to win based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and controls a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery is a win. , A main-side board (a board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, a function display board provided in the function display unit 1400, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, etc.) used for the progress of the game, and for executing the effect Sub-side board used (peripheral control board 1510, back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration body unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top production unit 3400, back front right of decoration body unit 3810 Decorative substrate 3814, lower back right decorative substrate 3253 of lower back right rendering unit 3250, lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of lower back left rendering unit 3200, door frame left side decorative substrate 402, door frame right side decorative substrate 418, door frame A top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457), and the main side board is arranged such that the surface on which electronic components are mounted faces the rear of the game machine. A first main side board (main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc.) and a surface arranged to face the front of the gaming machine, and a specific color that is not formed on at least the surface on the sub side board A second main-side substrate (a substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, a functional display substrate provided in the functional display unit 1400) having a region, and an electronic component mounted on the first main-side substrate. Of the electronic component such as information for identifying the type of the electronic component (part number of the electronic component, an area indicating the position where the electronic component is arranged, etc. (in addition, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction of the electronic component ( (Mounting direction), and the type of electronic component may be included) (including foil stripping and silk printing with an insulating paint of a color different from the first insulating paint)) On the other hand, the second main board is not provided with information for identifying the type of electronic component to be mounted. As a result, regarding the second main-side substrate arranged so that the surface on which the electronic components are mounted faces the front of the gaming machine, a colored region of a specific color that is not formed on the sub-side substrate (for example, resists of different colors). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the board is of high importance, and to prevent the inspection of the board of high importance from being overlooked. Further, if the player side can recognize the existence of the board of high importance, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act using it will be performed. However, in the present invention, the surface on which the electronic component is mounted is located behind the game machine. It is difficult to distinguish the first main side substrate from the sub side substrate by not forming the colored region of the specific color on the first main side substrate arranged so as to face the front side of the gaming machine. Information for identifying the type of electronic component to be mounted is not provided on the second main-side board to be arranged. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the first main side substrate is a substrate of high importance as the same as the sub side substrate without providing a colored region of a specific color, and the front surface of the gaming machine is A colored region of a specific color is formed on the easily visible second main-side substrate to facilitate the determination of whether or not the substrate is of high importance in the manufacturing process, while making it difficult to identify the type of electronic component. This makes it difficult to illegally modify the second main-side board and suppresses the reliability of the gaming machine from decreasing.

Further, the first main side board may have a function of performing a lottery to determine whether or not the winning is based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the second main side board may have a function of displaying the lottery result. The first main-side substrate, which has the highest importance by performing a lottery for winning or not, is the same as the sub-side substrate without forming a colored region of a specific color. Therefore, the first main-side substrate and the sub-side substrate It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the substrate is a substrate of high importance or not.

The surfaces of the first main-side board and the second main-side board are both covered with a cover body (main control board box 1320, payout control board box 632, case 7100, etc.). An opening (penetration part 7110a) that opens toward the front side of the gaming machine is provided in the cover body (front surface cover portion 7110) that accommodates, and the plate surface on the front side of the second main side substrate is defined by the cover body. A colored region (insulating film) having a color (black or the like) different from the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided on the plate surface outside the opening when covered, and the front surface side of the second main-side substrate is provided. Only the colored area (insulating film) of the color (white etc.) that is the same as or very similar to the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided on the plate surface inside the opening when the plate surface is covered with the cover body. You may Even if the board surface of the second main-side board is viewed from the opening toward the front side of the gaming machine, it is only possible to see the colored area that is the same as or similar to the board color of the sub-side board. It is possible to make a person recognize that the board is of low importance and not to notice it as an important board.

In addition, a part of the plate surface on the front side of the second main side substrate, which is outside the opening in the state where the plate surface on the front side is covered with the cover, has a color that is the same as or substantially similar to the substrate color of the sub side substrate. A colored region (an insulating film of a color formed by an arbitrary shape, a symbol, a character, a writing portion, or the like) may be provided. As a result, even if the second main-side substrate housed in the cover body is displaced and the area of the plate surface inside the opening changes, it is difficult to visually recognize the colored area having a color different from the substrate color of the sub-side board. ..

The cover body that covers the surface of the second main-side substrate includes a front cover portion (front surface cover portion 7110) that covers the front surface side of the second main-side substrate and a back surface cover portion that covers the back surface side of the second main-side substrate. (Rear surface cover portion 7120) and a rear surface side opening portion (opening portion 7120a) that opens toward the rear surface side of the gaming machine is provided in the rear surface cover portion, and the rear surface side plate of the second main side substrate. A colored region (insulating film) of a color (black or the like) different from the substrate color of the sub-side substrate is provided on the plate surface that is outside the opening in a state where the surface is covered by the back cover portion, and the second main On the plate surface inside the opening when the plate surface on the back side of the side substrate is covered by the back cover part, there is only a colored region of the same color as the substrate color of the sub-side substrate (white or the like). It may be provided. Even if the board surface of the second main-side board is viewed from the opening toward the back side of the gaming machine, it is only possible to see the colored area that is the same as or very similar to the board color of the sub-side board. It is possible to make a person recognize that the board is of low importance and not to notice the important board.

A game machine that performs a lottery whether or not it is a win based on the establishment of a lottery condition and, when the result of the lottery is a win, controls a special game state advantageous to the player, and is used for the progress of the game. Main-side substrate (substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, function display substrate provided in the function display unit 1400, main control substrate 1310, payout control substrate 633, etc.) and sub-side substrate (periphery) used for performance production Control board 1510, back front left decoration board 3714 of back front left decoration body unit 3710, back top front decoration board 3422 of back top production unit 3400, back front right decoration board 3814, back bottom right of back front right decoration unit 3810 Back lower right decorative board 3253 of rendering unit 3250, lower back left decorative board 3203 of lower back rendering unit 3200, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top central decorative board 455, door A frame top left decorative substrate 456 and a door frame top right decorative substrate 457), and the main side substrate is a first main side substrate (the main side substrate is arranged so that the surface on which electronic components are mounted faces the rear of the gaming machine). A main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, etc.) and a second main side having a colored region of a specific color which is arranged so that its surface faces the front of the gaming machine and is not formed on at least the sub-side board on the surface. A substrate (a substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 and a functional display substrate provided in the functional display unit 1400). The first main side substrate and the second main side substrate are respectively case bodies (main control substrates). Although it is accommodated in the box 1320, the payout control board box 632, the case 7100, etc., the second main board is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside when accommodated in the case body (main control board box 1320). The payout control board box 632 is transparent, while the case 7100 is opaque). According to the above configuration, with respect to the second main side substrate arranged so that the surface on which the electronic component is mounted faces the front of the gaming machine, a colored region of a specific color that is not formed on the sub side substrate (for example, different By having color resist, silk, etc.), it becomes easy to determine whether or not the board is of high importance in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent oversight of inspection on the board of high importance. .. Further, if the player side can recognize the existence of the board of high importance, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act using it will be performed. However, in the present invention, the surface on which the electronic component is mounted is located behind the game machine. It is difficult to distinguish the first main side substrate from the sub side substrate by not forming the colored region of the specific color on the first main side substrate arranged so as to face the front side of the gaming machine. The arranged second main-side board is housed in a case body so that it is difficult to visually recognize it from the outside. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the first main-side board is a board of high importance as the same as the sub-side board without providing a colored region of a specific color, and the surface is in front of the gaming machine. A colored region of a specific color is formed on the second main side substrate so as to face it, and it is easy to determine whether or not the substrate is of high importance in the manufacturing process, while it is easily visible to the player in the state after manufacturing. Since the existence of the second main-side board is hidden and it is difficult to tamper with it, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the gaming machine from decreasing.

In addition, the case body that houses the second main-side substrate may be formed in a color that is the same as or substantially similar to the substrate color of the sub-side substrate. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to notice that it is an important board.

[Lamp/LED brightness adjustment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED provided in the door frame 3 (at least the door frame left side decoration board in this example) is operated by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 301 in the production operation unit 300. 402, a door frame right side decoration board 418, a door frame top center decoration board 455, a door frame top left decoration board 456, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface of the door frame top right decoration board 457, and a plate upper left decoration board 273, the right upper plate of the plate 278, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface of the plate on the center of the plate 314 may be adjusted in brightness), and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 (at least in this example). A plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, the door frame top right decoration board 457, It is possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface of the rear back decorative substrate 3114, the rear upper rear decorative substrate 3452, the rear rear left decorative substrate 3522, and the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 which are mounted on the movable decorative body. It is also possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of LEDs as a backlight of the effect display device 1600. However, the LEDs (for example, the function display unit 1400 are provided in the display device that displays important information related to the game). It is desirable that the brightness of the provided LED) is not adjustable.) and the brightness of the LED can be adjusted in steps of 5% over a range of 70% to 100%.

Specifically, when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is improved, and the rotating operation unit 302 is operated. When rotated counterclockwise, the brightness of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 is reduced.

Further, when operating the rotary operation unit 302 to adjust the brightness, a barometer according to the current brightness is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period of time, and the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer is increased until the brightness reaches 100%, and when the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer is decreased until the brightness reaches 70%. In this way, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the display operation unit 300 is provided in the effect operation button unit 360 by directing attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to prevent the central button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 37, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 from being visually recognized, and the connectors described on these boards. The number of pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outlines on which the electronic parts are arranged are difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being lost and the design is improved. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the special lottery result of the lottery, the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is not performed. The LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. When the rotation operation unit 302 is operated in a normal state in which the LED mounted on the surface of the LED is off, the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are operated. The LED mounted on the display and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are controlled to emit light for a certain period, and the center of the effect operation button unit 360 is controlled. The button cover 375, the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are illuminated and decorated. When the period during which the effect operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a certain period, the barometer of the effect display device 1600 disappears and the LED of the effect operation unit 300 is turned off. In the player participation type production, the operation ring drive motor 342 can be used to rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation button lift drive motor. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 so as to be conspicuous, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

In this way, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs provided in the effect operation unit 300 while the rotation operation unit 302 is being operated to adjust the brightness, the central button decoration board 376 on which these LEDs are mounted, The surfaces of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LEDs.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and below the effect operation ring 330. With respect to the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in, the brightness cannot be adjusted. That is, the brightness of the LEDs provided in the effect operation unit 300, which is provided in a position close to the player and is easily noticed, is controlled so that the light emission is controlled with the brightness set in advance. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is light-emitted in the above-described effect light-emitting mode, it is always mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the operation operation ring decoration board 352 with a certain brightness or more. It is possible to make the LED that is present emit light, and the player emits light from the LED in a situation where the player pays attention to the effect operation unit 300 (a situation in which the effect operation unit 301 is operated such as player participation type effect or volume adjustment is performed). The central button decoration board 376, the outer circumference button decoration board 377, and the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the emitted light, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the parts described on these boards can be reduced. Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic components are arranged, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disturbed and prevent deterioration in design. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

In addition, in the above-described central button decoration board 376, outer circumference button decoration board 377, and production operation ring decoration board 352, white is adopted as the insulating film (resist) on the mounting surface of the LED, and the mounting surface has a yellow insulating property. Information (notation part) such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the external line on which the electronic parts are arranged is silk-printed with paint. As described above, in this example, since the notation part is silk-printed with the yellow insulating paint which has a small visual difference (contrast) with respect to white, the LED is turned off as well as the LED is turned off. Even this information is difficult to identify.

In addition, the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period (for example, before and after the special symbol that is variably displayed is stopped for a certain period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until the peripheral control MPU is activated). It may be always executable except for one or both of a certain period of time), or a specific condition such as a period in which a demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. It may be executable only when is satisfied. Further, the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 depending on the situation (whether or not the variable display is being performed). May be reflected immediately and the result of the brightness adjustment may be reflected at a timing later than the operation timing of the rotation operation unit 302.

In this example, the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be executed even when the door frame 3 is opened. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened, the LEDs mounted on the back front left decoration board 3714 of the back front left decoration body unit 3710 and the back front decoration board 3422 of the back production unit 3400 are mounted. LED, LED mounted on the back-front right decoration board 3814 of the back-front right decoration unit 3810, LED mounted on the back-bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back-bottom right effect unit 3250, and back-bottom left effect unit 3200 LEDs mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, movable decorative bodies (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, rear upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510, rear rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as LEDs provided on the back rear movable decorative body 3110), are turned off (non-lightable state), and LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (this example). Then, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, The plate upper right decorative substrate 278 and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be controlled to emit light. That is, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness with the door frame 3 opened, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off. However, it is not possible to judge the brightness based on the light emitting states of the plurality of LEDs.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not opened (the door frame 3 is closed), the LED mounted on the back-front left decorative board 3714 of the back-front left decorative body unit 3710, the back-up effect unit 3400. LED mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right performance unit 3250 LED, LED mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200, a movable decorative body (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration) There is no control to turn off a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3510, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, and the back back movable decoration body 3110 (lighting). Possible state). Therefore, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the brightness can be determined by the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.

Further, the back front left decorative substrate 3714, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back front right decorative substrate 3814, the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back rear decorative substrate Also for the 3452, the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, and the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, white is used as the insulating film (resist) on the mounting surface of the LED, and the number of pins of the connector is made of yellow insulating paint on the mounting surface. , The orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline of the electronic component, etc. (notation part) are silk-printed. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these substrates are in the lighting disabled state, it is possible to make it difficult to identify these pieces of information.

[Adjustment of brightness of LED mounted on specific board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, there are a circuit board on which an LED (dimming LED) whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range is mounted, and an LED (non-dimming LED) whose brightness cannot be adjusted and which emits light at a constant brightness. A circuit board to be mounted is provided. Then, when the brightness of the dimming LED is adjusted, the brightness can be adjusted by using the emission brightness of the non-dimming LED as an index.

Specifically, the back-front left decorative board 3714, the back-up front decorative board 3422, the back-front right decorative board 3814, the back-bottom right decorative board 3253, the back-bottom left decorative board 3203, the back-back decorative board 3114, the back-up rear Decorative substrate 3452, back rear left decorative substrate 3522, back rear right decorative substrate 3622, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, In the rear-back movable decorative body 3110, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the like. Is a central button decoration board 376 and outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and an effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. Non-dimming LEDs are mounted on the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, the functional display substrate provided on the functional display unit 1400, and the like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the circuit board on which the non-dimming LED is mounted is provided in the upper left portion or the upper right portion of the game board 5, and is provided below the game board 5 in the front frame 3. In other words, the non-dimming LED is provided in each of the upper and lower areas of the game board 5, which are arbitrarily divided. Therefore, when the brightness of the dimming LED is adjusted, the emission brightness of the non-dimming LED provided in the region to which the dimming LED belongs, that is, the non-dimming LED arranged near the dimming LED is used as an index. The brightness can be adjusted as follows. The non-dimming LEDs mounted on the production operation ring decoration substrate 352, the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, the function display substrate provided on the function display unit 1400, etc. are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern. However, at least one non-dimming LED among a predetermined number of mounted non-dimming LEDs is turned on. Therefore, it can be reliably used as an index when adjusting the brightness of the dimming LED.

Note that in FIG. 263(A), LED attributes such as the part number of the LED and the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged (in addition, the LED shape, the LED size, the LED mounting direction (mounting direction), The display of the notation part indicating the type of LED may be included is omitted. In addition, the notation part may be formed in a bright color (yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) different from the white color of the insulating film formed on the LED mounting surface (front face, front face), or the notation part may be formed by removing the foil. May be formed, or notation is not formed on the LED mounting surface, and the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface) is notated with a color different from the white color of the insulating film (not limited to a light color) or with the foil removed. You may make it form a part. Further, the notation part may be formed corresponding to each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, “LED1” is formed for one LED), or a plurality of LEDs (for example, for each type) are collected. It is also possible to form them (for example, "LED1 to LED5" are formed for a plurality of LEDs). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and increase the brightness of light emitted from the dimming LED or the non-dimming LED. Also, it is possible to realize efficient light emission by suppressing the loss of light emission due to the non-dimming LED.

Further, the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. ), back front left decorative substrate 3714, back front front decorative substrate 3422, back front right decorative substrate 3814, back lower right decorative substrate 3253, back lower left decorative substrate 3203, back rear decorative substrate 3114, back rear rear decoration. Substrate 3452, back rear left decorative substrate 3522, back rear right decorative substrate 3622, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back LEDs such as the rear movable decoration body 3110, the door frame left side decoration board 402, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top central decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457. A white insulating film (resist) is formed similarly to the mounting surface (front surface). As described above, the brightness is mounted on the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. The non-dimming LED, which is an index for adjustment, is controlled to emit light under the same conditions as the dimming LED (mounted on the same or very similar white insulating film (resist)). The difference between the brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment and the brightness of the dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. ), the back front left decorative substrate 3714, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back front right decorative substrate 3814, the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back rear decorative substrate 3452. , Back rear left decoration board 3522, back back right decoration board 3622, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310, back top back rotation decoration body 3440, back back left rotation decoration body 3510, back back right rotation decoration body 3610, back back movable LED mounting surfaces of the decorative body 3110, the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. By forming a white insulating film (resist) on the (front surface), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of these circuit boards and to emit light from the dimming LED or the non-dimming LED. Since it is possible to increase the brightness of the above, it is possible to suppress the loss of light emission due to the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED and realize efficient light emission.

A circuit board on which a non-dimming LED is mounted and which has the same function as the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400 and which has a white insulating film (resist) formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface). May be provided. In this case, in place of the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400, the emission brightness of the non-dimming LED mounted on the circuit board provided in the specific display may be provided. May be used as an index.

Also, provide a specific board on which both an LED whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range (dimming LED) and an LED whose brightness cannot be adjusted and emits light at a constant brightness (non-dimming LED) are mounted. You may For example, as shown in FIG. 263, a non-dimming LED having a function as the specific display and a back front left decoration board 3714, a back top front decoration board 3422, a back front right decoration board 3814, and a back bottom right decoration board 3253. , Back lower left decorative substrate 3203, back rear decorative substrate 3114, back upper rear decorative substrate 3452, back left left decorative substrate 3522, back rear right decorative substrate 3622, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 , Back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, back back right rotation decoration body 3610, back rear movable decoration body 3110, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame Both the top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the like, and a dimming LED for controlling light emission related to the game effect may be mounted on one circuit board.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263(A), a side view including a full-color LED in which a white insulating film (resist) is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) and whose brightness can be adjusted within a predetermined range. Both the type dimming LED 1820 and the top-view type non-dimming LED 1830, which is a full-color LED in which brightness adjustment is disabled and emits light with a constant brightness, are formed on the same surface (where a white insulating film (resist) is formed). The specific board 1800 to be mounted on the LED mounting surface, front surface, or front surface) may be provided on one or both of the game board 5 and the door frame 3. Further, the specific board 1800 has mounting holes 1810 for mounting at the four corners of the specific board 1800 and a plurality of through holes 1840.

Further, in the specific substrate 1800 of this example, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the dimming LED group composed of the plurality of dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are composed. The dimming LED group is arranged with a predetermined interval. In addition, the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group are more than the distance to the adjacent dimming LED 1820 of the dimming LED group and the distance to the adjacent non-dimming LED of the non-dimming LED group. Are arranged so that they are separated from each other. With such a configuration, it is easy to distinguish the dimming LED group and the non-dimming LED group, and it is easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830.

The dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are packaged in the same or very similar colors, and each package is made of white resin. As described above, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are packaged in the same or very similar colors, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can emit light under the same condition, and the non-dimming LED and the non-dimming LED 1830 can emit light. By comparing the brightness with the dimming LED, the difference between the brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment and the brightness of the non-dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. In the above example, the side-view type LED is used as the dimming LED 1820, while the top-view type LED is used as the non-dimming LED 1830. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same type of LED (top-view type or The side view type) may be used. In this case, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be made to emit light under the same condition, the brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment can be determined by comparing the brightness of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. The difference from the brightness of the dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Further, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be made to have the same type of package, and in this case, it becomes easier to adjust the brightness to a player's favorite.

Although the LED packages in which the LED bare chips are encapsulated are used as the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 in the above-described example, the LED bare chips encapsulated in the LED packages may be directly mounted on the specific substrate 1800. In this case as well, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be made to emit light under the same conditions, so that the brightness of the dimming LED after the brightness adjustment can be determined by comparing the brightness of the dimming LED and the non-dimming LED. The difference from the brightness of the dimming LED becomes clear, and it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 263(B), a dimming LED 1820 and a non-dimming LED 1830 have different decorations in front of the specific substrate 1800. In this example, the character "Chance" is formed by a translucent lens in front of the area of the specific substrate 1800 on which the dimming LED 1820 is mounted, and the opaque first decorative portion 1850 is arranged in the other area. A partitioning member 1860 is provided in front of the area of the substrate 1800 on which the non-dimming LED 1830 is mounted, and the partitioning member 1860 is provided so as to penetrate the non-dimming LED 1830 so that each light emission can be visually recognized. A semitransparent cover body 1870 is provided on the front side.

As described above, in this example, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted on the specific circuit board 1800 that is the same circuit board, but the respective dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are different in decoration. And are divided by decoration. Further, since the partition member 1860, which is not provided in the dimming LED 1820, is provided in front of the non-dimming LED 1830, it becomes easy to understand that the partition member 1860 has a function different from that of the dimming LED 1820.

In addition, since the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted on the same substrate in this example, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are arranged at a relatively short distance while being arranged at a constant interval. Therefore, it is easy to compare the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830.

In this example, a partition member is provided in front of the non-dimming LED 1830 so that the light emission of each of the non-dimming LEDs 1830 can be visually recognized. The dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 mounted on the specific board 1800 are controlled by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. In addition, as for the non-dimming LED 1830, similarly to the dot matrix display 7000 described above, the light emission control is performed in a predetermined mode in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and when the variable symbol display of the special symbol is stopped, the special lottery result (the The display may be turned on in a light emission mode according to one special lottery result, second special lottery result). As a result, the non-dimming LED 1830 that the player is paying attention to can be used as an index for brightness adjustment by being lit and displayed in a light emission mode according to the special lottery result, and when performing brightness adjustment of the dimming LED 1820. By making it easier to visualize the adjusted brightness, it becomes easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, a plurality of through holes 1840 are formed between the dimming LED 1820 group and the non-dimming LED 1830 group on the specific substrate 1800 on which the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are mounted. In this through hole 1840, the light emitted from the LED is leaked to the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) side of the specific substrate 1800 without being reflected, so that light reflection and interference are suppressed. Since a plurality of through holes 1840 are formed between the dimming LED 1820 group and the non-dimming LED 1830 group in this way, light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is reflected or interferes. It is possible to control the brightness of each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 according to the individual light emission, and the brightness of the non-dimming LED 1830 according to only the light emission of the dimming LED 1820 is used as an index. Since it is possible to adjust the brightness, the accuracy of comparison is improved, and it is easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

Further, in this example, the through hole 1840 is formed so that the outer diameter is smaller than that of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 (one through hole 1840 is formed on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800). Since the ratio (area) occupying ≦ the ratio (area) occupied by one dimming LED 1820 or one non-dimming LED 1830, the light of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is unnecessarily passed through the through hole 1840 and the rear surface of the specific substrate 1800. It is possible to suppress leakage to the (LED non-mounting surface). The number of through holes 1840 formed between the dimming LEDs 1820 and the non-dimming LEDs 1830 is greater than the number of dimming LEDs 1820 and the number of non-dimming LEDs 1830 mounted on the sides of the through holes 1840. Is increasing. Thus, in this example, the through hole 1840 is formed with an outer diameter smaller than that of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, and the number of the dimming LEDs 1820 mounted on the side of the through hole 1840 and the non-dimming LED 1820 are provided. Since more through holes 1840 than the number of LEDs 1830 are formed, while suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the dimming LEDs 1820 and The brightness of the non-dimming LED 1830 can be prevented from being lowered.

A hole different from the through hole 1840, for example, a positioning hole of the specific substrate 1800 or the mounting hole 1810 described above may be formed between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. In addition, the hole may be formed with an outer diameter larger than that of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. However, a small number of holes may be formed. Thereby, while suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the brightness of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is prevented from being lowered more than necessary. be able to.

Further, a three-dimensional object (an electronic component or structure having a predetermined thickness) is provided on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800 so as to partly or partially separate the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. By doing so, it is possible to realize the suppression of reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. For example, as shown in FIG. 263(C), a resistor 1880 may be mounted between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800. The resistor 1880 has a predetermined thickness and is mounted so as to project from the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800. As described above, the resistor 1880 is provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, and protrudes from the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800, so that the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are combined. Since the parts or all are separated, it is possible to suppress reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830.

In addition, as a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, a dark-colored (black, gray, green, blue, brown, or the like) three-dimensional object (a part of the dark color is A different portion (for example, a portion having a metallic color such as silver or a transparent portion) may be provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 263C, the resistor 1880 having a black appearance may be mounted on the specific substrate 1800. As described above, by mounting the resistor 1880 having a dark color appearance with low reflection efficiency between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, reflection of light emitted from each of the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 is performed. It is possible to further improve the effect of suppressing the interference. Further, when a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure having a black appearance with the lowest reflection efficiency as a dark color is provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are provided. It is possible to maximize the effect of suppressing the reflection and interference of the light emitted from each of the.

Moreover, although the one in which the resistor 1880 is mounted is illustrated as an electronic component, the same effect as above can be obtained as long as it is an electronic component mounted on a circuit board such as a capacitor, a diode, an IC, an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit). Can be played. Moreover, the number and arrangement of these three-dimensional objects such as electronic parts and structures are not limited to those described above. For example, a plurality of three-dimensional objects are arranged at a predetermined interval between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830. Alternatively, a three-dimensional object having a larger outer diameter than the dimming LED 1820 or the non-dimming LED 1830 (ratio (area) occupied by one three-dimensional object on the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) of the specific substrate 1800≧1 dimming LED 1820 or 1 One or a plurality of ratios (areas) occupied by one non-dimming LED 1830 may be arranged.

Further, as a three-dimensional object such as an electronic component or a structure provided between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, the LED mounting surface (front surface, front surface) from the LED package of the dimming LED 1820 or the non-dimming LED 1830 Those having a large amount of protrusion (the height from the LED mounting surface to the outermost surface of the three-dimensional object is high) may be arranged. With such a configuration, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 can be respectively arranged. The effect of suppressing the reflection and interference of the irradiated light can be further enhanced.

Further, the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 may be distinguished from each other by differentiating the color and shape of the package between the dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830, or may be distinguished from the dimming LED 1820 group. The dimming LED 1820 and the non-dimming LED 1830 are distinguished by differentiating the form of arrangement from the dimming LED 1830 group (arranged vertically in one line as shown in FIG. 263(B), diagonally arranged in two lines, etc.). It may be possible.

According to the above embodiment, the lottery means for performing the lottery based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the light emission possible as the game progresses A plurality of light emitting means (a light emitting decoration (a back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, a back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, a back rear left rotating decoration 3510, a back right rotating decoration 3610, a back movable movable decoration 3110, a back) LEDs provided on the upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the rear upper front decorative body 3421, the rear front left decorative body 3713, the rear front right decorative body 3813, etc., and the LED provided on the door frame 3 (at least in this example). Door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and LED provided on door frame top right decorative board 457, and plate left upper decorative board 273, the plate upper right decoration substrate 278, and the LED provided on the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 may be included.), the dot matrix display 7000, the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600, etc.), and the player. A brightness adjusting means capable of adjusting the brightness of the light emitting means in accordance with the operation of an operable operation means (rotation operation part 302 of the effect operation part 301), wherein 1 light emitting means (light emitting decoration (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, rear upper rear rotating decoration 3440, rear rear left rotating decoration 3510, rear rear right rotating decoration 3610, rear movable movable decoration 3110, rear upper front) The LEDs provided on the rotating decoration 3410, the back-up front decoration 3421, the back-front left decoration 3713, the back-front right decoration 3813, and the like, and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (at least the door frame in this example) The left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the LED provided on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and the like. 273, the plate upper right decoration substrate 278, and the plate provided on the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 may also be included.)) The light emission is controlled with the brightness adjusted according to the operation of the operation means, and a plurality of light emission is performed. Among the means, the second light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, effect display device 1600, etc.) is characterized in that light emission is controlled at a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operation means. As described above, since the brightness of the second light emitting means is constant, it can be used as a reference when confirming the brightness of the first light emitting means.

Further, the second light emitting means may be arranged at a position separated from the first light emitting means by a predetermined distance. The light emitted from the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are arranged by arranging the second light emitting means whose light emission is controlled with a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operating means at a position separated from the first light emitting means by a predetermined distance. Since the interference of the light emitted from is suppressed and the individual lights of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be visually recognized separately, the comparison of the luminance is facilitated.

A through hole (through hole 1840) may be formed between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. Since the through hole is formed between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, the reflection efficiency of the substrate surface between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be reduced, and light interference can be caused. Is suppressed, and the luminance of the first light emitting means and the luminance of the second light emitting means can be easily compared.

The second light emitting means is partitioned with a decoration different from that of the first light emitting means (in this example, the word "chance" is formed by a translucent lens in front of the area of the specific substrate 1800 where the dimming LED 1820 is mounted. The non-dimming LED 1830 is formed in front of the region where the non-dimming LED 1830 is mounted on the specific substrate 1800 where the opaque first decorative portion 1850 is arranged and other portions are formed, and each light emission is visually recognized. A partition member 1860 penetrating so as to be possible is provided, and a semitransparent cover body 1870 is provided in front of the partition member.). Since the second light emitting means is partitioned with a decoration different from that of the first light emitting means, the second light emitting means serving as a reference can be easily specified by controlling the light emitting property with a constant brightness regardless of the operation of the operating means. Will be able to.

The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be mounted on the same light emitting substrate. Since the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted on the same light emitting substrate, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be provided at positions relatively close to the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means. The comparison with the brightness of the light emitting means becomes easy.

A white coating film may be formed on the surface of the light emitting substrate on which the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted. Since the white coating film is formed on the surface on which the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are mounted, the reflection efficiency on the surface of the light emitting substrate can be improved, and the light emission by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be improved. It is possible to suppress loss and realize efficient light emission.

[Details of main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls B, a setting change board 1311 for setting game performance, a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. And a main control board box 1320 made of resin and having non-conductivity, which is attached to the board holder 1200.

In a state where the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from the rear, the rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the left-right direction is the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Of the area surrounded by the upper side, the right side, and the lower side, it is formed and arranged in a size that occupies an area of about ⅕ from the left side to the right side, and the remaining area is about ⅕. Therefore, a square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner area where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 coaxially rotates the body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main frame 4 can be supported and opened/closed to the front centering on the left side in front view, the main frame upper hinge part 310 and the main frame lower hinge part 320 of the main frame 4 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the front view in the vertical direction is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the main shaft 4 of the main body frame 4 ( The setting change board 1311 is disposed on the closed side).

Further, the back cover 640 that is openably and closably attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above. It is a thing. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the right side of the back cover 640 in front view is rotatably attached to the right side end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and the left side in front view is paid out. Since it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper tank ball path unit 600, the right side in front view is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, The left side in front view, which is the opposite side to this, is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the back cover is opened. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In the present embodiment, green is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resist and are solid-coated except for various land patterns. On the other hand, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color that is different from the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 is white. It is solid-painted with a resist except various land patterns.

Here, the point that a color different from the color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be described. Both the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320. A manager such as a game hall store manager, a game hall clerk, or the like is a board of high importance for crime prevention, in which the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game (controls the content of the game, payout of the game ball B, and the like). Awareness about is very high. Therefore, it is not necessary to call attention to the fact that this board is the main control board 1310 by distinguishing it from other boards. On the other hand, the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 capable of setting the game performance, and therefore, the setting change board 1311 is housed in the main control board box 1320, but is important for crime prevention. Very little awareness of the high substrate. Therefore, it is necessary to call attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311 by distinguishing it from other boards.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, green that is generally used as the resist of the substrate is adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310, and white different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311. Adopted. As a result, among the boards accommodated in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 becomes more prominent than the main control board 1310, and in addition to the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 is also highly important for crime prevention. It can contribute to increase awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

In the present embodiment described above, the resist of the setting change substrate 1311 is white, which is different from the green used as the resist of the main control substrate 1310, but the main control substrate 1310 and the setting change substrate 1311 may be distinguished. If possible, yellow, red, blue, and transparent may be used.

Further, in the above-described present embodiment, the resist of the setting change substrate 1311 is white, which is different from the green color used as the resist of the main control substrate 1310. However, instead of the resist of the setting change substrate 1311, It may be printed in white as silk printing so as to cover almost all of the front surface (mounting surface) and/or the back surface (solder surface), or as silk printing in any one of black, blue, yellow, and red. You may print it.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a non-conductive resin cover body and a non-conductive resin base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be housed in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded of a resin of polycarbonate, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether unauthorized modification is performed, Or, whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, the unauthorized opening/closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening/closing, and the deterrence against the unauthorized activity on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. It should be noted that the cover body is formed with a plurality of vent holes for heat dissipation that can release the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the gate sensor 2801, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening. The sensors 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, the second sub-out sensor 3054, and the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055 are connected.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting value. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connector-connected (inter-board connection) with the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is a harness. It may be electrically connected via (electrical wiring). The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (softens) the force accompanying the operation to the setting key switch 1311a to the setting control board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Can be difficult to reach). By this connector connection (board-to-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. It should be noted that the connector connection, which is the inter-board connection, includes a connection using a normal connector not equipped with a floating mechanism and a connection using a special connector equipped with a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the plug into the socket and pushing it in.When the socket is fitted to the plug, The structure is such that there is no amount of movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed (for example, the vertical direction). On the other hand, a special connector equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket into the plug and pushing it. When mating, it is possible to absorb the error (fitting axis deviation) that occurs when the socket is pushed by moving it within a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to the direction of inserting and pushing the socket (for example, the vertical direction). It has a structure. In the present embodiment, a normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism is adopted as the connector connection that is a connection between boards, but a special connector that has a floating mechanism may be adopted.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side thereof being about one fifth of the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side thereof is the main control board 1310. Is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side, and the lower side is arranged above the center line passing through the respective midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected to the main control board 1310. Of the setting change board 1311 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and pivotally operated is arranged at a center point where the center lines of the square-shaped setting change board 1311 intersect in the vertical and horizontal directions. The main control board 1310 is provided with a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light of a single color (for example, red) above the center line of the setting change board 1311 in the left-right direction and near the connector MSCN. Above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged, and the center line of the main control board 1310 is arranged. A special monitor 1310h is arranged below the center and extends from the center toward the right side with six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a line.

The setting display 1310g can display the set value of the pachinko machine 1, while the special monitor 1310h can display the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls. However, only the special monitor 1310h is provided, and the function of displaying the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and the function of displaying the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered may be combined. Good. In such a case, the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the special monitor 1310h in a state in which the setting of the set value can be changed (change permitted state) or a state in which the set value is confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). On the other hand, the calculated value of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is displayed in a state excluding the change permission state and the confirmation display state. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape extends in the vertical direction). (Position), the setting key switch 1311a is in an OFF state as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key made of metal can be inserted into the insertion port and the setting key made of metal can be removed from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted in the insertion opening, and the outer frame 2 is attached to the outer frame 2. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the members of another pachinko machine (or the members of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting keys that are lined up in the opposite direction to the island facility of the game hall do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so as not to damage it.

When the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turned on, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and the signal of this setting key ON is transmitted to the setting change board 1311. Is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Procedure for changing the setting of the setting value, and confirming the setting value]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310, and the setting display 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, a brief description will be given of a case where the setting value is changed, and a brief description will be given of a case where the present setting value is confirmed and displayed. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to check the current setting values that have been set in addition to changing the setting values, so that only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that causes a momentary power failure), power is restored to the outer frame 2 with respect to the main frame. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the "predetermined set value change permission condition" that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated must be satisfied. That is, the person who actually changes the setting of the set value confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then the outer frame 2 Perform the work of opening the main body frame 4, and then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and then the power switch 630a is operated to operate the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

The person who changes the setting of the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then the main frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. Perform the opening work, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to turn it ON. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to operate the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value (setting value 1 to setting value 6 among the setting values at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. (Displayed value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the extinguished state to the lit state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. To be done. Every time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 from the current set value based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch. When the set value 6 which is the maximum value is reached, it returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, increases by 1 again, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When deciding the setting value, the person who changes the setting of the setting value is the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). Turn it OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns to the setting key cylinder turning position (which turns OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM included in the main control MPU 1310a and hides the set value from the state in which the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. The state is switched to the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned on, and then turned off.

The person who changes the setting of the set value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and sets the set value. Complete the work of changing the settings of.

When confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, the outer frame 2 is displayed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure where an instantaneous power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on. Therefore, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is not operated. In other words, the person who actually performs the confirmation display of the set value currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then The main body frame 4 is opened to the frame 2, and then a metal setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311ab is rotated by 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the setting key switch 1311a, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

The person who performs the confirmation display of the set value that is currently set first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then the outer frame 2 Work to open the main body frame 4, then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees. By turning on the setting key, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value (setting value 1 to setting value 6 among the setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The displayed value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, even if the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set value is pressed by the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch, the pressing of the setting change permission lamp 1310z is maintained, and the pressing operation is handled. Then, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON is set. It is turned off by rotating counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g to a state in which the setting value is not displayed.

A person who confirms and displays the currently set set value is a work of removing the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. To complete the work of confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set.

In addition, as described above, the preset setting change permission condition is an outer frame at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power restoration at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). 2, the body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on. By doing so, it is necessary that the setting key is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is operated, whereas the preset set value display permission condition is, as described above, the pachinko machine. When the power of the machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs), the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key is inserted into the insertion opening 1311aba of the cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on, whereby the setting key is turned on and the RAM clear switch is pressed. It is necessary that the section is not operated. In this way, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are used when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, so that the setting key cylinder 1311ab moves clockwise. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on by being turned 60 degrees and turned on, and the preset setting change permission condition is “when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when a power failure ( "The pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch must be operated at the time of power restoration at the time of power recovery after a momentary blackout (a momentary power failure occurs). The condition requires "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a momentary power failure occurs), the RAM clear switch is not pressed." The difference is that

Here, the setting value will be briefly described. In addition to the probability for determining whether or not a big hit is a lottery or the probability for determining whether or not a small hit is a lottery, the "setting value" is usually a probability change time. It is possible to change the probability for lottery determination when moving to time, the distribution ratio to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., and it is advantageous for the player (that is, what the player acquires The probability (the degree of advantage) of increasing the number of game balls that can be played is set in advance. In this embodiment, as the set values, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance. The probability (degree of advantage) of being advantageous to the player is preset. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the proportion of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern). Big hit symbol determination table that stipulates the determination value ratio of the determination, small hit determination table that stipulates the percentage of the small hit determination value that indicates that you have won the small hit, stipulates the determination value ratio of the small hit symbol determination The small hit symbol determination table, the normal time transition determination table in which the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability change time to the normal time is specified) is selected, and is used in various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which a distribution time is defined, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like) are selected. In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values, the various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. It should be noted that various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used in various distribution rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned set values, the six set values (integers) in the range from the set value 1 to the set value 6 are set, but the set values may be set in a smaller range or set in a larger range. It may be one. For example, there may be four set values (integers) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the content of the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a when the power is restored to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the power-off process on the main control side has not ended normally when the power is shut off, there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM built in itself (or you trust it). It cannot be done) and displays an error message to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[Regarding the initial operation of the movable body when the power is turned on]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, Each control is shared. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310. Specifically, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM (stores commands as various commands at a predetermined timing, information relating to control of game effects and information relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1). (Private area, command buffer), and by sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 side also receives information regarding control of game production and information regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1. You can figure it out.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, various movable bodies are provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. Among these, as the movable body (main control board side movable body) whose operation itself is directly connected to the profit giving to the player, for example, the second starting opening door 2414 (starting opening solenoid 2415) for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004. , A first big winning opening door 2417 (first attacker solenoid 2418) for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005, a second big winning opening door 2611 (second attacker solenoid) for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2006. 261) is operated by the drive signal output from the main control board 1310. On the other hand, the movement itself is not directly connected to the profit for the player, but as the movable body (peripheral control board side movable body) that operates during various effects during the game, for example, the effect operation unit 301, the back-up rear rotation decoration The decorations such as the body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration 3451 are assumed to operate according to the drive signal output from the peripheral control board 1510. Regarding such a movable body, a movable body operated by the main control board 1310 (main control board side movable body) and a movable body operated by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control board side movable body) are respectively provided. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is possible to perform an initial operation for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 operates normally.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this example, the initial operation of the movable body (main control board side movable body) operated by the main control board 1310 is performed only when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 265, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t1, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process. Then, in the period from the timing t1 to the timing t3, the processes of steps S10 to S22 of the main control side power-on process described above are executed. In the wait time waiting process of step S24, a waiting time (boot timer) is provided for waiting until the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted).

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by operating the ON key, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU sets the timing t3. In step S37, the setting change process is performed, and the state is changed to a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permitted state). In such a change-permitted state, it is possible to change the set value (set values 1 to 6) each time the RAM clear switch that operates as the function of the setting switch button is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. By turning OFF, the state is changed to a state in which the setting value cannot be changed (unchangeable state). Then, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs step S38, and excludes specific areas (the above-mentioned set value exclusive area and the out-ball counting exclusive area) of the entire area of the main control internal RAM. Then, steps S40 to S52 are performed, and various initial settings are performed (timing t4 is the completion time point of various initial settings).

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t1, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the RAM clear switch without turning on the setting key switch 1311a. In this case, the setting change process of step S37 is not performed at the timing t3, and there is no transition to a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permitted state). However, since the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU performs step S38 during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the main control internal RAM has a specific area out of all areas. The area is cleared except for the area for exclusive use of the set value and the exclusive area for out-ball counting described above, and then steps S40 to S52 are carried out to perform various initial settings.

After completion of various initial settings at timing t4, of movable bodies mounted on the game board 5, a movable body (main control board side movable body) that operates by a drive signal output from the main control board 1310. Start the initial operation. Specifically, as the movable body on the main control board side, a second starting opening door 2414 (starting opening solenoid 2415) for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, and a first large opening for opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005. The initial operation of the winning opening door 2417 (first attacker solenoid 2418) and the second winning opening door 2611 (second attacker solenoid 261) for opening and closing the second winning opening 2006 is started. Each of these main control board side movable bodies is a member that can be opened and closed. In the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, the second starting opening door 2414, the first big winning opening door 2417, the second Each special winning opening door 2611 performs a special operation different from the operation that appears in the normal game progression process. Such an operation ends when the timing t5 arrives. (Timing t5 is the time when the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed).

When the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, the main control MPU transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, after completing the initial operation of the main control board side movable body at timing t5, the state shifts to a state in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed (variable state). That is, at the timing t6 after completing the initial operation of the main control board side movable body at the timing t5, when entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol is started, The variation pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the period from the timing t3 to t4, it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state). Regardless of whether or not it is performed, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is performed. As a result, in the inspection at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the movable body on the main control board operates, so that the movable body on the main control board operates normally. Whether or not to do so can be visually confirmed, and inspection at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated.

During the period from timing t4 to t5, as the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, a special operation different from the operation that appears in the normal game progression process is performed, and specifically, the second starting door The initial operation of 2414, the first big winning opening door 2417, and the second big winning opening door 2611 are performed in this order (details of each initial operation will be described later). As described above, in the initial operation of the movable bodies on the main control board side, by sequentially operating the movable bodies, it is easy to confirm whether or not the movable bodies operate normally, and it is difficult to overlook a defect, so that the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to improve the accuracy of the inspection at the time of manufacturing. If it is important to shorten the inspection time at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, the initial operations of the main control board side movable bodies may be operated in parallel at the same time. In such a case, the inspection of the initial operation of the main control board side movable body can be completed early, and the game can be started early (variable display of special symbols can be performed. Can be set to a different state (variable state). Further, when the respective initial operations of the main control board side movable bodies are operated in parallel at the same time, the main control board side movable bodies are moved within a specific area of the game area 5a (for example, the center accessory 2500). It is preferable to collectively arrange them in the right side region). As a result, even if the initial operations of the movable bodies on the main control board side are operated in parallel at the same time, it is easy to confirm whether or not they operate normally, and it is difficult to overlook the problem. The accuracy of the inspection at the time of manufacturing the machine 1 can be improved.

Here, a specific mode of the initial operation of the main control substrate side movable body performed in the period from timing t4 to timing t5 will be described. During the period from the timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the second starting opening door 2414, the initial operation of the first special winning opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second large winning opening door 2611 are performed by individual driving sources. Each of the initial operations is an opening/closing operation for performing a short opening of 1 second or less and a long opening of 3 seconds or more. That is, the initial operation of the second starting opening door 2414, the initial operation of the first special winning opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second special winning opening door 2611 each first open for 0.5 seconds, and then, A combination operation for the initial operation is set in which after closing for 1 second, opening for 3 seconds is performed. Such a combination operation for initial operation (operation for opening for 3 seconds after opening for 0.5 seconds) is an operation that does not appear when the main control board side movable body operates in the course of the game. Yes, by this, it is possible to clarify that it is not an operation due to returning to the game (time-saving game or big hit game) before the power interruption, and it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition at the time of inspection work. In addition, for individual operations of short opening and long opening, check whether normal operation can be performed by making it possible to appear even when the main control board side movable body operates during game progress This is preferable because the accuracy of can be improved.

Further, regarding the initial operation of the second starting opening door 2414, the initial operation of the first special winning opening door 2417, and the initial operation of the second special winning opening door 2611, it is possible to detect whether or not each initial operation is normally performed. You can In each initial operation, an operation for returning from the operating position to the initial position is performed after operating from the initial position (closed state) to the operating position (open position). If an initial position detection sensor is provided in each of the winning opening door 2417 and the second big winning opening door 2621, and the occurrence of an abnormality in which the movable body does not return to the initial position is detected, the subsequent operation of the movable body. Alternatively, the game may be maintained without being played. This can prevent the outflow of defective products and the loss of holes.

In addition, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is performed, but the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning. Even if the game ball B enters the ball entrance such as the mouth 2006, it is treated as an invalid ball, and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at the timing t5, the game ball B enters such a ball entrance. The game ball B entered is treated as an effective one. Specifically, in the period of timings t4 to t5, "detection corresponding to each of the ball entrances such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006" "A mode in which the power supply to the detection sensor is cut off so that the detection itself by the sensor is not performed", or "a mode in which the detection signal is detected but the detection signal from the detection sensor is not input to the main control board 1310" , “The detection sensor performs detection, and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal, no detection signal or command is issued to another board such as the payout control board 633. A mode of not outputting" and the like. After the initial operation of the movable body on the main control board side is completed at timing t5, “the detection sensor detects, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the payout is performed based on the detection signal. It is a mode in which a detection signal and a command can be output to another board such as the control board 633."

In addition to the above, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the gaming ball B is prevented from being dispensed from the dispensing device 580, and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, the gaming ball is delivered from the dispensing device 580. B is able to pay out. Further, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the variable display of the special symbol is made impossible (variable state), and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, the special symbol is displayed. The display is changed to a state in which variable display is possible (variable state). Thereby, during the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, even if the game ball B is illegally entered when the entrance is opened, the variation display of the special symbol is not displayed, and the payout device 580 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being paid out and to obtain an illegal profit.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the special monitor 1310h monitors the number of entered balls and the number of paid-out balls, calculates the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls, and displays the calculation result. Regarding such a special monitor 1310h, during the period from timing t4 to t5, when the game ball B enters the entrance, regardless of whether or not detection by the detection sensor corresponding to each is performed, The number and the number of payouts are not added, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h is controlled so as not to be reflected. After the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, when the game ball B enters the ball entrance, detection is performed by the detection sensor corresponding to each, and the number of balls entered and the payout are made. It is controlled so that it is added to the number and reflected on the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. As a result, in the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, even if the game ball B is illegally entered when the entrance is opened, it is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h, The reliability of information can be increased. It should be noted that, for several seconds after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the control is performed so that all the 7-segments and the like for displaying information on the special monitor 1310h are turned on. Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is possible to confirm whether the special monitor 1310 normally operates for display.

Further, during the period from timing t4 to t5, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not launched from the ball launching device 540, and after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, When the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540. As a result, at the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, the ball entrance is opened, but since the game ball B is not fired in the first place, the game ball B is fired when the ball entrance is opened. It is possible to prevent illegal profit from being obtained.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. During the period from timing t4 to t5, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective, and is continued even after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5. There is. Thereby, in the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, an illegal magnetism is generated when the game ball B is illegally entered when the entrance is opened by using a magnet or applying vibration. Unauthorized vibration can be detected, and fraudulent activity can be prevented.

Next, control on the peripheral control board 1510 side will be described. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t1, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control unit power-on process. Then, during the period from the timing t1 to the timing t3, the processing of steps S1000 and S1002 of the peripheral controller power-on processing described above is executed. In the initial setting process of step S1000, a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and various control information (peripheral data) are transferred. Processing and the like are performed (timing t2 is the time when the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed).

The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) completes the initial setting process of step S1000 before the timing t3 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, and the timing t2 is reached. After that, various commands can be received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). However, the completion of the initialization process in step S1000 is before the timing t3 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, but it is the time when the main control MPU completes various initializations. It may be before the timing t4.

After the initial setting is completed at timing t2, the standby screen 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5. On the standby screen 1, for example, by displaying a message "restoring", it is informed that the game cannot be started. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, the effect display device 1600 displays the standby screen 2 based on the power-on command. On the standby screen 2, for example, by displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol "123", it is informed that it is in the state of waiting for the start of the symbol variation. After that, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at the timing t6, the effect display device 1600 starts the variation display (variation effect) of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern command.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is operated by the drive signal output from the peripheral control board 1510. The initial operation of the body (peripheral control board side movable body) has started. Specifically, as the peripheral control board side movable body, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5 and the like. The initial operation of the movable body has started. Each of these peripheral control board-side movable bodies is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operating position. In the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body, each movable body is moved to the initial position (withdrawal). From the (position) to the operation position (appearing position), it is confirmed whether or not the operation is normally performed, and accurate positioning is performed so that the movable body waits at the initial position. Then, after the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed, it is possible to perform an effect using the movable body. For example, when the variation pattern in which the effect using the movable body is set during the variation of the symbol is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the predetermined variation during the symbol variation. At this timing, the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operating position. However, if the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is not completed at the timing of operating the movable body based on the variation pattern command, the initial operation is prioritized and the movable body is controlled not to operate. ing.

At the time point when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5, among the peripheral control board-side movable bodies that are not in the initial position, first, after returning the movable body to the initial position, The initial operation is started.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5 after completing the initialization at timing t2, but at timing t5 after completing the initialization at timing t2. If the peripheral control board 1510 has not received the power-on command for a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 2 minutes), the predetermined time has elapsed even though the power-on command has not been received. At that time, the display of the standby screen 1 on the effect display device 1600 is changed to the display of the standby screen 2. Further, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started. This is because when the power supply on the peripheral control board 1510 side of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is not supplied and then the power supply on the peripheral control board 1510 side is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is Even if the power-on command is not received and the peripheral control board 1510 side power is restored even in such a case, the variation effect based on the variation pattern command can be started. This is because.

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the power switch 630a is operated while the RAM clear switch is being operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1, the set value is set in the period from timing t3 to t4. However, at the start of the change permission state, the main control board 1310 issues a setting change start command notifying that it is the start of the change permission state. It is transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change start command, the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, a message “setting is being changed” to notify that the change is permitted. It will be possible. However, the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body is started not when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change start command, but after that when the power control command is received at timing t5. There is.

As described above, among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, the main control board-side movable body performs the initial operation in the period from timing t4 to t5, while the peripheral control board. Regarding the side movable body, the initial operation is performed after the timing t5. That is, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started after the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed. In this way, by sequentially performing the initial operation on the main control board side movable body and the peripheral control board side movable body, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the operation is normal, and the inspection at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Can be facilitated.

In the above, when the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is completed at timing t5, the main control MPU sends a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510. A power-on command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the initial setting on the 1310 side is completed. In such a case, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t4, the peripheral control board-side movable body starts the initial operation. That is, the initial operation is started at the same time for the main control board side movable body and the peripheral control board side movable body. Thus, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body can be completed at an early timing, and the movable body can be quickly moved to a state in which the movable body can be operated based on the variation pattern command.

Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Here, only the part different from the case where the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 266, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t1, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on process. Then, in the period from the timing t1 to the timing t3, the processes of steps S10 to S22 of the main control side power-on process described above are executed. In the wait time waiting process of step S24, a waiting time (boot timer) is provided for waiting until the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted).

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by operating the ON switch and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU is At steps t3, steps S29 to S36 are performed, the main control built-in RAM is checked, and thereafter, the set value confirmation display process of step S28 is performed, and the state (confirmation display state) is displayed in which the set value confirmation display is being performed. .. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. When is turned off, the state is shifted to a state (confirmation impossible state) in which confirmation display of the set value is not performed. Then, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs steps S40 to S52 to perform various types of initialization (the completion point of various types of initialization is timing t5).

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t1, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on and the power switch 630a is operated without operating the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is not performed at the timing t3, and the state (confirmation display state) in which the confirmation display of the setting value is being performed does not occur. During the period from timing t3 to t5, the main control MPU performs steps S29 to S36 to check the main control built-in RAM, and then performs steps S40 to S52 to perform various initial settings.

When the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t1, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is not performed after completion of various initial settings at the timing t5. Upon completion of various initial settings at timing t5, the main control MPU transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, after completion of various initial settings at the timing t5, a transition is made to a state (variable state) in which variable display of special symbols can be performed. In other words, at timing t6 after completing various initial settings at timing t5, when entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol is started and the peripheral control board 1510 is displayed. To send a variation pattern command.

As described above, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the period from the timing t3 to t4, it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state). Regardless of whether or not it is performed, during the period from timing t4 to t5, the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the timings t4 to t5 are irrespective of whether or not the setting value confirmation display is being performed (confirmation display state). Is not provided, and the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is not performed. That is, whether or not the initial operation of the main control board side movable body is performed can be different depending on whether or not the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. With this, for example, in the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 installed on the game island, if it is desired to confirm whether or not the main control board side movable body operates normally, the RAM clear switch is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. The operator can select whether or not to perform the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, and the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated.

Regarding the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5 regardless of whether the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is supposed to start at the time.

Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the RAM clear switch, the setting is performed during the period from timing t3 to t5. The state shifts to a state in which the confirmation display of the value can be performed (confirmation display state), but at the start of the confirmation display state, the main control board 1310 sends a confirmation display start command notifying that it is the start of the confirmation display state. From the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the confirmation display start time command, the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, a message “setting value confirmation display is in progress” to notify that the display is in the confirmation display state. It becomes possible. However, the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body is started not when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the confirmation display start command, but after the power-on command is received at timing t5. There is.

In the above description, the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body is assumed to start when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t5, but the timing before the power-on command is received. That is, it may be started at the time when the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed at the timing t2. Such a modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 and 268. 267 is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and FIG. 268 is a RAM clear switch when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. 9 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when is not operated. Here, only the parts different from FIGS. 265 and 266 will be described below.

As shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, in this modification, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is started at the time when the initialization of the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed at the timing t2. That is, the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body is started early without waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to receive the power-on command at timing t5. Thus, the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body can be completed at an early timing, and the movable body can be quickly moved to a state in which the movable body can be operated based on the variation pattern command.

[Regarding the specific operation of the movable body in the pattern change for the predetermined number of times after the setting change]
In the present embodiment, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a variation display of the symbol for a predetermined number of times after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (in this embodiment, the first At the start of (variable display of symbols and variable display of symbols for the 100th time), a suggestion effect is suggested which suggests that the setting value has been changed. In this suggestive effect, a specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. If the setting value is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestive effect should be executed at the start of the variable display of the symbol for the predetermined number of times after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Therefore, the specific operation is not performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5.

First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 269, in which, after the setting of the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the movable body specifying operation is performed in the first variable display of symbols. FIG. 269 is a time chart showing the operation timing of the specific operation of the movable body in the first variable display of the symbols after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In the following, first, a case will be described in which the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body has already been completed at the time of starting the first variable display of symbols.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the RAM clear switch by turning on the setting key switch 1311a by operating the setting key switch 1311a by operating the RAM clear switch. Performs the setting change process in step S37 at timing t3, and shifts to a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permitted state). In such a change-permitted state, it is possible to change the set value (set values 1 to 6) each time the RAM clear switch that operates as the function of the setting switch button is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. By turning OFF, the state is changed to a state in which the setting value cannot be changed (unchangeable state). Then, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs various initial settings on the main control board 1310 side and the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, and supplies power to the peripheral control board 1510. Send a command at turn-on.

As shown in FIG. 269(A), when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the state of the set value is changed to a state in which the set value can be changed (change permitted state), and the set value is changed. In this case, when the power-on command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the setting change completion command indicating that the setting value has been changed is also transmitted. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 side to recognize that the setting value has been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

After transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the main control MPU shifts to a state in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed (variable state). That is, at timing t6 after transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, when entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol is started. At the same time, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at timing t6, the peripheral control MPU starts the first variation display (variation production) of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 based on the variation pattern command. ing.

After the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the start of the variable display of the decorative design for the first time at the timing t6, it is specified with respect to the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. I am trying to do it. Specifically, as the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4, a specific operation is performed with respect to the effect operation unit 301, and in addition, as the movable body mounted on the game board 5, the rear back decorative body 3451. The specific operation is performed for the. The effect operation unit 301 is a member that allows the button to move between an initial position (retracted position) and an operation position (projection position), and in a specific operation for the effect operation unit 301, the button moves to the operation position. After that, the operation of returning to the initial position is performed. The back-up rear decorative body 3451 is a member that allows the back-up rear decorative body 3451 to move between an initial position (retracted position) and an operation position (appearing position). In the specific operation for 3451, the back-up rear decorative body 3451 moves to the operating position and then returns to the initial position.

On the other hand, when the setting value is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, that is, when the set value confirmation display is displayed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When only the RAM with built-in control is being cleared, or when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (change of setting of setting value, confirmation display of setting value, and clearing of RAM with main control are all performed. If not), the specific operation is not performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the time of starting the subsequent variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the subsequent variable display of decorative symbols. A specific operation is performed on the moving body. The setting change of the set value is performed, for example, by the hall manager before the opening of the hall, so after the opening of the hall, the player knows whether the setting change of the set value has been performed before the game. I can't. However, by starting the game and starting the variable display of the decorative design for the first time, whether or not the specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, that is, the setting of the set value The player can see if the change has been made. As a result, when the hall is opened, the game can be actively started in order to know whether or not the setting value has been changed.

Also, regarding the specific operation for the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the first variation display of the decorative pattern is displayed. Including the start time, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started a predetermined number of times. For example, in addition to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for the first time, it is performed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for the specified number of times every 100 times. As a result, even if the game is not immediately after the opening of the hall, it is possible to know whether or not the setting value has been changed, and the game can be actively started.

Here, in the variation pattern, the variation time of the special symbol (decorative symbol) and the effect contents executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side during the variation period are set. For example, when a variation pattern in which an effect using a movable body is set during variation display of a decorative pattern is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation effect As a part of the above, the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operation position at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative pattern. However, for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, all the variation patterns are set so that the movable body is not operated. That is, for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the operation of the movable body based on the variation pattern is restricted. Then, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for the predetermined number of times, the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is moved. The specific action for the body is not based on the variation pattern, but is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern. As a result, when a specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, does it suggest that the setting value has been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on? It is possible to recognize whether or not the degree of expectation is suggested as a part of the change effect based on the change pattern.

Further, when performing a specific operation on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, the operating time of the specific operation is shorter than the operating time of the movable body based on the variation pattern. Is set to be Thereby, for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the movable body is restricted from operating based on the variable pattern, but the variable display of the decorative pattern at the predetermined number of times is limited. By shortening the operation time of the specific operation at the start of, the limited time can be shortened.

In this example, after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for the predetermined number of times. Although the specific operation is uniformly performed on the movable body, as a modified example, one of the specific operation A indicating the setting value and the specific operation B not indicating the setting value is executed. You may Specifically, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random number value X and a random number value Y at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for the predetermined number of times, and determines whether to execute the specific operation A (execution lottery). Is performed based on the acquired random value X, and the specific operation A or the specific operation B is executed based on the result of the execution determination. When determining the specific action A, one of the specific action A1 suggesting a low set value, the specific action A2 suggesting a high set value, and the specific action A3 suggesting a set value 6 is currently set. It is determined according to the set value and the random value Y. Here, when the currently set set values are set values 1 to 3, the probability that the specific action A1 suggesting a low set value is higher than the specific action A2 (specific action A1: specific action A2=7: The effect is determined according to the value of the random number value Y by referring to the low setting effect distribution table determined by the ratio (3). Further, in the case of the set values 4 to 5, the high setting for determining the specific action A2 suggesting the high set value with a higher probability than the specific action A1 (specific action A1: specific action A2=3:7) The production determination according to the value of the random number value Y is performed by referring to the production distribution table 1 for production. When the set value is 6, the specific actions A1 to A3 including the specific action A3 suggesting the set value 6 which is not determined when the set values are 1 to 5 have a predetermined probability (specific action A1. : Specific action A2: Specific action A3=1:5:4 ratio), and the production determination according to the value of the random number value Y is performed with reference to the high setting production distribution table 2. That is, since the specific operations A1 and A2 may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting is not determined by one execution. When A3 is output, it is determined that the currently set value is set value 6. In this way, when the specific operation A is executed, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the specific operation A.

Further, in this example, when the setting value is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main frame 4 and the game board 5 are displayed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for the predetermined number of times thereafter. Although it does not operate with respect to the mounted movable body, any non-specific operation other than the specific operation may be performed as long as it does not perform the specific operation. As the non-specific operation with respect to the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, for example, the effect operation unit 301 slightly moves from the initial position (moves to the extent that it does not move to the operation position), The decorative body 3451 may be slightly moved from the initial position (moved to the extent that it does not move to the operating position). Thus, even if the setting value is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, even if a non-specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. The difference from the specific operation is clear, and it can be clearly understood that the setting value has not been changed.

In addition, in this example, as a suggestive effect that suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 has been changed when the power was turned on, the main body frame 4 and the game board are started at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for the predetermined number of times. Although the specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted in No. 5, the suggestive effect may be performed by displaying a specific image using the effect display device 1600, or by the speaker. It may be performed by outputting sound.

Regarding the above description of FIG. 269(A), after the setting change of the set value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board side is already present at the time point when the first variable display of symbols is started at timing t6. Since the initial operation of the movable body is completed, the specific operation can be performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the first variable display of the symbols. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269(B), after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control board side movable at the time point when the first variation display of the symbol is started at timing t6. If the initial operation of the body is not completed, the specific operation cannot be performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 at the start of the variable display of the symbols for the first time. In such a case, at the start of variable display of symbols, which is started after the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body is completed, with respect to the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. I am trying to perform a specific action. For example, at the timing of starting the variable display of the first symbol at timing t6, although the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body has not been completed, at the time of starting the second variable display of the symbol, the peripheral control board side When the initial operation of the movable body is completed, at the start of the second variable display of the symbols, a specific operation is performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. ing. As a result, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, the specific operation can be reliably performed, and the information obtained from the specific operation can be prevented from being overlooked. it can.

Further, regarding the above description of FIG. 269(A), when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t5 after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, The case where the peripheral control board-side movable body is performing the initial operation but the peripheral control board-side movable body is normally completed in the initial operation will be described. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269(C), in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, when an abnormality such as the peripheral control board side movable body does not return to the initial position occurs, the fluctuation of the first symbol At the start of the variable display of the symbol for the predetermined number of times including the start of the display, the specific operation is not performed on the movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5. However, in this example, as movable bodies that perform a specific operation, there are a production operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and a back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, and an abnormality occurs. If any one of the movable bodies has been moved, the specific operation is not performed on the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred, whereas the specific operation is performed on the movable body that has completed the initial operation normally. I have to. As a result, if the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the specific operation can be performed except for the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred, and the information obtained from the specific operation can be displayed. It is possible to prevent it from being overlooked.

In addition, in the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, if an abnormality such as the peripheral control board side movable body does not return to the initial position occurs, after the abnormality occurs, the movable body is used during the pattern change. Even if the variation pattern in which the effect is set is transmitted, the movable body is not moved from the initial position to the operation position at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation. However, the operation based on the variation pattern is not performed on the movable body in which the abnormality occurs in the initial operation, and the operation based on the variation pattern can be performed on the movable body that normally completes the initial operation. ..

[About the standby position of the movable body after changing the settings]
In this embodiment, when the setting value is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board-side movable body waits for a normal standby at the completion of the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the setting value is changed, the peripheral control board-side movable body is not moved at the completion of the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body. The position is changed from the normal standby position. That is, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting value is changed depending on the standby position of the peripheral control board-side movable body when the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body is completed. A suggestive effect is suggested to indicate that the setting has been changed.

First, referring to FIG. Will be described. FIG. 294 is a time chart showing the standby position of the peripheral control board-side movable body at the completion of the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. .. In the following, first, a case will be described in which the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body has already been completed at the time of starting the first variable display of symbols.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the RAM clear switch by turning on the setting key switch 1311a by operating the setting key switch 1311a by operating the RAM clear switch. Performs the setting change process in step S37 at timing t3, and shifts to a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permitted state). In such a change-permitted state, it is possible to change the set value (set values 1 to 6) each time the RAM clear switch that operates as the function of the setting switch button is pressed. After that, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. By turning OFF, the state is changed to a state in which the setting value cannot be changed (unchangeable state). Then, after turning off the setting key switch 1311a, the main control MPU performs various initial settings on the main control board 1310 side and the initial operation of the main control board side movable body, and supplies power to the peripheral control board 1510. Send a command at turn-on.

As shown in FIG. 294(A), when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the state of the set value can be changed (change permitted state), and the set value is changed. In this case, when the power-on command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the setting change completion command indicating that the setting value has been changed is also transmitted. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 side to recognize that the setting value has been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at the timing t5, a movable body which is operated by the drive signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 among the movable bodies mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 ( The initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body) has started. Specifically, as the peripheral control board side movable body, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5 and the like. The initial operation of the movable body has started. Each of these peripheral control board-side movable bodies is a member that can operate between an initial position and an operating position. In the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body, each movable body is moved to the initial position (withdrawal). From the (position) to the operation position (appearing position), it is confirmed whether or not the operation is normally performed, and accurate positioning is performed so that the movable body waits at the initial position.

Then, at the end of the initial operation of the peripheral control board side movable body, each movable body is returned to the initial position, and then the movable body is made to wait at the initial position. However, a specific movable body of the peripheral control board side movable bodies, here, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 mounted on the game board 5, and the rear rear rear. As for the decorative body 3451, a specific movement is possible depending on whether the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the setting value is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The standby position of a specific movable body at the end of the initial movement of the body is different. Specifically, when the setting value is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, the standby position A which is the initial position of the specific movable body. While the pachinko machine 1 operates so as to be positioned in the (normal standby position), if the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is specified at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body. The movable body is operated so as to be positioned at any of standby positions B to D different from the initial position.

As described above, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the standby position A which is the initial position of the specific movable body at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body. It is located at any one of standby positions B to D different from the (normal standby position), and then a specific movable body stands by at the standby position. The setting change of the set value is performed by the hall manager before the opening of the hall, so normally, after the opening of the hall, the player determines whether the setting change of the set value is performed. I can't know. However, before the start of the game after the opening of the hall, whether the specific movable body mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 stands by at any of the standby positions B to D different from the normal standby position. By checking whether or not the setting value has been changed, the player can know. As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting value has been changed after the opening of the hall, the game can be actively started.

In this example, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the standby position of the specific movable body at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body is set to the initial position of the specific movable body. Although the standby position A (normal standby position) is different from the standby position A, the standby position of a specific movable body is further changed according to the currently set value (setting value after change). .. That is, the currently set setting value (changed setting value) is suggested by the standby position of the specific movable body. Specifically, when standby positions B to D are prepared as standby positions different from the normal standby position of the specific movable body, and the currently set values are set values 1, 3, and 5. , It is possible to determine the standby position B indicating that the set value is an odd number. Further, when the set values currently set are the set values 2, 4, and 6, it is possible to determine the standby position C, which indicates that the set values are even numbers. Further, when the set values currently set are the set values 5 and 6, it is possible to determine the standby position D, which indicates that the set value is a high set value. When the currently set setting value is the setting value 5, the ratio of the standby position B to the standby position D is higher than that of the standby position D (waiting position B: A peripheral control MPU refers to a random number value (at the time of determining the standby position (at the start of the initial operation of a specific movable body)) by referring to the effect allocation table for the setting value 5 determined by the standby position D=7:3. A decision is made according to the value of the acquired random number value). Similarly, when the currently set value is the set value 6, the standby position C is higher than the standby position D with respect to which of the standby position C and the standby position D is to be determined. : Peripheral control MPU at the time of determining the standby position (at the time of determining the standby position (at the start of the initial operation of the specific movable body)) by referring to the effect distribution table for the setting value 6 determined by the standby position D=7:3 The determination is made according to the value of the random number value obtained in. From this, the standby position B and the standby position C do not determine whether the current setting value is the low setting or the high setting, but the standby position D is determined to be the high setting. As a result, when a specific movable body is waiting at the standby position D, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the high set value that can be grasped from the standby position D.

Note that among the specific movable bodies, the standby positions B to D of the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 are in the order of the standby position B, the standby position C, and the standby position D, and the standby position A (normally). It is located so that the amount of movement from the standby position) becomes large. Similarly, with respect to the standby positions B to D of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, the standby position B, the standby position C, and the standby position D are standby in this order. It is positioned so that the movement amount from the position A (normal standby position) becomes large.

In this example, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, the standby positions B to D different from the initial position of the specific movable body. However, when the initial operation of the specific movable body is completed, the specific movable body may be returned to the initial position. In such a case, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, after returning the specific movable body to the initial position, the initial operation of the specific movable body is performed by an operation different from the initial operation of the specific movable body. It is supposed to operate so as to be positioned at any of the standby positions B to D different from the position.

Further, in this example, as the specific movable body, the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4, and the back-up/rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 mounted on the game board 5 are cited. Has been. Among these, since the production operation unit 301 is mounted on the main body frame 4, when it is located at the standby positions B to D different from the initial position, it is directed to the outside such as a customer who is not playing a game. It is possible to make a big appeal that the setting value is being changed. In addition, since the production operation unit 301 is exposed so that it can be contacted from the outside, there is a possibility that the standby position may be unreasonably changed due to mischief, but the hall manager notices it because it is easy to recognize from the outside. It is easy to prevent mischief. On the other hand, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 are mounted on the game board 5 and therefore cannot be contacted from the outside, and the standby position is unjustly changed due to mischief. Never.

In addition, in this example, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is mounted as a specific movable body on the production operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5. Both the back-up rear rotating ornamental body 3440 and the back-up rear ornamental body 3451 are operated so as to be located at any of standby positions B to D different from the initial position of the specific movable body. However, it may be possible to select only one of them and operate so as to be positioned at any of the standby positions B to D. In such a case, for example, it is mounted on the main body frame 4 more than when only the standby positions of the rear upper rear decorative body 3440 and the rear rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5 change. You may make it suggest that it is a high setting value, when only the standby position of the production|operation production part 301 changes. Further, only the standby position of one of the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the back upper rear decorative body 3440 and the rear rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5 is changed. It may be possible to suggest that the high setting value is set when both standby positions are changed, rather than when the standby positions are changed, and the setting value 6 is fixed when both standby positions are changed. May be.

In addition, in the present example, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, the setting value of the setting value is changed by changing the standby position of the specific movable body. Although suggested, the present invention is not limited to a movable body whose standby position can be changed, but is also applicable to a movable body that can rotate and has a different stop mode. Good. Even in such a case, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is suggested that the setting value is changed by changing from the normal stop mode. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 294(A), after transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t5, the main control MPU can perform variable display of special symbols (variable state). ). That is, at timing t6 after transmitting the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t5, when entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol is started. At the same time, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command at timing t6, the peripheral control MPU starts the first variation display (variation production) of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 based on the variation pattern command. ing.

At the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for the first time at the timing t6, the specific movable body positioned at any of the standby positions B to D is operated to return to the initial position (normal standby position). This makes it possible to perform an effect using a specific movable body based on the variation pattern during the first variation display of the decorative pattern. In addition, in the variation pattern, the variation time of the special symbol (decorative symbol) and the effect contents executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side during the variation time are set. For example, when a variation pattern in which an effect using a movable body is set during variation display of a decorative pattern is transmitted as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation effect As a part of the above, the movable body is moved from the initial position to the operation position at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In the above, when the ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 at the timing t6, the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started. Only at the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the sphere, the specific movable body located in any of the standby positions B to D is operating to return to the initial position (normal standby position). On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry into the second starting opening 2004 is started, the specific movable body located in any of the standby positions B to D is set to the initial position (normal standby position). I try not to return. When the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the RAM is initialized (RAM clear) and must be started from the normal game state (low probability non-time saving state). Therefore, the ball is not allowed to enter the second starting port 2004. Therefore, the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry into the second starting opening 2004 should not be performed as the variation display of the special symbol for the first time, and it is illegally entered into the second starting opening 2004. There is a possibility. In such a case, even if the variable display of the special symbol is performed for the first time, the specific movable body does not return to the initial position (normal standby position) but remains in any of the standby positions B to D. Therefore, it is easy for the hall manager to notice, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Regarding the above description of FIG. 294(A), after the setting value of the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control is already performed before starting the first variable display of the symbols at timing t6. Since the initial operation of the board-side movable body has been completed, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, a standby position different from the standby position A (normal standby position) which is the initial position of the specific movable body. It is located in any of B to D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 294(B), after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control board side movable at the time point when the first variation display of the symbol is started at timing t6. When the initial motion of the body is not completed, the specific movable body is not positioned at any of the standby positions B to D at the end of the initial motion of the specific movable body, and the initial position is the standby position. It is located at A (normal standby position). For example, when the specific movable body is located at any of the standby positions B to D at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body after the start of the variable display of the symbols for the first time, the variation effect based on the variation pattern Although it may be misunderstood that it suggests the degree of expectation as a part of the above, since it is located at the standby position A (normal standby position) which is the initial position, such misunderstanding does not occur.

Also, regarding the above description of FIG. 294(A), when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command at timing t5 after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, The case where the peripheral control board-side movable body is performing the initial operation but the peripheral control board-side movable body is normally completed in the initial operation will be described. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 294(C), in the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body, if an abnormality such as the peripheral control board-side movable body does not return to the initial position occurs, At the end of the initial operation, the specific movable body is not located at any of the standby positions B to D. However, in this example, as the specific movable body, there are the effect operation unit 301 mounted on the main body frame 4 and the back rear decorative body 3451 mounted on the game board 5, and the movable body in which the abnormality occurs When the body is either one, the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred is not located in any of the standby positions B to D, whereas the movable body which has completed the initial operation normally is in any of the standby positions B to D. It is located in the crab. As a result, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed when the power is turned on, the specific movable body is located at any of the standby positions B to D except the movable body in which the abnormality has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information obtained from the standby position of the specific movable body from being missed.

In the above, the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body is assumed to start at the timing t5 when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command, but before the power-on command is received. That is, it may be started at the time when the initialization of the peripheral control board 1510 side is completed at the timing t2 (see FIGS. 267 and 268). Even in such a case, at the end of the initial operation of the specific movable body, any one of standby positions B to D different from the standby position A (normal standby position) which is the initial position of the specific movable body. It is supposed to work to be located in. As a result, the initial operation of the peripheral control board-side movable body is completed at an early timing, so that it is possible to quickly shift to a state in which the specific movable body stands by at any of the standby positions B to D.

[Restriction of suggestive performance after occurrence of abnormality]
In the present embodiment, when the setting value setting is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when the number of jackpots after the setting value setting change reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example). In addition, a suggestive effect is suggested that suggests that the setting value has been changed. This suggestive effect is executed by using lamp light emission and voice output from the speaker. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, after the setting change of the set value, before the suggestive effect is executed, if an abnormality is detected, the suggestive effect is not executed at the execution timing of the suggestive effect. Have control. The relationship between such suggestive effect and abnormality detection will be described with reference to FIG. 295. FIG. 295 is a time chart showing the relationship between suggestive effect and abnormality detection.

As shown in FIG. 295, when the setting value is changed at power-on of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t1, after that, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. When the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery that is drawn by is a big hit, it is counted as the number of big hits. Then, at the timing t3, when the number of jackpots after changing the setting of the setting value reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example), a suggestion effect is suggested which indicates that the setting of the setting value has been changed. .. In this suggestive production, not only is it suggested that the setting of the setting value has been changed by executing the production according to the currently set setting value (the changed setting value), but it is not currently set. It also suggests the set value. Further, the suggestive effect is to be executed at the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot of the predetermined number (sixth in this example) after the setting value is changed.

In the suggestive effect, any of the suggestive effects A to C is executed as an effect corresponding to the currently set value (changed set value). Specifically, the execution determination (execution lottery) of which of the suggestive effects A to C is to be executed is performed. In the execution determination, the jackpot game based on the jackpot of a predetermined number of times (sixth in this example). When a peripheral control MPU obtains a predetermined random number value X when it is judged that it is the end time, a suggestive effect A suggesting a low setting value, a suggestive effect B suggesting a high setting value, a suggestion suggesting a setting value 6 One of the effects C is determined according to the currently set value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set setting values are the setting values 1 to 3, the probability that the suggestive effect A suggesting a low set value is higher than the suggestive effect B (instructive effect A: suggestive effect B=7: The effect determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed with reference to the low setting effect distribution table determined by the ratio (3). In addition, when the setting value is 4 to 5, the high setting that determines the suggestive effect B suggesting the high set value with a higher probability than the suggestive effect A (the ratio of suggestive effect A: suggestive effect B=3:7) The production determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed with reference to the production distribution table 1. Further, when the set value is 6, the suggestive effects A to C including the suggestive effect C suggesting the set value 6 which is not determined when the set values are 1 to 5 have a predetermined probability (the suggestive effect A. The production determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed with reference to the high setting production distribution table 2 determined by: suggestive production B: suggestive production C=1:5:4. That is, since the suggestive effects A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting is not fixed, but when the suggestive effect C is executed. , It is confirmed that the currently set setting value is the setting value 6. In this way, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to have expectations according to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the suggestive effect.

As the suggestive effect A that suggests a low set value, effect data in which a speaker outputs a sound “Bee” and a lamp mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 emits blue light is used. As the suggestion effect B that suggests the high set value, effect data in which a voice "beebee" is output from the speaker and a lamp mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 emits red light is used. As the suggestion effect C suggesting the set value 6, the speaker outputs the sound "Beebee" and the lamps mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 emit light in rainbow color. Is used. In this way, it is possible to grasp what kind of set value the suggestion is by making the voice output or the lamp light emission mode different for each suggestion of the set value.

On the other hand, when the setting value is not changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, that is, when the set value confirmation display is displayed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When only the RAM with built-in control is being cleared, or when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (change of setting of setting value, confirmation display of setting value, and clearing of RAM with main control are all performed. (If not), even if the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, which is subsequently drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, becomes a big hit, It is not counted as the number of big hits. In other words, even if the number of big hits after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example), the suggestion effect is not executed, and the set value currently set is also suggested. Absent.

Further, in this example, after the setting value is changed, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 becomes a big hit. When it hits, it is counted as the number of big hits, but when it becomes a small hit, it is not counted as the number of big hits. Here, when the setting value is changed, the big hit probability is changed, but the small hit probability is not changed. Therefore, the suggestion performance execution condition should include only the big hits involved in the setting change of the setting value as the number of times, and the small hits not involved in the setting change of the setting value should be counted as the number of times. Without doing so, it is not included in the execution condition of the suggested production.

The pachinko machine 1 of this example monitors whether or not an abnormality has occurred by various methods. Specifically, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. Then, it is monitored whether or not a magnet is used or vibration is applied, and if detection is made by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, an illegal act such as use of a magnet or vibration is performed. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the ball entrance (prize or exit) illegally thereafter, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, in the normal game state (low probability non-time saving state), entry into the first starting opening 2002 is permitted in which the game ball B flowing down the left side area of the game area 5a can enter. On the other hand, the game ball B flowing down the right side region of the game region 5a is not allowed to enter the second starting opening 2004 into which the game ball B can enter. Therefore, in the normal game state (low probability non-time saving state), it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is hit in the right side area of the game area 5a, and the game ball B flows down the right side area of the game area 5a. If it is detected that the game ball B has been hit in the right side area of the game area 5a in an attempt to illegally enter the second starting opening 2004, an abnormality occurs. I judge that there is.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is provided with a door frame opening switch that detects opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, and a body frame opening switch that detects opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. .. When the door frame opening switch or the main body frame opening switch is detected even during the game, the main frame 4 is opened to the door frame 3 or the outer frame 2 is to the main frame. There is a possibility that an illegal act such as opening No. 4 is being performed, and illegally entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, or causing an illegal big hit. Is determined to have occurred.

When an abnormality is detected at the timing t2, the speaker, the LED provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, or the like is used to notify the abnormality to the outside. As the abnormality notification, a warning message is output from the speaker or an LED provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 is blinked by a strong light emission in order to inform the outside that the abnormality has occurred. .. Further, as the warning message, the display content is changed depending on the type of abnormality. For example, if the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 detects that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message “Magnetic (vibration) detected” is output. Also, it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message "Please return to the left" is output. doing. Further, when the door frame opening switch and the body frame opening switch are detected and it is judged that an abnormality has occurred, a warning message "door is open" is output.

Further, the abnormality notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected. However, when the abnormality is resolved before a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the abnormality was detected, the abnormality notification is terminated at that time. For example, when it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side region of the game region 5a, and when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the game ball B flows down the left side region of the game region 5a. The abnormality is resolved at the time of returning to, and the abnormality notification is ended. Further, when the door frame opening switch or the body frame opening switch is detected and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 or the body frame with respect to the outer frame 2. The abnormality is resolved when 4 is closed, and the abnormality notification is ended.

When an abnormality is detected at timing t2, even if the number of jackpots after the setting value is changed reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example) at timing t3, the suggestion effect is restricted from being executed. ing. In other words, if an abnormality is detected before the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number (six in this example) after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a suggestive effect is generated. Even at the execution timing, the suggestive effect is not executed. Illegal activity is suspected as the cause of the abnormality detection. When such illegal activity is suspected, information about the setting change of the setting value and the currently set setting value is obtained. Since it is impossible to do so, it is possible to give a penalty for misconduct and deter the misconduct itself.

More specifically, when the abnormality is detected at the timing t2, the abnormality notification is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected, but the execution timing of the suggestive effect during the execution of the abnormality notification. Even if comes, the suggestive effect is not executed. That is, while the abnormality notification is being executed, even if the number of jackpots after the setting value is changed reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example), by executing the abnormality notification with priority over the suggestive effect, It is possible to clearly indicate to the outside that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, when the abnormality is detected at the timing t2, the abnormality notification is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the abnormality is detected, but it is assumed that the execution timing of the suggestive effect has arrived after the completion of the abnormality notification. Even, the suggestive production is never executed. In other words, even after the abnormality notification is finished, even if the number of jackpots after the setting value setting is changed reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example), the suggestion effect is not executed to change the setting value setting. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of information about the set value and the setting value currently set.

In the present example, when the abnormality at the time of detecting the abnormality at the timing t2 is a specific abnormality, all of the suggestive effects including voice output, lamp emission, and effect display are restricted from being executed. When there is no specific abnormality, only a part of the suggestive effect including voice output, lamp emission, and effect display is restricted from being executed. In other words, the extent to which the suggestive effect is limited differs depending on the type (degree) of abnormality. Specifically, when the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 detects at timing t2, it is determined that a serious abnormality (specific abnormality) has occurred, and voice output, lamp light emission, and effect production are performed. Whereas it is restricted not to execute all of the suggestive effects consisting of the display, at the timing t2, it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a, or the door frame. If the open switch or the main frame open switch is detected, it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred, and only the voice output is not executed among the suggested outputs consisting of voice output, lamp emission, and effect display. Thus, the lamp emission and the effect display are executed. Here, when the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 is detected, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act such as using a magnet or giving a vibration is being performed. While it is determined that (specific abnormality) has occurred, when it is detected that the game ball B is flowing down the right side area of the game area 5a, the player simply plays the game. Possibility of only making a mistake in the area to hit the ball B, or if the door frame opening switch or the body frame opening switch is detected, the hall manager may simply open the door frame 3 or the body frame 4. It is judged that a slight abnormality has occurred because it has a certain nature and is not necessarily a cheating act. As described above, when a serious abnormality occurs, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed, and since it is restricted so as not to execute all of the suggestion effects, the fraudulent act can be suppressed.

In the above, depending on the type (degree) of abnormality, it is restricted not to execute a part or all of the suggestive effect including voice output, lamp emission, and effect display. May not be executed. Further, when an abnormality is detected, the mode of outputting a suggestive effect including voice output, lamp light emission, and effect display may be suppressed. In this way, when the mode in which the suggestion effect including the voice output, the lamp light emission, and the effect display is output is suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the suggestion effect is being executed at the execution timing of the suggestion effect.

In this example, the suggestive performance is executed when the number of jackpots after the setting value setting is changed reaches a predetermined number (six times in this example), but after the setting value setting is changed. Before the number of big hits reaches a predetermined number, it may be possible to perform suggestive effect each time a big hit occurs after the setting value is changed. That is, when the predetermined number of big hits is 6, it may be possible to execute the suggestive effect even in each of the first to fifth big hits. As the suggestive effect, any of the suggestive effects A to C is executed as an effect corresponding to the currently set setting value (the set value after the change), and the suggestive effect A, the suggestive effect B, and the suggestive effect C are executed. In order, it suggests that there is a high expectation that it is a high setting value. When the suggestive effect is executed for each of the first to sixth big hits, the suggestive effect is executed so that the degree of expectation can be increased stepwise in each of the first to sixth big hits. In the sixth big hit, the final suggestion effect is executed to suggest the high degree of expectation. In each of the 1st to 5th big hits, the suggestive effect C that confirms that the currently set installation value is the set value 6 among the suggestive effects A to C is not executed. For example, in the case of executing the suggestive effect C as the final suggestive effect in the sixth big hit, the suggestive effect A→the suggestive effect A→the suggestive effect A→the suggestive effect B→in each of the first to fifth big hits. It is possible to execute in the order of suggestive effect B. As a result, since the final expectation cannot be grasped before the number of big hits reaches 6 after the setting value is changed, until the number of big hits reaches 6, You can continue the game with expectations.

In the above, the suggestive effect can be executed each time the jackpot is hit after the setting value is changed. However, if an abnormality is detected at the timing t2, the suggestive effect is executed at the subsequent suggestive effect execution timing. It is restricted not to do it. Specifically, when the predetermined number of big hits is 6, it is possible to perform suggestive effects even in each of the first to fifth big hits. For example, during the second to third big hits. When the abnormality is detected in step S1, the execution of the suggestive effect is restricted during the third and subsequent big hits.

Further, in the present example, the suggestive effect is executed at the end of the big hit game based on the predetermined number of times (the sixth time) of the big hit after the setting value is changed, but the predetermined number of times (the present example Then, it suffices if the suggestive effect is executed with the opportunity of the (sixth) big hit. For example, when a big hit result (stop pattern) based on the predetermined number of times (sixth in this example) big hit after the setting of the setting value is displayed, or a predetermined number of times (in this example, after the setting of the setting value is changed) The sixth big hit game based on the big hit may be in progress. Further, in the case of performing a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) after the jackpot game based on the jackpot of a predetermined number of times (the sixth time in the present example) after the setting value is changed The content of the demonstration (such as the lighting mode of the lamp) may be changed as the suggestive effect. The demonstration is an effect started when a state where no game is played continues for a predetermined time. As a result, after the big hit game based on the predetermined number of times (the sixth time in this example) of the big hit after the setting value is changed, if the game is not played, the contents of the demonstration can be confirmed. It is possible to know whether or not the high degree of expectation is high, and if the high degree of expectation is high, it is possible to increase the motivation to start the game. Regarding the content of the demonstration being executed as the suggestive production, for example, it is possible to end it by operating the production operation unit 301, and by confirming the content of the demonstration, whether or not there is a high expectation that it is a high set value. If the user does not want to be notified, the hall manager operates the effect operation unit 301 so that the hall manager cannot grasp whether or not the high degree of expectation is high.

[About contact/non-contact with handle and one-off button]
In the present embodiment, as a configuration related to the handle 182 and the one-shot button 193, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether the palm or finger touches the handle 182, whether the handle 182 is rotated, and the handle 182. And a single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the single-shot button 193 is being pressed during the rotation operation of 1), and detects the operation status of the handle 182 and the single-shot button 193.

First, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 182, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. It is to detect contact with. That is, when the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects it, whereas when the player does not touch the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect it.

The one-off button operation sensor 194 has a function of detecting whether or not the handle 182 is not rotating (non-rotating state), and the one-shot button 193 is pressed while the handle 182 is rotating. And a function of detecting whether or not there is. That is, when the handle 182 is not being rotated or when the handle 182 is being pressed while the handle 182 is being rotated, the handle button 182 is rotated while the handle 182 is detected. When the single-shot button 193 is not pressed during the operation, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 does not detect it. Regarding the one-shot button 193, the player presses the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182 to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182. At the same time, by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193, it is possible to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the one-shot button 193.

Next, a signal path when the steering wheel touch sensor 192 or the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is detected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a diagram for explaining a signal path when the steering wheel touch sensor 192 or the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is detected.

The detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control substrate 633 via the handle rear relay substrate 106. When the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input, the firing control unit 633b outputs the detection signal to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

Similarly, the detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633 via the handle rear relay board 106. When the firing control unit 633b receives the detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the firing control unit 633b outputs the detection signal to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU selects one of the following four operation statuses by a combination of whether or not the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is input and whether or not the detection signal from the one-off button operation sensor 194 is input. I know which of them is.

As the first operation situation, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input and the detection signal from the one-off button operation sensor 194 is input, the player is in contact with the handle 182. However, it is determined that the handle 182 is not being rotated, and the game is not being performed.

Further, as the second operation situation, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the one-off button operation sensor 194 is not input, the player is in contact with the handle 182, It is in a state in which the single shot button 193 is not being pressed while the handle 182 is being rotated, and it is determined that the game ball B is in a normal operation state in which it is about to be shot.

As the third operation state, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is input, the player touches the handle 182, Either the handle 182 is not rotating, or the player is in contact with the handle 182 and pressing the one-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182. We judge that it is a normal operation situation to temporarily stop the firing.

In addition, as the fourth operation state, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is not input and the detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is not input, the player touches the handle 182. Although it is not, it is determined that the handle 182 is in a rotating state and is in an abnormal operation state that cannot occur in a normal game.

The main control MPU performs the above-described firing permission signal setting process (step S113), and sets the logic of the firing permission signal that notifies the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted. Makes it possible. In this processing, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input and the detection signal from the single shot button operation sensor 194 is not input, it is possible to set the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal. On the other hand, even if the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is input, when the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input, the firing stop logic (the firing stop logic (the firing permission logic is inverted as the logic of the firing permission signal. Launch non-permission logic) is set. That is, when the handle 182 is touched and the one-shot button 193 is not operated, it is possible to output a firing permission signal to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, while operating the one-shot button 193. At times, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the detection signal from the one-off button operation sensor 194 is input, when the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is not input, the firing is performed by inverting the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal. It is set to stop logic (launch non-permission logic). That is, when the handle 182 is not in contact, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633.

Then, the firing control unit 633b receives the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 when the handle 182 is rotated during the period in which the firing permission signal is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be hit. On the other hand, even when the handle 182 is touched, when the one-shot button 193 is operated, the handle 182 is rotated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, but the shooting permission signal is not received. Because of this, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit.

Further, in the case of the fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) in which the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, Is a period in which the firing permission signal is not received (the period in which the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player), so that the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. It has become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

When the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and does not input the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the main control MPU permits the emission to the emission control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Although the signal is output, when outputting the firing permission signal, a firing permission time command for notifying that the firing permission signal is being output is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the player is not pressing the one-shot button 193 during the rotating operation of the handle 182 while the player is in contact with the handle 182 while receiving the command at the time of permitting firing. It is possible to understand that the second operation situation (normal operation situation) in which the game ball B is to be launched is in effect.

Further, when the main control MPU is inputting the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and the detection signal from the one-off button operation sensor 194, the main control MPU is directed toward the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Although the firing permission signal is not output, in that case, a firing stop time command that notifies that the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state where the player is not rotating the handle 182 while being in contact with the handle 182 while the player is in contact with the handle 182 during the period in which the command to stop firing is received. The third operation situation in which the single shot button 193 is being pressed while the handle 182 is rotating while being in contact with, and the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped (normal operation situation) Can be understood.

In addition, when the main control MPU does not input the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and does not input the detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633. Although the firing permission signal is not output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, a command at the time of an abnormality is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 to inform that an abnormal operation situation is occurring. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the handle 182 is rotating even though the player is not in contact with the handle 182 during the period when the abnormality occurrence command is received, and in the normal game. It is possible to understand that the fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) cannot occur.

Regarding the above, the peripheral control MPU notifies the abnormality to the outside by using the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the LED provided on the main body frame 4, the game board 5, and the like during the period when the abnormality occurrence command is received. I'm trying to do. As the abnormality notification, a warning message is output from the effect display device 1600 or a speaker, or an LED provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 in order to notify the outside that an abnormal operation situation has occurred. Flashes with a strong light emission. Further, as a warning message, a message "Please operate the steering wheel normally" is output. Here, in the case where the abnormality occurrence command is received, the handle 182 is in a state of being rotated even though the player is not in contact with the handle 182. There is a high possibility that the player will appear as if he or she is playing a fixed game, and there is a risk that he will attempt to commit fraud during such a period. In this respect, in this example, it is possible to understand that the fourth operation situation (abnormal operation situation) cannot occur in a normal game, and when such a fourth operation situation is grasped, By issuing the abnormality notification, it is possible to detect the risk of attempting an illegal act at an early stage.

Further, in the main control MPU, the player is not in contact with the handle 182 and is rotating the handle 182 during a period in which neither the command for firing permission, the command for firing stop, or the command for occurrence of abnormality is received. It is possible to understand that there is no state and the game is in the first operation state in which no game is being played.

Note that the main control MPU enables setting to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when it is determined that the setting value change permission and the setting value confirmation display are not being performed. When it is determined that the change permission of the value or the confirmation display of the set value is being performed, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic. In other words, during the permission to change the set value or during the confirmation display of the set value, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633 b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. .. Therefore, while the setting value is permitted to be changed or the setting value is being confirmed and displayed, even if the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball is not driven. You cannot hit B.

In the above, while the change of the set value is permitted or the confirmation of the set value is displayed, the fire permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, whereas the change of the set value is permitted. After the confirmation display of the set value is completed, it is possible to output the emission permission signal to the emission control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. However, before the completion of the change permission of the set value or the confirmation display of the set value. When the handle 182 is continuously in contact from the end to the end, the firing permission signal is not output even after the end of the set value change permission and the set value confirmation display. In such a case, after the permission to change the set value or the confirmation display of the set value is completed, the firing permission signal can be output by releasing the hand from the handle 182 and contacting the handle 182 again. The game ball B can be rotated and driven into the game area 5a.

Further, as described in detail above, the main control MPU determines, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected. When this is done, it is possible to set the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal, while it is determined that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud detection. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) that is the firing permission logic inverted. That is, at the time of detecting an illegal act, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. For this reason, at the time of detecting an illegal act, even when the handle 182 is rotated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. ing.

It should be noted that, while permitting the change of the set value or during confirmation display of the set value, even when the handle 182 is touched, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. Since the firing permission time command is not output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, it is understood that the peripheral control MPU is in the non-contact state with the handle 182. Similarly, at the time of detecting an illegal act, even when the handle 182 is contacted, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is not output to the discharge control section 633b of the payout control board 633 without outputting the discharge permission signal. Since it does not output the command at the time of permitting the firing toward, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that the steering wheel 182 is not in contact.

By the way, while the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is continuously input, the main control MPU may continue to output the firing permission command toward the peripheral control MPU. When the detection signal from is switched from non-input to input, the command for firing permission is output, and when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is switched from input to non-input, the command when firing is not permitted is output. May be. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU can recognize that the steering wheel 182 is being contacted during the period from the reception of the firing permission command to the reception of the firing non-permission command. Similarly, while the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is being input, during the period in which the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is continuously input, a command to stop firing is issued from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. The output may be continued, but when the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is switched from non-input to input, a command to stop firing is output, and the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input. The command for non-stop firing may be output when switching to non-input. In such a case, although the peripheral control MPU is in contact with the handle 182 during the period from receiving the command to stop firing to receiving the command to stop non-firing, it is determined that the single-shot button 193 is being operated. You can figure it out.

(Direction according to the operation of one-shot button)
Next, in the peripheral control MPU, it is determined whether or not the one-shot button 193 is being operated while the handle 182 is being touched, depending on whether or not a command to stop firing is input, and the one-shot button 193 is operated. And an effect corresponding to the release of the operation of the one-shot button 193 is executed. Of these, first, the execution control of the effect according to the operation of the one-shot button 193 will be described with reference to FIG. 272. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing an example of the first command at the time of stop of firing executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

As shown in FIG. 272, the peripheral control MPU is first executing a reach effect (for example, super reach effect) having a high degree of expectation as a reach effect after reach formation during variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol). It is determined whether or not (step S2801). In the peripheral control MPU, the effect is controlled on the basis of the variation pattern determined on the main control board 1310 side. As the effects based on the variation pattern, the effect of not forming reach (normal variation) and reach formation Examples include an effect of executing a normal reach effect with low expectations later, an effect of executing a normal reach effect with low expectations after the reach formation, and then executing a super reach effect with high expectations. For these effects, the effect time is set to be longer in the order of the effect that does not form the reach, the effect that executes the normal reach effect, and the effect that executes the super reach effect.

In the process of step S2801, when it is determined that the reach effect with high expectation (for example, super reach effect) is being executed as the reach effect after the reach formation, during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, It is determined whether or not a command to stop firing is received (step S2802). That is, it is determined whether or not the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single shot button 193 during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation. Then, when it is determined that the command at the time of the stop of the firing is received during the execution of the reach production with high expectation, the single shot button 193 is operated and the game ball B is launched during the execution of the reach production with high expectation. Is counted (added) to the firing stop number counter that indicates the number of times that has been temporarily stopped (step S2803). With regard to the firing stop number counter, it is possible to count only once for each execution of the reach effect with high expectation, and even if the single-shot button 193 is operated/non-operated repeatedly, a plurality of times can be obtained. It does not count times.

Subsequent to the processing of steps S2801 to S2803, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the end of the 10th reach effect with high expectations is reached (step S2804). When it is determined that the tenth reach production with high expectation has come to an end, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more (step S2805). That is, whether or not the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single shot button 193 in the reach production having high expectation of 5 times or more with respect to the execution of the reach production having high expectation of 10 times. To judge.

In the process of step S2805, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more at the time of the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach effect, the one-shot button 193 is output as a voice output from the speaker. A special sound A indicating that the number of times the player has operated the game ball B to be temporarily stopped is output (step S2806). As the special sound A, a voice "Good tune" is output.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S2805, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop count counter is not 5 counts or more at the time of the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach effect, the one-shot button 193 is output as a voice output from the speaker. Is output to output a special sound B indicating that the number of times the game ball B has been temporarily stopped is fired (step S2807). As the special sound B, a sound "Let's do our best" is output. Further, in the process of step S2807, execution determination (execution lottery) as to which of the setting suggestive sounds A to C indicating the currently set setting value is output is performed, and the execution is performed as a voice output from the speaker. Any of the setting suggestive sounds A to C is output according to the result of the determination.

At the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach effect, regardless of whether or not the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more, after the processing of steps S2806 and S2807, the firing stop number counter The value is being reset. After the end of the 10th highly expected reach effect, the next highly expected reach effect is the first highly expected reach effect, and the counting of the firing stop frequency counter is newly started. I am going to do it.

Here, during the execution of the reach production with high expectation, since the production time is long, there is a situation in which the suspension due to entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is likely to increase, and the suspension When the number reaches the upper limit (4 which is the limit number), the holding does not increase even if the player enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and operates the one-shot button 193 to play the game. Temporarily stop the firing of sphere B so that the number of spheres held is not reduced. At this time, when it is easy to enter the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the hold easily reaches the upper limit, and the single shot button 193 is operated to temporarily discharge the game ball B. It is likely to stop. That is, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th reach production with high expectation, the player enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. Since it was an easy situation and it was difficult to reduce the number of balls to be held, it is highly possible that the single shot button 193 was operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B, and in order to praise such a situation. The special sound A is output. On the other hand, when it is difficult to enter the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, it is difficult to reach the upper limit of the hold, and the single-shot button 193 may not be operated and the game ball B may continue to be launched. Is high. That is, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the tenth reach production with high expectation, the player enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Since it was a difficult situation and it was a situation where the number of balls to be held was likely to decrease, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will continue to be fired without operating the single shot button 193, and a special sound for encouraging such a situation. B is to be output.

In the process of step S2807, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to which of the setting suggestive sounds A to C is to be output. When the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random number value X when it is determined that the value of the stop count counter is not 5 counts or more, a setting suggestion sound A indicating a low setting value, a setting suggestion sound B indicating a high setting value, Any of the setting suggestive sounds C indicating the setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set setting values are the setting values 1 to 3, the probability that the setting suggestive sound A suggesting a low setting value is higher than that of the setting suggestive sound B (setting suggestive sound A: setting suggestive sound A The effect determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed with reference to the low setting effect allocation table determined by B=7:3). When the setting value is 4 to 5, the setting suggestive sound B suggesting a high setting value is more likely than the setting suggesting sound A (setting suggestive sound A: setting suggestive sound B=3:7). An effect is determined according to the value of the random number value X with reference to the determined high setting effect distribution table 1. Further, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggesting sounds A to C including the setting suggesting sound C indicating the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are set to have a predetermined probability (setting). Suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B: setting suggestion sound C=1:5:4 ratio) is used to refer to the high setting effect distribution table 2 to determine the effect according to the value of the random number X. .. That is, since the setting suggestive sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting is not determined by one output. When the suggestive sound C is output, it is determined that the currently set value is set value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestive sound is output, it is possible to have expectations according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggesting sound.

As the setting suggestive sound A suggesting a low set value, sound data in which a sound “BEE” is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestive sound B suggesting a high set value, “BEEBE” is output from the speaker. The sound data in which the voice is output is used, and as the setting suggestion sound C indicating the setting value 6, the sound data in which the voice “BeeBeeBee” is output from the speaker is used. In this way, by outputting the setting suggestion sound differently for each suggestion of the set value, it is possible to grasp what kind of set value the suggestion is.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect corresponding to the operation of the one-shot button 193. Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach production, the single shot button 193 is operated to fire the game ball B. By outputting the special sound A indicating that the number of times the player has temporarily stopped is large, it is easy to enter the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls to be held. I can understand what happened. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is less than 5 counts at the time of the end of the tenth reach production with high expectation, the single shot button 193 is operated to temporarily fire the game ball B. By outputting the special sound B indicating that the number of stops is small, it is difficult for the player to enter the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, and the situation in which the number of balls held is likely to decrease Can be grasped. With this, when the special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good.

The command to stop firing is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 only when the one-shot button 193 is operated while the handle 182 is being touched. In other words, even if the one-shot button 193 is operated, if the peripheral control MPU does not receive the command at the time of stop of firing unless the handle 182 is in contact, the command at the time of stop of firing is received in the process of step S2802. It does not judge that it has done so, and does not count (add) to the firing stop counter. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not the one-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B while coming into contact with the handle 182 and participating in the game, and the handle 182 and the one-shot button 193. It is possible to improve the accuracy of the information such as the game situation obtained from.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is less than 5 counts at the time of the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach effect, the single shot button 193 is operated to play the game ball B. In addition to outputting the special sound B indicating that the number of times of temporarily stopping the firing is small, any of the setting suggesting sounds A to C indicating the currently set setting value is output. In this way, when it is determined that the value of the firing stop number counter is less than 5 counts at the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach effect, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is entered. It is difficult to play the ball, and there is a high possibility that the game efficiency is low, but when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to know the information about the currently set setting value, so such a game efficiency It is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game even under bad circumstances. In addition, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high set value, the situation is likely to be a hit, so that it is possible to particularly motivate the player to continue the game.

In this example, at the time of the end of the 10th highly anticipated reach production, it is determined whether or not the value of the firing stop number counter is 5 counts or more, and it is possible to output the special sound. However, at the end of the 10th highly expected reach production, regardless of whether the value of the firing stop count counter is 5 counts or more, after the 10th highly expected reach production is completed, Sound may be output.

(Direction according to the release of the one-shot button operation)
Next, the effect execution control according to the release of the operation of the one-shot button 193 will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing an example of the second emission stop time command-related processing executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 273, the peripheral control MPU is executing a reach effect (eg, super reach effect) having a high degree of expectation as a reach effect after reach formation during variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol). It is determined whether or not (step S2901).

In the process of step S2901, if it is determined that the reach effect (eg, super reach effect) having a high degree of expectation is being executed as the reach effect after the reach formation, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is selected. It is determined whether or not the hold by the entry of the ball reaches the upper limit (limit number) (step S2902). It should be noted that when the number of holdings by entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 increases, or when the number of holdings decreases due to the start of the variation of the symbols, a holding number command indicating the number of holdings is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the number of reservations. When it is determined that the hold due to the ball entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 has reached the upper limit (limit number), it is determined whether or not a command at the time of the firing stop is received ( Step S2903). That is, it is determined whether or not the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single shot button 193 in a situation where the hold has reached the upper limit during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation. Whether the one-shot button 193 is operated before the start of the reach effect having a high expectation or the one-shot button 193 is operated after the start is determined, it is determined that the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped. can do.

In the process of step S2903, when it is determined that the command for firing stop is received, a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) is set as the time when the special effect described below can be executed when the command for firing permission is received. The set operation waiting time is started (step S2904). Here, when performing a reach effect with high expectations based on the variation pattern, the effects are executed in the order of start of variation→reach formation→reach effect with low expectations→reach effect with high expectations. The waiting time is set to be shorter than the production time of the reach production with high expectation. Also, after the start of the operation waiting time, the operation waiting time is ended when a command to permit firing is received. On the other hand, if the command for firing permission is not received after the start of the operation waiting time, the operation waiting time is ended when the predetermined time has elapsed, but the reach with a high degree of expectation is reached before the predetermined time has elapsed. When the effect is ended, the operation waiting time is also ended. Also, during the operation waiting time, it is monitored whether or not the state in which the command at the time of the firing stop is received can be switched to the state in which the command at the time of the firing permission is received. In other words, during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, in the situation where the hold has reached the upper limit, after the operation of the single shot button 193 to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B, the reach with high expectation is also reached. During execution of the effect, it is monitored whether or not the operation of the single shot button 193 is canceled and the firing of the game ball B is restarted.

Further, in the process of step S2904, when the operation waiting time is started, a promotion effect for promoting the release of the operation of the one-shot button 193 is started as an effect executed in the operation waiting time. As the promotion effect, the effect display device 1600 is used to display an image "What will happen if the firing is restarted?". Thereby, it is possible to understand that it is required to cancel the operation of the one-shot button 193 and restart the launch of the game ball B even though the one-shot button 193 is being operated.

Following the processing of steps S2901 to S2904, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the operation waiting time is occurring (step S2905). Then, if it is determined that the operation waiting time is being generated, during the operation waiting time being generated, the state in which the command at the time of the firing stop is switched to the state at which the command at the time of the firing permission is received ( Step S2906), as a special effect, execution determination (execution lottery) as to which of the setting suggestive sounds A to C indicating the currently set setting value is output is made, and the execution determination is made as a voice output from the speaker. Any of the setting suggestive sounds A to C is output according to the result of (step S2907). That is, during the operation waiting time, when the operation of the single shot button 193 is canceled and the firing of the game ball B is restarted, the special effect is executed.

Here, during the execution of the reach production with high expectation, since the production time is long, there is a situation in which the suspension due to entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is likely to increase, and the suspension When the number reaches the upper limit (4 which is the limit number), the holding does not increase even if the player enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and operates the one-shot button 193 to play the game. Temporarily stop the firing of sphere B so that the number of spheres held is not reduced. At this time, when it is easy to enter the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the hold easily reaches the upper limit, and the single shot button 193 is operated to temporarily discharge the game ball B. It is likely to stop. That is, when an operation waiting time occurs during execution of the reach production with high expectation, it is a situation in which it is easy to enter the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls to be held. Therefore, it is highly possible that the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single shot button 193. On the other hand, when the operation waiting time does not occur during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, it is difficult to enter the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and the number of balls held decreases. Since the situation was easy, it is highly possible that the single-shot button 193 was not operated and the game ball B was continuously fired.

Further, when the one-shot button 193 is operated during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, and the operation waiting time occurs, the number of balls held does not decrease, but on the hall side, the one-shot button 193 is operated. It is preferable that the player releases the game ball B and continues to shoot it. In this respect, when the operation of the one-shot button 193 is canceled during the operation waiting time, it is possible to guide the user to cancel the operation of the one-shot button 193 by executing a special effect.

In the process of step S2906, an execution determination (execution lottery) as to which of the setting suggestive sounds A to C is to be output is made. In the execution determination, the operation of the one-shot button 193 is canceled during the operation waiting time. When it is determined that a predetermined random number value X is acquired by the peripheral control MPU, a setting suggestion sound A indicating a low setting value, a setting suggestion sound B indicating a high setting value, and a setting suggestion sound indicating a setting value 6 are obtained. Either C is determined according to the currently set value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set setting values are the setting values 1 to 3, the probability that the setting suggestive sound A suggesting a low setting value is higher than that of the setting suggestive sound B (setting suggestive sound A: setting suggestive sound A The effect determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed with reference to the low setting effect allocation table determined by B=7:3). When the setting value is 4 to 5, the setting suggestive sound B suggesting a high setting value is more likely than the setting suggesting sound A (setting suggestive sound A: setting suggestive sound B=3:7). An effect is determined according to the value of the random number value X with reference to the determined high setting effect distribution table 1. Further, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggesting sounds A to C including the setting suggesting sound C indicating the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are set to have a predetermined probability (setting). Suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B: setting suggestion sound C=1:5:4 ratio) is used to refer to the high setting effect distribution table 2 to determine the effect according to the value of the random number X. .. That is, since the setting suggestive sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting is not determined by one output. When the suggestive sound C is output, it is determined that the currently set value is set value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestive sound is output, it is possible to have expectations according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggesting sound.

As the setting suggestive sound A suggesting a low set value, sound data in which a sound “BEE” is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestive sound B suggesting a high set value, “BEEBE” is output from the speaker. The sound data in which the voice is output is used, and as the setting suggestion sound C indicating the setting value 6, the sound data in which the voice “BeeBeeBee” is output from the speaker is used. In this way, by outputting the setting suggestion sound differently for each suggestion of the set value, it is possible to grasp what kind of set value the suggestion is.

As described above, in this example, when the one-shot button 193 is operated, the operation waiting time is generated, and during the operation waiting time, when the one-shot button 193 is released, the special effect is executed. ing. That is, the special effect is executed as the effect corresponding to the operation status of the one-shot button 193. Specifically, when it is determined that the single shot button 193 has been operated during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, an operation waiting time is generated so that the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are displayed. It is possible to understand that it is a situation in which it is easy to enter and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls that the player has. On the other hand, when it is determined that the single shot button 193 is not operated during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, the operation waiting time is not generated. As a result, it is possible to know whether or not the game efficiency is good, depending on whether or not the operation waiting time is generated. Further, when it is determined that the operation of the one-shot button 193 is released during the operation waiting time, it is possible to guide the user to release the operation of the one-shot button 193 by executing a special effect.

The command to stop firing is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 only when the one-shot button 193 is operated while the handle 182 is being touched. In other words, even if the one-shot button 193 is operated, if the peripheral control MPU does not receive the command at the time of stop of firing unless the handle 182 is in contact, the command at the time of stop of firing is received in the process of step S2802. It does not judge that it has done so, and does not count (add) to the firing stop counter. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not the one-shot button 193 is operated to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball B while coming into contact with the handle 182 and participating in the game, and the handle 182 and the one-shot button 193. It is possible to improve the accuracy of the information such as the game situation obtained from.

In addition, in the present example, when it is determined that the operation of the one-shot button 193 is released during the operation waiting time, as a special effect, the setting suggestion sounds A to C indicating the currently set setting value are generated. Which is being output. In this way, when the operation of the single shot button 193 is canceled during the operation waiting time, it is highly possible that the game ball B is re-launched and the number of balls held decreases, but a setting suggestion sound is output. In this case, since the information regarding the set value currently set can be known, it is possible to motivate the player to restart the launch of the game ball B even if there is a possibility that the number of balls to be held decreases. In addition, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high set value, the situation is likely to be a hit, so that it is possible to particularly motivate the player to continue the game.

In addition, in the present example, on the condition that the hold due to entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 has reached the upper limit (limit number) during execution of the reach production with high expectation, When the single shot button 193 is operated, an operation waiting time is generated. As a result, after the start of the variation of the symbols, until the start of the reach effect with high expectation, the suspension due to entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 reaches the upper limit (the limit number). Can motivate you to. Further, during execution of the reach production with a high expectation, even if the hold by entering the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 does not reach the upper limit (limit number), the single shot button 193 is operated. When doing, the operation waiting time may be generated. Then, when the operation of the one-shot button 193 is canceled during such an operation waiting time, a non-special effect (a special effect joke) may be executed. As the non-special effect, for example, a setting non-indicative sound that does not suggest the currently set setting value may be output, such as a sound of "pi-pi-pi" (a voice different from the setting suggestive sound) output from the speaker.

In this example, during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, it is monitored whether or not the operation of the one-shot button 193 is released during the operation waiting time, and the operation of the one-shot button 193 is released. At this point, the special effect is being executed, but even if it is determined that the operation of the one-shot button 193 has been canceled during the operation waiting time, the special effect is generated after the end of the reach effect with high expectation. The production may be executed.

(Direction according to the operation of the handle)
Next, the execution control of the effect according to the contact with the handle 182 will be described with reference to FIG. 274. FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing an example of the command related processing at the time of firing permission, which is executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 274, the peripheral control MPU first of all produces an effect including a reach effect (eg, super reach effect) having a high degree of expectation as a reach effect after reach formation during variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol). It is determined whether or not it is being executed (step S3001).

In the process of step S3001, if it is determined that a production including a reach production with a high degree of expectation (for example, a super reach production) is being executed as a reach production after the reach is formed, is a launch permission command received? It is determined whether or not (step S3002). As described above, the effect including the reach effect having a high expectation is an effect in which the super reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect having a low expectation is executed after the reach is formed, as an effect based on the variation pattern. When it is determined that the command for firing permission is received during execution of the effect including the reach effect having high expectation, the contact time counting counter indicating the time of contact with the handle 182 is counted. (Addition) (step S3003).

In the process of step S3303, only the time during which the command for firing permission is received is counted and the time during which the command for firing stop is received is counted during execution of the production including the reach production with high expectation. Absent. That is, when the production including the reach production with high expectation is being executed, the single shot button 193 is not operated while the handle 182 is in contact, and the game ball B can be fired. In the case where the contact time counting counter is counting, it is in the state of being in contact with the handle 182, but the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single shot button 193. Is not counted in the contact time counting counter, and is excluded from the contact time with the handle 182. Further, when the one-shot button 193 is temporarily operated while being in contact with the handle 182 during execution of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, after the operation of the one-shot button 193 is canceled, The counting of the contact time counting counter is restarted.

Subsequent to the processing of steps S3001 to S3003, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation (the end of the reach effect with high expectation) (step S3004). .. Then, when it is determined that the effect including the reach effect having a high expectation has come to an end, it is determined whether or not the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (step S3005).

In the process of step S3005, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is less than the predetermined time at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, a voice output from the speaker to the handle 182 is performed. The special sound A indicating that the contact time is short is output (step S3006). As the special sound A, a voice "Good tune" is output.

On the other hand, in the process of step S3005, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than the predetermined time at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, the handle 182 is output as the sound from the speaker. The special sound B indicating that the contact time with is long is output (step S3007). As the special sound B, a sound "Let's do our best" is output. In the process of step S3007, execution determination (execution lottery) as to which of the setting suggestive sounds A to C indicating the currently set setting value is output is performed, and the execution is performed as a voice output from the speaker. Any of the setting suggestive sounds A to C is output according to the result of the determination.

Here, when performing an effect including a reach effect having a high expectation based on the variation pattern, the effect is executed in the order of start of variation→reach formation→reach effect with a low expectation→reach effect with a high expectation. However, the predetermined time is set to be longer than the time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the reach effect with high expectation (the end of the reach effect with low expectation).

In addition, during the execution of the production including the reach production with high expectation, since the production time is long, there is a situation in which the hold due to entering the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 is likely to increase, When the hold reaches the upper limit (4 which is the limit number), the hold does not increase even if the player enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, and the single shot button 193 is operated. Therefore, the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped so that the number of balls held is not reduced. At this time, when it is easy to enter the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the hold easily reaches the upper limit, and the single shot button 193 is operated to temporarily discharge the game ball B. It is likely to stop. That is, when the contact time with the handle 182 is less than the predetermined time except when the single-shot button 193 is operated, it is easy to enter the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and the ball is held. Since it was a situation where it was difficult to reduce, there is a high possibility that the firing of the game ball B was temporarily stopped by operating the single shot button 193, and the special sound A for praising such a situation is output. I am trying. On the other hand, when it is difficult to enter the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, it is difficult to reach the upper limit of the hold, and the single-shot button 193 may not be operated and the game ball B may continue to be launched. Is high. That is, when the contact time with the handle 182 except when the single shot button 193 is operated is a predetermined time or more, it is difficult to enter the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and the holding ball is held. Since it was a situation where it was easy to decrease, it is highly possible that the single shot button 193 was not operated and the game ball B was continuously fired, and a special sound B for encouraging such a situation is output.

In the process of step S3007, an execution determination (execution lottery) as to which of the setting suggestive sounds A to C is to be output is made. When it is determined that the value of the time counting counter is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random number value X, and a setting suggestive sound A suggesting a low set value and a setting suggestive sound B suggesting a high set value. , The setting suggesting sound C indicating the setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set setting values are the setting values 1 to 3, the probability that the setting suggestive sound A suggesting a low setting value is higher than that of the setting suggestive sound B (setting suggestive sound A: setting suggestive sound A The effect determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed with reference to the low setting effect allocation table determined by B=7:3). When the setting value is 4 to 5, the setting suggestive sound B suggesting a high setting value is more likely than the setting suggesting sound A (setting suggestive sound A: setting suggestive sound B=3:7). An effect is determined according to the value of the random number value X with reference to the determined high setting effect distribution table 1. Further, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggesting sounds A to C including the setting suggesting sound C indicating the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are set to have a predetermined probability (setting). Suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B: setting suggestion sound C=1:5:4 ratio) is used to refer to the high setting effect distribution table 2 to determine the effect according to the value of the random number X. .. That is, since the setting suggestive sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting is not determined by one output. When the suggestive sound C is output, it is determined that the currently set value is set value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestive sound is output, it is possible to have expectations according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggesting sound.

As the setting suggestive sound A suggesting a low set value, sound data in which a sound “BEE” is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestive sound B suggesting a high set value, “BEEBE” is output from the speaker. The sound data in which the voice is output is used, and as the setting suggestion sound C indicating the setting value 6, the sound data in which the voice “BeeBeeBee” is output from the speaker is used. In this way, by outputting the setting suggestion sound differently for each suggestion of the set value, it is possible to grasp what kind of set value the suggestion is.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output the special sound as an effect corresponding to the contact time with the handle 182. Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is less than the predetermined time at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, it is suggested that the contact time with the handle 182 is short. By outputting the special sound A, it is possible to understand that it is easy to enter the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and it is difficult to reduce the number of balls to be held. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than the predetermined time at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, the special sound B indicating that the contact time with the handle 182 is long is provided. By outputting, it is possible to understand that it is difficult for the player to enter the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and the number of balls held is likely to decrease. With this, when the special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good.

Further, in this example, during execution of the production including the reach production with high expectation, only the time during which the command for firing permission is received is counted, and the time during which the command for firing stop is received is not counted. .. That is, when the production including the reach production with high expectation is being executed, the single shot button 193 is not operated while the handle 182 is in contact, and the game ball B can be fired. In the case where the contact time counting counter is counting, it is in the state of being in contact with the handle 182, but the firing of the game ball B is temporarily stopped by operating the single shot button 193. Is not counted in the contact time counting counter, and is excluded from the contact time with the handle 182. As a result, it is possible to know whether or not the game ball B can be fired out of the state of being in contact with the handle 182, and the accuracy of information such as the game status obtained from the handle 182 or the one-shot button 193. Can be increased.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than the predetermined time at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, it is suggested that the contact time with the handle 182 is long. In addition to outputting the special sound B to be output, any of the setting suggesting sounds A to C indicating the currently set setting value is output. As described above, when it is determined that the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or longer than the predetermined time at the end of the production including the reach production with high expectation, the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 is entered. It is difficult to play the ball, and there is a high possibility that the game efficiency is low, but when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to know the information about the currently set setting value, so such a game efficiency It is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game even under bad circumstances. In addition, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high set value, the situation is likely to be a hit, so that it is possible to particularly motivate the player to continue the game.

In this example, it is possible to output a special sound by determining whether or not the value of the contact time counting counter is equal to or more than a predetermined time at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation. However, at the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, regardless of whether the value of the contact time counter is equal to or more than a predetermined time, after the end of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, a special Sound may be output.

In addition, in the present example, it is possible to output a special sound by determining whether or not the contact time with the steering wheel 182 is longer than or equal to a predetermined time during execution of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation. However, the number of times the handle 182 is touched and the number of times the hand is released from the handle 182 are counted in a situation where the handle 182 is repeatedly touched and non-touched during execution of a production including a reach production with high expectations. In this way, it may be possible to output the special sound by determining whether or not the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is a predetermined number or more. For example, when the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is a predetermined number or more during execution of the effect including the reach effect with high expectation, the ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Since it is a difficult situation, it is highly likely that the game ball B is repeatedly fired and stopped, and a special sound B for encouraging such a situation is output. In addition, based on both the determination result of whether the contact time with the handle 182 is a predetermined time or more and the determination result of whether the number of times of contact or non-contact with the handle 182 is a predetermined number or more. Thus, it may be determined which of the special sounds A and B should be output.

[Regarding Common Modes Used in Hold Notice Production and Set Value Hold Suggestion Production]
Next, the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggestion effect will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a command for instructing the first reserved memory number when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600, and the second reserved memory number is determined based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004. When it changes, the command for instructing the second reserved storage number (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to set the second reserved storage number. It is adapted to be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, not only is the lottery result for which the suggestion start is suspended displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first reserve memory display 1700 or the second reserve memory display 1701, but also according to the lottery result for which the suggestion is being executed. The pending storage is also displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the running pending storage display 1702. As a result, the final display mode in the pending notice effect or the set value suggestion effect, which will be described later, can be displayed in the in-execution on-hold storage display 1702. With this configuration, the lottery result is suggested. Until this time, the pending notice effect or the set value suggestion effect can be paid attention to, and the expectation can be given to the big hit or the high set value, so that the deterioration of the entertainment can be suppressed.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402. When a pre-judgment command is received from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 2004, in response to the lottery result in which the start of suggestion is suspended based on the pre-judgment command. The display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed to execute a hold announcement effect that suggests a jackpot expectation at the time of suggesting the lottery result. It is like this.

In this example, the first hold storage number designated by the first hold count designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second reserve storage count designated by the second reserve storage command, and the pre-determination command The peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not there is a pending notice effect according to each of the pre-determination information (missing, small hit, big hit, etc., which can notify the type of big hit such as probability variation big hit or normal big hit). Also, a hold notice determination table for determining a hold notice pattern type when executing the hold notice effect is provided.

Then, when the decision to execute the pending notice effect is made and the pending notice pattern type to be executed is decided, the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 are normally set. It is displayed in a different display mode (display color different from normal in this example). In this example, normally, the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 are displayed in white which is a basic color, and when executing the hold notice, it is displayed in any of blue, green, red and rainbow colors. To do. Further, the display modes of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 are set so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher in the order of white→blue→green→red→rainbow color.

Also, when the lottery result is specified as the pre-judgment information, the pre-judgment is performed with a high probability of determining a pending notice pattern that is a mode with a high expectation for a big hit (for example, red or rainbow color) as a final hold display mode. When the lottery result is identified as a loss as information, the final pending display mode is determined with a high probability as a final pending display mode with a low jackpot expectation degree (for example, blue). When a mode with a high jackpot expectation is displayed, the expectation of the player for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

Further, in the hold announcement pattern, each time the suggestion of the lottery result (variable display of decorative design (variable display of special design)) is performed during execution of the hold announcement production (every time the hold is digested), the production display device It is set how the display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed in 1600 changes. In the hold notice pattern, the display modes of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 are the reverse of the order of white→blue→green→red→rainbow color. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the jackpot expectation does not decrease), and every time the suggestion of the lottery result (variable display of decorative design (variable display of special design)) is performed (every time the hold is exhausted In), the display mode of the first pending storage display 1700 and the second pending storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or a mode in which the jackpot expectation is high. Is set to. Therefore, even if the effect display device 1600 displays the first hold storage display 1700 or the second hold storage display 1701 in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation, suggestion of the lottery result for which the hold notice is executed is started. Until then, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display changes to a mode with a high jackpot expectation, and the mode of the hold display can be expected with attention to the end.

Further, in the pending notice pattern, it is not always necessary to change the order of blue→green→red→rainbow after displaying the first pending storage display 1700 and the second pending storage display 1701 in white (basic color). Starting from the display mode (for example, the first reserve memory display 1700c is displayed in red based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002) , The display mode is changed to the next display mode without passing through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first pending storage display 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the lottery result is finished and the next lottery result is started. Accordingly, when the first reserved storage display 1700d is moved to the first reserved storage display 1700c, the color changes from white to rainbow color). For this reason, even if the display mode of the first reserved storage display 1700 and the second reserved storage display 1701 is small (the number of reservations), the first reserved storage display 1700 and the second reserved storage display 1700 can be displayed in a display mode with a high jackpot expectation. The hold storage display 1701 can be displayed. Further, even if the first pending storage display 1700 or the second pending storage display 1701 is displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation level, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next. It is possible to expect the attention to the display modes of the hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 until the end.

Further, the start timing of the hold announcement effect (timing to display the display mode in a mode different from the normal mode) is based on the fact that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Not only the timing of displaying the memory display 1700 or the second hold memory display 1701, but also the timing thereafter (for example, the first hold memories 1700a to 1700a to 1700a to 1700d are moved according to the start of the next lottery result after the suggestion of the lottery result ends. It is also started at the time of making it). As a result, even if the pending notice effect is not executed, the first pending storage display 1700 and the second pending storage display 1701 can be expected and paid attention to the end.

Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the pachinko machine 1 is changed by changing the display mode of the first pending memory display 1700 and the second pending memory display 1701, as in the above-mentioned pending notice effect that suggests the jackpot expectation level. The setting value hold suggesting effect that suggests the setting value can be executed. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, and the second starting port based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402. Corresponding to the lottery result in which the start of suggestion is suspended based on the setting value currently set from the time when the advance determination command is received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball entering 2004. By changing the display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600, a set value hold suggesting effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be executed. There is.

In this example, the currently set value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU, but at the timing when the variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a variation pattern command, The current set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command and is also stored in the peripheral control MPU. However, regarding the information about the currently set setting value (setting value information), that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second starting It may be included in the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402.

In this example, the first hold storage number designated by the first hold count designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second hold storage count designated by the second hold count storage command, and the current setting A setting value hold suggestion determination table for determining the presence or absence of the set value hold suggestive effect and the set value hold suggestive pattern type when executing the set value hold suggestive effect according to each of the set values. I have it.

Then, when the decision to execute the set value hold suggestive effect is made and the set value hold suggestive pattern type to be executed is decided, the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is displayed in a display mode different from normal (in this example, a display color different from normal). In this example, normally, the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 are displayed in white which is a basic color, and when executing the hold notice, it is displayed in any of blue, green, red and rainbow colors. To do. Further, the display modes of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 are white->blue->green->red->rainbow color in the order of expectation for the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (expectation degree for the high set value). Is set to be high.

In addition, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6, the set value hold suggestive pattern that is a mode (eg, red or rainbow color) with a high degree of expectation for the high set value as the final hold display mode is high. When the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is determined to be 3 or 4 and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the final value of the pending display is a mode of expectation for the high set value (for example, green). Is determined with a high probability, and when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified to be 1 or 2, the set value hold suggestion is a mode (for example, blue) with the lowest expectation for the high set value as the final hold display mode. By determining the pattern with a high probability, when a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value is displayed as the final hold display mode, the degree of expectation of the player for the high set value is increased.

Further, in the set value hold suggestive pattern, each time the suggestion of the lottery result (variable display of decorative design (variable display of special design)) is performed during execution of the set value hold suggestive production (each time the hold is exhausted) It is set how the display modes of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 change. In the set value hold suggestive pattern, the display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is the reverse of the order of white→blue→green→red→rainbow color. It is set so that it does not change in the order of (that is, the degree of expectation for high set values does not decrease), and each time the suggestion of the lottery result (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) is performed (pending Every time the) is exhausted), the display mode of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or for a high set value. It is set to have a high expectation. Therefore, even if the first hold storage 1700 or the second hold storage 1701 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which the degree of expectation for the high set value is low, the lottery result that is the target of execution of the set value hold suggesting effect is displayed. Until the suggestion starts, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display may be changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and the mode of the hold display can be noticed with expectation to the end.

Further, it is not always necessary to change the set value holding suggestion pattern in the order of blue→green→red→rainbow color after displaying the first holding storage display 1700 and the second holding storage display 1701 in white (basic color). , Starting from a display mode in the middle (for example, the first hold storage display 1700c is displayed in red based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002) Change to the next display mode without passing through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first hold storage display 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the lottery result ends and the next lottery result is displayed. (When the first reserved storage display 1700d is moved to the first reserved storage display 1700c, the white color changes to a rainbow color). For this reason, even if the display mode of the first reserved storage display 1700 and the second reserved storage display 1701 changes (reserved number) is small, the first reserved storage display 1700 and The second hold storage display 1701 can be displayed. Further, even if the first pending storage display 1700 or the second pending storage display 1701 is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation for a high set value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will be changed next, With respect to the display modes of the first reserved memory display 1700 and the second reserved memory display 1701, it is possible to expect the attention to the end.

Further, the start timing of the set value holding suggestive effect (timing of displaying the display mode in a mode different from the normal mode) is based on the fact that the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. It is not limited to the timing of displaying the one hold storage display 1700 or the second hold storage display 1701, but the subsequent timing (for example, the first hold storage 1700a to 1700a to 1700a to 1700d in response to the start of the next lottery result after the suggestion of the lottery result ends. When moving, etc.) is also started. As a result, even if the set value holding suggestion effect is not executed, the first holding storage display 1700 and the second holding storage display 1701 can be expected to be noticed to the end.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the same notice content (the same aspect) is used in the pending notice effect that suggests the jackpot expectation and the set value hold suggestive effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to control the display. Specifically, in the pending announcement effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, the first pending storage display 1700 and the second pending storage display 1701 are displayed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors based on the pending announcement pattern. On the other hand, in the set value hold suggesting effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1, the first hold memory display 1700 and the second hold memory display 1701 are given a hold notice based on the set value hold suggestive pattern. It is possible to display in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors that are the same as the pattern-based mode. As a result, when the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 are displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (white which is the basic color), the jackpot expectation is suggested during execution of the hold announcement effect. It is not possible to determine whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is being suggested during execution of the set value holding suggestion effect, and it is possible to give a fun of guessing which effect is being executed. it can. For example, as a final hold display mode, when the lottery result shows a loss even though it is displayed in a rainbow color (when the result of the variable display of the decorative design shows a loss pattern), the hold is displayed. The player does not suggest that the jackpot expectation is high due to execution of the notice production, but suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is high due to the execution of the set value holding suggestion production. You can infer it conveniently.

It should be noted that while the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, the set value pending suggestion effect is not based on the preliminary determination information. That is, the pending notice effect can be executed by acquiring the held lottery result in advance, while the set value holding suggestion effect can be executed without acquiring the held lottery result in advance.

In addition, in this example, when it is determined that only one of the execution determination of the pending notice effect and the execution determination of the set value pending suggestion effect is executed, the determined effect is executed. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute both by the execution judgment of the pending notice effect and the execution judgment of the set value suggestion effect, the higher order mode (blue → green → red) →The effect in which the higher order of the order of rainbow colors is set is executed. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the jackpot expectation degree is being suggested during execution of the pending notice effect or the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is suggested during execution of the set value pending suggestion effect, but the game Can have as many expectations as possible. In addition, in the case where it is determined to execute both of the execution determination of the pending notice effect and the execution determination of the set value suggestion effect, if the final hold display mode is the same, which effect is executed? Alternatively, for example, the pending notice effect may be preferentially executed. In addition, if it is decided to execute both by the execution judgment of the pending notice effect and the execution judgment of the set value suggestion suggesting effect, one of the effects may be prioritized and executed. May be executed with priority.

Further, in this example, the execution frequency of the set value hold suggestive effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect. That is, the pending notice effect is executed based on the advance determination information, and when the lottery result based on the pending storage that is executing the pending notice effect is suggested, the content of the pending notice effect is reset. Since the content of the set value hold suggestive effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, by setting the execution frequency of the set value hold suggestive effect lower than that of the hold notice effect, It is possible to prevent the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

In addition, in this example, in the hold announcement effect and the set value suggestion effect, all the modes of blue, green, red, and rainbow color are commonly used as the mode of the hold display, but only some modes are used. You may use in common. In other words, there may be a mode in which it is possible to exclusively appear as the mode of the hold display only for one of the hold announcement effect and the set value suggestion effect, and the hold announcement effect and the set value hold For each of the suggestive effects, there may be a mode in which the reserved display can be made to appear exclusively. For example, when it is possible to change to the rainbow color as the final hold display mode only for the hold announcement effect, when the final hold display mode changes to the rainbow color, It can be determined that execution of the notice production suggests that the jackpot expectation is high. In addition, when it is possible to change to the rainbow color as the final hold display mode only for the set value hold suggestive effect, when the final hold display mode changes to the rainbow color. It is possible to determine that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value by executing the set value holding suggestion effect.

Further, in the pending notice effect, it is possible to display the first pending memory display 1700 or the second pending memory display 1701 in any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors based on the pending notice pattern. In the set value holding suggestion effect, the first holding storage display 1700 and the second holding storage display 1701 are displayed based on the setting value holding suggestion pattern in the same manner as the manner based on the holding notice pattern, that is, blue, green, red, and rainbow. Although it is possible to display in any of the colors, the common modes are displayed on the effect display device 1600 using the same image data. In addition, each time the suggestion of the lottery result (variable display of the decorative design (variable display of the special design)) is performed in the hold notice pattern and the set value hold suggestive pattern (each time the hold is digested), How to change the display mode of the first hold storage display 1700 and the second hold storage display 1701 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is set, but these effect patterns are made common and the hold notice effect is set. Regardless of which of the setting value hold suggestion effect and the setting value hold suggestion effect is executed, the mode of the hold display may be changed based on the common effect pattern.

Further, in the hold announcement effect, the effect (first effect) suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is executed by changing the mode of the hold display based on the hold announcement pattern, whereas in the set value hold suggesting effect, Based on the set value holding suggestion pattern, by changing the mode of the hold display similarly to the hold notice effect, the effect suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (second effect) is executed. Apart from this, a third effect may be executed that suggests the jackpot expectation and also suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1. Regarding such a third effect, the first holding storage number designated by the first holding count designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second holding storage count designated by the second holding count storage command, and , Pre-judgment information instructed by the pre-judgment command (may be notified of the type of big hit such as loss, small hit, big hit, etc., probability variation big hit or normal big hit), and the currently set value According to each, the effect pattern in which how the mode of the hold display changes is set is determined. Then, when the lottery result is specified as the jackpot as the pre-determination information and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as a high set value (for example, 5 or 6), a mode with a high expectation as a final hold display mode (For example, red or rainbow color) is determined with a high probability, the lottery result is specified as the preliminary determination information, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as a low set value (for example, 1 or 2). As a final hold display mode, a mode with the lowest expectation (for example, blue) may be determined with a high probability. Further, as the preliminary determination information, the lottery result is specified as a big hit (may be a specific big hit such as the probability variation big hit), and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a predetermined set value or more (for example, 3 or more). Only when specified, it may be possible to determine a specific mode (for example, rainbow color) as the mode of the final hold display. In such a case, when the particular mode is displayed as the final hold display mode, not only is it determined that the lottery result is a big hit and the variable display of the decorative design is stopped at the big hit design, the pachinko machine 1 Since it is determined that the set value of is equal to or larger than the predetermined set value, it is possible to particularly increase the motivation to continue the game even after the jackpot game is over.

Next, a concrete example of the pending notice effect and the set value suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a specific production example of the suspension notice production and the set value suspension suggestion production.

First, as shown in FIG. 275(A), the lottery result for which the start of suggestion is suspended is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first reserve memory display 1700 or the second reserve memory display 1701, and the suggestion is being executed. It is possible to display the pending storage corresponding to the lottery result described above on the effect display device 1600 as the running pending storage display 1702. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002, the number of first reserved memories increases, and one first reserved memory display 1700 is additionally displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002, if it is decided to execute either the hold notice effect or the set value hold suggestion effect, the effect pattern of the decided effect (hold notice pattern) Alternatively, it is possible to display the mode of the additionally displayed first hold storage display 1700 in any one of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors based on one of the set value hold suggestive patterns).

Then, each time the suggestion of the lottery result (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) is performed (every time the hold is exhausted), the first hold storage display 1700 displayed on the effect display device 1600, While the second hold storage display 1701 moves, it is possible to change the display mode thereof based on the effect pattern (either the hold notice pattern or the set value hold suggestive pattern) of the effect that has already been determined. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 275(B), while the suggestion of the lottery result (variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol)) is being executed, the execution pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is displayed in a rainbow color. At this time, when the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit design is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a stop design of the decorative design (FIG. 275(C)). On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is loss, the lost symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (FIG. 275(D)).

As described above in detail, as the notice of the hold notice, when the lottery result is specified as the advance determination information and the jackpot is a big hit, the notice of the hold notice becomes a mode in which the jackpot is highly expected as the final hold display mode (for example, red or rainbow color). The pattern is determined with a high probability, and when the lottery result is specified as the preliminary determination information, the pending notice pattern with a low jackpot expectation (for example, blue) is finally determined with a high probability as the final pending display mode. ing. That is, when the pending notice effect is executed, when the running pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a rainbow color, the lottery result is highly likely to be a big hit. From this, when the execution pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped by the jackpot symbol, the pending notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are displayed. Among them, it is possible to understand that there is a high possibility that the pending notice effect, which suggests that the jackpot expectation degree is high, is being executed.

On the other hand, as the set value holding suggestive effect, regardless of whether the lottery result is specified as a big hit or a loss as the preliminary determination information, when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6, the final holding is performed. When the set value hold suggestive pattern that is a mode of high expectation for a high set value (for example, red or rainbow color) is determined with a high probability as a display mode, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the final pattern is determined. The set value suggestion pattern, in which the degree of expectation for the high set value is medium (for example, green), is determined with a high probability as the mode of the temporary hold display, and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2. Occasionally, the set value hold suggestive pattern that has the lowest expectation for the high set value (for example, blue) as the final hold display mode is determined with high probability. That is, at the time of execution of the set value holding suggestion effect, when the execution pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a rainbow color, it is highly possible that the set value is high. It is not involved in the possibility that the result is a jackpot. From this, when the execution pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative design is stopped by the lost design, the pending notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are displayed. Among them, it can be understood that there is a high possibility that the set value hold suggesting effect that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value is being executed.

Further, in this example, the variation pattern is determined based on the lottery result, and as the effects based on the variation pattern, there are effects that do not form a reach (normal fluctuation) and normal reach effects that have low expectations after the reach is formed. Examples include an effect to be executed, a normal reach effect having a low expectation after a reach is formed, and a super reach effect having a high expectation to be executed, and the like. With regard to these effects, a big hit expectation degree is set to be higher in the order of an effect that does not form a reach, an effect that executes a normal reach effect, and an effect that executes a super reach effect. That is, when the pending notice effect is displayed, when the running pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a rainbow color, the lottery result is highly likely to be a big hit, and the reach with a high chance of a big hit is high. There is a high possibility that performance will be performed. From this, when the execution pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the reach effect with high jackpot expectation is executed, among the pending notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect. , It is possible to understand that there is a high possibility that the pending notice effect, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is high, was being executed.

On the other hand, when the set value hold suggesting effect is executed, when the running hold storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a rainbow color, it is highly possible that the set value is high. It is not involved in the possibility that the result is a big hit, and is not involved in the possibility of executing reach production with a high expectation for a big hit. From this, when the running hold storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the reach effect with a high expectation for a big hit is not executed, the hold notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are displayed. Of these, it can be understood that there is a high possibility that the set value holding suggestive effect that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value is being executed.

In the pending notice production, a rainbow color may be allowed to appear as a final pending display mode only when the lottery result is a big hit. In such a case, when the execution pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped by the missing symbol, the pending notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are displayed. Of these, it is determined that the set value hold suggesting effect that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is a high set value has been executed. Further, in the set value holding suggestion effect, the rainbow color may be allowed to appear as the final hold display mode only when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6. In such a case, when the execution pending storage display 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in rainbow color and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped by the missing symbol, the pending notice effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are displayed. Although it is not possible to know which of the above is being executed, if it is the execution of the set value holding suggestion effect, it is confirmed that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6, so that the player's expectation is increased. You can

In addition, in this example, both the hold announcement effect and the set value suggestion effect allow the mode of the hold display to change, but the display is not limited to the hold display, and the display other than the hold display is possible. May be targeted. Even in such a case, when the common mode appears by enabling the common mode to appear in the effect that suggests the jackpot expectation and the effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1. Moreover, it becomes impossible to determine whether the jackpot expectation degree is suggested or the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is suggested. In addition, the effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree and the effect that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 are not limited to those performed using the display of the effect display device 1600, and the sound from the speaker or the lamp light emission is used. It may be executed.

In addition, when the pending notice effect or the set value suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree or the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is set according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. The value may be suggested. In this case, after displaying the operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 301 or the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the effect display device 1600. The jackpot expectation degree or the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 301 or the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300. Also, the operation instruction image may be made common when maintaining the jackpot expectation degree or the suggested setting value and when further increasing the jackpot expectation degree or the suggesting setting value. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not the jackpot expectation or the suggested setting value is increased by the effect (the effect that displays the operation instruction image) that is a precursor of the execution of the hold suggestion effect, and the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 rotates. It is possible to cause the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to be actively operated.

Further, the presence/absence of the hold announcement effect or the presence/absence of the set value hold suggestion effect may be selectable during the demonstration (demonstration effect which is performed in the player waiting state). As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suits the player's taste, and execute a hold notice effect and a set value hold suggestion effect even for a player who does not want to be informed of the jackpot expectation or the set value of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the big hit and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from being suggested.

In addition, a description of the mode suggested by the hold announcement effect and the set value suggestion effect (the mode that suggests the jackpot expectation degree and the mode that suggests the set value of the pachinko machine 1 are common modes, etc.) You may make it perform at the time of demonstration (demo production performed in the waiting state of the player) and suggestion of the lottery result (during the variation display of the decorative pattern). As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the big hit from being excessively improved by being erroneously recognized as the big hit expectation when the set value holding suggestive effect is executed.

In addition, during execution of the time saving state or the probability variation state, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, the hold advance notice effect based on the advance determination information instructed by the advance determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is executed. Instead, it may be possible to execute only the pending notice effect based on the advance determination information instructed by the advance determination command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004. .. Further, during execution of the time saving state or the probability variation state, only the set value suggestion suggestion effect is associated with the first hold memory 1700 displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. May be executed. As a result, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 during the time saving state or the probability changing state, it is possible to have an expectation for the set value holding suggestive effect.

[About special monitor information]
Next, the special monitor 1310h will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of ball entrances into which game balls B can enter are provided in a game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5. Among the plurality of ball entrances, as the prize holes to which the prize balls are to be paid out by entering the game balls, a plurality of game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a are always open so that the game balls B can be received. The general winning opening 2001 and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the game area 5a, and the game ball B is the gate portion. By the second starting port 2004 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing through 2003, and the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is selected by lottery, the game ball B to the first big winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B And a second special winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by the acceptance of.

Further, of the plurality of ball entrances, the game ball B that has not entered the prize hole is collected as an out port at the lower end of the game area 5a, and the game ball B is discharged from the game area 5a. It is provided with an out port 2010, and a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 which are provided midway in the vertical direction within the game area 5a and discharge the game ball B from within the game area 5a.

In addition, among the game balls B shot in the game area 5a, a game entered in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. The ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening 2010, the first sub-out. The game ball B collected by the port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 is detected by the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and these detection signals are passed through the panel relay board 1710. Is input to the main control MPU.

The main control MPU is the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the ball entrance (winning port, out port) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, that is, within the game area 5a. The number of game balls B discharged from the game ball B is counted. Specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the winning opening, which is the object for paying out the winning ball by the winning ball, and the out of collecting the gaming ball B that has not entered the winning hole. The number of game balls B detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the mouth is counted as the number of entered balls.

In addition, the main control MPU counts the number of balls (the number of payouts) of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 by the ball entering the winning opening. Specifically, a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, 3 for entering the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004) corresponding to the winning opening for which the prize balls are paid out by entering the ball. The number of balls of the predetermined number of game balls B is detected when the detection sensor corresponding to the winning opening for which the prize balls are to be paid out is detected. , As the number of payouts.

Then, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the special monitor 1310h. The formula for calculating the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is (the number of paid-out balls/the number of paid-in balls)×100. For example, if the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is too large, it is possible that only the winning-payment opening, which is the target for paying out the prize-winning balls, comes into the game. Therefore, by monitoring the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h, it is possible to know whether or not the player has entered the winning opening due to an illegal act.

In this example, among a plurality of game states, only when the probability is a non-time saving state, the number of game balls B entered into the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) and the number of entrances (the number of entrances), The number of balls (the number of payouts) of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is counted and reflected in the display on the special monitor 1310h. In the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) and the high-probability time-saving state (probability change state), since the player frequently enters the second starting opening 2004, the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 also increases, The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls tends to increase. In other words, whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls increases depends on the period of the low-probability time saving state (time saving state) or the high probability time saving state (probability change state). By excluding the period, if there is no misconduct, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered can be kept within a certain range.

Further, in this example, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, but the number of balls of the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize or exit) (the number of entered balls). ) And the number of balls of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts) may be respectively displayed.

Further, regarding the special monitor 1310h, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the special monitor 1310h. I have to. Further, regarding the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls) stored in the specific area of the RAM, the information is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on. However, with regard to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls, a new entry is made each time the number of balls (number of entered balls) of the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize or out) reaches 60,000. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of old balls entered is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In such a specification of the special monitor 1310h, for example, from the time of newly calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls, at least the number of balls of the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize or exit) ( The display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of incoming balls may be restricted until the number of incoming balls reaches 1000 balls. This is because immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of new balls, the situation of entering the prize hole, which is the target for paying out the prize balls, continues, and The ratio of the number of payouts becomes high, the situation where the prize is not paid into the prize hole due to the ball is continued, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts is lower than the standard value, etc. Bias is likely to occur. For this reason, immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, it is determined that the information obtained from the special monitor information command is unreliable, and a display regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is made. Should not be executed.

In this example, the gaming balls B collected by the out-port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 are respectively output port sensor 3053, first sub-out port sensor 2403, and second sub-out port sensor 3054. Although detected, the detection sensors corresponding to the respective outlets may be provided on the main body frame 4 side instead of being provided on the game board 5 side. Such a modified example will be described below.

First, as a first modified example, a game ball B that has entered a ball entrance (prize hole, out hole) provided on the game board 5 has a ball discharge port 629 provided on the main body frame 4. Although it is discharged to the outside of the back of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall), a frame-side outlet sensor that can detect the game ball B passing through the ball discharge port 629 is provided. To be When the game ball B that has passed through the ball outlet 629 is detected, the detection signal of the frame side outlet sensor is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters the ball entrance (winning port, out port) provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. At this time, the frame side outlet sensor detects the game ball B, and the number of balls of the game ball B detected by the frame side outlet sensor is counted as the number of entered balls.

In addition, in the above, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is also the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper tank ball passage unit 600, and the lower ball removal of the lower tank ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball drop passage 610c to the ball drop guiding part 627 of the substrate unit 620 through the passage 610c, the discharge ball receiving part 628 and the ball discharge port 629 are passed to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1. Not only the game ball B that is discharged to the (island equipment side of the game hall) and is hit in the game area 5a, but also the game ball B that is discharged downwards from the ball-removing passage 580b of the payout device 580 is on the frame side. The outlet sensor can be detected. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of entered balls of the game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, regarding the number of game balls B that are discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, It is strongly desired to eliminate (invalidate) and perform various calculations. In response to this, in the configuration in which the frame-side outlet sensor also detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball-removing passage 580b of the payout device 580, it is different from the frame-side outlet sensor on the upstream side. The ball removal detection sensor is provided, and the ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. Further, the game ball detected by the ball removal detection sensor. It is desirable that the number of B is subtracted from the number of entered balls. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor and is once subtracted from the number of balls entered, and then detected by the frame side outlet sensor. It will be added to the number of entered balls, and the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially prevented from being reflected in the number of entered balls. In addition, in such a form, when the gaming ball B is discharged downward from the ball-out passage 580b of the payout device 580 while the gaming machine 1 is not energized (when the ball-out action of the payout device 580 is performed). There is no problem because neither the ball drop detection sensor nor the frame side outlet sensor can perform detection itself, but with the gaming machine 1 energized, the game is downward from the ball drop passage 580b of the dispensing device 580. When the ball B is discharged (when the payout device 580 is removed), the game ball B is discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 while the gaming machine 1 is not energized. Although the payout device 580 is removed from the ball, the problem is solved when the gaming machine 1 is energized during the removal of the ball. Further, the game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a and the game ball B that has been discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 do not merge, but pass through separate passages and outside the rear of the pachinko machine 1. It may be configured such that it is discharged to (the island facility side of the game hall) and only the game ball B hit in the game area 5a can be detected by the frame side outlet sensor. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to have a configuration in which the number of game balls detected by the above-mentioned ball removal detection sensor is subtracted from the number of entered balls.

Next, as a second modified example, the game ball B that has entered the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize ball by entering the ball, and the out opening that collects the game ball B that has not entered the winning opening, are entered. The game ball B that has been sphered is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 outside (the island facility side of the game hall) through separate passages without merging, and the prize balls to be paid out by entering a prize. A first frame-side outlet sensor capable of detecting the game ball B passing through the first passage after the game ball B entering the mouth merges, and a game ball not entering the winning opening A second frame side outlet sensor capable of detecting the game ball B passing through the second passage after the game balls B that have entered the outlet for collecting B are joined is provided. To be When the first frame side outlet sensor detects the game ball B passing through the first passage, the second frame side outlet sensor detects the game ball B passing through the second passage. At each time, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B has entered the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize ball by entering the ball, when the merged game ball B passes through the first passage, the first The frame side outlet sensor detects the game ball B and collects the game ball B that has not entered the winning opening. After the game ball B enters the out opening, the merged game ball B is the second. When passing the passage of, the second frame side outlet sensor detects the game ball B, the number of balls of the game ball B detected by the first frame side outlet sensor, and the second frame. The game ball B detected by the side outlet sensor is counted as the number of entered balls.

[Regarding production control based on information from a special monitor]
In this example, not only the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, but the game situation of the pachinko machine 1 is determined using the information obtained from the special monitor 1310h and reflected in the effect contents. I am making it. The effect control regarding the information obtained from such a special monitor 1310h will be described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing an example of the special monitor-related effect process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

As shown in FIG. 270, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not a special monitor information command has been received from the main control board 1310 side (step S2701). The special monitor information command is a command that is equivalent to the information output to the special monitor 1310h and indicates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls. In addition, the special monitor information command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board every time the number of game balls B (the number of entered balls) of the game balls B entered into the entrance (prize entrance, out exit) reaches 100 balls. It is being sent to 1510.

When it is determined in the processing of step S2701 that the special monitor information command has been received from the main control board 1310 side, it is determined whether or not the special monitor information command is the tenth or more reception after the power was turned on. (Step S2702). In other words, the special monitor information command is transmitted every time the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the ball inlet (prize or outlet) reaches 100, so after the power is turned on, the game is played. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls B (the number of entered balls) of the game balls B that have entered at least the entrance (prize entrance, out exit) after the start has reached 1000 balls. Then, if it is determined that the special monitor information command is the tenth reception after the power is turned on, the processing of steps S2703 to S2708 is performed.

In the process of step S2703, as information obtained from the special monitor information command, it is determined whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is equal to or more than the first abnormal value or less than the second abnormal value. ..

In the process of step S2703, when it is determined that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is not greater than or equal to the first abnormal value and not less than the second abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is determined. , It is determined whether or not the first specified value or more (step S2704). Then, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is equal to or larger than the first specified value, a special sound A that indicates that the number of paid-out balls for the number of paid-in balls is large is output as a voice output from the speaker ( Step S2705). As the special sound A, a voice "Good tune" is output.

In the process of step S2704, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of entered balls is less than the first specified value, it is determined whether the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the entered number of balls is less than or equal to the second specified value. It is determined (step S2706). When the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is equal to or less than the second specified value, a special sound B indicating that the number of paid-out balls for the number of paid-in balls is small is output as a voice output from the speaker ( Step S2707). As the special sound B, a sound "Good condition" is output. Further, in the process of step S2707, execution determination (execution lottery) as to which of the setting suggestive sounds A to C indicating the currently set setting value is output is made, and the execution is performed as a voice output from the speaker. Any of the setting suggestive sounds A to C is output according to the determination result.

Here, the first stipulated value and the second stipulated value are assumed by the game designer as to how much the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is when the game is played normally. With the reference value as a reference, the first specified value is set so as to increase the ratio above the reference value, and the second specified value is set so as to decrease the ratio below the reference value (first Prescribed value>reference value>second prescribed value). That is, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is equal to or more than the first specified value, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is higher than the reference value, and thus the payout amount is higher than the player designer's assumption. Since the number is large, it is possible to understand that it is easy to enter the winning opening, which is the object for paying out the prize balls. On the other hand, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is less than or equal to the second specified value, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is lower than the reference value, and thus the payout amount is higher than the player designer's assumption. Since the number is small, it can be understood that it is difficult to enter the winning opening, which is a target for paying out the prize balls.

Further, the first abnormal value is set so that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is much larger than the reference value or the first prescribed value (first abnormal value>> First prescribed value>reference value). In other words, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is equal to or greater than the first abnormal value, the ratio of the paid-out number to the number of paid-in balls is much higher than the reference value or the first prescribed value. The number is unexpectedly too large, and it is suspected that the player is fraudulently entering the prize hole, which is the target for paying out the prize ball. On the other hand, with respect to the second abnormal value, a value is set so that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is much smaller than the reference value or the second prescribed value (reference value>second prescribed value). Value>>second outlier). That is, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is less than or equal to the second abnormal value, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is extremely lower than the reference value or the second prescribed value. The number is unexpectedly too small, and the nails near the winning openings for which the prize balls are paid out are bent, and the nails are crafted so as not to enter the winning openings. Is suspected.

Further, in the execution determination (execution lottery) as to which of the setting suggestive sounds A to C is to be output, when the special monitor information command is received, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random number value X and sets a low set value. Any of the suggesting setting suggesting sound A, the setting suggesting sound B suggesting a high setting value, and the setting suggesting sound C suggesting the setting value 6 is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random number value X. Here, when the currently set setting values are the setting values 1 to 3, the probability that the setting suggestive sound A suggesting a low setting value is higher than that of the setting suggestive sound B (setting suggestive sound A: setting suggestive sound A The effect determination according to the value of the random number value X is performed with reference to the low setting effect allocation table determined by B=7:3). When the setting value is 4 to 5, the setting suggestive sound B suggesting a high setting value is more likely than the setting suggesting sound A (setting suggestive sound A: setting suggestive sound B=3:7). An effect is determined according to the value of the random number value X with reference to the determined high setting effect distribution table 1. Further, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggesting sounds A to C including the setting suggesting sound C indicating the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are set to have a predetermined probability (setting). Suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B: setting suggestion sound C=1:5:4 ratio) is used to refer to the high setting effect distribution table 2 to determine the effect according to the value of the random number X. .. That is, since the setting suggestive sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting is not determined by one output. When the suggestive sound C is output, it is determined that the currently set value is set value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestive sound is output, it is possible to have expectations according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggesting sound.

As the setting suggestive sound A suggesting a low set value, sound data in which a sound “BEE” is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestive sound B suggesting a high set value, “BEEBY” is output from the speaker. The sound data in which the voice is output is used, and the sound data in which the voice “BeeBee” is output from the speaker is used as the setting suggestive sound C indicating the setting value 6. In this way, by outputting the setting suggestion sound differently for each suggestion of the set value, it is possible to grasp what kind of set value the suggestion is.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to output a special sound as an effect according to the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls, which is information obtained from the special monitor information command. Specifically, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is equal to or more than the first specified value, by outputting a special sound A indicating that the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is large, It is possible to understand that it is easy to enter the winning opening, which is the target for paying out the prize balls. On the other hand, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is equal to or less than the second prescribed value, a special sound B indicating that the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is small is output, so that the winning ball It is possible to understand that it was difficult to enter the winning opening, which is the target of payout. With this, when the special sound is output, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game efficiency is good.

In addition, in this example, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of paid-in balls is in the range of the first specified value to the second specified value, the effect is executed according to the ratio of the number of paid-outs to the number of paid-in balls. Absent. However, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is in the range of the first specified value to the second specified value, for example, as the voice output from the speaker, the number of paid-out balls to the entered number of balls is around the reference value. The special sound C indicating that there is may be output. As the special sound C, for example, a sound “OK, OK” is output. Thus, when the special sound C is output, it can be understood that the game efficiency is close to the reference value assumed by the game designer.

When the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is less than or equal to the second prescribed value, in addition to outputting a special sound B indicating that the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is small, the current setting is made. Any of the setting suggestion sounds A to C indicating the set value that is present is output. In this way, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of wins is less than or equal to the second prescribed value, it is difficult to enter the winning opening, which is the target of paying out prize balls, and the gaming efficiency is improved. Although it is a bad situation, when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to know the information regarding the currently set setting value, which causes the desire to continue the game even in such a situation where the game efficiency is poor. Can be made In addition, when it is suggested that the currently set value is a high set value, the situation is likely to be a hit, so that it is possible to particularly motivate the player to continue the game.

Further, in this example, the effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts, which is the information obtained from the special monitor information command, is the number of balls of the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize or exit). It is supposed to be executed every time the (number of entered balls) reaches 100 balls. As a result, as long as the game is continued, it is possible to regularly execute an effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, and to periodically check whether the game efficiency is good. You can

In this example, after the game is started after the power is turned on, at least until the number of game balls B (the number of game balls) of the game balls B entered in the game entrance (winning hole, out game) reaches 1000 balls. In the meantime, execution of the effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, which is information obtained from the special monitor information command, is restricted. Immediately after the game is started after the power is turned on, the situation of entering the winning opening, which is the target of paying out prize balls, continues, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of paid balls is higher than the standard value. Bias is likely to occur, for example, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts becomes lower than the standard value because the situation becomes higher or the prize is not paid into the payout opening which is the target of payout. ing. For this reason, immediately after the game is started after the power is turned on, it is determined that the information obtained from the special monitor information command is unreliable, and the effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is not executed. I have decided.

In the process of step S2703, when it is determined that the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is equal to or more than the first abnormal value or less than the second abnormal value, the number of entered balls is output as a voice from the speaker. An abnormality notification sound indicating that the number of payouts for the amount of money largely deviates from the reference value is output (step S2708). As the abnormality notification sound, a sound "It sounds strange" is output.

As described above, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is equal to or greater than the first abnormal value, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is much higher than the standard value or the first prescribed value. , The number of payouts has become too large, and it is suspected that the payout opening, which is the target for paying out the prize balls, is fraudulently entered. On the other hand, when the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is less than or equal to the second abnormal value, the ratio of the paid-out amount to the number of paid-in balls is much lower than the reference value or the second prescribed value. The number is unexpectedly too small, and the nails near the winning openings for which the prize balls are paid out are bent, and the nails are crafted so as not to enter the winning openings. Is suspected. In such a case, by outputting an abnormality notification sound, it is possible to notify that something is wrong with respect to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, and it is possible to enhance the deterrence against fraud. it can.

Regarding the game sound output from the speaker, the volume can be changed by operating the effect operation unit 301. That is, after changing the volume of the game sound, the effect sound is output at the changed volume. However, the volume of the special sound is output at the changed volume, whereas the volume of the abnormality notification sound is output at the maximum volume regardless of whether the volume is changed. .. For example, if the volume of the abnormality notification sound is also reduced when the volume is changed to a low volume, the abnormality notification sound may not be noticed even if the abnormality notification sound is output. By outputting the abnormality notification sound at, it is possible to reliably notify that some abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to enhance the deterrence against fraud.

In this example, a special monitor information command is transmitted every time the number of game balls B (number of balls entered) in the ball entrance (prize or out) reaches 100, and the special monitor is sent. At the timing when the information command is transmitted, it is possible to execute the effect (output of special sound) according to the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls. You may make it possible to perform the production according to the ratio of the number of payouts. For example, the special monitor information command may be transmitted at any time each time the game ball B enters the entrance (prize entrance, exit entrance). Then, based on the special monitor information command, it is determined that the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is equal to or more than the first specified value, or the ratio of the paid-out number to the number of paid-in balls is less than or equal to the second specified value. It is also possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of entered balls. Thereby, the information obtained from the special monitor information command can be known in real time.

Further, for example, at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed as the contact time with the handle 182, it may be possible to perform an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. As a result, it is possible to generate motivation to continue the operation of the handle 182. Further, for example, during execution of a specific reach effect such as a reach effect with high expectation, the timing of operating the one-shot button 116 capable of stopping the launch of the game ball B or the operation of the one-shot button 116 is released. At a timing, it may be possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. Of these, when it is possible to execute an effect (output of a special sound) according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls received at the timing when the operation of the one-shot button 116 is released, the one-shot button 116 is operated. Thus, even in the situation where the launch of the game ball B is stopped, it is possible to release the operation of the single shot button 116 and motivate the player to continue launching the game ball B.

Further, regarding the special monitor 1310h, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the special monitor 1310h. I have to. Further, regarding the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls) stored in the specific area of the RAM, the information is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on. However, with regard to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls, a new entry is made each time the number of balls (number of entered balls) of the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize or out) reaches 60,000. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of old balls entered is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In such a specification of the special monitor 1310h, for example, from the time of newly calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls, at least the number of balls of the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize or exit) ( Until the number of entered balls reaches 1000, the execution of the effect may be restricted according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of entered balls. This is because immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of new balls, the situation of entering the prize hole, which is the target for paying out the prize balls, continues, and The ratio of the number of payouts becomes high, the situation where the prize is not paid into the prize hole due to the ball is continued, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts is lower than the standard value, etc. Bias is likely to occur. Therefore, immediately after newly calculating the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls, it is determined that the information obtained from the special monitor information command is unreliable, and according to the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls. It is only necessary not to execute the performance.

In this example, it is possible to output a special sound from the speaker as an effect according to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls received, which is the information obtained from the special monitor information command. May be performed using any of voice, display, and light emission from a lamp, or two or more of them may be performed.

[Measurement prohibition status of special monitor]
As described above, during the game, the number of balls of the game ball B (the number of balls entered) into the ball entrances (prize holes, out openings) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, That is, the number of game balls B discharged from within the game area 5a and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 when the player enters the winning opening (the number of payouts) are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is calculated from the information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the main control board 1310 can generate a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) that prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. A special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j. Since this special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1, it can be operated after opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and can be operated only by the hall manager. It is possible to

The special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j can be operated either upward or downward from the reference position. The signal from the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Normally, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is set as a reference position, and the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are counted. On the other hand, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward or downward, the measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is prohibited (stopped) so as not to measure the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. Has been generated. However, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B cannot be fired from the ball launching device 540, whereas the special monitor measurement is performed. When the prohibit switch 1310j is operated downward, when the handle 182 is operated, a state in which the game ball B is shot from the ball launching device 540 is generated.

More specifically, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, the main control MPU receives the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 as a logic of the firing permission signal and the firing permission logic. Is set to the inverted firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic). That is, even when the handle 182 is contacted, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. For this reason, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, the measurement prohibition state is generated. However, during the execution of the measurement prohibition state, when the handle 182 is touched, Even if the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by rotating 182, the firing controller 633b does not receive the firing permission signal, so the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B You can't type. Note that, while the measurement prohibited state is being executed, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, whereas the ejection control board 633 is fired after the measurement prohibited state ends. Although it is possible to output the firing permission signal to the control unit 633b, when the handle 182 is continuously in contact with the handle 182 before and after the measurement prohibited state is ended, the measurement prohibited state is ended. Even after that, the firing permission signal is not output. In such a case, after the end of the measurement prohibited state, by releasing the hand once from the handle 182 and making contact again, the firing permission signal can be output, and the handle 182 is rotated to play the game ball B. It can be driven into the area 5a.

On the other hand, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the main control MPU sets the firing permission logic as the firing permission signal logic when the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is input. It is possible. That is, at the time of contact with the handle 182, the firing permission signal is output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. For this reason, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the downward direction, the measurement prohibition state is generated, but during the execution of the measurement prohibition state, the firing control unit 633b receives the firing permission signal. Since it is during the period, when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, the drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182, and the game ball You can hit B.

(About extension of measurement prohibited state)
First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction will be described with reference to FIG. 286. FIG. 286 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction.

As shown in FIG. 286, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at the timing t1, the main control MPU prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts (measurement prohibited state). Transition to the non-measurement state. Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, regardless of whether or not the game ball B has entered the entrance (prize, out), the game entered into the entrance (prize, out) Counting the number of spheres B (number of spheres) is prohibited, and information about the number of spheres B before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of balls (the number of payouts) of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is prohibited, and information regarding the number of payouts before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, the information about the number of balls entered and the number of paid-outs does not change, so that the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of balls received is also maintained before the transition to the measurement prohibited state.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position at the timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately end the measurement prohibition state, and a predetermined state continuation period (for example, from the timing t2). At a timing t3 when (5 seconds) has elapsed, the measurement prohibited state is ended, and counting of the number of entered balls and the number of paid-outs is started. That is, even after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position at the timing t2, the measurement prohibition state is continued for a predetermined state continuation period. In addition, after the count prohibition state ends, a new number of balls entered will be added to the information regarding the number of balls kept before the transition to the measurement prohibited state. The new payout number is to be added to the information about the payout number that has been maintained before the transition.

After returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the upper direction to the reference position at the timing t2, the handle 182 is operated for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the measurement prohibition state is continued. Then, after the game ball B is launched, the game ball 4 enters the ball entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) on the game area 4a and is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the entrance entrance (prize entrance, out entrance). It is set to be at least longer than the ball flow-down time (for example, 4.5 seconds). For example, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward at the timing t2, and the game ball B used during the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 remains in the game area 4a while the measurement prohibition state is being executed. Therefore, even if the game ball B flows down the game area 4a after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position at the timing t2, the game ball B will enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out Regarding the timing detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the mouth, the information (the number of incoming balls) displayed on the special monitor 1310h is not counted as the number of incoming balls or the number of payouts while the measurement prohibited state continues. The ratio of the number of payouts to) can be reliably excluded.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) that prohibits (stops) so as not to measure the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is generated. ing. For example, if any abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager will inspect the pachinko machine 1 in order to eliminate the abnormality. If it counts, the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize entrance, out exit) during such inspection becomes information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entrances) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It is reflected, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h does not show the information during the game. In this regard, during inspection of the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j in the upward direction to generate a measurement prohibition state in which the measurement of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is prohibited. The game ball B entered into the entrance (prize or exit) during such inspection is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entrances). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be the information during the game.

Further, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) for prohibiting (stopping) so as not to measure the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is generated. The measurement prohibition state is continued until the predetermined state duration period elapses after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position. After the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 is completed and the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position, the pachinko machine 1 may have an abnormality again. In this respect, after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the upper direction to the reference position until the predetermined state continuation period elapses, by continuing the measurement prohibition state, the pachinko machine 1 is again provided with the measurement prohibition state. Even if an abnormality occurs, the game ball B entered in the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) at the time of such an abnormality is displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entrances). Will not be reflected in. Thereby, regarding the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h, the information at the time of the occurrence of the abnormality can be excluded, and the accuracy as the information during the game can be maintained.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period of timings t1 to t3, even if the game ball B enters the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance), it is treated as invalid, and the measurement is prohibited at timing t3. After the state is finished, the game ball B entered in such an entrance is treated as an effective one. Specifically, in a measurement prohibited state that is a period between timings t1 and t3, “a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensors is cut off so as not to perform detection itself by the detection sensors corresponding to each entrance” Or "a mode in which detection by the detection sensor is performed, but no detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310", or "detection by the detection sensor and detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310" However, based on the detection signal, a mode in which it is not reflected in the count of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts”, etc. Further, after the count prohibition state ends at the timing t3, “the detection sensor detects, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is determined based on the detection signal. It is a mode to be reflected in the counting”. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the entrance (prize or exit) in the measurement prohibited state, counting as the number of entered balls or the number of payouts is prohibited and displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

In addition to the above, the gaming ball B is prevented from being paid out from the payout device 580 in the measurement prohibited state during the period of the timings t1 to t3, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at the timing t3, the gaming ball B is paid from the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period between timings t1 and t3, the state in which the variable display of the special symbol cannot be performed (unchangeable state) is set, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t3, the variation of the special symbol The display is changed to a displayable state (variable state). As a result, in the measurement prohibited state, even if the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the variation display of the special symbol is not displayed and the payout device 580 The game ball B is not paid out, and it is possible to prevent a profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not launched from the ball launching device 540, and the handle is held after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t3. When operating 182, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540. As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated in the measurement prohibited state, the game ball B is not fired in the first place, and thus the game ball B cannot be fired to enter the ball entrance (prize or exit). It is possible to prevent a profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. In the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and it is continued even after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t3. .. As a result, in the measurement prohibited state, when attempting to illegally enter the game ball B into the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) by using a magnet or applying vibration, an illegal magnetism or an illegal Vibration can be detected, and fraudulent activity can be prevented. However, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid in the measurement prohibited state during the period from the timing t1 to t3. In such a case, in the measurement prohibited state, the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may be detected even if the hall manager unintentionally approaches or vibrates during inspection during inspection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above description, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid in the measurement prohibited state during the period from timing t1 to t3, and a magnet is used or vibration is applied to the ball entrance (the winning opening). , Out port), illegal magnetism or illegal vibration is detected when attempting to illegally enter the game ball B into the ball. Here, regarding the information regarding the game, although the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) through the external terminal board 558, the outer end signal for notifying the measurement prohibited state and the outer end signal for notifying the magnetic detection and the vibration detection. The end signal is output from the same terminal. Then, the outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibited state is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys the magnetic detection and the vibration detection. For this reason, except for the measurement prohibited state, when an illegal magnetism or an illegal vibration is detected, the outer end signal that conveys the magnetic detection or the vibration detection is output, while the illegal measurement is performed while the measurement prohibited state is being executed. Even if it detects magnetism or unauthorized vibration, it does not output an outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection. Further, except for the measurement prohibited state, the abnormality notification that conveys the magnetic detection or the vibration detection is performed using the effect display device 1600 or the like. The special display corresponding to is preferentially performed, and the abnormality notification (display) that conveys the magnetic detection and the vibration detection is not performed.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 as information about the number of paid-in balls and the number of paid-out balls. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. doing. Display of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 and 287. FIG. 287 is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction.

First, in a normal time (a state where the measurement is not prohibited), it is possible to count the number of paid-in balls and the number of paid-out balls, and calculate the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls. For example, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is 20.0%, the special monitor 1310h displays a numerical value “A-20.0”, and the effect display device 1600 displays “a payout rate of 20. The message "0%" is displayed (FIG. 287(A)). Thereby, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls can be recognized by both the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600. In the normal operation, by transmitting an information command that conveys the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 displays the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls. It is possible to display.

More specifically, with regard to the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls, each time the number of balls (the number of entered balls) of the game ball B entering the entrance (prize or exit) reaches 60,000, The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is newly calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the old number of incoming balls is stored as a history up to two times. Then, on the special monitor 1310h, "the ratio of the number of payouts to the current number of balls entered" → "the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered which is the previous history" → "the number of balls entered before the second history" The ratio of the number of payouts to the payout order" is changed at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds). For example, when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, which is the history of one time before and the history of the second time before, is 20.0%, “A-20.0” is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. The display is switched at regular time intervals (for example, 3 seconds) in the order of "B-20.0" and "C-20.0". While the measurement prohibited state is being executed, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as will be described later, but after the measurement prohibited state ends, the special display is terminated and Starting from the ratio of the number of payouts to the current number of balls entered”.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. A period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibiting switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position, and a period from timing t2 to t3 after returning the special monitor measurement prohibiting switch 1310j from the upward direction to the reference position. Then, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is switched from the special display 1 to the special display 2.

Specifically, in the measurement prohibition state, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction during the period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upward direction to the reference position. As the special display 1 corresponding to the current state, the special monitor 1310h displays the symbol "---" and the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Measurement prohibited state is being set". (FIG. 287(B)). As a result, it is possible to recognize that the measurement prohibited state is being set by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, by transmitting a start command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the start of the measurement prohibition state, in the effect display device 1600, It is possible to start displaying the display 1.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position during a period of timing t2 to t3 after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the upper direction to the reference position. As the special display 2 corresponding to the state after the start, the special monitor 1310h displays the symbol “++++++”, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message “Waiting for end of measurement prohibited state”. (FIG. 287(C)). Further, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message “Waiting for end of measurement prohibited state”. As a result, it is possible to recognize by the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 that the measurement-prohibited state is in the standby state. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position, a peripheral control command from the main control board 1310 is issued to notify that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position. By transmitting to the board 1510, the special display 2 can be started to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Also, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position, and when a predetermined state continuation period elapses, an end command for notifying the end of the measurement prohibition state is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to return to the normal display (display of the ratio of the number of payouts with respect to the number of entered balls) in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the data to the player.

As described above, in the measurement prohibited state, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. As a result, it is possible to recognize whether the measurement prohibited state is being set by using the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is switched from the special display 1 to the special display 2 before and after the special monitor measurement prohibiting switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position. Thereby, it is possible to recognize whether the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 is in the state after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the upper direction to the reference position, and to the reference position. It is possible to prevent forgetting to return.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, when the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is switched from the special display 1 to the special display 2 before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position, On the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message “waiting for the end of the measurement prohibited state”. As a result, the special display 2 becomes more conspicuous than the special display 1, and it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is in the state after returning from the upper direction to the reference position. In this example, while the measurement prohibited state is being executed, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed, but any notification that corresponds to the measurement prohibited state may be performed. In addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j, this may be executed using any of the sound output from the speaker, the light emission from the lamp, etc., or may be executed using two or more thereof.

In addition, regarding the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the production operation unit 301, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, etc., each has an initial position and an operating position. However, the effect member is restricted from operating during the execution of the measurement prohibited state. As a result, during the execution of the measurement prohibited state, the effect member does not operate and it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

Immediately after the start of the timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, that is, immediately after the start of the measurement prohibition state, a special display corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. You may make it display 0. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h is displayed so that all 7 segments and the like are turned on, and the message “Start measurement prohibited state” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be. Thereby, it is possible to recognize that it is the start time of the measurement prohibited state by any of the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600. Further, at the start of the measurement prohibited state, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special monitor 1310 operates normally by displaying the 7-segment segment of the special monitor 1310h so as to be fully lit.

In addition, in this example, in a state where the measurement is not normally performed but is in the measurement prohibited state, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as information regarding the number of paid-in balls and the number of paid-out balls, and a performance display It is displayed on the device 1600. Then, in the measurement prohibited state, a special display (special display 1, special display 2) corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. it's shown. However, in the effect display device 1600, in a normal measurement state that is not in the measurement prohibited state, the number of incoming balls and the number of outgoing balls are normally measured without displaying the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of incoming balls. You may make it display only to that effect. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side in the normal measurement state that is not the measurement prohibition state, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are normally measured. Only the effect can be grasped from the player side, while the special monitor 1310h is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 invisible to the player side. It is possible to grasp the ratio of the number of payouts to the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 displays the special display (special display 1 or special display 2) corresponding to the measurement prohibited state. The fact that the measurement has not been performed can be grasped from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, in this example, a switch that can be operated in the vertical direction is used as the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j, but any member that can shift to the measurement prohibition state by the operation may be used. It may be a push-down switch or a member capable of shifting to the measurement prohibited state by a key operation of the hall manager.

Further, in this example, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j provided on the main control board 1310 is configured to be exposed from the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a small cover that prevents the prohibit switch 1310j from being contacted from the outside, and when the special monitor measurement prohibit switch 1310j is operated, the small cover is opened to expose the special monitor measurement. The prohibit switch 1310j may be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the unintended operation of the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j.

(About a modification of the end timing of the measurement prohibited state)
In the above description, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position at the timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately terminate the measurement prohibition state, and the predetermined state duration elapses from the timing t2. Although the measurement prohibition state is to be ended at the timing t3, the measurement prohibition state may be ended at the time when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position at the timing t2. However, even in such a case, regarding the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state, not only during the execution of the measurement prohibited state, but also at the timing t3 when the predetermined notification continuation period elapses after the measurement prohibited state ends. Until then, it is displayed continuously. A modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction will be described with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction.

As shown in FIG. 288, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction at the timing t1, the main control MPU prohibits (stops) the measurement of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. Transition to the non-measurement state. Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, regardless of whether or not the game ball B has entered the entrance (prize, out), the game entered into the entrance (prize, out) Counting the number of spheres B (number of spheres) is prohibited, and information about the number of spheres B before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of balls (the number of payouts) of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is prohibited, and information regarding the number of payouts before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, the information about the number of balls entered and the number of paid-outs does not change, so that the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of balls received is also maintained before the transition to the measurement prohibited state.

Then, at the timing t2, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position, the main control MPU ends the measurement prohibition state, and starts counting the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. There is. In addition, after the count prohibition state ends, a new number of balls entered will be added to the information regarding the number of balls kept before the transition to the measurement prohibited state. The new payout number is to be added to the information about the payout number that has been maintained before the transition.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) that prohibits (stops) so as not to measure the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is generated. ing. For example, if any abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager will inspect the pachinko machine 1 in order to eliminate the abnormality. If it counts, the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize entrance, out exit) during such inspection becomes information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entrances) displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It is reflected, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h does not show the information during the game. In this regard, during inspection of the pachinko machine 1, the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j in the upward direction to generate a measurement prohibition state in which the measurement of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is prohibited. The game ball B entered into the entrance (prize or exit) during such inspection is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entrances). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be the information during the game.

In addition, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period between timings t1 and t2, even if the game ball B enters the entrance (prize or exit), it is treated as invalid, and the measurement is prohibited at timing t2. After the state is finished, the game ball B entered in such an entrance is treated as an effective one. Specifically, in a measurement prohibited state that is a period between timings t1 and t2, “a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensors is cut off so as not to perform detection itself by the detection sensors corresponding to each entrance” Or "a mode in which the detection sensor performs detection but the detection signal from the detection sensor is not input to the main control board 1310 at all" or "the detection sensor performs detection and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310". However, based on the detection signal, a mode in which it is not reflected in the count of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts”, etc. Further, after the count prohibition state ends at the timing t2, “the detection by the detection sensor is performed, the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is determined based on the detection signal. It is a mode to be reflected in the counting”. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the entrance (prize or exit) in the measurement prohibited state, counting as the number of entered balls or the number of payouts is prohibited and displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

In addition to the above, the gaming ball B is prevented from being paid out from the payout device 580 in the measurement prohibited state during the period of the timings t1 to t2, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at the timing t2, the gaming ball B is paid from the payout device 580. It is possible to pay out. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period between timings t1 and t2, the state in which the variable display of the special symbol cannot be displayed (variable state) is set, and after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t2, the variation of the special symbol. The display is changed to a displayable state (variable state). As a result, in the measurement prohibited state, even if the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the variation display of the special symbol is not displayed and the payout device 580 The game ball B is not paid out, and it is possible to prevent a profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not launched from the ball launching device 540, and the handle is held after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t2. When operating 182, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540. As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated in the measurement prohibited state, the game ball B is not fired in the first place, and thus the game ball B cannot be fired to enter the ball entrance (prize or exit). It is possible to prevent a profit from being obtained during execution of the measurement prohibited state.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. In the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and the detection is continued even after the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t2. .. As a result, in the measurement prohibited state, when attempting to illegally enter the game ball B into the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) by using a magnet or applying vibration, an illegal magnetism or an illegal Vibration can be detected, and fraudulent activity can be prevented. However, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2. In such a case, in the measurement prohibited state, the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may be detected even if the hall manager unintentionally approaches or vibrates during inspection during inspection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above description, the detection of the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective in the measurement prohibited state during the period of the timings t1 to t2, and a magnet is used or vibration is applied to the ball entrance (the winning opening). , Out port), illegal magnetism or illegal vibration is detected when attempting to illegally enter the game ball B into the ball. Here, regarding the information regarding the game, although the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) through the external terminal board 558, the outer end signal for notifying the measurement prohibited state and the outer end signal for notifying the magnetic detection and the vibration detection. The end signal is output from the same terminal. Then, the outer end signal that conveys the measurement prohibited state is output with priority over the outer end signal that conveys the magnetic detection and the vibration detection. For this reason, except for the measurement prohibited state, when an illegal magnetism or an illegal vibration is detected, the outer end signal that conveys the magnetic detection or the vibration detection is output, while the illegal measurement is performed while the measurement prohibited state is being executed. Even if it detects magnetism or unauthorized vibration, it does not output an outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection. In addition, except for the display of the special display during the execution of the measurement prohibited state and the display of the special display continuously displayed after the end of the measurement prohibited state as described later, the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed. Although the abnormality notification to be transmitted is performed using the effect display device 1600 or the like, during the display of such a special display, the special display is preferentially performed and the abnormality notification (display) for transmitting the magnetic detection or the vibration detection is given. I try not to do it.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 as information about the number of paid-in balls and the number of paid-out balls. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t2, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. doing. The special display corresponding to the measurement-prohibited state continues not only during the execution of the measurement-prohibited state but also after the end of the measurement-prohibited state until the timing t3 when a predetermined notification continuation period elapses. it's shown. A modified display example of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG. 289 is a modification of a specific display displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction.

First, in the measurement prohibited state, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. Regarding the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state, not only during the execution of the measurement prohibited state, but until the timing t3 when a predetermined notification continuation period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the end of the measurement prohibited state. It is displayed continuously during the period.

Specifically, during the period from timing t1 to t2 when the measurement prohibited state is being executed, the special monitor 1310h displays “-------” as the special display 1 corresponding to that the measurement prohibited state is being executed. The symbol "-" is displayed and the message "Measurement prohibited state is being set" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 289(A)). As a result, it is possible to recognize that the measurement prohibited state is being set by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, by transmitting a start command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the start of the measurement prohibition state, in the effect display device 1600, It is possible to start displaying the display 1.

In addition, during the period from timing t2 to t3 after the end of the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h displays the symbol "++++++" as a special display 2 corresponding to the end of the measurement prohibited state, to produce the effect. The display device 1600 displays a message "Measurement prohibited state is being set" (FIG. 289(B)). Further, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message “setting of measurement prohibited state”. Thereby, it is possible to make the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 recognize as if the measurement prohibited state is being set even after the measurement prohibited state is ended. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position, that is, when the measurement prohibition state ends, an end command for informing the end of the measurement prohibition state is directed from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting, it is possible to start displaying the special display 2 on the effect display device 1600. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, it is monitored whether or not a predetermined notification continuation period has elapsed since the end of the measurement prohibited state, and when the predetermined notification continuation period has elapsed since the end of the measurement prohibited state, a performance display is displayed. In the device 1600, it is possible to return to the normal display (display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

As described above, in the measurement prohibited state, a special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. As a result, it is possible to recognize whether the measurement prohibited state is being set by using the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. The special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is continuously displayed not only during execution of the measurement prohibited state but also after the end of the measurement prohibited state until a predetermined notification continuation period elapses. Here, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated, since the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. There is. That is, immediately after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, so that the entrance port (winning port, out port) Although it is easy to illegally enter the game ball B into the game ball, if the game ball B is illegally entered into the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance), it means that the measurement prohibition state has ended. It is counted as the number of incoming balls or the number of payouts, and is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls), and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h shows the information during the game. It is no longer what you show. In this respect, it is possible to reduce the motivation to illegally enter the ball by making the user recognize as if the measurement prohibited state is being set, even after the measurement prohibited state has ended, and eventually, The reliability of the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be improved. In addition, there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 due to an illegal act, and the hall manager operates the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j in the upward direction in order to inspect the pachinko machine 1 after the abnormality has occurred. If the measurement prohibited state has been generated by causing the person who may have committed a wrongdoing to do so again by recognizing it as if the measurement prohibited state is being set after the measurement prohibited state has ended. It is possible to reduce the willingness to engage in cheating.

Further, after the measurement prohibited state ends at the timing t2, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state continues to be displayed until the timing t3 when a predetermined notification continuation period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. However, during such a predetermined notification continuation period, when the handle 182 is operated, it is possible to launch the game ball B from the ball launching device 540, and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting By entering the game ball B into a winning opening such as the mouth 2004, it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol). In such a case, in the effect display device 1600, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is displayed in a state in which the variable display of the decorative design is performed, but the special display is displayed more than the variable display of the decorative design. By displaying with priority, even if the game ball B is illegally entered into the winning opening, it can be recognized as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is not displayed, and the game ball B is illegally entered. It is possible to reduce the willingness to

Further, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is switched from the special display 1 to the special display 2 before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position. Thereby, it is possible to recognize whether the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 is in the state after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the upper direction to the reference position, and to the reference position. It is possible to prevent forgetting to return.

Further, when the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is switched from the special display 1 to the special display 2 before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the upper direction to the reference position, in the effect display device 1600, A predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message "setting of measurement prohibited state". As a result, the special display 2 becomes more conspicuous than the special display 1, and it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is in the state after returning from the upper direction to the reference position. In this example, the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state is continuously displayed not only during execution of the measurement prohibited state but also after the end of the measurement prohibited state until the predetermined notification continuation period elapses. However, any notification such as sound output from a speaker or lamp light emission may be used in addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j as long as the notification corresponds to the measurement prohibited state. It may be executed using two or more of them.

In addition, regarding the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the production operation unit 301, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, etc., each has an initial position and an operating position. However, the effect member is restricted from operating during the execution of the measurement prohibited state. As a result, during the execution of the measurement prohibited state, the effect member does not operate and it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered. Further, not only during the display of the special display during the execution of the measurement prohibited state, but also during the display of the special display continuously displayed after the end of the measurement prohibited state, the production member may be restricted so as not to operate. .. As a result, even during the display of the special display that is continuously displayed after the end of the measurement-prohibited state, the effect member does not operate as during the execution of the measurement-prohibited state. Can be recognized.

Immediately after the start of the timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated upward, that is, immediately after the start of the measurement prohibition state, a special display corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibition state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. You may make it display 0. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the measurement prohibited state, the special monitor 1310h is displayed so that all 7 segments and the like are turned on, and the message “Start measurement prohibited state” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be. Thereby, it is possible to recognize that it is the start time of the measurement prohibited state by any of the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600. Further, at the start of the measurement prohibited state, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special monitor 1310 operates normally by displaying the 7-segment segment of the special monitor 1310h so as to be fully lit.

In addition, in this example, during the display of the special display during the execution of the measurement prohibited state and during the display of the special display that is continuously displayed after the measurement prohibited state ends, The ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is displayed on the special monitor 1310h as well as the effect display device 1600 as the information on the number of paid-in balls and the number of paid-out balls. Then, during the display of the special display, the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 does not display information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, and the special display corresponding to the measurement prohibited state (special display 1, special display 2). ) Is displayed. However, the effect display device 1600 does not display the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls during the non-display of the special display, but only displays that the number of paid-in balls or the number of paid-out balls is normally measured. You may do it. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 is visible from the player side during the non-display of the special display, only from the player side, the fact that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are normally measured is displayed. Although it can be grasped, since the special monitor 1310h is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 invisible to the player, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is determined as information about the number of paid-in balls and the number of paid-out balls. It can be grasped from the back side of the machine 1. During the display of the special display, the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 indicates that the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is not measured in the case of the special display 1 when the special display 2 is displayed. It is possible to grasp from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1 as if the number or payout number is not being measured (as if the measurement prohibited state is being set).

(Regarding permission to shoot a ball while measurement is prohibited)
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward will be described with reference to FIG. 290. FIG. 290 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward. Compared with the case where the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the upward direction, it is the same in that a measurement prohibition state for prohibiting the measurement of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is generated, but when the handle 182 is operated, The difference is that a state in which the game ball B is fired from the firing device 540 is generated.

More specifically, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, the main control MPU sets the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is input. It is possible to do. That is, at the time of contact with the handle 182, the firing permission signal is output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. For this reason, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the downward direction, the measurement prohibition state is generated, but during the execution of the measurement prohibition state, the firing control unit 633b receives the firing permission signal. Since it is during the period, when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, the drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182, and the game ball You can hit B.

As shown in FIG. 290, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward at the timing t1, the main control MPU prohibits (stops) so as not to measure the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. Transition to the non-measurement state. Specifically, in the measurement prohibited state, regardless of whether or not the game ball B has entered the entrance (prize, out), the game entered into the entrance (prize, out) Counting the number of spheres B (number of spheres) is prohibited, and information about the number of spheres B before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. Further, in the measurement prohibited state, counting the number of balls (the number of payouts) of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is prohibited, and information regarding the number of payouts before the transition to the measurement prohibited state is maintained. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, the information about the number of balls entered and the number of paid-outs does not change, so that the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of balls received is also maintained before the transition to the measurement prohibited state.

Then, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position at the timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately terminate the measurement prohibition state, and the predetermined state duration elapses from the timing t2. At the timing t3, the measurement prohibited state is ended, and the counting of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts is started. That is, even after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position at the timing t2, the measurement prohibition state is continued for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds). In addition, after the count prohibition state ends, a new number of balls entered will be added to the information regarding the number of balls kept before the transition to the measurement prohibited state. The new payout number is to be added to the information about the payout number that has been maintained before the transition.

Further, in the measurement prohibited state, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, when the handle 182 is operated, it is set to the launch permitted state in which the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540, and the measurement prohibited state ends at timing t3. I try to continue after that. In other words, in the measurement prohibited state, it is possible to shoot the game ball B from the ball launching device 540 by simultaneously setting the shooting permission state, and by the shooting of the game ball B, the game ball B is put into a ball entrance (prize entrance, out mouth). You can enter the ball.

As described above, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the downward direction, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) that prohibits (stops) so as not to measure the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is generated. Not only that, when the handle 182 is operated, the launch permission state in which the game ball B is launched from the ball launch device 540 is generated. That is, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the downward direction, when the handle 182 is operated, it is possible to perform a trial hit in which the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540, and even if a trial hit is performed. The trial shot mode is set so as not to be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540, and whether the game ball B launched from the ball launching device 540 can normally enter the ball entrance (prize or exit). In order to check if there is a trial shot, it is necessary for the hole manager to make a trial shot. However, if the number of balls entered and paid out is counted during the trial shot, the ball entrance ( The game ball B entered in the winning port, the out port) is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls), and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h is the game. It no longer represents the information inside. In this regard, when the hall manager makes a trial shot, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward to generate a measurement prohibition state in which the measurement of the number of balls entered and the number of payouts is prohibited. The game ball B entered in the entrance (prize or out) during the trial hit is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entrances). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be the information during the game.

Further, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, a measurement prohibition state (non-measurement state) is generated to prohibit (stop) so as not to measure the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. The measurement prohibited state is continued until the predetermined state duration period elapses after the special monitor measurement inhibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position. Immediately before returning the special monitor measurement prohibiting switch 1310j from the lower direction to the reference position, if the hall manager is making a trial shot, immediately after returning the special monitor measurement prohibiting switch 1310j from the lower direction to the reference position, There is a possibility that the game ball B that has been hit by trial will enter the ball entrance (prize entrance, out exit). In this respect, after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the downward direction to the reference position, until the predetermined state continuation period elapses, by continuing the measurement prohibition state, the game ball B that has been trial hit However, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (with respect to the number of entered balls) even if the player enters the entrance (prize or exit) immediately after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the bottom to the reference position. It is not reflected in the payout ratio). Thereby, regarding the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h, the information at the time of the trial hit can be excluded, and the accuracy as the information during the game can be maintained.

After returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the lower position to the reference position at the timing t2, the handle 182 is operated for a predetermined state continuation period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the measurement prohibition state is continued. Then, after the game ball B is shot, the game ball 4 enters the ball entrance (prize entrance, out exit) on the game area 4a and is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the entrance entrance (prize entrance, out entrance). It is set to be at least longer than the ball flow-down time (for example, 4.5 seconds). As a result, even if the handle 182 is operated immediately before the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position and the game ball B is shot, the game ball B corresponds to a ball entrance (prize entrance, out entrance). Regarding the timing detected by the detection sensor, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the number of payouts with respect to the number of paid-in balls is not counted as the number of entered balls or the number of paid-out balls, while the measurement prohibited state is continuing. Can be surely excluded from

Further, in the above description, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position at the timing t2, the main control MPU does not immediately end the measurement prohibition state, but continues from the timing t2 for a predetermined state continuation period. Although the measurement prohibition state is to be ended at the timing t3 when the time elapses, the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is pushed down at the timing t2 as described in (Modification of the end timing of the measurement prohibition state). The measurement prohibited state may be ended at the time when the measurement is returned from the direction to the reference position. That is, at the timing of returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the lower direction to the reference position at the timing t2, the test striking mode (measurement prohibition state and firing permission state) may be ended.

Further, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), which is the period of timings t1 to t3, even if the game ball B enters the ball entrance (prize entrance, out entrance), it is treated as invalid. In this way, after the measurement prohibition state ends at timing t3, the game ball B that has entered such a ball entrance is treated as being valid. Specifically, in the trial striking mode, which is the period from timing t1 to t3, "a mode in which the power supply to the detection sensors is cut off so as not to perform the detection itself by the detection sensors corresponding to each entrance" Or "a mode in which the detection sensor performs detection but the detection signal from the detection sensor is not input to the main control board 1310 at all" or "the detection sensor performs detection and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310". However, based on the detection signal, a mode in which it is not reflected in the count of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts”, etc. Further, after the trial hitting mode ends at the timing t3, “a detection sensor performs detection, a detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, and the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is determined based on the detection signal. It is a mode to be reflected in the counting”. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the entrance (prize or exit) in the trial striking mode, it is prohibited to count the number of balls or the number of payouts, and the number is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It can be excluded from the information (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

In addition to the above, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and launch permitted state) which is the period of timings t1 to t3, the gaming ball B is prevented from being dispensed from the dispensing device 580, and after the trial striking mode ends at timing t3. It is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580. Further, in the trial striking mode which is the period of timings t1 to t3, the variable display of the special symbol cannot be performed (unvariable state), and after the trial striking mode ends at timing t3, the variable display of the special symbol. It is arranged to shift to a state in which it is possible to perform (variable state). As a result, in the trial striking mode, even if the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the variation display of the special symbol is not displayed and the payout device 580 The game ball B is not paid out, and it is possible to prevent a profit from being obtained during the execution of the trial hit mode.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. In the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) which is the period from timing t1 to t3, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as valid, and after the trial striking mode ends at timing t3. I also try to continue. Thus, in the trial striking mode, when an attempt is made to illegally enter the game ball B into the entrance (prize or exit) by using a magnet or applying vibration, an illegal magnetism or an illegal Vibration can be detected, and fraudulent activity can be prevented. However, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 may be treated as invalid in the trial shot mode, which is the period from timing t1 to t3. In such a case, in the trial striking mode, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 detect the magnets even if the magnet approaches or is vibrated unintentionally during the trial striking. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspection work of the hall manager from being hindered.

In the above, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) which is the period from timing t1 to t3, the detection by the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is treated as effective, and a magnet is used or vibration is applied. For example, when attempting to illegally enter the game ball B into the entrance (prize or exit), illegal magnetism or illegal vibration is detected. Here, regarding the information regarding the game, although the outer end signal is output to the outside (hall computer) through the external terminal board 558, the outer end signal for transmitting the trial striking mode and the outer end signal for transmitting the magnetic detection and the vibration detection. The end signal is output from the same terminal. Then, the outer end signal for transmitting the trial striking mode is output with priority over the outer end signal for transmitting the magnetic detection and the vibration detection. For this reason, except for the trial striking mode, when an illegal magnetism or an improper vibration is detected, the outer end signal that conveys the magnetic detection or the vibration detection is output, while the illegal striking is performed during the trial striking mode. Even if it detects magnetism or unauthorized vibration, it does not output an outer end signal that conveys magnetic detection or vibration detection. Further, except for the trial hitting mode, the abnormality display that conveys the magnetic detection and the vibration detection is performed using the effect display device 1600 and the like, but during the measurement prohibited state test hitting mode, as will be described later. The special display corresponding to the trial striking mode is given priority, and the abnormality notification (display) notifying the magnetic detection or the vibration detection is not performed.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls is displayed on the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 as information about the number of paid-in balls and the number of paid-out balls. Further, in the period of timings t1 to t3, even if a trial shot is made, the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing) is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered). The special display corresponding to the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. Is displayed. Display of the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291. FIG. 291 is a specific display example displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310h when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward.

First, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), a special display corresponding to the trial striking mode is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. However, among these, during the period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position, and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position. The special display corresponding to the trial striking mode is switched from the special display 3 to the special display 4 during the period from the timing t2 to the timing t3.

Specifically, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibition state and firing permission state), the special monitor measurement prohibition is performed during the period from timing t1 to t2 until the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the downward direction to the reference position. As the special display 3 corresponding to the state in which the switch 1310j is operated in the downward direction, the special monitor 1310h displays the symbol "LLLLLL", and the effect display device 1600 displays "setting of trial striking mode". Message is displayed (FIG. 291(A)). As a result, the trial striking mode (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls) displayed on the special monitor 1310h is not reflected even if the trial striking is performed by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 ( It is possible to recognize that the measurement prohibition state and the firing permission state are being set. In addition, when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated in the downward direction, by transmitting a start command informing the start of the trial striking mode from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the special effect display device 1600 displays It is possible to start displaying the display 3.

In the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the special monitor measurement prohibited switch 1310j is operated during a period from timing t2 to t3 after returning the special monitor measurement prohibited switch 1310j from the lower position to the reference position. As the special display 4 corresponding to the state after returning from the lower side to the reference position, the symbol "UUUUUU" is displayed on the special monitor 1310h, and the effect display device 1600 displays "End of trial striking mode". The message “Standby” is displayed (FIG. 291(B)). Further, in the effect display device 1600, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed so as to surround the message “waiting for the end of the trial striking mode”. As a result, it is possible to recognize from the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 that the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is waiting for completion. When the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the lower side to the reference position, an end operation command for notifying that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the lower direction to the reference position is issued from the main control board 1310. The special display 4 can be started to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the special display 4 to the board 1510. Also, after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned from the lower side to the reference position, and when a predetermined state continuation period has elapsed, an end command for notifying the end of the trial shot mode is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to return to the normal display (display of the ratio of the number of payouts with respect to the number of entered balls) in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the data to the player.

As described above, in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. Moreover, the special display corresponding to the firing permission state) is displayed. As a result, the trial striking mode (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls) displayed on the special monitor 1310h is not reflected even if the trial striking is performed by either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 ( It is possible to recognize whether or not the measurement prohibited state and the firing permitted state are being set. In the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, the special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is changed from the special display 3 to the special display 3. The display is switched to special display 4. This makes it possible to recognize whether the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 is in a state after returning the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j from the lower position to the reference position, and to the reference position. It is possible to prevent forgetting to return.

In the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), before and after the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is returned to the reference position from below, the special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is changed from the special display 3 to the special display 3. When switching to the special display 4, a predetermined display (graphic) is added and displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to surround the message “waiting for the end of the trial striking mode”. As a result, the special display 4 becomes more conspicuous than the special display 3, and it is possible to easily recognize that the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is in the state after returning from the downward direction to the reference position. In this example, a special display corresponding to the trial shot mode is displayed during execution of the trial shot mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state). It suffices for such notification to be performed using any of sound output from a speaker, lamp light emission, etc. in addition to the effect display device 1600 and the special monitor 1310j. It may be executed.

Further, in this example, when the steering wheel 182 is touched, the main control MPU can input the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 and set the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal. Then, when the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is started to be input, it is possible to execute a specific effect by sound, light emission, an image, or the like, as an effect capable of notifying that the firing of the game ball B is started. It is possible. However, while the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is being executed, it is possible to input the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 by touching the steering wheel 182, but not to execute the specific effect. I have a limit. As a result, during the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), even if the handle 182 is touched and a trial striking is performed, a specific effect is not executed and the trial striking work is hindered. Can be prevented. Then, after the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state) is ended, the detection signal from the steering wheel touch sensor 192 is started to be input by the contact of the steering wheel 182, thereby making it possible to execute the specific effect. There is.

In addition, regarding the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the production operation unit 301, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, etc., each has an initial position and an operating position. However, the effect member is restricted so as not to operate during the execution of the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state). Accordingly, during the execution of the trial striking mode (measurement prohibited state and firing permitted state), the effect member does not operate, and it is possible to prevent the trial striking work from being hindered.

Immediately after the start of the timing t1 when the special monitor measurement prohibition switch 1310j is operated downward, that is, immediately after the start of the test striking mode (measurement prohibition state and firing permission state), the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 are used for trial. The special display 0 corresponding to the start of the hitting mode may be displayed. For example, as the special display 0 corresponding to the start of the trial striking mode, all 7 segments of the special monitor 1310h are displayed so as to be turned on, and the message “start of the trial striking mode” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the trial striking mode has started by using either the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600. Further, at the start of the trial shot mode, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special monitor 1310 normally operates by displaying the 7-segment segment of the special monitor 1310h so as to be fully lit.

In addition, in this example, in a normal measurement state that is not in the trial striking mode (measurement prohibition state and firing permission state), the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the number of paid-in balls It is displayed on the monitor 1310h and also displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, in the trial hit mode, a special display (special display 3, special display 4) corresponding to the trial hit mode is displayed on the special monitor 1310h or the effect display device 1600 without displaying information regarding the number of balls entered or the number of payouts. it's shown. However, in the effect display device 1600, in a state where the trial hit mode is not normally performed, the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out are normally measured without displaying the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. You may make it display only to that effect. In such a case, since the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side in a state where the trial hit mode is not normally performed, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are normally measured. Only the effect can be grasped from the player side, whereas the special monitor 1310h is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so as not to be visually recognized by the player side. It is possible to grasp the ratio of the number of payouts to the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the trial hitting mode, the special monitor 1310h and the effect display device 1600 display special displays (special display 3 and special display 4) corresponding to the trial hitting mode, so that the number of balls entered and the number of payouts are calculated. The fact that the measurement has not been performed can be grasped from the player side or the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

[Measurement of a special monitor when entering the ball when the second starting opening is closed]
As described above, during the game, the number of balls of the game ball B (the number of balls entered) into the ball entrances (prize holes, out openings) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, That is, the number of game balls B discharged from within the game area 5a and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 when the player enters the winning opening (the number of payouts) are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is calculated from the information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 despite the closing of the second starting port 2004 is counted as the number of incoming balls, but after that, The game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 is controlled not to be counted as the number of entered balls. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game ball B enters at the time of closing the second starting port 2004 will be described with reference to FIG. 292. FIG. 292 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is closed.

Regarding the second starting opening 2004, the second starting opening door 2414 operates to open the second starting opening 2004 according to the ordinary lottery result that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball B can be accepted. Then, the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401. Therefore, the game ball B entered immediately before closing the second starting port 2004 may be detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 immediately after closing the second starting port 2004. From this, the gaming ball B detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 during the predetermined period from the closing of the second starting port 2004 is “the gaming ball B entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed”. Regarding the game ball B detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 during the period excluding the time when the second starting port 2004 is opened and the predetermined period after the closing of the second starting port 2004 is not handled, It is treated as "a game ball B entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed".

As shown in FIG. 292, when the game ball B enters at the timing t1 when the second starting port 2004 is closed, the main control MPU determines the ball of the game ball B entering the ball inlet (prize or outlet). It is counted (added) as the number (number of balls entered). When the game ball B enters at the timing t1 when the second starting opening 2004 is closed, the main control MPU counts (adds) the number of balls of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 (payout number). .. That is, the game ball B entered when the second starting opening 2004 is closed is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls).

Further, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 based on the fact that the game ball B entered at the timing t1 when the second starting opening 2004 was closed. Also, based on the game ball B entered at the time of closing the second starting port 2004 at the timing t1, it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol. Thereby, with respect to the game ball B entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed, the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, as in the case where the game ball B enters when the second starting port 2004 is opened. Alternatively, the variable display of special symbols can be performed.

Further, when the game ball B enters at the timing t1 when the second starting opening 2004 is closed, a specific notification is given to the outside by using the effect display device 1600, the LED provided on the main body frame 4, and the like. (Notification of normal measurement failure) is performed. As the specific notification, which will be described later in detail, even if the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 during execution of the specific notification, the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is not counted (normal counting is performed. In order to convey the fact that there is no) to the outside, a warning message is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the LED provided on the main body frame 4 is blinked with a strong light emission. For example, if the game ball B enters when the second start port 2004 is closed, a warning message saying "Because there is a risk of illegal prize winning, the normal special monitor will not be measured from here." Is displayed.

Moreover, when the game ball B enters at the time of closing the second starting opening 2004 at the timing t1, the specific notification is given in the effect display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The specific notification (message display) may be displayed with priority over the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, by making the variable display of the decorative pattern invisible (making it difficult to see) by the specific notification (message display), the fact that the specific notification is being performed can be widely appealed to the outside.

After that, during execution of the specific notification, when the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004, and when the game ball B enters the entrance (winning opening, out opening) excluding the second starting opening 2004. Whether to count the number of balls entered or paid out differs from the case of a ball. That is, after the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 at the timing t1 when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004, and when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 and the second start port 2004 is excluded. Whether or not the game ball B enters the (winning mouth, out mouth) is different from whether to count the number of entered balls or the number of paid-out balls. It should be noted that even during the execution of the specific notification, when the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540.

Specifically, during the execution of the specific notification, for the game ball B that has entered the second starting opening 2004, regardless of whether the second starting opening 2004 is open or closed, the entrance opening It is prohibited to count (add) as the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B that entered the (winning hole, out mouth). Further, during execution of the specific notification, the game ball B that has entered the second starting opening 2004 is paid out from the payout device 580 regardless of whether the second starting opening 2004 is open or closed. It is prohibited to count (add) as the number of balls of the game ball B (the number of payouts). That is, during execution of the specific notification, the game ball B that has entered the second starting opening 2004 is not reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls).

Further, during execution of the specific notification, even if the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004, it is treated as an invalid one. Specifically, during the execution of the specific notification, “the power supply to the second starting port sensor 2401 is shut off so that the detection itself by the second starting port sensor 2401 corresponding to the second starting port 2004 is not performed. Aspects", "Aspects in which detection by the second starting opening sensor 2401 is performed but no detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 is input to the main control board 1310", and "Detection by the second starting opening sensor 2401 is performed. , A mode in which the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 is input to the main control board 1310, but it is not reflected in the count of the number of balls entered or the number of payouts based on the detection signal”. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 during execution of the specific notification, counting the number of balls entered or the number of payouts is prohibited, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (input Ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls).

In addition, during execution of the specific notification, the payout device is based on that the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 regardless of whether the second starting opening 2004 is open or closed. The game ball B is never paid out from 580. In addition, during execution of the specific notification, regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed, based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, a special symbol. The variable display of is not displayed. As a result, during execution of the specific notification, even if the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004, the variation display of the special symbol is not displayed, and the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580. Therefore, it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained during execution of the specific notification.

On the other hand, during the execution of the specific notification, the game ball B entered in the entrance (exit, out) excluding the second starting opening 2004 enters the entrance (exit, out) It is counted (added) as the number of balls of the game sphere B (the number of balls entered). In addition, during the execution of the specific notification, regarding the game ball B entered into the ball entrance (prize entrance, out mouth) excluding the second starting opening 2004, the number of balls of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 ( It is counted (added) as the number of payouts. In other words, during execution of the specific notification, regarding the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize entrance, out exit) excluding the second starting opening 2004, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (for the number of entrances) It will be reflected in the ratio of the number of payouts).

In addition, during execution of the specific notification, the game ball B is entered from the payout device 580 based on that the game ball B has entered the winning opening (the winning opening to which the prize ball is to be paid out) excluding the second starting opening 2004. It is possible to pay out the ball B. In addition, during execution of the specific notification, based on the game ball B entering the winning opening (the winning opening from which the prize ball is to be paid out) excluding the second starting opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol It is possible to do. As a result, during the execution of the specific notification, for the game ball B that has entered the winning opening other than the second starting opening 2004, the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed. be able to.

As described above, when the game ball B is entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed, the number of the game ball B entered in the ball entrance (prize or out) for the game ball B. It is counted (added) as (the number of balls entered), and is counted (added) as the number of balls (the number of payouts) of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580. While the game ball B can be entered when the second starting port 2004 is opened, it is impossible to enter the game ball B when the second starting port 2004 is closed. Regarding the game ball B entered when the second starting port 2004 was closed, there is a possibility that the second starting port 2004 was opened and the game ball B was entered by fraudulent activity. However, for example, at the time of transition from a state where the second starting port 2004 is open to a state where the second starting port 2004 is closed, the game ball B is caught by the operating second starting port door 2414, and the second starting port After the transition to the state in which 2004 is closed, the state in which the game ball B is caught in the second start opening door 2414 is eliminated, and the game ball B is detected by the second start opening sensor 2401. There is a possibility that such irregularities have occurred. In other words, regarding the game ball B that has entered when the second starting port 2004 is closed, although there is a possibility that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 due to a fraudulent act, the second starting port due to irregular occurrence Since the game ball B may have entered the 2004, the game ball B may not necessarily have entered the second starting opening 2004 due to an illegal act. Therefore, the game ball B entered when the second starting opening 2004 is closed is not excluded from the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered), but is included as information during the game. I am trying.

Further, when the game ball B enters the ball when the second starting opening 2004 is closed, a specific notification is given to the outside, and the player enters the second starting opening 2004 during the execution of the specific notification. Regarding the game ball B, regardless of whether the second starting port 2004 is open or closed, counting (adding) as the number of entered balls or the number of paid-outs is prohibited. Here, at the stage where one game ball B enters when the second starting opening 2004 is closed, it is not possible to determine whether or not the game ball B has entered the second starting opening 2004 due to misconduct, but it continues after that. When the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004, it can be determined that there is a high possibility that the game ball B entered the second starting opening 2004 due to an illegal act. Therefore, during execution of the specific notification, with respect to the game ball B that has entered the second starting opening 2004, it is prohibited to count (add) as the number of balls entered or the number of payouts, and the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h. It is not reflected in (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered). As a result, the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h can be excluded from the information when it is determined that the ball is entered due to an illegal act, and the accuracy as the information during the game can be maintained.

Note that while the specific notification is being executed, it is prohibited to count (add) the game balls B entered in the second starting opening 2004 as the number of entered balls or the number of payouts, but after the execution of the specific notification, The pachinko machine 1 is inspected by the hall manager, and the power is turned on again to eliminate the normal measurement inability state, whereby the game balls B entered in the second starting opening 2004 are counted as the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. It is possible to return to a state where (addition) is possible.

In the above, it is possible to pay out the game ball B from the payout device 580 based on that the game ball B entered at the timing t1 when the second starting opening 2004 was closed, but the game ball B from the payout device 580. May not be paid out. Also, based on the game ball B entered at the timing t1 when the second starting port 2004 is closed, it is possible to perform the variable display of the special symbol, but do not perform the variable display of the special symbol. May be. As a result, regarding the game ball B that first enters when the second starting opening 2004 is closed, the variable symbol of the special symbol is not displayed, and the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580, which is an illegal act. As a result, it is possible to prevent profit from being obtained in a state in which the ball may have entered the second starting opening 2004.

Further, during execution of the specific notification, regarding the game ball B that has entered the second starting opening 2004, regardless of whether the second starting opening 2004 is open or closed, the entry opening (the winning opening , Counting out (adding) as the number of balls (entering number) of the game ball B entered in the out mouth), it may be counted (adding) as the number of entering balls. However, during execution of the specific notification, the game ball B that has entered the second starting opening 2004 is paid out from the payout device 580 regardless of whether the second starting opening 2004 is open or closed. It is prohibited to count (add) as the number of balls (the number of payouts) of the game ball B. As a result, when the game ball B continues to enter the second starting opening 2004 during execution of the specific notification, only the number of entered balls out of the number of entered balls and the number of payouts increases, and Since the ratio of the number of payouts is reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h, the action itself of attempting to enter the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004 during execution of the specific notification is performed. Can be deterred.

As described above, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 when it is closed, whether the game ball B entered the second start port 2004 due to a fraudulent act or the second start due to irregular occurrence Since it cannot be determined whether the game ball B has entered the mouth 2004, the game ball B is counted as the number of entered balls and the number of payouts. In this way, when it is not possible to determine whether the game ball B has entered the second starting opening 2004 due to an illegal act or the irregularity has caused the game ball B to enter the second starting opening 2004. The number of balls entered and the number of payouts may be counted, and another example as described below may be used. Specifically, for the second starting opening 2004, the second starting opening door 2414 operates to open the second starting opening 2004 according to the ordinary lottery result that is drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. The game ball B is opened so that the game ball B can be received. However, in the normal state (the state where the time saving is not given), the ordinary lottery result is prevented from winning and the second starting opening 2004 is not opened. You may comprise. In such a case, with respect to the game ball B that has entered the second starting port 2004 in the normal state, there is a possibility that the second starting port 2004 is opened and the game ball B is entered by an illegal act. However, for example, the ordinary lottery result becomes a winning just before the end of the time saving state (the state in which the time saving is given), and the second starting port 2004 is opened after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state based on the hit. In such a case, there is a possibility that the game ball B has entered the second starting opening 2004 due to the occurrence of irregularity even in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, whether the game ball B entered the second starting port 2004 due to a fraudulent act or the irregular occurrence of the second starting port 2004 Since it is not possible to determine whether or not the game ball B has entered, the game ball B is counted as the number of balls entered and the number of payouts. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state is not excluded from the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls) and is used as information during the game. Can be included.

[Measurement of special monitor when abnormality is detected]
As described above, during the game, the number of balls of the game ball B (the number of balls entered) into the ball entrances (prize holes, out openings) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, That is, the number of game balls B discharged from within the game area 5a and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 when the player enters the winning opening (the number of payouts) are counted. Then, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls is calculated from the information, and the calculation result is displayed on the special monitor 1310h. In addition to such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the gaming balls B that enter the entrance (prize or exit) after the abnormality is detected are counted as the number of coins to be paid, but are not counted as the number of payouts. Have control over. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when such an abnormality is detected will be described with reference to FIG. 293. FIG. 293 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when an abnormality is detected.

The pachinko machine 1 of this example monitors whether or not an abnormality has occurred by various methods. Specifically, it is monitored whether or not a large number of game balls B have entered a single entrance from the entrances (prize, out). On the other hand, when a large amount of game balls B are entered in a short time, a fraudulent act, such as a player who directly enters the game balls B into one entrance, Since the game ball B has been illegally entered into the entrance (prize entrance, out exit), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, the game board 5 is provided with a magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a and a vibration sensor 3005 for detecting an illegal vibration in the game area 5a. Then, it is monitored whether or not a magnet is used or vibration is applied, and if detection is made by the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005, an illegal act such as use of a magnet or vibration is performed. Since there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the ball entrance (prize or exit) illegally thereafter, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, the detection sensors corresponding to the entrances (winning openings, out openings) are respectively connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring, but it is monitored whether or not those wirings are broken or pulled out. , If the wiring is detected to be broken or pulled out, even if the game ball B is inserted into the ball entrance (prize entrance, out entrance), it is not detected by the detection sensor and a normal game is played. Therefore, it is judged that an abnormality has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 293, with respect to the game ball B that has entered the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) from the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t1, the entrance ( It is counted (added) as the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B entered in the winning port and the out port. Further, with respect to the game ball B that has entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out port) from the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t1, the number of balls of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts) is counted ( Addition) is prohibited. That is, regarding the game ball B that has entered the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) from the time when the abnormality is detected, it is counted as the number of balls entered, but is not counted as the number of payouts, and information about the number of balls entered Only that will be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

As described above, with respect to the game ball B that has entered the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) after the abnormality is detected, it is counted as the number of entrances but not as the number of payouts. From this fact, when the game ball B enters the entrance (prize or exit) after detecting an abnormality, only the number of the entered balls out of the number of entered balls and the number of paid outs is large, and the number of entered balls Will be reflected in the information displayed on the special monitor 1310h so that the ratio of the number of payouts to Thereby, after detecting the abnormality, the act of attempting to enter the game ball B into the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) can be suppressed.

Further, from the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t1, when the game ball B enters the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance), it is treated as effective for counting the number of entrances, and payout. It is treated as invalid for counting numbers. Specifically, from the time when the abnormality is detected at the timing t1, “the detection sensor detects and the detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310, but the number of balls entered is detected based on the detection signal. A mode in which it is reflected in the count but not in the count of payouts" and the like. As a result, from the time when the abnormality is detected, when the game ball B enters the entrance (prize or exit), only the information regarding the number of entered balls out of the number of entered balls and the number of paid out is special. It can be included in the information displayed on the monitor 1310h (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered).

Further, the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580 from the time of the abnormality detection. Further, from the time of the abnormality detection, the variable display of the special symbol cannot be performed (unchangeable state). Thereby, from the time of abnormality detection, even if the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol is not displayed and the payout device Since the game ball B is not paid out from the 580, it is possible to prevent the profit from being obtained after the abnormality is detected.

In addition, triggered by the abnormality detection at the timing t1, the specific display (normal measurement failure notification) is performed to the outside by using the effect display device 1600, the LED provided on the main body frame 4, and the like. .. As a specific notification, even if the game ball B enters the ball entrance (prize entrance, out exit), it is not counted as the number of payouts (normal counting is not performed), so that the effect display device is provided. A warning message is displayed on the display 1600, and the LED provided on the main body frame 4 is made to flash with strong light emission. Further, as the warning message, the display content is changed depending on the type of abnormality. For example, when it is determined that a large amount of game balls B have entered a single entrance in a short time, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, "there is a possibility that an unauthorized prize has been won. Therefore, normal measurement of special monitor will not be performed from here on". In addition, when the magnetic sensor 2470 or the vibration sensor 3005 detects that an abnormality has occurred, “There is a risk of fraudulent winning, so from here on we will not measure normal special monitors. Is displayed as a warning message. Also, if it is determined that there is an abnormality such as disconnection or disconnection of the wiring, and it is judged that there is an abnormality, ``There is a possibility that winning detection may not be performed, so normal measurement from special monitor will not be performed from here Is displayed as a warning message.

Further, after the abnormality is detected, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not launched from the ball launching device 540. Thus, from the time of abnormality detection, even if the handle 182 is operated, since the game ball B is not fired in the first place, the game ball B can be fired to enter the ball entrance (prize entrance, out entrance). No, it is possible to prevent the profit from being obtained after the abnormality is detected.

In the above, from the time of the abnormality detection, even if the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is not emitted from the ball launching device 540, but when the handle 182 is operated, the game ball B is launched from the ball launching device 540. B may be fired. As a result, the game ball B can be launched, but even if the game ball B enters the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol may be displayed. Without, the game ball B is not paid out from the payout device 580, so that it is possible to prevent the profit from being obtained after the abnormality is detected.

It should be noted that, regarding the game ball B that has entered the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) after the abnormality is detected, it is prohibited to count it as the number of payouts although it is counted as the number of payouts. After that, the pachinko machine 1 is inspected by the hall manager, and the power is turned on again to eliminate the normal measurement inability state, so that the game ball B entered into the entrance (prize entrance, out entrance) is paid out. It can be returned to a state in which it can be counted (added) as a number.

[Other example]
Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a game machine, but it is also applicable to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums using game medals ( It is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or reel). Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 296, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body portion (box) 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, a key is inserted into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise, so that the front door (front frame) 6002 is main body. It can be opened from a portion (box) 6004.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the lock unit (not shown) to form a main body portion (box) 6004. It is used for locking and closing the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder main body (not shown) that extends in the front-rear direction and is made of metal, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder main body, and the rear side of the cylinder main body. And a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the locking device made of metal penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear side, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at positions facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed such that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, the metal transmission cylinder of the metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear side. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other in the state where the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body part (box body) 6004, The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcing unit also functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, and the main body part ( The box 6004 is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as a frame gland on the door frame side. This earth board (not shown) is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding (grounding) it to the island facility of the game hall. It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This opening switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device. However, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the opening switch is not arranged near the metal locking device and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has penetrated into the metal locking device. An opening switch is arranged on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic wave noise penetrates into the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative parts are not plated with decoration at all, and some are decorated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as a chrome plating or a hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may enter. Among various decorative portions, those having decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit forming the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via wiring not shown, while the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcing unit. Some are electrically connected). Thus, by transmitting the electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, it is possible to prevent the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the board ground. Also, of the various decorative parts, electromagnetic noise that has penetrated into the decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is connected. Through the grounding board provided inside the main body (box) 6004, and from the grounding board to the grounding of the island equipment in the game hall through the island equipment grounding wire, and removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the door frame side frame ground as described above.

It should be noted that an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a charge eliminating portion at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002. An electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a charge removal unit at a portion that is an open side that is opposite to a side (closed side) where the hinge is arranged. The static electricity removal pad can remove noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

A front door (front frame) 6002 is for decorating the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and is provided with various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative portions may not be subjected to decorative plating at all, Some parts have decorative plating on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit and electrical , And the earth substrate provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment in the game hall through the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was used. A metal door frame reinforcing unit and a power supply board are electrically connected to a terminal of a power supply board of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 without electrically connecting to a ground board. May be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects against an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. Although this surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and almost no current flows, when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly decreases and current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears. , And has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is removed from the slot machine 6000 by being transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the N terminal of the power supply board. ..

The game panel 6006 is provided in the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protruding portion that protrudes forward from the game panel 6006. The medal slot 6008, the bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this protruding portion. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, and storage adjustment button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004.

In the main control board box 1320, a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing a set value is mounted is housed together with the main control board 1310. That is, since the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and attached and fixed to the board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box) 6004. Note that the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to a casing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004. Further, on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) The setting display 1310g configured by, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 are provided through the display window. It is possible to see through. The three variable rotary bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

On these variable rotators, a light-transmissive pattern band, on which a plurality of types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as pattern information, is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are drive-controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-mentioned display window from top to bottom. It looks like.

The rendering device includes a plurality of movable rendering bodies (not shown), the rendering display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, performs operation control of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

The main control board 1310, as a game medium, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right. The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-providing state (big hit game state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008′, and the main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of game balls into the ball slot 6008′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The variable display of the symbol information is started based on this, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on the condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game balls as the game medium to the tray 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Gaming board 5a Gaming area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back rear effect unit 3110 Back back movable decoration body 3111 Decoration body (decoration member, decoration plate body)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative part 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Body part 3113b Flange part (peripheral wall part)
3113c 1st LED accommodating part 3113d 2nd LED accommodating part 3113e Reflecting part 3114 Rear back decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative body base 3115a Cover plate part 3115b Flange part EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

A lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a predetermined starting opening, and a variable display of a symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery, and a predetermined result is obtained when a hit result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbol. In a gaming machine that executes a hit game,
When a specific start operation is performed, setting change means capable of changing the setting information regarding the probability that the hit result is derived,
Suggestive effect execution means for executing suggestive effect based on the setting information,
Abnormality determination means for determining a specific abnormality for the gaming machine,
After the specific abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means, a suggestion effect execution limiting means for limiting the execution of the suggestion effect, and a gaming machine.